Outback 20011 2.5, 2,5t 3.0

11LE_US.
book 1 ページ２０１５年１２月２５日　金曜日　午前９時２１分
2011 LEGACY SERVICE MANUAL QUICK REFERENCE INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
SECTION
FOREWORD FW
HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS HU
SPECIFICATIONS SPC
PRECAUTION PC
This service manual has been prepared
to provide SUBARU service personnel
with the necessary information and data NOTE NT
for the correct maintenance and repair
of SUBARU vehicles.
IDENTIFICATION ID
This manual includes the procedures
for maintenance, disassembling, reas-
sembling, inspection and adjustment of RECOMMENDED MATERIALS RM
components and diagnostics for guid-
ance of experienced mechanics.
Please peruse and utilize this manual PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION PI
fully to ensure complete repair work for
satisfying our customers by keeping
their vehicle in optimum condition. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SERVICES PM
When replacement of parts during
repair work is needed, be sure to use
SUBARU genuine parts.
All information, illustration and specifi-

cations contained in this manual are
based on the latest product information
available at the time of publication
approval.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. G2470BE1

11LE_US.book 2 ページ２０１５年１２月２５日　金曜日　午前９時２１分
FOREWORD
FW
Page
1. Foreword ....................................................................................................2
Foreword
FOREWORD
1. Foreword
A: FOREWORD
These manuals are used when performing mainte-
nance, repair or diagnosis of Subaru LEGACY.
Applicable model:
2011MY BM*****, BR*****
The manuals contain the latest information at the

time of publication. Changes in the specifications,
methods, etc. may be made without notice.
FW-2
HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS
HU
Page
1. How to Use This Manuals ..........................................................................2
How to Use This Manuals

1. How to Use This Manuals

A: HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS
1. STRUCTURE
Each section consists of SCT that are broken down
into SC that are divided into sections for each com-
ponent. The specification, maintenance and other
information for the components are included, and
the diagnostic information has also been added
where necessary.
2. CONTENTS
The first page has an index with tabs.
HU-2

3. COMPONENT
Illustrations are provided for each component. The information necessary for repair work (tightening torque,
grease up points, etc.) is described on these illustrations. Information is described using symbol.
To order parts, refer to parts catalogue.
Example:
T2
(3) (6)
T3
(7)
(5) T3
(4)
(2)
(8)
T8 T1 (1) (20)
T2 (21) T3
T6 (5)
T10 T2
T5 (1) T3
(2)
(12) (22) (23) T3
(6) (9) (14) (16)
T4 (18)
(10)
(3) (11) T1
(4) (4) (11)
(13)
(10) (15)
(9) T2
(17)
(19)
T6
(4) (10) T4
(3)
(4)
(7) (15)
T2
T11 T6 (22) T5
(3) (12) (35)
T4 (34)
T5
(8) (27) T3
(10) T2
(26)
(23) (24)
T2 (14) (25)
T7
(24)
(36)
(25)
(13) (31)
(30)
T2 T5
(10) (29) (37) (33)
(17) (28) (32)
(16)
(18)
T4
T3 T1 : Selective part
T1 : Replacement part
(21)
: Sealing point
: Should be lubricated with oil.
(20) : Should be lubricated with grease.

T9 (19)
T1 , T2 .... : Tightening torque
HU-00017
HU-3

4. DEFINITION OF “NOTE”, “CAUTION” AND “WARNING”

• NOTE:
describes supplementary explanations for efficient operation.
• CAUTION:
describes particular items to be followed and items to be prohibited to avoid vehicle or parts damage.
• WARNING:
describes items to be strictly prohibited to avoid serious injury to the person doing the work or people in the
area, and items to be strictly followed to avoid any deficiency or accident.
5. SPECIFICATION
If necessary, specifications are also included.
6. INSPECTION
Inspections to be carried out before and after maintenance are included.
HU-4

7. MAINTENANCE
• Maintenance instructions for serviceable parts describe work area and detailed step with illustration. It also
describes the use of special tool, tightening torque, caution for each procedure.
• If many serviceable parts are included in one service procedure, appropriate reference is provided for each
parts.
Example:
15.Main Shaft (A)
A: REMOVAL (B)
1) Remove the manual transmission assembly
from vehicle. <Ref. to MT-33, REMOVAL, Manual
Transmission Assembly.>
(C)
11) Tighten the lock nuts to the specified torque us-

ing ST1 and ST2.
NOTE: (D)
Secure the lock nuts in two places after tightening.
ST1 498937000 TRANSMISSION HOLDER
ST2 499987003 SOCKET WRENCH (35)
(E) (F)
Tightening torque:
118 N m (12.0 kgf-m, 86.8 ft-lb) (G)
(H)
ST2 ST1
HU-00020
(A) Component (D) Cautions (G) Tightening torque

(B) Process (E) Tool number of special tool (H) Illustration
(C) Reference (F) Name of special tool
HU-5

8. DIAGNOSIS
Diagnosis uses step-by-step process to make operations easier.
9. SI UNITS
Measurements in these manuals are according to the SI units. Metric and yard/pound measurements are
also included.
Example:
Tightening torque:
44 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 ft-lb)
LIST OF SI UNIT
Item SI units Conventional unit Remarks
Force N (Newton) kgf 1 kgf = 9.80655 N
Mass (Weight) kg, g kg, g
Capacity 2, m2 or cm3 2or cc 1 cc = 1 cm3 = 1 m2
Torque N·m kgf-m, kgf-cm 1 kgf-m = 9.80655 N·m
Rotating speed rpm rpm
kgf/cm2 1 kgf/cm2 = 98.0655 kPa
Pressure kPa (kilopascal)
mmHg 1 mmHg = 0.133322 kPa
Power W PS 1 PS = 0.735499 kW
Calorie W·h cal 1 kcal = 1.16279 W·h
Fuel consumption rate g/kw·h g/PS·h 1 g/PS·h = 1.3596 g/kW·h
The figure used in these manuals are described in the SI units and conventional units are described in ( ).
HU-6

10.EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY
• LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
AAI : Air Assist Injection IG : Ignition
A/B : Airbag IN : Intake
ABS : Anti-lock Brake System INT : Intermittent
A/C : Air Conditioner I/O : Input / Output
A/F : Air Fuel Ratio ISC : Idle Speed Control
ALT : Generator LAN : Local Area Network
APS : Accessory Power supply Socket LH : LH (Left Hand)
ASSY : Assembly LSD : Limited Slip Differential
AT : Automatic Transmission M/B : Main Fuse & Relay Box
ATF : Automatic Transmission Fluid MD : Mini Disc
AVCS : Active Valve Control System MID : Multi Information Display
AWD : All Wheel Drive MFI : Multi-Point Fuel Injection
BATT : Battery MP-T : Multi-Plate Transfer
BCM : Brake Control Module MT : Manual Transmission
BJ : Bell Joint NA : Natural Aspiration
CAN : Communication Area Network NC : Normal Close (Relay)
CD : Compact Disc NO : Normal Open (Relay)
COMPL : Complete OP : Option Parts
CPU : Central Processing Unit PC : Personal Computer
DOHC : Double Overhead Camshaft PCV : Positive Crankcase Ventilation
DOJ : Double Offset Joint P/S : Power Steering
DTC : Diagnostic Trouble Code PTJ : Pillow Tripod Joint
EBJ : High-efficiency Compact Ball Fixed Joint P/W : Power Window
ECM : Engine Control Module RH : RH (Right Hand)
EDJ : High-efficiency Compact Double Offset Joint Rr : Rear
EGI : Electronic Gasoline Injection SDI : SUBARU Diagnostic Interface
E/G : Engine SI : SUBARU Intelligent
EGR : Exhaust Gas Recirculation SOHC : Single Overhead Camshaft
ETC : Electronic Throttle Control SRS : Supplemental Restraint System
EX : Exhaust ST : Special Tool
F/B : Fuse & Joint Box SW : Switch
Ft : Front TCS : Traction Control System
FWD : Front Wheel Drive TGV : Tumble Generator Valve
GPS : Global Positioning System T/M : Transmission
HID : High-Intensity Discharge UJ : Universal joint
H/U : Hydraulic Unit VDC : Vehicle Dynamics Control
HVAC : Heater, Ventilator and Air Conditioner VTD : Variable Torque Distribution
HU-7

HU-8
SPECIFICATIONS
SPC
Page
1. LEGACY .....................................................................................................2
2. OUTBACK ..................................................................................................6
LEGACY
SPECIFICATIONS
1. LEGACY
A: DIMENSION
1. SEDAN MODEL
Model 2.5 L SOHC non-turbo 2.5 L DOHC turbo 3.6 L DOHC non-turbo
Overall length mm (in) 4,735 (186.4)
Overall width mm (in) 1,820 (71.7)
Overall height (at C.W.) mm (in) 1,505 (59.3)
Wheelbase mm (in) 2,750 (108.3)
Front mm (in) 1,565 (61.6) 1,550 (61.0) 1,565 (61.6)
Tread
Rear mm (in) 1,570 (61.8) 1,555 (61.2) 1,570 (61.8)
Minimum road clearance mm (in) 150 (5.9)
B: ENGINE
Horizontally opposed, liquid
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled, 4-cylinder,
Engine type cooled, 6-cylinder, 4-stroke
4-stroke gasoline engine
gasoline engine
Valve arrangement Overhead camshaft
Bore × stroke mm (in) 99.5 × 79.0 (3.917 × 3.110) 92.0 × 91.0 (3.622 × 3.583)
Displacement cm3 (cu in) 2,457 (149.9) 3,630 (221.4)
Compression ratio 10.0 8.4 10.5
Ignition order 1—3—2—4 1—6—3—2—5—4
650 (MT)
Idle speed at Park or Neutral position rpm 700 700
675 (CVT)
Maximum output kW (HP)/rpm 127 (170)/5,600 198 (265)/5,600 191 (256)/6,000
350 (35.7, 258)/2,000
Maximum torque N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)/rpm 230 (23.5, 170)/4,000 334 (34.1, 247)/4,400
— 5,200
C: ELECTRICAL
Ignition timing (at idling) BTDC 10°(MT), 15°(CVT) 15°
Spark plug Type and manufacturer NGK: SIFR6A11 NGK: SILFR6B8 NGK: SILFR6C11
Generator 12 V — 110 A 12 V — 130 A
Type and capacity (5HR) 12 V — 52 AH (75D23R)
Battery
CCA 490 A
SPC-2
LEGACY
SPECIFICATIONS
D: TRANSMISSION
1. MT
Model 2.5 L SOHC non-turbo 2.5 L DOHC turbo
Transmission type 6MT 6MT
Clutch type DSPD DSPD
1st 3.454 3.454
2nd 1.947 1.947
3rd 1.296 1.296
Gear ratio 4th 0.972 0.972
5th 0.825 0.780
6th 0.695 0.666
Rev. 3.636 3.636
Type of gear Hypoid Hypoid
Reduction gear (Front)
Gear ratio 4.111 4.111
Type of gear Helical Helical
Transfer reduction
Reduction gear Gear ratio 1.000 1.000
(Rear) Type of gear Hypoid Hypoid
Final reduction
Gear ratio 4.111 4.111
6MT: 6-forward and 1-reverse speeds with synchromesh for all gears
DSPD: Dry Single Plate Diaphragm
2. AT
Model 3.6 L DOHC non-turbo
Transmission type 5AT
Clutch type TCC
1st 3.540
2nd 2.264
3rd 1.471
Gear ratio
4th 1.000
5th 0.834
Rev. 2.370
Type of gear Helical
1st reduction
Reduction gear Gear ratio 1.000
(Front) Type of gear Hypoid
Final reduction
Gear ratio 3.083
Type of gear Hypoid
Reduction gear (Rear)
Gear ratio 3.083
5AT: Electronically controlled fully-automatic, 5-forward speeds and 1-reverse

TCC: Torque Converter Clutch
SPC-3
LEGACY
SPECIFICATIONS
3. CVT
Model 2.5 L SOHC non-turbo
Transmission type CVT
Clutch type TCC
Forward 3.525 — 0.558
Change gear ratio
Rev. 2.358
1st reduction
Final reduction
Gear ratio 3.700
Transfer reduction ratio 1.000
Type of gear Hypoid
Gear ratio 3.700

CVT: Forward continuously variable speed change and 1-reverse
E: STEERING
Type Rack & pinion
Turns, lock to lock 2.8
Curb to curb 11.2 (36.7)
Minimum turning diameter m (ft)
Wall to wall 11.8 (38.7)
F: SUSPENSION
Front Macpherson strut type suspension
REAR Double wishbone type suspension
G: BRAKE
Service brake system Dual circuit hydraulic with vacuum suspended power unit
Front Ventilated disc brake
REAR Disc brake Ventilated disc brake
Parking brake Electric mechanical on rear brakes
Brake assist Standard equipment for all vehicles
H: TIRE
Model 2.5L SOHC non-turbo 2.5L DOHC turbo 3.6 L DOHC non-turbo
16 × 6 1/2JJ
Wheel size 16 × 6 1/2J 18 × 7 1/2J 17 × 7 1/2J
17 × 7 1/2J
P205/60 R16 91V
Tire size 225/45 R18 91W P225/50 R17 93V
P215/50 R17 90V
Type Tubeless, Steel belted radial
SPC-4
LEGACY
SPECIFICATIONS
I: CAPACITY
2.5L DOHC 3.6 L DOHC
2.5L SOHC non-turbo
Model turbo non-turbo
6MT CVT 6MT 5AT
Fuel tank 2 (US gal, Imp gal) 70 (18.5, 15.4)
Total capacity (at overhaul) 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.8 (5.1, 4.2) 4.8 (5.1, 4.2) 5.2 (5.5, 4.6) 7.8 (8.2, 6.9)
When replacing
4.2 (4.4, 3.7) 4.2 (4.4, 3.7) 4.3 (4.5, 3.8) 6.5 (6.9, 5.7)
Engine oil Filling amount of engine oil engine oil and oil filter
2 (US qt, Imp qt) When replacing
4.0 (4.2, 3.5) 6.3 (6.7, 5.5)
engine oil only
Transmission gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 3.7 (3.9, 3.3) — 3.7 (3.9, 3.3) —
12.0 — 12.5
9.8 (10.4,
ATF or CVTF 2 (US qt, Imp qt) — (12.7 — 13.2, —
8.6)
10.6 — 11.0)
Front differential gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) — 1.4 (1.5, 1.2) — 1.4 (1.5, 1.2)
Rear differential gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.8 (0.8, 0.7)
Power steering fluid 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.7 (0.7, 0.6)
Engine coolant 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 6.5 (6.9, 5.7) 6.4 (6.8, 5.6) 6.5 (6.9, 5.7) 6.5 (6.9, 5.7)
SPC-5
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
2. OUTBACK
A: DIMENSION
1. OUTBACK MODEL
Model 2.5L SOHC non-turbo 3.6 L DOHC non-turbo
Overall length mm (in) 4,780 (188.2)
Overall width mm (in) 1,820 (71.7)
Overall height (at C.W.) mm (in) 1,680 (66.1), 1,670 (65.7)*1
Wheelbase mm (in) 2,740 (107.9)
Front mm (in) 1,550 (61.0)
Tread
REAR mm (in) 1,550 (61.0)
Minimum road clearance mm (in) 220 (8.7)
*1:
when crossbar is stored
B: ENGINE
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled, Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled,
Engine type
4-cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine 6-cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine
Valve arrangement Overhead camshaft
Bore × stroke mm (in) 99.5 × 79.0 (3.917 × 3.110) 92.0 × 91.0 (3.622 × 3.583)
Displacement cm3 (cu in) 2,457 (149.9) 3,630 (221.4)
Compression ratio 10.0 10.5
Ignition order 1—3—2—4 1—6—3—2—5—4
650 (MT)
Idle speed at Park or Neutral position rpm 700
675 (CVT)
Maximum output kW (HP)/rpm 127 (170)/5,600 191 (256)/6,000
Maximum torque N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)/rpm 230 (23.5, 170)/4,000 334 (34.1, 247)/4,400
C: ELECTRICAL
Model 2.5 L SOHC non-turbo 3.6 L DOHC non-turbo
Ignition timing (at idling) BTDC 10°(MT), 15°(CVT) 15°
Spark plug Type and manufacturer NGK: SIFR6A11 NGK: SILFR6C11
Generator 12 V — 110 A 12 V — 130 A
Type and capacity (5HR) 12 V — 52 AH (75D23R)
Battery
CCA 490 A
SPC-6
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
D: TRANSMISSION
1. MT
Model 2.5L SOHC non-turbo
Transmission type 6MT
Clutch type DSPD
1st 3.454
2nd 1.947
3rd 1.296
Gear ratio 4th 0.972
5th 0.825
6th 0.695
Rev. 3.636
Type of gear Hypoid
Reduction gear (Front)
Gear ratio 4.444
Transfer reduction
(Rear) Type of gear Hypoid
Final reduction
Gear ratio 4.444
6MT: 6-forward and 1-reverse speeds with synchromesh for all gears
DSPD: Dry Single Plate Diaphragm
2. AT
Model 3.6 L DOHC non-turbo
Transmission type 5AT
Clutch type TCC
1st 3.540
2nd 2.264
3rd 1.471
Gear ratio
4th 1.000
5th 0.834
Rev. 2.370
1st reduction
Final reduction
Gear ratio 3.083
Type of gear Hypoid
Gear ratio 3.083
5AT: Electronically controlled fully-automatic, 5-forward speeds and 1-reverse

SPC-7
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
3. CVT
Model 2.5L SOHC non-turbo
Transmission type CVT
Clutch type TCC
Forward 3.525 — 0.558
Change gear ratio
Rev. 2.358
1st reduction
Final reduction
Gear ratio 3.900
Transfer reduction ratio 1.000
Type of gear Hypoid
Gear ratio 3.900

CVT: Forward continuously variable speed change and 1-reverse
E: STEERING
Model 2.5L SOHC 3.6 L DOHC
Type Rack & pinion
Turns, lock to lock 3.2
Curb to curb 11.0 (36.1)
Minimum turning diameter m (ft)
Wall to wall 11.8 (38.7)
F: SUSPENSION
Front Macpherson strut type suspension
REAR Double wishbone type suspension
G: BRAKE
Service brake system Dual circuit hydraulic with vacuum suspended power unit
Front Ventilated disc brake
REAR Disc brake Ventilated disc brake
Parking brake Electric mechanical on rear brakes
Brake assist Standard equipment for all vehicles
H: TIRE
16 × 6 1/2JJ
Wheel size 17 × 7J
17 × 7J
P215/70 R16 99S
Tire size P225/60 R17 98T
P225/60 R17 98T
Type Tubeless, Steel belted radial
SPC-8
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
I: CAPACITY
3.6 L DOHC
2.5L SOHC non-turbo
Model non-turbo
6MT CVT 5AT
Fuel tank 2 (US gal, Imp gal) 70 (18.5, 15.4)
Total capacity (at overhaul) 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.8 (5.1, 4.2) 4.8 (5.1, 4.2) 7.8 (8.2, 6.9)
When replacing
4.2 (4.4, 3.7) 4.2 (4.4, 3.7) 6.5 (6.9, 5.7)
Engine oil Filling amount of engine oil engine oil and oil filter
2 (US qt, Imp qt) When replacing
4.0 (4.2, 3.5) 6.3 (6.7, 5.5)
engine oil only
Transmission gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 3.7 (3.9, 3.3) —
12.0 — 12.5
ATF or CVTF 2 (US qt, Imp qt) — (12.7 — 13.2, 9.8 (10.4, 8.6)
10.6 — 11.0)
Front differential gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) — 1.4 (1.5, 1.2)
Rear differential gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.8 (0.8, 0.7)
Power steering fluid 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.7 (0.7, 0.6)
Engine coolant 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 6.5 (6.9, 5.7) 6.4 (6.8, 5.6) 6.5 (6.9, 5.7)
SPC-9
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
SPC-10
PRECAUTION
PC
Page
1. Precaution ..................................................................................................2
Precaution
PRECAUTION
1. Precaution 6. AIRBAG
To prevent bodily injury from unexpected deploy-
A: CAUTION ment of airbags and unnecessary maintenance, fol-
Please clearly understand and adhere to the follow- low the instructions in this manual when performing
ing general precautions. They must be strictly fol- maintenance on the airbag components and near-
lowed to avoid minor or serious injury to the person by, around front of the vehicle (radiator panel, front
doing the work or people in the area. wheel apron, front side frame, front bumper, front
hood panel, front fender panel), around side of the
1. VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL (VDC) vehicle (front door panel, rear door panel, center
Handle the VDC as a total system. Do not disas- pillar, rear fender panel, side sill, rear wheel apron),
semble or attempt to repair parts which are not in- around rear of the vehicle (the rear seat cushion,
structed in this manual. Follow the directions in this rear floor pan, rear crossmember) and the airbag
manual when performing maintenance on the VD- wiring harnesses and nearby.
CCM&H/U. When parts other than those specified To prevent unexpected deployment, turn the igni-
are disassembled, it is possible that the VDC sys- tion switch to OFF and disconnect the ground cable
tem will not operate when needed or cause it to op- from battery, then wait at least 60 seconds to dis-
erate incorrectly and result in injury. charge backup power supply before starting work.
2. ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE 7. AIRBAG AND SEAT BELT PRETEN-
Handle the electronic parking brake as a total sys- SIONER DISPOSAL
tem. Do not disassemble or attempt to repair indi- To prevent bodily injury from unexpected airbag
vidual parts. Doing so could prevent the electronic deployment, do not dispose the airbag modules or
parking brake system from operating when need- seat belt pretensioner in the same way as other
ed, or the system may operate incorrectly and re- waste. Follow the special instructions for disposal
sult in injury. in this manual. Follow all government regulations
3. BRAKE FLUID concerning disposal of refuse.
If brake fluid gets in your eyes or on your skin, do 8. AIRBAG MODULE
the following: Adhere to the following when handing and storing
• Wash eyes and seek immediate medical atten- the airbag module to prevent bodily injury from un-
tion. expected deployment:
• Wash your skin with soap and then rinse thor- • Do not hold the harnesses or connectors to carry
oughly with water. the module.
4. RADIATOR FAN • Do not face the bag in the direction that it opens
towards yourself or other people.
The radiator fan may rotate without warning, even • Do not face the bag in the direction that it opens
when the engine is not ON. Do not place your hand, towards the floor or walls.
cloth, tools or other items near the fan at any time.
9. AIRBAG SPECIAL TOOL
5. ROAD TEST
To prevent unexpected deployment, only use spe-
Always conduct road tests in accordance with traf- cial tools.
fic rules and regulations to avoid bodily injury and
interrupting traffic. 10.WINDOW
Always wear safety glasses when working around
any glass to prevent glass fragments from damag-
ing your eyes.
PC-2
Precaution
PRECAUTION
11.WINDOW ADHESIVE 16.REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OPERA-

Always use the recommended or equivalent adhe- TION OF HOSES, ETC.
sive when attaching glass to prevent it from coming 1. Before the removal and installation operation
falling, resulting in accidents and injury. of hoses, etc.
12.OIL • If you keep using the damaged or deformed
When handling oil, carefully observe the following hose, it results bleeds or leakage of the fat adheres
to prevent unexpected accidents. or disconnection of the hose. Be careful not to spill
• Prepare a container and cloth to prevent scatter- fat adheres on exhaust pipes, etc. during mainte-
ing of oil when performing work where fuels can be nance to prevent emitting smoke or causing fires.
spilled. If the fuel spills, wipe it off immediately to • Perform the operation with the hose removed. If
prevent from penetrating into floor or flowing out for the operation is performed without removing the
environmental protection. hose, it may damage inner surface of the hose.
• Follow all government regulations concerning 2. Removal and installation operation of hoses,
disposal of refuse when disposing. etc. during the inspection
13.FUEL • Follow the instructions below when remov-
When handling and storing fuel, carefully observe ing hose.
the following to prevent unexpected accidents. • Do not use a pointed hose remover (hose
• Be careful of fires. plucker) when using a general hose remover. It
• Prepare a container and cloth to prevent scatter- may damage the pipe surface or the hose.
ing of fuels when performing work where fuels can
be spilled. If the fuel spills, wipe it off immediately to
prevent it from penetrating the floor or flowing out,
NG
N G
to protect the environment.
• Follow all government and local regulations con-
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing.
14.ENGINE COOLANT
When handling engine coolant, adhere to the fol-
lowing to prevent from unexpected accident. (1)
• Never remove the radiator cap since engine
coolant may blow out when it is hot.
• Prepare a container and cloth to prevent scatter-
OKK
ing of engine coolant when performing work where
engine coolant can be spilled. If the oil spills, wipe it
off immediately to prevent from penetrating into
floor or flowing out for environmental protection.
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing.
15.AIR CONDITIONER REFRIGERANT (1)
In order to prevent from global warming, avoid re- PC-00065
leasing air conditioner refrigerant into the atmo-
sphere. Using a refrigerant recovery system, (1) Hose remover
discharge and reuse it.
• When draining hose using pliers, be sure to
cover the hose with cloth and rotate the hose
slightly to extract straight.
PC-3
Precaution
PRECAUTION
• If you keep using the hose, perform the in-

spection below and replace the hose with a new
part if faulty. (1)
• Replace the hose with a new part if it rides
over the stay or spool.
(1)
PC-00070
(1) Push against the spool. (Insert the hose and

prevent it from becoming wrinkled.)
(2) Tighten the hose outwards and apply force thor-
oughly.
PC-00071
(1) Hose rides over the stay • Check if the position, direction and hose lay-
out of the hose clamp are correct. (Check if the
position, direction, length and the gap around
are correct, or if it is different from the condition
(1) before the work)
• After the installation, check that the hose is in-
stalled securely and there is no leakage. (Check
if it is fixed securely with the clamp)
• For hose clips and hose clamps, perform the
inspection below and replace them with a new
part if faulty.
• Check for deformation, rust, damage or for-
PC-00073
eign matters.
(1) Hose rides over the spool • For hose clip, check if it works and has clamp-
ing force.
• Check if the surface and the inner surface of • For hose clamp, check if it can tighten screw,
the hose are damaged, cracked, bend, hard- not ovalized or the screw is not damaged.
ened, softened, swelled, peeled or deformed • For hose pipes, perform the inspection below
due to the adherence or the entry of the foreign and replace with a new part if faulty.
matter by bending the hose. Replace with the Check if the pipe is not damaged, rusted, peeled
new part if faulty. (peeled plates included), covered with foreign
• Follow the instructions below during installa- matter, bent, compressed or cracked.
tion. • For the parts below, replaces with a new part
• Check carefully for assembling position. when the hose is removed or the installation
• Never use lubricants. position is changed.
• Insert the hose to the specified position (stop- ATF cooler hose, engine oil cooler hose, power
per or spool) securely. steering suction hose, power steering return
hose
(2) (1)
PC-00074
PC-4
NOTE
NT
Page
1. Note ............................................................................................................2
Note
NOTE
1. Note
A: BASIC REPAIR HINT
This section describes basic points that the service operator must understand before performing the service
operation.
1. APPEARANCE
• Always wear clean work clothing.
• Wear a cap and protective shoes.
2. PROTECTION OF VEHICLE UNDER MAINTENANCE AND PREPARATION OF TOOLS/
EQUIPMENT
• Before work, cover the vehicle body. (Ex. grille cover, fender cover, seat cover and floor mat cover)
• Before performing the service operation, prepare tools, equipment, container box, grease and cloth etc.
(1)
(2) (3) (4)
(5) (6)
NT-00368
(1) Fender cover (3) Tray (5) Container box

(2) Tools/equipment case (4) Oil (6) Cloth
3. SAFETY 4. SERVICE OPERATION

• Before work, set the wheel stoppers to secure • By identifying the vehicle problems thoroughly
the vehicle. before work, service operation will be performed ef-
• When performing work by multiple workers, call fectively.
to each other to make sure that service operation is • Before removing parts, confirm the installation
performed safely. condition or the damage of the parts.
• Before starting engine, ventilate the room. • To reinstall parts properly, leave a note of the
• When performing the service operation of high- condition before work as necessary.
temperature parts like muffler, rotating parts like • For a part which needs positioning, take appro-
fan and other movable parts, be careful not to get priate action such as putting alignment marks.
burned or injured. • For a removed part, clean it as necessary and
• For the jack-up and lift up, set the tool to the check for damage and defect before installation.
proper location to support the vehicle correctly. And
use the safety device properly when lifting up.
NT-2
Note
NOTE
5. REMOVED PART 4. BACKUP/POWER SUPPLY FUSE

• A removed part must be organized to avoid mix- Right after the vehicle has arrived, 10 A backup
ing up with similar parts. When same parts are fuse is removed to avoid run-down of the battery.
used in multiple locations, such as pistons in en- Connect the backup fuse as shown in the figure. Al-
gine, manage the parts by using labels with cylin- so, delivery mode is canceled by disconnecting the
der No. so that the parts are not installed to the backup fuse from the fuse holder.
wrong location.
• Always replace nonreusable parts such as gas-
ket and O-ring with new parts.
• After work, have a customer confirm the re-
placed part.
6. WHEN REMOVING BATTERY
When removing battery, power supply is cut off and
the information stored in the computer memory is
volatilized. Therefore, setting information of some
device is initialized to the factory default. The de-
vice and functions initialized by removing battery
are as follows.
• Clock
• Set temperature of fully automatic air conditioner (1)
• Automatic full open/close of driver’s window

(power window needs to be initialized)
• User setting items in the navigation system
(3)
• Past trouble history (memory code)
B: NOTE (2)
This is the information that can improve the effi- NT-00369
ciency of maintenance and assure the sound work.
(1) Backup fuse insertion slot
1. FASTENERS NOTICE (2) Backup fuse holder
Tighten the bolts and nuts to the specified torque. (3) Backup fuse
Do not apply paint, lubricant, rust retardant or other
substance to the surface around bolts, nuts, etc. It 5. IMMOBILIZER RELATED PART
may cause troubles with tightening to the specified
torque and result in looseness and other problems Do not replace parts which have immobilizer ID (ig-
of bolts and nuts. nition key, combination meter, body integrated unit
and ECM) with the parts from other vehicle.
2. STATIC ELECTRICITY DAMAGE
6. SERVICE PARTS
Do not touch the control modules, connectors, logic
boards and other such parts when there is a risk of Use genuine parts for maximum performance and
static electricity. Always use a static electricity pre- maintenance when conducting repairs. Subaru/FHI
vention cord or touch grounded metal for the elimi- will not be responsible for poor performance result-
nation of static electricity before conducting work. ing from the use of parts except for genuine parts.
3. BATTERY 7. PROTECTING VEHICLE UNDER MAIN-

TENANCE
When removing the battery terminal, always be
sure to turn the ignition switch to OFF and remove Make sure to attach the fender cover, seat covers,
the battery ground cable first. etc. before work.
8. ENSURING SECURITY DURING WORK
When working in a group of two or more, perform
the work with calling each other to ensure mutual
safety.
NT-3
Note
NOTE
9. LIFT AND JACK

When using a lift or shop jack to raise a vehicle or
using rigid rack to support a vehicle, always follow
instructions concerning jack-up points and weight
limits to prevent the vehicle from falling, which
could result in injury. Be especially careful that the
vehicle is balanced before raising it. Be sure to set
the wheel stoppers when jacking-up only the front
or rear side of the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Select the lift attachment so that the side sill
does not contact the lift arm.
NOTE:
• When using a lift, follow its operation manual.
• When the side sill cover contacts the lift arm, use
a lift attachment.
• Do not work or leave unattended while the vehi-
cle is supported with jack, support it with rigid
racks.
• Be sure to use the rigid racks with rubber at-
tached to cradle to support the vehicle.
• When using a lift, use an attachment or some-
thing similar.
• When using a plate lift, use a rubber attachment.
Place the attachment to the specified position of
the vehicle, by adjusting front/rear and left/right
sides accordingly.
(A)
(C)
(B)
NT-00070
(A) 80 mm (3.1 in) or more

(B) 100 — 150 mm (3.94 — 5.91 in)
(C) 120 — 190 mm (4.72 — 7.48 in)
• Align the cushion rubber center part of plate lift

with the center part of rubber attachment.
• Do not use the plate lift whose attachment does
not reach the supporting locations.
NT-4
Note
NOTE
• SUPPORT LOCATIONS
(1) (1)
NT-00360
(1) Jack-up point
• Pantograph jack
(1) (1)
NT-00383
(1) Jack-up point
NT-5
Note
NOTE
• Lift
NT-00271
CAUTION:
For models with side under skirt, use a spacer or an attachment to lift up the vehicle securely at jack
up point, without contact of side under skirt and lift.
• Rigid rack
NT-00384
NT-6
Note
NOTE
• Plate lift
(1) (2) (1)
NT-00370
(1) Jack-up point (2) Attachment
• JACK-UP POINT (WHEN USING A GARAGE JACK)
(A)
(1)
(B)
(2)
NT-00382
(A) Front (B) Rear

(1) Front cradle (2) Rear differential
CAUTION:
If jacking up the front side of the vehicle, make sure that the jack is attached at the center of the jack-
up plate not at the sides.
NT-7
Note
NOTE
10.TIE-DOWNS
Tie-downs are used when transporting vehicles and when using the chassis dynamo. Attach tie-down only
to the specified locations on the vehicle.
• TIE-DOWN LOCATION
(2)
(1)
NT-00381
(1) Hook for tie-down (2) Tie-down hole
• CHAIN DIRECTION AT TIE-DOWN CONDITION

CAUTION:
• Pull the tie-down chains LH and RH in the same direction, but front and rear side in the counter di-
rection.
• Patterns except for the followings (recommended) are not allowed.
Recommended
Tie-down direction
NT-00214
NT-8
Note
NOTE
• TIE-DOWN RANGE
For ground transportation
CAUTION:
When the vehicle is tied down from vehicle inside, hook the hooks of tie-down chain on the rear tie-
down hooks from vehicle inside. When the vehicle is tied down from vehicle outside, hook the hooks
of tie-down chain on the rear tie-down hooks from vehicle outside.
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
(B)
(A)
45 45
45 45
:(C)
NT-00385
(A) Front tie-down hook (B) Rear tie-down hole (C) Chain pulling range at tie-down
condition
NT-9
Note
NOTE
For sea transportation
45
(D) 45
(1
38
1.
8)
(E)
45
70
45
45
(A) (B)
45
45
(F)
:(C)
NT-00386
(A) Front tie-down hook (C) Chain pulling range at tie-down (E) 1,320 mm (52.0 in)
condition
(B) Tie-down hole or wheel spoke (D) 400 mm (15.7 in) (F) When rear wheel is tied down
CAUTION:
• Basically, tie down using the tie-down hole.
• Tie-down procedure should be followed as much as reasonably possible depending on the deck
condition, however, lashing belt and vehicle must not contact each other. Also, if a wheel tie-down
is conducted instead of using rear tie-down hole due to the vehicle loading condition of the deck,
follow the instructions below.
1. Tie-down range must be within the backward of rear wheel as shown in the figure.
2. Wheel tie-down should be used only during sea transportation, and lashing belt should not
contact air valve while tie-down. Be careful not damage the wheel and vehicle.
3. Maximum tie-down load to each lashing belt is 5000 N (510 kgf, 1124 lbf).
4. For steel wheel, do not tie down wheels.
NT-10
Note
NOTE
• VEHICLE SINKING VOLUME AT TIE-DOWN CONDITION

CAUTION:
The vehicle sinking volume at tie-down condition should be less than 50 mm (1.97 in) and make sure
to fix the vehicle securely.
Check to see if the tensions of chains or belts at tie-down condition are appropriate in the following
procedures.
1) Before tie-down, measure the distance between the highest tire point and highest arch point at the center
of wheel.
2) After tie-down, measure the distance between the highest tire point and highest arch point at the center of
wheel.
3) If the distance (A) between the measured value of 1) and 2) above, is less than 50 mm (1.97 in), it is judged
as OK. If the distance is 50 mm (1.97 in) or more, it is judged as NG because the tension is too high.
(B) (B)
(C) (C) (A)

(A)
NT-00414
(B) Arch position before tie-down (C) Arch position after tie-down
• NOTES FOR THE USE OF TIE-DOWN HOOK

When the vehicle is tied down from vehicle inside, hook the hooks of tie-down chain from vehicle inside, and
when the vehicle is tied down from vehicle outside, hook the hooks of tie-down chain from vehicle outside.
For front tie-down hook, use S hook and J hook, and for rear tie-down hole, use S hook, J hook and T hook.
T hook can be used only for rear tie-down hole.
NT-11
Note
NOTE
11.TOWING
Avoid towing vehicles except when the vehicle cannot be driven. For models with AWD, AT or VTD, use a
loader instead of towing. When towing other vehicles, pay attention to the following to prevent hook or vehicle
damage resulting from excessive weight.
• Do not tow other vehicles with a front tie-down hook.
• Make sure the vehicle towing is heavier than the vehicle being towed.
• Front
Remove the hook cover, and install the hook.
(A)
(B)
NT-00378
(A) Hook cover (B) Hook
• Rear
Remove the hook cover, and install the hook.
(A)
(B)
NT-00377
(A) Hook cover (B) Hook
NT-12
Note
NOTE
• Precautions
Towing Precautions MT AT
Lifting up four wheels (On a trailer) Towing the vehicle after lifting up all four wheels is a
basic rule for AWD model.
NT-00023
Rope • Check if both front and rear wheels are rotated nor-
mally.
• AT model driving conditions: Driving speed of 30 km/h
(19 MPH) or less
Allow driving distance 50 km (31 miles) or less
NT-00024
Raising the front wheels Prohibited for full-time AWD model.
NT-00025
Lifting up the front wheels • Prohibited, due to damage on bumper, front grille, etc.
• Do not raise the vehicle with bumper.
NT-00026
Marked : OK, Marked : Prohibited, Marked : Conditionally OK.
NT-13
Note
NOTE
CAUTION:
• Place the shift lever in “N” position during towing.
• Do not lift up the rear wheels to avoid unsteady rotation.
• Turn the ignition key to “ACC”, then check the steering wheel moves freely.
• Release the parking brake to avoid tire dragging.
• Since the power steering does not work, be careful for the heavy steering effort. (When engine
is stopped)
• Since the servo brake does not work, be careful that the brake is not applied effectively. (When
engine is stopped)
• In case of the malfunction of internal transmission or drive system, lift up four wheels (on a trail-
er) for towing.
• Do not use towing hook except when towing.
• Make sure to detach the towing hook after towing. If the hook remains attached, airbag may not
operate properly when receiving a shock from front side.
12.FRONT HOOD DAMPER STAY
1) Always perform works such as inspections and maintenance with both damper stays attached.
CAUTION:
At the inspection and general maintenance, do not detach the damper stays.
(1)
NT-00366
(1) Normal attached position
2) When wider hood opening is necessary, set the damper stay below as shown in the figure.
Tightening torque:
<Ref. to EB-2, FRONT HOOD, COMPONENT, General Description.>
CAUTION:
• Always perform works such as inspections and maintenance with both damper stays attached.
• Do not leave one side of damper stay removed.
• The hood cannot be closed with the hood damper on the full open side. When it is necessary to
close, tie the hood striker and the radiator panel with a string etc. to fix them.
• After work, set the damper stays back to the normal position and tighten the bolts to the specified
torque.
NT-14
Note
NOTE
(1)
(2)
NT-00367
(1) Normal attached position (2) Installation position at full open
13.GENERAL SCAN TOOL 15.SPEEDOMETER TEST

Using general scan tools will greatly improve the ef- 1) Rear wheel free roller system
ficiency of repairing engine electronic throttle con- (1) Set the free roller on the floor of rear wheel
trols. Subaru Select Monitor can be used to side securely according to the wheel base and
diagnose the engine, VDC, air conditioner and oth- rear tread of the vehicle.
er parts. (2) Let the vehicle ride on the tester and free
roller gently.
14.AWD CIRCUIT MEASURES
1) Full-time AWD MT model CAUTION:
Since viscous coupling (limited slip differential) is Fix the vehicle using a pulling metal (chain or
used in the center differential, cut-off of AWD circuit wire) to the front and rear towing hooks or tie-
cannot be carried out. down hook to prevent the lateral runout of front
2) Full-time AWD 5AT model wheels and springing out of vehicle.
Since VTD type is used in the center differential,
cut-off of AWD circuit cannot be carried out.
3) Full-time AWD CVT model
Since electronically controlled MT-P hydraulic
multi-plate clutch is adapted for center differential,
switch to FWD by using Subaru Select Monitor.
(A)
NT-00033
(A) Free roller
(3) Set the speedometer tester.

(4) Conduct the speedometer test work.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the clutch quickly and do not ac-
celerate or decelerate suddenly during work.
NT-15
Note
NOTE
2) Rear wheel jack-up system (3) When the brake dragging force is large.
(1) Set the vehicle on speedometer tester. • Check the dragging of brake pad or brake
CAUTION: shoe.
Fix the vehicle using a pulling metal (chain or • Since it may be affected by the viscosity of
wire) to the front and rear towing hooks or tie- viscous coupling, jack up either of the front or
down hook to prevent the lateral runout of front rear two wheels to check the each wheel rota-
wheels and springing out of vehicle. tion condition with the viscous coupling affec-
tion removed.
(2) Jack up the rear wheels and set the rigid
racks to the specified locations of side sill. 2) Full-time AWD AT model
(1) Keep the front or rear wheels on the ground
during measurement.
(A)
NT-00034 (C) (A)
(B)
(A) RIGID RACK NT-00029
(3) Conduct the speedometer test work. (A) Brake tester

(B) Position for measuring front wheel
CAUTION:
(C) Position for measuring rear wheel
Do not operate the clutch quickly and do not ac-
celerate or decelerate suddenly during work. (2) When the brake dragging force is large.
16.BRAKE TEST • Check the dragging of brake pad or brake
1) Full-time AWD MT model shoe.
(1) Perform this test after driving the vehicle 2 to Specifications:
3 km (1.24 to 1.86 miles) on road in order to sta-
Braking force
bilize the viscous torque of viscous coupling.
Rear wheel total 10% or more of load on front or rear
(2) Keep the front or rear wheels on the ground
wheels
for this test.
Difference between 8% or less of load on front or rear
NOTE: right and left wheels
Effect of the viscous torque on braking force will be wheels
added approx. 25 kg compared with FWD model. Grand total 50% or more of vehicle weight at the
time of test
• When measurement is difficult to carry out

because both of front wheels are locked, break
force measurement in this condition conforms
to standard grand total.
(C) (A)
(B)
NT-00029
(A) Brake tester

(B) Position for measuring front wheel
(C) Position for measuring rear wheel
NT-16
Note
NOTE
17.ON THE CAR WHEEL BALANCING

CAUTION:
• Carry out the procedures after measuring the
balance of each single tire.
• Set the vehicle so that the front and rear
wheels are the same height.
• Release the parking brake during measure-
ment.
• Rotate each wheel by hands, and make sure it
rotates without dragging.
• Do not operate the clutch quickly and do not
accelerate or decelerate suddenly during work.
• When an error is indicated during engine
drive, do not use the motor drive together.
1) Set the rigid rack to the specified locations of
side sill, jack up the front or rear two wheels of non-
measuring side and set the pickup stands to two
wheels of measuring side.
(A)
(B) NT-00374
(A) Balancer body

(B) Pickup stand (left and right)
2) For drive wheel, drive the tires with engine for

measurement.
3) For non-drive wheel, drive the tires from the on
the car wheel balancer for measurement.
NT-17
Note
NOTE
NT-18
IDENTIFICATION
ID
Page
1. Identification ...............................................................................................2
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
1. Identification
A: IDENTIFICATION
1. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER & LABEL LOCATIONS
The V.I.N. (Vehicle Identification Numbers) is used to classify the vehicle.
• POSITIONING OF THE PLATE LABEL FOR IDENTIFICATION
(4)
(5) (3)
(1)
(2)
ID-00320
(1) Vehicle identification number (3) VIN cover (turbo model) (5) VIN plate
(V.I.N.)
(2) FMVSS label (U.S. model) (left (4) Intercooler (turbo model)
side)
CMVSS label (Canada model)
(left side)
Model No. label (Korea model)
(right side)
ID-2
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
• ENGINE • MANUAL TRANSMISSION

6MT
(1)
(1)
(2)
ID-00059
ID-00359
(1) Engine serial number (punch mark)
(2) Engine type (casting) crankcase upper side (1) Transmission serial number label and MT type
label
• AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
5AT • REAR DIFFERENTIAL
T-type
(1)
(1)
ID-00314
ID-00257
(1) Transmission serial number label and AT type
label (1) Identification (white paint)
CVT VA1-type
(2)
(3)
(1)
(1)
ID-00358 ID-00312
(1) Label (1) Type (label)

(2) CVT type label
(3) Transmission serial No. label
ID-3
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
VA2-TYPE
(1)
DI-00607
(1) Type (label)
• FMVSS LABEL, CMVSS LABEL

Example (FMVSS label)
ID-00321
• Model number label
ID-00322
ID-4
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
2. MEANING OF V.I.N.
The meaning of the V.I.N. is as follows:
]4S3BMAA6XB1210001[
The starting and ending brackets ( ] [ ) are stop marks.
Digits Code Meaning Details
1—3 4S3 Manufacturer body 4S3: All models except OUTBACK model for C0
area 4S4: OUTBACK for C0
4 B Car line B: LEGACY/OUTBACK
5 M Body type M: Sedan
R: Wagon
6 A Total emission and des- A: 2.5 L non-turbo for U4
tination B: 2.5 L non-turbo for U5
C: 2.5 L non-turbo for U6
D: 3.6 L non-turbo for U5
E: 3.6 L non-turbo for U6
F: 2.5 L turbo for U4
G: 2.5 L non-turbo for C0
H: 2.5 L non-turbo for C5
J: 3.6 L non-turbo for C0
K: 2.5 L turbo for C0
L: 2.5 L non-turbo for C6
M: 3.6 L non-turbo for C6
7 A Grade A: Base
B: Premium
C: Premium + cold weather package
D: Premium + 6CD harman/kardon
E: Premium + M/R
F: Premium + 6CD harman/kardon + cold weather package
G: Premium + M/R + cold weather package
H: Premium + M/R + cold weather package + 6CD harman/kardon
J: Limited + 6CD harman/kardon
K: Limited + 6CD harman/kardon + M/R
L: Limited + M/R + navigation
M: Limited + M/R
8 6 Restraint system or 6: Manual belt, dual airbag, side airbag for seat back + curtain air-
GVWR Class bag for roof (except for OUTBACK model)
C: Manual belt, dual airbag, side airbag for seat back + curtain airbag
for roof, class C (GVWR 4001 — 5000 lb) (for OUTBACK model)
9 X Check digit 0 — 9&X
10 B Model year B: 2011MY
11 1 Transmission type 1: Full-time AWD 6MT
2: Full-time AWD 5AT
3: Full-time AWD CVT
12 — 17 210001 Serial number 210001 — : Sedan
310001 — : Wagon
ID-5
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
3. MODEL NUMBER PLATE

The model number plate indicates: the applied model, the option code, the trim code, the engine type, the
transmission type, and the exterior color code. This information is helpful when placing orders for parts.
• BM9BY4M
1 B Series LEGACY
2 M Body type M: Sedan
R: Wagon
3 9 Total engine displace- 9: 2.5 L AWD
ment F: 3.6 L AWD
Drive system
Suspension system
4 B Model year B: 2011MY
5 Y Destination Y: U.S.A., Canada
6 4 Grade 4: 2.5 i
5: 2.5 i Premium
6: 2.5 i Limited
C: 2.5 GT Premium
D: 2.5 GT Limited
F: 3.6 R
G: 3.6 R Premium
H: 3.6 R Limited
K: OUTBACK 2.5 i
L: OUTBACK 2.5 i Premium
M: OUTBACK 2.5 i Limited
S: OUTBACK 3.6 R
T: OUTBACK 3.6 R Premium
U: OUTBACK 3.6 R Limited
7 M Transmission, fuel feed 9: SOHC MFI CVT
system M: SOHC MFI 6MT
U: DOHC MFI 5AT
X: DOHC MFI turbo 6MT
The engine and transmission type are as follows.

• ENGINE
EJ253CDAFB
1 and 2 EJ Engine type EJ: 4 cylinder
EZ: 6 cylinders
3 and 4 25 Displacement 25: 2.5 L
36: 3.6 L
5 3 Fuel feed system 3: MFI non-turbo (SOHC)
5: MFI turbo
D: MFI non-turbo (DOHC, H6)
6 C Emission regulations A: For states not using California emission standards
B: For all states
C: For states using California emission standards
7 D Mounted transmission C: D5AT
D: 6MT (T75)
U: CVT
8 — 10 AFB Detailed specifications Used when ordering parts. For details, refer to the parts cata-
log.
ID-6
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
• TRANSMISSION
1. MT
TY756WCAAA
1 T Transmission T: Transmission
2 Y Transmission system Y: Full-time AWD MT center differential
3 and 4 75 Distance between gear 75: Between main shaft and drive pinion
center
5 6 Classification 6: 6MT
6 W Transmission specifica- W: Full-time AWD 6MT single range with viscous coupling cen-
tions ter differential
7 C Mounted engine C: 2.5 L SOHC non-turbo
L: 2.5 L DOHC turbo
8 — 10 AAA Detailed specifications Used when ordering parts. For details, refer to the parts cata-
log.
2. AT
TG5D8CJAAA
2 G Transmission type G: Full-time AWD 5AT center differential
3 and 4 5D Identification 5D: 5AT
5 8 Series 8: 5AT
6 C Transmission specifica- C: Full-time AWD VTD 5AT
tions
7 J Equipped vehicle J: 3.6 L DOHC non-turbo
log.
3. CVT
TR690JHAAA
2 R Transmission type R: Full-time AWD CVT
3 and 4 69 Distance between gear 69: Between pulley centers
center
5 0 Classification 0: CVT
6 J Transmission specifica- J: Active torque split type full-time AWD CVT
tions
7 H Mounted engine H: 2.5 L SOHC non-turbo
log.
• REAR DIFFERENTIAL
Code Reduction gear ratio LSD
B1 4.111 No
B2 3.900 No
XC 3.083 No
XD 3.700 No
T2 4.111 No
TP 4.444 No
ID-7
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
• Option
U5DC
1—2 U5 Destination C0: Canada
C5: Canada (PZEV)
C6: Korea
U4: USA
U5: USA (for states using California emission standards)
U6: USA (for states not using California emission standards)
3 D Option equipment A: Cruise control
B: A package, power seat, cruise control
C: A package, power seat, genuine leather seat, cruise control
D: A package, cruise control
2: A package, power seat, cruise control, rearview camera
(rearview mirror with display)
3: A package, power seat, genuine leather seat, cruise control,
rearview camera (rearview mirror with display)
4: A package, power seat, genuine leather seat, cruise control,
rearview camera (navigation display)
4 C Option equipment A: Winter pack, side & curtain airbag
B: Side & curtain airbag
C: Winter pack, side & curtain airbag, sunroof
D: Side & curtain airbag, sunroof
E: Winter pack, navigation + wide monitor, side & curtain air-
bag, sunroof
F: Dark colored glass, winter pack, side & curtain airbag, sun-
roof
F: Dark colored glass, side & curtain airbag, sunroof
H: Dark colored glass, winter pack, navigation + wide monitor,
side & curtain airbag, sunroof
I: Dark colored glass, winter pack, side & curtain airbag
J: Dark colored glass, side & curtain airbag
O: Dark colored glass, harman/kardon audio, side & curtain air-
bag
U: Harman/kardon audio, side & curtain airbag
V: harman/kardon audio, side & curtain airbag, sunroof, winter
pack
V: harman/kardon audio, side & curtain airbag, winter pack
Y: Dark colored glass, winter pack, harman/kardon audio, side
& curtain airbag, sunroof
Z: Dark colored glass, winter pack, harman/kardon audio, side
& curtain airbag
ID-8
RECOMMENDED MATERIALS
RM
Page
1. Recommended Materials ...........................................................................2
Recommended Materials
1. Recommended Materials
A: RECOMMENDED MATERIALS
1. GENERAL
To insure the best performance, always use the specified oil, gasoline, adhesive, sealant, etc. or a substitute
of equivalent quality.
2. FUEL
• Use unleaded gasoline to reduce air pollution, because using leaded gasoline will damage the catalytic
converter.
• Do not use the low quality gasoline, or improper fuel such as diesel fuel, fuel alcohol, or gasoline additive
because they will adversely affect on engine components.
• Always use gasoline that is equivalent to that prescribed in the owner’s manual or that of high octane val-
ue. There is the possibility of damaging or improper operation of the engine and fuel injection system if the
specifications are not observed. Use the prescribed gasoline type to maintain proper vehicle performance.
3. LUBRICANTS
Use the lubricants shown in the table below, or equivalent. See the table below to choose the correct SAE
viscosity.
Lubricant Recommended materials
API standard ILSAC standard
Engine oil SN or SM grade “Resource conserving” or GF-5 or GF-4
Choose oil suitable for the standard “Energy conserving”
from the right.
TR OLEUM
PE
N
IN
FOR
AM ER I CA
ST I
GASOLINE
TUTE
ENGINES
C
ER D
T I F IE
RM-00002
RM-00076 Those with the above ILSAC certification
Those with the above API service labels mark (Starburst mark)
Manual transmission gear oil GL-5 —
Front differential gear oil GL-5 —
Rear differential gear oil GL-5 —
RM-2
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature

Engine oil
Non-turbo model
(˚C) –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40
(˚F) –22 –4 14 32 50 68 86 104
(1)
RM-00075
(1) 5W-30 (synthetic oil) Recommended

Turbo model
(˚C) –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40
(˚F) –22 –4 14 32 50 68 86 104
(1)
RM-00075
(1) 5W-30 (synthetic oil) Required
RM-3
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature

Manual transmission gear oil, rear differential gear oil, AT and CVT front differential gear oil
(˚C) –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40
(˚F) –22 –4 14 32 50 68 86 104
90
85W
80W
75W-90
RM-00058
4. FLUID
Use the fluids specified in the table below. Do not mix two different kinds or makes of fluid.
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the recommended or equivalent ATF or CVTF. Using material except recommended
one or substitute would cause trouble.
Fluid Recommended materials Item number Alternative
Automatic transmis- SUBARU CVT OIL FOR LIN-
CVT K0425Y0710 —
sion fluid EARTRONIC
5AT SUBARU ATF — IDEMITSU: ATF HP
Power steering fluid SUBARU PS fluid K0515YA000 DEXRON III
Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116 DOT3, or DOT4 — —
Clutch fluid FMVSS No. 116 DOT3 — —
5. COOLANT
Use genuine coolant to protect the engine.
Engine coolant Recommended materials Item number Alternative
Coolant SUBARU SUPER COOLANT K0670Y0001 —
Cooling system protective
Cooling system conditioner SOA345001 —
agent
6. REFRIGERANT
Standard air conditioners on Subaru vehicles use HFC134a refrigerant. Do not mix it with other refrigerants.
Also, do not use any compressor oil other than DENSO OIL 8.
Air Conditioner Recommended materials Item number Alternative
Refrigerant HFC134a — —
Compressor oil DENSO OIL 8 — —
RM-4
7. GREASE
Use grease and supplementary lubricants shown in the table below.
Grease Application point Recommended materials Item number Alternative
Supplementary
Oxygen sensor Spray type lubricant — —
lubricants
• MT main shaft (spline parts)
• MT main shaft (oil seal lip) NICHIMOLY N-130 — —
• Clutch release lever
Clutch master cylinder push
SILICONE GREASE G-40M — —
rod
Gear shift lever Multemp HL-D — —
• Clutch operating cylinder
• Clutch pedal NIGTIGHT LYW
— —
• Brake pedal No. 2 grease
• Release bearing
Select lever Multemp D — —
• Door latch
Grease SILICONE GREASE G-30M 004404002 —
• Door striker
Steering gearbox VALIANT GREASE M2 003608001 ONE LUBER SG or MO
Disc brake (Lock pin, guide Brake grease
00041000 —
pin, piston boot) (NIGLUBE RX-2)
Between brake pad and shim Molykote AS-880N K0777YA010 —
Molykote M7439
Brake pad clip — —
(Brake Grease 60G)
Front axle AC Olistamoly 2LN584/L0 — —
Front axle AAR One-Luber GKN-C — —
• Rear axle BJ
NKG106 — —
• Rear axle EBJ
Rear axle DOJ NKG205 — —
8. ADHESIVE
Use the adhesives shown in the table below, or equivalent.
Adhesive Application point Recommended materials Item number Alternative
Adhesive Windshield, rear window glass, Dow Automotive’s adhesive:
rear quarter glass, rear gate ESSEX U-400HV or the equiv-
glass and body alent — —
Glass primer: U-401 and U-402
Painted surface primer: U-413
Rearview mirror base REPAIR KIT IN MR 65029FC000 —
RM-5
9. SEAL MATERIAL
Use the seal material shown in the table below, or equivalent.
Seal material Application point Recommended materials Item number Alternative
Seal material • MT transmission case
• MT transfer case
• MT transmission cover
• 5AT converter case
• CVT transmission case
THREE BOND 1215 004403007 DOW CORNING No. 7038
• CVT intermediate case
• CVT extension case
• CVT converter cover
• CVT chain cover
• CVT drive pinion retainer
Transmission oil pan (AT and CVT
THREE BOND 1217B K0877YA020 —
model)
• Engine oil pan (Except for 3.6 L
model)
• Engine oil pan (block lower)
(except for 3.6 L model)
• Cylinder block lower (cylinder
block) (except for 3.6 L model)
• Camshaft cap
• Oil pump (Except for 3.6 L model)
• Strainer (3.6 L model)
• Rocker cover (except for 2.5 L
non-turbo model) THREE BOND 1217G K0877Y0100 —
• Oil pan (oil pan upper) (3.6 L
model)
• Block (oil pan upper) (3.6 L
model)
• Chain cover (block, head, oil pan
upper, front cam shaft cap) (3.6 L
model)
• Separator cover (except for 3.6 L
model)
• Scavenge pump (turbo model)
• Engine oil pressure switch
• Rear differential
• Oil return cover mounting bolt
(turbo model)
• Engine oil separator cover (when
reusing bolts)
THREE BOND 1324 004403042 —
• Engine oil pump mounting bolt
(when reusing bolts)
• Timing belt guide cam sprocket
side mounting bolt (when reusing
bolts)
• PCV valve (3.6 L model)
• Rear differential
• Service hole plug THREE BOND 1105 004403010 DOW CORNING No. 7038
• Intake manifold nipple
Steering adjusting screw THREE BOND 1102 004403006 THREE BOND 1215
• Front sealing cover (door)
3M Butyl Rubber 8626 — —
• Rear sealing cover (door)
Rear differential (side retainer bolt) THREE BOND 1110B K0879Y0020 —
RM-6
PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION
PI
Page
1. Pre-delivery Inspection ...............................................................................2
Pre-delivery Inspection
1. Pre-delivery Inspection
A: GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The purposes of the pre-delivery inspection (PDI) are as follows.
• Remove the additional parts used for ensuring the vehicle quality during transportation and restore the ve-
hicle to its normal condition.
• Check the vehicle before delivery is in normal condition.
• Check the vehicle has no damage and no vehicle protective parts are missing while shipped or stored in
a car barn.
• Make sure to deliver a complete vehicle to customer.
For above reasons, all SOA service center must carry out the PDIs before delivery of vehicle.
Besides, all SOA service center and PDI center check the condition of all vehicles to make sure to take re-
sponsibility.
B: PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION (PDI) PROCEDURE
Static Checks Just After Vehicle Receipt
Operation Check point
1. Appearance 1. If the vehicle is covered with protective coating, visually check the vehicle
body for damage and dents. If the protective coating has been removed,
visually check the painted body surfaces in detail for damage or rust.
2. Visually check the glass and light lenses for any damage, cracks or exces-
sive gaps between body sheet metal.
3. Visually check the plated parts for any damage.
4. Check the instrument panel, console and trim for stains or dirt.
2. Tire 1. Check the tires for damage, defective, and dents on wheels.
2. Check the tire air pressure.
3. Fuses If the vehicle is about to be delivered to customer, attach a back-up fuse.
4. Lock/unlock and open/close operation checks 1. Using the key, check the door can be locked or unlocked normally.
of doors. 2. Open and close all doors to check that there are no problems.
3. Operate the power door lock switch to check that all doors and the rear
gate lock and unlock normally.
5. Child safety lock Check the child safety lock system operates normally.
6. Trunk lid open/close operations 1. Press the trunk opener switch for approx. one second to check for normal
operation of the trunk lid.
2. Check that main and sub keys can lock/unlock the release lever, and that
valet key can not lock/unlock the release lever.
3. Open and close the trunk lid to see that there are no abnormal conditions.
7. Operation check of trunk lid release lever Operate the trunk lid release lever to check that the trunk lock is unlocked
normally.
8. Rear gate Lock/Unlock and open/close opera- 1. Open and close the rear gate to check that there are no problems.
tions 2. Check if the rear gate can be unlocked normally through the emergency
hole.
3. Operate the power door lock switch to check that all doors and the rear
gate lock and unlock normally.
9. Fuel lid opener lever Operate the fuel lid opener to check that the fuel lid is unlocked normally.
10. Accessory Check that the following accessories are provided.
• Owner’s manual
• Warranty booklet
• Maintenance note
• Spare key
• Key number plate
• Jack
• Tool set
• Spare tire
• Towing hook (eye bolt (model with eye bolt))
• Security ID plate
PI-2

11. Front hood lock release system Operate the front hood lock release lever to check that the front hood opens
normally.
12. Battery Check the battery for any abnormal conditions such as rust or traces of bat-
tery fluid leaks.
13. Brake fluid Check the brake fluid amount.
14. Engine oil Check the engine oil amount.
15. Transmission gear oil Check that the transmission gear oil level is normal.
16. AT front differential gear oil Check the AT front differential gear oil amount.
17. CVT front differential gear oil Check for no leakage of CVT front differential gear oil.
18. Engine coolant Check the engine coolant level.
19. Clutch fluid Check the clutch fluid amount.
20. Window washer fluid Check the window washer fluid amount.
21. Front hood latch Check that the front hood is closed normally and locked securely.
22. Keyless entry system Check that the keyless entry system operates normally.
23. Security system (Alarm system) Check that the security system (alarm system) operates normally.
24. Seat 1. Check the seat surfaces for stains or dirt.
2. Check the seat installation conditions and functionality.
3. Check that the occupant detection system for passenger’s seat operates
normally.
25. Seat belt 1. Check the seat belt installation conditions and functionality.
2. Check the seat belt warning system operates normally.
26. TPMS (U.S. model) 1. Turn the TPMS transmitter power supply to ON.
2. If the display of TPMS warning light does not operate normally, perform
the diagnosis by referring to TPMS (Diagnosis).
PI-3
Checks with the Engine Running

27. Immobilizer system 1. Check that the engine starts with all keys that are equipped on vehicle.
2. 60 seconds after turning ignition switch from ON to ACC or OFF, or imme-
diately after removing the key, check that the security indicator light is blink-
ing.
28. Starting condition Start the engine and check that the engine starts smoothly.
29. Exhaust system Check that the exhaust noise is normal and no leaks are found.
30. Indicator and warning lights Check that all indicator lights and warning lights are operating correctly.
31. Heater & ventilation Check that the heater & ventilation system operates normally.
32. Air conditioner Check that the air conditioner operates normally.
33. Clock 1. Check that the clock operates normally.
2. Check for normal switch operation of fuel economy display.
34. Audio 1. Check that the audio system operates normally.
2. Check that the radio, CD and AUX systems operate normally.
35. Navigation system 1. Check all display functions for normal operation.
2. Check that the navigation, audio and AUX systems operate normally.
3. Check that the rearview camera operates normally.
36. Accessory power supply socket Check that the accessory power supply socket operates normally.
37. Lighting system Check that the lighting system operates normally.
38. Wiper deicer Check that the wiper deicer operates normally.
39. Illumination control Check that the illumination control operates normally.
40. Window washer Check that the window washer system operates normally.
41. Wiper Check that the wiper system operates normally.
42. Power window Check that the power window operates normally.
43. Sunroof Check that the sunroof operates normally.
44. Door mirror Check that the remote control mirror and heated mirror operate normally.
45. Room mirror (RCD model) 1. Check all display functions for normal operation.
2. Check that the automatic anti-glare function operates normally.
3. Check that the compass function operates normally.
4. Check that the rearview camera operates normally.
46. Rear defogger Check that the rear defogger system operates normally.
47. Parking brake Check the parking brake for normal operations.
Dynamic Test with the Vehicle Running

48. Brake test Check the foot brake for normal operations.
49. AT, CVT shift control Check that the AT, CVT shifts normally.
50. MT shift control Check that the MT shifts normally.
51. Cruise control Check that the cruise control system operates normally.
Checks after Dynamic Test

52. ATF level Check that the ATF level is correct.
53. Power steering fluid level Check that the power steering fluid level is normal.
54. Fluid leakage Check for fluid/oil leaks.
55. Water leakage Spray the vehicle with water and check for water leaks.
56. Appearance 2 1. Remove the protective coat. (If attached)
2. Check the body paints for damage and stain.
3. Check the plated parts for damage and rust.
PI-4
1. APPEARANCE 4. LOCK/UNLOCK AND OPEN/CLOSE OP-

• If the vehicle is covered with protective coating, ERATION CHECKS OF DOORS.
visually check the vehicle body for damage and 1) Using the key, lock and unlock the door several
dents. times to check for normal operation. Open and
• When the protective coating is removed, visually close the door several times for smooth movement.
check the body paints for damage or stains in detail
and repair as necessary.
• Visually check the windshield glass, door glass-
es and light lenses for any damage, cracks or ex-
cessive gaps to the body sheet metal and repair as
necessary.
• Visually check the plated parts, such as the
grilles and door knobs, for damage or loss of gloss
and replace the parts as necessary.
• Check the instrument panel, console, and trims
PI-00604
for stains or dirt.
2) Completely close the driver’s door, and then
2. TIRE check the smooth movement with operating door
• Check the tires for damage, defective, and dents lock knob from lock to unlock several times. Set the
on wheels. door lock knob (A) to lock position. Then pull the in-
• Check and correct the tire size, spare tire and tire ner remote (B) to ensure that doors will not open.
air pressure described on the tire air pressure label For other doors, place the door lock knob (A) to lock
(driver’s side). position and then pull the inner remote (B) to en-
sure that doors will not open.
3. FUSE
Right after the vehicle has arrived, 10 A backup
fuse is removed to avoid run-down of the battery. (A)
Connect the backup fuse as shown in the figure. Al-
so, delivery mode is canceled by disconnecting the
backup fuse from the fuse holder.
(B)
PI-00612
(A) Door lock knob

(B) Inner remote
3) Close all the doors, and then press the lock on

power door lock switch at driver’s side. Check that
all doors including rear gate are locked.
(1)
(3)
(2)
NT-00369 PI-00613
(1) Backup fuse insertion slot

(2) Backup fuse holder
(3) Backup fuse
PI-5
4) Press the driver’s side power door lock switch to 6. OPEN/CLOSE OPERATION CHECKS OF
unlock side. Check that all doors including rear TRUNK LID
gate are unlocked. 1) Press the trunk opener switch for approx. one
second to check for normal operation of the trunk
lid.
PI-00614
5) Check that the passenger’s side power door lock

switch locks and unlocks normally in the same manner. PI-00617
2) Open and close the trunk lid several times for

(A)
(B)
smooth movement.
3) Press the trunk opener lock button in the glove
box.
PI-00615
(A) Lock
(B) Unlock
6) Insert the key to ignition switch, and open the PI-00609
driver’s side door. Press lock on power door lock. 4) Check that the trunk lid will not open even when
Check that the door is not locked. the trunk opener button is pressed.
5. CHILD SAFETY LOCK SYSTEM 7. TRUNK LID RELEASE HANDLE
1) Set the child safety lock on both rear doors to the CAUTION:
lock position. Do not check the trunk lid release handle when
2) Close the rear doors completely. in the trunk. If the trunk lid release handle is de-
3) Check that the lock levers of the rear doors are in fective, you may be trapped in.
the unlock position. Then, pull inner remote of rear 1) Use a flat tip screwdriver. Slide in the screwdriv-
doors to ensure that the doors will not open. er through the clearance at the lock assembly until
a click sound is heard. This is the latch lock posi-
tion.
(A)
(B)
PI-00616
(A) Lock
PI-00248
(B) Unlock
4) Pull the outer handles to ensure that doors will open.
PI-6
2) Make sure the latch is released by pulling the 10.ACCESSORY

yellow trunk lid release handle in the direction of ar- Check that the following accessories are provided.
row. • Owner’s manual
• Warranty booklet
• Maintenance note
• Spare key
• Key number plate
• Jack
• Tool set
• Spare tire
• Towing hook (eye bolt (model with eye bolt))
• Security ID plate
PI-00610
11.OPERATION CHECK OF FRONT HOOD
8. LOCK/UNLOCK AND OPEN/CLOSE OP- LOCK RELEASE SYSTEM
ERATIONS OF REAR GATE Operate the front hood lock release lever (A) to
1) Open and close the rear gate several times for check that the front hood is unlocked normally.
smooth movement.
2) Operate the rear gate lever to check that the rear
gate is locked and unlocked normally.
(1) Remove the cover inside the rear gate.
(A)
PI-00607
Operate the lever (B) and check that the front hood
is opened normally. Check that the front hood can
be supported by damper stay.
PI-00605
(2) Operate the lever to check that the rear gate

is locked and unlocked normally.
(B)
PI-00608
12.BATTERY
PI-00606 Check the battery terminals to make sure that there
are no rust or corrosions due to fluid leaks.
9. FUEL LID OPENER LEVER
Operate the fuel lid opener to check that the fuel lid
is unlocked normally. Check that the filler cap is se-
curely closed.
PI-00250
PI-7
13.BRAKE FLUID 15.TRANSMISSION GEAR OIL

CAUTION: CAUTION:
If the brake fluid is spilt over exhaust pipe, wipe If transmission gear oil is spilt over the exhaust
it off with cloth to avoid emitting smoke or pipe, wipe it off with a cloth to avoid emitting
causing a fire. smoke or causing a fire.
Check that the brake fluid level is normal. If the Check that the transmission gear oil level is normal.
amount is insufficient, carry out a brake line test to If the amount of gear oil is insufficient, check that no
identify brake fluid leaks and check the brake oper- leaks are found. Then add the necessary amount of
ation. After that, refill the brake fluid tank with the the specified transmission gear oil.
specified type of fluid.
14.ENGINE OIL (A)
CAUTION:
If engine oil is spilt onto the exhaust pipe, wipe
(B)
it off with cloth to avoid emission of smoke or
(C)
causing a fire.
Check the engine oil amount. If the amount of oil is in-
sufficient, check that no leaks are found. Then, add
the necessary amount of the specified engine oil.
MT-02052
• 2.5 L model
(A) Oil level gauge
(A) (B) (F) (B) Upper level
(C) Lower level
(C)
16.AT FRONT DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
(E)
CAUTION:
(D)
If the differential gear oil is spilt over exhaust
pipe, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emitting
smoke or causing a fire.
LU-02569
Check that the AT front differential gear oil level is
(A) Oil level gauge
normal. If the amount of oil is insufficient, check
that no leaks are found. Then, add the necessary
(B) Engine oil filler cap
amount of the specified AT front differential gear
(C) “F” line oil.
(D) “L” line
(E) Approx. 1.0 2 (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)
(F) Notch mark
• 3.6 L model
F
(A)
(B) (B)
(A)
L
(C)
(E)
AT-00017
(D)
(A) Upper level
(B) Lower level
LU-02555 17.CVT FRONT DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL

Check for no leakage of CVT front differential gear
(A) Oil level gauge
oil.
(B) Engine oil filler cap
(C) “F” line
(D) “L” line
PI-8
18.ENGINE COOLANT 22.KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

CAUTION: NOTE:
If the engine coolant is spilt over exhaust pipe, The following inspections show the initial settings.
wipe it off with cloth to avoid emitting smoke or When the settings are different from the initial set-
causing a fire. tings, use Subaru Select Monitor to check the de-
Check that the engine coolant level on the reservoir tails of each setting for inspections. <Ref. to
tank is normal. If the amount of engine coolant is in- BC(diag)-17, OPERATION, User Customizing.>
sufficient, check that no leaks are found. Then, add 1) Fully open all the door windows.
the necessary amount of coolant with the specified 2) Remove the key from the ignition switch and
concentration. close all the doors including rear gate.
3) Press the rear gate and trunk open button for at
19.CLUTCH FLUID least one second.
CAUTION: • Check if the trunk is opened and the hazard light
If the clutch fluid is spilt over the exhaust pipe, blinks twice and the buzzer sounds twice. (Sedan
wipe it off with cloth to avoid emitting smoke or model)
causing a fire. • Check if the rear gate is unlocked and the hazard
Check that the clutch fluid level is normal. If the light blinks twice and the buzzer sounds twice.
amount of the fluid is insufficient, check that no (OUTBACK model)
leaks are found. Then, add the necessary amount
of the specified fluid.
(C)
(A)
(B)
PI-00640
4) Press the “LOCK” button on the keyless trans-

CL-00753
mitter with one of the doors (including the rear gate
(A) MAX. level and trunk) opened. Check if all doors are locked,
hazard light blinks five times and the buzzer
(B) MIN. level
sounds five times and warning shows one of the
(C) Reservoir tank
doors (including the rear gate and trunk) open.
5) Close all the doors including rear gate and trunk.
20.WINDOW WASHER FLUID Press the “LOCK” button momentarily on the key-
Check that the window washer fluid level is normal. less transmitter. Check that all the doors (including
If the amount is insufficient, check that no leaks are rear gate and trunk) are locked, hazard light blinks
found. Then, add the necessary amount of washer once and buzzer sounds once.
fluid.
21.FRONT HOOD LATCH
Close the front hood. Check that the front hood is
securely latched.
PI-00639
PI-9
6) Press the “UNLOCK” button momentarily on the 10) Press the “Panic” button of the keyless trans-
keyless transmitter. Check that the driver’s door is mitter. Check if the alarm condition happens (horn
unlocked and hazard light blinks twice and the sounds continuously, hazard light blinks, security
buzzer sounds twice. indicator comes on). Check whether this condition
And press the “UNLOCK” button momentarily lasts until any button on the keyless transmitter is
again in 5 seconds. Check that all doors (including pressed or lasts for 30 seconds.
rear gate) are unlocked.
PI-00641
PI-00662
23.SECURITY SYSTEM (ALARM SYSTEM)
7) Within a distance of 10 m from a vehicle, press
keyless transmitter’s “LOCK” button three times NOTE:
within five seconds. Check that the horn honks The following inspections show the initial settings.
once and that the hazard light blinks three times. When the settings are different from the initial set-
8) Move the power door lock switch to the lock po- tings, use Subaru Select Monitor to check the de-
sition with one of doors (including the rear gate) tails of each setting for inspections. <Ref. to
opened. Next, close all the doors including rear BC(diag)-17, OPERATION, User Customizing.>
gate. Check if all doors are locked and buzzer 1) Fully open all the door windows.
sounds once and the hazard light flashes once. 2) Remove the key from the ignition switch and
9) Check buzzer operation. close all the doors including rear gate.
The buzzer sounds when the doors are locked or 3) Press the “LOCK” button momentarily on the
unlocked. The buzzer can be turned off if desired. keyless transmitter. All doors are locked, and buzz-
Turn the buzzer off or on with following procedure. er sounds once, hazard blinks once, security indi-
(1) Close all the doors including rear gate, then cator light blinks faster (five times per two seconds)
remove the key from ignition key lock. for 30 seconds and goes slower (twice per two sec-
(2) Press the power door lock switch to unlock onds), then the alarm system is in set condition.
and hold it until the operation is finished.
(3) Insert the key into ignition key lock, and in-
sert and remove the key in ignition key lock 5
times in 10 seconds.
(4) When finished step (3), open and close the
driver’s door once within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
When opening and closing of the door is not avail-
able within 10 seconds, hazard light blinks once
and the change over operation is cancelled. Retry PI-00639
from the step (1).
(5) Hazard light blinks 3 times and the buzzer
sound turns ON or OFF.
PI-10
4) Press the “UNLOCK” button momentarily on the

keyless transmitter. When the door of the driver’s (A)
seat is unlocked, the buzzer sounds twice, the haz-
ard light flashes twice, the room light turns on and
the security indicator light flashes once in three
seconds, and the alarm system enters the release
mode.
(B)
PI-00663
(A) Indication for US

(B) Indication for Canada
(3) Have a person weighing approximately 70

kg (155 lb) or more sit in the passenger’s seat,
PI-00662 and check whether the passenger’s airbag indi-
cator light illuminate or not.
5) Close all the doors including rear gate. Press the (4) Empty the passenger seat, then check
“LOCK” button momentarily on the keyless trans- whether the passenger side airbag indicator
mitter. When all the doors are locked, buzzer light OFF illuminates.
sounds once, hazard blinks once and the alarm
system is in set condition in 30 seconds. 25.SEAT BELT
6) Unlock the door using the inner lock knob and 1) Check installation condition of seat belt.
open the door while the alarm system is in the set 2) Pull out the seat belt and then release it. Check
mode. Check if the alarm condition happens (horn that the belt retracts smoothly.
sounds continuously, hazard light blinks, security 3) Check that the ALR seat belt operates normally.
indicator illuminates). Check if this condition lasts 4) Check seat belt warning function.
for a maximum of three minutes or until the “UN- (1) Turn the ignition switch to ON with the driv-
LOCK” button of the keyless transmitter is pressed. er’s and passenger’s seat belt detached.
NOTE: (2) Check the driver’s and passenger’s seat belt
The alarm condition will cease in 30 seconds once warning light blink for approx. 6 seconds and
the door is closed. the buzzer sounds intermittently.
7) When none of above is applicable, perform trou- (3) Then, check the seat belt warning light illu-
bleshooting for the security system. minates and blinks repeatedly at a cycle of ap-
prox. 15 seconds. (If no passenger is on the
24.SEAT passenger’s seat, the seat belt warning light on
1) Check the seat surfaces for stains or dirt. passenger’s seat does not operate.)
2) Check that each seat provides full functionality in
sliding and reclining. Check all available functions 26.TPMS
of the rear seat such as a trunk-through and center 1) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and check TPMS
armrest. warning light for normal operation.
3) Check the passenger’s seat occupant detection • Normal operation (IG ON (light check))
system.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(2) Check the ON and OFF of passenger’s air-
bag indicator light come on simultaneously for
about 6 seconds and go off for 2 seconds, and ON
then only OFF illuminates again.
OFF
2s
IGN ON
PI-00376
2) If the TPMS warning light display does not oper-

ate normally, check and repair the system. <Ref. to
TPM(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
PI-11
27.IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM 33.CLOCK

1) Check that the engine starts with all keys that Check the clock for normal operations and enough
are equipped on vehicle. accuracy. Check the fuel economy display switch-
2) 60 seconds after turning ignition switch from ON es by operating the knob on the meter. Also check
to ACC or OFF, or immediately after removing the there is no significant error on the outside temper-
key, check that the security indicator light is blink- ature display.
ing.
3) For the model for Canada, execute Each System
34.AUDIO
Check > Integ. unit mode > “SCU collation mode” Check that all radio functions operate, the speakers
on SSMIII to check [Collation OK (no error)] is dis- emit sound properly and the noise is at an accept-
played. able level. Also check the CD unit and AUX unit op-
erations.
NOTE:
If malfunctions occur, refer to “IMMOBILIZER (DI- 35.NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AGNOSIS)”. 1) Check all display functions for normal operation.
28.STARTING CONDITION (Refer to the owner’s manual for the operation pro-
cedures.)
Start the engine and check that the engine starts 2) Check the map disc (DVD) are provided on vehi-
smoothly. If the battery voltage is low, recharge or cle.
replace the battery. If any noises are observed, im- 3) Check that the navigation system operates nor-
mediately stop the engine and check and repair the mally.
abnormal components.
4) Check that the rearview camera operates nor-
29.EXHAUST SYSTEM mally.
Listen to the exhaust noise to see if no exhaust gas 36.ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY SOCKET
leak or abnormal noises are observed.
1) Check the operation of the front accessory pow-
30.INDICATOR LIGHT AND WARNING er supply socket.
LIGHT 2) Check operation of the accessory power supply
socket in console box.
Check that all indicator lights and warning lights op-
erate normally. 37.LIGHTING SYSTEM
31.HEATER & VENTILATION 1) Check the headlight operation.
Operate the heater & ventilation system to check 2) Check the stop light operation.
for normal airflow outlet control, air inlet control, air- 3) Check other lights for normal operations.
flow capacity and heating performance. 38.WIPER DEICER
32.AIR CONDITIONER Check that the wiper deicer operates normally.
Operate the air conditioner. Check that the A/C NOTE:
compressor operates normally and enough cooling When an ambient temperature is 5°C or more, wip-
is provided. er deicer operation is cancelled. Press the switch
NOTE: for 3 seconds or more to perform the compulsory
To prevent the insufficient lubrication of the air con- operation.
ditioner, operate the air conditioner for five minutes 39.ILLUMINATION CONTROL
at idling.
Check that the illumination control operates nor-
mally.
PI-12
40.WINDOW WASHER
Check that the window washer system injects washer fluid to the specified area of the windshield and rear
window glass shown in the figure.
Front injection position:
(A)
40
(B)
(3.54 in)
90 mm
75
:(C) (E) (E)

:(D) 250 mm 250 mm
(9.84 in) (9.84 in)
WW-00776
(A) Lower-side spray position center

(B) Ceramic line position on the washer nozzle cen-
ter
(C) Washer nozzle elevation angle, lower limit of
spray area
(D) Washer nozzle elevation angle, upper limit of
spray area
(E) Washer nozzle
Rear injection position:
(2.24 in)
(3.62 in)
57 mm
92 mm
56.5
PI-00646
41.WIPER
Check the front and rear wipers for normal opera-
tions.
PI-13
42.POWER WINDOW
• Operate the power window switches one by one
to check that each of the power windows goes up
and down without noises.
• Check AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN operate properly
by operating the power window switch on driver’s
seat side.
CAUTION:
If battery has been removed, AUTO UP does not
operate properly because initialized. In this PI-00611
case, perform the initial setting (reset A) and 50.MT SHIFT CONTROL
check AUTO UP operates properly.
1) Check for smooth operation to each position. Es-
43.SUNROOF pecially, shifting to 5th ←→ 6th, and then to Rev,
Check that the sunroof operates normally. check for any drag.
2) Check the slider returns to the original position
44.DOOR MIRROR by shifting to the Rev and then back in neutral while
Check that the remote control mirror and heated pulling up the slider.
mirror operate normally. 3) If the shift operation is not smooth, readjust the
exposed length (a) of the MT gear select cable re-
45.ROOM MIRROR (RCD MODEL) ferring to the figure below.
1) Check all display functions for normal operation.
2) Check that the automatic anti-glare function op-
erates normally. (a)
3) Check that the compass function operates nor-
mally.
4) Check that the rearview camera operates normally.
5) Perform compass calibration. <Ref. to GW-59,
CALIBRATION, ADJUSTMENT, Rearview Mirror (B) (A)
(RCD Model).>
6) Perform compass zone setting. <Ref. to GW-60,
ZONE SETTING, ADJUSTMENT, Rearview Mirror
(RCD Model).> 1st 3rd 5th
(A)
46.REAR DEFOGGER (B)

Check that the rear defogger system operates nor-
mally.
47.PARKING BRAKE
Check the parking brake operates properly by de-
pressing brake pedal and pressing the electronic
parking brake switch. 2nd 4th 6th Rev
(C)
48.BRAKE TEST CS-01043
Check the foot brake for normal operations. (a) Exposed length of MT gear select cable
49.AT, CVT SHIFT CONTROL (A) Extending exposed length of gear select cable
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (B) Shrinking exposed length of gear select cable
2) While brake pedal is not depressed, check if the (C) Reference for exposed length (a)
select lever does not move from “P” range. • If 5th or 6th gear cannot be selected when cable
3) While brake pedal is depressed, check if the se- is pressed to reverse lock bracket:
lect lever moves from “P” range. → Extend the exposed length (a) of MT gear select
4) Set the select lever to other than “P” range. cable.
5) When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, check • If select lever does not move along the cranking
if the ignition key switch cannot be removed. line when it is operated from 4th to 5th gear:
6) Set the selector lever to “D” range and check the → Shorten the exposed length (a) of MT gear se-
shifting while driving the vehicle. lect cable.
PI-14
51.CRUISE CONTROL 54.OIL LEAKAGE

Operate the cruise control system. Check that the Check entire areas of the vehicle for any trace of
system is activated and deactivated correctly. coolant/oil (such as engine and gear oil)/fluid (such
as transmission and brake) leaks.
52.ATF LEVEL
CAUTION: 55.WATER LEAK TEST
If the ATF is spilt over exhaust pipe, wipe it off Spray the vehicle with water using a hose and
with cloth to avoid emitting smoke or causing a check that no water enters the passenger compart-
fire. ment.
After selecting all positions (P, R, N, D), set the se- • Before performing the water leakage test, re-
lect lever in “P” range. Idle the engine for 1 or 2 min- move anything that may obstruct the operation or
utes, and measure the ATF level. If the amount is which must be kept dry.
insufficient, check that no leaks are found. Then, • Close all the windows and doors securely. Close
add the necessary amount of the specified ATF. the hood and trunk lid before starting the test.
• Spray the vehicle with water using a hose. The
(A) rate of water spray must be approx. 20 to 25 2 (5.3
HOT
F
(B) — 6.6 US gal, 4.4 — 5.5 Imp gal) per minute.

(C) When spraying water on areas adjacent to the floor
and wheel house, increase the pressure. When
L
F
(B)
spraying water on areas other than the floor and
(C) wheel house, decrease the pressure. But the force
COLD
L
of water must be made strong occasionally by

pressing the end of the hose.
AT-04217
NOTE:
Be sure to keep the hose at least 10 cm (3.9 in)
(A) Level gauge away from vehicle.
(B) Upper level Check the following areas.
(C) Lower level • Front window and body framework mating por-
tion
53.POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL • Door mating portions
• Glass mating portions
CAUTION: • Rear quarter window mating portions
If any power steering fluid is spilt over the ex- • Rear window and body framework mating por-
haust pipe, wipe it off with a cloth to avoid emit- tion
ting smoke or causing a fire.
• Around roof drips
Check that the power steering fluid level is normal.
If any dampness in the compartments is discovered
If the amount is insufficient, check that no leaks are
after the water has been applied, carefully check all
found. Then add the necessary amount of the
the areas that may have possibly contributed to the
specified power steering fluid.
leak.
HOT MAX
COLD MAX
HOT MIN
COLD MIN
PS-01076
PI-15
56.APPEARANCE CHECK 2 5) Check each portion of body and all of the exteri-
1) When vehicle body is covered with protective or parts for deformation or distortion. Also, check
film (wrap guard), peel it off. each light lens for cracks.
6) Peel the protective tape, vinyl wrapping and
NOTE: identification seal attached to the following places.
• It is easier to remove the wrap guard using • Seat
steam. • Door trim
• For a vehicle left for a long time or at low temper- • Floor carpet
ature, sprinkle some water heated to 50 — 60°C • Side sill
(122 — 140°F) over the vehicle to raise its surface • Front hood lock release lever
temperature before peeling off the wrap guard. Do
• Edge rear
not use the water heated to over 60°C (140°F).
• Rear wiper
• If the adhesive remains exist on the coated sur-
• Sedan rear combination light (Trunk lid opening
face, soak a flannel rag, etc. with a small amount of
portion)
coating wax or solvent such as oil benzene and
IPA, put the soaked cloth on the remains lightly, • Roof rail
and then wipe them off with a flannel rag etc. • Assist rail
• Keep solvent from touching the resin or rubber
parts. Do not use coating wax or solvent while the
component surface temperature is high due to hot
weather etc.
• If the coated surface is swollen out due to seams
or moisture, expose the vehicle to the sunlight for a
few hours or heat the seam and swollen portions
using a dryer etc.
• Dispose of the peeled wrap guard as burnable
industrial garbage.
• If a yellow label is attached to the fog light lens,
remove it.
2) Check the whole vehicle body for flaking paint,
damage by transportation, corrosion, dirt, cracks or
blisters.
NOTE:
• It is better to determine an inspection pattern in
order to avoid missing an area, since the total in-
spection area is wide.
• Do not repair the body paint unless absolutely
necessary. Also, if the vehicle is in need of repair to
remove scratches or corroded paint, the repair area
must be limited to the minimum. Re-painting and
spray painting must be avoided as much as possi-
ble.
3) Check each window glass for scratches careful-
ly. Slight damage may be removed by polishing
with cerium oxide. (Fill a cup half with cerium oxide,
and add warm water to it. Then agitate the content
until it turns to wax. Apply this wax to a soft cloth,
and polish the glass with it.)
4) Check each portion of the vehicle body and un-
derside components for the formation of rust. If rust
is discovered, remove it with sandpaper of #80 to
#180 and treat the surface with rust preventive. Af-
ter this treatment is completed, flush the portion
thoroughly, and prepare the surface for repair
painting.
PI-16
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SERVICES
PM
Page
1. General Description ...................................................................................2
2. Schedule ....................................................................................................3
3. Engine Oil ...................................................................................................8
4. Engine Oil Filter ..........................................................................................9
5. Spark Plug ................................................................................................10
6. V-belt ........................................................................................................11
7. Timing Belt ...............................................................................................12
8. Fuel Line ..................................................................................................14
9. Fuel Filter .................................................................................................15
10. Air Cleaner Element .................................................................................16
11. Cooling System ........................................................................................17
12. Engine Coolant .........................................................................................18
13. Clutch System ..........................................................................................19
14. Transmission Gear Oil .............................................................................20
15. Automatic Transmission Fluid ..................................................................21
16. CVTF ........................................................................................................22
17. Front & Rear Differential Gear Oil ............................................................23
18. Brake Line ................................................................................................24
19. Brake Fluid ...............................................................................................25
20. Disc Brake Pad and Disc .........................................................................26
21. Brake Lining and Drum ............................................................................27
22. Suspension ..............................................................................................28
23. Wheel Bearing ..........................................................................................31
24. Axle Boots & Joints ..................................................................................32
25. Tire Rotation .............................................................................................33
26. Steering System (Power Steering) ...........................................................34
27. A/C Filter ..................................................................................................36
General Description
1. General Description
A: GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Be sure to perform periodic maintenance in order to
maintain vehicle performance and find problems
before they occur.
PM-2
Schedule
2. Schedule
A: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 1
1. U.S.
• Other than U5 model
Maintenance interval
[Number of months or km (miles), whichever occurs first]
Months 3 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120
× 1,000 km 4.8 12 24 36 48 60 72 81.4 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 Remarks
× 1,000 miles 3 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120
1 Engine oil 3.6 L (R) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
2.5 L R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
2 Engine oil filter 3.6 L (R) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
2.5 L R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
3 Spark plug R R
4 Drive belt(s) I I I R
5 Camshaft drive belt I I I R
6 Fuel line (I) (I) (I) I Note 1.
7 Air cleaner element R R R R Note 2.
8 Cooling system I I I I
9 Engine coolant Replace after the first 11 years or 220,000 km (137,500 miles),
and every six years or 120,000 km (75,000 miles) thereafter
10 Clutch system I I I I I I I I
11 Transmission gear oil I I I I
12 ATF I I I I
13 CVTF I I I I
14 Front & rear differen- I I I I
tial gear oil
15 Brake line I I I I I I I I
16 Brake fluid R R R R
17 Disc brake pad and I I I I I I I I
disc
18 Parking brake I I I I I I I I
19 Suspension I I I I I I I I
20 Wheel bearing (I) (I)
21 Axle boots and joints I I I I I I I I
22 Tire rotation I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Note 3.
23 Steering system I I I I I I I I
(power steering)
24 A/C filter Replace every 15 months or 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
Symbols used:
R: Replace
I: Inspection
(R): Recommended service for maintaining the better vehicle performance
(I): Inspections recommended for vehicle safety
NOTE:
1. This inspection is not required to maintain emission warranty eligibility and it dose not affect the manufacturer’s obligations un-
der EPA’s in-use compliance program.
2. When the vehicle is used in extremely dusty conditions, the air cleaner element should be replaced more often.
3. A tire should be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. The indicators appear when
the remaining tread has been worn to 1.6 mm (0.063 in) or less.
PM-3
Schedule
• U5 model
Months 3 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 To be continued to the next
table.
Remarks
× 1,000 km 4.8 12 24 36 48 60 72 81.4 96 108 120
× 1,000 miles 3 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75
1 Engine oil 3.6 L (R) R R R R R R R R R R
2.5 L R R R R R R R R R R
2 Engine oil filter 3.6 L (R) R R R R R R R R R R
2.5 L R R R R R R R R R R
3 Spark plug R
4 Drive belt(s) I I
5 Camshaft drive belt I I
6 Fuel line (I) (I) Note 1.
7 Air cleaner element R R Note 2.
8 Cooling system I I
9 Engine coolant Replace after the first 11 years or 220,000 km (137,500 miles),
and every six years or 120,000 km (75,000 miles) thereafter
10 Clutch system I I I I I
11 Transmission gear oil I I
12 ATF I I
13 CVTF I I
14 Front & rear differen- I I
tial gear oil
15 Brake line I I I I I
16 Brake fluid R R
17 Disc brake pad and I I I I I
disc
18 Parking brake I I I I I
19 Suspension I I I I I
20 Wheel bearing (I)
21 Axle boots and joints I I I I I
22 Tire rotation I I I I I I I I I I Note 3.
23 Steering system I I I I I
(power steering)
Symbols used:
R: Replace
I: Inspection
NOTE:
PM-4
Schedule
Months Continued from previ- 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150
ous table
Remarks
× 1,000 km 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240
× 1,000 miles 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150
1 Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R
2 Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R
3 Spark plug R
4 Drive belt(s) I R I
5 Camshaft drive belt I R I
6 Fuel line (I) I (I) Note 1.
7 Air cleaner element R R R Note 2.
8 Cooling system I I I
9 Engine coolant Replace after the first 11 years or 220,000 km (137,500 miles), and every six years or
120,000 km (75,000 miles) thereafter
10 Clutch system I I I I
11 Transmission gear oil I I I
12 ATF I I I
13 CVTF I I I
14 Front & rear differen- I I I
tial gear oil
15 Brake line I I I I I
16 Brake fluid R R R
17 Disc brake pad and I I I I I
disc
18 Parking brake I I I I I
19 Suspension I I I I I
21 Axle boots and joints I I I I I
22 Tire rotation I I I I I I I I I I Note 3.
23 Steering system I I I I I
(power steering)
Symbols used:
R: Replace
I: Inspection
NOTE:
PM-5
Schedule
2. CANADA
Months 3 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120
× 1,000 km 4.8 12 24 36 48 60 72 81.4 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 Remarks
× 1,000 miles 3 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120
1 Engine oil 3.6 L (R) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
2.5 L R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
2 Engine oil filter 3.6 L (R) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
2.5 L R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
3 Spark plug R R
4 Drive belt(s) I I I R
5 Camshaft drive belt I I I R
6 Fuel line (I) (I) (I) I Note 1.
7 Air cleaner element R R R R Note 2.
8 Cooling system I I I I
9 Engine coolant Replace after the first 11 years or 220,000 km (137,500 miles), and every six years or
120,000 km (75,000 miles) thereafter
10 Clutch system I I I I I I I I
11 Transmission gear oil I I I I
12 ATF I I I I
13 CVTF I I I I
14 Front & rear differen- I I I I
tial gear oil
15 Brake line I I I I I I I I
16 Brake fluid R R R R
17 Disc brake pad and I I I I I I I I
disc
18 Parking brake I I I I I I I I
19 Suspension I I I I I I I I
21 Axle boots and joints I I I I I I I I
22 Tire rotation I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Note 3.
23 Steering system I I I I I I I I
(power steering)
Symbols used:
R: Replace
I: Inspection
NOTE:
1. This inspection is not required to maintain emission warranty eligibility and it dose not affect the manufacturer’s obligations under
EPA’s in-use compliance program.
3. A tire should be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. The indicators appear when the
remaining tread has been worn to 1.6 mm (0.063 in) or less.
PM-6
Schedule
B: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 2
Repeat Extremely Salt or other High humidity Repeat
Maintenance Repeat short
Item rough/muddy cold weather corrosive used or mountain towing
interval distance drive
road drive area or coastal area area trailer
Engine oil 3.75 months R R R
6,000 km
3,750 miles
Engine oil filter 3.75 months R R R
6,000 km
3,750 miles
Fuel line 7.5 months I
12,000 km
7,500 miles
Transmission gear oil 15 months R
24,000 km
15,000 miles
ATF 15 months R
24,000 km
15,000 miles
CVTF 40,000 km R
24,855 miles
Front and rear 15 months R
Differential Gear Oil 24,000 km
15,000 miles
Brake line 7.5 months I
12,000 km
7,500 miles
Brake fluid 15 months R
24,000 km
15,000 miles
Disc brake pad and 7.5 months I I I I
disc 12,000 km
7,500 miles
Parking brake 7.5 months I I I I
12,000 km
7,500 miles
Suspension 7.5 months I I I
12,000 km
7,500 miles
Axle boots and joints 7.5 months I I I I I
12,000 km
7,500 miles
Steering system 7.5 months I I I
(power steering) 12,000 km
7,500 miles
PM-7
Engine Oil
3. Engine Oil
A: INSPECTION
Refer to “LU” section for engine oil inspection.
<Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, INSPECTION, Engine Oil.>
<Ref. to LU(H6DO)-9, INSPECTION, Engine Oil.>
B: REPLACEMENT
Refer to “LU” section for engine oil replacement.
<Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, REPLACEMENT, Engine
Oil.> <Ref. to LU(H6DO)-9, REPLACEMENT, En-
gine Oil.>
PM-8
Engine Oil Filter

4. Engine Oil Filter

A: REPLACEMENT
Refer to “LU” section for engine oil filter replace-
ment. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-34, Engine Oil Filter.>
<Ref. to LU(H6DO)-15, Engine Oil Filter.>
PM-9
Spark Plug
5. Spark Plug
A: REPLACEMENT
Refer to “IG” section for spark plug replacement.
<Ref. to IG(H4SO)-3, Spark Plug.> <Ref. to
IG(H4DOTC)-4, Spark Plug.> <Ref. to IG(H6DO)-
4, Spark Plug.>
PM-10
V-belt
6. V-belt
A: INSPECTION
Refer to “ME” section for V-belt inspection. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-43, INSPECTION, V-belt.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-42, INSPECTION, V-belt.> <Ref. to
ME(H6DO)-49, INSPECTION, V-belt.>
B: REPLACEMENT
Refer to “ME” section for V-belt replacement. <Ref.
to ME(H4SO)-42, V-belt.> <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
41, V-belt.> <Ref. to ME(H6DO)-49, V-belt.>
PM-11
Timing Belt
7. Timing Belt 2. SOHC MODEL (OTHER INSPECTIONS)

1) Remove the front timing belt cover and timing
A: INSPECTION belt cover (LH).
1. SOHC MODEL (INSPECTION OF TIMING 2) While cranking engine at least four rotations,
BELT POSITION) check the timing belt back surface for cracks or
damage. Replace the faulty timing belt with new
1) Remove the timing belt cover (LH). part as needed.
2) Rotate the crank pulley to set #1 cylinder piston 3) When the side part of timing belt is abnormally
to top dead center of compression stroke and worn (fluff or jumping out of core) or damaged,
check the followings. check the idlers, tensioner, water pump pulley and
(1) Confirm that the arrow (A) of camshaft pul- cam sprocket to determine idler alignment (square-
ley LH points in an upward direction. ness). Replace the worn timing belt with new part.
4) Install the front timing belt cover and timing belt
cover (LH).
3. DOHC MODEL (INSPECTION OF TIMING
BELT POSITION)
(A)
1) Remove the timing belt cover (LH) and (RH).
2) Rotate the crank pulley to align single line mark
(A) on the intake camshaft pulley RH with notch (B)
on timing belt cover and check the followings.
PM-00531
(1) Confirm that the double line marks (C) on in-
take camshaft pulley RH and exhaust camshaft
(2) Remove the sealing rubber (B) of timing belt pulley RH are aligned.
cover RH. (2) Confirm that the single line mark (D) on ex-
(3) Confirm that the arrow (C) of camshaft pul- haust camshaft pulley RH and notch (E) on tim-
ley RH points in an upward direction. ing belt cover are aligned.
(B)
(B) (A)
(C)
(C)
(E)
(D)
PM-00532
PM-00533
3) If the camshaft pulley or timing belt position is (3) Confirm that the single line mark (A) on in-
not appropriate, check the faulty part and repair or take camshaft pulley LH and notch (B) on timing
replace as required. belt cover are aligned.
(4) Confirm that the double line marks (C) on in-
take camshaft pulley LH and exhaust camshaft
pulley LH are aligned.
PM-12
Timing Belt
(5) Confirm that the single line mark (D) on ex- B: REPLACEMENT
haust camshaft pulley LH and notch (E) on tim-
Refer to “ME” section for timing belt replacement.
ing belt cover are aligned.
<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-47, Timing Belt.> <Ref. to
(B)
ME(H4DOTC)-50, Timing Belt.>
(A)
(C)
(E)
(D)
PM-00534
3) If the camshaft pulley position is not appropriate,

check the faulty part and repair or replace as re-
quired.
4. DOHC MODEL (OTHER INSPECTIONS)
1) Remove the timing belt cover (LH).
2) While cranking engine at least four rotations,
check the timing belt back surface for cracks or
damage. Replace the faulty timing belt with new
part as needed.
3) When the side part of timing belt (arrow direction
shown in the figure) is abnormally worn (fluff or
jumping out of core) or damaged, check the idlers,
tensioner, water pump pulley and cam sprocket to
determine idler alignment (squareness). Replace
the worn timing belt with new part.
PM-00343
4) Install the timing belt cover (LH).
PM-13
Fuel Line
8. Fuel Line
A: INSPECTION
The fuel line is located mostly internally, so check
pipes, areas near pipes, and engine compartment
piping for rust, hose damage, loose band, etc. If
faulty parts are found, repair or replace them. <Ref.
to FU(H4DOTC)-93, INSPECTION, Fuel Delivery,
Return and Evaporation Lines.>
PM-14
Fuel Filter
9. Fuel Filter
A: REPLACEMENT
Refer to “FU” section for fuel filter replacement.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-66, Fuel Filter.> <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-85, Fuel Filter.> <Ref. to FU(H6DO)-
75, Fuel Filter.>
B: INSPECTION
Replace if the filter is clogged, or time for replace-
ment has come.
PM-15
Air Cleaner Element

10.Air Cleaner Element

A: REPLACEMENT
Refer to “IN” section for air cleaner element re-
placement. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-4, Air Cleaner Ele-
ment.> <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-7, Air Cleaner
Element.> <Ref. to IN(H6DO)-4, Air Cleaner Ele-
ment.>
PM-16
Cooling System
11.Cooling System
A: INSPECTION
1. RADIATOR
Refer to “CO” section for radiator inspection. <Ref.
to CO(H4SO)-21, INSPECTION, Radiator.> <Ref.
to CO(H4DOTC)-23, INSPECTION, Radiator.>
<Ref. to CO(H6DO)-19, INSPECTION, Radiator.>
2. RADIATOR CAP
Refer to “CO” section for radiator cap inspection.
<Ref. to CO(H4SO)-22, INSPECTION, Radiator
Cap.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-24, INSPECTION,
Radiator Cap.> <Ref. to CO(H6DO)-20, INSPEC-
TION, Radiator Cap.>
3. COOLING FAN
Check the radiator fan operates using Subaru Se-
lect Monitor, when the coolant temperature ex-
ceeds 98°C (208°F). If it does not operate, check
the radiator fan system. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-8, IN-
SPECTION, Radiator Fan System.> <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-8, INSPECTION, Radiator Fan Sys-
tem.> <Ref. to CO(H6DO)-9, INSPECTION, Radi-
ator Fan System.>
4. COOLING SYSTEM
Start the engine, and then inspect that it does not
overheat or it is not cooled excessively. If it over-
heats or it is cooled excessively, check the cooling
system.
PM-17
Engine Coolant
12.Engine Coolant
A: REPLACEMENT
Refer to “CO” section for engine coolant replace-
ment. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-13, REPLACEMENT,
Engine Coolant.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-14, RE-
PLACEMENT, Engine Coolant.> <Ref. to
CO(H6DO)-12, REPLACEMENT, Engine Cool-
ant.>
PM-18
Clutch System
13.Clutch System
A: INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Refer to “CL” section for inspection and adjustment
of clutch system. <Ref. to CL-29, INSPECTION,
Clutch Pedal.> <Ref. to CL-29, ADJUSTMENT,
Clutch Pedal.>
PM-19
Transmission Gear Oil

14.Transmission Gear Oil

A: INSPECTION
Refer to “6MT” section for transmission gear oil in-
spection. <Ref. to 6MT-24, INSPECTION, Trans-
mission Gear Oil.>
B: REPLACEMENT
Refer to “6MT” section for transmission gear oil re-
placement. <Ref. to 6MT-24, REPLACEMENT,
Transmission Gear Oil.>
PM-20
Automatic Transmission Fluid

15.Automatic Transmission Fluid

A: INSPECTION
Refer to “5AT” section for ATF inspection. <Ref. to
5AT-29, INSPECTION, Automatic Transmission
Fluid.>
B: REPLACEMENT
Refer to “5AT” section for ATF replacement. <Ref.
to 5AT-29, REPLACEMENT, Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid.>
PM-21
CVTF
16.CVTF
A: INSPECTION
Refer to “CVT” section for CVTF inspection. <Ref.
to CVT-37, INSPECTION, CVTF.>
B: REPLACEMENT
Refer to “CVT” section for CVTF replacement.
<Ref. to CVT-38, REPLACEMENT, CVTF.>
PM-22
Front & Rear Differential Gear Oil

17.Front & Rear Differential Gear

Oil
A: INSPECTION
1. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL (MT MODEL)
Front differential gear oil of MT model lubricates the
transmission and differential together. Refer to
“Transmission Gear Oil” for replacement proce-
dure. <Ref. to 6MT-24, INSPECTION, Transmis-
sion Gear Oil.>
2. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL (AT MODEL)
Refer to “5AT” section for inspection of AT model
front differential gear oil. <Ref. to 5AT-31, INSPEC-
TION, Differential Gear Oil.>
3. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL (CVT MODEL)
Refer to “CVT” section for inspection of CVT model
front differential gear oil. <Ref. to CVT-41, IN-
SPECTION, Differential Gear Oil.>
4. REAR DIFFERENTIAL
Refer to “DI” section for rear differential gear oil in-
spection. <Ref. to DI-23, INSPECTION, Differential
Gear Oil.>
B: REPLACEMENT
1. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL (MT MODEL)
Front differential gear oil of MT model lubricates the
transmission and differential together. Refer to
“6MT” section for replacement procedure. <Ref. to
6MT-24, REPLACEMENT, Transmission Gear
Oil.>
2. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL (AT MODEL)
Refer to “5AT” section for front differential gear oil
replacement. <Ref. to 5AT-31, REPLACEMENT,
Differential Gear Oil.>
3. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL (CVT MODEL)
Refer to “CVT” section for front differential gear oil
replacement. <Ref. to CVT-42, REPLACEMENT,
Differential Gear Oil.>
4. REAR DIFFERENTIAL
Refer to “DI” section for rear differential gear oil re-
placement. <Ref. to DI-23, REPLACEMENT, Dif-
ferential Gear Oil.>
PM-23
Brake Line
18.Brake Line 3. BRAKE SERVO SYSTEM

1) With the engine off, depress the brake pedal
A: INSPECTION several times applying the same pedal force.
1. BRAKE LINE Check that the travel distance should not change.
2) With the brake pedal depressed, start the en-
1) Check for scratches, swelling, corrosion, traces gine. Check that the pedal moves slightly toward
of fluid leakage on the brake hoses or pipe joints. the floor.
2) Make sure that brake pipes/hoses do not inter- 3) With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine
fere with adjacent parts and there is no loose con- and keep the pedal depressed for 30 seconds.
nector/clamp during driving. Check that the pedal height does not change.
3) Check any trace of fluid leakage, scratches, etc. 4) A check valve is built into the brake booster nip-
on master cylinder, wheel cylinder and hydraulic ple. Disconnect the vacuum hose to inspect func-
unit. tion of check valve.
NOTE: Check that check valve ventilates from booster side
• When the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank is to engine side. Also, check that there is no ventila-
lower than specified limit, the brake warning light tion from engine side to booster side.
on the combination meter will illuminate.
• Visually check the brake hose for damage. (Use
a mirror where it is difficult to see) (C) (A)
(3)
(2) (1) (D)
(B)
PM-00260
(A) Brake booster

PM-00465 (B) Check valve
(C) Engine side
(1) Front brake hose (D) Brake booster side
(2) Front brake pipe
(3) Clamp 5) Check the vacuum hose for cracks or other dam-
age.
CAUTION:
(3) (1) When installing the vacuum hose on the engine
and brake booster, do not use soapy water or
lubricating oil on their connections.
(2)
6) Check that the vacuum hose is securely tight-
ened.
PM-00466
(1) Brake pipe

(2) Rear brake hose
(3) Clamp
2. SERVICE BRAKE
Refer to “BR” section for foot brake inspection.
<Ref. to BR-58, INSPECTION, Brake Pedal.>
PM-24
Brake Fluid
19.Brake Fluid
A: INSPECTION
Refer to “BR” section for brake fluid inspection.
<Ref. to BR-49, INSPECTION, Brake Fluid.>
B: REPLACEMENT
Refer to “BR” section for brake fluid replacement.
<Ref. to BR-49, REPLACEMENT, Brake Fluid.>
PM-25
Disc Brake Pad and Disc

20.Disc Brake Pad and Disc

A: INSPECTION
Refer to “BR” section for disc brake pad and disc in-
spection. <Ref. to BR-15, INSPECTION, Front
Brake Pad.> <Ref. to BR-29, INSPECTION, Rear
Brake Pad.> <Ref. to BR-17, INSPECTION, Front
Disc Rotor.> <Ref. to BR-32, INSPECTION, Rear
Disc Rotor.>
PM-26
Brake Lining and Drum

21.Brake Lining and Drum

A: INSPECTION
Refer to “PB” section for brake lining inspection.
<Ref. to PB-14, INSPECTION, Parking Brake As-
sembly (Rear Disc Brake).>
B: ADJUSTMENT
Refer to “PB” section for brake lining adjustment.
<Ref. to PB-14, ADJUSTMENT, Parking Brake As-
sembly (Rear Disc Brake).>
PM-27
Suspension
22.Suspension
A: INSPECTION
(A)
1. FRONT SUSPENSION BALL JOINT
1) Lift up the vehicle until front wheels are off
ground.
2) Grasp the bottom of tire and move it in and out in
axial direction. If movement (B) is observed be-
tween the brake disc cover (A) and end of front arm
PM-00059
(D), ball joint (C) may be excessively worn.
(A) Dust boot
2. REAR SUSPENSION BALL JOINT

1) Lift up the vehicle until rear wheels are off
ground.
2) Grasp the bottom of tire and move it in and out in
axial direction.
(D) (A) 3) If movement is observed between the brake disc
(C)
(B) cover (A) and end of front lateral link (B), ball joint
PM-00258 may be excessively worn.
3) Next, grasp the end of front arm (C) and move it
up and down. If movement (A) between the hous-
ing (D) and front arm (C) boss is observed, ball joint
(B) may be excessively worn.
(D)
(A) (B)
PM-00548
(A)
4) Grasp the end of front lateral link (B) and move it
(C) up and down. If movement is observed between
(B)
the housing (C) and front lateral link (B) boss, ball
PM-00259 joint may be excessively worn.
4) If the relative movement is observed in the pre-
ceding two steps, remove and inspect the ball joint.
If the free play exceeds standard value, replace the (C)
ball joint. <Ref. to FS-31, Front Ball Joint.>
5) Damage of dust boot
Visually inspect the ball joint dust boot. Replace if
ball joint is damaged.
NOTE: (B)
When the front arm ball joint is removed or re-
placed, check the toe-in of front wheel. If it is not PM-00547
within the specified value, adjust the toe-in. <Ref. to 5) If the movement related to the previous two
FS-9, Wheel Alignment.> steps is observed, replace the front lateral link.
<Ref. to RS-22, Front Lateral Link.>
PM-28
Suspension
6) Damage of dust boot • Rear suspension bushing

Visually inspect the ball joint dust boot. Replace if
front lateral link is damaged.
7) Check upper arm ball joint in the same manner.
(A)
PM-00549
(A) Upper arm ball joint
3. FRONT, REAR SUSPENSION BUSHING

Apply pressure with tire lever etc, and inspect the
bushing for excessive wear or damage. Replace
the bushings if faulty.
• Front suspension bushing PM-00551
4. WHEEL ARCH HEIGHT

Refer to “FS” section for wheel arch height inspec-
tion. <Ref. to FS-10, WHEEL ARCH HEIGHT, IN-
SPECTION, Wheel Alignment.>
5. WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Measure and adjust the front and rear wheel align-
ment at a time. Refer to “FS” section for measure-
ment and adjustment of wheel alignment. <Ref. to
FS-9, INSPECTION, Wheel Alignment.>
6. OIL LEAKAGE OF STRUT AND SHOCK
ABSORBER
Visually inspect the front strut and rear shock ab-
sorber for oil leakage. Replace the front strut and
rear shock absorber if oil leaks excessively.
7. TIGHTNESS OF BOLTS AND NUTS
Check the bolts and nuts for looseness. Retighten
the bolts and nuts to specified torque. If the self-
PM-00550 locking nuts and bolts are removed, replace them
with new parts. <Ref. to FS-2, General Descrip-
tion.> <Ref. to RS-2, General Description.>
PM-29
Suspension
8. DAMAGE TO SUSPENSION PARTS

Check the following parts and the fastening portion
of the vehicle body for deformation or excessive
rusting which impairs the suspension. Thoroughly
remove the deposits of the lower spring seat of
strut where dust or mud are likely piled up. If nec-
essary, replace the damaged parts with new parts.
If minor rust formation, pitting, etc. are noted, re-
move the rust and take rust prevention measure.
• Front suspension
• Front arm
• Cradle
• STRUT
• Rear suspension
• Sub frame
• Front lateral link
• Rear lateral link
• Upper arm
• Trailing link
• Shock absorber
• In the area where salt is sprayed to melt snow on
a road in winter, check suspension parts for dam-
age caused by rust every 12 months after lapse of
60 months. Take rust prevention measures as re-
quired.
PM-30
Wheel Bearing
23.Wheel Bearing 6) While supporting rear drive shaft horizontally

with one hand, turn the hub with the other hand to
A: INSPECTION check for noise or binding.
If the hub is noisy or binds, replace the rear axle.
1. FRONT WHEEL BEARING
NOTE:
Inspect the condition of front wheel bearing grease.
1) Jack-up the front side of vehicle.
2) While holding the front wheel by hand, swing it in
and out to check bearing free play.
3) Loosen the wheel nuts, and remove the front
wheel.
4) If the bearing free play exists in step 2) above,
attach a dial gauge to the hub and measure axial PM-00173
play in axial direction.
Service limit:
Straight-ahead position within 0.05 mm
(0.0020 in)
5) Remove the bolts and self-locking nuts, and ex-
tract the front arm from front crossmember.
6) Remove the AAR of front drive shaft from trans-
mission. <Ref. to DS-15, Front Axle.>
7) While supporting the front drive shaft horizontal-
ly with one hand, turn the hub with the other hand to
check for noise or binding.
If the hub is noisy or binds, replace the front axle.
PM-00173
2. REAR WHEEL BEARING

1) Jack-up the rear side of vehicle.
2) While holding the rear wheel by hand, swing it in
and out to check bearing free play.
3) Loosen the wheel nuts, and remove the rear
wheel.
4) If the bearing free play exists in step 2) above,
attach a dial gauge to the hub and measure axial
play in axial direction.
Service limit:
Straight-ahead position within 0.05 mm
(0.0020 in)
5) Remove the DOJ of rear drive shaft from rear dif-
ferential. <Ref. to DS-56, Rear Drive Shaft.>
PM-31
Axle Boots & Joints

24.Axle Boots & Joints

A: INSPECTION
1. FRONT AND REAR AXLE BOOTS
Inspect the front axle boots (A) and rear axle boots
(B) for deformation, damage or failure. If faulty, re-
place with new part. <Ref. to DS-48, Front Drive
Shaft.> <Ref. to DS-56, Rear Drive Shaft.>
• Front
(A)
PM-00174
• REAR
(B)
PM-00175
2. PROPELLER SHAFT
Inspect the propeller shaft for damage or failure. If
faulty, replace with new part. <Ref. to DS-10, Pro-
peller Shaft.>
PM-32
Tire Rotation
25.Tire Rotation
A: INSPECTION
Refer to “WT” section for tire rotation procedures.
<Ref. to WT-4, TIRE ROTATION, INSPECTION,
Tire and Wheel.>
PM-33
Steering System (Power Steering)

26.Steering System (Power 2. STEERING SHAFT JOINT

Steering) When the steering wheel free play is excessive,
disconnect the universal joint of steering shaft and
A: INSPECTION check it for any play and yawing torque (at the point
of the crossing direction). Also inspect for any dam-
1. STEERING WHEEL age to sealing or worn serrations. If the joint is
1) Set the steering wheel in a straight-ahead posi- loose, retighten the mounting bolts to the specified
tion, and check the wheel spokes to make sure torque. <Ref. to PS-21, Universal Joint.>
they are correctly set in their specified positions.
Tightening torque:
2) Lightly turn the steering wheel to the left and 24 N·m (2.4 kgf-m, 17.4 ft-lb)
right to determine the point where front wheels start
to move. 3. GEARBOX
Measure the distance of the movement of steering 1) Set the steering wheel in the straight position,
wheel (periphery). then rotate it 90° in both the left and right directions.
Steering wheel free play: While steering wheel is being rotated, check the
0 — 17 mm (0 — 0.67 in) gearbox for looseness.
(1)
Tightening torque:
60 N·m (6.1 kgf-m, 44.3 ft-lb)
PM-00545
(1) Steering wheel free play

PS-01067
Move the steering wheel vertically toward the shaft 2) Check the boot for damage, cracks or deteriora-
to check if there is play in the direction. tion.
Play limit: 3) With the vehicle stopped on a level surface,
quickly turn the steering wheel to the left and right.
0.5 mm (0.020 in)
While steering wheel is being rotated, check the
3) Drive the vehicle and check the following items.
gear backlash. If any noise is noticed, adjust the
(1) Steering force:
gear backlash. <Ref. to PS-59, GEARBOX BACK-
The effort required for steering should be LASH ADJUSTMENT (SERVICING ON VEHI-
smooth and even at all points, and should not CLE), ADJUSTMENT, Steering Gearbox.>
vary.
(2) Pulled to one side: 4. TIE-ROD
Steering wheel should not be pulled to one side 1) Check the tie-rod and tie-rod ends for bends,
while driving on a level surface. scratches or other damage.
(3) Wheel runout:
Steering wheel should not show any sign of
runout.
(4) Return status:
Steering wheel should return to its original posi-
tion after it has been turned and then released.
(B)
(A)
PM-00394
(A) Tie-rod end

(B) Tie-rod
PM-34
Steering System (Power Steering)

2) Confirm that the connections of knuckle ball

joints for play, and then check for damage on dust
boots and free play of ball studs. If castle nut is
loose, retighten it to the specified torque, then tight-
en further up to a maximum of 60° until the cotter
pin hole is aligned.
Tightening torque:
27 N·m (2.75 kgf-m, 19.9 ft-lb)
3) Check the lock nut on the tie-rod end for tight-
ness. If it is loose, retighten it to the specified
torque.
Tightening torque:
85 N·m (8.7 kgf-m, 62.7 ft-lb)
5. GEARBOX BOOTS
Inspect both sides of the gearbox boot as follows,
and correct the defects if necessary.
1) The (A) and (B) positions of the gearbox boot are
fitted in (A) and (C) grooves of gearbox and the rod.
2) Clips are fitted outside of positions (A) and (B) of
boot.
3) Check that there is no cracks or holes in the
boot.
NOTE:
Rotate (B) position of gearbox boot against the tor-
sion produced by the adjustment of toe-in etc. Ap-
ply grease to the groove (C).
(C)
(B)
(A)
PM-00090
PM-35
A/C Filter
27.A/C Filter
A: REPLACEMENT
Refer to “AC” section for A/C filter replacement.
<Ref. to AC-83, REPLACEMENT, A/C Filter.>
PM-36
ENGINE 1 SECTION
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS) FU(H4SO)
EMISSION CONTROL
EC(H4SO)
(AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)
INTAKE (INDUCTION) IN(H4SO)
MECHANICAL ME(H4SO)
with the necessary information and data EXHAUST EX(H4SO)
of SUBARU vehicles.
COOLING CO(H4SO)
sembling, inspection and adjustment of LUBRICATION LU(H4SO)
Please peruse and utilize this manual SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS SP(H4SO)
their vehicle in optimum condition. IGNITION IG(H4SO)
SUBARU genuine parts. STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS SC(H4SO)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS) EN(H4SO)(diag)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION GD(H4SO)

approval.

FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)
FU(H4SO)
Page
2. Throttle Body ............................................................................................15
3. Intake Manifold .........................................................................................16
4. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor .......................................................23
5. Crankshaft Position Sensor ......................................................................24
6. Camshaft Position Sensor ........................................................................26
7. Knock Sensor ...........................................................................................28
8. Throttle Position Sensor ...........................................................................30
9. Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temperature Sensor .................................31
10. Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor .........................................................32
11. EGR Valve ...............................................................................................33
12. Fuel Injector .............................................................................................34
13. Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure Switch ...................................35
14. Oil Temperature Sensor ...........................................................................36
15. Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor ......................................................................37
16. Rear Oxygen Sensor ................................................................................39
17. Engine Control Module (ECM) .................................................................41
18. Main Relay ...............................................................................................42
19. Fuel Pump Relay ......................................................................................44
20. Electronic Throttle Control Relay .............................................................46
21. Fuel ..........................................................................................................48
22. Fuel Tank .................................................................................................50
23. Fuel Filler Pipe .........................................................................................57
24. Fuel Pump ................................................................................................60
25. Fuel Level Sensor ....................................................................................62
26. Fuel Sub Level Sensor .............................................................................64
27. Fuel Filter .................................................................................................66
28. Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines .......................................................68
29. Fuel System Trouble in General ..............................................................74
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Capacity 70 2 (18.5 US gal, 15.4 Imp gal)
Fuel tank
Location Under rear seat
Type Impeller
Shutoff discharge pressure 677 kPa (6.9 kgf/cm2, 98.2 psi) or less
Fuel pump
105 2 (27.7 US gal, 23.1 Imp gal)
Discharge rate
[12 V at 300 kPa (3.06 kgf/cm2, 43.5 psi)]
Fuel filter In-tank type
FU(H4SO)-2
General Description
B: COMPONENT
1. INTAKE MANIFOLD
T3 T3
(3)
(4)
T2
T1
(8) (7)
(5)
(11)
(12)
(13) T2
(1)
(14)
(9)
(6)
(10)
(13)
(14)
(9)
(10)
(2)
(2)
FU-05594
FU(H4SO)-3
General Description
(1) Intake manifold (8) Fuel delivery pipe (14) Rubber

(2) Gasket (9) Injector
(3) Intake manifold protector RH (10) Seal ring Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Intake manifold protector LH (11) Cap T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(5) Fuel gallery RH (12) Clip T2: 19 (1.9, 14.0)
(6) Fuel gallery LH (13) O-ring T3: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(7) Fuel pipe
FU(H4SO)-4
General Description
2. AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
(1) T3
(12)
T2
(13) (26)
(17) (18)
(14) T1 T2
(14)
(25) (24)
(15) (4) A
(2) T2
(5)
(16) (3)
(18) (28)
T2
(18)
A
(6) A (30)
(29)
(19)
(8)
(10)
T4 (18)
(11)
(21)
T2
(7)
(10)
(20)
(22)
(27) (9) T2
(23)
T4
FU-05595
(1) Throttle body (14) Clip (26) Bracket

(2) Gasket (15) PCV hose E (27) Engine harness
(3) Multi-function duct (16) Clip (28) Purge control solenoid valve (U5
model)
(4) Manifold absolute pressure sensor (17) Heater hose A (29) Evaporation hose B
(5) O-ring (18) Clip (30) Evaporation hose C
(6) Gasket (19) Heater hose B
(7) PCV pipe (20) EGR valve Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(8) PCV hose A (21) Gasket T1: 2 (0.2, 1.5)
(9) PCV hose B (22) Gasket T2: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(10) Clip (23) EGR pipe adapter T3: 8 (0.8, 5.9)
(11) PCV hose C (24) Evaporation hose A T4: 19 (1.9, 14.0)
(12) PCV hose D (25) Purge control solenoid valve
(Other than U5 model)
(13) PCV valve
FU(H4SO)-5
General Description
3. CRANKSHAFT POSITION, CAMSHAFT POSITION AND KNOCK SENSORS
T1
(1) T2
(2)
T1
(3)
(4) T1
FU-04926
(1) Crankshaft position sensor (3) Camshaft position sensor Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Knock sensor (4) Camshaft position sensor support T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
T2: 24 (2.4, 17.7)
FU(H4SO)-6
General Description
4. FUEL TANK
(23)
T1
(8)
T1
T1
(7)
(14)
A B
(9) (24) (24)
(12)
(25) (25)
(10)
(1)
C (11)
(25)
(27)
(25)
(26)
(24)
(15)
(13)
T4
(2)
(25) B
(3)
T4 A
(16)
(17) (16)
T4
(6)
(16)
T3
C
T3
T3 (4)
(18)
(5) (16)
(19)
(20)
(21) (22)
T2 (22)
T3 T2
(22) (22)
T2 T3
T2
FU-05596
FU(H4SO)-7
General Description
(1) Fuel tank (12) Fuel sub level sensor upper plate (23) Rubber cap
(2) Fuel tank band RH (13) Fuel sub level sensor gasket (24) Cushion
(3) Fuel tank band LH (14) Fuel sub level sensor protector (25) Cushion
(4) Fuel delivery tube (15) Fuel sub level sensor filter (26) Cushion
(5) Tube clamp (16) Retainer (27) Cushion
(6) Fuel sub delivery tube (17) Stopper
(7) Fuel pump ASSY (18) Heat shield cover Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(8) Fuel pump upper plate (19) Fuel tank protector RH T1: 4.4 (0.4, 3.2)
(9) Fuel pump gasket (20) Fuel tank protector LH T2: 9 (0.9, 6.6)
(10) Fuel sub level sensor upper plate (21) Clip T3: 18 (1.8, 13.3)
cushion
(11) Fuel sub level sensor (22) Self-locking nut T4: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
FU(H4SO)-8
General Description
5. FUEL LINE
(20)
(13)
(23)
T3 (22)
(1) (19)
(15) F
G
(28) (1) F (17)
T2 G (21)
(1) (18)
(27) (24)
F
(30) H
I
(1) T5
(25) (14)
(29) H
T1 (16)
(26) F
(1)
I
(1) (12)
(10) (11)
C (1)
(1)
T3 T3
(9)
(4)
(1)
C
(1)
(2)
(8)
(1)
A
(1) (3)
B (7)
A
B
(5)
T4 (6)
FU-05597
FU(H4SO)-9
General Description
(1) Clip (14) Air vent tube (26) Clamp

(2) Fuel delivery hose (15) Circulate hose (27) Pressure hose
(3) Evaporation hose (16) Vent tube (28) Fuel tank pressure sensor
(4) Connect check cover (17) Drain valve (29) Fuel tank pressure sensor bracket
(5) Fuel damper holder (18) Canister (30) Vacuum hose
(6) Damper bracket (19) Drain filter
(7) Fuel pipe ASSY (20) Canister protector Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(8) Purge hose A (21) Charge tube T1: 2 (0.2, 1.5)
(9) Purge pipe (22) Canister drain tube T2: 2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
(10) Purge hose B (23) Drain tube ASSY T3: 7.35 (0.7, 5.4)
(11) Connector (24) Clamp T4: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(12) Air vent hose A (25) Fuel filler hose T5: 8 (0.8, 5.9)
(13) Circulate tube
FU(H4SO)-10
General Description
6. FUEL FILLER PIPE
(3)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(10) (6)
(11) T3
(10)
(12) (7)
(14)
(13) T3
(8) T2
T1
(8)
(9)
(15)
T3
FU-05061
(1) Fuel filler cap (8) Fuel filler pipe bracket B (15) Grommet
(2) Fuel filler pipe protector (9) Fuel filler pipe bracket C
(3) Clip (10) Clip Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Neck holder A (11) Evaporation hose T1: 1 (0.1, 0.7)
(5) Neck holder B (12) Grommet T2: 7.35 (0.7, 5.4)
(6) Fuel filler pipe (13) Evaporation pipe T3: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(7) Fuel filler pipe bracket A (14) Evaporation pipe protector
FU(H4SO)-11
General Description
7. FUEL PUMP
(1)
(3)
B
A
(4)
(2)
(5) (2)
(6)
(7)
(11)
(10)
(8)
(11)
(9)
FU-08400
(1) Fuel filter assembly (5) Fuel pump (9) Fuel level sensor (model with fuel
level sensor bent in 3 locations)
(2) Pump module spring (6) Support rubber cushion (10) Fuel level sensor (model with fuel
(3) Fuel pump harness (7) Fuel pump holder (11) Fuel temperature sensor
(4) Gasket spacer (8) Fuel chamber ASSY
FU(H4SO)-12
General Description
C: CAUTION
• Wear appropriate work clothing, including a cap,
protective goggles and protective shoes when per-
forming any work.
• Remove contamination including dirt and corro-
sion before removal, installation or disassembly.
• Keep the disassembled parts in order and pro-
tect them from dust and dirt.
• Before removal, installation or disassembly, be
sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary re-
moval, installation, disassembly and replacement.
• Vehicle components are extremely hot after driv-
ing. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts.
• Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and
nuts to the specified torque.
• Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified
points.
• Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or
units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from
battery.
• Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the work-
ing area.
be spilled. If the oil spills, wipe it off immediately to
prevent from penetrating into floor or flowing out for
environmental protection.
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing fuel.
FU(H4SO)-13
General Description
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for draining fuel and each inspection.
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
18471AA000 FUEL PIPE Used for draining fuel.
ADAPTER
ST18471AA000
42099AE000 QUICK CONNEC- Used for removing the quick connector.
TOR RELEASE
ST42099AE000
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance and voltage.
Oscilloscope Used for inspecting the waveform of each sensor.
FU(H4SO)-14
Throttle Body
2. Throttle Body
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.
FU-04956
(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
IG-02107 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
2) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Boot.>
3) Disconnect the throttle position sensor connec-
tor (A).
4) Remove the bolts (B) which secure the throttle V
body to the multi-function duct assembly, and re- FU-04049
move the throttle body.
(A) To ECM connector
Throttle Accelerator
Terminal No. Standard
(B) (B) sensor pedal
Not
Main 18 (+) and 29 (–) Approx. 0.9 V
depressed
Not
Sub 28 (+) and 29 (–) Approx. 1.7 V
(A) depressed
5) After inspection, install the related parts in the

FU-06490
reverse order of removal.
B: INSTALLATION 2. THROTTLE SENSOR (METHOD WITH
Install in the reverse order of removal. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR)
NOTE: 1) Warm up the engine.
Use a new gasket. 2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF)
3) Read the throttle opening angle signal and volt-
Tightening torque: age of throttle sensor using Subaru Select Monitor.
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb) <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, READ CURRENT
C: INSPECTION DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE), OPERA-
TION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
1. THROTTLE SENSOR (METHOD WITH
Throttle opening
CIRCUIT TESTER) Throttle sensor
angle signal
Standard
1) Warm up the engine. Main 5% Approx. 0.9 V
2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI- Sub 5% Approx. 1.7 V
65, REMOVAL, Glove Box.>
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF) 3. OTHER INSPECTIONS
4) Measure the voltage between ECM connector
1) Check that the throttle body has no deformation,
terminals.
cracks or other damages.
2) Check that the engine coolant hose has no
cracks, damage or loose part.
FU(H4SO)-15
Intake Manifold
3. Intake Manifold 8) Remove the connector (A) from the fuel injector,
and remove the fuel delivery pipe (B) from the fuel
A: REMOVAL gallery RH.
1. INTAKE MANIFOLD NOTE:
Disconnect the quick connector as shown in the fig-
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
ure.
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE-
DURE, Fuel.>
(a)
(a)
IG-02107
3) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler
cap.
4) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to
5) Disconnect the connector (A) from the ignition
coil of #3 cylinder.
6) Disconnect the PCV hose (B) from the rocker
cover RH.
FU-05483
(a) Slider
(A) (B)
(B)
(A) (A)
FU-04845
7) Remove the intake manifold protector RH.

FU-05097
9) Disconnect the fuel delivery hose (A) and evap-

oration hose (B).
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to spill fuel.
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a container
or cloth.
(1) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push
FU-04846 ST in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect
the quick connector of the fuel delivery hose
(A).
ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RE-
LEASE
FU(H4SO)-16
Intake Manifold
(2) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapo- 16) Remove the connector (A) from the fuel injec-
ration hose (B) from the pipe. tor, and remove the fuel delivery pipe (B) from the
fuel gallery LH.
(A)
NOTE:
ST
ure.
(B) (a)
FU-04950
10) Remove the generator cable clip (A) from the

intake manifold protector LH.
11) Remove the oil filler pipe (B) from the rocker (a)
cover LH.
12) Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose
(C).
(C)
(A)
(B)
FU-05483
FU-05098
(a) Slider
13) Disconnect the connector (A) from the ignition
14) Disconnect the PCV hose (B) from the rocker (B)
cover LH.
(A) (A)
FU-05100
(A)
(B) 17) Remove the clip (A) securing the engine har-
ness to the intake manifold, and remove the bolt (B)
FU-04850
securing the LH side of the multifunction duct as-
15) Remove the intake manifold protector LH. sembly.
(A)
(B)
FU-05099 FU-04853
FU(H4SO)-17
Intake Manifold
18) Remove the bolts (A) which secure the RH side 2. MULTI-FUNCTION DUCT ASSEMBLY
of multi-function duct assembly to the intake mani- 1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
fold. 48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE-
19) Remove the cap (B) from the intake manifold. DURE, Fuel.>
(A)
(B)
FU-05701
20) Remove the intake manifold from cylinder IG-02107

head. 3) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler
21) Remove the fuel gallery RH and fuel injector cap.
from the intake manifold. 4) Lift up the vehicle.
5) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE-
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.>
6) Drain approximately 3.0 2 (3.2 US qt, 2.6 Imp
qt) of coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-13, DRAINING
OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACEMENT, Engine
Coolant.>
7) Lower the vehicle.
8) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-16, INTAKE MANIFOLD, REMOVAL,
FU-04860 Intake Manifold.>
9) Remove the bolt, and disconnect the bulkhead
22) Remove the fuel gallery LH, fuel pipe and fuel
harness connector from the engine harness con-
injector from the intake manifold.
nector and rear engine hanger.
FU-05102
FU-03924
10) Slide the engine harness connector in the di-

rection of the arrow and remove it from the rear en-
gine hanger.
FU-05247
FU(H4SO)-18
Intake Manifold
11) Disconnect the connector from the knock sen- 15) Disconnect the connectors from front oxygen
sor. (A/F) sensor (A) and rear oxygen sensor (B).
16) Disconnect the connector (C) from the ignition
17) Disconnect the connectors from oil switching
solenoid valve RH (D), oil temperature sensor RH
(E) and variable valve lift diagnosis switch (F), and
remove the bolt to detach the ground terminal (G).
(G)
(F) (A)
FU-05458
(E)
12) Disconnect the water hose (A) and EGR pipe
(B) from the LH side of multi-function duct assem- (D)
bly.
(B)
(A) (C) FU-05103
18) Slide the front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector

(B)
and rear oxygen sensor connector in the direction
of the arrow and remove them from the bracket.
FU-04855
13) Disconnect the PCV hose (A) and water hose

(B) from the RH side of multi-function duct assem-
bly.
FU-04857
19) Disconnect the connector from the ignition coil

(A) of #4 cylinder.
(B) 20) Disconnect the connectors from the oil switch-
ing solenoid valve LH (A) and camshaft position
sensor LH (B).
(A)
FU-04880
14) Disconnect the connectors from the engine

coolant temperature sensor (A), oil pressure switch
(B) and crankshaft position sensor (C).
(B)
(A)
(B) FU-04858
(C)
FU-04962
FU(H4SO)-19
Intake Manifold
21) Remove the PCV pipe, multi-function duct as-

sembly and engine harness as a single unit from
the engine.
(a)
FU-04859
22) Remove the bolt (A) securing the multi-function

duct assembly to the PCV pipe, and remove the
multi-function duct assembly.
(a)
23) Remove the clip (B) securing the engine har-
ness to the PCV pipe, and remove the engine har-
ness.
FU-05484
(A)
(A)
(a) Slider
NOTE:
• Use a new gasket.
• If fuel hoses or clamps are damaged, replace
(B) them with new parts.
FU-04881
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
B: INSTALLATION T2: 19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
1. INTAKE MANIFOLD
T1
Install in the reverse order of removal while being
careful of the following.
• Connect the quick connector as shown in the fig-
ure.
CAUTION:
• Check that there is no damage or dust on the T2 T2
quick connector. If necessary, clean the seal
surface of the pipe. FU-05104
• When connecting the quick connector, make
sure to insert the pipe all the way in before lock-
ing the slider.
• When it is difficult to lock the slider, check
that the pipe is fully inserted.
• Make sure that the quick connector is secure-
ly connected.
T2 T2
FU-04884
FU(H4SO)-20
Intake Manifold
Tightening torque: Tightening torque:

6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-04927 FU-05107
2. MULTI-FUNCTION DUCT ASSEMBLY

Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
• The oil pressure switch harness must be posi-
tioned to be within the range of a 45° angle on ei-
ther left or right toward the rear of the vehicle.
Tightening torque:
FU-05106 1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf-m, 1.1 ft-lb)
Tightening torque:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
45
(a)
45
FU-05471
(a) Front side of vehicle

FU-04846
FU-05099
FU(H4SO)-21
Intake Manifold
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-04931
FU-04933
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-04932
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the intake manifold and fuel pipe
have no deformation, cracks and other damages.
2) Check that the hose has no cracks, damage or
loose part.
FU(H4SO)-22
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

4. Engine Coolant Temperature

Sensor
A: REMOVAL
(A)
(B)
(C)
IG-02107
2) Remove the generator. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-16,

REMOVAL, Generator.>
3) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-13,
DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
MENT, Engine Coolant.> FU-04053
4) Disconnect the connector from the engine cool-
ant temperature sensor, and remove the engine (A) Thermometer
coolant temperature sensor. (B) Engine coolant temperature sensor
(C) Hexagonal part height: To approx.1/3
3) Raise water temperature gradually, measure the

resistance between the engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor terminals when the temperature is
20°C (68°F) and 80°C (176°F).
NOTE:
Agitate the water for even temperature distribution.
FU-04973
B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. 2 1
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
EC-02428
C: INSPECTION
Water temperature Terminal No. Standard
1) Check that the engine coolant temperature sen-
sor has no deformation, cracks or other damages. 20°C (68°F) 2.45+0.14 –0.13 kΩ
1 and 2
2) Immerse the engine coolant temperature sensor 80°C (176°F) 0.318±0.008 kΩ
and a thermometer in water.
CAUTION:
Take care not to allow water to get into the en-
gine coolant temperature sensor connector.
Completely remove any water inside.
FU(H4SO)-23
Crankshaft Position Sensor

5. Crankshaft Position Sensor C: INSPECTION

A: REMOVAL 1. CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. (METHOD WITH CIRCUIT TESTER)
Measure the resistance between crankshaft posi-
tion sensor terminals.
2 1
IG-02107
2) Remove the bolt which secures crankshaft posi-

EC-02428
tion sensor to oil pump.
1 and 2 2.04±0.204 kΩ
2. CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

(METHOD WITH OSCILLOSCOPE)
1) Prepare an oscilloscope.
2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI-
3) Connect the probe to ECM connector.
FU-04974
3) Remove the crankshaft position sensor, and discon-

nect the connector from the crankshaft position sensor.
FU-04956
(A)
FU-04975 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
B: INSTALLATION 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
31 30 29 28 27 26
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-04758
Terminal No. Probe

17 +
25 –
FU-04974 4) Start the engine and let it idle.
FU(H4SO)-24

5) Check the pattern is the same as the waveform

and voltage shown below.
10ms
5V
(A)
FU-04057
(A) One crankshaft rotation

3. OTHER INSPECTIONS
Check that the crankshaft position sensor has no
deformation, cracks or other damages.
FU(H4SO)-25
Camshaft Position Sensor

6. Camshaft Position Sensor 6) Remove the camshaft position sensor and the
camshaft position sensor support as a unit.
A: REMOVAL NOTE:
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. Slide in the arrowed direction until the camshaft po-
sition sensor contacts the rocker cover LH.
IG-02107
2) Disconnect the connector from camshaft posi- FU-05132
tion sensor. 7) Remove the camshaft position sensor from the

camshaft position sensor support.
FU-04890
3) Remove the ignition coil. (LH side only) <Ref. to FU-00179

IG(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Ignition Coil.> B: INSTALLATION
4) Remove the bolt which secures camshaft posi-
tion sensor to camshaft position sensor support. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Tightening torque:
Camshaft position sensor support
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
Camshaft position sensor
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-02724
5) Remove the bolt which secures camshaft posi-

tion sensor support to camshaft cap LH.
FU-02725
FU(H4SO)-26

C: INSPECTION 2. OTHER INSPECTIONS

Check that the camshaft position sensor has no de-
1. CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (METH- formation, cracks or other damages.
OD WITH OSCILLOSCOPE)
FU-04956
(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
31 30 29 28 27 26
FU-04934
Terminal No. Probe

24 +
30 –
4) Start the engine and let it idle.

5) Check the pattern is the same as the waveform
and voltage shown below.
LH
0
(A)
RH
0
(A) 5V
40ms
FU-04209
(A) One camshaft rotation

FU(H4SO)-27
Knock Sensor
7. Knock Sensor B: INSTALLATION

1) Install the knock sensor to the cylinder block.
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. NOTE:
The portion of the knock sensor cord that is pulled
out must be positioned at a 60° angle relative to the
engine rear.
Tightening torque:
24 N·m (2.4 kgf-m, 17.7 ft-lb)
(A)
IG-02107

60
3) Disconnect the knock sensor connector.
FU-02727
(A) Front side of vehicle
2) Connect the knock sensor connector.
FU-04698
4) Remove the knock sensor from cylinder block.
FU-04698
3) Install the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to

IN(H4SO)-8, INSTALLATION, Air Intake Boot.>
4) Connect the ground cable to battery.
FU-02726
IG-02107
FU(H4SO)-28
Knock Sensor
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the knock sensor has no deforma-
tion, cracks or other damages.
2) Measure the resistance between knock sensor
terminals.
2 1
EC-02426

1 and 2 560±28 kΩ
FU(H4SO)-29
Throttle Position Sensor

8. Throttle Position Sensor

A: SPECIFICATION
Throttle body is a non-disassembled part, so do not
remove the throttle position sensor from throttle
body.
Refer to “Throttle Body” for removal and installation
procedure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-15, REMOVAL,
Throttle Body.> <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-15, INSTAL-
LATION, Throttle Body.>
FU(H4SO)-30
Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temperature Sensor

9. Mass Air Flow and Intake Air 2) Check the voltage changes when air is blown to
the mass air flow sensor unit in arrow direction.
Temperature Sensor
A: REMOVAL
FU-04063
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE

SENSOR UNIT
IG-02107 Measure the resistance between intake air temper-
2) Disconnect the connector from the mass air flow ature sensor terminals.
and intake air temperature sensor, and remove the
mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor.
5 4 3 2 1
FU-04064
FU-04699
Temperature Terminal No. Standard
–20°C (–4°F) 16.0±2.4 kΩ
B: INSTALLATION 20°C (68°F) 1 and 2 2.45±0.24 kΩ
Install in the reverse order of removal. 60°C (140°F) 0.58±0.087 kΩ
Tightening torque:
1 N·m (0.1 kgf-m, 0.7 ft-lb)
1) Check that the mass air flow and intake air tem-
C: INSPECTION perature sensor has no deformation, cracks or oth-
er damages.
1. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR UNIT
2) Check that the mass air flow and intake air tem-
1) Connect the terminal No. 3 to the battery positive perature sensor has no dirt.
terminal and the terminal No. 4 to the battery
ground terminal, the circuit tester positive terminal
to terminal No. 5 and the circuit tester ground termi-
nal to terminal No. 4.
5 4 3 2 1
V
FU-04062
FU(H4SO)-31
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor

10.Manifold Absolute Pressure

Sensor
A: REMOVAL
3 2 1
IG-02107
2) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to 1.5V 1.5V 1.5V
3) Disconnect the connector from the manifold ab- 4.8 5.2V
solute pressure sensor and remove the manifold
absolute pressure sensor from throttle body. FU-04491
3) Connect the Mighty Vac to the pressure port (A)

of manifold absolute pressure sensor.
FU-04700
B: INSTALLATION (A)
Install in the reverse order of removal. FU-04492
NOTE: 4) Check the voltage when generating vacuum and

Use new O-rings. positive pressure using Mighty Vac.
CAUTION:
Tightening torque:
Do not apply vacuum of less than –88 kPa (–0.9
2 N·m (0.2 kgf-m, 1.5 ft-lb)
kgf/cm2, –12.8 psi). Doing so may damage the
C: INSPECTION manifold absolute pressure sensor.
1) Check that the manifold absolute pressure sen- NOTE:
sor has no deformation, cracks or other damages. When vacuum occurs at the pressure port of man-
2) Connect dry-cell battery positive terminal to ter- ifold absolute pressure sensor, the voltage will drop
minal No. 3 and dry-cell battery ground terminal to from the value as in step 3). When positive pres-
terminal No. 2, circuit tester ground terminal to ter- sure occurs, on the other hand, the voltage will rise.
minal No. 2 and the circuit tester positive terminal
Pressure Terminal No. Standard
to terminal No. 1.
–88 kPa (–0.9 kgf/cm2, Approx. 1 V
NOTE: –12.8 psi) (when 25°C (77°F))
• Use new dry-cell batteries. –35 kPa (–0.4 kgf/cm 2,
Approx. 2.6 V
2 (+) and 1 (–)
• Using circuit tester, check the voltage of a single –5.1 psi) (when 25°C (77°F))
dry-cell battery is 1.6 V or more. And also check the 19 kPa (–0.2 kgf/cm2, Approx. 4.2 V
voltage of three batteries in series is between 4.8 V 2.8 psi) (when 25°C (77°F))
and 5.2 V.
FU(H4SO)-32
EGR Valve
11.EGR Valve C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the EGR valve has no deformation,
A: REMOVAL cracks or other damages.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 2) Measure the resistance between EGR valve ter-
minals.
3 2 1
6 5 4
IG-02107
2) Remove the multi-function duct assembly. <Ref. FU-04101

to FU(H4SO)-18, MULTI-FUNCTION DUCT AS-
SEMBLY, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.>
3) Remove the EGR valve from the multi-function 2 and 1 22±2 Ω
duct assembly. 2 and 3 22±2 Ω
5 and 4 22±2 Ω
5 and 6 22±2 Ω
FU-04701
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU(H4SO)-33
Fuel Injector
12.Fuel Injector B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)- NOTE:
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- Use new O-rings, rubbers and seal rings.
DURE, Fuel.> Tightening torque:
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
IG-02107 FU-04860
3) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler C: INSPECTION
cap.
4) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to 1) Check that the fuel injector has no deformation,
FU(H4SO)-16, INTAKE MANIFOLD, REMOVAL, cracks or other damages.
Intake Manifold.> 2) Measure the resistance between fuel injector
5) Remove the bolts securing the fuel gallery to in- terminals.
take manifold.
2 1
EC-02428
FU-04860
6) Remove the fuel injector while lifting up the fuel Approx. 12.0 Ω
gallery. 1 and 2
(when 20°C (68°F))
FU-05133
FU(H4SO)-34
Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure Switch

13.Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis

Oil Pressure Switch
A: REMOVAL
IG-02107

3) Disconnect the connector from the variable
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch.
4) Remove the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres-
sure switch.
FU-05108
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Apply liquid gasket to the variable valve lift diagno-
sis oil pressure switch threads.
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
equivalent
Tightening torque:
17 N·m (1.7 kgf-m, 12.5 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the variable valve lift diagnosis oil
pressure switch does not have deformation, cracks
or damage.
2) Check the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres-
sure switch installation portion for oil leakage and
oil seepage.
FU(H4SO)-35
Oil Temperature Sensor

14.Oil Temperature Sensor C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the oil temperature sensor has no de-
A: REMOVAL formation, cracks or other damages.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 2) Check the resistance between the oil tempera-
ture sensor terminals.
2 1
IG-02107
2) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to EC-02428

3) Disconnect the connector from oil temperature
sensor. 2.45±0.2
1 and 2
(when 20°C (68°F))
4) Remove the oil temperature sensor.
FU-04888
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Apply liquid gasket to the oil temperature sensor
threads.
Liquid gasket:
equivalent
Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
FU-04888
FU(H4SO)-36
Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor

15.Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor

A: REMOVAL (B)
(A)
FU-02735
(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor

(B) Rear oxygen sensor
IG-02107
B: INSTALLATION
2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-
9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> CAUTION:
3) Disconnect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor con- If lubricant is spilt onto the exhaust pipe, wipe it
nector, and remove the clip holding the front oxy- off completely with cloth to avoid emission of
gen (A/F) sensor harness. smoke or causing a fire.
1) Before installing front oxygen (A/F) sensor, ap-
ply anti-seize compound only to the threaded por-
tion of front oxygen (A/F) sensor to make the next
(B) removal easier.
(A)
CAUTION:
Never apply anti-seize compound to the protec-
tor of front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
Anti-seize compound:
NEVER-SEEZ NSN, JET LUBE SS-30 or
(C)
FU-04697 equivalent
2) Install the front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector
(B) Rear oxygen sensor connector Tightening torque:
(C) Clip
21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.5 ft-lb)
4) Lift up the vehicle.

5) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- (B)
6) Apply spray-type lubricant to the threaded por-
tion of front oxygen (A/F) sensor, and leave it for
one minute or more.
7) Remove the front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
(A)
CAUTION:
When removing the front oxygen (A/F) sensor, FU-02735
wait until exhaust pipe cools, otherwise it will
damage the exhaust pipe.
FU(H4SO)-37

3) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL-

LATION, Front Under Cover.>
5) Connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor connec-
tor, and secure the front oxygen (A/F) sensor har-
ness by using the clip.
(B)
(A)
(C)
FU-04697

(B) Rear oxygen sensor connector
(C) Clip
6) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-9,

INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.>
7) Connect the battery ground terminal.
IG-02107
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the front oxygen (A/F) sensor has no
2) Measure the resistance between front oxygen
(A/F) sensor terminals.
1 2
3 4
FU-04937

2.4±0.24 Ω
3 and 4
(when 20°C (68°F))
FU(H4SO)-38
Rear Oxygen Sensor

16.Rear Oxygen Sensor

A: REMOVAL (B)
(A)
FU-02735

IG-02107
B: INSTALLATION
9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> CAUTION:
3) Disconnect the rear oxygen sensor connector, If lubricant is spilt onto the exhaust pipe, wipe it
and remove the clip holding the rear oxygen sensor off completely with cloth to avoid emission of
harness. smoke or causing a fire.
1) Before installing rear oxygen sensor, apply the
anti-seize compound only to the threaded portion of
rear oxygen sensor to make the next removal eas-
(B) ier.
(A)
CAUTION:
tor of rear oxygen sensor.
(C)
FU-04697 equivalent
2) Install the rear oxygen sensor.
(B) Rear oxygen sensor connector Tightening torque:
(C) Clip
21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.5 ft-lb)

5) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- (B)
6) Apply spray-type lubricant to the threaded por-
tion of rear oxygen sensor, and leave it for one
minute or more.
7) Remove the rear oxygen sensor.
(A)
CAUTION:
When removing the rear oxygen sensor, wait FU-02735
until exhaust pipe cools, otherwise it will dam-
age the exhaust pipe.
FU(H4SO)-39
Rear Oxygen Sensor


5) Connect the rear oxygen sensor connector, and
hold the rear oxygen sensor harness with the clip.
(B)
(A)
(C)
FU-04697

(B) Rear oxygen sensor connector
(C) Clip

IG-02107
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the rear oxygen sensor has no defor-
mation, cracks or other damages.
2) Measure the resistance between rear oxygen
sensor terminals.
2 1
4 3
FU-04073

5.6+1.7 –0.6 Ω
1 and 2
(when 20°C (68°F))
FU(H4SO)-40
Engine Control Module (ECM)

17.Engine Control Module (ECM) B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. CAUTION:
• When the ECM of model with immobilizer has
been replaced, be sure to perform the registra-
tion of immobilizer system. (Refer to “PC appli-
cation help for Subaru Select Monitor”.)
• If replacing ECM or the bracket, replace both
parts with new parts at a time.
• After installing the bracket to ECM, do not
separate the bracket.
• If the bracket has been installed to ECM in the
wrong direction, replace both parts to new
IG-02107 parts.
2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI- NOTE:
65, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> When replacing the ECM, be careful not to use the
3) Remove the connectors from ECM. wrong spec. ECM to avoid any damage on the fuel
injection system.
C: INSPECTION
Check that the ECM has no deformation, cracks or
other damages.
FU-04984
4) Remove the ECM from vehicle.
FU-04985
FU(H4SO)-41
Main Relay
18.Main Relay C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the main relay has no deformation,
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 2) Measure the resistance between main relay ter-
minals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
IG-02107

3) Remove the main relay from the relay holder.
1
2
3 4
IN-02836
FU-04986
B: INSTALLATION 1 and 2 1 MΩ or more
130.4 — 230.8 Ω
Install in the reverse order of removal. 3 and 4
(when 20°C (68°F))
FU(H4SO)-42
Main Relay
3) Connect terminal No. 3 to battery positive termi-

nal and terminal No. 4 to the battery ground termi-
nal, and check the resistance between the main
relay terminals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
1
2
3 4
FU-04077

1 and 2 Less than 1 Ω
FU(H4SO)-43
Fuel Pump Relay

19.Fuel Pump Relay C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the fuel pump relay has no deforma-
A: REMOVAL tion, cracks or other damages.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 2) Measure the resistance between fuel pump relay
terminals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
IG-02107

3) Remove the fuel pump relay from the relay hold-
er. 1
2
3 4
IN-02836

FU-04987
1 and 2 1 MΩ or more
B: INSTALLATION 93.8 — 136.4 Ω
3 and 4
(when 20°C (68°F))
FU(H4SO)-44
Fuel Pump Relay


nal, and check the resistance between the fuel
pump relay terminals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
1
2
3 4
FU-04077

FU(H4SO)-45
Electronic Throttle Control Relay

20.Electronic Throttle Control C: INSPECTION

Relay 1) Check that the electronic throttle control relay
has no deformation, cracks or other damages.
A: REMOVAL 2) Measure the resistance between electronic
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. throttle control relay terminals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
IG-02107

3) Remove the electronic throttle control relay from
1
the relay holder. 2
3 4
IN-02836

FU-04988
93.8 — 136.4 Ω
3 and 4
(when 20°C (68°F))
B: INSTALLATION
FU(H4SO)-46


nal, and check the resistance between the
electronic throttle control relay terminals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
1
2
3 4
FU-04077

FU(H4SO)-47
Fuel
21.Fuel 2) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push ST

in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect the fuel
A: PROCEDURE delivery hose.
1. RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE LEASE
WARNING: CAUTION:
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the • Be careful not to spill fuel.
working area. • Catch the fuel from hoses using a container
CAUTION: or cloth.
Be careful not to spill fuel.
1) Remove the fuse of fuel pump from main fuse
box.
ST
FU-04949
3) Connect ST to the fuel delivery hose.

ST 18471AA000 FUEL PIPE ADAPTER
FU-04800 4) Connect the gasoline proof hose to ST and put
2) Start the engine and run it until it stalls. the end of the hose in the container.
3) After the engine stalls, crank it for five more sec- 5) Drive the fuel pump and drain the fuel using Sub-
onds. aru Select Monitor. (Refer to “PC application help
4) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. for Subaru Select Monitor”.)
5) Install the fuse of fuel pump to the main fuse box. CAUTION:
2. DRAINING FUEL (WITH SUBARU SE- Be careful not to spill fuel.
LECT MONITOR) 6) Install the related parts in the reverse order after
draining the fuel.
WARNING:
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the 3. DRAINING FUEL (THROUGH THE FUEL
working area. FILLER HOSE)
CAUTION: WARNING:
Be careful not to spill fuel. Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the
working area.
NOTE:
• If the fuel pump cannot be driven, refer to the CAUTION:
procedures for draining from the fuel filler hose. • Be careful not to spill fuel.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-48, DRAINING FUEL • Fuel may remain in the fuel filler pipe. Drain-
(THROUGH THE FUEL FILLER HOSE), PROCE- ing the fuel from the fuel filler pipe through the
DURE, Fuel.> fill opening using the gasoline proof pump and
• Be careful not to let the battery run-out. the gasoline proof hose (ø10 or less) before the
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)- operation.
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- 1) Lift up the vehicle.
DURE, Fuel.> 2) Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
<Ref. to EX(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Rear Exhaust
Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-10, REMOVAL, Muf-
fler.>
FU(H4SO)-48
Fuel
cap.
4) Drain the fuel from the fuel filler pipe through the
filler opening using the gasoline proof pump and
the gasoline proof hose (ø10 or less).
5) Disconnect the fuel filler hoses from the fuel filler
pipe.
CAUTION:
or cloth.
FU-04803
6) Set the container under the vehicle and insert

the gasoline proof hose (ø10 or less) into the fuel
filler hose to drain the fuel.
CAUTION:
7) Install the related parts in the reverse order after
draining the fuel.
Tightening torque:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
FU(H4SO)-49
Fuel Tank
22.Fuel Tank (3) Push the grommet (D) down and remove the
service hole cover.
A: REMOVAL (C)
WARNING:
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the
working area. (D)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to spill fuel. (B)
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- (C)
DURE, Fuel.> (A) FU-04991
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-48, DRAINING
FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), 7) Remove the service hole cover of fuel sub level
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> sensor.
FU-05070
IG-02107 8) Disconnect the quick connector on the fuel deliv-
4) Remove the rear seat cushion. <Ref. to SE-32, ery tube (A). <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-68, REMOVAL,
REMOVAL, Rear Seat.> Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines.>
5) Remove the clips (A) and seat cushion hooks (A)
(B), and turn over the floor mat (C).
(C)
FU-05069
(B) (A) (A)

(B) 9) Remove the rear wheels.
FU-04990 10) Lift up the vehicle.
6) Remove the service hole cover of fuel pump. 11) Remove the rear ABS wheel speed sensor
(1) Disconnect the fuel cord connector (A), and from the rear housing.
remove the clip (B).
(2) Remove the screw (C).
FU-04994
FU(H4SO)-50
Fuel Tank
12) Remove the rear ABS wheel speed sensor har- 15) Remove the parking brake cable from parking
ness bracket from the upper arm. brake assembly. <Ref. to PB-9, REMOVAL, Park-
ing Brake Assembly (Rear Disc Brake).>
16) Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
<Ref. to EX(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Rear Exhaust
Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-10, REMOVAL, Muf-
fler.>
17) Remove the heat shield cover.
FU-04087
13) Remove the rear brake hose bracket from rear

housing.
(A)
DS-00472
(A) Heat shield cover
18) Remove the propeller shaft. <Ref. to DS-10,

REMOVAL, Propeller Shaft.>
19) Remove the clip (A) securing the fuel tank pro-
FU-04995 tector and heat shield cover.
20) Remove the bolts (B) and nuts (C) securing the
14) Remove the rear disc brake assembly and tie it fuel tank protector, and remove the fuel tank pro-
to the body side of the vehicle. tector.
(B)
(B) (B)
(C) (C)
(A)
FU-05655
21) Remove the bolts and nuts securing the heat

shield cover and remove the heat shield cover.
FU-04996
FU-05656
FU(H4SO)-51
Fuel Tank
22) Remove the rear suspension assembly. 1

WARNING: 2
A helper is required to perform this work.
(1) Support the rear differential with the trans-
mission jack.
(2) Remove the bolt and nut which secures rear
shock absorber to rear suspension arm.
1 FU-05002
FU-03359
(3) Remove the bolts which secure the rear

suspension assembly to the body.
FU-05003
25) Disconnect the fuel filler hose (A) and circulate

hose (B) from the fuel filler pipe assembly.
(B)
FU-04999
(4) Remove the rear suspension assembly. (A)
23) Disconnect the air vent hose from the fuel tank.
FU-05149
26) Support the fuel tank with a transmission jack,

remove the bolts from the fuel tank band, and re-
move the fuel tank from the vehicle.
WARNING:
• A helper is required to perform this work.
• Fuel may remain in the fuel tank. This will
cause the left and right sides to be unbalanced.
Be careful not to drop the fuel tank.
FU-05083
24) Disconnect the quick connector of the circulate

tube from evaporation pipe.
NOTE:
ure.
FU-05004
FU(H4SO)-52
Fuel Tank
B: INSTALLATION 3) Connect the quick connector of the circulate

tube to the evaporation pipe as shown in the figure.
set the fuel tank in place, and temporarily tighten CAUTION:
the bolts of the fuel tank band. • Check that there is no damage or dust on the
WARNING: quick connector. If necessary, clean the seal
surface of the pipe.
ly connected.
FU-05004
2) Securely insert the fuel filler hose (A) and circu- FU-05036
late hose (B) to the spool, then attach the clamp or
clip as shown in the figure.
Tightening torque:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
(B)
FU-05003
4) Connect the air vent hose to fuel tank.

(A)
FU-05149
(2) (3) (4)

(1)
FU-05083
L/2
L
FU-05646
(1) Hose
(2) Clamp or clip
(3) Spool
(4) Pipe
FU(H4SO)-53
Fuel Tank
5) Move the fuel tank so that the distance between 6) Install the rear suspension assembly.
the center of the positioning hole for the body (A) WARNING:
and the front end of the fuel tank flange (B) be-
comes L, and tighten the bolts of the fuel tank
bands in the sequence shown in the figure.
mission jack.
CAUTION: (2) Support the rear suspension assembly and
To prevent the fuel tank from damage, after install the rear suspension assembly to the
tightening the bolts of the fuel tank bands, body.
make sure that the distance between the center
of the positioning hole for the body (A) and the Tightening torque:
front end of the fuel tank flange (B) is L. T1: 70 N·m (7.1 kgf-m, 51.6 ft-lb)
T2: 200 N·m (20.4 kgf-m, 147.5 ft-lb)
Distance L: Center of the positioning hole for
the body (A) — Front end of the fuel tank flange
(B)
14.5 mm (0.571 in) or less
T2 T2
Tightening torque:
33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb)
T1 T1
(A)
L
(B) FU-05006
(3) Install the rear shock absorber to the rear

suspension arm.
NOTE:
Use a new self-locking nut.
Tightening torque:
120 N·m (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
1 2
3 4
FU-05585 FU-03359
7) Install the heat shield cover.

Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
FU-05656
FU(H4SO)-54
Fuel Tank
8) Install the bolts (B) and nuts (C) securing the fuel 14) Install the rear brake hose bracket to the rear
tank protector and install the clip (A) securing the housing.
fuel tank protector and heat shield cover.
Tightening torque:
Tightening torque: 33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb)
Nut (C): 9 N·m (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
Bolt (B): 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
(B)
(B) (B)
(C) (C)
(A)
FU-04995
15) Install the rear ABS wheel speed sensor har-

FU-05655 ness bracket to the upper arm.
9) Install the propeller shaft. <Ref. to DS-11, IN-
Tightening torque:
STALLATION, Propeller Shaft.>
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
10) Install the rear exhaust pipe and muffler. <Ref.
to EX(H4SO)-8, INSTALLATION, Rear Exhaust
Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-10, INSTALLATION,
Muffler.>
12) Connect the parking brake cable to the parking
brake assembly. <Ref. to PB-12, INSTALLATION,
Parking Brake Assembly (Rear Disc Brake).>
13) Install the rear disc brake assembly.
Tightening torque:
FU-04087
66 N·m (6.7 kgf-m, 48.7 ft-lb)
16) Attach the rear ABS wheel speed sensor to the
rear housing.
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
FU-04546
FU-04994
FU(H4SO)-55
Fuel Tank
17) Install the rear wheels. 21) Set the floor mat (C), and install clips (A) and
seat cushion hooks (B).
Tightening torque:
120 N·m (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
18) Connect the quick connector of the fuel delivery
tube (A). <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-71, INSTALLATION,
Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines.>
(A)
(C)
(B)
(B) (A) (A)
FU-04990
22) Install the rear seat cushion. <Ref. to SE-47,

INSTALLATION, Rear Seat.>
FU-05069
19) Install the service hole cover of fuel sub level

sensor.
IG-02107
24) Inspect the wheel alignment and adjust if nec-

essary.
FU-05070
C: INSPECTION
20) Attach the service hole cover of the fuel pump, 1) Check that the fuel tank and fuel pipe have no
and attach the connector and clip. deformation, cracks and other damages.
(C) 2) Check that the fuel hose has no cracks, damage
or loose part.
(D)
(B)
(C)
(A) FU-04991
(A) Connector
(B) Clip
(C) Screw
(D) Grommet
FU(H4SO)-56
Fuel Filler Pipe

23.Fuel Filler Pipe 10) Disconnect the fuel filler hose (A) and circulate
hose (B) from the fuel filler pipe assembly.
A: REMOVAL
WARNING: (B)
working area.
CAUTION:
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)- (A)
DURE, Fuel.>
FU-05149
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-48, DRAINING
FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), 11) Disconnect the evaporation hose (A) from fuel
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> filler pipe assembly and remove the bolts and nuts
3) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. securing the fuel filler pipe assembly to the vehicle
body.
(A)
IG-02107
4) Open the fuel filler lid, and remove the filler cap.
5) Turn the fuel filler pipe protector in the direction
of the arrow to unlock and remove it.
FU-05150
FU-04044 12) Remove the fuel filler pipe assembly from the
underside of the vehicle.
6) Remove the rear wheel RH.
8) Remove the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to EI-38,
REMOVAL, Mud Guard.>
9) Remove the rear sub frame. <Ref. to RS-16, RE-
MOVAL, Rear Sub Frame.>
FU(H4SO)-57
Fuel Filler Pipe

B: INSTALLATION 5) Securely insert the fuel filler hose (A) and circu-
late hose (B) to the spool, then attach the clamp or
1) Open the fuel filler lid.
clip as shown in the figure.
2) Insert the fuel filler pipe assembly into the rubber
saucer from inside of the rear fender. Tightening torque:
3) Install the fuel filler pipe assembly to the vehicle 2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
body and connect the evaporation hose (A) to the
fuel filler pipe assembly.
(B)
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
(A) (A)
FU-05149
(2) (3) (4)

(1)
L/2
L
FU-05646
(1) Hose
(2) Clamp or clip
(3) Spool
FU-05150 (4) Pipe
4) Align the cutout on the fuel filler pipe protector
6) Install the rear sub frame. <Ref. to RS-18, IN-
and the protrusion of the neck holder and insert
STALLATION, Rear Sub Frame.>
them all the way, and then turn the fuel filler pipe
7) Install the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to EI-38, IN-
protector in the direction of the arrow until it is
STALLATION, Mud Guard.>
locked.
9) Install the rear wheel RH.
Tightening torque:
120 N·m (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
FU-04104
IG-02107

essary.
FU(H4SO)-58
Fuel Filler Pipe

C: DISASSEMBLY E: INSPECTION
Remove the fuel filler pipe bracket from the fuel fill- 1) Check that the fuel filler pipe does not have de-
er pipe. formation, cracks or other damages.
2) Check that the fuel hose has no cracks, damage
or loose part.
FU-05009
D: ASSEMBLY
Install the fuel filler pipe bracket to the fuel filler
pipe.
Tightening torque:
7.35 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
FU-05009
FU(H4SO)-59
Fuel Pump
24.Fuel Pump 6) Remove the service hole cover.

(1) Disconnect the fuel cord connector (A), and
A: REMOVAL remove the clip (B).
WARNING: (2) Remove the screw (C).
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the (3) Push the grommet (D) down and remove the
working area. service hole cover.
(C)
CAUTION:
• If the fuel gauge indicates that two thirds or
(D)
more of the fuel is remaining, be sure to drain
fuel before starting work to avoid the fuel to
spill. (B)
NOTE:
Fuel pump assembly consists of fuel pump, fuel fil- (C)
ter, fuel chamber and fuel level sensor. (A) FU-04991
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- 7) Disconnect the connector (A) from fuel pump,
DURE, Fuel.> and remove the clip (B) securing the harness.
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-48, DRAINING 8) Disconnect the quick connector of fuel delivery
FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), tube (C) and fuel sub delivery tube (D). <Ref. to
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> FU(H4SO)-68, REMOVAL, Fuel Delivery and
3) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. Evaporation Lines.>
(D)
(C)
(A)
(B)
FU-05063
IG-02107
4) Remove the rear seat cushion. <Ref. to SE-32, 9) Remove the nuts securing the fuel pump upper
REMOVAL, Rear Seat.> plate to the fuel tank and remove the fuel pump up-
5) Remove the clips (A) and seat cushion hooks per plate.
(C)
FU-04534
(B)
(B) (A) (A) 10) Remove the fuel pump assembly from the fuel
FU-04990
tank.
FU(H4SO)-60
Fuel Pump
B: INSTALLATION
careful of the following.
• Make sure the sealing portion is free from fuel or
foreign matter before installation.
• Align protrusion (A) of the gasket to the position
shown in the figure.
• Insert the protrusion (B) of gasket to the fuel
pump upper plate. (3 places)
• Align the protrusion (C) of fuel pump assembly
with the cutout on the fuel pump upper plate.
• Tighten the nuts to the specified torque in the or-
der as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
4.4 N·m (0.4 kgf-m, 3.2 ft-lb)
(C)
2
4 7
(B) (B)
6 5
(a) 8 3
1 (A)
(B) FU-05064
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel pump has no deformation,
nal and No. 6 terminal to the battery ground termi-
nal, and inspect the fuel pump operation.
WARNING:
• Wipe off fuel completely.
• Keep the battery as far apart from fuel pump
as possible.
• Do not run the fuel pump for a long time un-
der non-load condition.
2 1
4 3
6 5
FU-04110
FU(H4SO)-61
Fuel Level Sensor

25.Fuel Level Sensor 4) Press two claws (A) of the fuel level sensor, and
slide the fuel level sensor in the direction of the ar-
A: REMOVAL row to remove the fuel level sensor.
WARNING:
working area. (A) (A)
CAUTION:
spill.
FU-05015
NOTE:
The fuel level sensor is built in fuel pump assembly. B: INSTALLATION
1) Remove the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to Install in the reverse order of removal.
FU(H4SO)-60, REMOVAL, Fuel Pump.>
2) Disconnect the fuel level sensor connector from
the fuel filter assembly.
FU-05065
3) Remove the harness from the hooks (A) on the

fuel chamber assembly and remove the fuel tem-
perature sensor (B) from fuel chamber assembly.
(A)
(B)
FU-05066
FU(H4SO)-62
Fuel Level Sensor

C: INSPECTION 3) Measure the resistance between fuel level sen-

sor terminals.
1) Check that the fuel level sensor has no damage.
• Model with fuel level sensor bent in 3 locations
2) Measure the fuel level sensor float position.
NOTE:
When inspecting the fuel level sensor, perform the
work with the sensor installed to the fuel pump.
• Model with fuel level sensor bent in 3 locations (A)
(1)
(B)
(A)
(2) 2 1
(3)
(B) 4 3
FU-05067 6 5
(1) FULL
(2) EMPTY
(3) Fuel tank seating surface
Float position Standard FU-05068

FULL to Fuel tank seating 126.4±4 mm
surface (A) (4.976±0.157 in)
EMPTY to Fuel tank seating 11.0±4 mm
surface (B) (0.433±0.157 in)

(A)
(1)
(B)
(A)
(2)
(3) 2 1
(B)
FU-08401 4 3
6 5
(1) FULL
(2) EMPTY
Float position Standard

FULL to Fuel tank seating 120.9±4 mm FU-08402
surface (A) (4.759±0.157 in)
Float position Terminal No. Standard
EMPTY to Fuel tank seating
surface (B)
14.8±4 mm (0.583±0.157 in) FULL (A) 2.0+0.5 –1.0 Ω
1 and 4
EMPTY (B) 31.9±1.0 Ω
FU(H4SO)-63
Fuel Sub Level Sensor

26.Fuel Sub Level Sensor 6) Disconnect the connector (A) from fuel sub level
sensor, and remove the clip (B) securing the fuel
A: REMOVAL cord from fuel sub level sensor protector.
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION: (B) (A)
spill.
FU-05071
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- 7) Remove the bolts (A) securing the fuel sub level
DURE, Fuel.> sensor protector to the fuel sub level sensor upper
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-48, DRAINING plate, and remove the fuel sub level sensor protec-
FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), tor.
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> 8) Disconnect the quick connector on the fuel sub
3) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. delivery tube (B). <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-68, REMOV-
AL, Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines.>
(A)
(B)
IG-02107
FU-05072
4) Remove the rear seat cushion. <Ref. to SE-32,
REMOVAL, Rear Seat.> 9) Remove the nuts securing the fuel sub level sen-
5) Remove the service hole cover. sor upper plate to the fuel tank and remove the fuel
sub level sensor upper plate.
FU-05070
FU-04569
10) Remove the fuel sub level sensor from the fuel
tank.
FU(H4SO)-64

B: INSTALLATION C: INSPECTION
Install in the reverse order of removal while being 1) Check that the fuel sub level sensor has no dam-
careful of the following. age.
• Make sure the sealing portion is free from fuel or 2) Measure the fuel sub level sensor float position.
• Align protrusion (A) of the gasket to the position (A)
(1) (3)
• Align protrusion (B) of the fuel sub level sensor to
the cutout in the fuel sub level sensor upper plate.
• After tightening the bolts to the specified torque (B)
in the order indicated in the figure, install the fuel
sub level sensor protector.
NOTE: (2)
Use a new gasket. FU-04213
Tightening torque: (1) FULL

4.4 N·m (0.4 kgf-m, 3.2 ft-lb) (2) EMPTY
4 (3) Datum points
2
6
6.4±3.5 mm
FULL to Datum point (A)
(0.252±0.138 in)
5
163.3±3.5 mm
EMPTY to Datum point (B)
(6.429±0.138 in)
(a) 1 (B)
3
3) Measure the resistance between fuel sub level
(A)
FU-04533 sensor terminals.
(A)
(B)
FU-05073
2 1
FU-04214

FULL (A) 2.0+0.5 –1.0 Ω
1 and 2
EMPTY (B) 62.1±1.0 Ω
FU(H4SO)-65
Fuel Filter
27.Fuel Filter 5) Remove the fuel pump holder from the fuel filter
assembly.
A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION:
FU-05023
spill.
• Be careful not to drop or apply any impact to 6) Remove the fuel pump from the fuel filter assem-
the fuel pump during work. This may deterio- bly.
rate its performance.
NOTE:
The fuel filter is built in fuel pump assembly.
1) Remove the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-60, REMOVAL, Fuel Pump.>
2) Remove the fuel level sensor and fuel tempera-
ture sensor. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-62, REMOVAL,
Fuel Level Sensor.>
3) Disconnect the connector from the fuel filter as-
sembly.
FU-05074
FU-05024
4) Disengage the claw connecting the fuel filter as-
sembly and fuel chamber assembly, and separate
fuel filter assembly and fuel chamber assembly.
FU-05075
FU(H4SO)-66
Fuel Filter
B: INSTALLATION
1) Assemble the gasket spacer (A) and support
rubber cushion (B) to the fuel pump, and install the
fuel pump to the fuel filter assembly. (B)
NOTE:
• Use a new gasket spacer.
• Use a new support rubber cushion.
• Apply gasoline to the surface of gasket spacer
and support rubber cushion.
(A)
(B) (A)
(A)
FU-03889
FU-05025
FU-05075
2) Install the fuel pump holder to the fuel filter as-
sembly. 4) Connect the fuel pump connector.
FU-03886 FU-05074
3) Install the pump module spring (A) to fuel filter 5) Install the fuel level sensor and fuel temperature
assembly, and install the fuel chamber assembly sensor. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-62, INSTALLATION,
(B). Fuel Level Sensor.>
6) Inspect the fuel level sensor. <Ref. to
NOTE:
FU(H4SO)-63, INSPECTION, Fuel Level Sensor.>
• Use a new fuel chamber assembly.
7) Install the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to
• Check that the claw connecting the fuel filter as- FU(H4SO)-61, INSTALLATION, Fuel Pump.>
sembly and fuel chamber assembly is securely fas-
tened.
FU(H4SO)-67
Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines

28.Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines

A: REMOVAL
FU-05093
WARNING: (1) Remove the connect check cover from the

Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the fuel delivery hose.
working area.
CAUTION:
DURE, Fuel.>
cap.
3) Remove the floor mat. <Ref. to EI-162, REMOV-
AL, Floor Mat.> FU-05094
4) In the engine compartment, disconnect the fuel (2) Set the ST to the fuel pipe.
delivery hoses (A) and evaporation hose (B). ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RE-
CAUTION: LEASE
• Be careful not to spill fuel. (3) Disconnect the quick connector of the fuel
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a container delivery hose by pushing the ST in the direction
or cloth. of the arrow.
FU(H4SO)-68

(4) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapo-

ration hose from the fuel pipe.
(D)
ST (C)
(B)
(A) (A)
(B) FU-05081
8) Remove the fuel pipe assembly from vehicle.

FU-05095
9) Disconnect the quick connector, and remove the
5) Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-50, fuel delivery tube and fuel sub delivery tube from
REMOVAL, Fuel Tank.> the fuel tank.
6) Remove the rear mud guard LH. <Ref. to EI-38, • When using ST
REMOVAL, Mud Guard.> 1. Attach ST to the pipe and push ST in the direc-
7) Remove the purge hose (A), purge pipe (B), air tion of arrow mark to disconnect the quick connec-
vent hose (C) and drain tube assembly (D). tor.
NOTE: ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RE-
LEASE
ure. CAUTION:
1 • Be careful not to spill fuel.
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a contain-
2
er or cloth.
• To disconnect the connector, hold (C)
shown in the figure and pull in axial direction.
• If the connector and pipe are sticking to
each other, push and pull the connector with
ST pushed, and then pull the connector after
it started moving freely.
1 • When disconnecting the connector, do not
(a)
bend or twist the tube forcibly. If the tube is
1
bent, replace with a new part.
2
NOTE:
Clean the pipe and quick connector, if they are cov-
ered with dust.
(C)
ST
1
(b) EC-02590
(A)
(a) Air vent hose (C), drain tube ASSY (D)
(C)
(b) Purge pipe (B)
(B)
FU-05506
(A) Quick connector

(B) Pipe
(C) Connector holding position
FU(H4SO)-69

2. To prevent from damaging or entering foreign 2. To prevent from damaging or entering foreign
matter, wrap the pipes and quick connectors with matter, wrap the pipes and quick connectors with
plastic bag etc. plastic bag etc.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
When reusing the retainer, do not disconnect When reusing the retainer, do not disconnect
the retainer from the connector. the retainer from the pipe.
FU-01333 FU-05507
• When not using ST 10) Remove the evaporation pipe.

1. Push the retainer in the direction of the arrow, (1) Remove the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to
disconnect the quick connector from pipe. EI-38, REMOVAL, Mud Guard.>
CAUTION: (2) Remove the evaporation hose.
er or cloth.
• To disconnect the connector, hold (D)
the retainer pushed in the direction of the ar-
row, and then pull the connector after it start-
ed moving freely. FU-05082
• When disconnecting the connector, do not
(3) Remove the trunk side trim panel assembly -
side on RH. <Ref. to EI-109, REMOVAL, Rear
Quarter Trim.>
NOTE: (4) Remove the evaporation pipe protector.
ered with dust.
(D)
(B)
(C)
(A)
(D) FU-05032
FU-05510
(A) Quick connector

(B) Retainer
(C) Pipe
(D) Connector holding position
FU(H4SO)-70

(5) Remove the evaporation pipe from vehicle. 4) Install the evaporation hose.
FU-05033 FU-05082
B: INSTALLATION 5) Install the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to EI-38, IN-
careful of the following. 2. CONNECTING THE FUEL LINE QUICK
CONNECTOR
1. INSTALLATION OF EVAPORATION PIPE
1) Install the evaporation pipe to the vehicle. CAUTION:
• Make sure there are no damage or dust on
connections. If necessary, clean seal surface of
pipe.
(A)
(a)
(b)
FU-05033
2) Install the evaporation pipe protector.

Tightening torque:
T1: 1 N·m (0.1 kgf-m, 0.7 ft-lb) (B)
T2: 7.5 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
(a)
T2
(b)
T1
FU-05508
FU-05034
(A) When removed using ST
3) Install the trunk side trim panel assembly - side (B) When removed without using ST
on RH. <Ref. to EI-119, INSTALLATION, Rear (a) Seal surface
Quarter Trim.> (b) Pipe
• When reusing the retainer, make sure that

neither scratches nor deformation exist on the
retainer. If it is faulty, use a new part.
FU(H4SO)-71

1) Connect the quick connector to pipe.

(A) (a) (d)
CAUTION: (b)
ly connected.
(c)
(d)
(A)
(B)
(a) (d)
(B)
(C)
FU-05511
(b)
(A) Quick connector

(c)
(B) Retainer
(C) Pipe
(d)
• Make sure the two retainer pawls are en-

gaged in their mating positions in the quick FU-05509
connector.
• Be sure to inspect tubes and their connec- (A) When removed using ST
tions for any leakage of fuel. (B) When removed without using ST
• To connect the connector, hold (d) shown in (a) Quick connector
the figure and push in axial direction. (b) Retainer
• When connecting the connector, do not bend (c) Pipe
or twist the tube forcibly. If the tube is bent, re- (d) Connector holding position
place with a new part.
3. EVAPORATION HOSE CONNECTION
Connect the evaporation hose to the pipe with an
overlap of 15 to 20 mm (0.59 to 0.79 in).
L = 17.5±2.5 mm (0.689±0.098 in)
(2) (3)
(1)
L/2
L
FU-04501
(1) Hose
(2) Clip
(3) Pipe
FU(H4SO)-72

4. CONNECTING THE EVAPORATION LINE

QUICK CONNECTOR
CAUTION:
connections. If necessary, clean the seal sur-
face of the pipe.
ly connected.
Connect the quick connector as shown in the fig-
ure.
FU-05035
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel pipe has no deformation,
2) Check that the hose and tube have no cracks,
damage or loose part.
FU(H4SO)-73
Fuel System Trouble in General

29.Fuel System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Trouble Possible cause Corrective action
a. Fuel pump does not operate.
Inspect contact, especially ground, and tighten it
Defective terminal contact
securely.
Trouble in electromagnetic or electronic circuit
Replace the faulty parts.
parts
b. Decline of fuel pump function Replace the fuel pump.
Insufficient fuel
supply to injector Replace the fuel filter. Clean or replace the fuel tank if
c. Clogged fuel filter
necessary.
Clean, correct or replace the fuel line pipe, hose or
d. Clogged or bent fuel line pipe, hose or tube
tube.
Check the fuel line connections, correct or replace the
e. Air is mixed in fuel system.
defective part.
f. Damaged diaphragm of pressure regulator Replace the pressure regulator.
a. Loose connections of fuel line pipe, hose or tube
defective part.
Leakage or blow b. Cracked fuel line pipe, hose or tube Replace the fuel line pipe, hose or tube.
out of fuel c. Cracked fuel tank or defective welded part Replace the fuel tank.
Clean, correct or replace the fuel line pipe, hose or
d. Clogged or bent fuel line pipe, hose or tube
tube.
Gasoline smell a. Loose connections of fuel line pipe, hose or tube
defective part.
inside of compart-
b. Improper installation of rubber saucer Correct or replace the rubber saucer.
ment
c. Defective canister Replace the canister.
Defective fuel a. Defective operation of fuel level sensor Replace the fuel level sensor.
gauge b. Defective operation of combination meter Replace the combination meter.
Noise a. Large operation noise or vibration of fuel pump Replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
• When the vehicle is left unattended for an extended period of time, water may accumulate in the fuel tank.
Fill fuel fully to prevent the problem.
• In snow-covered areas, mountainous areas, skiing areas, etc. where ambient temperatures drop to 0°C
(32°F) or less throughout the winter season, use a water removing agent in the fuel system to prevent freez-
ing fuel system and accumulating water.
• When water is accumulated in fuel filter, fill the water removing agent in the fuel tank.
• Before using water removing agent, follow the cautions noted on the bottle.
FU(H4SO)-74
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION

CONTROL DEVICES)
EC(H4SO)
Page
2. Front Catalytic Converter ...........................................................................3
3. Rear Catalytic Converter ............................................................................4
4. Canister ......................................................................................................5
5. Purge Control Solenoid Valve ....................................................................9
6. EGR Valve ...............................................................................................11
8. Fuel Temperature Sensor ........................................................................13
10. Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor .....................................................................15
11. Drain Filter ................................................................................................17
12. Drain Valve ...............................................................................................18
13. PCV Hose Assembly ................................................................................19
14. PCV Valve ................................................................................................20
General Description
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)
A: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
battery.
B: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS • Used for removing and installing the PCV
hose.
• This is a general tool made by the French
company CAILLAU. (code) 54.0.000.205
To make this easier to obtain, it has been pro-
vided with a tool number.
ST18353AA000
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Mighty Vac Used for inspecting the fuel tank pressure sensor.
EC(H4SO)-2
Front Catalytic Converter

2. Front Catalytic Converter

A: REMOVAL
The front catalytic converter is integrated into the
front exhaust pipe; therefore, refer to “Front Ex-
haust Pipe” for the removal procedure. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-4, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
front exhaust pipe; therefore, refer to “Front Ex-
haust Pipe” for the installation procedure. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-5, INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the connections and welds for exhaust
leaks.
2) Check for hole or rust.
EC(H4SO)-3
Rear Catalytic Converter

3. Rear Catalytic Converter

A: REMOVAL
The rear catalytic converter is integrated into the
center exhaust pipe. Refer to “Center Exhaust
Pipe” for removal procedures. <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-
7, REMOVAL, Center Exhaust Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
center exhaust pipe. Refer to “Center Exhaust
Pipe” for installation procedures. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-7, INSTALLATION, Center Exhaust
Pipe.>
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
2) Check for hole or rust.
EC(H4SO)-4
Canister
4. Canister 5) Remove the clip holding the rear wiring harness.
A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the rear wheel LH.
3) Remove the rear mud guard LH. <Ref. to EI-38,
4) Disconnect the quick connectors of the vent tube
(A), canister drain tube (B) and charge tube (C),
and remove the tubes from clips (D).
NOTE: EC-02608
Disconnect the quick connector as shown in the fig- 6) Remove the canister from vehicle.
ure.
1
1
(a)
1
EC-02609
(b) 1
EC-02615
7) Disconnect the connector from drain valve.
(a) Vent tube (A) and canister drain tube (B)
(b) Charge tube (C)
(C)
(A)
EC-02610
(B) (D)
EC-02607
EC(H4SO)-5
Canister
8) Disconnect the vent tube (A), canister drain tube B: INSTALLATION

(B) and charge tube (C), and remove the canister
1) Install the vent tube (A), canister drain tube (B)
drain tube (B) from clip (D).
and charge tube (C), and install the canister drain
NOTE: tube (B) to clip (D).
Disconnect the quick connector as shown in the fig- CAUTION:
ure.
1 connections. If necessary, clean the seal sur-
2 face of the pipe.
ly connected.
NOTE:
ure.
1
(a)
1
(a)
(b) 1
EC-02615

(b) Charge tube (C)
(B)
(A) (b) EC-02616

(b) Charge tube (C)
(C) (D)
EC-02611
EC(H4SO)-6
Canister
3) Install the canister to the vehicle.

(B)
Tightening torque:
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
(A)
(C) (D)
EC-02611
2) Connect the connector to the drain valve.
EC-02609
4) Secure the rear wiring harness with clip.
EC-02610
EC-02608
EC(H4SO)-7
Canister
5) Attach all tubes to clips (D), and connect the C: INSPECTION

quick connectors of the vent tube (A), canister drain
1) Check that the canister has no deformation,
tube (B) and charge tube (C).
CAUTION: 2) Check that the tube has no cracks, damage or
• Make sure there are no damage or dust on loose part.
face of the pipe.
ly connected.
NOTE:
ure.
(a)
(b) EC-02616

(b) Charge tube (C)
(C)
(A)
(B) (D)
EC-02607
6) Install the rear mud guard LH. <Ref. to EI-38, IN-

8) Install the rear wheel LH.
Tightening torque:
120 N·m (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
EC(H4SO)-8
Purge Control Solenoid Valve

5. Purge Control Solenoid Valve • Other than U5 model

(B) (A)
A: REMOVAL
EC-02557
• U5 model
(A)
IG-02107

3) Disconnect the purge control solenoid valve con-
nector (A) and evaporation hose (B), and then re- (B)
move the purge control solenoid valve.
EC-02619
(A)
(A) To multifunction duct
(B) To evaporation line
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(B)
EC-02556
• U5 model (A)
(A)
(B)
EC-02556
• U5 model
(B)
EC-02714
B: INSTALLATION (A)

NOTE:
Connect the evaporation hose as shown in the fig-
ure.
(B)
EC-02714
EC(H4SO)-9

C: INSPECTION 4) Connect the terminal No. 1 to the battery positive

terminal and the terminal No. 2 to the battery
1. PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ground terminal. Check that air is discharged from
1) Check that the purge control solenoid valve has (B), when supplying air to (A).
no deformation, cracks or other damages. • Other than U5 model
2) Measure the resistance between the purge con-
trol solenoid valve terminals.
2 1
2 1
EC-02426
• Other than U5 model (A) (B)

1 and 2 24±3 Ω (when 20°C (68°F))
• U5 model
1 and 2 24.5±1.5 Ω (when 20°C (68°F))
EC-02559
3) Check that air does not come out from (B) when
• U5 model
air is blown into (A).
2 1
(A) (B)
EC-02558
• U5 model
(B)
(B)
(A)
(A)
EC-02621
EC-02620
Check that the evaporation hose has no cracks,
EC(H4SO)-10
EGR Valve
6. EGR Valve
A: REMOVAL
For removal procedures, refer to the “FU(H4SO)”
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-33, REMOVAL, EGR
Valve.>
B: INSTALLATION
For installation procedure, refer to “FU(H4SO)”
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-33, INSTALLATION,
EGR Valve.>
C: INSPECTION
For inspection procedures, refer to the “FU(H4SO)”
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-33, INSPECTION,
EGR Valve.>
EC(H4SO)-11
Fuel Level Sensor

7. Fuel Level Sensor

A: REMOVAL
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-62, REMOVAL, Fuel
Level Sensor.>
B: INSTALLATION
For installation procedures, refer to the
“FU(H4SO)” section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-62, IN-
STALLATION, Fuel Level Sensor.>
C: INSPECTION
Fuel Level Sensor.>
EC(H4SO)-12
Fuel Temperature Sensor

8. Fuel Temperature Sensor C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the fuel temperature sensor has no
A: REMOVAL deformation, cracks or other damages.
The fuel temperature sensor and fuel level sensor 2) Check the resistance between the fuel tempera-
are integrated into one unit; therefore, refer to “Fuel ture sensor terminals.
Level Sensor” for removal procedure. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-62, REMOVAL, Fuel Level Sensor.> CAUTION:
When measuring the resistance, check the cir-
cuit tester specification and be careful not to
turn on electricity 3 V or more to prevent dam-
aging the fuel temperature sensor.
1 2
3 4
(A)
EC-02391
(A) Fuel temperature sensor
B: INSTALLATION EC-02452
The fuel temperature sensor and fuel level sensor Temperature Terminal No. Standard
are integrated into one unit; therefore, refer to “Fuel 9.2±2.2 kΩ (when the mea-
Level Sensor” for installation procedure. <Ref. to –10°C (14°F)
sured current is 0.5 mA)
FU(H4SO)-62, INSTALLATION, Fuel Level Sen- 2.5±0.2 kΩ (when the mea-
sor.> 20°C (68°F) 2 and 3
0.84+0.06 –0.05 kΩ (when the
50°C (122°F)
measured current is 1.0 mA)
(A)
EC-02391
EC(H4SO)-13

9. Fuel Sub Level Sensor

A: REMOVAL
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-64, REMOVAL, Fuel
Sub Level Sensor.>
B: INSTALLATION
“FU(H4SO)” section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-65, IN-
STALLATION, Fuel Sub Level Sensor.>
C: INSPECTION
Fuel Sub Level Sensor.>
EC(H4SO)-14
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor

10.Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
Tightening torque:
WARNING:
7.35 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
working area.
EC-02599
C: INSPECTION
IG-02107
1. FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
cap. 1) Check that the fuel tank pressure sensor does
3) Lift up the vehicle. not have deformation, cracks or other damages.
4) Disconnect connector (A) from fuel tank pres- 2) Connect dry-cell battery positive terminal to ter-
sure sensor. minal No. 3 and dry-cell battery ground terminal to
5) Pull out the vacuum hose (B) from vehicle. terminal No. 1, circuit tester positive terminal to ter-
6) Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor from the minal No. 2 and the circuit tester negative terminal
bracket. to terminal No. 1.
(A)
NOTE:
• Use new dry-cell batteries.
• Using circuit tester, check the voltage of a single
(B) dry-cell battery is 1.6 V or more. And also check the
voltage of three batteries in series is between 4.8 V
and 5.2 V.
3 2 1
EC-02597
7) Disconnect the pressure hose from fuel tank

pressure sensor and remove the fuel tank pressure
sensor.
1.5V 1.5V 1.5V

EC-02598
4.8 5.2V
FU-04486
EC(H4SO)-15

3) Check the voltage at a normal atmospheric pres-

sure.
NOTE:
The atmospheric pressure at higher altitude is low-
er than normal. Therefore, the voltage is lower than
the standard value.
Approx. 2.5 V
2 (+) and 1 (–)
(when 25°C (77°F))

on the fuel tank pressure sensor.
(A)
EC-02586
5) Check the voltage when generating vacuum and

positive pressure using Mighty Vac.
CAUTION:
Be sure to apply pressure within a range of –10
— 20 kPa (–0.1 — 0.2 kgf/cm2, –1.45 — 2.90 psi).
Otherwise the fuel tank pressure sensor will be
damaged.
Terminal
Pressure Standard
No.
–6.67 kPa (–0.07 kgf/cm2, Approx. 0.5 V
–0.97 psi) 2 (+) and (when 25°C (77°F))
6.67 kPa (0.07 kgf/cm2, 1 (–) Approx. 4.5 V
0.97 psi) (when 25°C (77°F))
Check that the hose has no cracks, damage or
loose part.
EC(H4SO)-16
Drain Filter
11.Drain Filter
A: SPECIFICATION
Drain valve is a non-disassembled part, so do not
remove the drain filter from drain valve. Refer to
“Canister” for removal and installation procedures.
<Ref. to EC(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Canister.>
<Ref. to EC(H4SO)-6, INSTALLATION, Canister.>
EC(H4SO)-17
Drain Valve
12.Drain Valve
A: REMOVAL
Drain valve is integrated with canister. Refer to
“Canister” for removal procedure. <Ref. to
EC(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Canister.>
B: INSTALLATION
Refer to “Canister” for the installation procedure.
<Ref. to EC(H4SO)-6, INSTALLATION, Canister.>
C: INSPECTION
Check the resistance between drain valve termi-
nals.
2 1
EC-02455

1 and 2 20 — 30 Ω
EC(H4SO)-18
PCV Hose Assembly

13.PCV Hose Assembly B: INSTALLATION

1) Install the PCV hose assembly (B) to the cylinder
A: REMOVAL block RH and PCV pipe, and then connect the vac-
CAUTION: uum hose (A) to the PCV valve.
Do not remove except when the hose is broken. NOTE:
1) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to Use a new clamp for the PCV hose assembly, fit
IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Boot.> the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the
2) Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from PCV clamp as shown in the figure, and lock the clamp.
valve, and remove the PCV hose assembly (B) ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS
from cylinder block RH and PCV pipe.
NOTE:
Pinch the clamp of the PCV hose assembly by fit- ST
ting the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the
clamp as shown in the figure, and unlock the
clamp.
ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS
ST
ME-04374
(A)
ME-04374
(B)
EC-02605
(A) 2) Install the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to

IN(H4SO)-8, INSTALLATION, Air Intake Boot.>
(B) C: INSPECTION
Check the PCV hose assembly for cracks, damage
or looseness.
EC-02605
EC(H4SO)-19
PCV Valve
14.PCV Valve
A: REMOVAL
(A)
(B)
2) Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) and PCV hose
(B) from the PCV valve and remove the PCV valve.
NOTE:
Pinch the clamp of the PCV hose (B) by fitting the
cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the clamp as EC-02606
shown in the figure, and unlock the clamp. 2) Install the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to
ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS IN(H4SO)-8, INSTALLATION, Air Intake Boot.>
C: INSPECTION
ST
1. PCV VALVE
1) Check that the PCV valve has no deformation,
2) Check that air is discharged from (B) when air is
blown into (A).
ME-04374
(B) (A)
(A)
(B)
EC-02507
EC-02606
B: INSTALLATION
1) Connect the vacuum hose (A) and PCV hose (B)
to the PCV valve.
NOTE: (A) (B)
Use a new clamp for the PCV hose (B), fit the cut
out in the ST with the protrusion on the clamp as
shown in the figure, and lock the clamp.
ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS EC-02508
ST Check the vacuum hose for cracks, damage or
looseness.
ME-04374
EC(H4SO)-20
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
IN(H4SO)
Page
2. Air Cleaner Element ...................................................................................4
3. Air Cleaner Case ........................................................................................6
4. Air Intake Boot ............................................................................................8
5. Air Intake Duct ............................................................................................9
6. Resonator Chamber .................................................................................10
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
A: COMPONENT
(9)
T1
(8)
(16)
(7)
T4
(4)
(15)
(3)
T3
(5)
(6)
(12) (11)
(2)
(13)
(10)
(1)
T2
(14)
T2
(17)
IN-02661
IN(H4SO)-2
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
(1) Air intake duct (9) Clip (17) Blow-by hose

(2) Clip (10) Clamp
(3) Resonator chamber (11) Cover Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Air cleaner case (front) (12) Clip T1: 1 (0.1, 0.7)
(5) Spacer (13) Air intake boot ASSY T2: 3 (0.3, 2.2)
(6) Cushion (14) Clamp T3: 6 (0.6, 4.4)
(7) Air cleaner element (15) Cushion T4: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(8) Air cleaner case (rear) (16) Mass air flow and intake air tem-
perature sensor
B: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
IN(H4SO)-3
Air Cleaner Element

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
2. Air Cleaner Element 5) Remove the clip (B) securing the upper side of
air cleaner case.
A: REMOVAL
(B) (A)
IN-02749
6) Pull the air cleaner case (rear) backward of the

IG-02107 vehicle, and remove the air cleaner element.
2) Disconnect the power steering oil pressure hose
(suction hose) from the clip on the side of air clean-
er case (rear).
IN-02664
B: INSTALLATION
IN-02762
3) Disconnect the connector (A) from the mass air CAUTION:
flow and intake air temperature sensor, and re- Be sure to use SUBARU genuine air cleaner el-
move the clip (B). ement depending on the engine type when re-
placing the air cleaner elements. Using other air
cleaner element may affect the engine perfor-
mance.
(A)
NOTE:
• Check that there are no foreign objects in the air
(B)
cleaner case.
• When installing the air cleaner case (rear), align
the protrusion of the air cleaner case (rear) to the
hole on the air cleaner case (front) to install.
IN-02748
4) Loosen the clamp (A) which connects the air

cleaner case (rear) and air intake boot assembly.
IN-02438
IN(H4SO)-4
Air Cleaner Element

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
Tightening torque:
Clamp (A)
3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
(A)
IN-02750
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the air cleaner element has no defor-
2) Check the air cleaner element for excessive dirt.
IN(H4SO)-5
Air Cleaner Case

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
3. Air Cleaner Case 6) Remove the clips (B) from the air cleaner case
(front).
A: REMOVAL
(B) (A)
IN-02749
7) Remove the air cleaner case (rear) and air

IG-02107 cleaner element.
9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
3) Disconnect the power steering oil pressure hose
(suction hose) from the clip on the side of air clean-
er case (rear).
IN-02666
8) Remove the bolt (A) and nut (B) which secure

the air cleaner case (front) to the body.
IN-02762 (B)
4) Disconnect the connector (A) from the mass air

flow and intake air temperature sensor, and re-
move the clip (B).
(A)
(A)
IN-02751
9) Remove the air cleaner case (front).

(B)
IN-02748
5) Loosen the clamp (A) which connects the air

cleaner case (rear) and air intake boot assembly.
IN(H4SO)-6
Air Cleaner Case

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
B: INSTALLATION 4) Connect the connector (A) to the mass air flow

and intake air temperature sensor and secure the
1) Install the bolt (A) and nut (B) which secure the
harness with clip (B).
air cleaner case (front) to the body.
Tightening torque:
Bolt (A)
(A)
6 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.4 ft-lb)
Nut (B)
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
(B)
(B)
IN-02748
5) Connect the power steering oil pressure hose

(suction hose) to the clip on the side of air cleaner
case (rear).
(A)
IN-02751
2) Install the air cleaner case (rear) and the air

cleaner element.
NOTE:
When installing the air cleaner case (rear), align the
protrusion of the air cleaner case (rear) to the hole
on the air cleaner case (front) to install.
IN-02762

IN-02438
3) Install the clip (B) to the air cleaner case (front),

then tighten the clamp (A) that connects the air
cleaner case (rear) to the intake boot.
IG-02107
Tightening torque:
Clamp (A) C: INSPECTION
3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
1) Check that the air cleaner case has no deforma-
2) Check that the air intake boot has no cracks,
(B) (A)
IN-02749
IN(H4SO)-7
Air Intake Boot

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
4. Air Intake Boot

A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the cover (A) and clip (B) from air intake
boot assembly.
(A)
(B) (B)
IN-02668
2) Loosen the clamp (A) which connects the air in-

take boot assembly and air cleaner case.
3) Loosen the clamp (B) which connects the air in-
take boot assembly and throttle body.
(B)
(A)
IN-02669
4) Disconnect the blow-by hose and remove the air

intake boot assembly.
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
Clamp (A), (B)
3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
(B)
(A)
IN-02669
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the air intake boot assembly does not
have deformation, cracks or other damages.
2) Check there is no foreign matter in the air intake
boot assembly.
IN(H4SO)-8
Air Intake Duct

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
5. Air Intake Duct

A: REMOVAL
1) Detach the clip connecting the air intake duct to
the front vehicle body, and remove the air intake
duct.
IN-02752
B: INSTALLATION
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the air intake duct has no deforma-
2) Inspect that no foreign objects are mixed in the
air intake duct.
IN(H4SO)-9
Resonator Chamber
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
6. Resonator Chamber
A: REMOVAL
The resonator chamber and air cleaner case are in-
tegrated into one unit; therefore, refer to “Air Clean-
er Case” for removal procedure. <Ref. to
IN(H4SO)-6, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner Case.>
B: INSTALLATION
er Case” for installation procedure. <Ref. to
IN(H4SO)-7, INSTALLATION, Air Cleaner Case.>
C: INSPECTION
Check that the resonator chamber has no deforma-
IN(H4SO)-10
MECHANICAL
ME(H4SO)
Page
2. Compression ............................................................................................23
3. Idle Speed ................................................................................................24
4. Ignition Timing ..........................................................................................25
5. Intake Manifold Vacuum ...........................................................................26
6. Engine Oil Pressure .................................................................................27
7. Fuel Pressure ...........................................................................................28
8. Valve Clearance .......................................................................................29
9. Engine Assembly .....................................................................................31
10. Engine Mounting ......................................................................................38
11. Preparation for Overhaul ..........................................................................41
12. V-belt ........................................................................................................42
13. Crank Pulley .............................................................................................44
14. Timing Belt Cover .....................................................................................46
15. Timing Belt ...............................................................................................47
16. Cam Sprocket ..........................................................................................52
17. Crank Sprocket ........................................................................................53
18. Valve Rocker Assembly ...........................................................................54
19. Camshaft ..................................................................................................57
20. Cylinder Head ..........................................................................................61
21. Cylinder Block ..........................................................................................68
22. Oil Switching Solenoid Valve ...................................................................89
23. Intake and Exhaust Valve ........................................................................91
24. Piston .......................................................................................................92
25. Connecting Rod .......................................................................................93
26. Crankshaft ................................................................................................94
27. Engine Trouble in General .......................................................................95
28. Engine Noise ..........................................................................................101
General Description
MECHANICAL
A: SPECIFICATION
Model 2.5 L
Cylinder arrangement
Belt driven,
Valve system mechanism single overhead camshaft,
4 valve/cylinder
Bore × Stroke mm (in) 99.5 × 79.0 (3.92 × 3.11)
Displacement cm3 (cu in) 2,457 (149.94)
Compression ratio 10.0
Compression pressure
kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Standard 1,020 — 1,275 (10.4 — 13.0, 148 — 185)
(at 200 — 300 rpm)
Number of piston rings Pressure ring: 2, Oil ring: 1
Open BTDC 0°
Constant
Close ABDC 58°
Engine Low Open BTDC 0°
Intake valve timing
speed Close ABDC –10°
High Open BTDC 14°
speed Close ABDC 62°
Open BBDC30°
Exhaust valve timing
Close ATDC14°
Intake 0.20±0.04 (0.0079±0.0016)
Valve clearance mm (in)
Exhaust 0.25±0.04 (0.0098±0.0016)
Idle speed (For CVT model, CVT model: 675±100
No load Standard
select lever in “P” or “N” range. MT model: 650±100
rpm
For MT model, gear shift lever in
neutral position.) A/C ON Standard 700 — 850
Ignition order 1→3→2→4
CVT model: 15°±10°/675
Ignition timing BTDC/rpm Standard
MT model: 10°±10°/650
ME(H4SO)-2
General Description
MECHANICAL
NOTE:
US: Undersize OS: Oversize
Belt tension
Adjuster rod protrusion amount mm (in) 5.2 — 6.2 (0.205 — 0.244)
adjuster
Clearance between arm and shaft mm (in) Standard 0.020 — 0.054 (0.0008 — 0.0021)
Valve rocker
Rocker arm inside diameter mm (in) Standard 22.020 — 22.041 (0.8669 — 0.8678)
arm
Rocker shaft diameter mm (in) Standard 21.987 — 22.000 (0.8656 — 0.8661)
Bending limit mm (in) 0.025 (0.00098)
Constant Standard 40.075 — 40.175 (1.5778 — 1.5817)
Cam lobe Intake Low speed Standard 35.496 — 35.596 (1.3975 — 1.4014)
mm (in)
height High speed Standard 40.315 — 40.415 (1.5872 — 1.5911)
Exhaust Standard 39.289 — 39.389 (1.5468 — 1.5507)
Cam base circle diameter mm (in) Standard 34.00 (1.3386)
Camshaft
Base circle step of adjacent intake cams
mm (in) Standard 0.03 (0.001) or less
(low speed and high speed)
Oil clearance mm (in) Standard 0.055 — 0.090 (0.0022 — 0.0035)
Journal O.D. mm (in) Standard 31.928 — 31.945 (1.2570 — 1.2577)
Cylinder head journal I.D. mm (in) Standard 32.000 — 32.018 (1.2598 — 1.2605)
Thrust clearance mm (in) Standard 0.030 — 0.090 (0.0012 — 0.0035)
Warping limit (mating surface with cylinder block) mm (in) 0.035 (0.0014)
Cylinder
Grinding limit mm (in) 0.1 (0.004)
head
Standard height mm (in) 97.5 (3.84)
Seating angle between valve and valve seat 90°
Valve seat Contacting width Intake Standard 0.8 — 1.4 (0.03 — 0.055)
between valve and valve mm (in)
seat Exhaust Standard 1.2 — 1.8 (0.047 — 0.071)
Clearance between the Intake Standard 0.035 — 0.062 (0.0014 — 0.0024)
valve guide and valve mm (in)
stem Exhaust Standard 0.040 — 0.067 (0.0016 — 0.0026)
Inside diameter mm (in) 6.000 — 6.012 (0.2362 — 0.2367)
Valve guide Intake 5.950 — 5.965 (0.2343 — 0.2348)
Valve stem outer diameters mm (in)
Exhaust 5.945 — 5.960 (0.2341 — 0.2346)
Intake 20.3 — 20.7 (0.799 — 0.815)
Valve guide protrusion amount mm (in)
Exhaust 16.8 — 17.2 (0.661 — 0.677)
Intake Standard 0.8 — 1.2 (0.03 — 0.047)
Head edge thickness mm (in)
Valve
Intake 120.6 (4.75)
Overall length mm (in)
Exhaust 121.7 (4.79)
Free length mm (in) 55.2 (2.173)
235.3 — 270.7 (24 — 27.6, 52.9 — 60.8)/
Set
45.0 (1.772)
Valve spring Tension/spring height N (kgf, lb)/mm (in)
578.9 — 639.9 (59.1 — 65.3, 130.3 — 143.9)/
Lift
34.7 (1.366)
Squareness 2.5°, 2.4 mm (0.094 in) or less
Warping limit (mating surface with cylinder head) mm (in) 0.025 (0.00098)
Cylinder Cylindricality mm (in) Standard 0.015 (0.0006)
block Out-of-roundness mm (in) Standard 0.010 (0.0004)
Clearance between cylinder and piston
mm (in) Standard –0.015 — 0.005 (–0.00059 — 0.00020)
at 20°C (68°F)
Cylinder inner diameter boring limit (diameter) mm (in) To 100.005 (3.9372)
ME(H4SO)-3
General Description
MECHANICAL
Piston grade point mm (in) 38.2 (1.504)

A 99.510 — 99.520 (3.9177 — 3.9181)
Standard
Piston B 99.500 — 99.510 (3.9173 — 3.9177)
Outer diameter mm (in)
0.25 (0.0098) OS 99.750 — 99.770 (3.9272 — 3.9280)
0.50 (0.0197) OS 100.000 — 100.020 (3.9370 — 3.9378)
Piston pin must be fitted into position with
Degree of fit
thumb at 20°C (68°F).
Piston pin
Clearance between piston pin hole and
mm (in) Standard 0.004 — 0.008 (0.0002 — 0.0003)
piston pin
Top ring Standard 0.20 — 0.35 (0.0079 — 0.0138)
Piston ring gap mm (in) Second ring Standard 0.37 — 0.52 (0.0146 — 0.0205)
Piston ring Oil ring Standard 0.20 — 0.50 (0.0079 — 0.0197)
Clearance between pis- Top ring Standard 0.040 — 0.080 (0.0016 — 0.0031)
ton ring and piston ring mm (in)
groove Second ring Standard 0.030 — 0.070 (0.0012 — 0.0028)
Bend or twist per 100 mm (3.94 in) in
mm (in) Limit 0.10 (0.0039)
length
Connecting
rod and con- Oil clearance mm (in) Standard 0.016 — 0.044 (0.0006 — 0.0017)
necting rod Standard 1.492 — 1.501 (0.0587 — 0.0591)
bearing Bearing size 0.03 (0.0012) US 1.510 — 1.513 (0.0594 — 0.0596)
mm (in)
(Thickness at center) 0.05 (0.0020) US 1.520 — 1.523 (0.0598 — 0.0600)
0.25 (0.0098) US 1.620 — 1.623 (0.0638 — 0.0639)
Bushing of Clearance between piston pin and
mm (in) Standard 0 — 0.022 (0 — 0.0009)
small end bushing
Out-of-
mm (in) Standard 0.003 (0.0001)
roundness
Crank pin
Cylindricality mm (in) Standard 0.004 (0.0002)
Grinding limit (dia.) mm (in) To 51.750 (2.0374)
Out-of-
mm (in) Standard 0.005 (0.0002)
roundness
Crank journal
Cylindricality mm (in) Standard 0.006 (0.0002)
Standard 51.984 — 52.000 (2.0466 — 2.0472)
0.03 (0.0012) US 51.954 — 51.970 (2.0454 — 2.0461)
Crank pin outer diameter mm (in)
0.05 (0.0020) US 51.934 — 51.950 (2.0446 — 2.0453)
Crankshaft 0.25 (0.0098) US 51.734 — 51.750 (2.0368 — 2.0374)
and crank- Standard 59.992 — 60.008 (2.3619 — 2.3625)
shaft bear-
Crank journal outer 0.03 (0.0012) US 59.962 — 59.978 (2.3607 — 2.3613)
ing mm (in)
diameter 0.05 (0.0020) US 59.942 — 59.958 (2.3599 — 2.3605)
0.25 (0.0098) US 59.742 — 59.758 (2.3520 — 2.3527)
Standard 1.998 — 2.011 (0.0787 — 0.0792)
0.03 (0.0012) US 2.017 — 2.020 (0.0794 — 0.0795)
#1, #3
0.05 (0.0020) US 2.027 — 2.030 (0.0798 — 0.0799)
Bearing size (Thickness 0.25 (0.0098) US 2.127 — 2.130 (0.0837 — 0.0839)
at center)
mm (in) Standard 2.000 — 2.013 (0.0787 — 0.0793)
0.03 (0.0012) US 2.019 — 2.022 (0.0795 — 0.0796)
#2, #4, #5
0.05 (0.0020) US 2.029 — 2.032 (0.0799 — 0.0800)
0.25 (0.0098) US 2.129 — 2.132 (0.0838 — 0.0839)
ME(H4SO)-4
General Description
MECHANICAL
B: COMPONENT
1. V-BELT
(5)
(6)
(4)
(3)
(7)
T4
A
(11)
T2
(8)
T4 (2)
T6 T5
A
B
(12)
T1 B
T7 T7
(9) T5
(10)
C
C
(1)
(13)
T7
T3
ME-04541
(1) V-belt (8) Idler pulley ASSY Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) V-belt cover bracket (9) Stopper rod RH T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) V-belt tensioner ASSY (10) Stopper rod LH T2: 20 (2.0, 14.8)
(4) Power steering pump bracket (11) A/C compressor T3: 22 (2.2, 16.2)
(5) Generator (12) A/C compressor bracket B T4: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(6) Generator plate (13) Front cushion rubber T5: 26.5 (2.7, 19.5)
(7) A/C compressor bracket A T6: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
T7: 36 (3.7, 26.6)
ME(H4SO)-5
General Description
MECHANICAL
2. TIMING BELT
(5) T1 (1)
(2)
T2
T5 (3)
(6)
(4)
T4 (7)
(8)
T1
(12) T3
T1
(9) T1
T4
T4
(10)
(15) (13)
(11)
T5
(16)
(14)
T6
T1
T6
ME-04539
(1) Timing belt cover No. 2 RH (9) Automatic belt tension adjuster Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
ASSY
(2) Timing belt guide (MT model) (10) Belt idler No. 2 T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(3) Crank sprocket (11) Cam sprocket No. 2 T2: 9.75 (1.0, 7.2)
(4) Timing belt cover No. 2 LH (12) Timing belt T3: 24.5 (2.5, 18.1)
(5) Cam sprocket No. 1 (13) Front timing belt cover T4: 39 (4.0, 28.8)
(6) Belt idler (A) (14) Timing belt cover LH T5: 78 (8.0, 57.5)
(7) Tensioner bracket (15) Crank pulley (MT model) T6: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-44, INSTAL-
LATION, Crank Pulley.>
(8) Belt idler (B) (16) Crank pulley (CVT model)
ME(H4SO)-6
General Description
MECHANICAL
3. CYLINDER HEAD AND CAMSHAFT

(1)
(20)
(2) T3
T9 T5 T2 T6
T6 (4) (26)
(22) (25)
T4
(7)
T7
(8)
(3)
(23)
T3
(24)
(6)
(8)
(5) T8
(9)
(10)
(30) (19)
T5
(8)
(14)
(15)
T8 (16)
(7)
T6 T2
(10) (2)
T4 (17)
(29) T3
(21) (18)
(11)
(28) (27) (19)
T2
(12)
(5) (13) T1
T6
(31) T7
T9
T3
(3)
T7
ME-04540
ME(H4SO)-7
General Description
MECHANICAL
(1) Rocker cover RH (16) Oil filler duct (31) Seal washer
(2) Intake valve rocker ASSY (17) O-ring
(3) Exhaust valve rocker ASSY (18) Rocker cover LH Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Camshaft cap RH (19) Stud bolt T1: 6 (0.6, 4.4)
(5) Oil seal (20) Rocker cover gasket RH T2: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(6) Camshaft RH (21) Rocker cover gasket LH T3: 9.75 (1.0, 7.2)
(7) PLUG (22) Oil switching solenoid valve RH T4: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(8) Spark plug pipe gasket (23) Oil switching solenoid valve T5: 17 (1.7, 12.5)
holder RH
(9) Cylinder head RH (24) Gasket T6: 18 (1.8, 13.3)
(10) Cylinder head gasket (25) Oil temperature sensor T7: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(11) Cylinder head LH (26) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil T8: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-61, INSTAL-
pressure switch RH LATION, Cylinder Head.>
(12) Camshaft LH (27) Oil switching solenoid valve LH T9: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-54, INSTAL-
LATION, Valve Rocker Assem-
bly.>
(13) Camshaft cap LH (28) Oil switching solenoid valve
holder LH
(14) Oil filler cap (29) Gasket
(15) Gasket (30) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil
pressure switch LH
ME(H4SO)-8
General Description
MECHANICAL
4. VALVE ROCKER ASSY
T2
T3
(1)
(1)
T1
(5)
(2)
(2)
(4)
T2 (3)
(3)
T2
T3
ME-02691
(1) Intake valve rocker ASSY (4) Exhaust rocker shaft Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Valve rocker nut (5) Exhaust valve rocker arm T1: 6 (0.6, 4.4)
(3) Valve rocker adjusting screw T2: 9.75 (1.0, 7.2)
T3: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
ME(H4SO)-9
General Description
MECHANICAL
5. CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE ASSEMBLY
(1) (1)
(4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

(3)
(2)
(2)
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(3)
(4)
(9)
(6)
(7)
(3) (8)
(4)
(9)
(6)
(7)
(8)
ME-04786
(1) Exhaust valve (4) Valve spring seat (7) Retainer

(2) Intake valve (5) Intake valve oil seal (8) Retainer key
(3) Valve guide (6) Valve spring (9) Exhaust valve oil seal
ME(H4SO)-10
General Description
MECHANICAL
6. CYLINDER BLOCK
T5
T2
T6 (31) T2
(1)
(5)
(7) T10
(32)
(2) (3) (6)
(29) (4)
T2 T6
(32)
T9 T2
(10) (28)
(8) (11)
(9) T2
(10)
(4)
T2 (3)
T6
(27) (15)
(10) (28)
(4)
(14) T8
T9
(26)
T9
T3 (23) (29)
T2
(16) (3)
(10) T2 (22) (12)
(17) (33)
T6
T10
(35) (38) (34) T2
(37) T2
(24)
T4
T5 T2
(21)
(36)
(13)
(25)
(30)
(18)
T1
(20)
T7
(19)
ME-04941
ME(H4SO)-11
General Description
MECHANICAL
(1) Oil pressure switch (18) Oil pan (35) O-ring

(2) Cylinder block RH (19) Drain plug (36) Oil drain pipe
(3) Service hole plug (20) Drain plug gasket (37) O-ring
(4) Gasket (21) Oil level gauge guide (38) Oil level switch
(5) Oil separator cover (22) Water pump sealing
(6) Water by-pass pipe (23) Oil filter Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(7) Oil pump (24) Gasket T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(8) Front oil seal (25) Water pump hose T2: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(9) Rear oil seal (26) Plug T3: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(10) O-ring (27) Seal T4: First 12 (1.2, 8.9)
Second 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(11) Service hole cover (28) Seal washer T5: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(12) Cylinder block LH (29) Washer T6: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(13) Water pump (30) O-ring T7: 41.7 (4.3, 30.8)
(14) Baffle plate (31) Engine rear hanger T8: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
(15) Oil filter connector (32) Oil pump seal T9: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(16) Oil strainer (33) Oil level gauge T10: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-72, INSTAL-
LATION, Cylinder Block.>
(17) Cylinder block lower (34) O-ring
ME(H4SO)-12
General Description
MECHANICAL
7. CRANKSHAFT AND PISTON
(2)
T2
(1)
(3)
T3
(10)
(4)
(9)
(5)
(6) (12)
(7)
(10) (8) (13)
(11)
T1 (15)
(13)
(14) (14)
(11)
(13) T1
(13) (8) (10)

(16)
(7)
(6)
(12) (5)
(10)
(9)
(19)
(18)
(17)
(18)
(17)
ME-04166
(1) Reinforcement (CVT model) (9) Piston pin (17) Crankshaft bearing #1, #3
(2) Drive plate (CVT model) (10) Snap ring (18) Crankshaft bearing #2, #4
(3) Flywheel (MT model) (11) Connecting rod nut (19) Crankshaft bearing #5
(4) Ball bearing (MT model) (12) Connecting rod
(5) Top ring (13) Connecting rod bearing Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(6) Second ring (14) Connecting rod cap T1: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
(7) Oil ring (15) Crankshaft T2: <Ref. to CVT-132, INSTALLA-
TION, Drive Plate.>
(8) Piston (16) Woodruff key T3: <Ref. to CL-14, INSTALLATION,
Flywheel.>
ME(H4SO)-13
General Description
MECHANICAL
8. ENGINE MOUNTING
T4 (3)
T1
B
T4
A (2)
T3
(1)
T2
T4
ME-04465
(1) Front mounting bracket (3) Engine mounting bracket Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Front cushion rubber T1: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
T2: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
T3: 58 (5.9, 42.8)
T4: 60 (6.1, 44.3)
ME(H4SO)-14
General Description
MECHANICAL
C: CAUTION
• Wear appropriate work clothing, including a cap, protective goggles and protective shoes when performing
any work.
• Remove contamination including dirt and corrosion before removal, installation or disassembly.
• Keep the disassembled parts in order and protect them from dust and dirt.
• Before removal, installation or disassembly, be sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary removal, in-
stallation, disassembly and replacement.
• Vehicle components are extremely hot after driving. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts.
• Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
• Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified points.
• Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from the bat-
tery.
• All parts should be thoroughly cleaned, paying special attention to engine oil passages, pistons and bear-
ings.
• Rotating parts and sliding parts such as piston, bearing and gear should be coated with oil prior to assem-
bly.
• Be careful not to let oil, grease or coolant contact the timing belt, clutch disc and flywheel.
• All removed parts, if to be reused, should be reinstalled in the original positions and directions.
• Bolts, nuts and washers should be replaced with new parts as required.
• Even if necessary inspections have been made in advance, proceed with assembly work while making re-
checks.
• Remove or install the engine in an area where chain hoists, lifting devices, etc. are available for ready use.
• Be sure not to damage coated surfaces of body panels with tools, or not to stain seats and windows with
coolant or oil. Place a cover over fender, as required, for protection.
• Prior to starting work, prepare the following:
Service tools, clean cloth, containers to catch coolant and oil, wire ropes, chain hoist, transmission jacks, etc.
• Lift up or lower the vehicle when necessary. Make sure to support the correct positions.
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing cam sprocket.
WRENCH (LH side)
NOTE:
CAM SPROCKET WRENCH (499207100) can
also be used.
ST18231AA010
1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for various inspections.
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
ME(H4SO)-15
General Description
MECHANICAL

498267800 CYLINDER HEAD • Used for replacing valve guides.
TABLE • Used for removing and installing valve spring.
ST-498267800
498277200 STOPPER SET Used for installing automatic transmission
assembly to engine.
ST-498277200
498457000 ENGINE STAND Used together with ENGINE STAND
ADAPTER RH (499817100).
ST-498457000
ADAPTER LH (499817100).
ST-498457100
498747300 PISTON GUIDE Used for installing piston in cylinder.
ST-498747300
ME(H4SO)-16
General Description
MECHANICAL

498857100 VALVE OIL SEAL Used for press-fitting of intake and exhaust valve
GUIDE guide oil seals.
ST-498857100
499017100 PISTON PIN GUIDE Used for installing piston pin, piston and con-
necting rod.
ST-499017100
499037100 CONNECTING ROD Used for removing and installing connecting rod
BUSHING bushing.
REMOVER AND
INSTALLER
ST-499037100
499587200 CRANKSHAFT OIL • Used for installing crankshaft oil seal.
SEAL INSTALLER • Used together with CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
GUIDE (499597100).
ST-499587200
499587500 OIL SEAL • Used for installing the camshaft oil seal.
INSTALLER • Used together with OIL SEAL GUIDE
(499597000).
ST-499587500
ME(H4SO)-17
General Description
MECHANICAL

499587700 CAMSHAFT OIL Used for installing cylinder head plug.
SEAL INSTALLER
ST-499587700
18320AA010 PISTON PIN • Used for removing piston pin.
REMOVER ASSY • PISTON PIN REMOVER ASSY (499097700)
can also be used.
ST18320AA010
499207400 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing cam sprocket.
WRENCH (RH side)
ST-499207400
499497000 TORX® PLUS Used for removing and installing camshaft cap.
ST-499497000
499587100 OIL SEAL Used for installing oil pump oil seal.
INSTALLER
ST-499587100
ME(H4SO)-18
General Description
MECHANICAL

499597000 OIL SEAL GUIDE • Used for installing the camshaft oil seal.
• Used together with CAMSHAFT OIL SEAL
INSTALLER (499587500).
ST-499597000
SEAL GUIDE • Used together with CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
ST-499597100
499718000 VALVE SPRING Used for removing and installing valve spring.
REMOVER
ST-499718000
499767200 VALVE GUIDE Used for removing valve guides.
REMOVER
ST-499767200
499767400 VALVE GUIDE Used for reaming valve guides.
REAMER
ST-499767400
ME(H4SO)-19
General Description
MECHANICAL

499767700 VALVE GUIDE Used for installing valve guides. (Intake side)
ADJUSTER
ST-499767700
499767800 VALVE GUIDE Used for installing valve guides. (Exhaust side)
ADJUSTER
ST-499767800
499817100 ENGINE STAND • Stand used for engine disassembly and
assembly.
• Used together with ENGINE STAND
ADAPTER RH (498457000) & LH (498457100).
ST-499817100
499977100 CRANK PULLEY Used for removing and installing the crank pulley.
WRENCH (MT model)
ST-499977100
499977400 CRANK PULLEY Used for removing and installing the crank pulley.
WRENCH (CVT model)
ST-499977400
ME(H4SO)-20
General Description
MECHANICAL

499987500 CRANKSHAFT Used for rotating crankshaft.
SOCKET
ST-499987500
18854AA000 ANGLE GAUGE Used for installing the crank pulley.
ST18854AA000
42099AE000 QUICK CONNEC- Used for disconnecting quick connector of the
TOR RELEASE engine compartment.
ST42099AE000
18471AA000 FUEL PIPE Used for inspecting the fuel pressure.
ADAPTER
ST18471AA000
42075AG690 Fuel hose Used for inspecting the fuel pressure.
NOTE:
This is the SUBARU genuine part.
ST42075AG690
ME(H4SO)-21
General Description
MECHANICAL

18354AA000 VALVE ROCKER Used for installing the valve rocker assembly
HOLDER (intake). (2-piece set)
ST18354AA000
18258AA000 SPRING Used for installing the valve rocker assembly
INSTALLER (intake).
ST18258AA000
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Compression gauge Used for measuring compression.
Vacuum gauge Used for measuring intake manifold vacuum.
Oil pressure gauge Used for measuring engine oil pressure.
Fuel pressure gauge Used for measuring fuel pressure.
Timing light Used for measuring ignition timing.
ME(H4SO)-22
Compression
MECHANICAL
2. Compression 11) Crank the engine by starter motor and read the
value when the needle of the compression gauge
A: INSPECTION becomes stable.
CAUTION: NOTE:
After warming-up, engine becomes very hot. Be • Perform at least two measurements per cylinder,
careful not to burn yourself during measure- and make sure that the values are correct.
ment. • If the compression pressure is out of standard,
1) After warming-up the engine, turn the ignition check or adjust the pistons, valves and cylinders.
switch to OFF. Compression (fully open throttle):
2) Make sure that the battery is fully charged. Standard
3) Remove the fuse of fuel pump from main fuse 1,020 — 1,275 kPa (10.4 — 13.0 kgf/cm2,
box. 148 — 185 psi)
Difference between cylinders
49 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2, 7 psi) or less
FU-04800
4) Start the engine and run it until it stalls.

5) After the engine stalls, crank it for five more sec-
onds.
6) Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
7) Remove all spark plugs. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-3,
REMOVAL, Spark Plug.>
8) Fully open the throttle valve.
9) Check the starter motor for satisfactory perfor-
mance and operation.
10) Install the compression gauge to the spark plug
hole.
NOTE:
When using a screw-in type compression gauge,
the screw should be less than 18 mm (0.71 in) long.
ME-00192
ME(H4SO)-23
Idle Speed
MECHANICAL
3. Idle Speed
A: INSPECTION
1) Before checking the idle speed, check the fol-
lowing item:
(1) Check the air cleaner element is free from
clogging, ignition timing is correct, spark plugs
are in good condition, and hoses are connected
properly.
(2) Check the malfunction indicator light does
not illuminate.
2) Warm up the engine.
3) Read the engine idle speed using Subaru Select
Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, READ CUR-
RENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE),
OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
NOTE:
• Idle speed cannot be adjusted manually, be-
cause the idle speed is automatically adjusted.
• If idle speed is out of standard, refer to the Gen-
eral Diagnosis Table under “Engine Control Sys-
tem”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic
Procedure.>
(1) Check the idle speed when no-loaded.
(Headlight, heater fan, rear defroster, radiator
fan, A/C and etc. are OFF)
Idle speed (No load, and for CVT model, select
lever in “P” or “N” range, for MT model, gear
shift lever in neutral position.):
Standard
675±100 rpm (CVT model)
650±100 rpm (MT model)
(2) Check the idle speed when loaded. (Turn
the A/C switch to “ON” and operate the com-
pressor for at least one minute before measure-
ment.)
Idle speed (A/C on, and for CVT model, select
lever in “P” or “N” range, for MT model, gear
shift lever in neutral position.):
Standard
700 — 850 rpm
ME(H4SO)-24
Ignition Timing
MECHANICAL
4. Ignition Timing
A: INSPECTION
CAUTION:
After warming-up, engine becomes very hot. Be
careful not to burn yourself at measurement.
1) Before checking the ignition timing, check the
following item:
clogging, spark plugs are in good condition, and
hoses are connected properly.
not illuminate.
3) Read the ignition timing using Subaru Select
Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, READ CUR-
RENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE),
NOTE:
If ignition timing is out of standard, check the igni-
tion control system. Refer to “Engine Control Sys-
tem”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic
Procedure.>
Ignition timing [BTDC/rpm]:
Standard
15°±10°/675 (CVT model)
10°±10°/650 (MT model)
ME(H4SO)-25
Intake Manifold Vacuum

MECHANICAL
5. Intake Manifold Vacuum

A: INSPECTION
2) Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from
the intake manifold, and attach the vacuum gauge.
ME-04467
3) Keep the engine at idle speed and read the vac-

uum gauge indication.
NOTE:
Condition of engine inside can be diagnosed by ob-
serving the behavior of the vacuum gauge needle
as described in table below.
Intake manifold vacuum (at idling, A/C OFF):
Standard
–60.0 kPa (–450 mmHg, –17.72 inHg) or
more
Diagnosis of engine condition by inspection of intake manifold vacuum
Vacuum gauge needle behavior Possible engine condition
1. Needle is steady but lower than standard value. This tendency Leakage around intake manifold gasket, disconnection or
becomes more evident as engine temperature rises. damage of vacuum hose
2. Needle intermittently drops to position lower than standard value. Leakage around cylinder
3. Needle drops suddenly and intermittently from standard value. Sticky valve
4. When engine speed is gradually increased, needle begins to Weak or broken valve springs
vibrate rapidly at certain speed, and then vibration increases as
engine speed increases.
5. Needle vibrates above and below standard value in narrow range. Defective ignition system
ME(H4SO)-26
Engine Oil Pressure

MECHANICAL
6. Engine Oil Pressure Engine oil pressure:

Standard
A: INSPECTION 98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14 psi) or more (at 600
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. rpm)
294 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2, 43 psi) or more (at
5,000 rpm)
IG-02107
2) Remove the oil pressure switch. <Ref. to

LU(H4SO)-24, REMOVAL, Oil Pressure Switch.>
3) Install the oil pressure gauge to cylinder block.
ME-00196
IG-02107
5) Start the engine, and check the oil pressure.

NOTE:
• Standard value is based on an engine oil temper-
ature of 80°C (176°F).
• If the oil pressure is out of specification, check oil
pump, oil filter and lubrication line. <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-43, INSPECTION, Engine Lubrication
System Trouble in General.>
• If the oil pressure warning light is ON and oil
pressure is within specification, check the oil pres-
sure switch. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-43, INSPECTION,
Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General.>
ME(H4SO)-27
Fuel Pressure
MECHANICAL
7. Fuel Pressure 5) Check the fuel pressure after warming up the en-
gine.
A: INSPECTION NOTE:
CAUTION: • The fuel pressure gauge registers 10 to 20 kPa
• Before removing the fuel pressure gauge, re- (0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2, 1 to 3 psi) higher than standard
lease the fuel pressure. values during high-altitude operations.
• Be careful not to spill fuel. • Check or replace the fuel pump and fuel delivery
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a container line if the fuel pressure is out of the standard.
or cloth. Fuel pressure:
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)- Standard
48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- 340 — 400 kPa (3.5 — 4.1 kgf/cm2, 49 — 58
DURE, Fuel.> psi)
2) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler 6) After inspection, install the related parts in the
cap. reverse order of removal.
3) Disconnect the fuel delivery hose and connect
the fuel pressure gauge.
CAUTION:
or cloth.
(1) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push
ST1 in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect
the quick connector of the fuel delivery hose.
LEASE
ST
FU-05602
(2) Connect the fuel pressure gauge with ST2

and ST3.
NOTE:
ST2 is a SUBARU genuine part.
ST2 42075AG690 FUEL HOSE
ST3 18471AA000 FUEL PIPE ADAPTER
ST3
ST2
ME-04897
4) Start the engine.
ME(H4SO)-28
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
8. Valve Clearance 8) When inspecting #2 and #4 cylinders

(1) Disconnect the ignition coil from spark plug
A: INSPECTION on LH side. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-3, LH SIDE, RE-
MOVAL, Spark Plug.>
CAUTION:
If engine oil is spilt onto the exhaust pipe, wipe (2) Place a suitable container under the vehicle.
it off with cloth to avoid emission of smoke or (3) Disconnect the PCV hose from the rocker
causing a fire. cover LH.
(4) Remove the bolts, then remove the rocker
NOTE: cover LH.
Inspection of valve clearance should be performed 9) Set #1 cylinder piston to top dead center of com-
while engine is cold. pression stroke by rotating the crank pulley clock-
1) Lift up the vehicle. wise using the socket wrench.
NOTE:
3) Lower the vehicle. When the arrow mark (A) on cam sprocket LH is at
the top position, the #1 cylinder piston is at top
dead center of the compression stroke.
(A)
IG-02107
ME-00200
5) Remove the timing belt cover LH.
10) Measure #1 cylinder valve clearance by using
thickness gauge (A).
NOTE:
• Insert the thickness gauge (A) in as horizontally
as possible with respect to the valve stem end face.
• Lift up the vehicle, and then measure the ex-
haust valve clearances.
• If the measured value is not within the inspection
value, take notes of the value in order to adjust the
valve clearance later on.
ME-00199
Valve clearance (inspection value):
6) Remove the fuel injector. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
Intake
34, REMOVAL, Fuel Injector.>
0.20±0.04 mm (0.0079±0.0016 in)
7) When inspecting #1 and #3 cylinders
Exhaust
(1) Disconnect the ignition coil from spark plug
on RH side. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-3, RH SIDE, 0.25±0.04 mm (0.0098±0.0016 in)
REMOVAL, Spark Plug.> (A)
(2) Place a suitable container under the vehicle.

(3) Disconnect the PCV hose from the rocker
cover RH.
(4) Remove the bolts, then remove the rocker
cover RH.
ME-02696
ME(H4SO)-29
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
11) Measure the valve clearance in #3, #2 and #4 2) Adjust the #1 cylinder valve clearance.
cylinder in the same measurement procedure as #1 (1) Loosen the valve rocker nut and screw.
cylinder in this order. (2) Set a suitable thickness gauge.
NOTE: (3) While noting the valve clearance, tighten the
• Be sure to set the cylinder pistons to their re- valve rocker adjusting screw.
spective top dead centers on compression stroke (4) When the specified valve clearance is ob-
before measuring valve clearances. tained, tighten the valve rocker nut.
• By rotating the crank pulley clockwise and turn- NOTE:
ing the cam sprocket LH at every 90° from the state • Insert a thickness gauge in a direction as hori-
that #1 cylinder piston is on the top dead center of zontal as possible with respect to the valve stem
compression stroke, #3, #2 and #4 cylinder pistons end face.
come to the top dead center of compression stroke • Lift up the vehicle and adjust the exhaust valve
in this order. clearances.
12) If necessary, adjust the valve clearance. <Ref.
to ME(H4SO)-30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clear- Valve clearance (adjustment value):
ance.> Intake
13) After inspection, install the related parts in the 0.20±0.04 mm (0.0079±0.0016 in)
reverse order of removal. Exhaust
0.25±0.04 mm (0.0098±0.0016 in)
NOTE:
Use a new rocker cover gasket. Tightening torque:
9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
B: ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION:
causing a fire.
NOTE:
Adjustment of valve clearance should be per-
formed while engine is cold.
1) Set #1 cylinder piston to top dead center of com-
pression stroke by rotating the crank pulley clock- ME-00203
wise using the socket wrench. 3) Adjust the valve clearance in #3, #2 and #4 cyl-
NOTE: inder in the same adjustment procedure as #1 cyl-
When the arrow mark (A) on cam sprocket LH is at inder in this order.
the top position, the #1 cylinder piston is at top NOTE:
dead center of the compression stroke. • Be sure to set the cylinder pistons to their re-
spective top dead centers on compression stroke
(A)
before adjusting valve clearances.
• By rotating the crank pulley clockwise and turn-
ing the cam sprocket LH at every 90° from the state
that #1 cylinder piston is on the top dead center of
compression stroke, #3, #2 and #4 cylinder pistons
come to the top dead center of compression stroke
in this order.
4) Ensure the valve clearances of each cylinder are
ME-00200
within specifications. If necessary, readjust the
valve clearances.
5) After adjustment, install the related parts in the
NOTE:
Use a new rocker cover gasket.
ME(H4SO)-30
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
9. Engine Assembly 12) Remove the bolt, and disconnect the bulkhead
harness connector from the engine harness con-
A: REMOVAL nector and rear engine hanger.
1) Change the front hood damper mounting posi-
tion from (A) to (B), and completely open the front
hood.
Tightening torque:
20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(A) (A)
(B) (B) FU-05129
13) Slide the engine harness connector in the di-

rection of the arrow and remove it from the rear en-
gine hanger.
ME-04396
2) Remove the V-belt covers.

3) Collect the refrigerant from A/C system. <Ref. to
AC-20, Refrigerant Recovery Procedure.>
DURE, Fuel.>
FU-05247
14) Disconnect connector (A) and terminal (B) from

the generator, and remove the generator cord from
clip (C).
15) Disconnect connector (D) from the A/C com-
pressor.
(A) (B) (C)
IG-02107
cap.
7) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)- (D)
ME-04240
9) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-19, 16) Remove the clip which secure the generator
REMOVAL, Radiator.> cord to the intake manifold protector LH.
10) Remove the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
ME-04241
ME(H4SO)-31
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
17) Disconnect the following hoses. 20) Disconnect the ground cable on the engine
(1) A/C pressure hose <Ref. to AC-68, RE- side.
MOVAL, Hose and Pipe.>
(2) Brake booster vacuum hose
ME-04533
ME-04898
(3) Heater inlet hose and heater outlet hose
ME-03377

22) Separate the torque converter clutch from the
ME-04216 drive plate. (CVT model)
18) Remove the power steering pump. (1) Remove the throttle body. <Ref. to
(1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- FU(H4SO)-15, REMOVAL, Throttle Body.>
42, REMOVAL, V-belt.> (2) Remove the manifold absolute pressure
(2) Disconnect the connector (A) from power sensor. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-32, REMOVAL,
steering pump, and remove the power steering Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor.>
pump together with the power steering pump (3) Remove the service hole plug.
bracket from engine and stopper rod. (4) Insert the wrench into the crank pulley bolt,
and rotate the crank pulley to remove the four
bolts which hold torque converter clutch to the
(A) drive plate.
ME-04908
(3) Mount the power steering pump together

with the power steering pump bracket on RH
ME-00212
side wheel apron.
19) Lift up the vehicle. 23) Disconnect the fuel delivery hose (A) and evap-
oration hose (B).
CAUTION:
or cloth.
ME(H4SO)-32
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
(1) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push 27) Lift up the vehicle.
ST in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect CAUTION:
the quick connector of the fuel delivery hose
When lifting up the vehicle, raise up wire ropes
(A).
at the same time.
28) Remove the bolts which secure the engine
LEASE
mounting onto the engine, and remove the engine
(2) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapo- mounting.
ration hose (B) from the evaporation pipe.
(A)
ST
(B)
ME-04247
FU-04950
29) Remove the bolts and nuts which hold the low-
24) Support the engine with a lifting device and er side of transmission to the engine.
wire ropes.
• CVT model
LU-00222
ME-04228
25) Remove the stopper rod.
• MT model
ME-04422
MT-00077
26) Remove the bolt and nut which secure engine
mounting to the cradle.
CAUTION:
When lifting down the vehicle, lower wire ropes
at the same time.
ME-04246
ME(H4SO)-33
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
31) Support the transmission with a garage jack. • MT model

NOTE:
Fine adjustment of the transmission height can be
performed with this operation.
(A)
(B)
MT-01524
33) Remove the engine from vehicle.

(1) Slightly raise the engine.
ME-04959 (2) Adjust the height of the transmission with
garage jack.
(A) Transmission (3) Move the engine horizontally until main
(B) Garage jack shaft is withdrawn from clutch cover. (MT mod-
el)
32) Separation of engine and transmission (4) Slowly move the engine away from engine
CAUTION: compartment.
Before removing the engine away from trans- NOTE:
mission, check to be sure no work has been Be careful not to damage adjacent parts or body
overlooked. panels with crank pulley, oil level gauge, etc.
(1) Remove the starter. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-9,
REMOVAL, Starter.> B: INSTALLATION
(2) Attach the ST to the torque converter clutch 1) Apply a small amount of grease to splines of
case. (CVT model) main shaft. (MT model)
ST 498277200 STOPPER SET
Grease:
NICHIMOLY N-130 or equivalent
2) Position the engine in engine compartment and
align it with transmission.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage adjacent parts or body
panels with crank pulley, oil level gauge, etc.
3) Tighten the bolts which hold upper side of trans-
ST mission to engine.
ME-04960 Tightening torque:
(3) Remove the bolts which hold the upper side 50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
of the transmission to the engine. • CVT model
• CVT model
ME-04227
ME-04227
ME(H4SO)-34
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
• MT model • MT model
MT-01524 MT-00077
4) Remove the garage jack. 9) Set the engine mounting, and tighten the bolts
5) Remove the ST from torque converter clutch which hold engine mounting to the engine.
case. (CVT model)
Tightening torque:
NOTE: 58 N·m (5.9 kgf-m, 42.8 ft-lb)
Be careful not to drop the ST into the torque con-
verter clutch case when removing the ST.
ST 498277200 STOPPER SET
ME-04247
ST 10) Lower the vehicle.

ME-04960 CAUTION:
6) Install the starter. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-9, IN- at the same time.
STALLATION, Starter.>
11) Attach the bolts and nuts which secure engine
CAUTION:
Tightening torque:
60 N·m (6.1 kgf-m, 44.3 ft-lb)
at the same time.
8) Attach the bolts and nuts which hold lower side
of the transmission to engine.
Tightening torque:
50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
• CVT model
ME-04246
ME-04228
ME(H4SO)-35
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
12) Install the stopper rod. 15) Lift up the vehicle.

Tightening torque: 16) Connect the ground cable.
36 N·m (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb) Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
ME-04422
13) Remove the lifting device and wire ropes. ME-04533
LU-00222 ME-03377
14) Install the torque converter clutch to drive plate. 17) Lower the vehicle.
(CVT model) 18) Install the power steering pump.
(1) Insert the wrench into the crank pulley bolt, (1) Install the power steering pump together
and rotate the crank pulley to attach the four with the power steering pump bracket to engine
bolts which hold torque converter clutch to the and stopper rod, and connect the connector (A)
drive plate. to the power steering pump.
NOTE: Tightening torque:
Be careful not to drop bolts into the torque convert- Refer to “COMPONENT” of “STARTING/
er clutch case. CHARGING SYSTEMS” for the tightening
Tightening torque: torque. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-7, GENERATOR
BRACKET, COMPONENT, General Descrip-
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
tion.>
(A)
ME-00212
ME-04908
(2) Fit the plug to service hole.
(2) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42,
(3) Install the throttle body. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
INSTALLATION, V-belt.>
15, INSTALLATION, Throttle Body.>
(4) Install the manifold absolute pressure sen-
sor. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-32, INSTALLATION,
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor.>
ME(H4SO)-36
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
19) Connect the following hoses. 25) Install the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-20, IN-
(1) Fuel delivery hose STALLATION, Radiator.>
(2) Evaporation hose 26) Install the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to
(3) Heater inlet hose and heater outlet hose IN(H4SO)-8, INSTALLATION, Air Intake Boot.>
(4) Brake booster vacuum hose 27) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-9,
(5) A/C pressure hose <Ref. to AC-68, INSTAL- INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.>
LATION, Hose and Pipe.> 28) Connect the battery ground terminal.
20) Install the clip which secure the generator cord
to the intake manifold protector LH.
IG-02107
29) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-13,

ME-04241 FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
21) Connect connector (D) to the A/C compressor. MENT, Engine Coolant.>
22) Install the generator cord to clip (C), and con- 30) Charge the A/C system with refrigerant. <Ref.
nect connector (A) and terminal (B) to the genera- to AC-21, PROCEDURE, Refrigerant Charging
tor. Procedure.>
31) Check the CVTF level and replenish it if neces-
Tightening torque: sary. (CVT model) <Ref. to CVT-37, ADJUST-
15 N·m (1.5 kgf-m, 11.1 ft-lb) MENT, CVTF.>
(A) (B) (C) 32) Install the V-belt cover.
tion from (B) to (A), and close the front hood.
Tightening torque:
20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(D)
(A) (A)
ME-04240 (B) (B)

23) Connect the engine harness connector to the
bulkhead harness connector, attach it to the rear
engine hanger, and fasten with bolt.
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) ME-04396
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the pipes, hoses, connectors and
clamps are securely connected.
2) Check that the engine coolant is up to specified
level.
3) Check CVTF is at the specified level. (CVT mod-
el)
4) Start the engine and check for exhaust gas leak-
age, engine coolant leakage, fuel leakage, noise or
FU-05129
vibration.
24) Install the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
Pipe.>
ME(H4SO)-37
Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL
10.Engine Mounting 9) Remove the stopper rod.
A: REMOVAL
hood.
Tightening torque:
20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(A) (A)
ME-04422

(B) (B) mounting to the cradle.
ME-04396
ME-04249

CAUTION:
at the same time.
IG-02107 mounting onto the engine, and remove the engine
3) Remove the radiator main fan motor assembly mounting.
and radiator sub fan motor assembly. <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-23, REMOVAL, Radiator Main Fan and
Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-24, REMOVAL,
Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
7) Lower the vehicle. ME-04247
8) Support the engine with a lifting device and wire
ropes.
LU-00222
ME(H4SO)-38
Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION 5) Remove the lifting device and wire ropes.

1) Set the engine mounting, and tighten the bolts
which hold engine mounting to the engine.
Tightening torque:
58 N·m (5.9 kgf-m, 42.8 ft-lb)
LU-00222

Pipe.>
ME-04247
2) Lower the vehicle. LATION, Front Under Cover.>
CAUTION: 9) Lower the vehicle.
When lifting down the vehicle, lower wire ropes 10) Install the radiator main fan motor assembly
at the same time. and radiator sub fan motor assembly. <Ref. to
3) Attach the bolts and nuts which secure engine CO(H4SO)-23, INSTALLATION, Radiator Main
mounting to the cradle. Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-24, IN-
STALLATION, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
Tightening torque: 11) Connect the ground cable to battery.
60 N·m (6.1 kgf-m, 44.3 ft-lb)
IG-02107
ME-04249
4) Install the stopper rod. tion from (B) to (A), and close the front hood.
36 N·m (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb) 20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(A) (A)
(B) (B)
ME-04422 ME-04396
ME(H4SO)-39
Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL
C: DISASSEMBLY 2) Install the front cushion rubber to the engine

mounting bracket.
1) Remove the front cushion rubber from the en-
gine mounting bracket. Tightening torque:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
ME-04251
2) Remove the front cushion rubber from the front ME-04251
mounting bracket. E: INSPECTION

Check that the engine mounting does not have de-
formation, cracks and any other damage.
ME-04252
D: ASSEMBLY
1) Install the front cushion rubber to the front
mounting bracket.
Tightening torque:
45 N·m (4.6 kgf-m, 33.2 ft-lb)
ME-04252
ME(H4SO)-40
Preparation for Overhaul

MECHANICAL
11.Preparation for Overhaul

A: PROCEDURE
1) After removing the engine from vehicle body, at-
tach the ST to the engine as shown in the figure.
ST1 498457000 ENGINE STAND ADAPTER
RH
LH
ST3 499817100 ENGINE STAND
ST3 ST1
ST2
ME-00221
2) In this section the procedures described under

each index are all connected and stated in order.
Engine overhaul will be completed when you go
through all steps in the procedure.
Therefore, in this section, to conduct the particular
procedure within the flow of a section, you need to
go back and conduct the procedure described pre-
viously in order to do that particular procedure.
ME(H4SO)-41
V-belt
MECHANICAL
12.V-belt 3) Remove the bolt securing the idler pulley to the

A/C compressor bracket, and remove the idler pul-
A: REMOVAL ley.
NOTE:
When replacing the single part, perform the work
with the engine installed to vehicle body.
1. V-BELT
1) Remove the V-belt covers.
3) Attach the tool to the V-belt tensioner assembly,
and rotate the tool clockwise to loosen and remove ME-04385
the V-belt.
B: INSTALLATION
1. V-BELT
CAUTION:
• When reusing the V-belt, wipe off dust and
water with cloth.
• Do not use the V-belt if there is any oil, grease
or coolant on the belt.
• Be careful not to rub the V-belt end surface
with bare hands; exposed core may cause inju-
ry.
• Wipe off any dust, oil and water on the groove
of each pulley with cloth.
(E)
(F) (G)
(D)
(B)
ME-04383 (A)
(C)
2. V-BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY AND
IDLER PULLEY ME-04386
1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42, V-
(A) V-belt
BELT, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
(B) V-belt tensioner ASSY
2) Remove the bolt securing the V-belt tensioner
assembly to the power steering pump bracket, and (C) Crank pulley
remove the V-belt tensioner assembly. (D) Idler pulley
(E) Generator pulley
(F) Power steering pump pulley
(G) A/C compressor pulley
ME-04384
ME(H4SO)-42
V-belt
MECHANICAL
2. V-BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY AND C: INSPECTION

IDLER PULLEY 1) Check the V-belt for cracks, tear or wear.
Install in the reverse order of removal. 2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-
Tightening torque: 9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb) 3) Check the V-belt tensioner assembly and idler
pulley for deformation, cracks or other damages.
4) Check that the V-belt tension indicator (A) is
within the limit (B).
(B) (A)
ME-04385
Tightening torque:
20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
ME-04384
ME-04387
ME(H4SO)-43
Crank Pulley
MECHANICAL
13.Crank Pulley (2) Draw reference lines (A) and (B) using a
marker to set the socket to the crank pulley bolt
A: REMOVAL as shown in the figure.
NOTE: ST 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
(CVT MODEL)
with the engine installed to vehicle body. ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
(MT MODEL)
1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42,
REMOVAL, V-belt.> NOTE:
2) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and remove Set the socket onto the crank pulley bolt so that ref-
the crank pulley bolt. erence lines (A) and (B) is visible.
ST 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
(CVT MODEL)
(MT MODEL)
(A) (B) (A) (B)

(a) (b)
ST
ME-04524
3) Remove the crank pulley.

B: INSTALLATION
ST
1. METHOD WITHOUT ANGLE GAUGE
(A)
1) Clean the crankshaft thread using compressed (B)
air.
ME-04945
2) Install the crank pulley.
3) Apply engine oil to the crank pulley bolt seat and (a) When using 6-point socket
thread. (b) When using 12-point socket
4) Tighten the crank pulley bolts.
(1) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and (3) Draw end line (C) on ST using a marker at
temporarily tighten the crank pulley bolt. the same position as reference line (B) was
ST 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH drawn on the socket in step (2).
(CVT MODEL) ST 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH (CVT MODEL)
(MT MODEL) ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
Tightening torque: (MT MODEL)
47 N·m (4.8 kgf-m, 34.7 ft-lb)
(C)
ST ST
(B)
ME-04527
ME-04525
ME(H4SO)-44
Crank Pulley
MECHANICAL
(4) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and (3) Set the ST2, use the ST1 to lock the crank
tighten the crank pulley bolt to the angle where pulley, and tighten the crank pulley bolt to the
reference line (A) and end line (C) are aligned. specified angle.
ST 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH ST1 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
(CVT MODEL) (CVT MODEL)
(MT MODEL) (MT MODEL)
NOTE: ST2 18854AA000 ANGLE GAUGE
It should be approx. 60° when reference line (A) NOTE:
and end line (C) are aligned. Attach the magnet used for securing the ST2 (AN-
Tightening angle: GLE GAUGE) to ST1.
60°±5° Tightening angle:
60°±5°
(C)
ST1
ST
(A) ST2
ME-04528
5) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42, IN- ME-04530
STALLATION, V-belt.> (4) Install the radiator main fan motor assembly
and radiator sub motor assembly. <Ref. to
2. METHOD WITH ANGLE GAUGE CO(H4SO)-23, INSTALLATION, Radiator Main
1) Clean the crankshaft thread using compressed air. Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-24,
2) Install the crank pulley. INSTALLATION, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan
3) Apply engine oil to the crank pulley bolt seat and Motor.>
thread. 5) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42, IN-
4) Tighten the crank pulley bolts. STALLATION, V-belt.>
(1) Remove the radiator main fan motor assem-
bly and radiator sub motor assembly. <Ref. to C: INSPECTION
CO(H4SO)-23, REMOVAL, Radiator Main Fan Check that the crank pulley has no deformation,
and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-24, RE- cracks or other damages.
MOVAL, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
(2) Use the ST1 to lock the crank pulley, and
temporarily tighten the crank pulley bolt.
ST1 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
(CVT MODEL)
(MT MODEL)
Tightening torque:
47 N·m (4.8 kgf-m, 34.7 ft-lb)
ST1
ME-04529
ME(H4SO)-45
Timing Belt Cover

MECHANICAL
14.Timing Belt Cover 3) Install the stopper rod.

Tightening torque:
A: REMOVAL 36 N·m (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb)
1) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
ME-04422
4) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-44,

INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
ME-04422
3) Remove the timing belt cover LH (A). C: INSPECTION

4) Remove the front timing belt cover (B). Check the timing belt cover for damage.
(A)
(B)
ME-04424
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the front timing belt cover (B).
Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
2) Install the timing belt cover LH (A).
Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
(A)
(B)
ME-04424
ME(H4SO)-46
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
15.Timing Belt 4) If the alignment mark or arrow mark (which indi-

cates the direction of rotation) on timing belt fade
A: REMOVAL away, put new marks before removing the timing
belt as shown in procedures below.
NOTE:
(1) Use the ST to turn crankshaft. Align the
• When replacing the single part, perform the work
mark (a) of sprocket to the mark (b) of oil pump,
and then ensure the right side cam sprocket
• When performing the work with the engine in-
mark (c), cam cap and cylinder head matching
stalled to body, the following parts must also be re-
surface (d) or left side cam sprocket mark (e),
moved/installed.
timing belt cover notch (f) are properly adjusted.
• Radiator main fan motor assembly <Ref. to
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET
CO(H4SO)-23, REMOVAL, Radiator Main Fan
and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-23, IN-
STALLATION, Radiator Main Fan and Fan Mo-
tor.>
• Radiator sub fan motor assembly <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-24, REMOVAL, Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-24, IN-
STALLATION, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Mo-
tor.>
• When performing the work with the engine in- ST
stalled to body, protect the radiator with cardboards ME-00231
or blankets.
1. TIMING BELT
(d)
2) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to (c)
ME(H4SO)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
3) Remove the timing belt guide. (MT model)
(b) (a)
(f)
ME-00065
(e)
ME-02533
ME(H4SO)-47
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
(2) Using white paint, put an alignment mark or 2. BELT IDLER AND AUTOMATIC BELT
an arrow mark on timing belts in relation to the TENSION ADJUSTER ASSEMBLY
crank sprocket and cam sprockets. 1) Remove the belt idler.
ME-02967
ME-03449
Z1: 46.8 teeth 2) Remove the automatic belt tension adjuster as-
Z2: 43.7 teeth sembly.
Z1 Z2
ME-00234
ME-00238
5) Remove the belt idler (A).
6) Remove the belt idler No. 2 (B). B: INSTALLATION
1. AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUST-
ER ASSEMBLY AND BELT IDLER
1) Prepare for installation of the automatic belt ten-
sion adjuster assembly.
CAUTION:
• Always use a vertical type pressing tool to
move the adjuster rod down.
• Do not use a lateral type vise.
(A) • Push the adjuster rod vertically.
(B) ME-02968
• Press-in the push adjuster rod gradually tak-
7) Remove the timing belt. ing three minutes or more.
• Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807
N (1,000 kgf, 2,205 lb).
• Push in the adjuster rod to the end face of the
cylinder. However, do not push in the adjuster
rod below the end face of the cylinder. Doing so
may damage the cylinder.
• Do not release the press pressure until stop-
per pin is completely inserted.
(1) Attach the automatic belt tension adjuster
ME-00236
assembly to vertical pressing tool.
(2) Slowly push in the adjuster rod with a pres-
sure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lbf) or more until
the adjuster rod is aligned with the stopper pin
hole in the cylinder.
ME(H4SO)-48
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
2. TIMING BELT
sion adjuster assembly. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48,
AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUSTER AS-
SEMBLY AND BELT IDLER, INSTALLATION,
Timing Belt.>
2) Align the mark (B) on oil pump with the mark (A)
on crank sprocket.
ME-00239
(A) (B)
(3) With a 2 mm (0.08 in) dia. stopper pin or a 2
mm (0.08 in) (nominal) dia. hex wrench inserted
into the stopper pin hole in cylinder, secure the
adjuster rod.
ME-03975
3) Turn the camshaft sprocket No. 2 using ST1,

and turn the camshaft sprocket No. 1 using ST2 so
that their alignment marks (A) come to top posi-
tions.
ST1 18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET
ME-00350 WRENCH
2) Install the automatic belt tension adjuster as- NOTE:
sembly. CAM SPROCKET WRENCH (499207100) can
also be used.
Tightening torque: ST2 499207400 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
(A)
ME-00243
ME-00241
4) While aligning the alignment mark (B) on timing
3) Install the belt idlers. belt with the mark (A) on sprockets, position the
Tightening torque: timing belt properly.
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
ME-00244
ME-03449
ME(H4SO)-49
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
5) Install the belt idler No. 2 (B). (2) Check and adjust the clearance between
timing belt and timing belt guide by using thick-
Tightening torque:
ness gauge.
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
6) Install the belt idler (A). Clearance:
1.0±0.5 mm (0.039±0.020 in)
Tightening torque:
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
ME-00246
(A)
(B) ME-02968 (3) Tighten the bolts mounting the timing belt
guide.
7) After ensuring the marks on timing belt and cam-
shaft sprockets are aligned, remove the stopper pin Tightening torque:
from belt tension adjuster. 9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
ME-00245 ME-00247
8) Install the timing belt guide. (MT model) 9) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
(1) Temporarily tighten the bolts mounting the 46, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cover.>
timing belt guide. 10) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-44,
ME-00230
ME(H4SO)-50
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
C: INSPECTION CAUTION:
1. TIMING BELT move the adjuster rod down.
1) Check the timing belt teeth for breaks, cracks or • Do not use a lateral type vise.
wear. If any fault is found, replace the timing belt. • Push the adjuster rod vertically.
2) Check the condition on the back surface of the • Press the adjuster rod gradually taking three
timing belt. If cracks are found, replace the timing minutes or more.
belt. • Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807
CAUTION: N (1,000 kgf, 2,205 lb).
• Be careful not to let oil, grease or coolant • Push in the adjuster rod to the end face of the
contact the timing belt. Remove quickly and cylinder. However, do not press the adjuster
thoroughly if this happens. rod below the end face of the cylinder. Doing so
• Do not bend the timing belt sharply. may damage the cylinder.
4) Measure the amount of adjuster rod protrusion
In radial diameter h: “H” from the end surface of the cylinder. If it is not
60 mm (2.36 in) or more within specifications, replace the automatic belt
tension adjuster assembly with a new part.
Amount of adjuster rod protrusion H:
5.2 — 6.2 mm (0.205 — 0.244 in)
h
ME-00248
2. AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUSTER

1) Visually check the oil seals for leaks, and rod
ends for abnormal wear and scratches. If neces- ME-00249
sary, replace the automatic belt tension adjuster 3. BELT TENSION PULLEY
assembly.
1) Check the mating surfaces of timing belt and
NOTE: contact point of adjuster rod for abnormal wear or
Slight traces of oil at rod’s oil seal does not indicate scratches. Replace the automatic belt tension ad-
a problem. juster assembly with a new part if faulty.
2) Check that the adjuster rod does not move when 2) Check the belt tension pulley for smooth rota-
a pressure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb) is applied to tion. Replace the automatic belt tension adjuster
it. This is to check adjuster rod stiffness. assembly with a new part if abnormal noise or ex-
3) If the adjuster rod is not stiff and moves freely cessive play occurs.
when applying 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb), check it us- 3) Check the belt tension pulley for grease leakage.
ing the following procedures:
(1) Slowly press the adjuster rod down to the 4. BELT IDLER
end surface of cylinder. Repeat this operation 1) Check the belt idler for smooth rotation. Replace
two to three times. if noise or excessive play occurs.
(2) With the adjuster rod moved all the way up, 2) Check the outer contacting surfaces of idler pul-
apply a pressure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb) to ley for abnormal wear and scratches.
it, and check the adjuster rod stiffness. 3) Check the belt idler for grease leakage.
(3) If the adjuster rod is not stiff and moves
down, replace the automatic belt tension adjust-
er assembly with a new part.
ME(H4SO)-51
Cam Sprocket
MECHANICAL
16.Cam Sprocket ST 18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH

NOTE:
A: REMOVAL CAM SPROCKET WRENCH (499207100) can
NOTE: also be used.
When replacing a single part, perform the work with Tightening torque:
the engine installed to body.
78 N·m (8.0 kgf-m, 57.5 ft-lb)
2) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
3) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-47,
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
4) Remove the camshaft position sensor. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-26, REMOVAL, Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
5) Use the ST to lock the cam sprocket, and re- ST
move the cam sprocket bolt. ME-00250
ST 18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH ST 499207400 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH
CAM SPROCKET WRENCH (499207100) can 78 N·m (8.0 kgf-m, 57.5 ft-lb)
also be used.
ST
ST ME-00251
ME-00250
3) Install the camshaft position sensor. <Ref. to
ST 499207400 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH FU(H4SO)-26, INSTALLATION, Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
ST 4) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48,
INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
5) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
46, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cover.>
C: INSPECTION
ME-00251
1) Check the cam sprocket teeth for abnormal wear
and scratches.
6) Remove the cam sprocket. 2) Make sure there is no free play between cam
B: INSTALLATION sprocket and key.
3) Check the cam sprocket protrusion used for sen-
1) Install the cam sprocket.
sor for damage and contamination of foreign mat-
2) Use the ST to lock the cam sprocket, and install ter.
the cam sprocket bolt.
NOTE:
• Do not confuse cam sprockets (LH) and (RH)
during installation.
• They can be distinguished by the L or R indica-
tion.
ME(H4SO)-52
Crank Sprocket
MECHANICAL
17.Crank Sprocket
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
When replacing a single part, perform the work with
4) Remove the crank sprocket.
ME-00103
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the crank sprocket.
ME-00103
2) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48,

C: INSPECTION
1) Check the crank sprocket teeth for abnormal
wear and scratches.
2) Make sure there is no free play between crank
sprocket and key.
3) Check the crank sprocket protrusion used for
sensor for damage and contamination of foreign
matter.
ME(H4SO)-53
Valve Rocker Assembly

MECHANICAL
18.Valve Rocker Assembly (d)

(a) (j) (h)
(b)
A: REMOVAL (f)
NOTE:
with the engine installed to vehicle body. Refer to
“Valve Clearance” for preparation procedures.
<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-29, Valve Clearance.> (c)
1) Remove the ignition coil. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-5, (e)
(g) (i)
REMOVAL, Ignition Coil.> ME-02975
2) Disconnect the PCV hose and remove the rock- (3) Remove the valve rocker assembly.
er cover.
3) Remove the valve rocker assembly. NOTE:
(1) Use the ST to rotate the spring stopper in Set the ST in the position shown in the drawing to
the direction of the arrow to remove it from ad- remove the intake valve rocker assembly.
juster pin. ST 18354AA000 VALVE ROCKER HOLDER
ST 18258AA000 SPRING INSTALLER
ST ST
ME-02794
ME-02704 B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the valve rocker assembly.
(1) Temporarily tighten the bolts equally in al-
phabetical order as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
(A) • Do not temporarily tighten the bolts (i) and (j).
• Set the ST in the position shown in the drawing to
(B) mount the intake valve rocker assembly.
ST 18354AA000 VALVE ROCKER HOLDER
(C)
ME-02744
(A) Adjuster pin

(B) Spring stopper
(C) Spring
(2) Remove the bolts (a) through (j) in alphabet-

ical sequence.
NOTE: ST
Leave two or three threads of bolts (i) and (j) en- ME-02794
gaged in order to retain the valve rocker assembly. (2) Tighten the bolts (a) through (h) to specified
torque.
Tightening torque:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
ME(H4SO)-54

MECHANICAL
(3) Tighten the bolts (i) through (j) to specified 5) Install the rocker cover.
torque. (1) Install the rocker cover gasket to the rocker
cover.
Tightening torque:
6 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.4 ft-lb) NOTE:
(i) (a) (c)
(g)
(j) (2) Temporarily tighten the bolts in alphabetical
order shown in the figure, tighten them in two
(e)
stages.
Tightening torque:
1st
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(h) 2nd (only (a) and (b) are tightened)
(f)
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(d) (b) ME-02703 RH side
(4) Use the ST to rotate the spring stopper in (f) (a) (c)
the direction of the arrow to fasten the adjuster
pin.
ST 18258AA000 SPRING INSTALLER
(d) (b) (e)

ME-02715
LH side
ST (f) (a) (c)
ME-02704
(A)
(d) (b) (e)
ME-02716
(B)
(3) Connect the PCV hose.
(C) 6) Install the ignition coil. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-5, IN-
ME-02705 STALLATION, Ignition Coil.>
(A) Adjuster pin C: DISASSEMBLY
(B) Spring stopper NOTE:
(C) Spring Intake valve rocker assembly cannot be disassem-
bled.
2) Remove the timing belt cover LH. 1) Remove the exhaust valve rocker arm from the
3) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- rocker shaft.
30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clearance.>
4) Install the timing belt cover LH. NOTE:
Keep all the removed parts in order for re-installing
Tightening torque: in their original positions.
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb) 2) Remove the nut and adjusting screw from ex-
haust valve rocker.
ME(H4SO)-55

MECHANICAL
D: ASSEMBLY 2) If the oil clearance exceeds the limit, replace the

valve rocker arm or shaft, whichever shows the
NOTE: greater amount of wear.
Intake valve rocker assembly cannot be disassem-
bled. Rocker arm inside diameter:
1) Install the adjusting screw and nut to the exhaust 22.020 — 22.041 mm (0.8669 — 0.8678 in)
valve rocker. Rocker shaft diameter:
2) Insert the exhaust valve rocker arm to rocker 21.987 — 22.000 mm (0.8656 — 0.8661 in)
shaft. 3) If the roller or valve contact surface of valve
NOTE: rocker arm is worn or dented excessively, replace
Valve rocker arms, and rocker shaft have identifica- the valve rocker arm.
tion marks. Make sure the parts with same mark- 4) Check that the valve rocker arm roller rotates
ings are properly assembled. smoothly. If not, replace the valve rocker arm.
E: INSPECTION
1. INTAKE VALVE ROCKER ASSEMBLY
1) If the roller or valve contact surface of valve
rocker arm is worn or dented excessively, replace
the valve rocker assembly.
2) Check that the valve rocker arm roller rotates
smoothly. If not, replace the valve rocker assembly.
2. EXHAUST VALVE ROCKER ASSEMBLY
1) Measure the inner diameter of valve rocker arm
and outer diameter of valve rocker shaft, and con-
firm the difference (oil clearance) between the two
values.
Clearance between arm and shaft:
Standard
0.020 — 0.054 mm (0.0008 — 0.0021 in)
ME-02706
ME-00257
ME(H4SO)-56
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
19.Camshaft 10) Remove the camshaft cap.

(1) Remove the bolts (a) and (b) in alphabetical
A: REMOVAL sequence.
NOTE:
the engine installed to body. Refer to “Valve Clear-
ance” for preparation procedures. <Ref. to (a)
ME(H4SO)-29, Valve Clearance.>

44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> (b)
3) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-47, ME-02707
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> (2) Equally loosen the bolts (c) through (j) all the
4) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- way in alphabetical sequence.
52, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.>
(j) (h)
5) Remove the timing belt cover No. 2 LH.
6) Remove the timing belt cover No. 2 RH.
(d) (f)
NOTE:
Do not damage or lose the seal rubber when re-
moving the timing belt covers.
(e)
(c)
(g) (i) ME-02708
(3) Remove the bolts (k) through (p) in alpha-

betical sequence using ST.
ST 499497000 TORX® PLUS
(n) (p) (l)
ME-00258
7) Remove the tensioner bracket.
(m)
(k)
(o) ME-02709
(4) Remove the camshaft cap.

11) Remove the camshaft.
12) Remove the oil seal.
ME-00259
13) Remove the plug from rear side of camshaft.
8) Remove the camshaft position sensor support. CAUTION:
(LH side only)
Do not scratch the journal surface when remov-
9) Remove the valve rocker assembly. <Ref. to ing the oil seal.
ME(H4SO)-54, REMOVAL, Valve Rocker Assem-
14) Similarly, remove the camshaft RH and related
bly.>
parts.
ME(H4SO)-57
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION (4) Tighten the TORX® bolts (e) through (j) in al-
phabetical sequence using the ST.
1) Apply a thin coat of engine oil to camshaft jour-
ST 499497000 TORX® PLUS
nals, and install the camshaft.
2) Install the camshaft cap. Tightening torque:
(1) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
camshaft cap. (g) (e) (i)
NOTE:
Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
or equivalent
(h)
(j)
(f) ME-02712
(5) Tighten the bolts (k) through (r) in alphabet-

ical sequence.
Tightening torque:
9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
(k) (m)
ME-02710
NOTE: (q) (o)

Apply a coat of liquid gasket of 3 mm (0.12 in) in di-
ameter (A) along the edge (B) of camshaft cap (C)
mating surface.
(p)
(A)
(r)
(n) (l) ME-02713
(6) Tighten the bolts (s) and (t) in alphabetical

(B) sequence.
(C) NOTE:
• Use a new seal washer.
• Install and tighten the seal washer to the bolt.
ME-00265
Tightening torque:
(2) Temporarily tighten the bolts (a) through (d) 9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
in alphabetical sequence.
(c) (a) (s)
(t)
(b)
(d)
ME-02714
ME-02711
3) Apply a coat of engine oil to camshaft oil seal pe-
(3) Install the valve rocker assembly. <Ref. to riphery and oil seal lips and install the oil seal (A) on
ME(H4SO)-54, INSTALLATION, Valve Rocker camshaft using ST1 and ST2.
Assembly.>
NOTE:
Use a new oil seal.
ME(H4SO)-58
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
ST1 499597000 OIL SEAL GUIDE

ST2 499587500 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
ST1
ST2
ME-00274
(A) 10) Install the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-

ME-02596 52, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.>
4) Apply a coat of engine oil to plug periphery and 11) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48,
install the plug (A) using ST. INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
ST 499587700 CAMSHAFT OIL SEAL IN- 12) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to
STALLER ME(H4SO)-30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clearance.>
13) Install the rocker cover.
(1) Install the rocker cover gasket to the rocker
cover.
(A) NOTE:
ST (2) Temporarily tighten the bolts in alphabetical
order shown in the figure, tighten them in two
stages.
Tightening torque:
ME-02717 1st
5) Install the camshaft position sensor support. (LH 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
side only) Second (only (a) and (b) are tightened)
Tightening torque: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) RH side
6) Similarly, install the parts on right-hand side. (f) (a) (c)
7) Install the tensioner bracket.
Tightening torque:
24.5 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
(d) (b) (e)

ME-04696
LH side
(f) (a) (c)
ME-00273
8) Install the timing belt cover No. 2 RH.

Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
9) Install the timing belt cover No. 2 LH.
Tightening torque: (d) (b) (e)
ME-02716
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
(3) Connect the PCV hose.
ME(H4SO)-59
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
14) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to Cam base circle diameter A:
ME(H4SO)-46, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cov- Standard
er.> 34.00 mm (1.3386 in)
15) Install the ignition coil. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-5,
INSTALLATION, Ignition Coil.> Base circle step of adjacent intake cams (low
speed and high speed):
Standard
0.03 mm (0.001 in) or less
C: INSPECTION
1) Measure the bend, and repair or replace if nec-
essary.
Camshaft bend limit: H
0.025 mm (0.00098 in)
A
ME-00276
5) Measure the outer diameter of camshaft journal

and inner diameter of cylinder head journal, and
check the difference (oil clearance) between the
two values. If the oil clearance is not within the
standard, replace the camshaft or cylinder head as
ME-00275
necessary.
2) Check the journal for damage and wear. Re-
Unit: mm (in)
place if faulty.
3) Check the cam face condition, and remove the 0.055 — 0.090
Oil clearance Standard
(0.0022 — 0.0035)
minor faults by grinding with oil stone. If offset wear
occurs, replace it. 31.928 — 31.945
Camshaft journal O.D. Standard
(1.2570 — 1.2577)
4) Measure the Cam height “H”, Cam base circle
diameter “A”, and base circle step of adjacent in- Cylinder head journal 32.000 — 32.018
Standard
I.D. (1.2598 — 1.2605)
take cams (low speed and high speed). If it ex-
ceeds the standard or offset wear occurs, replace
6) Measure the thrust clearance with setting the
it.
dial gauge at end surface of camshaft. If the thrust
Cam lobe height H: clearance is not within the standard or there is off-
Unit: mm (in)
set wear, replace the camshaft caps and cylinder
head as a set. If necessary, replace the camshaft.
40.075 — 40.175
Constant Standard
(1.5778 — 1.5817) Camshaft thrust clearance:
35.496 — 35.596 Standard
Intake Low speed Standard
(1.3975 — 1.4014) 0.030 — 0.090 mm (0.0012 — 0.0035 in)
40.315 — 40.415
High speed Standard
(1.5872 — 1.5911)
39.289 — 39.389
Exhaust Standard
(1.5468 — 1.5507)
ME(H4SO)-60
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
20.Cylinder Head 11) While tapping the cylinder head with a plastic
hammer, separate it from cylinder block. Remove
A: REMOVAL the bolts (a) and (c) to remove cylinder head.
NOTE:
(e) (c)
• When replacing a single part, perform the work
with the engine installed to body. Refer to “Valve
Clearance” for preparation procedures. <Ref. to (a)
ME(H4SO)-29, Valve Clearance.>
stalled to body, the following parts must also be re- (b)
moved/installed.
Front exhaust pipe <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-4, RE- (f)
MOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.> <Ref. to (d) ME-02745
EX(H4SO)-5, INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust 12) Remove the cylinder head gasket.
Pipe.>
1) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to CAUTION:
FU(H4SO)-16, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.> Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
2) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- cylinder head and cylinder block.
44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> 13) Similarly, remove the right side cylinder head.
3) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to B: INSTALLATION
4) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-47, 1) Install the cylinder head to the cylinder block.
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> CAUTION:
5) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
52, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.> cylinder head and cylinder block.
6) Remove the bolts which secure A/C compressor
NOTE:
bracket to cylinder head.
Use a new cylinder head gasket.
7) Remove the valve rocker assembly. <Ref. to
(1) Clean the bolt threads and the bolt holes in
ME(H4SO)-54, REMOVAL, Valve Rocker Assem-
the cylinder block
bly.>
8) Remove the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-57, CAUTION:
REMOVAL, Camshaft.> To avoid erroneous tightening of the bolts,
9) Remove the oil level gauge guide. (LH side) clean out the bolt holes sufficiently by blowing
10) Remove the cylinder head bolts in alphabetical with compressed air to eliminate engine cool-
sequence as shown in the figure. ant etc.
(2) Apply a sufficient coat of engine oil to the
NOTE:
washer and bolt thread.
Leave bolts (a) and (c) engaged by three or four
(3) Tighten all bolts to 40 N·m (4.1 kgf-m, 29.5
threads to prevent the cylinder head from falling.
ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
(4) Retighten all bolts to 95 N·m (9.7 kgf-m,
(c)
(e) 70.1 ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
CAUTION:
(a) If the bolt makes stick-slip sound during tight-
ening, repeat the procedure from step (1). In
this case, the cylinder head gasket can be re-
(b)
used.
(f)
(5) Loosen all the bolts by 180° in the reverse
order of installing, and loosen them further by
(d) ME-02745
180°.
ME(H4SO)-61
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
(6) Tighten all bolts to 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft- 9) Install the rocker cover.
lb) in alphabetical order. (1) Install the rocker cover gasket to the rocker
(7) Retighten all bolts to 30 N·m (3.1 kgf-m, cover.
22.1 ft-lb) in alphabetical order. NOTE:
(8) Retighten all bolts to 60 N·m (6.1 kgf-m, Use a new rocker cover gasket.
44.3 ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
(2) Temporarily tighten the bolts in alphabetical
(9) Retighten all bolts by 80 — 90° in alphabet- order shown in the figure, tighten them in two
ical order. stages.
(10) Retighten all bolts by 40 — 45° in alphabet-
ical order. Tightening torque:
1st
CAUTION:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
The tightening angle of the bolt should not ex-
ceed 45°. Second (only (a) and (b) are tightened)
(11) Retighten bolts (a) and (b) by 40 — 45°. 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
RH side
CAUTION:
Make sure the total “tightening angle” of steps (f) (a) (c)
(10) and (11) does not exceed 90°.
(a) (f)
(c)
(d) (d) (b) (e)

ME-04696
(b) LH side
(e) ME-02746 (a)
(f) (c)
2) Install the oil level gauge guide. (LH side)
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
3) Install the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-58, IN-
STALLATION, Camshaft.>
4) Install the valve rocker assembly. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-54, INSTALLATION, Valve Rocker As-
(d) (b) (e)
sembly.> ME-02716
5) Install the A/C compressor bracket on cylinder
10) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
head.
ME(H4SO)-46, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cov-
Tightening torque: er.>
36 N·m (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb) 11) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-44,
6) Install the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-52, INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.> 12) Install the intake manifold. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
7) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48, 20, INSTALLATION, Intake Manifold.>
8) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clearance.>
ME(H4SO)-62
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Place the cylinder head on the ST.
ST
ST 498267800 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
2) Compress the valve spring and remove the
valve spring retainer key using ST. Remove each
valve and valve spring.
ST 499718000 VALVE SPRING REMOVER
NOTE:
• Keep all the removed parts in order for re-install-
ME-00280
ing in their original positions.
• Mark each valve to prevent confusion.
• Pay careful attention not to damage the lips of in-
take valve oil seals and exhaust valve oil seals.
• For removal and installation procedures of the
valve guide, intake valve oil seal and exhaust valve
oil seal, refer to “INSPECTION”. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-65, VALVE GUIDE, INSPECTION, Cyl-
inder Head.> <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-67, INTAKE AND
EXHAUST VALVE OIL SEAL, INSPECTION, Cyl-
inder Head.>
D: ASSEMBLY
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(2)
(1)
(11)
(8)
(9)
(12)
(10)
(2) (13)
(3)
(4) (14)
(5)
(6)
(7)
ME-04771
(1) Valve (6) Retainer (11) Plug

(2) Valve guide (7) Retainer key (12) Camshaft cap
(3) Valve spring seat (8) Spark plug pipe gasket (13) Valve rocker ASSY
(4) Oil seal (9) Camshaft (14) Seal washer
(5) Valve spring (10) Oil seal
ME(H4SO)-63
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
1) Install the valve spring and valve. 3) Measure the warping of the cylinder head sur-
(1) Coat the stem of each valve with engine oil face that mates with cylinder block using a straight
and insert the valve into valve guide. edge (A) and thickness gauge (B).
NOTE: If the warping exceeds the limit, correct the surface
by grinding it with a surface grinder.
When inserting the valve into valve guide, use spe-
cial care not to damage the oil seal lip. Warping limit:
(2) Set the cylinder head on ST. 0.035 mm (0.0014 in)
Grinding limit:
(3) Install the valve spring and retainer.
0.1 mm (0.004 in)
NOTE:
Standard height of cylinder head:
Be sure to install the valve spring with its close-
coiled end facing the cylinder head side. 97.5 mm (3.84 in)
(4) Set the ST on valve spring. NOTE:
ST 499718000 VALVE SPRING REMOVER Uneven torque for the cylinder head bolts can
cause warpage. When reassembling, pay special
attention to the torque so as to tighten evenly.
ST (A)
(B)
ME-00280
(5) Compress the valve spring and fit the valve ST

ME-00285
spring retainer key.
2. VALVE SEAT
Inspect the intake and exhaust valve seats, and
(B) (C)
correct the contact surfaces with a valve seat cutter
if they are defective or when valve guides are re-
placed.
Contacting width of valve and valve seat W:
(B)
(A) Standard
(C)
Intake (A)
ME-02816 0.8 — 1.4 mm (0.03 — 0.055 in)
Exhaust (B)
(A) Retainer key 1.2 — 1.8 mm (0.047 — 0.071 in)
(B) Valve spring
(C) Retainer
(6) After installing, tap the valve spring retainers (A) (B)
lightly with a plastic hammer for better seating.

E: INSPECTION
W
W
1. CYLINDER HEAD
1) Check for cracks or damage. Use liquid pene-
trant tester on the important sections to check for ME-00397
fissures.
Check that there are no marks of gas leaking or wa-
ter leaking on gasket installing surface.
2) Place the cylinder head on the ST.
ME(H4SO)-64
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
2) If the clearance between the valve guide and

valve stem exceeds the standard, replace the valve
guide or valve itself, whichever shows greater
amount of wear or damage. See the following pro-
cedure for valve guide replacement.
Valve guide inner diameter:
6.000 — 6.012 mm (0.2362 — 0.2367 in)
Valve stem outer diameters:
Intake
ME-00287
5.950 — 5.965 mm (0.2343 — 0.2348 in)
3. VALVE GUIDE Exhaust
1) Check the clearance between valve guide and 5.945 — 5.960 mm (0.2341 — 0.2346 in)
valve stem. The clearance can be checked by mea- (1) Place the cylinder head on ST1 with the
suring respectively the outer diameter of valve combustion chamber upward so that valve
stem with a micrometer and the inner diameter of guides fit the holes in ST1.
valve guide with a caliper gauge. (2) Insert the ST2 into valve guide and press it
down to remove the valve guide.
Clearance between the valve guide and valve ST1 498267800 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
stem: ST2 499767200 VALVE GUIDE REMOVER
Standard
Intake
0.035 — 0.062 mm (0.0014 — 0.0024 in)
Exhaust ST2
0.040 — 0.067 mm (0.0016 — 0.0026 in)
ST1
ME-00290
(3) Turn the cylinder head upside down and

place the ST as shown in the figure.
Intake side
(A) ST 499767700 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
ME-00763 Exhaust side
ST 499767800 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
(A) Valve guide
X
ST
(A)
ME-00291
ME-00289
(A) Valve guide
(4) Before installing a new valve guide, make

sure that neither scratches nor damages exist
on the inner surface of valve guide holes in cyl-
inder head.
ME(H4SO)-65
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
(5) Put a new valve guide, coated with sufficient ST 499767400 VALVE GUIDE REAMER
oil, in the cylinder head, and insert the ST1 into
valve guide. Press in until the valve guide upper
end is flush with the upper surface of ST2.
ST1 499767200 VALVE GUIDE REMOVER
Intake side
ST2 499767700 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER ST
Exhaust side
ST2 499767800 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
ST1 ME-04393
ST2
(8) After reaming, clean the valve guide to re-
move chips.
(9) Recheck the contact condition between
valve and valve seat after replacing the valve
guide.
4. INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE
ME-00292 1) Inspect the flange of valve and valve stem, and
(6) Check the valve guide protrusion amount replace the valve with a new part if damaged, worn,
“L”. deformed, or if dimension “H” in the figure is out-
side of the specified limit.
Valve guide protrusion amount L:
Intake Head edge thickness H:
20.3 — 20.7 mm (0.799 — 0.815 in) Intake (A)
Exhaust Standard
16.8 — 17.2 mm (0.661 — 0.677 in) 0.8 — 1.2 mm (0.03 — 0.047 in)
Exhaust (B)
Standard
1.0 — 1.4 mm (0.039 — 0.055 in)
L
(A)
(A)
ME-04917 H
(A) Valve guide
(7) Ream the inside of valve guide using ST.

Put the ST in valve guide, and rotate the ST
slowly clockwise while pushing it lightly. Bring
the ST back while rotating it clockwise.
(B)
NOTE:
• Apply engine oil to the ST when reaming.
• If the inner surface of valve guide is damaged,
the edge of ST should be slightly ground with oil H
stone.
• If the inner surface of valve guide becomes lus-
trous and the ST does not chip, use a new ST or
remedy the ST. ME-04825
ME(H4SO)-66
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
2) Put a small amount of grinding compound on the 2) Place the cylinder head on ST1, and use ST2 to
valve seat surface, and lap the valve and valve seat press-fit the oil seal.
surface. Replace with a new valve oil seal after lap- ST1 498267800 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
ping. ST2 498857100 VALVE OIL SEAL GUIDE
NOTE: NOTE:
It is possible to differentiate between the intake • Apply engine oil to oil seal before press-fitting.
valve and the exhaust valve by their overall length. • When press-fitting the oil seal, do not use a ham-
Valve overall length: mer or strike in.
Intake • The intake valve oil seals and exhaust valve oil
120.6 mm (4.75 in) seals are distinguished by their colors.
Exhaust Color of rubber part:
121.7 mm (4.79 in) Intake [Gray]
Exhaust [Green]
5. VALVE SPRING
1) Check the valve springs for damage, free length,
and tension. Replace the valve spring if it is not ST2
within the standard value presented in the table.
2) To measure the squareness of the valve spring,
stand the valve spring on a surface plate and mea- ST1
sure its deflection at the top of the valve spring us-
ing a try square.
235.3 — 270.7 ME-00284
Set (24 — 27.6, 52.9 — 60.8)/
Tension/spring 45.0 (1.772)
height
N (kgf, lb)/mm (in) 578.9 — 639.9
Lift (59.1 — 65.3, 130.3 — 143.9)/
34.7 (1.366)
ME-00283
6. INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE OIL

SEAL
1) For the following, replace the oil seal with a new
part.
See the procedure 2) and subsequent for replace-
ment procedures.
• When the lip is damaged.
• When the spring is out of the specified position.
• When readjusting the surfaces of valve and
valve seat.
• When replacing the valve guide.
ME(H4SO)-67
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
21.Cylinder Block 15) Remove the oil pump from cylinder block using
a flat tip screwdriver.
A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
Before conducting this procedure, drain the engine cylinder block and oil pump.
oil completely.
1) Remove the engine from the vehicle. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-31, REMOVAL, Engine Assembly.>
FU(H4SO)-16, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.>
5) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-47, ME-00138
6) Remove the crank sprocket. <Ref. to 16) Remove the front oil seal from the oil pump.
ME(H4SO)-53, REMOVAL, Crank Sprocket.> 17) Remove the oil pan and cylinder block lower.
7) Remove the generator and A/C compressor with (1) Set the part so that the cylinder block LH is
their brackets. on the upper side.
8) Remove the cylinder head. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- (2) Remove the bolts which secure the oil pan
61, REMOVAL, Cylinder Head.> to the cylinder block lower.
9) Remove the drive plate. (CVT model) <Ref. to (3) Insert an oil pan cutter blade into the gap be-
CVT-132, REMOVAL, Drive Plate.> tween cylinder block lower and oil pan, and re-
10) Remove the clutch disc and cover. (MT model) move the oil pan.
<Ref. to CL-11, REMOVAL, Clutch Disc and Cov- CAUTION:
er.> Do not use a screwdriver or similar tools in
11) Remove the oil separator cover. place of oil pan cutter.
12) Remove the water by-pass pipe for heater. (4) Remove the bolts which secure the cylinder
13) Remove the water pump. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)- block lower to the cylinder block, and remove
15, REMOVAL, Water Pump.> the cylinder block lower by using flat tip screw-
14) Remove the bolts which secure oil pump to cyl- driver.
inder block.
CAUTION:
NOTE: Insert the flat tip screwdriver to the position
When disassembling and checking the oil pump, shown in the figure, and be careful not to dam-
loosen the relief valve plug before removing the oil age the mating surface of the cylinder block
pump. and cylinder block lower.
LU-00015 ME-04426
ME(H4SO)-68
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
18) Remove the oil strainer.

19) Remove the baffle plate.
20) Remove the oil filter. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-34,
REMOVAL, Engine Oil Filter.>
21) Remove the water pipe assembly.
ME-00300
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(4)
(5)
(3)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(7)
(8)
(4)
(7)
(3)
(2)
(1)
ME-04723
(1) Service hole plug (4) Piston pin (7) Seal washer
(2) Gasket (5) Service hole cover (8) Washer
(3) Snap ring (6) O-ring
ME(H4SO)-69
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
22) Remove the service hole plugs using a hexa-

gon wrench [14 mm].
ME-00140
23) Remove the service hole cover.

24) Rotate the crankshaft to bring #1 and #2 pis-
tons to bottom dead center position, then remove
the piston snap ring through service hole of #1 and
#2 cylinders.
ME-00141
25) Draw out the piston pin from #1 and #2 pistons

using ST.
ST 18320AA010 PISTON PIN REMOVER
ASSY
NOTE:
• PISTON PIN REMOVER ASSY (499097700)
can also be used.
• Be careful not to confuse the original combina-
tion of piston, piston pin and cylinder.
ST
ME-03325
26) Similarly draw out the piston pins from #3 and

#4 pistons.
27) Remove the cylinder block connecting bolt on
the RH side.
28) Loosen the cylinder block connecting bolt on
the LH side by 2 to 3 turns.
ME(H4SO)-70
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
29) Set the part so that the cylinder block LH is on

the upper side, and remove the cylinder block con-
necting bolt.
30) Separate the cylinder block LH and RH.
NOTE:
When separating the cylinder block, do not allow
the connecting rod to fall or damage the cylinder
block.
(5)
(7)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(6) (4)
(3)
(1)
(5)
ME-04724
(1) Cylinder block (4) Crankshaft bearing (6) Seal washer

(2) Rear oil seal (5) Piston (7) Washer
(3) Crankshaft
31) Remove the rear oil seal.
32) Remove the crankshaft along with the connect-
ing rods.
33) Remove the crankshaft bearings from cylinder
block using a hammer handle.
NOTE:
• Press the crankshaft bearing at the end opposite
to locking lip to remove.
• Be careful not to confuse the crankshaft bearing
combination.
34) Remove each piston from the cylinder block us-
ing a wooden bar or hammer handle.
NOTE:
Be careful not to confuse the original combination
of piston and cylinder.
ME(H4SO)-71
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION
(6)
(5)
(4)
(1) (7)
(3)
(3)
(7) (2)
(6)
(7)
(6)
ME-04725
(1) Crankshaft bearing (4) Rear oil seal (6) Seal washer
(2) Crankshaft (5) O-ring (7) Washer
(3) Cylinder block
1) Remove oil on the mating surface of cylinder Liquid gasket:
block before installation. Apply a coat of engine oil THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
to the bearing and crankshaft journal. or equivalent
2) Position the crankshaft and O-ring on cylinder
block RH.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
3) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of cyl-
inder block RH, and position cylinder block LH.
NOTE:
• Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
• Do not allow liquid gasket to jut into O-ring
grooves, oil passages, bearing grooves, etc. ME-00145
ME(H4SO)-72
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
4) Apply a coat of engine oil to the washer and bolt 8) Tighten the RH side cylinder block connecting
thread. bolts (E — J) further in alphabetical order.
Use a new seal washer. 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
5) Tighten the 10 mm cylinder block connecting
bolts on the LH side (A — D) in alphabetical order.
Tightening torque: (E)
(G)
10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb) (J)
(A)
(H)
(D) (I) (F)
ME-00841
9) Tighten the LH side cylinder block connecting

(B) bolts (A — D) further in alphabetical order.
(C) • (A), (C): Angle tightening
ME-00840
Tightening angle:
6) Tighten the 10 mm cylinder block connecting 90°
bolts on the RH side (E — J) in alphabetical order. • (B), (D): Torque tightening
(G) (E) (A)

(J)
(D)
(B)
(H)
(I) (F) (C)
ME-00841 ME-00840
7) Tighten the LH side cylinder block connecting 10) Tighten the RH side cylinder block connecting
bolts (A — D) further in alphabetical order. bolts (E — J) further in alphabetical order.
Tightening torque: Tightening angle:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb) 90°
(A) (G) (E)

(J)
(D)
(B)
(C) (H)
(I) (F)
ME-00840 ME-00841
ME(H4SO)-73
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
11) Tighten the 8 mm and 6 mm cylinder block con- 15) Position the upper rail gap at (C) in the figure.
necting bolts on the LH side (A — H) in alphabetical
order.
Tightening torque: (C)
(A) — (G): 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb) 25

(H): 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
25
(G)
(C)
(C) (A) (B)
(E)
RH LH
ME-02722
16) Align the upper rail spin stopper (E) to the side
hole (D) on the piston.
(D) (E)
(D) (F)
(H) ME-00147
12) Apply a coat of engine oil to the oil seal inner

periphery and outer periphery, and install the rear
oil seal using ST1 and ST2.
NOTE:
Use a new rear oil seal.
ST1 499597100 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
ME-02471
GUIDE
ST2 499587200 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL IN- 17) Position the expander gap at (F) in the figure on
STALLER the 180° opposite direction of (C).
(B) (A)
180
ST2
(F) (C)
(C) (F)
180
RH LH
ST1
ME-00148 ME-02723
(A) Rear oil seal

18) Set the lower rail gap at position (G), located
120° clockwise from (C) in the figure.
(B) Flywheel attaching bolt
120
13) Position the top ring gap at (A) or (B) in the fig- (G)
ure. (C)
14) Position the second ring gap at 180° on the re-
verse side the top ring gap.
180 180 (C)

(G)
120
RH LH
ME-02724
(B) (A) (A) (B) NOTE:
• Make sure ring gaps do not face the same direc-
tion.
RH LH • Make sure ring gaps are not within the piston
ME-02721 skirt area.
ME(H4SO)-74
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
19) Install the snap ring.

Before positioning the piston on the cylinder block,
attach the snap ring in the service hole of the cylin-
der block, and the piston pin hole on the opposite
side.
NOTE:
Use new snap rings.
#3
#1
#4
(A)
#2
ME-04764
(A) Front side
(5) T
(4) (5)
(1) (3) (4)

(3)
(2)
(2)
(1)
ME-04730
(1) Piston (4) Gasket Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)

(2) Piston pin (5) Service hole plug T: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(3) Snap ring
ME(H4SO)-75
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
20) Install the piston. (3) Apply a coat of engine oil to piston pin, and
(1) Set the parts so that the #1 and #2 cylinders insert the piston pin into piston and connecting
are on the upper side. rod through service hole.
(2) Using the ST1, turn the crankshaft so that (4) Install the snap ring.
#1 and #2 connecting rods are set at bottom NOTE:
dead center. Use new snap rings.
ST1 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET
(3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the pistons and
cylinders and insert pistons in their cylinders us-
ing ST2.
ST2 498747300 PISTON GUIDE
ST1
ME-00159
(5) Apply liquid gasket to the threaded portion

of the service hole plug.
ST2 Liquid gasket:
ME-00157 THREE BOND 1105 (Part No. 004403010) or
NOTE: equivalent
Face the piston front mark towards the front of the
engine.
ME-00160
RH (A) LH
(6) Install the service hole plug and gasket.
ME-04918
NOTE:
(A) Front mark Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
21) Install the piston pin. 70 N·m (7.1 kgf-m, 51.6 ft-lb)
(1) Apply a coat of engine oil to ST3.
(2) Insert ST3 into the service hole to align pis-
ton pin hole with connecting rod small end.
ST3 499017100 PISTON PIN GUIDE
ST1
ST3
ME-00140
ME-00158
ME(H4SO)-76
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(5)
T2 T1
(6)
(4)
(3)
(1) (2) (7)
(3)
(2)
(1)
ME-04731
(1) Piston (5) Service hole plug Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Piston pin (6) Service hole cover T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) Snap ring (7) O-ring T2: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(4) Gasket
(7) Set the parts so that the #3 and #4 cylinders 22) Install the water pipe assembly.
are on the upper side. Following the same pro- NOTE:
cedures as used for #1 and #2 cylinders, install
Use new O-rings.
the pistons and piston pins.
(8) Install the service hole cover. Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME-00300
ME(H4SO)-77
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
23) Install the baffle plate.

NOTE:
• Use a new seal.
• Make sure that the seals (A) are installed secure-
ly on the baffle plate in a direction as shown in the
figure below.
(A)
T1
T2
ME-04327
25) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of oil

pan, and install the oil pan.
NOTE:
• Before installing the oil pan, clean the mating
surface of oil pan and cylinder block.
LU-00052 • Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
Tightening torque: Liquid gasket:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
24) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of or equivalent
cylinder block lower, and install the cylinder block
lower.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to apply any liquid gasket to the
O-ring attachment section.
NOTE:
• Use new O-rings.
• Before installing the cylinder block lower, clean
the mating surface of cylinder block lower and cyl-
inder block. LU-02580
• Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket. Tightening torque:
Liquid gasket: 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
or equivalent
(A)
LU-02583
26) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of

LU-02581 the oil separator cover and the threaded portion of
(A) O-ring
bolt (A) shown in the figure (when reusing the bolt),
and then install the oil separator cover.
Tightening torque: NOTE:
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) • Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
T2: 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb) • Use new oil separator cover.
Liquid gasket: • (A) bolt thread (when reusing bolts)
• Mating surface THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. equivalent
K0877Y0100) or equivalent
ME(H4SO)-78
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
Tightening torque: (3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the inside of oil
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) seal.
(A)
ME-03333 ME-00312
27) Install the clutch disc and cover. (MT model) (4) Install the oil pump to cylinder block.
<Ref. to CL-11, INSTALLATION, Clutch Disc and CAUTION:
Cover.> • Be careful not to damage the front oil seal
28) Install the drive plate. (CVT model) <Ref. to during installation.
CVT-132, INSTALLATION, Drive Plate.> • Make sure the front oil seal lip is not folded.
29) Install the oil pump.
(1) Using the ST, install the front oil seal. NOTE:
ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER • Align the flat surface of oil pump’s inner rotor with
that of crankshaft before installation.
NOTE: • Use new O-rings.
Use a new front oil seal. • Do not forget to assemble O-rings.
(5) Apply liquid gasket to the three bolts thread
shown in figure. (when reusing bolts)
Liquid gasket:
equivalent
ST
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
LU-00021
(2) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of

oil pump.
NOTE:
Liquid gasket:
or equivalent ME-04946
(A)
ME-00165
(A) O-ring
ME(H4SO)-79
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
30) Install the water pump and gasket. Tightening torque:

NOTE: 1st
• When installing the water pump, tighten bolts in 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
two stages in alphabetical order as shown in the Second (only (a) and (b) are tightened)
figure. 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
• Use a new gasket. RH side
Tightening torque: (f) (a) (c)
First: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
Second: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
(B)
(C)
(A)
(D)
(E) (F) (d) (b) (e)

ME-04696
LH side
(f) (a) (c)
ME-04425
31) Install the water by-pass pipe for heater.

Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
32) Install the oil filter.
<Ref. to LU(H4SO)-34, INSTALLATION, Engine
Oil Filter.>
(d) (b) (e)
33) Install the cylinder head. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- ME-02716
61, INSTALLATION, Cylinder Head.>
34) Install the generator and A/C compressor with
ME(H4SO)-46, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cov-
their brackets.
er.>
Tightening torque: 40) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-44,
36 N·m (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb) INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
35) Install the crank sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- 41) Install the intake manifold. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
53, INSTALLATION, Crank Sprocket.> 20, INSTALLATION, Intake Manifold.>
36) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48, 42) Install the engine to the vehicle. <Ref. to
INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.> ME(H4SO)-34, INSTALLATION, Engine Assem-
37) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to bly.>
ME(H4SO)-30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clearance.>
cover.
NOTE:
(2) Temporarily tighten the rocker cover bolts in
alphabetical order shown in the figure, and then
tighten to specified torque in alphabetical order
in two steps.
ME(H4SO)-80
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
C: DISASSEMBLY
(7)
(6)
(6)
(5)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(4)
ME-04732
(1) Top ring (4) Snap ring (6) Connecting rod bearing
(2) Second ring (5) Connecting rod (7) Connecting rod cap
(3) Oil ring
1) Remove the connecting rod cap.
2) Remove the connecting rod bearing.
NOTE:
Keep the removed connecting rods, connecting rod
caps and bearings in order so that they are kept in
their original combinations/groups, and not mixed
together.
3) Remove the piston rings using piston ring ex-
pander.
4) Remove the oil ring by hand.
NOTE:
Arrange the removed piston rings in proper order,
to prevent confusion.
5) Remove the snap ring.
ME(H4SO)-81
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
D: ASSEMBLY
(8)
T (7)
(7)
(6)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(5)
(4)
ME-04733
(1) Top ring (5) Side mark Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Second ring (6) Connecting rod T: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
(3) Oil ring (7) Connecting rod bearing
(4) Snap ring (8) Connecting rod cap
1) Apply engine oil to the surface of the connecting E: INSPECTION
rod bearings, and install the connecting rod bear-
ings on connecting rods and connecting rod caps. 1. CYLINDER BLOCK
2) Position each connecting rod with the side with a 1) Check for cracks or damage. Use liquid pene-
side mark facing forward, and install it. trant tester on the important sections to check for
3) Attach the connecting rod cap, and tighten with fissures. Check that there are no marks of gas leak-
connecting rod nut. ing or water leaking on gasket installing surface.
Make sure the arrow on connecting rod cap faces 2) Check the oil passages for clogging.
the front during installation. 3) Inspect the cylinder head surface that mates
NOTE: with cylinder block for warping by using a straight
• Each connecting rod has its own mating cap. edge, and correct by grinding if necessary.
Make sure that they are assembled correctly by Warping limit:
checking their matching number. 0.025 mm (0.00098 in)
• When tightening the connecting rod nuts, apply
oil on the threads. Grinding limit:
0.1 mm (0.004 in)
Tightening torque:
45 N·m (4.6 kgf-m, 33.2 ft-lb) Standard height of cylinder block:
4) Install the oil ring upper rail, expander and lower 201.0 mm (7.91 in)
rail by hand.
5) Install the second ring and top ring using piston
ring expander.
NOTE:
Assemble so that the piston ring mark “R” faces the
top side of the piston.
ME(H4SO)-82
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
2. CYLINDER AND PISTON 2) Measure inner diameter of each cylinder.

1) The cylinder bore size is stamped on the front Measure the inner diameter of each cylinder in both
upper face of the cylinder block. the thrust and piston pin directions at the heights as
shown in the figure, using a cylinder bore gauge.
NOTE:
• Measurement should be performed at a temper- NOTE:
ature of 20°C (68°F). Measurement should be performed at a tempera-
• Standard sized pistons are classified into two ture of 20°C (68°F).
grades, “A” and “B”. These grades should be used Cylindricality:
as guide lines in selecting a standard piston. Standard
Standard diameter: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
A: 99.510 — 99.520 mm (3.9177 — 3.9181 in) Out-of-roundness:
B: 99.500 — 99.510 mm (3.9173 — 3.9177 in) Standard
0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
(A) (B)
(A) (B)
#5
4
#4
5
H1
#3 H2
#2 (F) H3
B
#1 (D) H4
A
(E) (C)
ME-00170
ME-00171
(A) Main journal size mark
(B) Cylinder block (RH) — (LH) combination mark (A) Piston pin direction
(C) #1 cylinder bore size mark (B) Thrust direction
(D) #2 cylinder bore size mark H1 10 mm (0.39 in)
(E) #3 cylinder bore size mark H2 45 mm (1.77 in)
(F) #4 cylinder bore size mark H3 80 mm (3.15 in)
H4 115 mm (4.53 in)
3) When the piston is to be replaced due to general

or cylinder wear, select a suitable sized piston by
measuring the piston clearance.
ME(H4SO)-83
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
4) Measure outer diameter of each piston. (2) If the cylinder inner diameter exceeds the
Measure the outer diameter of each piston at the limit after boring and honing, replace the cylin-
height as shown in the figure. (Thrust direction) der block.
NOTE: NOTE:
Measurement should be performed at a tempera- Immediately after reboring, the cylinder diameter
ture of 20°C (68°F). may differ from its real diameter due to temperature
rise. Thus, when measuring the cylinder diameter,
Piston grade point H:
wait until it has cooled to room temperature.
38.2 mm (1.504 in)
Cylinder inner diameter boring limit:
Piston outer diameter: To 100.005 mm (3.9372 in)
Standard
A: 99.510 — 99.520 mm (3.9177 — 3.9181 in)
3. PISTON AND PISTON PIN
B: 99.500 — 99.510 mm (3.9173 — 3.9177 in) 1) Check the piston and piston pin for damage,
cracks or wear. Replace if faulty.
0.25 mm (0.0098 in) oversize: 2) Check the piston ring groove for wear or dam-
99.750 — 99.770 mm (3.9272 — 3.9280 in) age. Replace if faulty.
0.50 mm (0.0197 in) oversize: 3) Make sure the piston pin can be inserted into the
100,000 — 100.020 mm (3.9370 — 3.9378 in) piston pin hole by a thumb at 20°C (68°F). Replace
if faulty.
Clearance between piston pin hole and piston
pin:
Standard
0.004 — 0.008 mm (0.0002 — 0.0003 in)
ME-00172
5) Calculate the clearance between cylinder and

piston.
NOTE:
Measurement should be performed at a tempera-
ME-00173
ture of 20°C (68°F).
Clearance between cylinder and piston at 20°C
(68°F):
Standard
–0.015 — 0.005 mm (–0.00059 — 0.00020 in)
6) Boring and honing
(1) If any of the measured value of cylindricality,
out-of-roundness or cylinder-to-piston clear-
ance is out of standard or if there is any damage
on the cylinder wall, rebore it to replace with an
oversize piston. ME-00174
CAUTION:
When any of the cylinders needs reboring, all
other cylinders must be bored at the same time,
and replaced with oversize pistons.
ME(H4SO)-84
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
4) Check the snap ring installation groove (A) on 2) Using the piston, insert the piston ring and oil
the piston for burr. If necessary, remove burr from ring into the cylinder so that they are perpendicular
the groove so that the piston pin can lightly move. to the cylinder wall, and measure the piston ring
gap with a thickness gauge.
Standard
mm (in)
(A) 0.20 — 0.35
Top ring
(0.0079 — 0.0138)
0.37 — 0.52
Piston ring gap Second ring
(0.0146 — 0.0205)
0.20 — 0.50
Oil ring rail
(0.0079 — 0.0197)
ME-00175
5) Check the piston pin snap ring for distortion,

cracks and wear.
4. PISTON RING
1) If the piston ring is broken, damaged or worn, or
if its tension is insufficient, or when the piston is re-
placed, replace the piston ring with a new part of
the same size as piston.
NOTE:
ME-00177
• The top ring and second ring have the mark to
determine the direction for installing. When attach- 3) Fit the piston ring straight into the piston ring
ing the ring to the piston, face these marks towards groove, then measure the clearance between pis-
the top side. ton ring and piston ring groove with a thickness
• Oil ring consists of the upper rail, expander and gauge.
lower rail. When attaching the oil ring to the piston, NOTE:
pay attention to the direction of each rail. Before measuring the clearance, clean the piston
ring groove and piston ring.
Standard
mm (in)
(A)
0.040 — 0.080
Clearance between Top ring
(B)
(0.0016 — 0.0031)
piston ring and pis-
ton ring groove 0.030 — 0.070
Second ring
(C) (0.0012 — 0.0028)
(A)
(B)
(C)
ME-00178
ME-02480
(A) Upper rail

(B) Expander
(C) Lower rail
ME(H4SO)-85
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
5. CONNECTING ROD 4) Inspect the connecting rod bearing for scar,

1) Replace the connecting rod, if the large or small peeling, seizure, melting, wear, etc.
end thrust surface is damaged. 5) Measure the oil clearance on each connecting
2) Check for bend or twist using a connecting rod rod bearing using plastigauge. If any oil clearance
aligner. Replace the connecting rod if the bend or is not within the standard, replace the defective
twist exceeds the limit. bearing with a new part of standard size or under-
size as necessary.
Limit of bend or twist per 100 mm (3.94 in) in
length: Connecting rod oil clearance:
0.10 mm (0.0039 in) Standard
0.016 — 0.044 mm (0.0006 — 0.0017 in)
(A) Unit: mm (in)
Bearing size Outer diameter of
Bearing
(Thickness at center) crank pin
1.492 — 1.501 51.984 — 52.000
(B) Standard
(0.0587 — 0.0591) (2.0466 — 2.0472)
0.03
1.510 — 1.513 51.954 — 51.970
(0.0012)
(0.0594 — 0.0596) (2.0454 — 2.0461)
Undersize
0.05
1.520 — 1.523 51.934 — 51.950
(0.0020)
(0.0598 — 0.0600) (2.0446 — 2.0453)
Undersize
0.25
1.620 — 1.623 51.734 — 51.750
(0.0098)
(0.0638 — 0.0639) (2.0368 — 2.0374)
Undersize
(A)
6) Inspect the bushing at connecting rod small end,
and replace with a new part if worn or damaged.
(B) 7) Measure the piston pin clearance at connecting
rod small end. Replace it with a new part if the val-
ue is not within the standard,
ME-00179 Clearance between piston pin and bushing:
(A) Thickness gauge
Standard
0 — 0.022 mm (0 — 0.0009 in)
(B) Connecting rod
3) Install the connecting rod with bearings attached

to the crankshaft, and using a thickness gauge,
measure the thrust clearance. If the thrust clear-
ance exceeds the standard or uneven wear is
found, replace the connecting rod.
Connecting rod thrust clearance:
Standard
0.070 — 0.330 mm (0.0028 — 0.0130 in)
ME-00181
ME-00180
ME-00174
ME(H4SO)-86
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
8) The replacement procedure for the connecting 3) Inspect the crank journal and crank pin for wear.
rod small end bushing is as follows. If they are not within the standard, replace the bear-
(1) Remove the bushing from connecting rod ing with a suitable (undersize) one, and replace or
with ST and press. grind to correct the crankshaft as necessary. When
(2) Press the bushing with the ST after applying grinding the crank journal or crank pin, finish them
oil on the periphery of new bushing. to the specified dimensions according to the under-
ST 499037100 CONNECTING ROD BUSH- size bearing to be used.
ING REMOVER AND IN- Crank pin:
STALLER Out-of-roundness
Standard
0.003 mm (0.0001 in)
ST
Cylindricality
Standard
0.004 mm (0.0002 in)
Grinding limit (dia.)
To 51.750 mm (2.0374 in)
Crank journal:
Out-of-roundness
ME-00182
Standard
(3) Make two 3 mm (0.12 in) holes in the 0.005 mm (0.0002 in)
pressed bushing to match the pre-manufac- Cylindricality
tured holes on the connecting rod, then ream Standard
the inside of the bushing. 0.006 mm (0.0002 in)
(4) After completion of reaming, clean the bush- Grinding limit (dia.)
ing to remove chips. To 59.758 mm (2.3527 in)
6. CRANKSHAFT AND CRANKSHAFT
BEARING
1) Clean the crankshaft completely, and check it for
cracks using liquid penetrant tester. If defective, re-
place the crankshaft.
2) Measure warping of the crankshaft. If it exceeds
the limit, correct or replace it.
NOTE:
If a suitable V-block is not available, using just the
ME-00184
#1 and #5 crankshaft bearings on cylinder block,
position the crankshaft on cylinder block. Then,
measure the crankshaft bend using a dial gauge.
Crankshaft bend limit:
0.035 mm (0.0014 in)
ME-00183
ME(H4SO)-87
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
Unit: mm (in)
Crank journal outer diameter
Crank pin outer diameter
#1, #3 #2, #4, #5
59.992 — 60.008 59.992 — 60.008 51.984 — 52.000
Journal O.D.
(2.3619 — 2.3625) (2.3619 — 2.3625) (2.0466 — 2.0472)
Standard
Bearing size 1.998 — 2.011 2.000 — 2.013 1.492 — 1.501
(Thickness at center) (0.0787 — 0.0792) (0.0787 — 0.0793) (0.0587 — 0.0591)
59.962 — 59.978 59.962 — 59.978 51.954 — 51.970
Journal O.D.
0.03 (0.0012) (2.3607 — 2.3613) (2.3607 — 2.3613) (2.0454 — 2.0461)
undersize Bearing size 2.017 — 2.020 2.019 — 2.022 1.510 — 1.513
59.942 — 59.958 59.942 — 59.958 51.934 — 51.950
Journal O.D.
0.05 (0.0020) (2.3599 — 2.3605) (2.3599 — 2.3605) (2.0446 — 2.0453)
Undersize Bearing size 2.027 — 2.030 2.029 — 2.032 1.520 — 1.523
59.742 — 59.758 59.742 — 59.758 51.734 — 51.750
Journal O.D.
0.25 (0.0098) (2.3520 — 2.3527) (2.3520 — 2.3527) (2.0368 — 2.0374)
4) Use a thickness gauge to measure the thrust
clearance of crankshaft at #5 crank journal bearing.
If clearance exceeds the standard, replace the
bearing.
Crankshaft thrust clearance:
Standard
0.030 — 0.115 mm (0.0012 — 0.0045 in)
ME-00322
5) Inspect individual crankshaft bearings for signs

of flaking, seizure, melting and wear.
6) Measure the oil clearance on each crankshaft
bearing using plastigauge. If the measured value is
out of standard, replace the defective bearing with
an undersize one, and replace or grind to correct
the crankshaft as necessary.
Crankshaft oil clearance:
Standard
0.010 — 0.030 mm (0.0004 — 0.0012 in)
ME(H4SO)-88
Oil Switching Solenoid Valve

MECHANICAL
22.Oil Switching Solenoid Valve 9) Remove the oil switching solenoid valve holder
from the cylinder head.
A: REMOVAL (A) (C)
(B)
1. RH SIDE
(D)
(E)
ME-02726
(A) Oil switching solenoid valve

(B) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch
IG-02107 (C) Oil temperature sensor
2) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to (D) Oil switching solenoid valve holder
IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Boot.> (E) Gasket
3) Remove the bolt, and disconnect the bulkhead
harness connector from the engine harness con- 2. LH SIDE
nector and rear engine hanger. 1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.
FU-05129 IG-02107
4) Slide the engine harness connector in the direc- 2) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42,
tion of the arrow and remove it from the rear engine REMOVAL, V-belt.>
hanger. 3) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
6) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
52, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.>
7) Remove the timing belt cover No. 2 LH.
8) Disconnect the connector from the oil switching
FU-05247 solenoid valve.
9) Remove the oil switching solenoid valve.
5) Disconnect the connector from the oil switching 10) Remove the variable valve lift diagnosis oil
solenoid valve. pressure switch. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-35, REMOV-
6) Remove the oil switching solenoid valve. AL, Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure
7) Remove the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres- Switch.>
sure switch. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-35, REMOVAL,
Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure Switch.>
8) Remove the oil temperature sensor. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-36, REMOVAL, Oil Temperature Sen-
sor.>
ME(H4SO)-89
Oil Switching Solenoid Valve

MECHANICAL
11) Remove the oil switching solenoid valve holder Tightening torque:
from the cylinder head. 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(B)
(D)
(C) (A) ME-02727 FU-05129
(A) Oil switching solenoid valve 2. LH SIDE

(B) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch Install in the reverse order of removal.
(C) Oil switching solenoid valve holder
NOTE:
(D) Gasket • Use a new gasket.
• Apply liquid gasket to variable valve lift diagnosis
B: INSTALLATION oil pressure switch threads.
1. RH SIDE • Install the oil switching solenoid valve to the
holder, then install it to the cylinder head.
Tightening torque:
NOTE:
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
• Apply liquid gasket to variable valve lift diagnosis
T3: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf-m, 12.5 ft-lb)
oil pressure switch threads.
• Install the oil switching solenoid valve to the Liquid gasket:
holder, then install it to the cylinder head. THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
equivalent
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) (B)
T3
T2: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
T3: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf-m, 12.5 ft-lb)
T4: 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
Liquid gasket:
equivalent
T2
(A) (C) (D)
T1
(C) (A) T1
T4 ME-03003
(B)
T2 (A) Oil switching solenoid valve
T3
(C) Oil switching solenoid valve holder
(D)
(D) Gasket
(E)
ME-03002
(A) Oil switching solenoid valve

(C) Oil temperature sensor
(D) Oil switching solenoid valve holder
(E) Gasket
ME(H4SO)-90
Intake and Exhaust Valve

MECHANICAL
23.Intake and Exhaust Valve

A: SPECIFICATION
Refer to “Cylinder Head” for removal and installa-
tion procedures of the intake and exhaust valves.
<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-61, REMOVAL, Cylinder
Head.> <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-61, INSTALLATION,
Cylinder Head.>
ME(H4SO)-91
Piston
MECHANICAL
24.Piston
A: SPECIFICATION
Refer to “Cylinder Block” for removal and installa-
tion procedures of pistons. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-68,
REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.> <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
72, INSTALLATION, Cylinder Block.>
ME(H4SO)-92
Connecting Rod
MECHANICAL
25.Connecting Rod
A: SPECIFICATION
tion procedures of connecting rods. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-68, REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.> <Ref.
to ME(H4SO)-72, INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Block.>
ME(H4SO)-93
Crankshaft
MECHANICAL
26.Crankshaft
A: SPECIFICATION
tion procedures of the crankshaft. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-68, REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.> <Ref.
to ME(H4SO)-72, INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Block.>
ME(H4SO)-94
Engine Trouble in General

MECHANICAL
27.Engine Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
NOTE:
The “RANK” shown in the chart shows the possibilities of the cause of trouble in order from “Very often” to
“Rarely”.
A — Very often
B — Sometimes
C — Rarely
Symptoms Problem parts etc. Possible cause RANK
1. Engine does not start.
1) Starter does not turn. Starter Defective battery-to-starter harness B
Defective starter switch C
Defective inhibitor switch C
Defective starter B
Battery Improper connection of terminal A
Run-down battery A
Defective charging system B
Friction Seizure of crankshaft and connecting rod bearing C
Seized camshaft C
Seized or stuck piston and cylinder C
Immobilizer system <Ref. to IM(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
2) Initial combustion does Starter Defective starter C
not occur. Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay A
Clogged fuel line C
Lack of fuel or insufficient fuel B
Timing belt Degradation, etc. B
Defective timing B
Compression Incorrect valve clearance C
Loosened spark plug or defective gasket C
Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective cylinder head C
gasket
Improper valve sealing C
Defective valve stem C
Worn or broken valve spring B
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston C
Incorrect valve timing B
Improper engine oil (low viscosity) B
ME(H4SO)-95

MECHANICAL

3) Initial combustion occurs. Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Defective intake manifold gasket B
Defective throttle body gasket B
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay C
Clogged fuel line C
Defective timing B
gasket
4) Engine stalls after initial Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
combustion. Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct B
Loosened or cracked PCV hose C
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose C
Defective intake manifold gasket B
Dirty air cleaner element C
Fuel line Clogged fuel line C
Defective timing B
gasket
ME(H4SO)-96

MECHANICAL

2. Rough idle and engine Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
stall Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Loosened or cracked PCV hose A
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose A
Defective PCV valve C
Loosened oil filler cap B
Clogged fuel line C
Timing belt Defective timing C
Compression Incorrect valve clearance B
Loosened spark plug or defective gasket B
Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective cylinder head B
gasket
Improper valve sealing B
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston B
Incorrect valve timing A
Lubrication system Incorrect oil pressure B
Defective rocker cover gasket C
Cooling system Over-heating C
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction A
Stuck or damaged throttle valve B
ME(H4SO)-97

MECHANICAL

3. Low output, hesitation and Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
poor acceleration Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose B
Defective PCV valve B
Dirty air cleaner element A
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay B
Clogged fuel line B
Lack of fuel or insufficient fuel C
Timing belt Defective timing B
gasket
Over-cooling C
ME(H4SO)-98

MECHANICAL

4. Surging Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Dirty air cleaner element B
Clogged fuel line B
gasket
Worn or broken valve spring C
Cooling system Over-heating B
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction C
5. Engine does not return to Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
idle. Intake system Loosened or cracked vacuum hose A
Others Stuck or damaged throttle valve A
6. Dieseling (Run-on) Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction B
7. After burning in exhaust Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
system Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct C
Loosened oil filler cap C
gasket
Lubrication system Incorrect oil pressure C
Cooling system Over-cooling C
ME(H4SO)-99

MECHANICAL

8. Knocking Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Loosened oil filler cap B
Cooling system Over-heating A
9. Excessive engine oil con- Intake system Loosened or cracked PCV hose A
sumption Defective PCV valve B
Compression Defective valve stem A
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston A
Lubrication system Loosened oil pump attaching bolts and defective gas- B
ket
Defective oil filter gasket B
Defective crankshaft oil seal B
Defective rocker cover gasket B
Loosened oil drain plug or defective gasket B
Loosened oil pan fitting bolts or defective oil pan B
10. Excessive fuel consump- Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
tion Intake system Dirty air cleaner element A
gasket
ME(H4SO)-100
Engine Noise
MECHANICAL
28.Engine Noise
A: INSPECTION
Type of sound Condition Possible cause
• Valve mechanism is defective.
• Incorrect valve clearance
Sound increases as engine
Regular clicking sound • Worn valve rocker
speed increases.
• Worn camshaft
• Broken valve spring
• Worn crankshaft main bearing
Oil pressure is low.
• Worn connecting rod bearing (large end)
Heavy and dull clank
• Damaged engine mounting
Oil pressure is normal.
• Loosened flywheel mounting bolt
• Ignition timing advanced
Sound is noticeable when
High-pitched clank (Spark • Accumulation of carbon inside combustion chamber
accelerating with an overload
knock) • Wrong heat range of spark plug
condition.
• Improper octane value gasoline
Sound is reduced when fuel • Worn crankshaft main bearing
Clank when engine speed is
injector connector of noisy cyl- • Worn connecting rod bearing (large end)
1,000 to 2,000 rpm
inder is disconnected. *
Sound is reduced when fuel • Worn cylinder liner and piston ring
injector connector of noisy cyl- • Broken or stuck piston ring
Knocking sound when engine inder is disconnected. * • Worn piston pin and hole at piston end of connecting rod
is operating under idling speed
and engine is warm Sound is not reduced if each • Worn cam sprocket
fuel injector connector is dis- • Worn camshaft journal bore in cylinder head
connected in turn. *
Squeaky sound — Insufficient generator lubrication
Rubbing sound — Poor contact of generator brush and rotor
Gear scream when starting • Defective ignition starter switch
—
engine • Worn gear and starter pinion
Sound like polishing glass with • Loose V-belt
—
a dry cloth • Defective water pump shaft
• Insufficient compression
Hissing sound —
• Air leakage in air intake system, hose, connection or manifold
• Loose timing belt
Timing belt noise —
• Timing belt contacting with adjacent part
Valve noise — Incorrect valve clearance
* When disconnecting the fuel injector connector, the malfunction indicator light illuminates and DTC is stored in ECM memory.
Therefore, perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.> and Inspection
Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE, Inspection Mode.> after connecting the fuel injector connector.
ME(H4SO)-101
Engine Noise
MECHANICAL
ME(H4SO)-102
EXHAUST
EX(H4SO)
Page
2. Front Exhaust Pipe .....................................................................................4
3. Center Exhaust Pipe ..................................................................................7
4. Rear Exhaust Pipe .....................................................................................8
5. Muffler ......................................................................................................10
General Description
EXHAUST
A: COMPONENT
(5) (30)
(8)
(6) T1
(7)
T8
(9) (31)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(1) (4) T8
(3)
T10
(18) (11)
T2 T3
T9
(28)
(16) (24)
(10) T3
(23) (22)
T2
(12) (13)
T2
(20)
(14)
(17) (15)
T2
(19) T2
T7
(20)
T5
(25)
(32)
T5
T4
T2 T5
(21)
(29)
T2
(26) T6
T2
(27) T2
EX-02698
EX(H4SO)-2
General Description
EXHAUST
(1) Gasket (16) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (31) Cushion rubber (with protrusion)
(2) Spring (17) Front catalytic converter (32) Hanger bracket (MT model)
(3) Chamber (18) Rear oxygen sensor
(4) Rear exhaust pipe (19) Gasket Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(5) Cushion rubber (without protru- (20) Gasket T1: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
sion)
(6) Self-locking nut (21) Front exhaust pipe T2: 13 (1.3, 9.6)
(7) Gasket (22) Front exhaust pipe upper cover LH T3: 18 (1.8, 13.3)
(8) Muffler (23) Front exhaust pipe upper cover T4: 23 (2.3, 17.0)
RH
(9) Bolt (24) Front catalytic converter upper T5: 30 (3.1, 22.1)
cover
(10) Center exhaust pipe front upper (25) Front catalytic converter lower T6: 35 (3.6, 25.8)
cover cover
(11) Rear catalytic converter upper (26) Front exhaust pipe lower cover RH T7: 40 (4.1, 29.5)
cover
(12) Center exhaust pipe (27) Front exhaust pipe lower cover LH T8: 48 (4.9, 35.4)
(13) Rear catalytic converter (28) Band T9: <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-37, INSTAL-
LATION, Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
(14) Rear catalytic converter lower (29) Hanger bracket (CVT model) T10: <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-39, INSTAL-
cover LATION, Rear Oxygen Sensor.>
(15) Center exhaust pipe front lower (30) Muffler cutter (Models with muffler
cover cutter)
B: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
• If any fat adheres to the exhaust pipe, wipe it off.
Otherwise a fire may happen.
EX(H4SO)-3
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
2. Front Exhaust Pipe 7) Remove the nuts which hold front exhaust pipe
onto cylinder heads.
A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop the front exhaust pipe
Vehicle components are extremely hot after and center exhaust pipe assembly.
driving. Be wary of receiving burns from heated
parts.
EX-02529
8) Remove the bolt which holds center exhaust

pipe to hanger bracket.
IG-02107
3) Disconnect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor con-

nector (A) and rear oxygen sensor connector (B)
and remove the clip (C) fastening the harness.
(B)
EX-02530
(A)
9) Remove the front exhaust pipe and center ex-
haust pipe from vehicle as a unit.
CAUTION:
• The front exhaust pipe and center exhaust
(C)
EX-02527
pipe assembly are very heavy. Be careful not to
drop the exhaust pipes when removing.
4) Lift up the vehicle. • After removing the front exhaust pipe and
5) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- center exhaust pipe assembly, do not pull the
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> rear exhaust pipe with excessive force.
6) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from center ex- 10) Remove the center exhaust pipe from the front
haust pipe. exhaust pipe.
EX-02528 EX-02712
11) Remove the front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear

oxygen sensor from front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-37, REMOVAL, Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.> <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-39, REMOVAL, Rear
Oxygen Sensor.>
EX(H4SO)-4
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
B: INSTALLATION 5) Install the rear exhaust pipe to center exhaust

pipe.
1) Install the front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear ox-
ygen sensor to the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to NOTE:
FU(H4SO)-37, INSTALLATION, Front Oxygen (A/ Use a new gasket.
F) Sensor.> <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-39, INSTALLA-
Tightening torque:
TION, Rear Oxygen Sensor.>
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
2) Install the center exhaust pipe to front exhaust
pipe.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
40 N·m (4.1 kgf-m, 29.5 ft-lb)
EX-02528
6) Tighten the bolts which secure the center ex-

haust pipe to the hanger bracket.
Tightening torque:
35 N·m (3.6 kgf-m, 25.8 ft-lb)
EX-02712
3) Install the front exhaust pipe and center exhaust

pipe as a unit to the vehicle.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
4) Temporarily tighten the nuts which hold front ex-
haust pipe to cylinder heads.
EX-02530
7) Tighten the nuts which hold front exhaust pipe to

cylinder heads.
Tightening torque:
30 N·m (3.1 kgf-m, 22.1 ft-lb)
EX-02529
EX-02529
EX(H4SO)-5
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST

10) Connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor connec-
tor (A) and rear oxygen sensor connector (B), and
fasten the harness with the clip (C).
(B)
(A)
(C)
EX-02527
IG-02107

C: INSPECTION
leaks.
2) Make sure there are no holes or rusting.
EX(H4SO)-6
Center Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
3. Center Exhaust Pipe

A: REMOVAL
After removing the center exhaust pipe and front
exhaust pipe as a unit, separate them. Refer to
“Front Exhaust Pipe” for the removal procedure.
<Ref. to EX(H4SO)-4, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
Install the center exhaust pipe and front exhaust
pipe as a unit. Refer to “Front Exhaust Pipe” for the
installation procedure. <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-5, IN-
STALLATION, Front Exhaust Pipe.>
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
EX(H4SO)-7
Rear Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
4. Rear Exhaust Pipe B: INSTALLATION

1) Apply a coat of spray type lubricant to the mating
A: REMOVAL area of cushion rubber.
CAUTION: 2) Install the rear exhaust pipe to cushion rubber.
Vehicle components are extremely hot after NOTE:
After assembling, degrease the lubricant which
parts. was applied to the cushion rubber while removing/
1) Lift up the vehicle. installing.
2) Remove the center exhaust pipe from rear ex-
haust pipe.
EX-02598
EX-02528 3) Install the rear exhaust pipe to the muffler.

3) Remove the muffler from rear exhaust pipe. NOTE:
Use a new gasket and self-locking nut.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the rear exhaust pipe. Tightening torque:
48 N·m (4.9 kgf-m, 35.4 ft-lb)
EX-02531
EX-02531
area of cushion rubber. 4) Install the center exhaust pipe to rear exhaust
5) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from the cushion pipe.
rubber. NOTE:
CAUTION: Use a new gasket.
Be careful not to let the muffler contact the rear Tightening torque:
bumper. 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
EX-02598
EX-02528
EX(H4SO)-8
Rear Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
3) Check the cushion rubber for wear or crack.
EX(H4SO)-9
Muffler
EXHAUST
5. Muffler B: INSTALLATION
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
CAUTION:
• Use a new gasket and self-locking nut.
Vehicle components are extremely hot after
• After assembling, degrease the lubricant which
was applied to the cushion rubber while removing/
parts. installing.
2) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from the muffler. Tightening torque:
48 N·m (4.9 kgf-m, 35.4 ft-lb)
EX-02531
EX-02531
area of cushion rubber. C: INSPECTION
4) Remove the muffler from the cushion rubber.
CAUTION: leaks.
Be careful not to drop the muffler during remov- 2) Make sure there are no holes or rusting.
al. 3) Check the cushion rubber for wear or crack.
EX-02532
EX(H4SO)-10
COOLING
CO(H4SO)
Page
2. Radiator Fan System .................................................................................7
3. Engine Coolant .........................................................................................13
4. Water Pump .............................................................................................15
5. Thermostat ...............................................................................................17
6. Radiator ....................................................................................................19
7. Radiator Cap ............................................................................................22
8. Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor ...........................................................23
9. Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor .............................................................24
10. Reservoir Tank .........................................................................................25
11. Engine Cooling System Trouble in General .............................................26
General Description
COOLING
A: SPECIFICATION
Electric fan + Forced engine coolant
Cooling system
circulation system
Total engine
coolant 2 (US qt, Imp qt) Approx. 6.5 (6.9, 5.7)
capacity
Type Centrifugal impeller type
Discharge rate 2 (US gal, Imp gal) /min. 200 (52.8, 44.0)
Discharge perfor-
Pump speed — Discharge pressure 6,000 rpm — 225.4 kPa (23 mAq)
mance
Engine coolant temperature 80°C (176°F)
Water pump
Impeller diameter mm (in) 76 (2.99)
Number of impeller vanes 8
Pump pulley diameter mm (in) 60 (2.36)
Clearance between impeller and case mm (in) Standard 0.5 — 1.5 (0.020 — 0.060)
Type Wax pellet type
Starting temperature to open 86 — 90°C (187 — 194°F)
Thermostat Fully opens 95°C (203°F)
Valve lift mm (in) 9.0 (0.354) or more
Valve bore mm (in) 35 (1.38)
Main fan W 90
Motor input
Sub fan W 90
Radiator fan
Main fan 300 mm (11.81 in)/4
Fan diameter / Blade
Sub fan 300 mm (11.81 in)/5
Type Down flow, pressure type
687.4 × 340 × 16
Core dimensions Width × Height × Thickness mm (in)
(27.06 × 13.39 × 0.63)
Positive pres- Standard 93 — 123 (0.95 — 1.25, 14 — 18)
Radiator Pressure range in sure side Service limit 83 (0.85, 12)
which cap valve is kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
open Negative –1.0 to –4.9 or less
Standard
pressure side (–0.01 — –0.05, –0.1 — –0.7)
Fins Corrugated fin type
Reservoir
Capacity 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.45 (0.48, 0.40)
tank
Recommended materials Item number Alternative

SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
—
(Concentrated type)
Coolant —
K0670Y0001
(Diluted type)
Water for dilution Distilled water — Soft water or tap water
Cooling system protecting agent Cooling system conditioner SOA345001 —
CO(H4SO)-2
General Description
COOLING
B: COMPONENT
1. WATER PUMP
(2)
(1)
T1
(7)
T1 (3)
(7)
(4)
T2 (5)
(6)
CO-02648
(1) Water pump ASSY (5) Gasket Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Gasket (6) Thermostat cover T1: First 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(3) Heater by-pass hose (7) Clip Second 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(4) Thermostat T2: 12 (1.2, 8.9)
CO(H4SO)-3
General Description
COOLING
2. RADIATOR & RADIATOR FAN
(5)
(6) (8)
(5)
T2
T1
T2
(7)
T1
(10)
T3
(9)
(4) (11)
(3)
(20) (12)
(2)
(13)
(5)
B
B (14)
A (14)
(16)
(17) A (14)
(19) (1)
(5)
(18)
(15)
CO-02663
(1) Radiator lower cushion (10) Radiator sub fan shroud (19) O-ring
(2) Radiator (11) Radiator sub fan, radiator sub fan (20) Radiator cap
motor ASSY
(3) Radiator upper cushion (12) Radiator main fan shroud
(4) Radiator upper bracket (13) Radiator main fan, radiator main Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
fan motor ASSY
(5) Clip (14) CVTF hose clip (CVT model) T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(6) Radiator inlet hose (15) CVTF hose A (CVT model) T2: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(7) Engine coolant reservoir tank cap (16) CVTF hose B (CVT model) T3: 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(8) Over flow hose (17) Radiator outlet hose
(9) Engine coolant reservoir tank (18) Radiator drain plug
CO(H4SO)-4
General Description
COOLING
C: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
battery.
ing of engine coolant when performing work where
engine coolant can be spilled. If the fuel spills, wipe
it off immediately to prevent from penetrating into
floor or flowing out for environmental protection.
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing engine
coolant.
CO(H4SO)-5
General Description
COOLING
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
499977400 CRANK PULLEY Used for removing and installing the crank pul-
WRENCH ley. (CVT model)
ST-499977400
WRENCH ley. (MT model)
ST-499977100
18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing cam sprocket.
WRENCH NOTE:
CAM SPROCKET WRENCH (499207100) can
also be used.
ST18231AA010
1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for troubleshooting the electrical system.
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Radiator cap tester Used for checking radiator and radiator cap.
CO(H4SO)-6
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
2. Radiator Fan System

A: WIRING DIAGRAM
TO POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
MB-6 FB-35 MB-7 FB-39

M/B FUSE NO. 8 F/B FUSE NO. 26 M/B FUSE NO. 7 F/B FUSE NO. 22
(B) (IG) (B) (IG)
14
17
20
21
10
13
2
MAIN
FAN A/C
MOTOR MAIN MAIN SUB RELAY HOLDER
FAN FAN FAN
B473 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY B497
1
15
16
22
19
18
11
12
B482
1
B12
B11
J/C
3
B479
B : B135 ECM
SUB FAN MOTOR
B473 B479 B497 B: B135
B482 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
3 4 5 1
2 1 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
6
2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 7
18
12 16 19
10 11 14 15
13 17 20 21 22
A/C RELAY HOLDER
CO-02650
CO(H4SO)-7
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
B: INSPECTION
Operating condition:
Radiator fan operates depending on the radiator fan operation mode related to engine coolant temperature or
the radiator fan operation mode related to A/C compressor load, whichever is higher as an operation mode.
• Radiator fan operation mode related to engine coolant temperature
(A)
(1)
(2)
(3) (B)
(4) (5)(6) (7)
CO-02661
(A) Radiator fan operation mode (B) Engine coolant temperature
(1) High-Speed (4) 96°C (205°F) (7) 100°C (212°F)

(2) Low-Speed (5) 97.5°C (207°F)
(3) OFF (6) 98°C (208°F)
• Radiator fan operation mode related to A/C compressor load
(A)
(1)
(2)
(3) (B)
(4) (5) (6) (7)
CO-02662
(A) Radiator fan operation mode (B) A/C compressor refrigerant pressure
(1) High-Speed (4) 0.8 MPa (8.16 kgf/cm2, 116 psi) (7) 1.5 MPa (15.30 kgf/cm2, 218 psi)
(2) Low-Speed (5) 1.125 MPa (11.47 kgf/cm2,
163 psi)
(3) OFF (6) 1.25 MPa (12.75 kgf/cm2, 181 psi)
CO(H4SO)-8
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
DIAGNOSIS:
Radiator main fan and radiator sub fans do not rotate under the above operating conditions.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Do the radiator main fans and Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
1) Connect the delivery mode fuse. radiator sub fans rotate at low
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. speed?
3) Using the Subaru Select Monitor, check the
forced operation of the radiator fan relay.
NOTE:
• When performing a forced operation radiator
fan relay check using the Subaru Select Moni-
tor, the radiator main fan and radiator sub fan
will repeat low speed revolution → high speed
revolution → OFF in this order.
• Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to “PC
application help for Subaru Select Monitor”.
2 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Do the radiator main fans and Radiator main fan Go to step 27.
1) Connect the delivery mode fuse. radiator sub fans rotate at high system is normal.
NOTE:
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO SUB FAN RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Go to step 5.
LAY.
2) Remove the sub fan relay from A/C relay
holder.
3) Measure the voltage between sub fan relay
connector and chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B497) No. 10 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
LAY.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
5 CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Repair the power
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. supply line.
2) Remove the fuse No. 7.
3) Check the condition of fuse.
CO(H4SO)-9
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

7 CHECK SUB FAN RELAY. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 8. Replace the sub
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between sub fan AC-25, Relay and
relay terminals. Fuse.>
Terminals
No. 10 — No. 11:
8 CHECK SUB FAN RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 9. Replace the sub
1) Connect the battery to terminals No. 13 and fan relay. <Ref. to
No. 12 of the sub fan relay. AC-25, Relay and
2) Measure the resistance between sub fan Fuse.>
relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 10 — No. 11:
9 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SUB FAN RE- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 10. Repair the open
LAY CONNECTOR AND SUB FAN MOTOR circuit of harness
CONNECTOR. between sub fan
1) Disconnect the connector from the sub fan relay connector
motor. and sub fan motor
2) Measure the resistance of harness between connector.
sub fan relay connector and sub fan motor con-
nector.
(B482) No. 2 — (B497) No. 11:
10 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SUB FAN MO- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 11. Repair the open
TOR CONNECTOR AND MAIN FAN RELAY 2 circuit of the har-
CONNECTOR. ness between sub
1) Remove the main fan relay 2 from A/C relay fan motor connec-
holder. tor and main fan
2) Measure the resistance of harness between relay 2 connector.
sub fan motor connector and main fan relay 2
connector.
(B482) No. 1 — (B497) No. 18:
11 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the sub Repair the poor Go to step 12.
Check poor contact of sub fan motor connector. fan motor connector? contact of sub fan
motor connector.
12 CHECK SUB FAN MOTOR. Does the radiator sub fan Go to step 13. Replace the sub
Connect the battery positive (+) terminal to ter- rotate? fan motor. <Ref. to
minal No. 2 of the sub fan motor, and the ground CO(H4SO)-24,
(–) terminal to terminal No. 1. Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.>
13 CHECK MAIN FAN RELAY 2. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 14. Replace the main
Measure the resistance between main fan relay fan relay 2. <Ref. to
2 terminals. AC-25, Relay and
Terminals Fuse.>
No. 21 — No. 18:
14 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN MAIN FAN Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 15. Repair the open
RELAY 2 CONNECTOR AND MAIN FAN MO- circuit of the har-
TOR CONNECTOR. ness between
1) Disconnect the connector from the main fan main fan relay 2
motor. connector and
2) Measure the resistance of the harness main fan motor
between main fan relay 2 connector and main connector.
fan motor connector.
(B473) No. 2 — (B497) No. 21:
CO(H4SO)-10
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

15 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT OF MAIN FAN Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 16. Repair the open
MOTOR. circuit of the har-
Measure the resistance between main fan ness between the
motor connector and chassis ground. main fan motor
Connector & terminal connector and
(B473) No. 1 — Chassis ground: chassis ground or
poor contact of the
joint connector.
16 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the
Repair the poor Go to step 17.
Check poor contact of main fan motor connec- main fan motor connector? contact of main fan
tor. motor connector.
17 CHECK MAIN FAN MOTOR. Does the radiator main fan Go to step 18. Replace the main
Connect the battery positive (+) terminal to ter-
rotate? fan motor. <Ref. to
minal No. 2 of the main fan motor, and the CO(H4SO)-23,
ground (–) terminal to terminal No. 1. Radiator Main Fan
and Fan Motor.>
LAY CONNECTOR AND ECM. circuit of harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. between sub fan
2) Measure the resistance between the sub relay connector
fan relay connector and ECM connector. and ECM.
(B135) No. 11 — (B497) No. 12:
19 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Check the DTC.
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM Repair the trouble
connector. cause. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
40, Read Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
20 CHECK MAIN FAN RELAY 1. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 21. Replace the main
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay 1. <Ref. to
2) Remove the main fan relay 1 from A/C relay AC-25, Relay and
holder. Fuse.>
3) Measure the resistance between main fan
relay 1 terminals.
Terminals
No. 14 — No. 15:
1) Connect terminals No. 17 and No. 16 of the fan relay 1. <Ref. to
main fan relay 1 to the battery. AC-25, Relay and
2) Measure the resistance between terminals Fuse.>
of main fan relay 1 switch.
Terminals
No. 14 — No. 15:
(B473) No. 2 — (B497) No. 15:
CO(H4SO)-11
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

RELAY 1 CONNECTOR AND ECM. circuit of the har-
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. ness between
2) Measure the resistance between the main main fan relay 1
fan relay 1 connector and ECM connector. connector and
Connector & terminal ECM.
(B135) No. 12 — (B497) No. 16:
Measure the resistance between the main fan ness between
relay 2 connector and ECM connector. main fan relay 2
(B135) No. 12 — (B497) No. 22: ECM.
25 CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Go to step 26.
2) Remove the fuse No. 8 and 26.
26 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Repair the power
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM supply circuit to the
connector. main fuse box.
27 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Does the radiator sub fan Go to step 20. Go to step 28.
If the both fans do not rotate at high speed in the rotate?
condition of step 2, check whether the radiator
sub fan is rotating.
RELAY 2. circuit of the har-
1) Remove the main fan relay 2 from A/C relay ness between
holder. main fan relay 2
2) Measure the resistance between main fan connector and
relay 2 connector and chassis ground. chassis ground or
Connector & terminal poor contact of the
(B497) No. 19 — Chassis ground: joint connector.
29 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO MAIN FAN RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 30. Repair the power
LAY 2. supply line.
2) Measure the voltage between main fan relay
2 connector and chassis ground.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay 2. <Ref. to
2) Remove the main fan relay 2. AC-25, Relay and
3) Measure the resistance between main fan Fuse.>
relay 2 terminals.
Terminals
No. 18 — No. 19:
1) Connect the battery to terminals No. 20 and fan relay 2. <Ref. to
No. 22 of the main fan relay 2. AC-25, Relay and
2) Measure the resistance between main fan Fuse.>
relay 2 terminals.
Terminals
No. 18 — No. 19:
CO(H4SO)-12
Engine Coolant
COOLING
3. Engine Coolant NOTE:

The SUBARU Super Coolant is especially made for
A: REPLACEMENT SUBARU engine, which has an aluminum cylinder
block, and contains anti-freeze and anti-rust
1. DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT agents. Always use SUBARU Super Coolant, since
1) Lift up the vehicle. other coolant may cause corrosion.
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- 3) Fill engine coolant into the reservoir tank up to
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> “FULL” level.
3) Remove the drain plug to drain engine coolant
into container.
NOTE:
Remove the radiator cap so that engine coolant will
drain faster.
FULL
FULL
LOW
LOW
CO-00269
4) Close the radiator cap and start the engine.

Race 5 to 6 times at 3,000 rpm or less, then stop
the engine. (Complete this operation within 40 sec-
onds.)
CO-02632 5) Wait for one minute after the engine stops, and
4) Install the drain plug. open the radiator cap. If the engine coolant level
5) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL- drops, add engine coolant into radiator up to the fill-
LATION, Front Under Cover.> er neck position.
6) Perform the procedures 4) and 5) again.
2. FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT 7) Attach the radiator cap and reservoir tank cap
1) Pour cooling system conditioner from the filler properly.
neck. 8) Start the engine and operate the heater at max-
imum hot position and the blower speed setting to
Cooling system protecting agent: “LO”.
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for cooling sys- 9) Run the engine at 2,000 rpm or less until radiator
tem protecting agent. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-2, fan starts and stops.
SPECIFICATION, General Description.>
2) Pour engine coolant into the radiator up to the NOTE:
filler neck position. Be careful with the engine coolant temperature
gauge to prevent overheating.
Recommended engine coolant: 10) Stop the engine and wait until the engine cool-
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for recommended ant temperature lowers to 30°C (86°F) or less.
engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-2, SPECI- 11) Open the radiator cap. If the engine coolant lev-
FICATION, General Description.> el drops, fill engine coolant up to the radiator filler
Engine coolant level: neck position and to the reservoir tank “FULL” lev-
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for engine cool- el.
ant level. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-2, SPECIFICA- 12) Attach the radiator cap correctly.
TION, General Description.> 13) Set the heater setting to maximum hot position
and the blower speed setting to “LO” and start the
Engine coolant concentration: engine. Perform racing at 3,000 rpm or less. If the
Refer to “ADJUSTMENT” for the recommend- flowing sound is heard from heater core, repeat the
ed engine coolant concentration. <Ref. to procedures from step 9).
CO(H4SO)-14, ADJUSTMENT, Engine Cool-
ant.>
CO(H4SO)-13
Engine Coolant
COOLING
B: ADJUSTMENT
1. PROCEDURE TO ADJUST THE SUBARU SUPER COOLANT CONCENTRATION
CAUTION:
SUBARU Super Coolant concentration must be used from 50 to 60% to assure the best performance
of the anti-freeze and anti-rust agents.
To adjust the concentration of SUBARU Super Coolant according to temperature, find the proper SUBARU
Super Coolant concentration in the table, and add diluting water to the SUBARU Super Coolant (concentrat-
ed type) until it reaches the proper dilution.
Relationship of SUBARU Super Coolant concentration and freezing temperature
SUBARU Super Coolant concentration 50% 55% 60%
Freezing temperature –36°C (–33°F) –41°C (–42°F) –50°C (–58°F)
Recommended Engine Coolant and Water for Dilution:

Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for the recommended engine coolant and diluting water. <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-2, SPECIFICATION, General Description.>
CO(H4SO)-14
Water Pump
COOLING
4. Water Pump 11) Disconnect the hose from water pump.

12) Remove the water pump.
A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-19,
REMOVAL, Radiator.>
2) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42,
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
5) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-47, CO-00021
TIMING BELT, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
6) Remove the automatic belt tension adjuster. B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the water pump onto cylinder block LH.
NOTE:
• When installing the water pump, tighten the bolts
in two stages in alphabetical sequence as shown in
figure.
Tightening torque:
First
CO-00016
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
Second
7) Remove the camshaft position sensor. <Ref. to 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
FU(H4SO)-26, REMOVAL, Camshaft Position
Sensor.> (B)
(C)
8) Remove the cam sprocket LH. <Ref. to (A)
ME(H4SO)-52, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.> (D)
9) Remove the belt cover No. 2 LH.
(E) (F)
ME-04425
2) Install the hose to water pump.

Tightening torque:
CO-00019 24.5 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
ME-04984
ME-04984
CO(H4SO)-15
Water Pump
COOLING
4) Install the belt cover No. 2 LH. C: INSPECTION

Tightening torque: 1) Check the water pump bearing for smooth rota-
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb) tion.
2) Check the water pump pulley for abnormalities.
3) Make sure the impeller is not abnormally de-
formed or damaged.
4) Inspect the clearance between impeller and
pump case.
Clearance between impeller and pump case:
Standard
0.5 — 1.5 mm (0.020 — 0.060 in)
CO-00019
5) Install the cam sprocket LH. <Ref. to

ME(H4SO)-52, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.>
6) Install the camshaft position sensor. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-26, INSTALLATION, Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
7) Install an automatic belt tension adjuster with the
tension rod held by a pin. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48,
AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUSTER AS- CO-00293
SEMBLY AND BELT IDLER, INSTALLATION,
Timing Belt.> 5) After water pump installation, check pulley shaft
for engine coolant leaks or noise. If leaks or noise
8) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-49,
are noted, replace the water pump assembly.
TIMING BELT, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
11) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42, IN-
STALLATION, V-belt.>
12) Install the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-20, IN-
STALLATION, Radiator.>
CO(H4SO)-16
Thermostat
COOLING
5. Thermostat B: INSTALLATION
1) Install a gasket to thermostat.
A: REMOVAL
1) Lift up the vehicle. NOTE:
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- Use a new gasket.
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> 2) Install the thermostat and thermostat cover.
3) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-13, NOTE:
DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE- Install the parts with the jiggle pin facing upward.
MENT, Engine Coolant.>
Tightening torque:
4) Disconnect the radiator outlet hose from thermo-
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
stat cover.
CO-00270
(D)
5) Remove the thermostat cover, and then remove
the gasket and thermostat.
(C)
(B)
(A)
CO-02762
(A) Thermostat cover

(B) Gasket
(C) Thermostat
(D) Jiggle pin
3) Connect the radiator outlet hose to thermostat

(C)
cover.
(B)
(A)
CO-02649
FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
(B) Gasket
(C) Thermostat
CO(H4SO)-17
Thermostat
COOLING
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the thermostat does not have defor-
mation, cracks or damage.
2) Check that the thermostat valve closes com-
pletely at an ambient temperature.
3) Immerse the thermostat and a thermometer in
water. Raise water temperature gradually, and
check the temperature and valve lift when the valve
begins to open and when the valve is fully opened.
Replace the thermostat if faulty.
NOTE:
• During the test, agitate the water for even tem-
perature distribution.
• Leave the thermostat in the boiling water for
five minutes or more before measuring the valve
lift.
• Hold the thermostat with a wire or the like to
avoid contacting the container bottom.
Starting temperature to open:
86 — 90°C (187 — 194°F)
Full open temperature:
95°C (203°F)
Total valve lift:
9.0 mm (0.354 in) or more
(A)
(B)
CO-02420
(A) Thermometer
(B) Thermostat
CO(H4SO)-18
Radiator
COOLING
6. Radiator 8) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-

A: REMOVAL 9) Remove the reservoir tank. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-
25, REMOVAL, Reservoir Tank.>
CAUTION:
The radiator is pressurized when the engine 10) Disconnect the connectors of main fan motor
and radiator are hot. Wait until engine and radi- (A) and sub fan motor (B).
ator cools down before working on the radiator.
(A)
CO-02624
IG-02107
2) Lift up the vehicle. (B)

4) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-13,
DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
stat cover. CO-02625
11) Disconnect the radiator inlet hoses from the en-

gine.
CO-00270
6) Disconnect the CVTF cooler hoses from CVTF

pipes. (CVT model) CO-02617
NOTE: 12) Remove the grille bracket.

Plug the CVTF pipe to prevent CVTF from leaking. NOTE:
Remove ten clips when removing the grille bracket.
CO-02664
7) Lower the vehicle. CO-02618
CO(H4SO)-19
Radiator
COOLING
13) Remove the radiator upper brackets. 3) Install the radiator upper brackets.
Tightening torque:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
CO-02619
14) Lift the radiator up and away from vehicle.

15) Remove the radiator lower cushion from the ve- CO-02619
hicle body.
4) Attach the grille bracket.
CO-02620
CO-02618
B: INSTALLATION 5) Connect the radiator inlet hose.
1) Install the radiator lower cushion to the vehicle
body.
CO-02617
6) Connect the connectors of radiator main fan mo-

CO-02620 tor connector (A) and sub fan motor connector (B).
2) Install the radiator to the vehicle.
NOTE:
Insert the pin on the lower side of radiator into the
radiator lower cushion.
(A)
CO-02624
CO(H4SO)-20
Radiator
COOLING

(B)
16) Adjust the CVTF level. (CVT model) <Ref. to
CVT-37, ADJUSTMENT, CVTF.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the radiator does not have deforma-
tion, cracks or damage.
CO-02625
loose part.
7) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-9, 3) Remove the radiator cap, fill the radiator with en-
INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.> gine coolant, and then install the radiator cap tester
8) Install the reservoir tank. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)- to the filler neck of radiator.
25, INSTALLATION, Reservoir Tank.>
10) Connect the CVTF cooler hoses. (CVT model)
NOTE:
Use a new CVTF hose.
CO-02588
4) Apply a pressure of 157 kPa (1.6 kgf/cm2, 23

psi) to the radiator, and check the following items.
• Leakage from the radiator or its vicinity
• Leakage from the hose or its connections
CO-02664
CAUTION:
11) Connect the radiator outlet hose. • Engine should be turned off.
• Wipe engine coolant from check points in ad-
vance.
• Be careful of engine coolant from spurting
out when removing the radiator cap tester.
• Be careful not to deform the filler neck of ra-
diator when installing and removing the radia-
tor cap tester.
CO-00270

IG-02107
CO(H4SO)-21
Radiator Cap
COOLING
7. Radiator Cap
A: INSPECTION
1) Check that the radiator cap does not have defor-
2) Attach the radiator cap tester to radiator cap.
CO-00044
3) Increase pressure until the radiator cap tester

gauge needle stops. Radiator cap is functioning
properly if it holds the service limit pressure for 5 —
6 seconds. Replace the radiator cap if its valve
opens at less than the service limit.
Standard:
93 — 123 kPa (0.95 — 1.25 kgf/cm2, 14 — 18
psi)
Service limit:
83 kPa (0.85 kgf/cm2, 12 psi)
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove foreign matter and rust from
the cap in advance. Otherwise, results of pres-
sure test will be incorrect.
CO(H4SO)-22
Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor

COOLING
8. Radiator Main Fan and Fan Tightening torque:

7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
Motor
A: REMOVAL
CO-02621
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the clip which holds the main fan motor
IG-02107 assembly connector onto the radiator main fan
2) Remove the reservoir tank. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)- shroud.
25, REMOVAL, Reservoir Tank.> 2) Remove the bolts which hold the main fan motor
3) Disconnect the connector (A) of the main fan assembly onto the radiator main shroud.
motor assembly.
CO-00098
(A)
CO-02624
D: ASSEMBLY
4) Remove the CVTF hose from the clip of the radi-
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
ator main fan shroud. (CVT model)
5) Remove the bolts which hold the radiator main Tightening torque:
fan shroud to the radiator. 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
CO-02621 CO-00098
6) Remove the radiator main fan and fan motor E: INSPECTION

from vehicle.
Check that the radiator main fan, radiator main fan
B: INSTALLATION shroud and main fan motor assembly do not have
CAUTION: deformation, cracks or damage.
Confirm that the radiator hose is securely con-
nected.
CO(H4SO)-23
Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor

COOLING
9. Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Tightening torque:

7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
Motor
A: REMOVAL
CO-02622
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the clip which holds the radiator sub fan
IG-02107 motor assembly connector onto the radiator sub
2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)- fan shroud.
9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> 2) Remove the bolts which hold the sub fan motor
3) Remove the connector (B) of sub fan motor as- assembly onto the radiator sub fan shroud.
sembly.
(B)
CO-00098
CO-02625
D: ASSEMBLY
4) Remove the CVTF hose from the clip of the radi-
ator sub fan & fan motor assembly. (CVT model) Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
5) Remove the bolts which hold the radiator sub fan Tightening torque:
shroud to the radiator. 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
CO-02622 CO-00098
6) Remove the radiator sub fan and fan motor from E: INSPECTION
vehicle.
Check that the radiator sub fan, radiator sub fan
B: INSTALLATION shroud and sub fan motor assembly do not have
CAUTION: deformation, cracks or damage.
Confirm that the radiator hose is securely con-
nected.
CO(H4SO)-24
Reservoir Tank
COOLING
10.Reservoir Tank
A: REMOVAL
1) Pull out the over flow hose (A) from the reservoir
tank.
2) Pull out the reservoir tank to the arrow direction
while pushing the claw (B).
(B)
(A)
CO-02623
B: INSTALLATION
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the reservoir tank does not have de-
formation, cracks or damage.
2) Make sure the over flow hoses are not cracked,
damaged or loose.
3) Make sure the engine coolant level is between
“FULL” and “LOW”.
CO(H4SO)-25
Engine Cooling System Trouble in General

COOLING
11.Engine Cooling System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Replenish engine coolant, inspect for leakage, and
a. Insufficient engine coolant
repair it if necessary.
b. Loose timing belt Repair or replace timing belt tensioner.
c. Oil on timing belt Replace.
d. Malfunction of thermostat Replace.
e. Malfunction of water pump Replace.
f. Clogged engine coolant passage Clean.
Inspect and repair ignition control system. <Ref. to
g. Improper ignition timing
EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
h. Clogged or leaking radiator Clean, repair or replace.
Over-heating i. Defective radiator fan Replace.
Replace the engine coolant. If ineffective, check, repair
j. Improper engine oil in engine coolant
or replace engine components.
Inspect and repair the fuel injection system. <Ref. to
k. Air/fuel mixture ratio too lean
EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
l. Excessive back pressure in exhaust system Clean or replace.
m. Insufficient clearance between piston and cylinder Adjust or replace.
n. Slipping clutch Repair or replace.
o. Dragging brake Adjust.
Inspect the radiator fan relay, engine coolant tempera-
p. Defective radiator fan
ture sensor or fan motor and replace them.
a. Ambient temperature extremely low Partly cover radiator front area.
Over-cooling
b. Defective thermostat Replace.
a. Loosened or damaged connecting units on hoses Repair or replace.
b. Leakage from water pump Replace.
c. Leakage from water pipe Repair or replace.
Retighten cylinder head bolts or replace cylinder head
Engine coolant d. Leakage around cylinder head gasket
gasket.
leaks
e. Damaged or cracked cylinder head and cylinder
Repair or replace.
block
f. Damaged or cracked thermostat cover Repair or replace.
g. Leakage from radiator Repair or replace.
a. Timing belt problem Replace.
b. Defective radiator fan Replace.
Noise
c. Defective water pump bearing Replace water pump.
d. Defective water pump mechanical seal Replace water pump.
CO(H4SO)-26
LUBRICATION
LU(H4SO)
Page
2. Oil Pressure System ................................................................................11
3. Engine Oil .................................................................................................13
4. Oil Pump ..................................................................................................15
5. Oil Pan and Strainer .................................................................................19
6. Oil Pressure Switch ..................................................................................24
7. Engine Oil Cooler .....................................................................................25
8. Oil Catch Tank .........................................................................................27
9. Scavenge Pump .......................................................................................28
10. Oil Pipe .....................................................................................................29
11. Engine Oil Filter ........................................................................................34
12. Oil Level Switch ........................................................................................35
13. Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General ........................................43
General Description
LUBRICATION
A: SPECIFICATION
• Non-turbo model
Lubrication method Forced lubrication
Pump type Trochoid type
Inner rotor 9
Number of teeth
Outer rotor 10
Outer rotor diameter × thickness mm (in) 76 × 10 (2.99 × 0.39)
Tip clearance between inner and
mm (in) Standard 0.04 — 0.14 (0.0016 — 0.0055)
outer rotors
Case clearance between outer
mm (in) Standard 0.10 — 0.175 (0.0039 — 0.0069)
rotor and pump case
Side clearance between inner
mm (in) Standard 0.02 — 0.07 (0.0008 — 0.0028)
rotor and pump case
Oil pump
Relief valve spring Installed length mm (in) 54.7 (2.154)
Load when installed N (kgf, lbf) 93.1 (9.49, 20.93)
Discharge
kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) 98 (1.0, 14)
600 rpm pressure
Performance Discharge rate 2 (US qt, Imp qt)/min. 4.6 (4.9, 4.0) or more
(Oil temperature
Discharge
80°C (176°F)) kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) 294 (3.0, 43)
5,000 rpm pressure
Discharge rate 2 (US qt, Imp qt)/min. 47.0 (49.7, 41.4) or more
Relief valve working pressure kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) 588 (6.0, 85)
Filter type Full-flow filter type
Outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in) (Black) 800 (124)
Filtration area cm2 (sq in)
Outer diameter: 67.4 mm (2.65 in) (Blue) 555 (86)
Oil filter By-pass valve opening pressure kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) 160 (1.63, 23.2)
Outer diameter × Outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in) (Black) 68 × 65 (2.68 × 2.56)
mm (in)
width Outer diameter: 67.4 mm (2.65 in) (Blue) 67.4 × 65.3 (2.65 × 2.57)
Installation screw specifications M 20 × 1.5
Type Immersed contact point type
Oil pressure Operating voltage — power consumption 12 V — 3.4 W or less
switch Warning light operating pressure kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) 14.7 (0.15, 2.1)
Proof pressure kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) 981 (10, 142) or more
Total capacity (at overhaul) 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.8 (5.1, 4.2)
Engine oil When replacing engine oil and oil filter 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.2 (4.4, 3.7)
When replacing engine oil only 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.0 (4.2, 3.5)
LU(H4SO)-2
General Description
LUBRICATION
Recommended oil:
CAUTION:
It is acceptable to fill an engine with oil of another brand when replacing the oil, but make sure to use
following oil specified by Subaru.
Engine oil standard SAE viscosity No.
5W-30 (synthetic oil)
TR OLEUM
PE
IN
FOR
AM ER I CA
ST I
GASOLINE
TUTE
or ENGINES
C
ER D
T I F IE
RM-00076 RM-00002
For API standard, oil with SM “Energy Those with the ILSAC standard GF-4
Conserving” or SN “Resource Con- or GF-5 “starburst mark” displayed on
serving” logo. top of the container.
NOTE:
The proper viscosity oil helps the engine maintain its ideal temperature, and cranking speed increased by re-
ducing viscosity friction in hot condition.
LU(H4SO)-3
General Description
LUBRICATION
• Turbo model
Lubrication method Forced lubrication
Pump type Trochoid type
Inner rotor 9
Number of teeth
Outer rotor 10
Outer rotor diameter × thickness mm (in) 78 × 11 (3.07 × 0.43)
Tip clearance between inner and
mm (in) Standard 0.04 — 0.14 (0.0016 — 0.0055)
outer rotors
Case clearance between outer
mm (in) Standard 0.10 — 0.175 (0.0039 — 0.0069)
rotor and pump case
Side clearance between inner
mm (in) Standard 0.02 — 0.07 (0.0008 — 0.0028)
rotor and pump case
Oil pump
Relief valve spring Installed length mm (in) 54.7 (2.154)
Load when installed N (kgf, lbf) 93.1 (9.49, 20.93)
Discharge
kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 98 (1.0, 14)
600 rpm pressure
Performance Discharge rate 2 (US qt, Imp qt)/min. 6.4 (6.8, 5.6) or more
(Oil temperature
Discharge
80°C (176°F)) kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 392 (4.0, 56.8)
6,000 rpm pressure
Discharge rate 2 (US qt, Imp qt)/min. 63.0 (66.6, 55.4) or more
Relief valve working pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 538 (5.5, 78)
Filter type Full-flow filter type
Outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in) (Black) 800 (124)
Filtration area cm2 (sq in)
Outer diameter: 67.4 mm (2.65 in) (Blue) 555 (86)
Oil filter By-pass valve opening pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 160 (1.63, 23.2)
Outer diameter × Outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in) (Black) 68 × 65 (2.68 × 2.56)
mm (in)
width Outer diameter: 67.4 mm (2.65 in) (Blue) 67.4 × 65.3 (2.65 × 2.57)
Installation screw specifications M 20 × 1.5
Type Immersed contact point type
Oil pressure Operating voltage — power consumption 12 V — 3.4 W or less
switch Warning light operating pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 14.7 (0.15, 2.1)
Proof pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 981 (10, 142) or more
Total capacity (at overhaul) 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 5.2 (5.5, 4.6)
Engine oil When replacing engine oil and oil filter 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.3 (4.5, 3.8)
When replacing engine oil only 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.0 (4.2, 3.5)
LU(H4SO)-4
General Description
LUBRICATION
Required oil:
CAUTION:
• Use 5W-30 (synthetic oil).
• It is acceptable to fill an engine with oil of another brand when replacing the oil, but make sure
to use following oil specified by Subaru.
Engine oil standard SAE viscosity No.
5W-30 (synthetic oil)
TR OLEUM
PE
IN
FOR
AM ER I CA
ST I
GASOLINE
TUTE
or ENGINES
C
ER D
T I F IE
RM-00076 RM-00002
For API standard, oil with SM “Energy Those with the ILSAC standard GF-4
Conserving” or SN “Resource Con- or GF-5 “starburst mark” displayed on
serving” logo. top of the container.
NOTE:
The proper viscosity oil helps the engine maintain its ideal temperature, and cranking speed increased by re-
ducing viscosity friction in hot condition.
LU(H4SO)-5
General Description
LUBRICATION
B: COMPONENT
• Non-turbo model
T6 (13)
(16)
(15)
(14)
T3
(17)
(12)
(29)
(11) (28)
T3 (18)
(32)
T3 T10
T3
T4
T3
(9)
T2
(20)
(8) T9 (31) (19) T3
(7) (33)
(6)
(36)
(24)
(27)
(35) (30)
T3
(5) (10)
(4) (2)
T5
(34) T3
(21)
(3) T8
(1) (23) (22)
T1
(26)
T7 (25) LU-02686
LU(H4SO)-6
General Description
LUBRICATION
(1) Plug (17) O-ring (33) O-ring

(2) Gasket (18) Baffle plate (34) Oil drain pipe
(3) Relief valve spring (19) O-ring (35) O-ring
(4) Relief valve (20) Oil strainer (36) Oil level switch
(5) Front oil seal (21) Oil level gauge guide
(6) Oil pump case (22) O-ring Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(7) Inner rotor (23) Oil pan T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(8) Outer rotor (24) Oil level gauge T2: 5.4 (0.6, 4.0)
(9) Oil pump cover (25) Drain plug T3: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(10) Oil filter (26) Drain plug gasket T4: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(11) O-ring (27) Cylinder block lower T5: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(12) Oil pump ASSY (28) Seal T6: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(13) Oil pressure switch (29) Rocker cover T7: 41.7 (4.3, 30.8)
(14) Oil filler duct (30) O-ring T8: 44 (4.5, 32.5)
(15) Gasket (31) Oil filter connector T9: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
(16) Oil filler cap (32) Plug T10: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
LU(H4SO)-7
General Description
LUBRICATION
• Turbo model
(16) (30)
T6
(33)
T3
(17)
(18)
(44)
T3 (19)
(31)
(15) (20)
T10
(14)
(35)
(37)
(29)
T3 (36) T4
T3
(13)
(37)
(37)
T3 (9) T2
(22)
(36) (21) T3
(8) (37)
T3 (42)
(7) (11) (23)
(6) (41)
(38) (34)
T9
(12) T3 (40) (26)
T3
(5) (39)
(4) T3 T5 T3
(2) (43)
(24)
(25)
(3) T8 (32)
(1)
T1
(10) (27)
T7 (28)
LU-02679
LU(H4SO)-8
General Description
LUBRICATION
(1) Plug (21) O-ring (41) Oil level switch

(2) Gasket (22) Oil strainer (42) O-ring
(3) Relief valve spring (23) Cylinder block lower (43) Oil drain pipe
(4) Relief valve (24) Oil level gauge guide (44) Scavenge pump
(5) Front oil seal (25) Oil pan
(6) Oil pump case (26) O-ring Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(7) Inner rotor (27) Drain plug gasket T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(8) Outer rotor (28) Drain plug T2: 5.4 (0.6, 4.0)
(9) Oil pump cover (29) Gasket T3: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(10) Oil filter (30) Oil filler cap T4: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(11) Oil cooler connector (31) Seal T5: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(12) Oil cooler pipe (32) O-ring T6: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(13) Oil cooler (33) Gasket T7: 41.7 (4.3, 30.8)
(14) O-ring (34) Oil level gauge T8: 44 (4.5, 32.5)
(15) Oil pump ASSY (35) Plug T9: 54 (5.5, 39.8)
(16) Oil pressure switch (36) Oil cooler hose T10: 69 (7.0, 50.9)
(17) Oil filler duct (37) Clip
(18) O-ring (38) Oil cooler pipe stay
(19) Rocker cover (39) O-ring
(20) Baffle plate (40) O-ring
C: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
battery.
• If the engine oil is spilt over exhaust pipe or the
under cover, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emitting
smoke or causing a fire.
• Prepare a container and cloth when performing
work which oil possibly spills. If oil spills, wipe it off
immediately to prevent from penetrating into floor
or flowing out for environmental protection.
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing of oil.
LU(H4SO)-9
General Description
LUBRICATION
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
18332AA000 OIL FILTER Used for removing and installing black oil filter
WRENCH (outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in)).
ST18332AA000
INSTALLER
ST-499587100
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Oil filter wrench (65/67 mm 14 flutes) Used for removing and installing blue oil filter (outer diameter:
67.4 mm (2.65 in)).
LU(H4SO)-10
Oil Pressure System

LUBRICATION
2. Oil Pressure System

A: WIRING DIAGRAM
FB-30
F/B FUSE NO. 5
(IG)
19
OIL PRESSURE
COMBINATION
WARNING
METER
LIGHT
i 10
8
i1
35
B 36
B 21
*
E2
E 11
: 2.5 L NON-TURBO MODEL : 31

* 2.5 L TURBO MODEL : 45
OIL
PRESSURE
SWITCH
i10 B21 (BLACK) B36
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 28 42
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
LU-02597
LU(H4SO)-11
Oil Pressure System

LUBRICATION
B: INSPECTION
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK COMBINATION METER. Does the warning light illumi- Go to step 2. Repair or replace
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF) nate? the combination
2) Check the warning light in the combination meter. <Ref. to IDI-
meter. 10, INSPECTION,
Combination Meter
System.>
2 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the oil Go to step 3.
COMBINATION METER AND OIL PRES- pressure switch.
SURE SWITCH. <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. LU(H4SO)-24, Oil
2) Disconnect the connector from oil pressure Pressure Switch.>
switch.
4) Measure the voltage of harness between oil
pressure switch connector and chassis ground.
(E11) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
3 CHECK COMBINATION METER. Is the resistance less than 10 Repair the harness Repair or replace
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Ω? and connector. the combination
2) Remove the combination meter. NOTE: meter. <Ref. to IDI-
3) Measure the resistance of combination In this case, repair 10, INSPECTION,
meter. the following item: Combination Meter
Terminals • Open circuit of System.>
No. 8 — No. 19: harness between
combination meter
and oil pressure
switch
• Poor contact of
combination meter
connector
• Poor contact of
oil pressure switch
connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
LU(H4SO)-12
Engine Oil
LUBRICATION
3. Engine Oil B: REPLACEMENT

A: INSPECTION CAUTION:
If the engine oil is spilt over exhaust pipe or the
CAUTION: under cover, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emit-
If the engine oil is spilt over exhaust pipe or the ting smoke or causing a fire.
under cover, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emit- 1) Open the oil filler cap for quick draining of engine
ting smoke or causing a fire. oil.
1) Park the vehicle on a level surface. 2) Lift up the vehicle.
2) Remove the oil level gauge and wipe away the 3) Remove the service hole cover of under cover.
oil. (Large under cover model)
3) Reinsert the oil level gauge all the way. Be sure
that the oil level gauge is correctly inserted and
properly orientated.
4) Pull out the oil level gauge again, and check the
oil level. If the engine oil level is below “L” line,
check for oil leakage from engine and add oil to
bring the level up to “F” line.
5) Start the engine to circulate the oil in engine
room.
6) After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes
for the oil to return to the oil pan before checking LU-02570
the level. 4) Drain engine oil by loosening the drain plug.
NOTE: NOTE:
• Just after driving or while the engine is warm, en- Prepare the container for draining of engine oil.
gine oil level shows in the range between the “F” • Models with small and medium under cover
line and the notch mark. This is caused by thermal
expansion of engine oil.
• To prevent overfilling of engine oil, do not add oil
above “F” line when the engine is cold.
• As the oil level gauge is used for daily inspection,
“F” line and “L” line are set assuming that the en-
gine is cold.
(A) (B) (F)
LU-02571
(C)
• Models with large under cover
(E)
(D)
LU-02569
(A) Oil level gauge

(B) Oil filler cap
(C) “F” line
(D) “L” line LU-02572
(F) Notch mark
LU(H4SO)-13
Engine Oil
LUBRICATION
5) Tighten the drain plug after draining engine oil. 9) Close the oil filler cap.
NOTE: 10) Start the engine to circulate the oil in engine
Use a new drain plug gasket. room.
11) After stopping the engine, recheck the oil level.
Tightening torque: If necessary, add engine oil up to the “F” line on oil
41.7 N·m (4.3 kgf-m, 30.8 ft-lb) level gauge.
• Models with small and medium under cover
(A) (B) (F)
(C)
(E)
(D)
LU-02569
LU-02571
(A) Oil level gauge
• Models with large under cover
(B) Oil filler cap
(C) “F” line
(D) “L” line
(F) Notch mark
LU-02572
6) Install the service hole cover of under cover.

(Large under cover model)
LU-02570

8) Using engine oil of proper quality and viscosity,
fill engine oil through the oil filler duct to the “F” line
on oil level gauge. Make sure that the vehicle is
parked on a level surface when checking oil level.
Recommended oil:
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for recommended
oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-2, SPECIFICATION,
General Description.>
Engine oil capacity:
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for engine oil ca-
pacity. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-2, SPECIFICA-
TION, General Description.>
LU(H4SO)-14
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
4. Oil Pump 8) Remove the oil pump by using flat tip screwdriv-
er.
A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
1) Remove the collector cover. (turbo model) Be careful not to damage the mating surface of
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. the cylinder block and oil pump.
IG-02107 LU-00016
3) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-19, 9) Remove the front oil seal from the oil pump.
REMOVAL, Radiator.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-21,
REMOVAL, Radiator.> B: INSTALLATION
4) Remove the crankshaft position sensor. <Ref. to 1) Using the ST, install the front oil seal.
FU(H4SO)-24, REMOVAL, Crankshaft Position ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
Sensor.> <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-34, REMOVAL, NOTE:
Crankshaft Position Sensor.>
Use a new front oil seal.
5) Remove the water pump. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-
15, REMOVAL, Water Pump.> <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-16, REMOVAL, Water Pump.>
6) Remove the crank sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
53, REMOVAL, Crank Sprocket.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-60, REMOVAL, Crank Sprocket.>
ST
LU-00021

pump.
NOTE:
LU-02111
Liquid gasket:
7) Remove the bolts which install oil pump onto cyl- THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
inder block. or equivalent
NOTE:
When disassembling and checking the oil pump, loos-
en the relief valve plug before removing the oil pump.
(A)
ME-00165
(A) O-ring
LU-00015
LU(H4SO)-15
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the inside of front oil 10) Connect the battery ground terminal.
seal.
IG-02107
ME-00312
C: DISASSEMBLY
4) Install the oil pump to cylinder block.
Remove the screw which secures oil pump cover
CAUTION: and then disassemble oil pump. Inscribe alignment
• Be careful not to damage the front oil seal marks on the inner and outer rotors so that they can
during installation. be replaced in their original positions during reas-
• Make sure the front oil seal lip is not folded. sembly.
NOTE: NOTE:
• Align the flat surface of oil pump’s inner rotor with Before disassembling the oil pump, remove the re-
that of crankshaft before installation. lief valve.
• Do not forget to assemble O-rings.
5) Apply liquid gasket to the three bolts thread (E)
(D)
Liquid gasket:
(C)
equivalent (B)
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(A)
(F) (I)
(G)
(H)
ME-04946
6) Install the crank sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- LU-00020

53, INSTALLATION, Crank Sprocket.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-60, INSTALLATION, Crank Sprock- (A) Front oil seal
et.> (B) Oil pump case
7) Install the water pump. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-15, (C) Inner rotor
INSTALLATION, Water Pump.> <Ref. to (D) Outer rotor
CO(H4DOTC)-17, INSTALLATION, Water Pump.> (E) Oil pump cover
8) Install the crankshaft position sensor. <Ref. to (F) Relief valve
FU(H4SO)-24, INSTALLATION, Crankshaft Posi-
(G) Relief valve spring
tion Sensor.> <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-34, INSTAL-
LATION, Crankshaft Position Sensor.> (H) Plug
9) Install the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-20, IN- (I) Gasket
STALLATION, Radiator.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-
22, INSTALLATION, Radiator.>
LU(H4SO)-16
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
D: ASSEMBLY
1) Using the ST, install the front oil seal. T1
ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
(E)
NOTE:
Use a new front oil seal. (D)
(C)
(B)
(A)
ST
(F) (G) (I)
(H)
LU-00021
2) Apply a coat of engine oil to inner and outer ro-

tors. T2
3) Install the inner and outer rotors.
4) Install the oil relief valve and relief valve spring
and plug. LU-02134
NOTE: (A) Front oil seal

Use a new gasket.
(B) Oil pump case
5) Install the oil pump cover.
(C) Inner rotor
Tightening torque: (D) Outer rotor
T1: 5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.0 ft-lb) (E) Oil pump cover
T2: 44 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 ft-lb) (F) Relief valve
(G) Relief valve spring
(H) PLUG
(I) Gasket
E: INSPECTION
1. TIP CLEARANCE
Measure the tip clearance of rotors. If the clearance
is out of standard, replace the rotors as a set.
Tip clearance between inner and outer rotors:
Standard
0.04 — 0.14 mm (0.0016 — 0.0055 in)
LU-00023
LU(H4SO)-17
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
2. CASE CLEARANCE 5. OIL PUMP CASE

Measure the clearance between outer rotor and oil Check for worn shaft hole, clogged oil passage,
pump case. If clearance is out of standard, replace worn rotor chamber, cracks and other faults.
the oil pump case.
6. FRONT OIL SEAL
Case clearance between outer rotor and pump Check the front oil seal lips for deformation and
case: hardening, wear.
Standard
0.10 — 0.175 mm (0.0039 — 0.0069 in)
LU-00024
3. SIDE CLEARANCE
Measure the gap between the inner rotor and the
oil pump case to measure the clearance between
the inner rotor and the oil pump cover as shown in
the figure. If clearance is out of standard, replace
the rotor or the oil pump case.
Side clearance between inner rotor and pump
case:
Standard
0.02 — 0.07 mm (0.0008 — 0.0028 in)
LU-00025
4. OIL RELIEF VALVE

Check the valve for assembly condition and dam-
age, and the relief valve spring for damage and de-
terioration. Replace the parts if defective.
Relief valve spring:
Free length
73.7 mm (2.902 in)
Installed length
54.7 mm (2.154 in)
Load when installed
93.1 N (9.49 kgf, 20.93 lbf)
LU(H4SO)-18
Oil Pan and Strainer

LUBRICATION
5. Oil Pan and Strainer 2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.
A: REMOVAL
1. OIL PAN
IG-02107
3) Remove the air intake boot assembly. (non-tur-

bo model) <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air In-
take Boot.>
4) Remove the intercooler. (turbo model) <Ref. to
IG-02107
IN(H4DOTC)-17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.>
2) Lift up the vehicle. 5) Support the engine with a lifting device and wire
3) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- ropes.
4) Drain the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, RE-
PLACEMENT, Engine Oil.>
<Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-5, REMOVAL, Front Ex-
haust Pipe.>
6) Remove the bolts which secure the oil pan to the
cylinder block lower.
LU-00222

CAUTION:
at the same time.
7) Remove the oil pan. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-19, OIL
PAN, REMOVAL, Oil Pan and Strainer.>
8) Remove the engine mounting. <Ref. to
LU-02583 ME(H4SO)-38, REMOVAL, Engine Mounting.>
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-37, REMOVAL, Engine
7) Insert an oil pan cutter blade into the gap be-
Mounting.>
tween cylinder block lower and oil pan, and remove
9) Remove the bolt which secures the cylinder
the oil pan.
block lower to the cylinder block.
CAUTION:
Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool in place
of oil pan cutter.
2. CYLINDER BLOCK LOWER
1) Remove the collector cover. (turbo model)
LU-02635
10) Use a flat tip screwdriver through the gap be-

tween the cylinder block and cylinder block lower to
remove the cylinder block lower.
LU(H4SO)-19

LUBRICATION
CAUTION: B: INSTALLATION
Insert the flat tip screwdriver to the position
shown in the figure, and be careful not to dam- 1. OIL PAN
age the mating surface of the cylinder block NOTE:
and cylinder block lower. Before installing the oil pan, clean the mating sur-
face of oil pan and cylinder block.
pan, and install the oil pan.
NOTE:
Liquid gasket:
or equivalent
ME-04426
11) Remove the oil strainer from the cylinder block

lower.
12) Remove the oil level switch from the cylinder
block lower. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-35, REMOVAL, Oil
Level Switch.>
(G)
LU-02580
2) Tighten the bolts to install the oil pan to the cyl-

inder block lower.
Tightening torque:
(I) 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
(F)
(E)
(H)
(D)
(K)
(C) (J)
LU-02583
(B)
(A) 3) Install the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
LU-02598
Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-7, INSTALLATION,
Front Exhaust Pipe.>
(A) Oil pan 4) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL-
(B) Oil drain pipe LATION, Front Under Cover.>
(C) Cylinder block lower 5) Lower the vehicle.
(D) O-ring
(E) Oil strainer
(F) Baffle plate
(G) Cylinder block
(H) O-ring
(I) Seal
(J) O-ring
(K) Oil level switch
LU(H4SO)-20

LUBRICATION
6) Connect the battery ground terminal. (2) Insert the oil drain pipe up to the reference
line (A) using a plastic hammer.
NOTE:
Be careful not to deform the oil drain pipe.
(A)
IG-02107
7) Refill the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, RE-

LU-02601
2. CYLINDER BLOCK LOWER
(3) Measure the oil drain pipe protrusion “L” and
NOTE: check that the value is within the specified
Before installing the cylinder block lower, clean the range.
mating surface of cylinder block lower and cylinder
block. Oil drain pipe protrusion L:
1) Make sure that the seals (A) are installed se- Standard
curely on the baffle plate in a direction as shown in 89.0 — 91.0 mm (3.50 — 3.58 in)
the figure below.
NOTE:
Use a new seal.
L
(A)
LU-02600
4) Install the oil level switch to the cylinder block

lower. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-36, INSTALLATION, Oil
LU-00052 Level Switch.>
5) Install the oil strainer to the cylinder block lower.
NOTE:
Tightening torque:
Use new O-rings.
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
3) Install the oil drain pipe to the cylinder block lower. Tightening torque:
(1) Draw a reference line (A) on the oil drain 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
pipe using a marker as shown in the figure. 6) Install the O-ring to the cylinder block lower.
Oil drain pipe protrusion L: NOTE:
90.0 mm (3.54 in) • Use new O-rings.
• Install the O-ring with the metal side facing up-
ward.
7) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of the
oil pan, and install the cylinder block lower.
L CAUTION:
(A)
O-ring (A).
NOTE:
LU-02608
LU(H4SO)-21

LUBRICATION
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100) (G)
or equivalent
(A)
(I)
(F)
T2 T3
(E)
T2
LU-02581 (H)
(D)
(A) O-ring (K)
(C)
(J)
8) Tighten the bolts to install the cylinder block low-
er to the cylinder block. T4
T2
(B)
Tightening torque: (A)
T1: 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
T1
T2: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) LU-02599
T3: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
T4:16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb) (A) Oil pan
(B) Oil drain pipe
(C) Cylinder block lower
(D) O-ring
(E) Oil strainer
(F) Baffle plate
(G) Cylinder block
(H) O-ring
(I) Seal
(J) O-ring
(K) Oil level switch
9) Install the engine mount. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-

39, INSTALLATION, Engine Mounting.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-38, INSTALLATION, Engine Mount-
ing.>
10) Install the oil pan. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-20, OIL
PAN, INSTALLATION, Oil Pan and Strainer.>
CAUTION:
When lowering the vehicle, lower the lift up de-
vice and wire ropes at the same time.
LU(H4SO)-22

LUBRICATION
12) Remove the lifting device and wire ropes.
LU-00222
13) Install the intercooler. (turbo model) <Ref. to

IN(H4DOTC)-18, INSTALLATION, Intercooler.>
14) Install the air intake boot assembly. (non-turbo
model) <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-8, INSTALLATION, Air
Intake Boot.>
IG-02107
16) Install the collector cover. (turbo model)

17) Refill the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13,
REPLACEMENT, Engine Oil.>
C: INSPECTION
Check that the oil pan, oil strainer and baffle plate
do not have deformation, cracks or damage.
LU(H4SO)-23
Oil Pressure Switch

LUBRICATION
6. Oil Pressure Switch

A: REMOVAL
LU-00129
2) Install the oil pressure switch to cylinder block.

Tightening torque:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
IG-02107

3) Disconnect the terminal from oil pressure switch.
LU-02616
3) Connect the terminal to the oil pressure switch.
LU-02615
4) Remove the oil pressure switch.
LU-02615
4) Install the generator. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-16, IN-

STALLATION, Generator.>
LU-02616
B: INSTALLATION
1) Apply liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch
threads.
Liquid gasket:
equivalent
IG-02107
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the oil pressure switch does not have
deformation, cracks or damage.
2) Check the oil pressure switch installation portion
for oil leakage and oil seepage.
LU(H4SO)-24
Engine Oil Cooler

LUBRICATION
7. Engine Oil Cooler 8) Remove the oil cooler connector (D) and oil cool-
er (E).
A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
causing a fire.
NOTE:
Turbo model is equipped with engine oil cooler.
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- (G)
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> (F)
3) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)- (C)
14, DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, RE- (E)
PLACEMENT, Engine Coolant.> (G)
EX(H4DOTC)-5, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.>
(C) (G)
5) Remove the engine oil filter. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)- (B)
(G) (H)
34, REMOVAL, Engine Oil Filter.>
6) Remove the bolt (B) holding the oil cooler pipe (B)
(A) to the oil pump. (D) (A)
7) Remove the oil cooler pipe (A) and oil cooler (B) (I)
hose (C). LU-02573
(A) Oil cooler pipe

(B) Bolt
(C) Oil cooler hose
(D) Oil cooler connector
(E) Oil cooler
(F) Gasket
(G) Clip
(H) Oil cooler pipe stay
(I) O-ring
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
• Use new gaskets and O-rings.
• Use a new oil cooler hose.
• After installing, check the engine oil level and re-
plenish it if necessary. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, IN-
SPECTION, Engine Oil.>
• After temporarily installing the oil cooler pipe,
tighten the bolts in alphabetical order as shown be-
low.
LU(H4SO)-25
Engine Oil Cooler

LUBRICATION
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the engine oil cooler, oil cooler pipe
and oil cooler connector do not have deformation,
(B)
cracks or damage.
2) Make sure the oil cooler hoses are not cracked,
damaged or loose.
(C)
3) Check the coolant paths for clogs while spraying
(A) compressed air.
4) Make sure the mating surfaces of the cylinder
LU-02613 block do not have damage.
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf-m, 39.8 ft-lb)
(G)
(F)
(C)
(E)
(G)
(C) (G)
(G) (B)
(H)
T1
(A) (B)
(D) T2
(B) T1
T1 (I)
LU-02574
(A) Oil cooler pipe

(B) Bolt
(C) Oil cooler hose
(D) Oil cooler connector
(E) Oil cooler
(F) Gasket
(G) Clip
(H) Oil cooler pipe stay
(I) O-ring
LU(H4SO)-26
Oil Catch Tank

LUBRICATION
8. Oil Catch Tank

A: REMOVAL
For the removal procedures, refer to IN (H4DOTC)
section. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-23, REMOVAL, Oil
Catch Tank.>
B: INSTALLATION
For the installation procedures, refer to IN
(H4DOTC) section. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-23, IN-
STALLATION, Oil Catch Tank.>
C: INSPECTION
For the inspection procedures, refer to IN
(H4DOTC) section. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-24, IN-
SPECTION, Oil Catch Tank.>
LU(H4SO)-27
Scavenge Pump
LUBRICATION
9. Scavenge Pump B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Do not start applying liquid gasket from (A) as
If engine oil is spilt onto the exhaust pipe, wipe shown in the following figure.
causing a fire. NOTE:
NOTE:
Turbo model is equipped with scavenge pump.
1) Lift up the vehicle. Liquid gasket:
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> or equivalent
3) Remove the union bolt (A) that holds the oil pipe
(C) to the scavenge pump (E). (A)
4) Remove the bolt (D) that holds the scavenge
pump (E) to the cylinder head, and remove the
scavenge pump using a flat tip screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surface of
the cylinder head and scavenge pump.
LU-02602
Tightening torque:
(A)
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(B)
(C) T2: 29 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb)
T2
(E)
(A)
(D) LU-02577
(B)
(C)
(A) Union bolt
(B) Gasket T1
(C) Oil pipe

(E)
(D) BOLT (D) LU-02578
(E) Scavenge pump
(A) Union bolt
(B) Gasket
(C) Oil pipe
(D) BOLT
(E) Scavenge pump
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the scavenge pump and oil pipe have
no deformation, cracks and other damages.
2) Check that the scavenge pump has no cracks,
LU(H4SO)-28
Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION
10.Oil Pipe
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
Turbo model is equipped with oil pipe.
1) Remove the collector cover.
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. (a)
EX-02549
(C)
IG-02107
(B) (A)
3) Remove the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-
17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.>
4) Lift up the vehicle. EX-02550
5) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- 9) Lower the vehicle.
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> 10) Remove the union bolt (B) securing the oil out-
6) Remove the ground cable from the oil outlet let pipe (A) from the scavenge pump.
pipe. 11) Remove the bolts (C) and (D) securing the oil
7) Disconnect the oil outlet hose from the oil outlet outlet pipe (A) to the cylinder head, and remove the
pipe. oil outlet pipe (A).
(B)
(D)
(A)
EX-02548
A
8) Remove oil inlet pipe B (B) from oil inlet pipe A
(A), and remove the bolt which holds oil outlet pipe
C (C) and oil inlet pipe A (A).
CAUTION:
In order to prevent damaging the oil inlet pipe,
fix the section (a) shown in the figure when A
loosing the oil inlet pipe flare nut, and avoid the
part from rotating together while loosening the
(C)
nut.
LU-02585
LU(H4SO)-29
Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION
12) Remove the oil inlet pipe B (A) from the oil inlet 17) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
pipe C (C). 41, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
CAUTION: 18) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to
In order to avoid damaging the oil inlet pipe C ME(H4DOTC)-43, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
(C), fix the section (a) shown in the figure so 19) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
that it will not rotate together when loosening ME(H4DOTC)-45, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
the flare nut of the oil inlet pipe B (A). 20) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-50, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
21) Remove the cam sprocket LH. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-59, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.>
(a)
LU-02586
13) Remove the bolt (B) securing the oil inlet pipe B
(A) to the cylinder head and stay, and remove the
oil inlet pipe B (A). ME-04191
14) Remove the union bolt (D) securing the oil inlet
pipe C (C) to the cylinder head, and remove the oil 23) Remove the oil pipe.
inlet pipe C (C). (B) (A)
(B)
(D)
(C) (D)
(D)
(A) (C)
(D)
(B)
(B)
(D)
(C)
(A)
(D)
ME-04320
LU-02587
(A) Union bolt with filter (with protrusion)
15) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to (B) Union bolt without filter (without protrusion)
FU(H4DOTC)-17, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.> (C) Oil pipe
16) Remove the radiator main fan and radiator sub (D) Gasket
fan. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-25, REMOVAL, Radia-
tor Main Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.>
LU(H4SO)-30
Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION
B: INSTALLATION 4) Install the cam sprocket LH. <Ref. to

ME(H4DOTC)-59, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprock-
1) Inspect the union bolt with filter. <Ref. to
et.>
LU(H4SO)-33, INSPECTING UNION BOLT WITH
5) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-53,
FILTER, INSPECTION, Oil Pipe.>
2) Install the oil pipe.
NOTE: ME(H4DOTC)-48, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt
• Be careful of the install location of the union bolt; Cover.>
the location will differ depending on the presence of 7) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
filter. 43, INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
• Use a new gasket. 8) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-41,
Tightening torque: INSTALLATION, V-belt.>
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) 9) Install the radiator main fan and the radiator sub
T2: 29 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb) fan. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-25, INSTALLATION,
Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to
(B) (A) CO(H4DOTC)-27, INSTALLATION, Radiator Sub
T2
T2 T1
Fan and Fan Motor.>
(D) 10) Install the intake manifold. <Ref. to
(C) (D)
(D) FU(H4DOTC)-21, INSTALLATION, Intake Mani-
fold.>
11) Install the oil inlet pipe C (C) to the cylinder
head with the union bolt (D).
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
29 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb)
(B) 12) Temporarily install the oil inlet pipe B (A) to the
T2
oil inlet pipe C (C).
(D) 13) Install the oil inlet pipe B (A) to the cylinder
(C)
head with the bolt (B).
Tightening torque:
(A) 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
14) Tighten the flare nut of the oil inlet pipe B (A).
(D)
T2 CAUTION:
ME-03922
In order to avoid damaging the oil inlet pipe C
(A) Union bolt with filter (with protrusion) (C), fix the section (a) shown in the figure so
(B) Union bolt without filter (without protrusion) that it will not rotate together when tightening
the flare nut of the oil inlet pipe B (A).
(C) Oil pipe
(D) Gasket
3) Install the belt cover No. 2 LH.

Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb) (a)
LU-02586
ME-04191
LU(H4SO)-31
Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION
Tightening torque: 17) Tighten the union bolt (B) of the oil outlet pipe
20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb) (A).
(B) Tightening torque:
29 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb)
(B)
(A) (C)
(D)
(D)
(A)
(B)
LU-02587 (C)
15) Temporarily install the oil outlet pipe (A) to the
scavenge pump using the union bolt (B). LU-02585
16) Secure the oil outlet pipe (A) to the cylinder
head and stay with bolts (C) and (D).
19) Install the bolt which holds oil outlet pipe (C)
Tightening torque: and oil inlet pipe A (A), and install oil inlet pipe B (B)
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) to oil inlet pipe A (A).
CAUTION:
fix the section (a) shown in the figure when
tightening the oil inlet pipe flare nut, and avoid
the part from rotating together while tightening
the nut.
(a)
EX-02549
LU(H4SO)-32
Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION
Tightening torque: C: INSPECTION

T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb) 1. INSPECTING UNION BOLT WITH FILTER
Check the filter part of union bolt for clogging or
damage, and if defective, replace the union bolt
T1 with filter with the new part.
(C)
(B) (A)
(D)
(C) (D)
(D)
(B) T2 (A)
EX-02555
20) Attach the ground cable to the oil outlet pipe.

Tightening torque:
7 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.2 ft-lb)
21) Connect the oil outlet hose to the oil outlet pipe.
(B)
(D)
(C)
(A)
(D)
ME-04320
EX-02548
(B) Union bolt without filter (without protrusion)
(C) Oil pipe
24) Install the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)- (D) Gasket
18, INSTALLATION, Intercooler.>
25) Connect the battery ground terminal. 2. OTHER INSPECTIONS
1) Check that the oil pipe and union bolt have no
deformation, cracks and other damages.
2) Check that there are no oil leaks or oil oozing
from the oil pipe attachment section.
IG-02107
26) Install the collector cover.
LU(H4SO)-33
Engine Oil Filter

LUBRICATION
11.Engine Oil Filter B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
Do not tighten excessively, or oil may leak.
CAUTION: 1) Clean the oil filter installation surface on the cyl-
If the engine oil is spilt over exhaust pipe or the inder block or engine oil cooler.
under cover, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emit- 2) Obtain a new oil filter and apply a thin coat of en-
ting smoke or causing a fire. gine oil to the seal rubber.
1) Lift up the vehicle. 3) Install the oil filter turning it by hand, being care-
2) Remove the service hole cover of under cover. ful not to damage the seal rubber of the oil filter.
• Medium under cover model • Tighten the oil filter (Black) with an outer diame-
ter of 68 mm (2.68 in) (approx. 1 rotation) after the
seal rubber of the oil filter comes in contact with cyl-
inder block. When using a torque wrench, tighten to
14 N·m (1.4 kgf-m, 10.3 ft-lb).
• Tighten the oil filter (Blue) with an outer diameter
of 67.4 mm (2.65 in) (approx. 7/8 rotation) after the
seal rubber of the oil filter comes in contact with cyl-
inder block. When using a torque wrench, tighten to
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb).
LU-02575
4) Return the service hole cover to its original posi-
tion.
• Models with large under cover 5) Lower the vehicle.
6) After installing, check the engine oil level and re-
plenish it if necessary. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, IN-
C: INSPECTION
1) After installing the oil filter, run the engine and
make sure that no oil is leaking around seal rubber.
NOTE:
The filter element and filter case are permanently
LU-02570 jointed; therefore, interior cleaning is not neces-
3) Remove the oil filter. sary.
• Black oil filter 2) Check the engine oil level. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-
Remove it using the ST. 13, INSPECTION, Engine Oil.>
ST 18332AA000 OIL FILTER WRENCH (OUT-
ER DIAMETER: 68 MM (2.68
IN) FOR OIL FILTER)
• Blue oil filter
Remove it using the general tool (65/67 mm 14
flutes).
LU-02576
LU(H4SO)-34
Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION
12.Oil Level Switch 6) Remove the clip holding the oil level switch har-
ness.
A: REMOVAL • Turbo model
IG-02107

4) Drain the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, RE-
5) Disconnect the connector of the oil level switch
from the engine harness.
LU-02619
• Non-turbo model
LU-02617
LU-02714
LU(H4SO)-35
Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION
7) Remove the oil level switch from the cylinder 2) Hold the oil level switch harness with the clip.
block lower. • Turbo model
LU-02618
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the oil level switch to the cylinder block
lower.
NOTE:
• Apply a coat of engine oil to the O-rings.
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
LU-02619
• Non-turbo model
LU-02618
LU-02715
LU(H4SO)-36
Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION
3) Connect the connector of the oil level switch to

the engine harness.
LU-02617

6) Refill the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, RE-
7) Check the engine oil level. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-
13, INSPECTION, Engine Oil.>
IG-02107
LU(H4SO)-37
Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION
C: WIRING DIAGRAM
FB-30 FB-17
F/B FUSE NO. 5 F/B FUSE NO. 7
(IG) (B) : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
*1 AMONG 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 AND 6
J/C : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
2 2
*2 AMONG 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 AND 12
* * *3 : NON-TURBO MODEL : 10
i82 TURBO MODEL : 1
19
20 COMBINATION
I/F POWER SUPPLY METER
LOW CIRCUIT
ENGINE OIL i10
WARNING LIGHT
DRIVE CIRCUIT MICRO COMPUTER
CAN TRANSCEIVER &

RECEIVER
32
33
39
*1
28
17
J/C
i 98
B 1 3 6 ECM
*1
26
B 21
OIL LEVEL SWITCH
3
*
E2
E 130
B21
i82 B136 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
i10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
i98 1 2 3 4 5 6
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
7 8 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
LU-02653
LU(H4SO)-38
Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION
D: INSPECTION
1. INSPECTION WHILE OIL LEVEL SWITCH WARNING LIGHT IS ON
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL. Is engine oil level normal? Go to step 2. Replace engine oil
or refill, and check
again while the oil
level is normal con-
dition. <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-13,
REPLACEMENT,
Engine Oil.>
To turn off the oil
level warning light,
install the spare
fuse at the delivery
(test) mode fuse in
the main fuse box.
Then turn the igni-
tion switch to ON
(engine off) again,
to confirm the
warning light turns
off. Remove the
spare fuse
installed to finish
this step.
NOTE:
The engine oil level
switch is normal, if
the low engine oil
level warning light
turns off with the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in-
stalled.
2 CHECK LAN SYSTEM. Has a DTC of the LAN system Perform the diag- Go to step 3.
been input? nosis according to
DTC.
LU(H4SO)-39
Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION
Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK OIL LEVEL SWITCH CIRCUIT. Is the “Oil level switch” signal To turn off the oil Go to step 4.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF). displayed in Subaru Select level warning light,
2) Read the current data for engine in the Sub- Monitor HIGH? install the spare
aru Select Monitor to confirm the item for “Oil fuse at the delivery
level switch”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, (test) mode fuse in
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NOR- the main fuse box.
MAL MODE), OPERATION, Subaru Select Then turn the igni-
Monitor.> <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, tion switch to ON
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NOR- (engine off) again,
MAL MODE), OPERATION, Subaru Select to confirm the
Monitor.> warning light turns
off. Remove the
spare fuse
installed to finish
this step.
NOTE:
the low engine oil
level warning light
turns off with the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in-
stalled.
4 CHECK COMBINATION METER. Is combination meter OK? Go to step 5. Replace the com-
Perform the self-diagnosis of combination bination meter.
meter to check if there are any faults in the com- <Ref. to IDI-20,
bination meter. <Ref. to IDI-6, OPERATION, REMOVAL, Com-
Combination Meter System.> bination Meter.>
5 CHECK SECURE CONNECTION OF CON- Is there any insecure connec- Remedy the con- Go to step 6.
NECTOR BETWEEN ENGINE HARNESS tion? nection condition.
AND OIL LEVEL SWITCH. Then, to turn off
the oil level warn-
ing light, install the
spare fuse at the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in the
main fuse box.
Then turn the igni-
tion switch to ON
(engine off) again,
to confirm the
warning light turns
off. Remove the
spare fuse
installed to finish
this step.
NOTE:
the low engine oil
level warning light
turns off with the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in-
stalled.
LU(H4SO)-40
Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION
Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK OIL LEVEL SWITCH. Is the “Oil level switch” signal Replace the oil Go to step 7.
1) Deliberately short circuits by connecting the displayed in Subaru Select level switch. <Ref.
engine harness connector terminal and chassis Monitor HIGH? to LU(H4SO)-35,
ground. REMOVAL, Oil
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF). Level Switch.>
3) Read the current data for engine in the Sub-
aru Select Monitor to confirm the item for “Oil
level switch”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34,
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NOR-
MAL MODE), OPERATION, Subaru Select
Monitor.> <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36,
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NOR-
MAL MODE), OPERATION, Subaru Select
Monitor.>
(E130) No. 1 — Chassis ground:
NECTOR BETWEEN BULKHEAD HARNESS tion? nection condition.
AND ENGINE HARNESS. Then, to turn off
the oil level warn-
ing light, install the
spare fuse at the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in the
main fuse box.
Then turn the igni-
tion switch to ON
(engine off) again,
to confirm the
warning light turns
off. Remove the
spare fuse
installed to finish
this step.
NOTE:
the low engine oil
level warning light
turns off with the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in-
stalled.
8 CHECK ENGINE HARNESS. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 9. Repair or replace
1) Disconnect the connector on the oil level the open circuit of
switch side for the engine harness. engine harness.
2) Disconnect the connector on the bulkhead
harness side for the engine harness.
3) Measure the resistance between connector
terminals.
•Non-turbo model
(E2) No. 10 — (E130) No. 1:
•Turbo model
(E2) No. 1 — (E130) No. 1:
LU(H4SO)-41
Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION
Step Check Yes No

NECTOR BETWEEN ENGINE CONTROL tion? nection condition.
MODULE (ECM) AND BULKHEAD HAR- Then, to turn off
NESS. the oil level warn-
Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI- ing light, install the
65, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> spare fuse at the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in the
main fuse box.
Then turn the igni-
tion switch to ON
(engine off) again,
to confirm the
warning light turns
off. Remove the
spare fuse
installed to finish
this step.
NOTE:
the low engine oil
level warning light
turns off with the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in-
stalled.
10 CHECK BULKHEAD HARNESS. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the Repair or replace
1) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to engine control the open circuit of
EI-65, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> module (ECM). the bulkhead har-
2) Disconnect the engine control module <Ref. to ness.
(ECM) side connector for the bulkhead har- FU(H4SO)-41,
ness. REMOVAL, Engine
3) Disconnect the engine harness connectors Control Module
from the bulkhead harness. (ECM).> <Ref. to
4) Measure the resistance between connector FU(H4DOTC)-58,
terminals. REMOVAL, Engine
Connector & terminal Control Module
•Non-turbo model (ECM).>
(B136) No. 26 — (B21) No. 10:
•Turbo model
(B136) No. 26 — (B21) No. 1:
1) Check that the oil level switch does not have deformation, cracks, or damage.
2) Check the oil level switch installation part for oil leakage and oil seepage.
LU(H4SO)-42
Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General

LUBRICATION
13.Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Before performing diagnostics, make sure that the engine oil level is correct and no oil leakage exists.
a. Oil pressure switch failure
Cracked diaphragm or oil leakage within switch Replace.
Broken spring or seized contacts Replace.
b. Low oil pressure
Clogging of oil filter Replace.
Malfunction of oil by-pass valve in oil filter Replace.
Malfunction of oil relief valve in oil pump Clean or replace.
Warning light remains ON. Clogged oil passage Clean.
Excessive tip clearance and side clearance of oil pump
Replace.
rotor
Clogged oil strainer or broken pipe Clean or replace.
c. No oil pressure
Insufficient engine oil (degradation, etc.) Replace.
Broken pipe of oil strainer Replace.
Stuck oil pump rotor Replace.
a. Defective combination meter Replace.
Warning light does not illu-
b. Poor contact of switch contact points Replace.
minate.
c. Disconnection of wiring Repair.
a. Defective terminal contact Repair.
b. Defective wiring harness Repair.
c. Oil pressure switch failure
Cracked diaphragm or oil leakage within switch Replace.
Broken spring or seized contacts Replace.
d. Low oil pressure
Warning light flickers
momentarily. Clogging of oil filter Replace.
Malfunction of oil by-pass valve in oil filter Replace.
Malfunction of oil relief valve in oil pump Clean or replace.
Clogged oil passage Clean.
Excessive tip clearance and side clearance of oil pump
Replace.
rotor
Clogged oil strainer or broken pipe Clean or replace.
LU(H4SO)-43
Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General

LUBRICATION
LU(H4SO)-44
SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS
SP(H4SO)
Page
2. Accelerator Pedal .......................................................................................4
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Accelerator pedal Stroke At pedal pad 54 — 59 mm (2.13 — 2.32 in)
B: COMPONENT
(2)
(1)
(4)
(3)
SP-02085
(1) Accelerator pedal ASSY (3) Accelerator plate Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Clip (4) Accelerator stopper T: 18 (1.8, 13.3)
C: CAUTION
forming any work.
sion before removal or installation.
• Keep the parts in order and protect them from
dust and dirt.
• Before removal or installation, be sure to clarify
the failure. Avoid unnecessary removal, installa-
tion, disassembly and replacement.
points.
the battery.
SP(H4SO)-2
General Description
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for inspecting the accelerator pedal.
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Circuit tester Used for measuring voltage.
SP(H4SO)-3
Accelerator Pedal
2. Accelerator Pedal D: INSPECTION

A: REMOVAL 1. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. AREA (METHOD WITH CIRCUIT TESTER)
1) Remove the glove box lid assembly, glove box
lower cover, instrument panel side cover RH and
glove box back panel. <Ref. to EI-65, REMOVAL,
Glove Box.>
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF)
3) Measure the voltage between ECM connector
terminals.
IG-02107
2) Disconnect the connector (A).

3) Remove the nut (B) securing accelerator pedal
assembly and remove the accelerator pedal as-
sembly.
(A)
FU-04956
Main sensor side
(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
V
SP-02078
(B)
Sub sensor side
(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
SP-02086
B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. V
Tightening torque: SP-02079
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
C: DISASSEMBLY
NOTE:
The accelerator pedal cannot be disassembled.
SP(H4SO)-4
Accelerator Pedal
Accelerator Accelerator
pedal sensor pedal
Not depressed
1V
(Full closed)
Main 23 (+) and 29 (–)
Depressed
3.5 V
(Full opened)
Not depressed
1V
(Full closed)
Sub 31 (+) and 30 (–)
Depressed
3.5 V
(Full opened)

2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL SEN-
SOR AREA (METHOD WITH SUBARU SE-
LECT MONITOR)
2) Read the accelerator pedal opening angle signal
and voltage of accelerator pedal sensor using Sub-
aru Select Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34,
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL
MODE), OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, READ CURRENT
DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE), OPERA-
TION, Subaru Select Monitor.> <Ref. to
EN(H6DO)(diag)-35, READ CURRENT DATA
FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE), OPERATION,
Subaru Select Monitor.>
Accelerator pedal Accelerator pedal
Standard
sensor opening angle signal
0.0% 1V
Main
100.0% 3.5 V
0.0% 1V
Sub
100.0% 3.5 V
1) Check that the accelerator pedal does not have
deformation, cracks or damage.
2) Check for smooth operation when the accelera-
tor pedal is depressed.
3) Check if the accelerator pedal returns to its orig-
inal position smoothly when the pedal is released.
SP(H4SO)-5
Accelerator Pedal
SP(H4SO)-6
IGNITION
IG(H4SO)
Page
2. Spark Plug ..................................................................................................3
3. Ignition Coil ................................................................................................5
General Description
IGNITION
A: SPECIFICATION
Item Specifications
Type FK 0376
Ignition coil Ignition system Independent ignition coil
Manufacturer Diamond Electric
Manufacturer and type NGK: SIFR6A11
Thread size (diameter, pitch, length) mm 14, 1.25, 19
Spark plug
Spark plug gap mm (in) Standard 1.0 — 1.1 (0.039 — 0.043)
Electrode Iridium
B: COMPONENT
T1
T2
(1)
(2)
T2 T1
(1)
(2)
IG-02103
(1) Spark plug (2) Ignition coil Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
T1: 9 (0.9, 6.6)
T2: 21 (2.1, 15.5)
C: CAUTION
any work.
• Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from the battery.
IG(H4SO)-2
Spark Plug
IGNITION
2. Spark Plug 3) Remove the bolt (B), and remove the ignition
coil.
A: REMOVAL
Spark plug:
(B) (B)
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for the spark
plug. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-2, SPECIFICATION,
1. RH SIDE (A)
(A)
IG-02105
4) Remove the spark plug with a spark plug socket.

B: INSTALLATION
1. RH SIDE
Tightening torque (Spark plug):
IG-02107 21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.5 ft-lb)
2) Remove the air cleaner case. <Ref. to Tightening torque (Ignition coil):
IN(H4SO)-6, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner Case.> 9 N·m (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
3) Disconnect the connector (A) from ignition coil.
4) Remove the bolt (B), and remove the ignition 2. LH SIDE
coil. Install in the reverse order of removal.
(B)
21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.5 ft-lb)
(B)
Tightening torque (Ignition coil):
9 N·m (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the spark plug for abnormalities. If defec-
(A)
(A) tive, replace the spark plug.
IG-02104 (C)
2. LH SIDE
(A)
(B) IG-02094
(A) Terminal damage

(B) Crack or damage in insulator
(C) Damaged gasket
IG-02107
2) Disconnect the connector (A) from ignition coil.
IG(H4SO)-3
Spark Plug
IGNITION
2) Check the spark plug electrode and condition of (4) Overheating:

the insulator. If abnormal, check and repair the White or light gray insulator with black or brown
cause and replace the spark plug. spots and bluish burnt electrodes indicate en-
(1) Normal: gine overheating, wrong selection of fuel, or
Brown to grayish-tan deposits and slight elec- loose spark plugs.
trode wear indicate correct spark plug heat
range.
IG-00014
3) Using a nylon brush, etc., clean and remove the

IG-00011 carbon or oxide deposits from the spark plug. If de-
(2) Carbon fouled: posits are too stubborn, replace the spark plugs.
Dry fluffy carbon deposits on insulator and elec- After cleaning the spark plugs, check the spark
trode are mostly caused by slow speed driving plug gap “L” using a gap gauge. If it is not within the
in the city, weak ignition, too rich fuel mixture, standard, replace the spark plug.
etc. NOTE:
• Never use a plug cleaner.
• Do not use a metal brush as it may damage the
electrode area.
Spark plug gap L:
Standard
1.0 — 1.1 mm (0.039 — 0.043 in)
IG-00012
L
(3) Oil fouled:
Wet black deposits show oil entrance into com-
bustion chamber through worn piston rings or
increased clearance between valve guides and
valve stems.
IG-02108
IG-00013
IG(H4SO)-4
Ignition Coil
IGNITION
3. Ignition Coil
A: REMOVAL
Direct ignition type is adopted. Refer to “Spark
Plug” for removal procedure. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-3,
REMOVAL, Spark Plug.>
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
9 N·m (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
For inspection procedure, refer to “Diagnostics for
Engine Starting Failure”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-
69, IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM, Diagnostics
for Engine Starting Failure.>
IG(H4SO)-5
Ignition Coil
IGNITION
IG(H4SO)-6
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS
SC(H4SO)
Page
2. Starter ........................................................................................................9
3. Generator .................................................................................................16
4. Battery ......................................................................................................25
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
1. 2.5 L MODEL
Item Specification
Vehicle model AT and CVT MT
Type Reduction type
Model 428000-4790 428000-4780
Manufacturer DENSO
Voltage and output 12 V — 1.6 kW
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise (when observed from pinion)
Number of pinion teeth 9
Voltage 11 V
Current 90 A or less
No-load character-
istics Rotat-
Starter ing 1,900 rpm or more
speed
Voltage 8V
Current 370 A
Load characteris- Torque 11.1 N·m (1.1 kgf-m, 8.2 ft-lb) or more
tics Rotat-
ing 910 rpm or more
speed
Voltage 3V
Lock characteris-
tics
Torque 15.5 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.4 ft-lb) or more
Rotating-field three-phase type, voltage regulator built-in type, with load
Type
response control system
Model A3TG6191
Manufacturer MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Voltage and output 12 V — 110 A
Polarity on ground side Negative
Direction of rotation Clockwise (when observed from pulley side)
Armature connection 3-phase Y-type
Generator 1,500 rpm — 50 A or more
Output current 2,500 rpm — 91 A or more
5,000 rpm — 105 A or more
Regulated voltage 14.1 — 14.8 V [20°C (68°F)]
Stan-
Rotor slip ring outer 22.7 mm (0.894 in)
dard
diameter
Limit 22.1 mm (0.870 in)
Stan-
18.5 mm (0.728 in)
Brush length dard
Limit 5.0 mm (0.197 in)
Battery Type and capacity 12 V — 52 AH (75D 23R)
SC(H4SO)-2
General Description
2. 3.6 L MODEL
Item Specification
Vehicle model AT
Type Reduction type
Model 428000-5250
Manufacturer DENSO
Voltage and output 12 V — 1.6 kW
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise (when observed from pinion)
Number of pinion teeth 9
Voltage 11 V
No-load character-
istics Rotat-
Starter ing 1,550 rpm or more
speed
Voltage 8V
Current 370 A
Load characteris- Torque 12.8 N·m (1.3 kgf-m, 9.4 ft-lb) or more
tics Rotat-
ing 800 rpm or more
speed
Voltage 3V
Lock characteris-
tics
Torque 19.0 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb) or more
Rotating-field three-phase type, voltage regulator built-in type, with load
Type
response control system
Model A3TJ3591
Manufacturer MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Voltage and output 12 V — 130 A
Polarity on ground side Negative
Direction of rotation Clockwise (when observed from pulley side)
Armature connection 3-phase type
Generator Output current 2,500 rpm — 108 A or more
Regulated voltage 14.1 — 14.8 V [20°C (68°F)]
Stan-
22.7 mm (0.894 in)
Outer diameter of dard
rotor slip ring Service
22.1 mm (0.870 in)
limit
Stan-
18.5 mm (0.728 in)
dard
Brush length
Service
5.0 mm (0.197 in)
limit
Battery Type and capacity 12 V — 52 AH (75D 23R)
SC(H4SO)-3
General Description
B: COMPONENT
1. STARTER
T4
(2)
(5)
(4)
(3)
T2
T3
(11)
(10) T1
(13)
(9)
(12)
(8)
(1)
(6)
(7)
SC-02441
(1) Starter housing (8) Starter plate Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Magnet switch ASSY (9) Yoke T1: 1.4 (0.1, 1.0)
(3) Shift lever (10) Armature T2: 6 (0.6, 4.4)
(4) Starter seal (11) Brush holder ASSY T3: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(5) Overrunning clutch ASSY (12) Drain duct T4: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(6) Washer (13) Starter cover
(7) Planetary gear
SC(H4SO)-4
General Description
2. GENERATOR
• 2.5 L model
(6) (7)
(5)
(4)
(3)
T1
(2)
(1)
T1
T2
(13)
(12)
(11)
(10)
(9)
(8)
SC-02121
(1) Pulley nut (7) Bearing (13) Terminal B

(2) Pulley (8) Stator coil
(3) Front cover (9) IC regulator Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Ball bearing (10) Brush T1: 4.7 (0.5, 3.5)
(5) Bearing retainer (11) Rectifier T2: 108 (11.0, 79.8)
(6) Rotor (12) Rear cover
SC(H4SO)-5
General Description
• 3.6 L model
(7) (8)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
T1
(2)
(1)
T5
T2
T3
(14)
T2
(13)
T4 (12)
(11)
(10)
T4
(9)
SC-02298
(1) Pulley nut (8) Bearing Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)

(2) Pulley (9) Stator coil T1: 4.4 (0.4, 3.2)
(3) Front cover (10) IC regulator T2: 3.9 (0.4, 2.9)
(4) Ball bearing (11) Brush T3: 117.5 (12.0, 86.7)
(5) Bearing retainer (12) Rectifier T4: 2 (0.2, 1.5)
(6) Spacer (13) Rear cover T5: 8.9 (0.9, 6.6)
(7) Rotor (14) Terminal B
SC(H4SO)-6
General Description
3. GENERATOR BRACKET
• 2.5 L model
T2 (5)
(6)
(4)
T4
(3)
(7)
T5
T3
T4
(2)
(8) A
(1)
T5
T6
T7 (9) T7
(10)
T1
T7
T4
SC-02439
(1) V-belt cover bracket (6) Generator plate Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Collector cover bracket (7) A/C compressor bracket T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) V-belt tensioner ASSY (8) Idler pulley T2: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(4) Power steering pump bracket (9) Stopper rod RH T3: 20 (2.0, 14.8)
(5) Generator (10) Stopper rod LH T4: 22 (2.2, 16.2)
T5: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
T6: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
T7: 36 (3.7, 26.6)
SC(H4SO)-7
General Description
• 3.6 L model
T2
(1)
(2)
(3)
T3
T1
T3
SC-02368
(1) Generator (3) Collector cover bracket Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Power steering pump bracket T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
T2: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
T3: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
C: CAUTION
any work.
tery.
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance, voltage and current.
SC(H4SO)-8
Starter
2. Starter Tightening torque:

50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
A: REMOVAL (A)
SC-02363
Tightening torque:
IG-02107 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
2) Remove the air intake boot assembly. (non-tur-
bo model) <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air In-
take Boot.> <Ref. to IN(H6DO)-7, REMOVAL, Air
Intake Boot.>
3) Remove the intercooler. (turbo model) <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.>
4) Disconnect connector (B) and terminal (A) from
starter.
SC-00006
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the nut which holds terminal M (A) of
the magnet switch assembly, then disconnect the
harness from the terminal.
SC-00006
5) Remove the starter from transmission. (A)

NOTE:
For the MT model, a bolt is used in place (A).
(A)
SC-02128
2) Remove the nuts fastening the magnet switch

assembly to the starter housing, then remove the
magnet switch assembly.
SC-02363
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
For the MT model, a bolt is used in place (A).
SC-02129
SC(H4SO)-9
Starter
3) Remove the starter seal. 6) Remove the overrunning clutch assembly from
the yoke.
SC-02130
4) Remove the through bolts on both sides, and re-

move the starter housing.
SC-02136
SC-02131
7) Remove the starter plate.
SC-02132
SC-02442
5) Remove the shift lever.
8) Remove the planetary gear (A) and washer (B)
from internal gear.
(A)
(A) (B)
(A)
SC-02133
SC-02443
SC(H4SO)-10
Starter
9) Remove the screws, and remove the starter cov- D: ASSEMBLY

er from the brush holder assembly.
1) Install the armature to the yoke.
NOTE:
Separate the starter cover by pressing the brush
holder assembly using the screws so that the as-
sembly stays onto the armature side.
SC-02145
2) Install the brush holder assembly to the arma-

ture.
SC-02142 NOTE:
Spread the brush with your fingers, being careful
not to damage the brush.
SC-02143
10) Remove the brush holder assembly from the SC-02144

armature.
3) Install the starter cover, and secure it to the
NOTE: brush holder assembly with the screws.
Spread the brush with your fingers, being careful
not to damage the brush.
SC-02142
4) Assemble the planetary gear (A) and washer (B)

SC-02144
to the internal gear.
11) Remove the armature from the yoke. (1) Apply grease to the planetary gear installa-
tion position.
Grease:
DENSO HL50
(2) Install the planetary gear to the pin.
(3) Apply grease to the planetary gear, internal
gear, washer, and upper part of the pin.
SC-02145
SC(H4SO)-11
Starter
NOTE: 6) Install the shift lever.

• Apply grease so that it contacts each gear. NOTE:
• Be careful not to allow dirt to get in. Apply grease to the contact portion of the shift le-
Grease: ver.
DENSO HL50 Grease:
DENSO HL50
(A)
(A) (B)
(A)
SC-02443
(4) Install the starter plate. SC-02133
7) Install the starter housing, and tighten through

bolts on both sides.
Tightening torque:
6 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.4 ft-lb)
SC-02442
5) Assemble the overrunning clutch assembly to

the yoke.
SC-02132
SC-02131
8) Install the starter seal.
SC-02136
SC-02130
SC(H4SO)-12
Starter
9) Install the magnet switch assembly to the starter E: INSPECTION

housing, and tighten the nuts.
1. SWITCH ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Apply grease to the shift lever installation position. Using a circuit tester (set to “ohm”), check that
there is continuity between terminals S and M, and
Grease: between terminal S and ground.
DENSO HL50 Also check to be sure there is no continuity be-
Tightening torque: tween terminals M and B.
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb) Terminal/Resistance:
S — M/1 Ω or less
S — Ground/1 Ω or less
M — B/1 MΩ or more
(C)
SC-02129
(A)
10) Install the harness to the terminal M (A) of the (B)
magnet switch assembly, and tighten the nut.
SC-00181
Tightening torque:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb) (A) Terminal S
(B) Terminal M
(C) Terminal B
2. SWITCH ASSEMBLY OPERATION

(A)
NOTE:
Perform each test in a short period of time (3 — 5
sec).
1) Suction test
Check that the pinion gear comes flying out when
SC-02128 the harness is disconnected from terminal M and
connected as shown in the figure.
(B)
(A)
SC-02086
(A) Terminal S
(B) Terminal M
SC(H4SO)-13
Starter
2) Holding test 3. PERFORMANCE TEST

Check that the pinion gear remains flying out after The starter should be submitted to performance
the cable is disconnected from terminal M. tests whenever it has been overhauled, to assure
its satisfactory performance when installed on the
(B)
engine.
Three performance tests, no-load test, load test,
and lock test, are presented here; however, if the
load test and lock test cannot be performed, carry
out at least the no-load test.
For these performance tests, use the circuit shown
(A)
in figure.
SC-02087
(A) Terminal S B
(B)
S (A)
(B) Terminal M M
3) Returning test (C) +

With terminal S connected to the positive terminal, 12V
and terminal M and starter body connected to the V A
battery ground terminal to suction the main contact
SC-00077
point, check that the pinion gear returns to its orig-
inal position when terminal S is disconnected. (A) Variable resistance
(B) Magnetic switch
(B)
(C) Starter body
1) No-load test
Adjust the variable resistance with the switch on
until the voltage is 11 V, and read the value dis-
played on the ammeter to measure rotating speed.
Compare these values with the standard.
(A)
No-load test (standard):
SC-02088
Voltage/Current
(A) Terminal S Max. 11 V/90 A or less
(B) Terminal M
Rotating speed
2.5 L model
1,900 rpm or more
3.6 L model
1,550 rpm or more
2) Load test
Apply the specified braking torque to starter. The
condition is normal if the current draw and rotating
speed are within standard.
Load test (standard):
Voltage/Load
2.5 L model
8 V/11.1 N·m (1.1 kgf-m, 8.2 ft-lb) or more
3.6 L model
8 V/12.8 N·m (1.3 kgf-m, 9.4 ft-lb) or more
SC(H4SO)-14
Starter
Current/Rotating speed
2.5 L model
370 A/910 rpm or more
3.6 L model
370 A/800 rpm or more
3) Lock test
With the starter stalled, or not rotating, measure the
torque developed and current draw when the volt-
age is adjusted to standard voltage.
Lock test (standard):
Voltage/Current
3 V/750 A or less
Torque
2.5 L model
15.5 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.4 ft-lb) or more
3.6 L model
19.0 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb) or more
Check that the starter does not have deformation,
cracks and any other damage.
SC(H4SO)-15
Generator
3. Generator B: INSTALLATION
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. Tightening torque:
T1: 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
T2: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T1 T2
IG-02107
2) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-42, V- SC-02374

BELT, REMOVAL, V-belt.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-41, V-BELT, REMOVAL, V-belt.> C: DISASSEMBLY
<Ref. to ME(H6DO)-49, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
3) Disconnect the connector and terminal from 1. 2.5 L MODEL
generator. 1) Remove the four through bolts.
SC-02372 SC-00078
4) Remove the collector cover bracket or v-belt 2) Use a drier to heat the rear cover (A) portion to
cover bracket. 50°C (122°F).
(A)
SC-02373 SC-00079
5) Remove the generator from the bracket.
SC-02375
SC(H4SO)-16
Generator
3) Insert the end of a flat tip screwdriver into the (1) Remove the bolt, and then detach the bear-
gap between stator core and front cover. Pry them ing retainer.
apart to disassemble.
(A)
(A)
SC-00081
SC-00080
(2) Firmly attach an appropriate tool (such as a
(A) Screwdriver
correct size socket wrench) to the bearing inner
race.
4) Using a vise, support the rotor and remove the
pulley bolt.
SC-00082
(3) Use the press to push the ball bearings out

SC-00035 from the front cover.
CAUTION: 6) Using the bearing puller, remove the bearings
When holding the rotor with a vise, place alumi- from the rotor.
num plates or wooden pieces on the vise jaws
to prevent rotor from damage.
(A)
(B)
SC-00046
(C)
(D)
SC-00036
(A) Front cover

(B) Pulley
(C) Nut
(D) Rotor
5) Use the following procedures to remove the ball

bearings.
SC(H4SO)-17
Generator
7) Disconnect the connection between the rectifier (1) Remove the cover A.
and stator coil, then remove the stator coil.
CAUTION:
(A)
The rectifier is easily damaged by heat. Do not
allow a 180 — 270 W soldering iron to contact
the terminals for 5 seconds or more at a time.
SC-00086
(A) Cover A
(2) Remove the cover B.

SC-00083 (A)
8) Use the following procedures to remove the IC

regulator.
(1) Remove the screws which secure the IC
regulator to the rear cover.
SC-00087
(A) Cover B
(3) Disconnect the connection and remove the

brush.
SC-00084
(2) Disconnect the connection between the IC

regulator and rectifier, then remove the IC reg-
ulator.
SC-00088
10) Remove the rectifier as follows.

(1) Remove the bolts which secure the rectifier.
SC-00085
9) Use the following procedures to remove the

brush.
SC-00089
SC(H4SO)-18
Generator
(2) Remove the cover on terminal B. 3) Insert the end of a flat tip screwdriver into the
gap between stator core and front cover. Pry them
apart to disassemble.
(A)
SC-00090 (A)
(3) Remove the nuts of terminal B, then remove

SC-00080
the rectifier.
(A) Screwdriver
4) Using a vise, support the rotor and remove the

pulley bolt.
SC-00091
2. 3.6 L MODEL
1) Remove the four through bolts.
SC-00035
CAUTION:
When holding the rotor with a vise, place alumi-
num plates or wooden pieces on the vise jaws
to prevent rotor from damage.
(A)
(B)
SC-00078
2) Use a drier to heat the rear cover (A) portion to

50 — 60°C (122 — 140°F).
(C)
(A)
(D)
SC-02300
(A) Front cover

(B) Pulley
(C) Nut
(D) Rotor
SC-02299 5) Use the following procedures to remove the ball

bearings.
SC(H4SO)-19
Generator
(1) Remove the bolt, and then detach the bear- 8) Remove four screws which secure the IC regu-
ing retainer. lator to the rear cover, then remove the IC regula-
tor.
SC-00081
SC-02302
(2) Firmly attach an appropriate tool (such as a
correct size socket wrench) to the bearing inner 9) Use the following procedures to remove the
race. brush.
(1) Remove the cover A.
(A)
SC-00082
SC-02303
(3) Use the press to push the ball bearings out
from the front cover. (A) Cover A
6) Using the bearing puller, remove the bearings
from the rotor. (2) Remove the cover B.
(A)
SC-00046 SC-02304
7) Remove six bolts between the rectifier and stator
coil, then remove the stator coil. (A) Cover B
(3) Disconnect the connection and remove the

brush.
SC-02301
SC-02305
SC(H4SO)-20
Generator
10) Remove the rectifier as follows. D: ASSEMBLY

(1) Remove the cover on terminal B.
1. 2.5 L MODEL
1) Before assembling, press the brush down into
the brush holder, then fix the brush in that position
by inserting a [1 mm (0.04 in) dia., 40 — 50 mm (1.6
— 2.0 in) long] wire through the hole as shown in
the figure.
CAUTION:
After re-assembling, remove the wire.
SC-02307
(A)
(2) Remove the nut on terminal B.
SC-00092
(A) Wire
SC-02308
(3) Remove the bolts which secure the rectifier, 2) Install the ball bearings.
and remove the rectifier. (1) Set the ball bearings in the front cover, then
securely install an appropriate tool (such as a
socket wrench of proper size) to the bearing
outer race.
(2) Using a press to press the ball bearings into
the specified location.
(3) Install the bearing retainer.
3) Use a press to install the bearings (rear side) to
the rotor shaft.
4) Heat the bearing box in rear cover [50 to 60°C
(122 to 140°F)], and then press the rear bearing
SC-02306
into rear cover.
CAUTION:
Do not apply grease to the rear bearings. If
there is any oil on the bearing box, remove it
completely.
5) After re-assembling, manually turn the pulley to
check that the rotor rotates smoothly.
2. 3.6 L MODEL
NOTE:
Refer to component for tightening torque of each
part. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-5, GENERATOR, COM-
PONENT, General Description.>
SC(H4SO)-21
Generator
1) Push of the brush 1) Check for continuity between the diode lead and
Before assembling the front and rear parts, press positive side heat sink. If resistance is 1 Ω or more
the brush down into the brush holder, then fix the only in the direction from the diode lead to the heat
brush in that position by inserting a [1 mm (0.08 in) sink, replace the rectifier.
dia., 40 — 50 mm (1.6 — 2.0 in) long] wire through (A) (B)
the hole as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
After re-assembling, remove the wire.
(A)
SC-00042
(A) Diode lead

(B) Heat sink (positive side)
SC-00092 2) Check for continuity between the negative side

heat sink and diode lead. If resistance is 1 Ω or
(A) Wire
more only in the direction from the heat sink to the
2) Install the ball bearings. diode lead, replace the rectifier.
(1) Set the ball bearings in the front cover, then
(A)
securely install an appropriate tool (such as a
socket wrench of proper size) to the bearing
outer race.
(2) Using a press to press the ball bearings into
the specified location. (B)
(3) Install the bearing retainer.
3) Use a press to install the bearings (rear side) to
the rotor shaft.
4) Heat the bearing box in rear cover to 50 — 60°C SC-00043
(122 — 140°F), and then press the rear bearing
into rear cover. (A) Diode lead
(B) Heat sink (negative side)
CAUTION:
Do not apply grease to the rear bearings. If
there is any oil on the bearing box, remove it
2. DIODE (3.6 L MODEL)
completely. CAUTION:
5) After re-assembling, manually turn the pulley to There is the possibility of damaging the diodes
check that the rotor rotates smoothly. if a mega-tester (used to measure high voltag-
es) or a similar measuring instrument is used.
E: INSPECTION Never use a mega tester or equivalent for this
1. DIODE (2.5 L MODEL) test.
1) Check for continuity between the diode lead and
CAUTION: terminal E or B. If continuity is not as shown in the
There is the possibility of damaging the diodes table, replace the rectifier.
if a mega-tester (used to measure high voltag- • At analog type tester
es) or a similar measuring instrument is used.
Never use a mega tester or equivalent for this Tester lead
Continuity
test. –lead +lead
E P1, P2, P3, P4, Yes
B P5, P6 None
P1, P2, P3, P4, E None
P5, P6 B Yes
SC(H4SO)-22
Generator
• At digital type tester 4) Check the continuity between slip ring and rotor
Tester lead
core or shaft. If the resistance is 1 Ω or less, re-
Continuity place the rotor assembly.
–lead +lead
E P1, P2, P3, P4, None
B P5, P6 Yes
P1, P2, P3, P4, E Yes
P5, P6 B None
P4 P5 P6
P3
P2
SC-00045
P1
5) Check the rear ball bearing. If there is any noise,
E or the rotor does not rotate smoothly, replace the
B bearings.
4. STATOR COIL (2.5 L MODEL)
SC-02310
1) Inspect continuity between the stator coil lead
3. ROTOR wire terminals. If the resistance is 1 MΩ or more, re-
place the stator assembly.
1) Inspect the slip rings for contamination or any
roughness on the sliding surface. Repair the slip (A)
ring surface using a lathe or sand paper.
2) Measure the slip ring outer diameter. Replace
the rotor assembly if the slip ring is worn.
Slip ring outer diameter:
Standard
22.7 mm (0.894 in)
Limit
22.1 mm (0.870 in) SC-00047
3) Using a circuit tester, check the resistance be-
tween slip rings. If the resistance is not within the (A) Stator
standard, replace the rotor assembly.
2) Inspect the continuity between the stator coil sta-
Standard:
tor core and lead wire terminals. If the resistance is
Approx. 1.8 — 2.2 Ω
1 Ω or less, replace the stator assembly.
SC-00044
SC-00048
SC(H4SO)-23
Generator
5. 3.6 L MODEL 6. BRUSH

1) Continuity test 1) Measure the length of each brush. Replace the
Inspect the continuity between the stator coil termi- brush if wear exceeds service limits. There is a ser-
nals. If continuity is not as shown in the table, re- vice limit mark (A) on each brush.
place the stator coil.
Brush length:
(A) • 2.5 L model
1 2 3 4 5 6 Standard (1)
18.5 mm (0.728 in)
Limit (2)
5.0 mm (0.197 in)
• 3.6 L model
Standard (1)
22.5 mm (0.886 in)
SC-02349 Limit (2)
5.0 mm (0.197 in)
(A) Terminals
3 (2)
2 4 (A)
1
5
6 (1)
SC-02313
SC-02311 2) Using a spring pressure indicator, push the

brush into the brush holder until its tip protrudes 2
2) Insulation test
mm (0.08 in). Then measure the pressure of brush
Inspect the continuity between the stator coil stator
spring. If the pressure is 2.648 N (270 g, 9.52 oz) or
core and lead wire terminals. If there is continuity,
less, replace the brush spring with a new part.
replace the stator coil because the stator coil is
4.609 — 5.786 N (470 — 590 g, 16.58 — 20.810
grounded.
oz) pressure is required on the new spring.
SC-02314
SC-00093
7. BALL BEARING (FRONT SIDE)

Check the front ball bearings. Replace the ball
bearings if there is resistance in the rotation, or if
there is any abnormal noise.
Check that the generator does not have deforma-
tion, cracks and any other damage.
SC(H4SO)-24
Battery
4. Battery • Ventilate sufficiently when using or charging

battery in enclosed space.
A: REMOVAL • Before starting work, remove rings, metal
1) After disconnecting the battery ground terminal, watch-bands, and other metal jewelry.
remove the terminal cover, then disconnect the • Never allow metal tools to contact the posi-
positive terminal. tive battery terminal and anything connected to
2) Remove the battery cable holder from the bat- it while you are at the same time in contact with
tery rod. any other metallic portion of the vehicle.
3) Remove flange nut from the battery rod and re- 1. EXTERNAL PARTS
move battery holder.
Check the battery case, top cover, vent plugs, and
terminal posts for dirt or cracks. If necessary, clean
with water and wipe with a dry cloth.
Apply a thin coat of grease on the terminal posts to
prevent corrosion.
2. ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
Check the electrolyte level in each cell. If the level
is below MIN level, bring the level to MAX level by
pouring distilled water into the battery cell. Do not
SC-02377 fill beyond MAX level.
4) Remove the battery. 3. SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF ELECTROLYTE
B: INSTALLATION 1) Measure specific gravity of electrolyte using a
hydrometer and a thermometer.
Install in the reverse order of removal. Specific gravity varies with temperature of electro-
Tightening torque: lyte so that it must be corrected at 20°C (68°F) us-
3.5 N·m (0.4 kgf-m, 2.6 ft-lb) ing the following calculation:
NOTE: S20 = St + 0.0007 × (t – 20)
• Clean the battery cable terminals and apply S20: Specific gravity corrected at electrolyte
grease to retard the formation of corrosion. temperature of 20°C (68°F)
• Connect the battery positive (+) terminal, and St: Measured specific gravity
then connect the negative (–) terminal. t: Measured temperature (°C)
• After the battery is installed, initial diagnosis of Judge whether or not battery must be
the electronic throttle control is performed. Wait for charged, according to corrected specific
10 seconds or more after turning the ignition switch gravity.
to ON, and then start the engine. Standard specific gravity: 1.220 — 1.290 [at
20°C (68°F)]
C: INSPECTION 2) Measuring the specific gravity of the electrolyte
WARNING: in the battery will disclose the state of charge of the
• Electrolyte is corrosive acid, and has toxici- battery. The relation between specific gravity and
ty; be careful of handling the fluid. state of charge is as shown in the figure.
• Make sure the electrode does not come into 1.28
Specific gravity [20˚C (68˚F)]
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Especially 1.26

at contact with eyes, flush with water for 15 1.24
minutes and get prompt medical attention. 1.22
• In addition, be careful not to let the electrode 1.20

1.18
contact with the coated parts.
1.16
• Be careful when handling the batteries be- 1.14
cause they produce explosive gases. 1.12
• Be sure to keep battery away from any fire. 100% 75% 50% 22% 0%
Complete charge Charging condition (%)
• For safety, in case an explosion does occur, Specific gravity and state of charge SC-00094
wear eye protection or shield your eyes when
working near any battery. In addition, never
lean over the battery.
SC(H4SO)-25
Battery
D: MEASUREMENT Since a large current flow raises electrolyte temper-

ature, the battery is subject to damage if the large
WARNING: current is used for prolonged time. For this reason,
Do not bring an open flame close to the battery quick charging must be carried out within a current
when working. range that will not raise the electrolyte temperature
CAUTION: to 40°C (104°F) or more.
• Prior to charging, corroded terminals should Also the quick charging is a temporary mean to
be cleaned with a brush and common caustic bring battery voltage up to some level, and battery
soda solution. should be charged slowly with low current as a rule.
• Be careful since battery electrolyte overflows
while charging the battery.
• Observe instructions when handling the bat-
tery charger.
• Before charging the battery on the vehicle,
disconnect the battery ground terminal to pre-
vent damage of generator diodes or other elec-
trical units.
1. JUDGMENT OF BATTERY IN CHARGED
CONDITION
1) Specific gravity of electrolyte should be held
within the specific range from 1.250 to 1.290 for
one hour or more.
2) Voltage per battery cell should be held at a spe-
cific value in a range from 2.5 to 2.8 V for one hour
or more.
2. CHECK CONDITION OF CHARGE WITH
HYDROMETER
Hydrometer State of
Corrective action
indicator charge
Green dot 65% or more Load test
Dark dot 65% or less Charge battery
Low electro- Replace the battery.*
Clear dot
lyte (If cranking is difficult)
* Check electrical system before replacement.
3. NORMAL CHARGING
Charge the battery at the current value specified by
manufacturer or at approximately 1/10 of battery’s
ampere-hour rating.
4. QUICK CHARGING
CAUTION:
• Observe the items in “3. NORMAL CHARG-
ING”.
• Never use 10 A or more when charging the
battery because it will shorten the battery life.
Quick charging is a method that the battery is
charged in a short period of time with a relatively
large current by using a quick charger.
SC(H4SO)-26
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)
EN(H4SO)(diag)
Page
1. Basic Diagnostic Procedure .......................................................................2
2. Check List for Interview ..............................................................................4
4. Electrical Component Location ..................................................................9
5. Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal ................................................17
6. Engine Condition Data .............................................................................26
7. Data Link Connector ................................................................................27
8. General Scan Tool ...................................................................................28
9. Subaru Select Monitor ..............................................................................33
10. Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) .....................................................40
11. Inspection Mode .......................................................................................41
12. Drive Cycle ...............................................................................................46
13. Clear Memory Mode .................................................................................51
14. System Operation Check Mode ...............................................................52
15. Malfunction Indicator Light .......................................................................53
16. Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure ....................................................62
17. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....................................................75
18. Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....................82
19. General Diagnostic Table .......................................................................282
Basic Diagnostic Procedure

1. Basic Diagnostic Procedure

A: PROCEDURE
1. ENGINE
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE START FAILURE. Does the engine start? Go to step 2. Inspection using
1) Ask the customer when and how the trouble “Diagnostics for
occurred using the interview check list. <Ref. to Engine Start Fail-
EN(H4SO)(diag)-4, CHECK, Check List for ure”. <Ref. to
Interview.> EN(H4SO)(diag)-
2) Start the engine. 62, Diagnostics for
Engine Starting
Failure.>
2 CHECK ILLUMINATION OF MALFUNCTION Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 3. Inspection using
INDICATOR LIGHT. light illuminate? “General Diagnos-
tic Table”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
282, INSPEC-
TION, General
Diagnostic Table.>
3 CHECK COMMUNICATION STATUS. Does Subaru Select Monitor or Go to step 4. Inspection using
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. general scan tool communicate LAN system “Diag-
2) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor or gen- with vehicle normally? nostic Procedure
eral scan tool to the data link connector. with Diagnostic
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and run the Trouble Code
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool. (DTC)”. <Ref. to
NOTE: LAN(diag)-48,
• Subaru Select Monitor COMMUNICA-
For detailed procedures, refer to “Subaru Select TION FOR INI-
Monitor”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru TIALIZING
Select Monitor.> IMPOSSIBLE,
• General scan tool Diagnostic Proce-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the dure with Diagnos-
general scan tool operation manual. tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
4 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed on Subaru Record the DTC. Repair the related
Read DTC using Subaru Select Monitor or gen- Select Monitor or general scan Repair the trouble parts.
eral scan tool. tool? cause. <Ref. to NOTE:
NOTE: EN(H4SO)(diag)- If DTC is not
• Subaru Select Monitor 75, List of Diagnos- shown on display
Refer to “Read Diagnostic Trouble Code” for tic Trouble Code although the mal-
detailed operation procedure. <Ref. to (DTC).> function indicator
EN(H4SO)(diag)-40, Read Diagnostic Trouble Go to step 5. light illuminates,
Code (DTC).> perform the diag-
• General scan tool nosis of malfunc-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tion indicator light
general scan tool operation manual. circuit or combina-
tion meter. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
53, Malfunction In-
dicator Light.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-2

Step Check Yes No

5 CHECK FREEZE FRAME DATA. Is freeze frame data displayed Record the freeze Go to step 6.
Check the freeze frame data using the Subaru on Subaru Select Monitor or frame data. Repair
Select Monitor or general scan tool. general scan tool? the cause of fault,
NOTE: and go to the next
• Subaru Select Monitor step. Go to step 6.
For detailed procedures, refer to “Subaru Select
Monitor”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru
Select Monitor.>
• General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
6 PERFORM DIAGNOSIS. Is DTC displayed on Subaru Inspect using Finish the diagno-
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to Select Monitor or general scan “Diagnostic Proce- sis.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory Mode.> tool? dure with Diagnos-
2) Perform the Inspection Mode or Drive Cycle. tic Trouble Code
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, Inspection (DTC)”. <Ref. to
Mode.> <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-46, Drive EN(H4SO)(diag)-
Cycle.> 82, Diagnostic Pro-
cedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-3
Check List for Interview

2. Check List for Interview

A: CHECK
1. CHECK LIST NO. 1
Check the following item when problem has occurred.
NOTE:
Use copies of this page for interviewing customers.
Customer’s name Engine No.
Date of purchase Fuel type
Date of repair km
Odometer reading
V.I.N. miles
Weather Fine
Cloudy
Rainy
Snowy
Various/Others:
Ambient air temperature °C (°F)
Hot
Warm
Cool
Cold
Place Highway
Suburbs
Inner city
Uphill
Downhill
Rough road
Others:
Engine temperature Cold
Warming-up
After warming-up
Any temperature
Others:
Engine speed rpm
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Driving conditions Not affected
At starting
While idling
At racing
While accelerating
While cruising
While decelerating
While turning (RH/LH)
Headlight ON/ OFF Rear defogger ON/ OFF
Blower ON/ OFF Audio ON/ OFF
A/C compressor ON/ OFF Rear entertainment system ON/ OFF
Radiator fan ON/ OFF Car phone ON/ OFF
Front wiper ON/ OFF Wireless device ON/ OFF
Rear wiper ON/ OFF
EN(H4SO)(diag)-4

2. CHECK LIST NO. 2

Check the following item about the vehicle’s state when the malfunction indicator light turns on.
NOTE:
a) Other warning lights or indicators illuminate. Yes / No
Low fuel warning light
Charge warning light
Engine coolant temperature warning light
Oil pressure warning light
ATF temperature warning light or SPORT indicator light
Driver’s control center differential indicator light
ABS warning light
VDC warning light
Cruise indicator light
SI-CRUISE warning light
Immobilizer indicator light
STEERING warning light
Electronic parking brake warning light
Glow indicator light
Sedimentor warning light
Others:
b) Fuel level
• Lack of fuel: Yes / No
• Indicator position of fuel gauge:
• Experienced running out of fuel: Yes / No
c) Intentional connecting or disconnecting of harness connectors or spark plug cords: Yes / No
• What:
d) Intentional connecting or disconnecting of hoses: Yes / No
• What:
e) Installing of other parts except genuine parts: Yes / No
• What:
• Where:
f) Occurrence of noise: Yes / No
• From where:
• What kind:
g) Occurrence of smell: Yes / No
• From where:
• What kind:
h) Intrusion of water into engine compartment or passenger compartment: Yes / No
i) Troubles occurred
Engine does not start.
Engine stalls during idling.
Engine stalls while driving.
Engine speed decreases.
Engine speed does not decrease.
Rough idling
Poor acceleration
Back fire
After fire
Does not shift.
Excessive shift shock
EN(H4SO)(diag)-5
General Description
3. General Description 7) Use ECM mounting stud bolts at the body side
grounding point when measuring voltage and resis-
A: CAUTION tance inside the passenger compartment.
1) Airbag system wiring harness is routed near the
ECM, main relay and fuel pump relay.
CAUTION:
• Do not use electrical test equipment on the
airbag system circuits.
• Be careful not to damage the airbag system
wiring harness when servicing the ECM, TCM, (A)
main relay and fuel pump relay.
2) Never connect the battery in reverse polarity.
Doing so will damage the ECM instantly, and other EN-07713
parts will also be damaged.
(A) Stud bolt
3) Do not disconnect the battery terminals while the
engine is running. A large counter electromotive 8) Use the engine ground terminal or engine as-
force will be generated in the generator, and this sembly for the grounding point to chassis when
voltage may damage electronic parts such as ECM measuring the voltage and resistance in engine
etc. compartment.
4) Before disconnecting the connectors of each
sensor and ECM, be sure to turn the ignition switch
to OFF. Perform the Clear Memory Mode after con-
necting the connectors. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-
51, Clear Memory Mode.>
5) When measuring the voltage or resistance of in-
dividual sensor or all electrical control modules,
use a tapered pin with a diameter of less than 0.6
mm (0.024 in). Do not insert the pin 4 mm (0.16 in)
or more into the part.
EN-07710
CAUTION:
When replacing the ECM, be careful not to use 9) Every engine control system-related part is a
the wrong spec. ECM to avoid any damage on precision part. Do not drop them.
the fuel injection system. 10) Observe the following cautions when installing
NOTE: a radio in vehicle.
When replacing the ECM of the models with Immo- CAUTION:
bilizer, immobilizer system must be registered. To • The antenna must be kept as far apart as pos-
do so, all ignition keys and ID cards need to be pre- sible from control module. (ECM is installed at
pared. Refer to the “PC application help for Subaru the back of the glove box.)
Select Monitor”. • The antenna feeder must be placed as far
6) Take care not to allow water to get into the con- apart as possible from the ECM and engine
nectors when servicing or washing the vehicle in control system harness.
rainy weather. Avoid exposure to water even if the • Carefully adjust the antenna for correct
connectors are waterproof. matching.
• When mounting a large power type radio, pay
special attention to the three items mentioned
above.
• Incorrect installation of the radio may affect
the operation of ECM.
11) When disconnecting the fuel hose, release the
fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-48, RELEASING
OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-6
General Description
12) Warning lights may illuminate when performing • The OBD system stores freeze frame engine
driving test with jacked-up or lifted-up condition, but condition data (engine load, engine coolant tem-
this is not a system malfunction. The reason for this perature, fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
is the speed difference between the front and rear speed, etc.) into on-board computer when it detects
wheels. When engine control system diagnosis is a malfunction.
finished, perform the VDC memory clearance pro- • Freeze frame engine condition data are stored
cedure of self-diagnosis function. <Ref. to VDC(di- until the DTCs are cleared. However when such
ag)-25, Clear Memory Mode.> malfunctions as fuel trim fault and misfire are de-
tected with the freeze frame engine condition data
B: INSPECTION stored, they are rewritten into those related to the
Before performing diagnostics, check the following fuel trim fault and misfire.
item which might affect engine problems. • When the malfunction does not occur again for
1. BATTERY three consecutive driving cycles, malfunction indi-
cator light is turned off, but DTC remains at on-
1) Measure the battery voltage and specific gravity board computer.
of the electrolyte. • When performing diagnosis, connect the Subaru
Standard voltage: 12 V Select Monitor or general scan tool to the vehicle.
Specific gravity: 1.260 or more
2) Check the condition of the main and other fuses,
and harnesses and connectors. Also check for
proper grounding.
2. ENGINE GROUND
Make sure that the engine ground terminal has no
contamination, corrosion or looseness and is prop-
erly connected to the engine.
EN-07710
C: NOTE
• The on-board diagnostic (OBD) system detects
and indicates a fault in various inputs and outputs
of the complex electronic control. Malfunction indi-
cator light in the combination meter indicates oc-
currence of a fault or trouble.
• Further, against such a failure of sensors as may
disable the drive, the fail-safe function is provided
to ensure the minimal drivability.
• The OBD system incorporated with the vehicles
within this type of engine complies with OBD-II reg-
ulations. The OBD system monitors the compo-
nents and the system malfunction listed in “Engine
Section” which affects on emissions.
• When the system decides that a malfunction oc-
curs, malfunction indicator light illuminates. At the
same time of the malfunction indicator light illumi-
nation or blinking, a DTC and a freeze frame en-
gine conditions are stored into on-board computer.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-7
General Description
D: PREPARATION TOOL
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
SOCKET
ST-499987500
EN(H4SO)(diag)-8
Electrical Component Location

4. Electrical Component Location

A: LOCATION
1. CONTROL MODULE
(1)
(3) (2) (4)

EN-07690
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Delivery (test) mode fuse (4) Data link connector
(2) Malfunction indicator light
(1)
CHECK
ENGINE
CHECK
ENGINE (2)
EN-07715 EN-07716
(3)
(4)
EN-07511 EN-07717
EN(H4SO)(diag)-9

2. SENSOR
(3) (4) (2)
(1) (8) (7) (5) (6)

EN-07691
(1) Mass air flow and intake air tem- (4) Electronic throttle control (7) Crankshaft position sensor
perature sensor
(2) Manifold absolute pressure sensor (5) Knock sensor (8) Oil temperature sensor
(3) Engine coolant temperature sen- (6) Camshaft position sensor
sor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-10

(2)
(1)
EN-07595 EN-07596
(3)
(4)
EN-07597 EN-07598
(5) (6)
EN-07599 EN-07600
(7)
(8)
EN-07601 EN-07602
EN(H4SO)(diag)-11

(4)
(2)
(3)
(1)
EN-07603
(1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (3) Front catalytic converter (4) Rear catalytic converter
(2) Rear oxygen sensor
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
EN-07692
(1) Fuel level sensor (3) Fuel tank pressure sensor (4) Fuel sub level sensor
(2) Fuel temperature sensor
(3)
(1)
(2)
EN-07718 EN-07719
EN(H4SO)(diag)-12

(4)
EN-07720
EN(H4SO)(diag)-13

3. SOLENOID VALVE, ACTUATOR, EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PARTS AND IGNITION

SYSTEM PARTS
(3) (4) (2) (1)
(4) (3)
EN-07693
(1) Purge control solenoid valve (3) Oil switching solenoid valve (4) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil
pressure switch
(2) EGR valve
(3)
(1)
(2)
EN-07605 EN-07606
EN(H4SO)(diag)-14

(4)
EN-08625
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (2)
(8) (9) (10) (1) (11) (13) (12) (14)

EN-07694
(1) Starter (6) Electronic throttle control relay (11) Starter relay
(2) Fuel pump (7) Fuel pump relay (12) Canister
(3) Main relay (8) Radiator main fan relay 1 (13) Drain valve
(4) IG relay (9) Radiator main fan relay 2 (14) Drain filter
(5) A/F, oxygen sensor relay (10) Radiator sub fan relay
(2)
(1)
EN-07512 EN-07752
EN(H4SO)(diag)-15

(3)
(4)
(5)
(9)
(6)
(8)
(7)
(10)
EN-07721 EN-07514
(14)
(13)
(12)
(11)
EN-07722 EN-07723
4. TRANSMISSION
(2)
(1)
EN-07518 EN-07724
(1) Inhibitor switch (CVT model) (2) Neutral position switch (MT
model)
EN(H4SO)(diag)-16
Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

5. Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

A: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
TO A: B134 TO B: B135 TO C: B136 TO D: B137
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 31 30 29 28 27 26
EN-05288
Termi- Signal (V)

Connector
Description nal Ignition SW ON Engine ON Note
No.
No. (engine OFF) (idling)
Crankshaft Signal (+) B137 17 0 –7 — +7 Waveform
position sen- Signal (–) B137 25 0 0 —
sor Shield B137 31 0 0 —
Camshaft Signal (+) B137 24 0 –7 — +7 Waveform
Approx. 0.9 Approx. 0.6 — 0.7
Fully closed: Approx. 0.6
Main B134 18 (After engine is (After engine is
Fully open: Approx. 4.0
warmed up.) warmed up.)
Electronic Sub B134 28 (After engine is (After engine is
throttle control warmed up.) warmed up.)
Power
B134 19 5 5 —
supply
Ground
B134 29 0 0 —
(sensor)
Electronic throttle control
B134 2 Duty waveform Duty waveform Drive frequency: 500 Hz
motor (+)
motor (–)
B135 7 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
motor power supply
Electronic throttle control ON: 0 ON: 0 When ignition switch is
B135 17
motor relay OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14 turned to ON: ON
EN(H4SO)(diag)-17

Termi- Signal (V)

Connector
No.
Main sen- Fully closed: 1.0 Fully closed: 1.0
B135 23 —
sor signal Fully opened: 3.5 Fully opened: 3.5
Main
power sup- B135 21 5 5 —
ply
Ground
Accelerator (Main sen- B135 29 0 0 —
pedal position sor)
sensor Sub sen- Fully closed: 1.0 Fully closed: 1.0
B135 31 —
Sub power
B135 22 5 5 —
supply
Ground
(Sub sen- B135 30 0 0 —
sor)
Signal (+) B136 19 — 2.7 — 2.9 —
Front oxygen
Signal (–) B136 18 — 2.35 — 2.25 —
(A/F) sensor
Shield B136 9 0 0 —
Rear oxygen Signal B136 20 0 0 — 0.9 —
sensor Shield B136 9 0 0 —
Front oxygen Signal 1 B136 6 10 — 13 1 — 14 Duty waveform
(A/F) sensor
heater Signal 2 B136 5 10 — 13 1 — 14 Duty waveform
Rear oxygen sensor heater
B135 6 10 — 13 1 — 14 Duty waveform
signal
Engine coolant temperature
B137 22 1.0 — 1.4 1.0 — 1.4 After engine is warmed up.
sensor
CVT model
Cranking: 8 — 14
Starter switch B136 16 0 0 MT model
Cranking with the clutch
pedal pressed: 8 — 14
ON: 0.5 or less ON: 0.5 or less
Starter relay control B135 26 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Ignition switch B136 30 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
CVT model: Switch is ON
when select lever is in “P”
ON: 0 range or “N” range.
Neutral position switch B136 35
OFF: 12±0.5 MT model: Switch is ON
when the shift lever is in
neutral.
Delivery (test) mode switch B136 34 10 — 13 13 — 14 When fuse is installed: 0
Signal B137 2 2.5 2.5 —
Knock sensor
Shield B137 8 0 0 —
Ignition switch “OFF”: 10
Back-up power supply B136 2 10 — 13 12 — 14
— 13
Control module power sup- B137 7 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
ply B136 1 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
#1 B134 21 0 0 or 5 Waveform
#2 B134 22 0 0 or 5 Waveform
Ignition control
#3 B134 31 0 0 or 5 Waveform
#4 B134 32 0 0 or 5 Waveform
EN(H4SO)(diag)-18

Termi- Signal (V)

Connector
No.
#1 B134 10 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
#2 B134 11 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
Fuel injector
#3 B134 12 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
#4 B134 13 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
Fuel pump relay control B136 33 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Radiator fan relay 1 control B135 11 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Self-shutoff control B135 13 0.5 or less 0.5 or less —
Light “ON”: 1 or less
Malfunction indicator light B135 33 — —
Light “OFF”: 10 — 14
Engine speed output B135 15 — 0 — 13 or more Waveform
Oil temperature sensor sig-
B137 21 1.0 — 1.4 1.0 — 1.4 After engine is warmed up.
nal
ON: 1 or less ON: 1 or less
Purge control solenoid valve B137 6 Duty waveform
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Signal 1 B134 8 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 Waveform
EGR valve
Power steering oil pressure ON: 1 or less ON: 1 or less
B137 28 —
switch OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Oil level switch B136 26 0 0 Oil level LOW: 10 — 14
Oil switching Signal (+) B134 7 0 Duty waveform Drive frequency: 300 Hz
solenoid valve
RH Signal (–) B134 15 0 0 —
Oil switching Signal (+) B134 5 0 Duty waveform Drive frequency: 300 Hz
solenoid valve
LH Signal (–) B134 14 0 0 —
Variable valve lift diagnosis
B137 14 0 0 —
oil pressure switch RH
B137 13 0 0 —
oil pressure switch LH
Manifold absolute pressure
B137 20 3.4 — 3.8 1.4 — 1.8 —
sensor
Signal B136 22 — 0.3 — 4.5 —
Air flow sensor Shield B136 10 0 0 —
Ground B136 11 0 0 —
Intake air temperature sen-
B136 31 0.3 — 4.6 0.3 — 4.6 —
sor signal
1 or less ←→ 4 or
Immobilizer communication B135 25 1 or less ←→ 4 or more —
more
SSM communication B135 14 1 or less ←→ 4 or more —
more
B134 19 5 5 —
Sensor power supply
B135 22 5 5 —
EN(H4SO)(diag)-19

Termi- Signal (V)

Connector
No.
B134 29 0 0 —
Sensor
B135 30 0 0 —
Engine 1 B134 6 0 0 —
Engine 2 B134 4 0 0 —
Ground
Engine 3 B134 3 0 0 —
Engine 4 B137 1 0 0 —
Engine 5 B137 3 0 0 —
Body B136 4 0 0 —
When clutch pedal is When clutch pedal is
depressed: 0 depressed: 0
Clutch switch B135 9 —
released: 10 — 13 released: 12 — 14
When brake pedal is When brake pedal is
Brake switch 1 depressed: 0 depressed: 0
B136 15 —
(brake switch) When brake pedal is When brake pedal is
Brake switch 2 depressed: 10 — 13 depressed: 12 — 14
B136 3 —
(stop light switch) When brake pedal is When brake pedal is
released: 0 released: 0
ON: 0 ON: 0
Cruise control main switch B136 13 —
OFF: 5 OFF: 5
When operating
When operating noth- nothing: 3.5 — 4.5
ing: 3.5 — 4.5 When operating
When operating RES/ RES/ACC: 2.5 —
Cruise control command ACC: 2.5 — 3.5 3.5
B136 12 —
switch When operating SET/ When operating
COAST: 0.5 — 1.5 SET/COAST: 0.5 —
When operating CAN- 1.5
CEL: 0 — 0.5 When operating
CANCEL: 0 — 0.5
Ambient temperature:
Fuel temperature sensor B136 23 2.5 — 3.8 2.5 — 3.8
25°C (77°F)
Value after removing fuel
Fuel tank pressure sensor B136 21 2.3 — 2.7 2.3 — 2.7 filler cap and installing
again
Drain valve B135 4 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
CAN commu- (Hi) B136 17 2.5 — 3.5 2.5 — 3.5 Waveform
nication (Lo) B136 28 1.5 — 2.5 1.5 — 2.5 Waveform
Input/output name:
• Crankshaft position sensor
• Camshaft position sensor
Measuring condition:
• After warming-up
EN(H4SO)(diag)-20

• At idling
CRANKSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR 0
ONE CRANKSHAFT ROTATION
CAMSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR 0
10 ms
5V ONE CAMSHAFT ROTATION
EN-07430
EN(H4SO)(diag)-21

F/B FUSE No. 4

DATA LINK
M/B FUSE No. 12 CONNECTOR
CVT
CVT
MT
C2 B9
MT
STARTER RELAY
CLUTCH
SWITCH
IGNITION SWITCH
B26
F/B FUSE No. 21 CVT
MT
MT
B14
CLUTCH START
SWITCH DELIVERY (TEST)
MODE FUSE
1 C34
NEUTRAL
POSITION SWITCH
1 MT
JOINT
CONNECTOR
C4
MT
INHIBITOR SWITCH C35

CVT CVT
P R N D
MT
B23
CVT
C16
STARTER MOTOR
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
POSITION SENSOR
B21
B31
C30
F/B FUSE No. 12
M/B FUSE No. 20

B29
FUEL
PUMP B22
RELAY
C33
FUEL
PUMP FUEL TANK
C21
PRESSURE
SENSOR
POWER STEERING
OIL PRESSURE B30 JOINT
SWITCH CONNECTOR
D28
2 3 4
EN-08626
EN(H4SO)(diag)-22

M/B FUSE No. 16

M/B FUSE No. 13
M/B FUSE No. 15
M/B FUSE No. 14
SENSOR RELAY
A/F, OXYGEN
RELAY
RELAY
MAIN
IG
A21
IGNITION COIL
B13 No. 1
A22
ELECTRONIC IGNITION COIL
THROTTLE 5 No. 2
CONTROL
RELAY
A31
IGNITION COIL
B7 No. 3
B17
A32
IGNITION COIL
No. 4
7
C1
D7
B15
COMBINATION METER
B33
PURGE CONTROL D6
SOLENOID VALVE
A5
A8 OIL SWITCHING
A14 SOLENOID VALVE LH
A7
OIL SWITCHING
A9 A15 SOLENOID VALVE RH
EGR VALVE
A20
VVL DIAGNOSIS
D13
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH LH
A30
VVL DIAGNOSIS
6 D14
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH RH
EN-08627
EN(H4SO)(diag)-23

6
4
FUEL INJECTOR A10
No. 1
A18
FUEL INJECTOR A11

A28
No. 2 ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE
A1 CONTROL
A2
FUEL INJECTOR A12
No. 3 A19
FUEL INJECTOR A13

No. 4
MANIFOLD
D20 ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
B4
DRAIN VALVE
D21
OIL
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
D22 ENGINE
MASS AIR FLOW &
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
INTAKE AIR
C31
SENSOR
SENSOR
C11
C10
D2
C22
D8 KNOCK
SENSOR
A29
8 9
EN-08628
EN(H4SO)(diag)-24

BODY INTEGRATED UNIT B25

(IMMOBILIZER)
C17 3
BODY INTEGRATED UNIT FUEL
(CAN COMMUNICATION) C28 C23 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
OIL LEVEL SWITCH

C13
C26
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
C12
B12
MAIN FAN RELAY
C3
STOP LIGHT SWITCH
B11
SUB FAN RELAY
C15
BRAKE SWITCH
C5
8 5
C6
FRONT
OXYGEN C18 D17
CRANKSHAFT
(A/F)
C19 D25 POSITION
SENSOR
SENSOR
C20
REAR D24 CAMSHAFT

OXYGEN POSITION
D30
SENSOR SENSOR
B6 D31
7 C9
9
D3
A3 A4
D1 A6
ENGINE GROUND ENGINE GROUND

EN-08629
EN(H4SO)(diag)-25
Engine Condition Data

6. Engine Condition Data

Contents Specifications
17.6 — 40.5 (%): Idling
Engine load
14.7 — 29.8 (%): 2,500 rpm racing
• After engine is warmed up.
• Set the select lever in “P” range or “N” range, or the shift lever in neutral.
• Turn the A/C to OFF.
• Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-26
Data Link Connector

7. Data Link Connector

A: NOTE
This connector is used for Subaru Select Monitor.
CAUTION:
Do not connect any scan tools other than Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool because the cir-
cuit for Subaru Select Monitor may be damaged.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
EN-07824
Terminal No. Contents Terminal No. Contents

1 Blank 9 Blank
2 Blank 10 Blank
3 Blank 11 Blank
4 Ground 12 Blank
5 Ground 13 Blank
6 CAN communication (Hi) 14 CAN communication (Lo)
7 Subaru Select Monitor signal 15 Blank
8 Blank 16 Power supply
EN(H4SO)(diag)-27
General Scan Tool

8. General Scan Tool

A: OPERATION
1. HOW TO USE GENERAL SCAN TOOL
1) Prepare a scan tool (general scan tool) required
by SAE J1978.
2) Connect the general scan tool to data link con-
nector located in the lower portion of the instrument
panel (on the driver’s side).
EN-07712
3) Using the general scan tool, call up each data.

General scan tool functions consist of:
(1) MODE $01: Current powertrain diagnostic
data
(2) MODE $02: Powertrain freeze frame data
(3) MODE $03: Emission-related powertrain
DTC
(4) MODE $04: Clear/Reset emission-related
diagnostic information
(5) MODE $06: Request on-board monitoring
test results for intermittently monitored systems
test results for continuously monitored systems
(7) MODE $09: Request vehicle information
4) Read out the data according to repair proce-
dures. (For detailed operation procedure, refer to
the general scan tool operation manual.)
NOTE:
For details concerning DTC, refer to “List of Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-75, List of Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-28
General Scan Tool

2. MODE $01: (CURRENT POWERTRAIN DIAGNOSTIC DATA)

Refer to data denoting the current operating condition of analog input/output, digital input/output or the pow-
ertrain system.
A list of the support data and PID (Parameter Identification) codes are shown in the following table.
PID Data Unit of measure
Number of emission-related powertrain DTC, and malfunction indicator light status and diag-
$01 —
nosis support information
$03 Fuel system control status —
$04 Calculated engine load value %
$05 Engine coolant temperature °C
$06 Short term fuel trim %
$07 Long term fuel trim %
$0B Intake manifold absolute pressure kPa
$0C Engine speed rpm
$0D Vehicle speed MPH
$0E Ignition timing advance °
$0F Intake air temperature °C
$10 Intake air amount g/s
$11 Throttle valve opening angle %
$13 Air fuel ratio sensor —
Oxygen sensor output voltage and short term fuel trim associated with oxygen sensor (Bank 1
$15 V and %
Sensor 2)
$1C Supporting OBD system —
$1F Elapsed time after starting the engine sec
$21 Travel distance after the malfunction indicator light illuminates miles
$24 A/F value and A/F sensor output voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) – and V
$2C Target EGR %
$2D EGR deviation %
$2E Evaporative purge %
$2F Fuel level %
$30 Number of warm ups after DTC clear —
$31 Travel distance after DTC clear miles
$32 Fuel tank pressure Pa
$33 Barometric pressure kPa
$34 A/F value and A/F sensor current (Bank 1 Sensor 1) – and mA
$3C Catalyst temperature #1 °C
$41 Diagnostic monitor of each drive cycle —
$42 ECM power voltage V
$43 Absolute load %
$44 A/F target lambda —
$45 Relative throttle opening angle %
$46 Ambient temperature °C
$47 Absolute throttle opening angle 2 %
$49 Absolute accelerator opening angle 1 %
$4A Absolute accelerator opening angle 2 %
$4C Target throttle opening angle %
$4D Engine operating time while malfunction indicator lit min
$4E Elapsed time after DTC clear min
$51 Fuel used —
$5A Relative accelerator opening angle %
$65 Neutral status —
EN(H4SO)(diag)-29
General Scan Tool

NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruction manual to access generic OBD-II PIDs (MODE $01).
3. MODE $02 (POWERTRAIN FREEZE FRAME DATA)
Refer to data denoting the operating condition when trouble is detected by on-board diagnosis system.
$02 DTC that caused the freeze frame data storage required by CARB —
$06 Short term fuel trim (Bank 1 Sensor 1) %
$07 Long term fuel trim (Bank 1 Sensor 1) %
Oxygen sensor output voltage and short term fuel trim associated with oxygen sensor (Bank 1
$15 V and %
Sensor 2)
$2C Target EGR %
$2D EGR deviation %
$2F Fuel level %
$33 Barometric pressure kPa
$43 Absolute load %
$49 Absolute accelerator opening angle 1 %
$4A Absolute accelerator opening angle 2 %
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruction manual to access freeze frame data (MODE $02).
4. MODE $03 (EMISSION-RELATED POWERTRAIN DTC)
Refer to “List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)” for information about data denoting emission-related pow-
ertrain DTC. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-75, List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-30
General Scan Tool

5. MODE $04 (CLEAR/RESET EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION)

Refer to the mode used to clear or reset emission-related diagnostic information (OBD-II trouble diagnostic
information).
NOTE:
• Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruction manual to clear the emission-related diagnostic in-
formation (MODE $04).
• Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is performed after memory clearance. Wait for 10 seconds or
more after turning the ignition switch to ON, and then start the engine.
6. MODE $06
Refer to test value of troubleshooting and data of test limit indicated on the support data bit sequence table.
A list of the support data is shown in the following table.
OBDMID TID SID Diagnostic item
$81 $0A
$82 $8D A/F sensor continuity failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$83 $14
$01
$84 $1E
A/F sensor range failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$85 $1E
$86 $20 A/F sensor response failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$87 $0B
Oxygen sensor circuit failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$88 $0B
$07 $0B
$02 $08 $0B Oxygen sensor drop failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$A5 $0B
$05 $10
Oxygen sensor response failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$06 $10
$21 $89 $20 Catalyst deterioration diagnosis (Bank 1)
$31 $8A $FD EGR system diagnosis
$39 $93 $FE Evaporative emission control system (Cap off)
$94 $FE
$3B $95 $FE Evaporative emission control system (0.04 inch leak)
$A6 $FE
$96 $FE
$3C Evaporative emission control system (0.02 inch leak)
$97 $FE
$3D $98 $FE Evaporative emission control system (Purge flow)
$99 $24
A/F sensor heater failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$41 $9A $24
$9B $14 A/F sensor heater characteristics failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$9C $24
$42 Oxygen sensor heater failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$9D $24
$0B $24
$A1 Misfire monitoring (All cylinders)
$0C $24
$0B $24
$A2 Misfire monitoring (#1 cylinder)
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
EN(H4SO)(diag)-31
General Scan Tool

7. MODE $07
Refer to the data of DTC (pending code) for troubleshooting result about emission in the first time.
8. MODE $09
Refer to data of vehicle specification (V.I.N., calibration ID, diagnosis frequency etc.).
EN(H4SO)(diag)-32
Subaru Select Monitor

9. Subaru Select Monitor

A: OPERATION
1. HOW TO USE SUBARU SELECT MONITOR
NOTE:
For detailed operation procedures, refer to “PC application help for Subaru Select Monitor”.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-33

2. READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE)

NOTE:
• For detailed operation procedures, refer to “PC application help for Subaru Select Monitor”.
• A list of the support data is shown in the following table.
• *: For models without cruise control, the brake switch signal does not change.
Unit of mea-
Contents Display Note (at idling)
sure
Engine load Engine Load % 21.0%
85°C or 185°F or more
Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp. °C or °F
(after warm-up)
A/F correction #1 A/F Correction #1 % –0.8%
A/F learning #1 A/F Learning #1 % 0.0%
200 — 300 mmHg,
mmHg, kPa,
Intake manifold absolute pressure Mani. Absolute Pressure 26.7 — 40 kPa, 7.8 — 11.8 inHg
inHg or psig
or 3.8 — 5.8 psig
700 rpm (Agree with the
Engine speed signal Engine Speed rpm
tachometer indication)
Meter vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed km/h or MPH 0 km/h or 0 MPH (at parking)
Ignition timing signal Ignition Timing deg 14 — 16 deg
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. °C or °F (Ambient air temperature)
Intake air amount Mass Air Flow g/s or lb/m 2.5 g/s or 0.33 lb/m
Throttle opening angle signal Throttle Opening Angle % 2.0%
Rear oxygen sensor voltage Rear O2 Sensor V 0.1 — 0.7 V
Battery voltage Battery Voltage V 12 — 14 V
Mass air flow voltage Air Flow Sensor Voltage V 1.26 V
Injection 1 pulse width Fuel Injection #1 Pulse ms 2.82 ms
mmHg, kPa,
Atmospheric pressure signal Atmosphere Pressure (Atmospheric pressure)
inHg or psig
mmHg, kPa, (Air intake absolute pressure –
Intake manifold relative pressure Mani. Relative Pressure
inHg or psig Atmospheric pressure)
Learned ignition timing Learned Ignition Timing deg 0 deg
Acceleration opening angle signal Accel. Opening Angle % 0.0%
Fuel temperature signal Fuel Temp. °C or °F +20°C or +68°F
Purge control solenoid duty ratio CPC Valve Duty Ratio % 0 — 3%
Number of EGR steps No. of EGR steps STEP 0 STEP
A/F sensor current value 1 A/F Sensor #1 Current mA –0.2 — 0.2 mA
A/F sensor resistance value 1 A/F Sensor #1 Resistance Ω 32 Ω
A/F sensor output lambda 1 A/F Sensor #1 — 1.0
A/F correction #3 A/F Correction #3 % 0.3%
Throttle motor duty Throttle Motor Duty % –15%
Throttle motor voltage Throttle Motor Voltage V (Battery voltage)
Sub throttle sensor voltage Sub-Throttle Sensor V 1.52 V
Main throttle sensor voltage Main-Throttle Sensor V 0.66 V
Sub accelerator sensor voltage Sub-Accelerator Sensor V 0.68 V
Main acceleration sensor voltage Main-Accelerator Sensor V 0.68 V
Memory vehicle speed Memorized Cruise Speed km/h or MPH 0 km/h or 0 MPH
Fuel level sensor signal Fuel level resistance Ω 2 — 96 Ω
Engine oil temperature Oil Temperature °C ≥ 85°C (after warm-up)
Oil switching solenoid valve duty RH OSV Duty R % 16.9%
Oil switching solenoid valve duty LH OSV Duty L % 16.9%
Oil switching solenoid valve current RH OSV Current R mA 192 mA
Oil switching solenoid valve current LH OSV Current L mA 192 mA
EN(H4SO)(diag)-34

Unit of mea-
sure
Variable valve lift lift mode VVL Lift Mode — 1
#1 cylinder roughness monitor Roughness Monitor #1 — 0
Knock sensor correction Knocking Correction deg 0.0 deg
mmHg, kPa, +7.7 mmHg, +1.1 kPa, +0.31
Fuel tank pressure signal Fuel Tank Pressure
inHg or psig inHg or +0.15 psig
AT vehicle ID signal AT Vehicle ID Signal — ON/OFF
D-check require Flag D-check Require Flag — OFF
Delivery Mode Connector — OFF
Delivery (test) mode terminal
(Test Mode Connector)
Neutral position switch signal Neutral Position Switch — ON
Soft idle switch signal Idle Switch Signal — ON
Ignition switch signal Ignition Switch — ON
Power steering switch signal P/S Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Air conditioning switch signal A/C Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Starter switch signal Starter Switch — OFF
Rear oxygen monitor Rear O2 Rich Signal — Rich/Lean
Knocking signal Knocking Signal — OFF
Crankshaft position sensor signal Crankshaft Position Sig. — ON
Camshaft position sensor signal Camshaft Position Sig. — ON
Rear defogger switch signal Rear Defogger SW — OFF (when OFF)
Blower fan switch signal Blower Fan SW — OFF (when OFF)
Light switch signal Light Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Radiator fan relay 1 signal Radiator Fan Relay #1 — OFF (when OFF)
Fuel pump relay signal Fuel Pump Relay — ON output
Drain valve signal Vent. Solenoid Valve — OFF output
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure
Eng. Oil Press. SW 1 — ON
switch signal 1
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure
Eng. Oil Press. SW 2 — ON
switch signal 2
AT coordinate retard angle demand signal Retard Signal from AT — OFF
AT coordinate fuel cut demand signal Fuel Cut signal from AT — OFF
Vehicle dynamics control (VDC) torque
Ban of Torque Down — ON
down prohibition output
Vehicle dynamics control (VDC) torque
Request Torque Down VDC — OFF
down demand
Allowed
AT coordinate permission signal Torque permission signal —
(prohibited on MT vehicles)
Electronic throttle control motor relay signal ETC Motor Relay — ON
Clutch switch signal Clutch Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Stop light switch signal Stop Light Switch — OFF (when OFF)
SET/COAST switch signal SET/COAST Switch — OFF (when OFF)
RES/ACC switch signal RESUME/ACCEL Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Brake switch signal* Brake Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Main switch signal Main Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Cruise control cancel switch signal CC Cancel SW — OFF (when OFF)
Malfunction indicator light signal MIL On Flag — OFF (when unlit)
Oil level switch Oil level switch — HIGH level
EN(H4SO)(diag)-35

3. READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (OBD MODE)

NOTE:
Unit of mea-
sure
Number of diagnosis code Number of Diag. Code: 0 —
Condition of malfunction indicator light MI(MIL) OFF —
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring (Supp) YES —
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring (Rdy) YES —
Fuel system monitoring
Monitoring test of fuel system YES —
(Supp)
Monitoring test of fuel system Fuel system monitoring (Rdy) YES —
Component monitoring
Monitoring test of comprehensive component YES —
(Supp)
Monitoring test of comprehensive component Component monitoring (Rdy) YES —
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis (Supp) YES —
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis (Rdy) NO —
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Supp) NO —
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Rdy) N/A —
Evaporative purge system
Test of evaporative emission purge control system YES —
(Supp)
Test of evaporative emission purge control system NO —
(Rdy)
Secondary air system test Secondary air system (Supp) NO —
Secondary air system test Secondary air system (Rdy) N/A —
Test of air conditioning system refrigerant A/C system refrigerant (Supp) NO —
Test of air conditioning system refrigerant A/C system refrigerant (Rdy) N/A —
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Supp) YES —
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Rdy) NO —
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis (Supp) YES —
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis (Rdy) NO —
Test of EGR system EGR system (Supp) YES —
Test of EGR system EGR system (Rdy) NO —
Air fuel ratio control system for bank 1 Fuel system for Bank 1 Cl_normal —
Engine load data Calculated load value 23.0 %
Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp. 92 °C
Short term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor
Short term fuel trim B1 –0.8 %
(Bank 1)
Long term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor
Long term fuel trim B1 0.0 %
(Bank 1)
Intake manifold absolute pressure signal Mani. Absolute Pressure 28 kPa
Engine speed signal Engine Speed 700 rpm
Vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed 0 km/h
#1 Cylinder ignition timing Ignition timing adv. #1 16.0 °
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. 36 °C
Intake air amount Mass Air Flow 2.7 g/s
Throttle position signal Throttle Opening Angle 13 %
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 0.7 V
A/F correction (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Short term fuel trim #12 0.0 %
On-board diagnostic system OBD System OBD/OBD2 —
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Oxygen sensor #11 Supported —
EN(H4SO)(diag)-36

Unit of mea-
sure
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 Supported —
Elapsed time after engine start Time Since Engine Start — sec
Travel distance after the malfunction indicator light
Lighted MI lamp history — km
illuminates
A/F lambda signal (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F Sensor #11 1.001 —
A/F sensor output signal (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F Sensor #11 2.79 V
Target EGR Commanded EGR — %
EGR deviation EGR Error — %
Evaporative purge Commanded Evap Purge 0 %
Fuel level signal Fuel Level — %
Number of warm ups after DTC clear Number of warm-ups — —
Travel distance after DTC clear Meter since DTC cleared — km
Fuel tank pressure signal Fuel Tank Pressure –32.00 Pa
Atmospheric pressure signal Atmosphere Pressure Atmospheric pressure kPa
A/F sensor current (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F Sensor #11 0.00 mA
Catalyst temperature #1 Catalyst Temperature #11 — °C
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring (Enable) YES —
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring (Comp) NO —
Monitoring test of fuel system YES —
(Enable)
Monitoring test of fuel system NO —
(Comp)
Monitoring test of comprehensive component YES —
(Enable)
Monitoring test of comprehensive component NO —
(Comp)
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis (Enable) YES —
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis (Comp) NO —
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Enable) N/A —
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Comp) N/A —
Test of evaporative emission purge control system YES —
(Enable)
(Comp)
Secondary air system
Secondary air system test N/A —
(Enable)
Secondary air system test Secondary air system (Comp) N/A —
A/C system refrigerant
Test of air conditioning system refrigerant N/A —
(Enable)
A/C system refrigerant
Test of air conditioning system refrigerant N/A —
(Comp)
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Enable) YES —
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Comp) NO —
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis (Enable) YES —
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis (Comp) NO —
Test of EGR system EGR system (Enable) YES —
Test of EGR system EGR system (Comp) NO —
ECM power supply voltage Control module voltage 13.789 V
Absolute load Absolute Load Value 22 %
A/F target lambda Target Equivalence Ratio 0.976 —
EN(H4SO)(diag)-37

Unit of mea-
sure
Relative throttle opening angle Relative Throttle Pos. 2 %
Ambient temperature Ambient Temperature Ambient air temperature °C
Absolute throttle opening angle 2 Absolute Throttle Pos.#2 32 %
Absolute accelerator opening angle 1 Accelerator Pedal Pos.#1 13 %
Target throttle opening angle Target Throt. Act. Cont. 0 %
Engine operating time while malfunction indicator light
Time while MIL lighted — min
lit
Elapsed time after DTC clear Time since DTC cleared — min
Type of fuel Type of fuel GAS —
Relative acceleration opening angle Relative Accelera. Pos. 0 %
AT drive status/MT gear sta-
Neutral condition NEUT —
tus
EN(H4SO)(diag)-38

4. READ FREEZE FRAME DATA FOR ENGINE (OBD MODE)

NOTE:
Description Display Unit of measure
DTCs of freeze frame data Freeze frame data —
Air fuel ratio control system for bank 1 Fuel system for Bank 1 —
Engine load data Calculated load value %
Short term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor Short term fuel trim B1 %
Long term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor Long term fuel trim B1 %
Intake manifold absolute pressure signal Mani. Absolute Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psig
Vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed km/h or MPH
Ignition timing advance for #1 cylinder Ignition timing adv. #1 °
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. °C or °F
Intake air amount Mass Air Flow g/s or lb/m
Throttle position signal Throttle Opening Angle %
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 V
A/F correction (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Short term fuel trim #12 %
On-board diagnostic system OBD System —
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Oxygen sensor #11 —
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 —
Elapsed time after engine start Time Since Engine Start sec
Target EGR Commanded EGR %
EGR deviation EGR Error %
Evaporative purge Commanded Evap Purge %
Fuel level signal Fuel Level %
Fuel tank pressure signal Fuel Tank Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psig
Atmospheric pressure Atmosphere Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psig
ECM power supply voltage Control module voltage V
Absolute load Absolute Load Value %
A/F target lambda Target Equivalence Ratio —
Relative throttle opening angle Relative Throttle Pos. %
Ambient temperature Ambient Temperature °C or °F
Absolute throttle opening angle 2 Absolute Throttle Pos.#2 %
Absolute accelerator opening angle 1 Accelerator Pedal Pos.#1 %
Target throttle opening angle Target Throt. Act. Cont. %
Neutral condition AT drive status/MT gear status —
5. V.I.N REGISTRATION
1) On «Main Menu» display, select {Each System Check}.
2) On «System Selection Menu» display, select {Engine Control System}.
3) Click the [OK] button after the information of engine type has been displayed.
4) On the «Engine Diagnosis» display, select {Entry VIN}.
5) Perform the procedures shown on the display screen.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-39
Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

10.Read Diagnostic Trouble

Code (DTC)
A: OPERATION
1. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR
NOTE:
• For detailed operation procedures, refer to “PC
• For details concerning DTC, refer to “List of Diag-
Code (DTC).>
2. GENERAL SCAN TOOL
Refer to data denoting emission-related powertrain
DTC.
Code (DTC).>
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruc-
tion manual to access powertrain DTC (MODE
$03).
EN(H4SO)(diag)-40
Inspection Mode
11.Inspection Mode
A: PROCEDURE
Perform the diagnosis shown in the following DTC table.
When performing the diagnosis not listed in “List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)”, refer to the item on the
drive cycle. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-46, Drive Cycle.>
DTC Item Condition
P0031 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
P0032 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
P0077 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit High (Bank 1) —
P0083 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit High (Bank 2) —
P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input —
P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High Input —
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Barometric Pressure Circuit Low Input —
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Barometric Pressure Circuit High Input —
P0112 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Low —
P0113 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit High —
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Low —
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit High —
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “A” Circuit Low —
P0123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “A” Circuit High —
P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 2) —
P0182 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit Low Input —
P0183 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit High Input —
P0197 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Low —
P0198 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor High —
P0222 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “B” Circuit Low —
P0223 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “B” Circuit High —
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) —
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) —
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit —
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance —
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) —
Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance (Bank 1 or Sin-
P0341 —
gle Sensor)
P0447 Evaporative Emission Control System Vent Control Circuit Open —
P0448 Evaporative Emission Control System Vent Control Circuit Shorted —
P0452 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor Low Input —
P0453 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor High Input —
P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit Low —
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Low —
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit High —
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor “A” —
P0512 Starter Request Circuit —
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key —
EN(H4SO)(diag)-41
Inspection Mode
DTC Item Condition

P0604 Internal Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) Error —
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) Error —
P0607 Throttle Control System Circuit Range/Performance —
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/Performance (Bank 1) —
P0700 Transmission Control System (MIL Request) —
P0851 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low —
P0852 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit High —
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (Low) (Bank1 Sensor1) —
P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (High) (Bank1 Sensor1) —
P1160 Return Spring Failure —
P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input —
P1560 Back-Up Voltage Circuit Malfunction —
P1570 Antenna —
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility —
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure —
P1574 Key Communication Failure —
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM —
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM —
P1578 Meter Failure —
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Range/Performance —
P2102 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Low —
P2103 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit High —
P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor “A” Minimum Stop Performance —
P2122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “D” Circuit Low Input —
P2123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “D” Circuit High Input —
P2127 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “E” Circuit Low Input —
P2128 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “E” Circuit High Input —
P2135 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “A”/“B” Voltage Correlation —
P2138 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “D”/“E” Voltage Correlation —
P2227 Atmospheric Pressure Sensor Range/Performance —
P2228 Barometric Pressure Circuit Low —
P2229 Barometric Pressure Circuit High —
EN(H4SO)(diag)-42
Inspection Mode
1. PREPARATION FOR THE INSPECTION 2. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR

MODE 1) Check that no DTC remains after clearing mem-
1) Check that the battery voltage is 12 V or more ory. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory
and fuel remains approx. half [20 — 40 2 (5.3 — Mode.>
10.6 US gal, 4.4 — 8.8 Imp gal)]. 2) Warm up the engine.
2) Lift up the vehicle using a garage jack and place 3) Prepare the Subaru Select Monitor kit. <Ref. to
it on rigid racks, or drive the vehicle onto free roll- EN(H4SO)(diag)-8, PREPARATION TOOL, Gen-
ers. eral Description.>
WARNING:
• Before lifting up the vehicle, ensure parking
brake is applied.
• Do not use a pantograph jack in place of a rig-
id rack.
• Secure a rope or wire to the front or rear tow-
ing hooks to prevent the lateral runout of front
wheels.
• Before rotating the wheels, make sure that
there is no one in front of the vehicle. Besides EN-05692
while the wheels are rotating, make sure that no 4) Prepare PC with Subaru Select Monitor in-
one approaches the vehicle front side. stalled.
• Make sure that there is nothing around the 5) Connect the USB cable to SDI (Subaru Diagno-
wheels. For AWD model, pay special attention sis Interface) and USB port on the personal com-
to all four wheels. puter (dedicated port for the Subaru Select
• While servicing, do not depress or release Monitor).
the clutch pedal or accelerator pedal quickly re-
gardless of the engine speed. Quick operation NOTE:
may cause the vehicle to drop off the free roller. The dedicated port for the Subaru Select Monitor
• To prevent the vehicle from slipping due to means the USB port which was used to install the
vibration, do not place anything between rigid Subaru Select Monitor.
rack and the vehicle. 6) Connect the diagnosis cable to SDI.
7) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse (A) of the
fuse box.
(A)
(A)
EN-07555
(B)
EN-00041
(A) Rigid rack

(B) Free roller
EN(H4SO)(diag)-43
Inspection Mode
8) Connect SDI to data link connector located in the 3. GENERAL SCAN TOOL
lower portion of the instrument panel (on the driv- 1) After performing the diagnostics and clearing the
er’s side). memory, check that no DTC remains. <Ref. to
CAUTION: EN(H4SO)(diag)-31, MODE $04 (CLEAR/RESET
Do not connect the scan tools except for Suba- EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
ru Select Monitor and general scan tool. TION), OPERATION, General Scan Tool.>
3) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse (A) of the
main fuse box.
(A)
EN-07712
9) Start the PC.

10) Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF)
EN-07555
and run the “PC application for Subaru Select Mon-
itor”. 4) Connect the general scan tool to data link con-
11) On «Main Menu» display, select {Each System nector located in the lower portion of the instrument
Check}. panel (on the driver’s side).
12) On «System Selection Menu» display, select CAUTION:
{Engine Control System}. Do not connect the scan tools except for Suba-
13) Click the [OK] button after the information of ru Select Monitor and general scan tool.
engine type has been displayed.
14) On «Engine Diagnosis» display, select {Dealer
Check Mode Procedure}.
15) When the «Perform Inspection (Dealer Check)
Mode ?» is shown on the screen, click the [Next]
button.
16) Perform subsequent procedures as instructed
on the display screen.
• If trouble still remains in the memory, the corre-
sponding DTC appears on the display screen.
EN-07712
NOTE:
• For detailed operation procedures, refer to 5) Start the engine.
“PC application help for Subaru Select Monitor”. NOTE:
• For details concerning DTC, refer to “List of Di- • Ensure the selector lever is placed in the “P”
agnostic Trouble Code (DTC)”. <Ref. to range before starting. (CVT model)
EN(H4SO)(diag)-75, List of Diagnostic Trouble • Depress the clutch pedal when starting engine.
Code (DTC).> (MT model)
• Release the parking brake. 6) Turn the neutral position switch to ON using se-
• The speed difference between front and rear lect lever or shift lever.
wheels may illuminate the ABS warning light, but 7) Depress the brake pedal to turn the brake switch
this does not indicate a malfunction. When en- ON. (CVT model)
gine control system diagnosis is finished, per- 8) Keep the engine speed in 2,500 — 3,000 rpm
form the VDC memory clearance procedure of range for 40 seconds.
self-diagnosis function. <Ref. to VDC(diag)-25,
Clear Memory Mode.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-44
Inspection Mode
9) Place the select lever or shift lever in “D” position

(CVT model) or “1st gear” (MT model) and drive the
vehicle at 5 to 10 km/h (3 to 6 MPH).
NOTE:
• For AWD model, release the parking brake.
• The speed difference between front and rear
wheels may illuminate the ABS warning light, but
this does not indicate a malfunction. When engine
control system diagnosis is finished, perform the
VDC memory clearance procedure of self-diagno-
sis function. <Ref. to VDC(diag)-25, Clear Memory
Mode.>
10) Using the general scan tool, check for DTC and
record the result(s).
NOTE:
• For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
nostic Trouble Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-75, List of Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-45
Drive Cycle
12.Drive Cycle
A: PROCEDURE
It is necessary to perform the drive cycle listed below if DTC is not found in the Inspection Mode. It is possible
to complete diagnosis of the DTC by performing the indicated drive cycle. After the repair for the DTC, per-
form a necessary drive cycle and make sure the function recovers and the DTC is recorded.
1. PREPARATION FOR DRIVE CYCLE
1) Check that the battery voltage is 12 V or more and fuel remains approx. half [20 — 40 2 (5.3 — 10.6 US
gal, 4.4 — 8.8 Imp gal)].
2) After performing the diagnostics and Clear Memory Mode, check that no DTC remains. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory Mode.>
3) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is removed.
NOTE:
• Perform the drive cycle after warming up the engine except when the engine coolant temperature at en-
gine start is specified.
• Perform the drive cycle twice if the DTC in the list is marked with *. After completing the first drive cycle,
stop the engine and perform second diagnosis in same condition.
2. DRIVE CYCLE A
DTC Item Condition
Engine coolant temperature at
*P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop Fuel Control
engine start is less than 20°C (68°F).
*P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant Temperature for Stable Operation —
Coolant Thermostat (Engine Coolant Temperature Below Thermostat Regu-
*P0128 —
lating Temperature)
*P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
*P0141 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank1 Sensor2) —
Complete diagnosis with drive cycle
*P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1)
B or C as well.
*P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1)
B or C as well.
*P0196 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Circuit Range/Performance —
*P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected
B or C as well.
B or C as well.
B or C as well.
B or C as well.
*P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1) —
*P0442 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Small Leak)
*P0451 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor —
*P0456 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Very Small Leak)
*P0457 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/Off)
*P0459 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit High —
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Function Problem —
*P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Lean (Bank 1)
B or C as well.
*P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Rich (Bank 1)
B or C as well.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-46
Drive Cycle
Diagnostic procedure:
1) Drive for 20 minutes or more at a constant speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more.
2) Stop the vehicle and idle for one minute.
3. DRIVE CYCLE B
DTC Item Condition
Complete diagnosis with drive
cycle A or C as well.
*P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermittent —
*P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower Than Expected —
*P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher Than Expected —
1) Drive at 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more.
2) Stop the vehicle and idle for ten minutes.
4. DRIVE CYCLE C
DTC Item Condition
P0026 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Range/Performance (Bank 1) —
P0028 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Range/Performance (Bank 2) —
*P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
*P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position Correlation —
P0076 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Low (Bank 1) —
P0082 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Low (Bank 2) —
*P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Range/Performance —
cycle A or B as well.
*P0400 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow —
EN(H4SO)(diag)-47
Drive Cycle
DTC Item Condition

P1492 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Circuit Malfunction (Low Input) —
P1493 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Circuit Malfunction (High Input) —
Drive according to the drive pattern described below.
(H)
(C)
97 (60)
(D) (F) (G)
64 (40)
(B) (E)
(A)
0
50 100 150 (I)
EN-00842
(A) Idle the engine for 10 seconds or (D) Decelerate with fully closed throt- (G) Stop the vehicle with throttle fully
more. tle to 64 km/h (40 MPH) or less. closed.
(B) Accelerate to 97 km/h (60 MPH) (E) Drive for 20 seconds or more at 64 (H) Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
or more within 20 seconds. km/h (40 MPH) or less.
(C) Drive for 20 seconds or more at 97 (F) Accelerate to 97 km/h (60 MPH) (I) Sec.
km/h (60 MPH) or more. or more within 10 seconds.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-48
Drive Cycle
5. DRIVE CYCLE D
DTC Item Condition
*P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance —
NOTE:
In drive cycle D, one drive cycle will be established when both the drift diagnosis and stuck diagnosis have
completed.
DRIFT DIAGNOSIS
1) Make sure of the items below before starting the engine.
• Engine coolant temperature is less than 30°C (86°F).
• Remaining fuel is 10 2 (2.6 US gal, 2.2 Imp gal) or more.
• Battery voltage is 10.9 V or more.
2) Idle the engine until engine coolant temperature is at least 10°C (18°F) higher than it was when engine
started.
3) After the engine has reached the state of procedure 2), idle the engine for another 5 minutes or more.
STUCK DIAGNOSIS
1) Make sure that the battery voltage is 10.9 V or more.
2) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory Mode.>
3) Drive for approximately 50 2 (13.2 US gal, 11 Imp gal) of fuel.
NOTE:
• It is acceptable to drive the vehicle intermittently.
• Do not disconnect the battery terminals during stuck diagnosis. (Data will be cleared by disconnecting the
battery terminals.)
6. DRIVE CYCLE E
DTC Item Condition
*P0461 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance —
3) Drive for approximately 30 2 (7.9 US gal, 6.6 Imp gal) of fuel.
NOTE:
• Do not disconnect the battery terminals while diagnosing. (Data will be cleared by disconnecting the bat-
tery terminals.)
7. DRIVE CYCLE F
DTC Item Condition
*P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Range/Performance —
1) Make sure that the engine coolant temperature is less than 30°C (86°F).
EN(H4SO)(diag)-49
Drive Cycle
2) Drive according to the drive pattern described below.
(A)
(2) (4) (6)

80 km/h
(50 MPH)
0
(3) (5) (7) (B)
(1)
EN-07588
(A) Vehicle speed (B) Elapsed time
(1) Idle the engine for 10 seconds or (4) Drive for 30 seconds or more at a (6) Drive for 30 seconds or more at a
more after engine start. constant speed of 80 km/h (50 constant speed of 80 km/h (50
MPH) or more. MPH) or more.
(2) Drive for 8 minutes or more at a (5) Stop the vehicle and idle for 30 (7) Stop the vehicle and idle for 30 sec-
constant speed of 80 km/h (50 seconds or more. onds.
MPH) or more.
(3) Stop the vehicle and idle for 30
seconds or more.
NOTE:
• There is no given transition time between idling and cruising.
• Driving at constant speed only on a downhill causes smaller engine load and may result in failure to obtain
a right diagnostic result.
• When the engine stops while performing drive cycle F, perform it again from the state of procedure 1).
8. DRIVE CYCLE H
DTC Item Condition
*P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance —
*P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Performance —
2) With the ignition switch ON (engine OFF), read the engine coolant temperature, intake air temperature and
fuel temperature. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-34, READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE),
3) If the values from step 2) satisfy the following two conditions, idle the engine for one minute.
Condition:
|Engine coolant temperature — Intake air temperature | ≤ 5°C (41°F)
|Engine coolant temperature — Fuel temperature | ≤ 2°C (36°F)
NOTE:
• If the conditions are not satisfied, turn the ignition switch to OFF and wait until the parameters are satisfied.
• For CVT models, hold the select lever to “P” range or “N” range at idling, and for MT models, the shift lever
in the neutral position at idling.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-50
Clear Memory Mode

13.Clear Memory Mode

A: OPERATION
NOTE:
• Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is
performed after memory clearance. Wait for 10
seconds or more after turning the ignition switch to
ON, and then start the engine.
For clear memory procedures using the general
scan tool, refer to “General Scan Tool Instruction
Manual”.
NOTE:
Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is per-
formed after memory clearance. Wait for 10 sec-
onds or more after turning the ignition switch to ON,
and then start the engine.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-51
System Operation Check Mode

14.System Operation Check

Mode
A: OPERATION
CAUTION:
After executing the system operation check
mode, execute the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, OPERATION, Clear Memo-
ry Mode.>
NOTE:
For detailed operation procedures, refer to “PC ap-
plication help for Subaru Select Monitor”.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-52
Malfunction Indicator Light

15.Malfunction Indicator Light

A: PROCEDURE
1. Activation of malfunction indicator light. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-54, ACTIVATION OF MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT,
Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
2. Malfunction indicator light does not come on. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-55, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
COME ON, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
3. Malfunction indicator light does not go off <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-57, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT GO
OFF, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
4. Malfunction indicator light does not blink <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-58, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT BLINK,
↓
5. Malfunction indicator light remains blinking <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-60, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT REMAINS
BLINKING, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-53

B: ACTIVATION OF MALFUNCTION
(1)
INDICATOR LIGHT
(2)
1) When the ignition switch is turned to ON (engine
OFF), the malfunction indicator light (A) in the com- (3)
bination meter illuminates.
(4)
NOTE: (6)
If the malfunction indicator light does not illuminate,
perform diagnostics of the malfunction indicator (5)
light circuit or the combination meter circuit. <Ref. EN-01680

to EN(H4SO)(diag)-55, MALFUNCTION INDICA-
TOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON, Malfunction (1) ON
Indicator Light.> (2) OFF
(3) Ignition switch ON
(4) Engine start
(5) Misfire start
(6) 1 second
CHECK
ENGINE
4) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse (A) with igni-

tion switch to OFF.
CHECK
ENGINE (A)
EN-07714
(A)
2) After starting the engine, the malfunction indica-
tor light goes out. If it does not go off, any of the en-
gine and emission control system has malfunction.
(1)
(3)
(4)
EN-07555
(2)
(3) (1) When the ignition switch is turned to ON
(engine OFF), the malfunction indicator light il-
(4) luminates.
(5) (2) After the engine starts, malfunction indicator
(6)
light blinks in a cycle of 0.5 Hz. (During diagno-
EN-01679 sis)
(3) Malfunction indicator light blinks at a cycle of
(1) No faulty 3 Hz after diagnosis if there is no trouble. Mal-
(2) Trouble occurs function indicator light illuminates if faulty.
(3) ON
(4) OFF
(1)
(6) Engine start (2)
3) If the diagnostic system detects a misfire which (4)

could damage the catalyst, the malfunction indica-
tor light will blink at a cycle of 1 Hz. (3)
EN-01681
(1) ON
(2) OFF
(4) 1 second
EN(H4SO)(diag)-54

C: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON

DIAGNOSIS:
The malfunction indicator light circuit is open or shorted.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (engine OFF), malfunction indicator light does not illuminate.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B72 IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY

F/B No. 5 SBF-5 MAIN SBF
1 3
E
19
COMBINATION
METER
i10
6
M/B
DELIVERY
(TEST) MODE
FUSE No. 36 B138
1 2
*
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL
i3
* * ARRANGEMENT
18
B38
C34
B33
C4
B : B135 C : B136 ECM
B138 i10 B: B135 C: B136
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B72 B38
1 2
1 2 3
4 5 6 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
EN-07700
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 5. Go to step 2.
2) Measure the voltage between ECM connec-
tor and chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-55

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
COMBINATION METER CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Remove the combination meter. <Ref. to In this case, repair
IDI-20, Combination Meter.> the following item:
3) Disconnect the connector from ECM and • Open circuit in
combination meter. harness between
4) Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and combi-
ECM and combination meter connector. nation meter con-
Connector & terminal nector
(B135) No. 33 — (i10) No. 6: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of combi- Repair the poor Go to step 4.
Check for poor contact of combination meternation meter connector? contact of combi-
connector. nation meter con-
nector.
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINA- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the meter Check the follow-
TION METER AND IGNITION SWITCH CON- case assembly of ing item and repair
NECTOR. combination meter. if necessary.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. <Ref. to IDI-20, NOTE:
2) Measure the voltage between combination Combination • Blown out of fuse
meter connector and chassis ground. Meter.> (F/B No. 5)
Connector & terminal • Open circuit or
(i10) No. 19 (+) — Chassis ground (–): short circuit to
ground in harness
of power supply
circuit
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Does the malfunction indicator Repair the poor Go to step 6.
Check for poor connection by shaking or pulling light illuminate? contact of ECM
ECM harness. connector.
6 CHECK ECM CONNECTOR. Is the ECM connector correctly Replace the ECM. Repair the connec-
Check the connection of ECM connector. connected? <Ref. to tion of ECM con-
FU(H4SO)-41, nector.
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-56

D: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT GO OFF

DIAGNOSIS:
The malfunction indicator light circuit is shorted.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Although malfunction indicator light comes on when the engine runs, DTC is not shown on the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool display.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

1 3
E
19
COMBINATION
METER
i10
6
M/B
DELIVERY
(TEST) MODE
FUSE No. 36 B138
1 2
*
i3
* * ARRANGEMENT
18
B38
C34
B33
C4
B : B135 C : B136 ECM
B138 i10 B: B135 C: B136
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B72 B38
1 2
1 2 3
4 5 6 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
EN-07700
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Does the malfunction indicator Repair the ground Replace the ECM.
COMBINATION METER CONNECTOR. light illuminate? short circuit of har- <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ness between FU(H4SO)-41,
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. ECM and combi- Engine Control
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. nation meter con- Module (ECM).>
nector.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-57

E: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT BLINK

DIAGNOSIS:
• The malfunction indicator light circuit is open or shorted.
• The delivery (test) mode fuse circuit is open.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Malfunction indicator light does not blink during Inspection Mode.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

1 3
E
19
COMBINATION
METER
i10
6
M/B
DELIVERY
(TEST) MODE
FUSE No. 36 B138
1 2
*
i3
* * ARRANGEMENT
18
B38
C34
B33
C4
B : B135 C : B136 ECM
B138 i10 B: B135 C: B136
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B72 B38
1 2
1 2 3
4 5 6 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
EN-07700
EN(H4SO)(diag)-58

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK STATUS OF MALFUNCTION INDI- Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 2. Repair the mal-
CATOR LIGHT. light illuminate? function indicator
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. light circuit. <Ref.
2) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is to
removed. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF) 55, MALFUNC-
TION INDICATOR
LIGHT DOES NOT
COME ON, Mal-
function Indicator
Light.>
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Does the malfunction indicator Repair the ground Go to step 3.
COMBINATION METER CONNECTOR. light illuminate? short circuit of har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ness between
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. ECM and combi-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. nation meter con-
nector.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND DE- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
LIVERY (TEST) MODE FUSE. and connector.
2) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse of the In this case, repair
main fuse box. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of harness between • Open circuit of
ECM connectors. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and delivery
(B136) No. 34 — (B136) No. 4: (test) mode fuse
• Poor contact of
joint connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Replace the ECM.
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM <Ref. to
connector. FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-59

F: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT REMAINS BLINKING

DIAGNOSIS:
The delivery (test) mode fuse circuit is shorted.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Malfunction indicator light blinks when delivery (test) mode fuse is not connected.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

1 3
E
19
COMBINATION
METER
i10
6
M/B
DELIVERY
(TEST) MODE
FUSE No. 36 B138
1 2
*
i3
* * ARRANGEMENT
18
B38
C34
B33
C4
B : B135 C : B136 ECM
B138 i10 B: B135 C: B136
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B72 B38
1 2
1 2 3
4 5 6 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
EN-07700
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK DELIVERY (TEST) MODE FUSE. Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 2. System is normal.
1) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is light blink? NOTE:
removed. Malfunction indica-
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor light blinks
when delivery
(test) mode fuse is
connected.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-60

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Repair the short Replace the ECM.
CHASSIS GROUND. circuit to ground in <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. harness between FU(H4SO)-41,
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. ECM and delivery Engine Control
3) Measure the resistance of harness between (test) mode fuse. Module (ECM).>
ECM and chassis ground.
(B136) No. 34 — Chassis ground:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-61
Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure

16.Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure

A: PROCEDURE
1. Check of the fuel amount
↓
2. Inspection of starter motor circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-63, STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting
Failure.>
↓
3. Inspection of ECM power supply and ground line <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-67, CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND LINE
OF ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM), Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure.>
↓
4. Inspection of ignition control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-69, IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM, Diagnostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>
↓
5. Inspection of fuel pump circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-71, FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure.>
↓
6. Inspection of fuel injector circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-73, FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting Fail-
ure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-62

B: STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
F/B No. 21
6
BATTERY
SBF-5 MAIN SBF
2 3
2
IGNITION SWITCH
B72
STARTER RELAY
B493
E
1
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
MT CVT 12 6
11 9
MT
B12 T3 T7
CVT
2
CLUTCH STROKE
SENSOR (CLUTCH STARTER MOTOR
MT
START SWITCH)
B501
CVT
1
CVT
B14
MT M
B26
C16
B : B135
ECM
C : B136
B493 B501 B72 T7 B12 B : B135 C : B136
1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 14 15 16
3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4 5 6 9 10 11 12 25 26 27
4 6 7 8 9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-07701
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK BATTERY. Is the voltage 12 V or more? Go to step 2. Charge or replace
Check the battery voltage. the battery.
2 CHECK OPERATION OF STARTER MOTOR. Does the starter motor oper- Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
ate?
EN(H4SO)(diag)-63

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? <Ref. to Check the appro- The circuit has
EN(H4SO)(diag)-40, OPERA- priate DTC using returned to a nor-
TION, Read Diagnostic Trouble the “List of Diag- mal condition at
Code (DTC).> nostic Trouble this time. Repro-
Code (DTC)”. duce the failure,
<Ref. to and then perform
EN(H4SO)(diag)- the diagnosis
75, List of Diagnos- again.
tic Trouble Code NOTE:
(DTC).> In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR STARTER MO- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check the starter Go to step 5.
TOR. motor. <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. SC(H4SO)-9,
2) Disconnect the connector from starter Starter.>
motor.
3) Turn the ignition switch to START.
4) Measure the voltage between the starter
motor connector and the engine ground.
(B14) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–):
NOTE:
For CVT model, place the select lever in “P”
range or “N” range. For MT model, depress the
clutch pedal.
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 6. Repair the power
AND IGNITION SWITCH CONNECTOR. supply circuit.
2) Disconnect the connector from ignition
switch.
3) Measure the voltage between ignition
switch connector and chassis ground.
6 CHECK IGNITION SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 7. Replace the igni-
Measure the resistance between ignition switch tion switch. <Ref.
terminals after turning the ignition switch to to SL-60,
START position. REPLACEMENT,
Terminals Ignition Key Lock.>
No. 3 — No. 2:
No. 3 — No. 6:
7 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF STARTER RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 8. Repair open or
LAY. short circuit to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ground in harness
2) Remove the starter relay. between starter
3) Connect the connector to ignition switch. relay and ignition
4) Measure the input voltage between starter switch connector.
relay connector and chassis ground after turn-
ing the ignition switch to START position.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-64

Step Check Yes No

8 CHECK STARTER RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 9. Replace the starter
1) Connect the battery to starter relay termi- relay. <Ref. to
nals No. 1 and No. 2. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
2) Measure the resistance between starter 9, Electrical Com-
relay terminals. ponent Location.>
Terminals
No. 3 — No. 4:
9 CHECK TRANSMISSION TYPE. Is the transmission type CVT? Go to step 10. Go to step 14.
10 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 11. Repair the open
STARTER RELAY CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. starter relay con-
3) Measure the resistance of harness connec- nector.
tor between ECM and starter relay.
(B493) No. 1 — (B135) No. 26:
11 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STARTER RE- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 12. Repair the harness
LAY AND INHIBITOR SWITCH CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Disconnect the connector from inhibitor In this case, repair
switch. the following item:
2) Measure the resistance of harness between • Open circuit in
starter relay connector and inhibitor relay con- harness between
nector. starter relay con-
Connector & terminal nector and inhibitor
(B493) No. 3 — (T7) No. 6: switch connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
12 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN INHIBITOR Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 13. Repair the harness
SWITCH AND STARTER MOTOR. and connector.
Measure the resistance of harness between the NOTE:
inhibitor switch and starter motor. In this case, repair
Connector & terminal the following item:
(T7) No. 9 — (B14) No. 1: • Open circuit in
harness between
inhibitor switch
connector and
starter motor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
13 CHECK INHIBITOR SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Check the ECM Replace the inhibi-
1) Place the select lever in “P” range or “N” power supply and tor switch. <Ref. to
range. ground line. <Ref. CVT-94, Inhibitor
2) Measure the resistance between inhibitor to Switch.>
switch terminals. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
Terminals 67, CHECK
No. 6 — No. 9: POWER SUPPLY
AND GROUND
LINE OF ENGINE
CONTROL MOD-
ULE (ECM), Diag-
nostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-65

Step Check Yes No

14 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STARTER RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 15. Repair the open
LAY AND CLUTCH STROKE SENSOR CON- circuit in harness
NECTOR. between starter
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. relay connector
2) Disconnect the connector from clutch stroke and clutch stroke
sensor. sensor connector.
3) Measure the resistance of harness between
starter relay connector and clutch stroke sensor
connector.
(B493) No. 1 — (B501) No. 2:
CLUTCH STROKE SENSOR CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. between ECM and
2) Measure the resistance of harness between clutch stroke sen-
ECM and clutch stroke sensor connector. sor connector.
(B135) No. 26 — (B501) No. 1:
16 CHECK CLUTCH STROKE SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 17. Replace the clutch
Measure the resistance between clutch stroke stroke sensor.
sensor terminals while depressing the clutch. <Ref. to PB(diag)-
Terminals 10, Electrical Com-
No. 1 — No. 2: ponent Location.>
17 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STARTER RE- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Check the ECM Repair the open
LAY AND STARTER MOTOR. power supply and circuit of the har-
Measure the resistance of harness between ground line. <Ref. ness between
starter relay connector and starter motor. to starter relay con-
Connector & terminal EN(H4SO)(diag)- nector and starter
(B493) No. 3 — (B14) No. 1: 67, CHECK motor.
POWER SUPPLY
AND GROUND
LINE OF ENGINE
CONTROL MOD-
ULE (ECM), Diag-
nostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-66

C: CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND LINE OF ENGINE CONTROL MOD-

ULE (ECM)
CAUTION:
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
M/B No. 16
4
3 M/B No. 12
1
2 B72 IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
B220 F/B No. 12 SBF-5 MAIN SBF
1 3
C30
B13
C1
D7
C2
A : B134
E
B : B135
ECM
C : B136
D : B137
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
B21
40
35
34
37
36
E2
E E
B21 A: B134 B: B135 B220
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 5 9 13
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B72 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07702
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK MAIN RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Replace the main
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. relay. <Ref. to
2) Remove the main relay. FU(H4SO)-42,
3) Connect the battery to main relay terminals Main Relay.>
No. 1 and No. 2.
4) Measure the resistance between main relay
terminals.
Terminals
No. 3 — No. 4:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-67

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. and connector.
2) Measure the resistance of harness between NOTE:
ECM and chassis ground. In this case, repair
(B134) No. 3 — Chassis ground: • Open circuit in
(B134) No. 4 — Chassis ground: harness between
(B134) No. 6 — Chassis ground: ECM and engine
(B137) No. 1 — Chassis ground: ground terminal
(B137) No. 3 — Chassis ground: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the open or
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ground short circuit
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and of harness of
chassis ground. power supply cir-
Connector & terminal cuit.
4 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF MAIN RELAY. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 5. Repair the open or
Measure the voltage between main relay con- ground short circuit
nector and chassis ground. of harness of
Connector & terminal power supply cir-
(B220) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): cuit.
5 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 6. Repair the open
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. circuit in harness
2) Install the main relay. between ECM and
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. main relay connec-
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and tor.
chassis ground.
6 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check ignition con- Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol system. <Ref. and connector.
2) Connect the connector to ECM. to NOTE:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. EN(H4SO)(diag)- In this case, repair
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and 69, IGNITION the following item:
chassis ground. CONTROL SYS- • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal TEM, Diagnostics harness between
(B136) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): for Engine Starting ECM and main re-
(B137) No. 7 (+) — Chassis ground (–): Failure.> lay connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-68

D: IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM

CAUTION:
Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-41, Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
M/B No. 14 B134 ECM
21
22
31
32
E
IG RELAY
8
7
B220 B21
49
32
33
11
5
E2
E31 E32 E33 E34

1
3
E
IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E31 E33 B21 B220 B134
E32 E34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 5 9 13
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
2 6 10 14
19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
1
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
2
42 43 44 45 46 47
3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07703
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SPARK PLUG CONDITION. Is the spark plug condition nor- Go to step 2. Replace the spark
1) Remove the spark plug. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)- mal? plug. <Ref. to
3, REMOVAL, Spark Plug.> IG(H4SO)-3,
2) Check the spark plug condition. <Ref. to Spark Plug.>
IG(H4SO)-3, INSPECTION, Spark Plug.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-69

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK IGNITION SYSTEM FOR SPARKS. Does spark occur at each cylin- Check fuel pump Go to step 3.
1) Connect the spark plug to ignition coil. der? system. <Ref. to
2) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-
FU(H4SO)-48, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES- 71, FUEL PUMP
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> CIRCUIT, Diag-
3) Contact the spark plug thread portion to nostics for Engine
engine. Starting Failure.>
4) While opening the throttle valve fully, crank
the engine to check that spark occurs at each
cylinder.
3 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
CIRCUIT. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ignition coil. In this case, repair
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between ignition coil • Open circuit or
connector and engine ground. short circuit to
Connector & terminal ground in harness
(E31) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): of power supply
(E32) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): circuit
(E33) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Poor contact of
(E34) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): coupling connector
• Blown out of fuse
(M/B No. 14)
4 CHECK HARNESS OF IGNITION COIL Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 5. Repair the open
GROUND CIRCUIT. circuit in harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ignition
2) Measure the resistance of harness between coil connector and
ignition coil connector and engine ground. engine grounding
Connector & terminal terminal.
(E31) No. 3 — Engine ground:
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 6. Repair the harness
NITION COIL CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance of harness between In this case, repair
ECM and ignition coil connector. the following item:
Connector & terminal • Open circuit of
(B134) No. 21 — (E31) No. 2: harness between
(B134) No. 22 — (E32) No. 2: ECM and ignition
(B134) No. 31 — (E33) No. 2: coil connector
(B134) No. 32 — (E34) No. 2: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 7. Repair the ground
NITION COIL CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance of harness between ness between
ECM and engine ground. ECM and ignition
Connector & terminal: coil connector.
(B134) No. 21 — Engine ground:
7 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Replace the igni-
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM tion coil. <Ref. to
connector. IG(H4SO)-5, Igni-
tion Coil.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-70

E: FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
M/B No. 20
IGNITION
B72 BATTERY
SWITCH
1 3
FUEL PUMP RELAY
21
17
19 33
20 E
B136 ECM
B220
B38
14
i3
i155
2
R333
FUEL PUMP
5 1
M 6 2
R58 R57 R15
B72 R58 B38 B136 B220
1 2
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
4 5 6 3 4 5 6 17
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
5 6 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
i155
R57
1 2
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
EN-07704
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OPERATING SOUND OF FUEL Does the fuel pump emit oper- Check the fuel Go to step 2.
PUMP. ating sound? injector circuit.
Check if the fuel pump operates for two seconds <Ref. to
when turning the ignition switch to ON. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
NOTE: 73, FUEL INJEC-
Fuel pump operation can be executed using the TOR CIRCUIT,
Subaru Select Monitor. Diagnostics for
For detailed procedures, refer to “SYSTEM OP- Engine Starting
ERATION CHECK MODE”. <Ref. to Failure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-52, System Operation Check
Mode.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-71

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT OF FUEL PUMP. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. and connector.
2) Remove the fuel pump access hole lid. NOTE:
3) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump. In this case, repair
4) Measure the resistance of harness connec- the following item:
tor between fuel pump and chassis ground. • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(R58) No. 6 — Chassis ground: fuel pump connec-
tor and chassis
grounding terminal
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO FUEL PUMP. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the fuel Go to step 4.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. pump. <Ref. to
2) Measure the voltage between fuel pump FU(H4SO)-60,
connector and chassis ground. Fuel Pump.>
(R58) No. 5 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUEL PUMP Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 5. Repair the harness
AND FUEL PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR. and connector.
fuel pump connector and fuel pump relay con- the following item:
nector. • Open circuit in
(R58) No. 5 — (B220) No. 20: fuel pump connec-
tor and fuel pump
relay connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUEL PUMP Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 6. Repair the short
AND FUEL PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR. more? circuit to ground in
Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
fuel pump and fuel pump relay connector. fuel pump connec-
Connector & terminal tor and fuel pump
(R58) No. 5 — Chassis ground: relay connector.
6 CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 7. Replace the fuel
1) Remove the fuel pump relay. pump relay. <Ref.
2) Connect the battery to fuel pump relay ter- to FU(H4SO)-44,
minals No. 17 and No. 19. Fuel Pump Relay.>
3) Measure the resistance between fuel pump
relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 20 — No. 21:
FUEL PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
2) Measure the resistance of harness between fuel pump relay
ECM and fuel pump relay connector. connector.
(B136) No. 33 — (B220) No. 19:
8 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF FUEL PUMP Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Repair the open or
RELAY. contact of ECM ground short circuit
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. connector. of harness of
2) Measure the voltage between fuel pump power supply cir-
relay connector and chassis ground. cuit.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-72

F: FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
• Check or repair only faulty parts.
• After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
E
B220
B134 ECM
10
11
12
13
B21
48
42
43
44
45
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
2
FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E5 E16 B21 B134 B220
E6 E17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 2 6 10 14
1 2 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07705
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OPERATION OF EACH FUEL INJEC- Does the fuel pump emit oper- Check the fuel Go to step 2.
TOR. ating sound? pressure. <Ref. to
While cranking the engine, check each fuel ME(H4SO)-28,
injector emits operating sound. Use a sound INSPECTION,
scope or attach a screwdriver to the injector to Fuel Pressure.>
listen to sounds for this check.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-73

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO EACH FUEL IN- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
JECTOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector. In this case, repair
4) Measure the voltage between fuel injector • Open circuit in
connector and the engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal main relay connec-
#1 (E5) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): tor and fuel injector
#2 (E16) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): connector
#3 (E6) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Poor contact of
#4 (E17) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): main relay connec-
tor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. In this case, repair
3) Measure the resistance of harness between the following item:
ECM and fuel injector connector. • Open circuit in
#1 (B134) No. 10 — (E5) No. 1: ECM and fuel in-
#2 (B134) No. 11 — (E16) No. 1: jector connector
#3 (B134) No. 12 — (E6) No. 1: • Poor contact of
#4 (B134) No. 13 — (E17) No. 1: coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 5. Repair the short
FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. more? circuit to ground in
Measure the resistance between ECM and harness between
chassis ground. ECM and fuel
Connector & terminal injector connector.
#1 (B134) No. 10 — Chassis ground:
5 CHECK EACH FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance 5 — 20 Ω? Go to step 6. Replace the faulty
Measure the resistance between each fuel fuel injector. <Ref.
injector terminals. to FU(H4SO)-34,
Terminals Fuel Injector.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
6 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Inspection using
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM “General Diagnos-
connector. tic Table”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
282, INSPEC-
TION, General
Diagnostic Table.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-74
List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

17.List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: LIST
DTC Item Note
P0026 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-82, DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLE-
Range/Performance (Bank 1) NOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure
with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Range/Performance (Bank 2) NOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure
P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-86, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
Sensor 1) CUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0031 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-88, DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) CUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0032 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-90, DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) CUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0037 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-92, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) CUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0038 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-94, DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) CUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position Correla- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-96, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION
tion CORRELATION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Low (Bank 1) NOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
High (Bank 1) NOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
Low (Bank 2) NOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
High (Bank 2) NOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-105, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW
Range/Performance CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-106, DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW
Input CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-108, DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW
Input CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baromet- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-110, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRES-
ric Pressure Circuit Low Input SURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baromet- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-112, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRES-
ric Pressure Circuit High Input SURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Proce-
P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-114, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
cuit Range/Performance SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-75

DTC Item Note

cuit Low SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
cuit High SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-119, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA-
Low TURE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-121, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA-
High TURE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-123, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
“A” Circuit Low SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
“A” Circuit High SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-127, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEM-
Closed Loop Fuel Control PERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Procedure
P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant Tempera- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-128, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOL-
ture for Stable Operation ANT TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0128 Coolant Thermostat (Engine Coolant <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-129, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT
Temperature Below Thermostat Reg- (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING
ulating Temperature) TEMPERATURE), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-130, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
1 Sensor 1) VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-132, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
ble Code (DTC).>
P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-134, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-135, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIV-
Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) ITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-137, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
ble Code (DTC).>
P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-139, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
ble Code (DTC).>
P0139 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-141, DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-143, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIV-
Detected (Bank1 Sensor2) ITY DETECTED (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0141 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank1 <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-145, DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT
Sensor2) (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1) <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-145, DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1),
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-76

DTC Item Note

P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1) <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-146, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1),
P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-148, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Range/Performance “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Low Input “A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
High Input “A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0196 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-153, DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
cuit Range/Performance SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0197 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-154, DTC P0197 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0198 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-156, DTC P0198 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
“B” Circuit Low SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
“B” Circuit High SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-162, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE
DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank 1 <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-169, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
or Single Sensor) LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank 1 <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-171, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
or Single Sensor) HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-173, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SEN-
SOR “A” CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-175, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SEN-
Range/Performance SOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-176, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(Bank 1 or Single Sensor) “A” CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with
P0341 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-178, DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Range/Performance (Bank 1 or Single “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR),
Sensor) Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0400 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-180, DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION
FLOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-181, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY
Threshold (Bank 1) BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-77

DTC Item Note

P0442 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-185, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON-
tem Leak Detected (Small Leak) TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Procedure
tem Vent Control Circuit Open TROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Procedure
tem Vent Control Circuit Shorted TROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Proce-
tem Pressure Sensor TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
tem Pressure Sensor Low Input TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
tem Pressure Sensor High Input TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
tem Leak Detected (Very Small Leak) TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Proce-
tem Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/ TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diagnostic
Off) Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-200, DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYS-
Control Valve Circuit Low TEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0459 Evaporative Emission System Purge <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-202, DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYS-
Control Valve Circuit High TEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-204, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIR-
Performance CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-204, DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIR-
CUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-204, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIR-
CUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermittent <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-205, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
INTERMITTENT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor “A” <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-205, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”,
P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-206, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
Than Expected RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-207, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
Than Expected RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-208, DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CON-
Performance TROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Perfor- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-216, DTC P050B COLD START IGNITION TIMING
mance PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0512 Starter Request Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-217, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT,
EN(H4SO)(diag)-78

DTC Item Note

P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key <Ref. to IM(diag)-16, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY, Diagnos-
tic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0604 Internal Control Module Random <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-219, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE
Access Memory (RAM) Error RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-219, DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE
Memory (ROM) Error READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM) ERROR, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0607 Throttle Control System Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-220, DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/Per- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-221, DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CON-
formance (Bank 1) TROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0700 Transmission Control System (MIL <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-221, DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYS-
Request) TEM (MIL REQUEST), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0851 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-222, DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
(AT Model) CIRCUIT LOW (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0851 Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low (MT <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-224, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
Model) CUIT LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0852 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-226, DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
(AT Model) CIRCUIT HIGH (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0852 Neutral Switch Input Circuit High (MT <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-228, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
Model) CUIT HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-230, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/
mance (Low) (Bank1 Sensor1) PERFORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Procedure with
P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-232, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/
mance (High) (Bank1 Sensor1) PERFORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Procedure with
P1160 Return Spring Failure <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-233, DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE,
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Function <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-234, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID
Problem VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P1492 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-235, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL
Malfunction (Low Input) #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
Malfunction (High Input) #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
EN(H4SO)(diag)-79

DTC Item Note

P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-242, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT
LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1560 Back-Up Voltage Circuit Malfunction <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-244, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1570 Antenna <Ref. to IM(diag)-17, DTC P1570 ANTENNA, Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility <Ref. to IM(diag)-19, DTC P1571 REFERENCE CODE INCOMPATIBILITY,
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-20, DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT
ANTENNA CIRCUIT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P1574 Key Communication Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-22, DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE, Diag-
nostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to IM(diag)-22, DTC P1576 EGI CONTROL MODULE EEPROM, Diag-
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to IM(diag)-23, DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM, Diag-
P1578 Meter Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-24, DTC P1578 METER FAILURE, Diagnostic Procedure
P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-246, DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM
Lean (Bank 1) SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-252, DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM
Rich (Bank 1) SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-258, DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CON-
Range/Performance TROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure
Low TROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
High TROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor “A” <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-266, DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
Minimum Stop Performance SENSOR “A” MINIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
“D” Circuit Low Input SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with
“D” Circuit High Input SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with
“E” Circuit Low Input SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with
EN(H4SO)(diag)-80

DTC Item Note

“E” Circuit High Input SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with
“A”/“B” Voltage Correlation SENSOR/SWITCH “A”/“B” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Procedure
“D”/“E” Voltage Correlation SENSOR/SWITCH “D”/“E” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Procedure
P2227 Atmospheric Pressure Sensor Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-280, DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIR-
Performance CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P2228 Barometric Pressure Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-280, DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIR-
P2229 Barometric Pressure Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIR-
U0073 CAN Failure, Bus ‘OFF’ Detection <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS ‘OFF’
DETECTION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
U0101 CAN (TCU) Data not Loaded <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC U0101 CAN (TCU) DATA NOT LOADED,
U0122 CAN (VDC) Data not Loaded <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC U0122 CAN (VDC) DATA NOT LOADED,
U0140 CAN (BCU) Data not Loaded <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC U0140 CAN (BCU) DATA NOT LOADED,
U0402 CAN (TCU) Data Abnormal <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC U0402 CAN (TCU) DATA ABNORMAL,
U0416 CAN (VDC) Data Abnormal <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC U0416 CAN (VDC) DATA ABNORMAL,
U0422 CAN (BCU) Data Abnormal <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC U0422 CAN (BCU) DATA ABNORMAL,
EN(H4SO)(diag)-81
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

18.Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (BANK 1)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
• Immediately at fault recognition
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-8, DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B137 ECM 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
14
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
21
E2
E71
VVL DIAGNOSIS
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH RH
EN-07708
EN(H4SO)(diag)-82

Step Check Yes No

VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL and connector.
PRESSURE SWITCH RH CONNECTOR. NOTE:
1) Warm up the engine. In this case, repair
2) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the following item:
3) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM • Open circuit in
and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure harness between
switch RH. ECM and variable
4) Measure the resistance of harness between valve lift diagnosis
ECM and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres- oil pressure switch
sure switch RH connector. RH connector
Connector & terminal • Poor contact of
(B137) No. 14 — (E71) No. 1: coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair the ground
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL more? short circuit in har-
PRESSURE SWITCH RH CONNECTOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between the variable ECM and variable
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch RH con- valve lift diagnosis
nector and engine ground. oil pressure switch
Connector & terminal RH connector.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL circuit to power
PRESSURE SWITCH RH CONNECTOR. supply in harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. between ECM and
2) Measure the voltage between the variable variable valve lift
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch RH con- diagnosis oil pres-
nector and engine ground. sure switch RH
Connector & terminal connector.
(E71) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–):
4 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? Replace the oil End.
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. switching solenoid
2) After idling the engine, check the DTC. valve RH. <Ref. to
NOTE: ME(H4SO)-89, Oil
For detailed procedures, refer to “Clear Memory Switching Solenoid
Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Valve.> After
Memory Mode.> replacement, go to
the next step. Go to
step 5.
5 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? Check for oil rout- End.
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. ing.
2) After idling the engine, check the DTC.
NOTE:
For detailed procedures, refer to “Clear Memory
Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear
Memory Mode.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-83

B: DTC P0028 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE (BANK 2)
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B137 ECM 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
13
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
22
E2
E72
VVL DIAGNOSIS
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH LH
EN-07709
EN(H4SO)(diag)-84

Step Check Yes No

VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL and connector.
PRESSURE SWITCH LH CONNECTOR. NOTE:
1) Warm up the engine. In this case, repair
3) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM • Open circuit in
and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure harness between
switch LH. ECM and variable
4) Measure the resistance of harness between valve lift diagnosis
ECM and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres- oil pressure switch
sure switch LH connector. LH connector
Connector & terminal • Poor contact of
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL more? short circuit in har-
PRESSURE SWITCH LH CONNECTOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between the variable ECM and variable
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch LH con- valve lift diagnosis
nector and engine ground. oil pressure switch
Connector & terminal LH connector.
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL circuit to power
PRESSURE SWITCH LH CONNECTOR. supply in harness
2) Measure the voltage between the variable variable valve lift
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch LH con- diagnosis oil pres-
nector and engine ground. sure switch LH
4 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? Replace the oil End.
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. switching solenoid
2) After idling the engine, check the DTC. valve LH. <Ref. to
NOTE: ME(H4SO)-89, Oil
For detailed procedures, refer to “Clear Memory Switching Solenoid
Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Valve.> After
Memory Mode.> replacement, go to
the next step. Go to
step 5.
5 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? Check for oil rout- End.
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. ing.
2) After idling the engine, check the DTC.
NOTE:
For detailed procedures, refer to “Clear Memory
Mode”. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear
Memory Mode.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-85

C: DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

• Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-11, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
(BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
EN(H4SO)(diag)-86

Step Check Yes No

FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Start and warm up the engine. In this case, repair
3) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and • Open circuit in
front oxygen (A/F) sensor. harness between
4) Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and front oxy-
ECM and front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. gen (A/F) sensor
Connector & terminal connector
(B136) No. 18 — (E24) No. 2:
(B136) No. 19 — (E24) No. 1:
2 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. Is the resistance 2 — 3 Ω? Go to step 3. Replace the front
Measure the resistance between front oxygen oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector terminals. sor. <Ref. to
Terminals FU(H4SO)-37,
No. 3 — No. 4: Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
3 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the front
Check for poor contact of ECM and front oxygen front oxygen (A/F) sensor con- contact of ECM or oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector. nector? front oxygen (A/F) sor. <Ref. to
sensor connector. FU(H4SO)-37,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-87

D: DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
EN(H4SO)(diag)-88

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO FRONT OXY- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
GEN (A/F) SENSOR. supply line.
2) Disconnect the connectors from front oxy- In this case, repair
gen (A/F) sensor. the following item:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. • Open circuit in
4) Measure the voltage between front oxygen harness between
(A/F) sensor connector and engine ground. A/F, oxygen sen-
Connector & terminal sor relay connector
(E24) No. 4 (+) — Engine ground (–): and front oxygen
(A/F) sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
A/F, oxygen sen-
sor relay connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Malfunction of A/
F, oxygen sensor
relay
TOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and • Open circuit in
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and front oxy-
(B136) No. 5 — (E24) No. 3: gen (A/F) sensor
(B136) No. 6 — (E24) No. 3: connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
Measure the resistance of harness between and connector.
ECM and chassis ground. NOTE:
Connector & terminal In this case, repair
(B134) No. 3 — Chassis ground: the following item:
(B134) No. 4 — Chassis ground: • Open circuit of
(B137) No. 3 — Chassis ground: ground
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. Is the resistance 2 — 3 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the front
Measure the resistance between front oxygen contact of ECM oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector terminals. connector. sor. <Ref. to
Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-89

E: DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
EN(H4SO)(diag)-90

Step Check Yes No

FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in
TOR. the harness
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and front oxygen (A/F)
chassis ground. sensor connector.
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. contact of ECM and connector.
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and connector. NOTE:
chassis ground. In this case, repair
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-91

F: DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY E25

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
SENSOR A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
EN(H4SO)(diag)-92

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO REAR OXY- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
GEN SENSOR. supply line.
2) Disconnect the connector from rear oxygen In this case, repair
sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen harness between
sensor connector and engine ground. A/F, oxygen sen-
Connector & terminal sor relay connector
(E25) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): and rear oxygen
sensor connector
• Poor contact of
A/F, oxygen sen-
sor relay connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and the following item:
oxygen sensor connector. • Open circuit in
(B135) No. 6 — (E25) No. 1: ECM and rear oxy-
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. Is the resistance 5 — 7 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the rear
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen contact of ECM oxygen sensor.
sensor connector terminals. connector. <Ref. to
No. 2 — No. 1: Rear Oxygen Sen-
sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-93

G: DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
Step Check Yes No

REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. circuit to power in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the harness
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and between ECM and
chassis ground. rear oxygen sensor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-94

Step Check Yes No

coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-95

H: DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION CORRELATION

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-21, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION
CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Are there holes, loose bolts or Repair the air Go to step 2.
disconnection of hose on air intake system.
intake system?
2 CHECK MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Is the measured value 73.3 — Go to step 3. Replace the mani-
SENSOR. 106.6 kPa (550 — 800 mmHg, fold absolute pres-
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until 21.65 — 31.50 inHg) when the sure sensor. <Ref.
coolant temperature is higher than 75°C ignition is turned ON, and 20.0 to FU(H4SO)-32,
(167°F). — 46.7 kPa (150 — 350 mmHg, Manifold Absolute
2) For CVT models, set the select lever to “P” 5.91 — 13.78 inHg) during Pressure Sensor.>
range or “N” range, and for MT models, place idling?
the shift lever in the neutral position.
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF.
4) Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
5) Read the data of intake manifold pressure
sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or
general scan tool.
NOTE:
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
“General Scan Tool Instruction Manual”.
3 CHECK THROTTLE OPENING ANGLE. Is the measured value less than Go to step 4. Replace the elec-
Read the data of throttle position signal using 5% when throttle is fully tronic throttle con-
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool. closed? trol. <Ref. to
NOTE: FU(H4SO)-15,
• Subaru Select Monitor Throttle Body.>
tor.>
4 CHECK THROTTLE OPENING ANGLE. Is the measured value 85% or Replace the mani- Replace the elec-
more when throttle is fully fold absolute pres- tronic throttle con-
open? sure sensor. <Ref. trol. <Ref. to
to FU(H4SO)-32, FU(H4SO)-15,
Manifold Absolute Throttle Body.>
Pressure Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-96

I: DTC P0076 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B134 ECM
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
15
7
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
23
24
E2 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E69
1 2
E69
1
OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH
EN-07625
EN(H4SO)(diag)-97

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM the following item:
and oil switching solenoid valve RH. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and oil switching solenoid valve RH. ECM and oil
Connector & terminal switching solenoid
(B134) No. 7 — (E69) No. 1: valve RH connec-
(B134) No. 15 — (E69) No. 2: tor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair the short
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH CON- more? circuit to ground in
NECTOR. harness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and oil
chassis ground. switching solenoid
Connector & terminal valve RH connec-
(B134) No. 7 — Chassis ground: tor.
3 CHECK OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE Is the resistance 6 — 12 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the oil
RH. contact of ECM switching solenoid
Measure the resistance between oil switching and oil switching valve RH. <Ref. to
solenoid valve RH terminals. solenoid valve RH ME(H4SO)-89, Oil
Terminals connector. Switching Solenoid
No. 1 — No. 2: Valve.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-98

J: DTC P0077 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B134 ECM
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
15
7
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
23
24
E2 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E69
1 2
E69
1
OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH
EN-07625
EN(H4SO)(diag)-99

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the voltage less than 1 V? Go to step 2. Repair the short
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH CON- circuit to power
NECTOR. supply in harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM oil switching sole-
and oil switching solenoid valve RH. noid valve RH con-
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and nector.
chassis ground.
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
Measure the resistance of harness between In this case, repair
ECM and oil switching solenoid valve RH con- the following item:
(B134) No. 7 — (E69) No. 1: ECM and oil
(B134) No. 15 — (E69) No. 2: switching solenoid
valve RH connec-
tor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
RH. contact of ECM switching solenoid
Measure the resistance between oil switching and oil switching valve RH. <Ref. to
solenoid valve RH terminals. solenoid valve RH ME(H4SO)-89, Oil
EN(H4SO)(diag)-100

K: DTC P0082 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2)

CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B134 ECM
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
14
5
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
27
28
E2 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E70
1 2
E70
1
OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH
EN-07626
EN(H4SO)(diag)-101

Step Check Yes No

SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
and oil switching solenoid valve LH. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and harness between
oil switching solenoid valve LH. ECM and oil
Connector & terminal switching solenoid
(B134) No. 5 — (E70) No. 1: valve LH connec-
(B134) No. 14 — (E70) No. 2: tor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair the short
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH CON- more? circuit to ground in
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and oil
chassis ground. switching solenoid
Connector & terminal valve LH connec-
(B134) No. 5 — Chassis ground: tor.
LH. contact of ECM switching solenoid
Measure the resistance between oil switching and oil switching valve LH. <Ref. to
solenoid valve LH terminals. solenoid valve LH ME(H4SO)-89, Oil
EN(H4SO)(diag)-102

L: DTC P0083 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2)

CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B134 ECM
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
14
5
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
27
28
E2 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E70
1 2
E70
1
OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH
EN-07626
EN(H4SO)(diag)-103

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the voltage less than 1 V? Go to step 2. Repair the short
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH CON- circuit to power
NECTOR. supply in harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM oil switching sole-
and oil switching solenoid valve LH. noid valve LH con-
chassis ground.
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
Measure the resistance between ECM and oil In this case, repair
switching solenoid valve LH connector. the following item:
Connector & terminal • Open circuit in
(B134) No. 14 — (E70) No. 2: ECM and oil
switching solenoid
valve LH connec-
tor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
LH. contact of ECM switching solenoid
Measure the resistance between oil switching and oil switching valve LH. <Ref. to
solenoid valve LH terminals. solenoid valve LH ME(H4SO)-89, Oil
EN(H4SO)(diag)-104

M: DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-26, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT
RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
• Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the mass
priate DTC using air flow and intake
the “List of Diag- air temperature
nostic Trouble sensor. <Ref. to
Code (DTC)”. FU(H4SO)-31,
<Ref. to Mass Air Flow and
EN(H4SO)(diag)- Intake Air Temper-
75, List of Diagnos- ature Sensor.>
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-105

N: DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
3
B220
MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
2
* * : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

*
B83
C31
C10
C22
B30
C11
ECM
B: B135 C: B136
B3 B: B135 C: B136 B220

B83
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08674
EN(H4SO)(diag)-106

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the voltage less than 0.2 V? Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of air flow sensor signal using cuit has returned to
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool. a normal condition
NOTE: at this time. Repro-
• Subaru Select Monitor duce the failure,
For detailed operation procedures, refer to and then perform
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. the diagnosis
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- again.
tor.> NOTE:
• General scan tool In this case, tem-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the porary poor con-
general scan tool operation manual. tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF MASS AIR Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE and connector.
SENSOR. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connectors from the mass the following item:
air flow and intake air temperature sensor. • Open circuit in
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. harness between
4) Measure the voltage between mass air flow main relay and
and intake air temperature sensor connector mass air flow and
and engine ground. intake air tempera-
Connector & terminal ture sensor con-
(B3) No. 3 (+) — Engine ground (–): nector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit in harness
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. between ECM and
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the mass air flow
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. and intake air tem-
3) Measure the resistance of harness between perature sensor
ECM and the mass air flow and intake air tem- connector.
perature sensor connector.
(B136) No. 22 — (B3) No. 5:
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- more? circuit to ground in
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. harness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and mass air
chassis ground. flow and intake air
Connector & terminal temperature sen-
(B136) No. 22 — Chassis ground: sor connector.
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the mass
Check for poor contact of ECM and mass air mass air flow and intake air contact of ECM or air flow and intake
flow and intake air temperature sensor connec- temperature sensor connector? mass air flow and air temperature
tor. intake air tempera- sensor. <Ref. to
ture sensor con- FU(H4SO)-31,
nector. Mass Air Flow and
Intake Air Temper-
ature Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-107

O: DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
3
B220
MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
2

*
B83
C31
C10
C22
B30
C11
ECM
B: B135 C: B136
B3 B: B135 C: B136 B220

B83
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08674
EN(H4SO)(diag)-108

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the voltage 5 V or more? Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- again.
tor.> NOTE:
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit of harness
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. to power supply
2) Disconnect the connectors from the mass mass air flow and
air flow and intake air temperature sensor. intake air tempera-
3) Start the engine. ture sensor con-
4) Read the data of air flow sensor signal using nector.
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- and connector.
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. NOTE:
mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor • Open circuit in
connector and engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and mass air
(B3) No. 4 — Engine ground: flow and intake air
temperature sen-
sor connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of mass Repair the poor Replace the mass
Check for poor contact of mass air flow and air flow and intake air tempera- contact of mass air air flow and intake
intake air temperature sensor connector. ture sensor connector? flow and intake air air temperature
temperature sen- sensor. <Ref. to
sor connector. FU(H4SO)-31,
Mass Air Flow and
Intake Air Temper-
ature Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-109

P: DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-33, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE E21
SENSOR
1 2 3
2
1
3
E21
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E2
20
19
7
B21
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A29
D20
A19
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A: B134
42 43 44 45 46 47
ECM
D: B137 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07628
EN(H4SO)(diag)-110

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value less than Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. 13.3 kPa (100 mmHg, 3.94 detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of intake manifold absolute inHg)? cuit has returned to
pressure signal using Subaru Select Monitor or a normal condition
general scan tool. at this time. Repro-
NOTE: duce the failure,
• Subaru Select Monitor and then perform
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the diagnosis
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. again.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- NOTE:
tor.> In this case, tem-
• General scan tool porary poor con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tact of connector,
general scan tool operation manual. temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF MANIFOLD Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from manifold In this case, repair
absolute pressure sensor. the following item:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. • Open circuit of
4) Measure the voltage between manifold harness between
absolute pressure sensor connector and ECM and manifold
engine ground. absolute pressure
Connector & terminal sensor connector.
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- and connector.
SOR CONNECTOR. NOTE:
ECM and manifold absolute pressure sensor harness between
connector. ECM and manifold
Connector & terminal absolute pressure
(B137) No. 20 — (E21) No. 1: sensor connector.
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 5. Repair ground
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- more? short circuit of har-
SOR CONNECTOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and manifold
chassis ground. absolute pressure
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the mani-
Check for poor contact of ECM and manifold manifold absolute pressure contact of ECM or fold absolute pres-
absolute pressure sensor connector. sensor connector? manifold absolute sure sensor. <Ref.
pressure sensor to FU(H4SO)-32,
connector. Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-111

Q: DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-35, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE E21
SENSOR
1 2 3
2
1
3
E21
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E2
20
19
7
B21
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A29
D20
A19
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A: B134
42 43 44 45 46 47
ECM
D: B137 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07628
EN(H4SO)(diag)-112

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value 119.5 Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. kPa (896.5 mmHg, 35.29 inHg) detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of intake manifold absolute or more? cuit has returned to
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the measured value 119.5 Repair the short Go to step 3.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- kPa (896.5 mmHg, 35.29 inHg) circuit to power in
SOR CONNECTOR. or more? harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and manifold
2) Disconnect the connector from manifold absolute pressure
absolute pressure sensor. sensor connector.
4) Read the data of intake manifold absolute
pressure signal using Subaru Select Monitor or
general scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
manifold absolute pressure sensor connector • Open circuit of
and engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and manifold
(E21) No. 2 — Engine ground: absolute pressure
sensor connector.
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of mani- Repair the poor Replace the mani-
Check for poor contact of manifold absolute fold absolute pressure sensor contact of manifold absolute pres-
pressure sensor connector. connector? fold absolute pressure sensor. <Ref.
sure sensor to FU(H4SO)-32,
connector. Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-113

R: DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-37, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA- Is the engine coolant tempera- Replace the mass Check for DTC
TURE. ture 75°C (167°F) or higher? air flow and intake P0125. <Ref. to
1) Start the engine and warm up completely. air temperature EN(H4SO)(diag)-
2) Measure the engine coolant temperature sensor. <Ref. to 127, DTC P0125
using the Subaru Select Monitor or general FU(H4SO)-31, INSUFFICIENT
scan tool. Mass Air Flow and COOLANT TEM-
NOTE: Intake Air Temper- PERATURE FOR
• Subaru Select Monitor ature Sensor.> CLOSED LOOP
For detailed operation procedures, refer to FUEL CONTROL,
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. Diagnostic Proce-
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- dure with Diagnos-
tor.> tic Trouble Code
• General scan tool (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-114

S: DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW

1 CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
3
B220
MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
2

*
B83
C31
C10
C22
B30
C11
ECM
B: B135 C: B136
B3 B: B135 C: B136 B220

B83
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08674
EN(H4SO)(diag)-115

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the intake air temperature Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. 120°C (248°F) or more? detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of intake air temperature sen- cuit has returned to
sor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or gen- a normal condition
eral scan tool. at this time. Repro-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the mass Repair the short
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- more? air flow and intake circuit to ground in
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. air temperature harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sensor. <Ref. to ECM and mass air
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and FU(H4SO)-31, flow and intake air
the mass air flow and intake air temperature Mass Air Flow and temperature sen-
sensor. Intake Air Temper- sor connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and ature Sensor.>
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-116

T: DTC P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

1 CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
3
B220
MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
2

*
B83
C31
C10
C22
B30
C11
ECM
B: B135 C: B136
B3 B: B135 C: B136 B220

B83
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08674
EN(H4SO)(diag)-117

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. less than –40°C (–40°F)? detected, the cir-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Go to step 3.
Check for poor contact of ECM and mass air mass air flow and intake air contact of ECM or
flow and intake air temperature sensor connec- temperature sensor connector? mass air flow and
tor. intake air tempera-
ture sensor con-
nector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and the following item:
the mass air flow and intake air temperature • Open circuit in
sensor. harness between
3) Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and mass air
ECM and the mass air flow and intake air tem- flow and intake air
perature sensor connector. temperature sen-
Connector & terminal sor connector
(B136) No. 31 — (B3) No. 1: • Poor contact of
(B135) No. 30 — (B3) No. 2: joint connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the mass
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit of harness air flow and intake
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. to power supply air temperature
1) Connect all connectors. between ECM and sensor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. mass air flow and FU(H4SO)-31,
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and intake air tempera- Mass Air Flow and
chassis ground. ture sensor con- Intake Air Temper-
Connector & terminal nector. ature Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-118

U: DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-43, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2
E8
E2
19
8
B21
D22
A29
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
B21
E8 A: B134 D: B137 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 26 27 28 29 30 31 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-08632
EN(H4SO)(diag)-119

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the engine coolant tempera- Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. ture 150°C (302°F) or higher? detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of engine coolant tempera- cuit has returned to
ture sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor a normal condition
or general scan tool. at this time. Repro-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the Repair short cir-
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR more? engine coolant cuit in harness to
CONNECTOR. temperature sen- ground between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sor. <Ref. to ECM and engine
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and FU(H4SO)-23, coolant tempera-
engine coolant temperature sensor. Engine Coolant ture sensor con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and Temperature Sen- nector.
chassis ground. sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-120

V: DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-45, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2
E8
E2
19
8
B21
D22
A29
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
B21
E8 A: B134 D: B137 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 26 27 28 29 30 31 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-08632
EN(H4SO)(diag)-121

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. ture less than –40°C (–40°F)? detected, the cir-
ness may be the
cause.
Check for poor contact of ECM and engine cool- engine coolant temperature contact of ECM or
ant temperature sensor connector. sensor connector? engine coolant
temperature sen-
sor connector.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR and connector.
CONNECTOR. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
engine coolant temperature sensor. • Open circuit in
ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor ECM and engine
connector. coolant tempera-
(B137) No. 22 — (E8) No. 2: nector
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR circuit to power in engine coolant
CONNECTOR. harness between temperature sen-
1) Connect all connectors. ECM and engine sor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. coolant tempera- FU(H4SO)-23,
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and ture sensor con- Engine Coolant
chassis ground. nector. Temperature Sen-
Connector & terminal sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-122

W: DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT

LOW
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-47, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
ELECTRONIC M/B No. 13
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
EN(H4SO)(diag)-123

Step Check Yes No

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? circuit to ground in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and tronic throttle con-
electronic throttle control. trol connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and
chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 — (B136) No. 4:
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the elec- Repair the short
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? tronic throttle con- circuit to ground in
2) Measure the resistance between electronic trol. <Ref. to harness between
throttle control connector and engine ground. FU(H4SO)-15, ECM and elec-
Connector & terminal Throttle Body.> tronic throttle con-
(E57) No. 6 — Engine ground: trol connector.
Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-124

X: DTC P0123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT

HIGH
SOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
EN(H4SO)(diag)-125

Step Check Yes No

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
electronic throttle control. • Open circuit in
ECM and electronic throttle control connector. ECM and electron-
Connector & terminal ic throttle control
coupling connector
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Connect the connector to ECM. In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance between electronic the following item:
throttle control connector and engine ground. • Open circuit of
(E57) No. 3 — Engine ground: ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- circuit to power in
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ECM and elec-
2) Measure the voltage between electronic tronic throttle con-
throttle control connector and engine ground. trol connector.
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair the poor Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? contact of elec- circuit to power in
NECTOR. tronic throttle con- harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol connector. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. Replace the electronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- tronic throttle control connector.
nectors. trol if defective.
Connector & terminal <Ref. to
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 18: FU(H4SO)-15,
Throttle Body.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-126

Y: DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP

FUEL CONTROL
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-51, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERA-
TURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine does not return to idle.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK TIRE SIZE. Is the tire size as specified and Go to step 2. Replace the tire.
the same size as three other
wheels?
2 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT. Is the engine coolant normal? Go to step 3. Fill or replace the
Check the following items: engine coolant.
• Amount of engine coolant <Ref. to
• Engine coolant freeze CO(H4SO)-13,
• Contamination of engine coolant REPLACEMENT,
Engine Coolant.>
3 CHECK THERMOSTAT. Does the thermostat remain Replace the ther- Replace the
opened? mostat. <Ref. to engine coolant
CO(H4SO)-17, temperature sen-
Thermostat.> sor. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-23,
Engine Coolant
Temperature Sen-
sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-127

Z: DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR STA-

BLE OPERATION
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-53, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Is the resistance of engine cool- Repair the poor Replace the
SENSOR. ant temperature sensor differ- contact of ECM engine coolant
1) Disconnect the connectors from the engine ent between when engine connector. temperature sen-
coolant temperature sensor. coolant is cold and after sor. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between engine warmed up? FU(H4SO)-23,
coolant temperature sensor terminals when the Engine Coolant
engine coolant is cold and after warmed up. Temperature Sen-
Terminals sor.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-128

AA:DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEMPERATURE)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-55, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE
COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEMPERATURE), Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Thermostat remains open.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT. Is the engine coolant amount Go to step 2. Refill the engine
normal? coolant. <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-13,
Engine Coolant.>
2 CHECK RADIATOR FAN. Does the radiator fan continu- Repair radiator fan Replace the ther-
1) Start the engine. ously rotate for 3 minutes or circuit. <Ref. to mostat. <Ref. to
2) Check the radiator fan operation. more during idling? CO(H4SO)-23, CO(H4SO)-17,
Radiator Main Fan Thermostat.>
and Fan Motor.>
and <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-24,
Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-129

AB:DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-57, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 2.
CONNECTOR AND COUPLING CONNEC- tor? remove any water
TOR. inside.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-130

Step Check Yes No

FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- more? short circuit of har-
TOR. ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and front oxy-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and gen (A/F) sensor
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. connector.
chassis ground.
3 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of front Repair the poor Replace the front
Check for poor contact of the front oxygen (A/F) oxygen (A/F) sensor connec- contact of front oxygen (A/F) sen-
sensor connector. tor? oxygen (A/F) sensor. <Ref. to
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-131

AC:DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-59, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-132

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 8 V or more? Repair the short Replace the front
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in oxygen (A/F) sen-
TOR. the harness sor. <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and FU(H4SO)-37,
2) Disconnect the connectors from front oxy- front oxygen (A/F) Front Oxygen (A/F)
gen (A/F) sensor. sensor connector. Sensor.>
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-133

AD:DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-61, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RE-
SPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair the exhaust Replace the front
NOTE: system? system. oxygen (A/F) sen-
Check the following items. sor. <Ref. to
• Loose installation of front portion of exhaust FU(H4SO)-37,
pipe onto cylinder heads Front Oxygen (A/F)
• Loose connection between front exhaust pipe Sensor.>
and front catalytic converter
• Damage of exhaust pipe resulting in a hole
EN(H4SO)(diag)-134

AE:DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SEN-

SOR 1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-64, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
EN(H4SO)(diag)-135

Step Check Yes No

TOR. NOTE:
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. • Open circuit in
ECM and front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. ECM and front oxy-
Connector & terminal gen (A/F) sensor
coupling connector
sensor connector. FU(H4SO)-37,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-136

AF:DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-66, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
EN(H4SO)(diag)-137

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA. Is the voltage 490 mV or more? Go to step 5. Go to step 2.
1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant
temperature is higher than 75°C (167°F), and
keep the engine speed at 3,000 rpm. (2 minutes
maximum)
2) Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
2 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNEC- Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 3.
TOR AND COUPLING CONNECTOR. tor? remove any water
inside.
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and In this case, repair
rear oxygen sensor. the following item:
ECM and rear oxygen sensor connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and rear oxy-
(B136) No. 20 — (E25) No. 3: gen sensor con-
(B134) No. 29 — (E25) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 0.2 — 0.5 V? Replace the rear Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. oxygen sensor. and connector.
1) Connect the connector to ECM. <Ref. to NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. FU(H4SO)-39, In this case, repair
3) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen Rear Oxygen Sen- the following item:
sensor connector and chassis ground. sor.> • Open circuit in
(E25) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): ECM and rear oxy-
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
5 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair or replace Replace the rear
Check exhaust system parts. system? faulty parts. oxygen sensor.
NOTE: <Ref. to
Check the following items. FU(H4SO)-39,
• Looseness and improper fitting of exhaust Rear Oxygen Sen-
system parts sor.>
• Damage (crack, hole etc.) of parts
• Loose part and improper installation between
front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear oxygen sen-
sor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-138

AG:DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-69, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
EN(H4SO)(diag)-139

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA. Is the voltage 250 mV or less? Go to step 5. Go to step 2.
rapidly reduce the engine speed from 3,000
rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
inside.
(B134) No. 29 — (E25) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
NOTE: <Ref. to
system parts sor.>
sor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-140

AH:DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-70, DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RE-
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
EN(H4SO)(diag)-141

Step Check Yes No

nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen ness between
sensor connector and chassis ground. ECM and rear oxy-
Connector & terminal gen sensor con-
(E25) No. 3 — Chassis ground: nector.
3 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the rear Even if DTC is
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen oxygen sensor. detected, the cir-
sensor terminals. <Ref. to cuit has returned to
Terminals FU(H4SO)-39, a normal condition
No. 3 — No. 4 Rear Oxygen Sen- at this time. Repro-
sor.> duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-142

AI: DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK1

SENSOR2)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-78, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
DETECTED (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
EN(H4SO)(diag)-143

Step Check Yes No

maximum)
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
inside.
(B134) No. 29 — (E25) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-144

Step Check Yes No

gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
NOTE: <Ref. to
system parts sor.>
sor
AJ:DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT (BANK1 SENSOR2)

Refer to DTC P0037 for diagnostic procedure. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-92, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
AK:DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)
Refer to DTC P0172 for diagnostic procedure. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-146, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO
RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-145

AL:DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-83, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Are there holes or loose bolts Repair the exhaust Go to step 2.
on exhaust system? system.
intake system?
3 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE. Is the measured value 340 — Go to step 4. Repair the follow-
WARNING: 400 kPa (3.5 — 4.1 kg/cm2, 49 ing item.
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the — 58 psi)? Fuel pressure is
working area. too high:
CAUTION: • Clogged fuel line
Be careful not to spill fuel. or bent hose
Measure the fuel pressure. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- Fuel pressure is
28, INSPECTION, Fuel Pressure.> too low:
CAUTION: • Improper fuel
Release fuel pressure before removing the pump discharge
fuel pressure gauge. • Clogged fuel line
4 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Is the engine coolant tempera- Go to step 5. Replace the
SENSOR. ture 75°C (167°F) or higher? engine coolant
1) Start the engine and warm up completely. temperature sen-
2) Read the data of engine coolant tempera- sor. <Ref. to
ture sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor FU(H4SO)-23,
or general scan tool. Engine Coolant
NOTE: Temperature Sen-
• Subaru Select Monitor sor.>
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-146

Step Check Yes No

5 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Is the measured value 2.0 — Go to step 6. Replace the mass
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. 5.0 g/s (0.26 — 0.66 lb/m)? air flow and intake
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until air temperature
coolant temperature is higher than 75°C sensor. <Ref. to
(167°F). FU(H4SO)-31,
2) For CVT models, set the select lever to “P” Mass Air Flow and
range or “N” range, and for MT models, place Intake Air Temper-
the shift lever in the neutral position. ature Sensor.>
5) Read the data of the mass air flow and
intake air temperature sensor signal using Sub-
aru Select Monitor or general scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
6 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Subtract ambient temperature Repair the poor Check the mass air
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. from intake air temperature. Is contact of ECM flow and intake air
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until the obtained value –10 — 50°C connector. temperature sen-
coolant temperature is higher than 70°C (–18 — 90°F)? sor. <Ref. to
(158°F). FU(H4SO)-31,
5) Open the front hood.
6) Measure the ambient temperature.
NOTE:
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-147

AM:DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-85, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the fuel
priate DTC using temperature sen-
the “List of Diag- sor. <Ref. to
nostic Trouble EC(H4SO)-13,
Code (DTC)”. Fuel Temperature
<Ref. to Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
75, List of Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-148

AN:DTC P0182 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2
3
R58
R57
11
7
R15
R333
3
8
i155
i3
11
5
B38
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

*
*
*
B83
C23
B30
B: B135
ECM
C: B136
R58 R57 B38 B: B135 C: B136

B83
i155 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3 4 1 2 3 7 8 9 10 11 12
4 5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4 5 6 3 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11
EN-08675
EN(H4SO)(diag)-149

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the temperature 120°C Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. (248°F) or higher? detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of fuel temperature sensor cuit has returned to
signal using Subaru Select Monitor. a normal condition
For detailed operation procedures, refer to duce the failure,
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. and then perform
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- the diagnosis
tor.> again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the fuel Repair the ground
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- more? temperature sen- short circuit of har-
TOR. sor. <Ref. to ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. EC(H4SO)-13, ECM and fuel
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and Fuel Temperature pump.
fuel temperature sensor. Sensor.>
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-150

AO:DTC P0183 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2
3
R58
R57
11
7
R15
R333
3
8
i155
i3
11
5
B38

*
*
*
B83
C23
B30
B: B135
ECM
C: B136
R58 R57 B38 B: B135 C: B136

B83
i155 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3 4 1 2 3 7 8 9 10 11 12
4 5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4 5 6 3 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11
EN-08675
EN(H4SO)(diag)-151

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the temperature less than – Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. 40°C (–40°F)? detected, the cir-
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- the diagnosis
tor.> again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the Repair any poor Go to step 3.
Repair any poor contact between the ECM and ECM or fuel temperature sen- contact between
fuel temperature sensor connectors. sor connectors? the ECM and fuel
temperature sen-
sor connectors.
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
fuel temperature sensor. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of the harness harness between
between the ECM and fuel temperature sensor ECM and fuel tem-
connector. perature sensor
(B136) No. 23 — (R58) No. 2: • Poor contact of
(B135) No. 30 — (R58) No. 3: coupling connector
• Poor contact of
joint connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the fuel
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in temperature sen-
1) Connect all connectors. between the ECM EC(H4SO)-13,
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. and fuel tempera- Fuel Temperature
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and ture sensor con- Sensor.>
chassis ground. nector.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-152

AP:DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-92, DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the oil
nostic Trouble FU(H4SO)-36, Oil
Code (DTC)”. Temperature Sen-
<Ref. to sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-153

AQ:DTC P0197 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW

LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E75
1 2
OIL
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2
E75
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E2
19
6
D: B137
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D21
A29
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A: B134 42 43 44 45 46 47
ECM 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
D: B137
EN-07787
EN(H4SO)(diag)-154

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the oil temperature 215°C Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. (419°F) or more? detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of the oil temperature sensor cuit has returned to
signal using the Subaru Select Monitor or gen- a normal condition
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the oil Repair the short
TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. more? temperature sen- circuit to ground in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sor. <Ref. to harness between
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and oil FU(H4SO)-36, Oil ECM and oil tem-
temperature sensor. Temperature Sen- perature sensor
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and sor.> connector.
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-155

AR:DTC P0198 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR HIGH

HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E75
1 2
OIL
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2
E75
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E2
19
6
D: B137
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D21
A29
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A: B134 42 43 44 45 46 47
ECM 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
D: B137
EN-07787
EN(H4SO)(diag)-156

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the oil temperature less than Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. –40°C (–40°F)? detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of the oil temperature sensor cuit has returned to
ness may be the
cause.
Check for poor contact of ECM and oil tempera- oil temperature sensor connec- contact of ECM or
ture sensor connector. tor? the oil temperature
sensor connector.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and oil In this case, repair
temperature sensor. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of the harness • Open circuit in
between ECM and oil temperature sensor con- harness between
nector. ECM and oil tem-
Connector & terminal perature sensor
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the oil
TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. circuit to power temperature sen-
1) Connect all connectors. supply in harness sor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. between ECM and FU(H4SO)-36, Oil
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and oil temperature Temperature Sen-
chassis ground. sensor connector. sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-157

AS:DTC P0222 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT

LOW
SOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
EN(H4SO)(diag)-158

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
throttle control connector and engine ground. FU(H4SO)-15, ECM and elec-
Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-159

AT:DTC P0223 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT

HIGH
SOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
EN(H4SO)(diag)-160

Step Check Yes No

NECTOR. NOTE:
coupling connector
NECTOR. NOTE:
ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 28: FU(H4SO)-15,
Throttle Body.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-161

AU:DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE DETECTED

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0304. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-163, DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4
MISFIRE DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
AV:DTC P0302 CYLINDER 2 MISFIRE DETECTED
NOTE:
AW:DTC P0303 CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE DETECTED
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-162

AX:DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED

• Immediately at fault recognition (A misfire which could damage catalyst occurs.)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-106, DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED, Di-
agnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Improper idling
• Rough driving
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
E
B220
B134 ECM
10
11
12
13
B21
48
42
43
44
45
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
2

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E5 E16 B21 B134 B220
E6 E17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 2 6 10 14
1 2 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07705
EN(H4SO)(diag)-163

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground on faulty cylinders.
#1 (B134) No. 10 (+) — Chassis ground (–):
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. harness between
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector ECM and fuel
on faulty cylinders. injector connector.
3) Measure the resistance between fuel injec-
tor connector and engine ground on faulty cylin-
ders.
#1 (E5) No. 1 — Engine ground:
Measure the resistance of harness between NOTE:
ECM and fuel injector connector on faulty cylin- In this case, repair
ders. the following item:
#1 (B134) No. 10 — (E5) No. 1: harness between
coupling connector
4 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance 5 — 20 Ω? Go to step 5. Replace the faulty
Measure the resistance between fuel injector fuel injector. <Ref.
terminals on faulty cylinder. to FU(H4SO)-34,
No. 1 — No. 2:
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY LINE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. contact of all con- and connector.
2) Measure the voltage between fuel injector nectors in fuel NOTE:
and engine ground on faulty cylinders. injector circuit. In this case, repair
#1 (E5) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Open circuit in
#2 (E16) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): harness between
#3 (E6) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): the main relay con-
#4 (E17) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): nector and fuel in-
jector connector on
faulty cylinders
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-164

Step Check Yes No

FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. circuit to power in
7 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance 5 — 20 Ω? Replace the faulty Go to step 8.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. fuel injector. <Ref.
2) Measure the resistance between fuel injec- to FU(H4SO)-34,
tor terminals on faulty cylinder. Fuel Injector.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
8 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the camshaft position sensor Tighten the cam- Go to step 9.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR/CRANK- or crankshaft position sensor shaft position sen-
SHAFT POSITION SENSOR. loosely installed? sor or crankshaft
position sensor.
9 CHECK CRANK SPROCKET. Is the crank sprocket rusted or Replace the crank Go to step 10.
Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to does it have broken teeth? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> ME(H4SO)-53,
Crank Sprocket.>
10 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the timing belt dislocated Repair the installa- Go to step 11.
TIMING BELT. from its proper position? tion condition of
Turn the crankshaft using ST, and align the timing belt. <Ref. to
alignment mark on crank sprocket with align- ME(H4SO)-47,
ment mark on cylinder block. Timing Belt.>
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT
SOCKET
11 CHECK FUEL LEVEL. Is the fuel meter indication Go to step 12. Refill the fuel so
higher than the “Lower” level? that the fuel meter
indication is higher
than the “Lower”
level, and proceed
to the next step. Go
to step 12.
12 CHECK STATUS OF MALFUNCTION INDI- Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 14. Go to step 13.
CATOR LIGHT. light illuminate or blink?
1) Clear the memory using the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool.
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory
Mode.>
2) Start the engine, and drive the vehicle 10
minutes or more.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-165

Step Check Yes No

13 CHECK CAUSE OF MISFIRE. Was the cause of misfire identi- Finish diagnostics Repair the poor
fied when the engine is run- operation, if the contact of connec-
ning? engine has no tor.
abnormality. NOTE:
In this case, repair
the following item:
• Poor contact of
ignition coil con-
nector
• Poor contact of
fuel injector con-
nector on faulty
cylinders
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
14 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Is there any fault in air intake Repair the air Go to step 15.
system? intake system.
NOTE:
Check the follow-
ing items.
• Are there air
leaks or air suction
caused by loose or
dislocated nuts
and bolts?
• Are there cracks
or any disconnec-
tion of hoses?
15 CHECK MISFIRE SYMPTOM. Does the Subaru Select Moni- Go to step 20. Go to step 16.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor or general scan tool indicate
2) Check for DTC. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)- only one DTC?
40, Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
16 CHECK DTC. Is DTC P0301 and P0302 dis- Go to step 21. Go to step 17.
played on the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool?
20 ONLY ONE CYLINDER. Is there any fault in the cylin- Repair or replace Go to DTC P0171.
der? faulty parts. <Ref. to
NOTE: EN(H4SO)(diag)-
Check the follow- 145, DTC P0171
ing items. SYSTEM TOO
• Spark plug LEAN (BANK 1),
• Spark plug cord Diagnostic Proce-
• Fuel injector dure with Diagnos-
• Compression ra- tic Trouble Code
tio (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-166

Step Check Yes No

21 GROUP OF #1 AND #2 CYLINDERS. Are there any faults in #1 and Repair or replace Go to DTC P0171.
#2 cylinders? faulty parts. <Ref. to
• Check the fol- 145, DTC P0171
lowing items. SYSTEM TOO
• Fuel injector Diagnostic Proce-
• Ignition coil dure with Diagnos-
• Compression tic Trouble Code
ratio (DTC).>
• If any fault are
not found, check
the “IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM” of #1 and #2
cylinders side.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
69, IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM, Diagnostics
for Engine Starting
Failure.>
• Check the fol- 145, DTC P0171
ratio (DTC).>
• If any fault are
not found, check
the “IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM” of #3 and #4
cylinders side.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
69, IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM, Diagnostics
for Engine Starting
Failure.>
• Compression ra- dure with Diagnos-
tio tic Trouble Code
• Skipping timing (DTC).>
belt teeth
EN(H4SO)(diag)-167

Step Check Yes No

belt teeth
25 CYLINDER AT RANDOM. Is the engine idle rough? Go to DTC P0171. Repair or replace
<Ref. to faulty parts.
EN(H4SO)(diag)- NOTE:
145, DTC P0171 Check the follow-
SYSTEM TOO ing items.
LEAN (BANK 1), • Spark plug
Diagnostic Proce- • Fuel injector
dure with Diagnos- • Compression ra-
tic Trouble Code tio
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-168

AY:DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SEN-

SOR)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-107, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW
(BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Knocking occurs.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
KNOCK SENSOR
E14
1
E14
1 2
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E2
16
19
B21
E
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A29
D8
D2
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A: B134
42 43 44 45 46 47
ECM
D: B137 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07632
EN(H4SO)(diag)-169

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 600 kΩ or Go to step 2. Repair the poor
KNOCK SENSOR CONNECTOR. more? contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. connector.
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con-
nectors.
(B137) No. 2 — (B134) No. 29:
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR. Is the resistance 600 kΩ or Replace the knock Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connector from the knock more? sensor. <Ref. to and connector.
sensor. FU(H4SO)-28, NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance between knock Knock Sensor.> In this case, repair
sensor terminals. the following item:
Terminals • Open circuit in
ECM and knock
sensor connector
• Poor contact of
knock sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-170

AZ:DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SEN-

SOR)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-109, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
KNOCK SENSOR
E14
1
E14
1 2
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E2
16
19
B21
E
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A29
D8
D2
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A: B134
42 43 44 45 46 47
ECM
D: B137 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07632
EN(H4SO)(diag)-171

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 500 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
KNOCK SENSOR CONNECTOR. kΩ?
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM.
nectors.
(B137) No. 2 — (B134) No. 29:
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 500 Replace the knock Repair the short
1) Disconnect the connector from the knock kΩ? sensor. <Ref. to circuit to ground in
sensor. FU(H4SO)-28, harness between
2) Measure the resistance between knock Knock Sensor.> ECM and knock
sensor terminals. sensor connector.
Terminals NOTE:
No. 1 — No. 2: The harness be-
tween both con-
nectors are
shielded. Remove
the shield and re-
pair the short cir-
cuit of harness.
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 2 V or more? Even if DTC is Repair the poor
1) Connect the connector to ECM. detected, the cir- contact of ECM
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. cuit has returned to connector.
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and a normal condition
chassis ground. at this time. Repro-
Connector & terminal duce the failure,
(B137) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–): and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-172

BA:DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-111, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Failure of engine to start
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
CRANKSHAFT
POSITION
SENSOR E10
1 2
2
1
E10
B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
15
14
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
E
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
25
17
31
B137 ECM
EN-07639
EN(H4SO)(diag)-173

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the crankshaft position sen- Go to step 2. Tighten the crank-
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. sor installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
securely? sor installation bolt
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-24,
Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>
2 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is the resistance between 1 and Go to step 3. Replace the crank-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 4 kΩ? shaft position sen-
2) Remove the crankshaft position sensor. sor. <Ref. to
3) Measure the resistance between terminals FU(H4SO)-24,
of crankshaft position sensor connector. Crankshaft Posi-
Terminals tion Sensor.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the harness
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CON- contact of ECM and connector.
NECTOR. and crankshaft NOTE:
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. position sensor In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance of harness between connector. the following item:
ECM and crankshaft position sensor connector. • Open circuit in
(B137) No. 17 — (E10) No. 1: ECM and crank-
(B137) No. 25 — (E10) No. 2: shaft position sen-
sor connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-174

BB:DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-113, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CONDITION OF CRANKSHAFT PO- Is the crankshaft position sen- Go to step 2. Tighten the crank-
SITION SENSOR. sor installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
Turn the ignition switch to OFF. securely? sor installation bolt
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-24,
Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>
2 CHECK CRANK SPROCKET. Are crank sprocket teeth Replace the crank Go to step 3.
Remove the timing belt cover. cracked or damaged? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-53,
Crank Sprocket.>
3 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the timing belt dislocated Repair the installa- Replace the crank-
TIMING BELT. from its proper position? tion condition of shaft position sen-
Turn the crankshaft, and align alignment mark timing belt. <Ref. to sor. <Ref. to
on crank sprocket with alignment mark on cylin- ME(H4SO)-47, FU(H4SO)-24,
der block. Timing Belt.> Crankshaft Posi-
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT tion Sensor.>
SOCKET
EN(H4SO)(diag)-175

BC:DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SIN-

GLE SENSOR)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-115, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
CAMSHAFT
POSITION
E15
SENSOR
1 2
2
1
E15
B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
13
12
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
E
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
30
24
31
B137 ECM
EN-07640
EN(H4SO)(diag)-176

Step Check Yes No

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
camshaft position sensor. • Open circuit in
ECM and camshaft position sensor connector. ECM and camshaft
Connector & terminal position sensor
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 3. Repair short cir-
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNEC- more? cuit to ground in
TOR. harness between
Measure the resistance between camshaft ECM and camshaft
position sensor connector and engine ground. position sensor
(E15) No. 1 — Engine ground: NOTE:
The harness be-
tween both con-
nectors are
shielded. Remove
the shield and re-
pair the ground
short circuit of the
harness circuit.
3 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the camshaft position sensor Go to step 4. Tighten the cam-
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-26,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
4 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is the resistance between 1 and Repair the poor Replace the cam-
1) Remove the camshaft position sensor. 4 kΩ? contact of ECM or shaft position sen-
2) Measure the resistance between terminals camshaft position sor. <Ref. to
of camshaft position sensor connector. sensor connector. FU(H4SO)-26,
Terminals Camshaft Position
No. 1 — No. 2: Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-177

BD:DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-117, DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) De-
tecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
CAMSHAFT
POSITION
E15
SENSOR
1 2
2
1
E15
B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
13
12
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
E
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
30
24
31
B137 ECM
EN-07640
EN(H4SO)(diag)-178

Step Check Yes No

TOR. NOTE:
camshaft position sensor. • Open circuit in
ECM and camshaft position sensor connector. ECM and camshaft
Connector & terminal position sensor
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
(E15) No. 1 — Engine ground: NOTE:
The harness be-
tween both con-
nectors are
shielded. Remove
the shield and re-
pair the ground
short circuit of the
harness circuit.
3 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the camshaft position sensor Go to step 4. Tighten the cam-
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-26,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
4 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is the resistance between 1 and Go to step 5. Replace the cam-
1) Remove the camshaft position sensor. 4 kΩ? shaft position sen-
2) Measure the resistance between terminals sor. <Ref. to
of camshaft position sensor connector. FU(H4SO)-26,
Terminals Camshaft Position
No. 1 — No. 2: Sensor.>
5 CHECK CAM SPROCKET. Are cam sprocket teeth cracked Replace the cam Go to step 6.
Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to or damaged? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-46, Timing Belt Cover.> ME(H4SO)-52,
Cam Sprocket.>
6 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the timing belt dislocated Repair the installa- Replace the cam-
Turn the crankshaft using the ST, and align the timing belt. <Ref. to sor. <Ref. to
alignment mark on the cam sprocket with the ME(H4SO)-47, FU(H4SO)-26,
alignment mark on the timing belt cover LH. Timing Belt.> Camshaft Position
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT Sensor.>
SOCKET
EN(H4SO)(diag)-179

BE:DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION FLOW

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-119, DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION
FLOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Movement performance problem when engine is low speed.
• Improper idling
• Movement performance problem
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value 53.3 kPa Make sure that the Go to step 2.
1) Start the engine. (400 mmHg, 15.75 inHg) or EGR valve, mani-
2) Read data of intake manifold absolute pres- more? fold absolute pres-
sure signal using Subaru Select Monitor or gen- sure sensor and
eral scan tool. throttle body are
NOTE: installed securely.
tor.>
2 CHECK EGR VALVE. Are there any holes, clogged Repair the EGR Replace the EGR
Remove the EGR valve. lines or foreign matters in the system. valve. <Ref. to
EGR system? FU(H4SO)-33,
EGR Valve.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-180

BF:DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK

1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-122, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BE-
LOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Idle mixture is out of specifications.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
EN(H4SO)(diag)-181

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair or replace Go to step 2.
Check for gas leaks or air suction caused by system? the exhaust sys-
loose or dislocated nuts and bolts, and open tem. <Ref. to
hole at exhaust pipes. EX(H4SO)-2, Gen-
NOTE: eral Description.>
Check the following positions.
• Between cylinder head and front exhaust
pipe
• Between front exhaust pipe and front catalytic
converter
• Between front catalytic converter and rear
catalytic converter
• Loose or improperly attached front oxygen
(A/F) sensor or rear oxygen sensor
2 CHECK WAVEFORM DATA ON THE SUBA- Is a normal waveform dis- Even if DTC is Go to step 3.
RU SELECT MONITOR (WHILE DRIVING). played? detected, the cir-
1) Drive at a constant speed between 80 — cuit has returned to
112 km/h (50 — 70 MPH). a normal condition
2) After 5 minutes have elapsed in the condi- at this time. Repro-
tion of step 1), use the Subaru Select Monitor duce the failure,
while still driving to read the waveform data. and then perform
• At normal condition the diagnosis
again.
1
NOTE:
REAR OXYGEN In this case, tem-
SENSOR VOLTAGE porary poor con-
(V)
tact of connector,
0 temporary open or
1.5
A/F SENSOR
ness may be the
OUTPUT LAMBDA 1 cause.
0.5
10 sec/div
EN-06666
• At abnormal condition (numerous inversion)
REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)
0
1.5
A/F SENSOR
OUTPUT LAMBDA 1
0.5
10 sec/div
EN-06667
EN(H4SO)(diag)-182

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK WAVEFORM DATA ON THE SUBA- Is a normal waveform dis- Go to step 4. • The waveform is
RU SELECT MONITOR (WHILE IDLING). played? displayed at abnor-
1) Run the engine at idle. mal condition 1: Go
2) In the condition of step 1), use the Subaru to step 4.
Select Monitor to read the waveform data. • The waveform is
• At normal condition displayed at abnor-
mal condition 2: Go
1
to step 5.
REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)
0
10 sec/div
EN-06668
• At abnormal condition 1 (numerous inversion)
REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)
0
10 sec/div
EN-06669
• At abnormal condition 2 (noise input)
REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)
0
10 sec/div
EN-06670
4 CHECK CATALYTIC CONVERTER. Is the catalytic converter dam- Replace the cata- Go to step 5.
aged? lytic converter.
<Ref. to
EC(H4SO)-3,
Front Catalytic
Converter.>
inside.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-183

Step Check Yes No

(B134) No. 29 — (E25) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
7 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 0.2 — 0.5 V? Go to step 8. Repair the harness
1) Connect the connector to ECM. NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Repair the follow-
3) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen ing locations.
sensor connector and chassis ground. • Open circuit in
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
8 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SHIELD. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the rear Repair the open
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. oxygen sensor. circuit of rear oxy-
2) Expose the rear oxygen sensor connector <Ref. to gen sensor har-
body side harness sensor shield. FU(H4SO)-39, ness.
3) Measure the resistance between sensor Rear Oxygen Sen-
shield and chassis ground. sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-184

BG:DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT-

ED (SMALL LEAK)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-125, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Fuel odor
• There is a hole of more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in) dia. in evaporation system or fuel tank.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. Is the fuel filler cap tightened Go to step 2. Tighten fuel filler
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. securely? cap securely.
2) Check the fuel filler cap.
NOTE:
The DTC is stored in memory if fuel filler cap is
or was loose or if the cap chain has caught while
tightening.
2 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. Is the fuel filler cap genuine? Go to step 3. Replace with a
genuine fuel filler
cap.
3 CHECK FUEL FILLER PIPE GASKET. Is there any damage to the seal Repair or replace Go to step 4.
between fuel filler cap and fuel the fuel filler cap
filler pipe? and fuel filler pipe.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-57,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
4 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Does the drain valve operate? Go to step 5. Replace the drain
1) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse. valve. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. EC(H4SO)-18,
3) Operate the drain valve using the Subaru Drain Valve.>
Select Monitor.
NOTE:
The drain valve can be operated using Subaru
Select Monitor. For detailed procedures, refer
to “SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK MODE”.
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-52, System Opera-
tion Check Mode.>
5 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Does the purge control sole- Go to step 6. Replace the purge
VALVE. noid valve operate? control solenoid
Operate the purge control solenoid valve using valve. <Ref. to
the Subaru Select Monitor. EC(H4SO)-9,
NOTE: Purge Control
Purge control solenoid valve operation can be Solenoid Valve.>
executed using Subaru Select Monitor. For de-
tailed procedures, refer to “SYSTEM OPERA-
TION CHECK MODE”. <Ref. to
Mode.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-185

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- Is there any hole of more than Repair or replace Go to step 7.
TROL SYSTEM LINE. 1.0 mm (0.04 in) dia. on evapo- the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ration line? line. <Ref. to
2) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is FU(H4SO)-68,
removed. Fuel Delivery and
Evaporation
Lines.>
7 CHECK CANISTER. Is the canister damaged or is Repair or replace Go to step 8.
there a hole of more than 1.0 the canister. <Ref.
mm (0.04 in) dia. in it? to EC(H4SO)-5,
Canister.>
8 CHECK FUEL TANK. Is the fuel tank damaged or is Repair or replace Go to step 9.
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-50, there any hole of more than 1.0 the fuel tank. <Ref.
Fuel Tank.> mm (0.04 in) dia. in it? to FU(H4SO)-50,
Fuel Tank.>
9 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU- Is there any hole of more than Repair or replace Repair the poor
BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- 1.0 mm (0.04 in) dia., crack, the hoses or pipes. contact of ECM
TROL SYSTEM. clogging, or disconnection, connector.
bend, misconnection of hoses
or pipes in evaporative emis-
sion control system?
EN(H4SO)(diag)-186

BH:DTC P0447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT OPEN
SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B: B135 D: B137 ECM
B220 E
D6
B4
B38 B21
15
48
41
1
i3 E2
i54
12
11
R99
R144 E4
1
DRAIN VALVE PURGE CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE
B220
E4 R144
B21
17
1 5 9 13
1 2 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B38 D: B137 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
B: B135
42 43 44 45 46 47
i54
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
11 12 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08633
EN(H4SO)(diag)-187

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
2 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Even if DTC is
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM detected, the cir-
connector. cuit has returned to
a normal condition
at this time. Repro-
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary open or
ness or temporary
poor contact of
connector may be
the cause.
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO DRAIN VALVE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the power
Measure the voltage between drain valve and supply circuit.
chassis ground.
DRAIN VALVE CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM ECM and drain
and drain valve. valve connector.
3) Measure the resistance between the drain
valve connector and chassis ground.
(R144) No. 2 — Chassis ground:
DRAIN VALVE CONNECTOR. and connector.
ECM and drain valve connector. In this case, repair
(B135) No. 4 — (R144) No. 2: • Open circuit of
harness between
ECM and drain
valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
6 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Is the resistance 10 — 100 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the drain
Measure the resistance between drain valve contact of drain valve. <Ref. to
terminals. valve connector. EC(H4SO)-18,
Terminals Drain Valve.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-188

BI: DTC P0448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT SHORTED
SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B: B135 D: B137 ECM
B220 E
D6
B4
B38 B21
15
48
41
1
i3 E2
i54
12
11
R99
R144 E4
1

SOLENOID VALVE
B220
E4 R144
B21
17
1 5 9 13
1 2 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B38 D: B137 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
B: B135
42 43 44 45 46 47
i54
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
11 12 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08633
EN(H4SO)(diag)-189

Step Check Yes No

DRAIN VALVE CONNECTOR. circuit to power in
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM between ECM and
and drain valve. drain valve con-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. nector.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the drain Repair the poor
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. valve. <Ref. to contact of ECM
2) Measure the resistance between drain valve EC(H4SO)-18, connector.
terminals. Drain Valve.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-190

BJ:DTC P0451 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SEN-

SOR
SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
2) Open the fuel flap.
2 CHECK PRESSURE VACUUM LINE. Is there any fault in pressure/ Repair or replace Replace the fuel
NOTE: vacuum line? the hoses and tank pressure sen-
Check the following items. pipes. sor. <Ref. to
• Disconnection, leakage and clogging of the EC(H4SO)-15,
vacuum hoses and pipes between fuel tank Fuel Tank Pres-
pressure sensor and fuel tank sure Sensor.>
• Disconnection, leakage and clogging of air
ventilation hoses and pipes between fuel filler
pipe and fuel tank
EN(H4SO)(diag)-191

BK:DTC P0452 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR LOW INPUT
SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
PRESSURE
SENSOR
3
R47
R57
10
R15
R333
11
10
9
i155
i3
12
2
B38
*
*
B83
*
B22
C21
B30
B: B135
ECM
C: B136
R57 B38 B: B135 C: B136 R47

B83
i155 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4 5 6
3 4 5 6 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11
EN-08676
EN(H4SO)(diag)-192

Step Check Yes No

1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. –7.41 kPa (–55.6 mmHg, –2.19 detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of fuel tank pressure sensor inHg)? cuit has returned to
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
POWER SUPPLY. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank In this case, repair
pressure sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between the fuel tank harness between
pressure sensor connector and chassis ground. ECM and fuel tank
Connector & terminal pressure sensor
(R47) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
the ECM and fuel tank pressure sensor connec- harness between
tor. ECM and fuel tank
(B136) No. 21 — (R47) No. 2: connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- more? short circuit of har-
TOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and fuel tank
chassis ground. pressure sensor
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the Repair the poor Replace the fuel
Check for poor contact between the ECM and ECM or fuel tank pressure sen- contact of the ECM tank pressure sen-
fuel tank pressure sensor connector. sor connector? or fuel tank pressor. <Ref. to
sure sensor con- EC(H4SO)-15,
nector. Fuel Tank Pres-
sure Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-193

BL:DTC P0453 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR HIGH INPUT
SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
PRESSURE
SENSOR
3
R47
R57
10
R15
R333
11
10
9
i155
i3
12
2
B38
*
*
B83
*
B22
C21
B30
B: B135
ECM
C: B136
R57 B38 B: B135 C: B136 R47

B83
i155 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4 5 6
3 4 5 6 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11
EN-08676
EN(H4SO)(diag)-194

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value 7.95 kPa Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (59.6 mmHg, 2.35 inHg) or detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of fuel tank pressure sensor more? cuit has returned to
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the measured value 7.95 kPa Repair the short Go to step 3.
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- (59.6 mmHg, 2.35 inHg) or circuit to power in
TOR. more? the harness
2) Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank fuel tank pressure
pressure sensor. sensor connector.
4) Read the data of fuel tank pressure sensor
signal using the Subaru Select Monitor or gen-
eral scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
TOR. NOTE:
fuel tank pressure sensor connector and engine • Open circuit of
ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and fuel tank
(R47) No. 1 — Engine ground: pressure sensor
connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
joint connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of fuel Repair the poor Replace the fuel
Check for poor contact of the fuel tank pressure tank pressure sensor connec- contact of fuel tank tank pressure sen-
sensor connector. tor? pressure sensor sor. <Ref. to
connector. EC(H4SO)-15,
Fuel Tank Pres-
sure Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-195

BM:DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT-

ED (VERY SMALL LEAK)
SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Fuel odor
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
NOTE:
tightening.
genuine fuel filler
cap.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-57,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
Select Monitor.
NOTE:
Drain valve can be operated using the Subaru
tion Check Mode.>
NOTE: Purge Control
Mode.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-196

Step Check Yes No

TROL SYSTEM LINE. 0.5 mm (0.020 in) dia. on evap- the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. oration line? line. <Ref. to
Evaporation
Lines.>
mm (0.020 in) dia. in it? to EC(H4SO)-5,
Canister.>
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-50, there any hole of more than 0.5 the fuel tank. <Ref.
Fuel Tank.> mm (0.020 in) dia. in it? to FU(H4SO)-50,
Fuel Tank.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-197

BN:DTC P0457 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT-

ED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF)
SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Fuel odor
• Fuel filler cap loose or lost
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
NOTE:
tightening.
genuine fuel filler
cap.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-57,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
Select Monitor.
NOTE:
tion Check Mode.>
NOTE: Purge Control
Mode.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-198

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- Is there any disconnection, Repair or replace Go to step 7.
TROL SYSTEM LINE. damage or clogging on the the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. evaporation line? line. <Ref. to
Evaporation
Lines.>
7 CHECK CANISTER. Is the canister damaged? Repair or replace Go to step 8.
the canister. <Ref.
to EC(H4SO)-5,
Canister.>
8 CHECK FUEL TANK. Is the fuel tank damaged? Repair or replace Go to step 9.
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-50, the fuel tank. <Ref.
Fuel Tank.> to FU(H4SO)-50,
Fuel Tank.>
9 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU- Are there holes, cracks, clog- Repair or replace Repair the poor
BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- ging, or disconnection, miscon- the hoses or pipes. contact of ECM
TROL SYSTEM. nection of hoses or pipes in connector.
evaporative emission control
system?
EN(H4SO)(diag)-199

BO:DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT LOW
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-149, DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B: B135 D: B137 ECM
B220 E
D6
B4
B38 B21
15
48
41
1
i3 E2
i54
12
11
R99
R144 E4
1

SOLENOID VALVE
B220
E4 R144
B21
17
1 5 9 13
1 2 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B38 D: B137 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
B: B135
42 43 44 45 46 47
i54
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
11 12 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08633
EN(H4SO)(diag)-200

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
a normal condition
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary open or
ness or temporary
poor contact of
connector may be
the cause.
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO PURGE CON- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the power
TROL SOLENOID VALVE. supply circuit.
Measure the voltage between purge control
solenoid valve and engine ground.
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CON- more? short circuit of har-
NECTOR. ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and purge
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and control solenoid
purge control solenoid valve. valve connector.
3) Measure the resistance between the purge
control solenoid valve connector and engine
ground.
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
ECM and purge control solenoid valve. the following item:
ECM and purge
control solenoid
valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
6 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance 10 — 100 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the purge
VALVE. contact of purge control solenoid
1) Remove the purge control solenoid valve. control solenoid valve. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between purge con- valve connector. EC(H4SO)-9,
trol solenoid valve terminals. Purge Control
Terminals Solenoid Valve.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-201

BP:DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT HIGH
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-151, DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B: B135 D: B137 ECM
B220 E
D6
B4
B38 B21
15
48
41
1
i3 E2
i54
12
11
R99
R144 E4
1

SOLENOID VALVE
B220
E4 R144
B21
17
1 5 9 13
1 2 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B38 D: B137 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
B: B135
42 43 44 45 46 47
i54
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
11 12 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08633
EN(H4SO)(diag)-202

Step Check Yes No

PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CON- circuit to power in
NECTOR. the harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and purge control sole-
purge control solenoid valve. noid valve connec-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the purge Repair the poor
VALVE. control solenoid contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. valve. <Ref. to connector.
2) Measure the resistance between purge con- EC(H4SO)-9,
No. 1 — No. 2:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-203

BQ:DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-153, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using level sensor and
the “List of Diag- fuel sub level sen-
nostic Trouble sor. <Ref. to
Code (DTC)”. FU(H4SO)-62,
<Ref. to Fuel Level Sen-
EN(H4SO)(diag)- sor.> <Ref. to
75, List of Diagnos- FU(H4SO)-64,
tic Trouble Code Fuel Sub Level
(DTC).> Sensor.>
BR:DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0463. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-204, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL
SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
BS:DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-157, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is DTC P0462 or P0463 dis- Check the combi- Even if DTC is
played on the Subaru Select nation meter. <Ref. detected, the cir-
Monitor? to IDI-12, CHECK cuit has returned to
FUEL LEVEL a normal condition
SENSOR, at this time. Repro-
INSPECTION, duce the failure,
Combination Meter and then perform
System.> the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-204

BT:DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-159, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT IN-
TERMITTENT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is DTC P0464 displayed on the Check the combi- Even if DTC is
display? nation meter. <Ref. detected, the cir-
to IDI-12, CHECK cuit has returned to
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
BU:DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-162, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”, Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK DTC OF VDC. Is DTC of VDC displayed? Perform the diag- Repair the poor
Check DTC of VDC. nosis according to contact of ECM
DTC. <Ref. to connector.
VDC(diag)-35, List
of Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-205

BV:DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-163, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start the engine.
• Engine does not start.
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Go to step 2.
priate DTC using
the “List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK AIR CLEANER ELEMENT. Is there excessive clogging on Replace the air Go to step 3.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. air cleaner element? cleaner element.
2) Check the air cleaner element. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-
4, Air Cleaner Ele-
ment.>
3 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Are foreign matter found inside Remove foreign Perform the diag-
TROL. electronic throttle control? matter from elec- nosis of DTC
1) Remove the electronic throttle control. tronic throttle con- P2101. <Ref. to
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-15, REMOVAL, Throttle trol. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
Body.> 258, DTC P2101
2) Check the electronic throttle control. THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CON-
TROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE,
Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-206

BW:DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-164, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine keeps running at higher speed than specified idle speed.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Is there any fault in air intake Repair air suction Go to step 3.
1) Start and idle the engine. system? and leaks.
2) Check the following items.
• Loose installation of intake manifold and
throttle body
• Cracks of intake manifold gasket and throttle
body gasket
• Disconnection of vacuum hoses
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. tronic throttle con- P2101. <Ref. to
2) Remove the electronic throttle control. trol. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-15, REMOVAL, Throttle 258, DTC P2101
Body.> THROTTLE
3) Check the electronic throttle control. ACTUATOR CON-
TROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE,
Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-207

BX:DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-165, DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CONTROL
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine keeps running at higher speed than specified idle speed.
• Engine keeps running at a lower speed than the specified idle speed.
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
E
B220
B134 ECM
10
11
12
13
B21
48
42
43
44
45
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
2

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E5 E16 B21 B134 B220
E6 E17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 2 6 10 14
1 2 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07705
EN(H4SO)(diag)-208

BATTERY
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
Step Check Yes No

priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK ENGINE OIL. Is there a proper amount of Go to step 3. Replace engine oil.
engine oil? <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-13,
REPLACEMENT,
Engine Oil.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-209

Step Check Yes No

intake system?
Measure the fuel pressure. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- Fuel pressure is
28, INSPECTION, Fuel Pressure.> too low:
CAUTION: • Improper fuel
Release fuel pressure before removing the pump discharge
fuel pressure gauge. • Clogged fuel line
tor.>
(167°F). FU(H4SO)-31,
NOTE:
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-210

Step Check Yes No

8 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Subtract ambient temperature Go to step 9. Check the mass air
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. from intake air temperature. Is flow and intake air
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until the obtained value –10 — 50°C temperature sen-
(167°F). FU(H4SO)-31,
NOTE:
tor.>
ders.
ECM and fuel injector on faulty cylinders. In this case, repair
#1 (B134) No. 10 — (E5) No. 1: • Open circuit in
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-211

Step Check Yes No

terminals on faulty cylinder. to FU(H4SO)-34,
No. 1 — No. 2:
#3 (E6) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): the main relay con-
#4 (E17) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): nector and fuel in-
jector connector on
faulty cylinders
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector between the ECM
on faulty cylinders. and fuel injector.
15 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the faulty Go to step 16.
2) Measure the resistance between fuel injec- to FU(H4SO)-34,
tor terminals on faulty cylinder. Fuel Injector.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
16 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the camshaft position sensor Tighten the cam- Go to step 17.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR/CRANK- or crankshaft position sensor shaft position sen-
SHAFT POSITION SENSOR. loosely installed? sor or crankshaft
position sensor.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-26,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.> <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-24,
Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>
ME(H4SO)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> ME(H4SO)-53,
Crank Sprocket.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-212

Step Check Yes No

alignment mark on crank sprocket with align- ME(H4SO)-47,
SOCKET
19 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 20. Replace the elec-
TROL RELAY. tronic throttle con-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol relay. <Ref. to
2) Remove the electronic throttle control relay. FU(H4SO)-46,
3) Connect the battery to terminals No. 13 and Electronic Throttle
No. 14 of electronic throttle control relay. Control Relay.>
4) Measure the resistance between electronic
throttle control relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 15 — No. 16:
20 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF ELECTRONIC Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 21. Repair the open or
THROTTLE CONTROL RELAY. ground short circuit
Measure the voltage between electronic throttle of power supply
control relay connector and chassis ground. circuit.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- circuit to power in
LAY CONNECTOR. the harness
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. electronic throttle
3) Measure the voltage between electronic control relay con-
throttle control relay connector and chassis nector.
ground.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- more? circuit in harness
LAY CONNECTOR. to ground between
2) Measure the resistance between electronic tronic throttle con-
throttle control relay connector and chassis trol relay
ground. connector.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- circuit in harness
LAY CONNECTOR. between ECM and
Measure the resistance between ECM and electronic throttle
electronic throttle control relay connector. control relay con-
Connector & terminal nector.
(B135) No. 17 — (B220) No. 14:
(B135) No. 7 — (B220) No. 15:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-213

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 — (B136) No. 4:
25 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 26. Repair the short
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? circuit to ground in
2) Measure the resistance between electronic harness between
throttle control connector and engine ground. ECM and elec-
Connector & terminal tronic throttle con-
(E57) No. 4 — Engine ground: Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
NECTOR. NOTE:
ECM and electronic throttle control connector. • Open circuit in
(B134) No. 18 — (E57) No. 6: ECM and electron-
(B134) No. 28 — (E57) No. 4: ic throttle control
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
NECTOR. NOTE:
ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-214

Step Check Yes No

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? circuit to power in
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. tronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM control connector.
nectors.
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 18:
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 28:
30 CHECK SENSOR OUTPUT. Is the voltage 0.81 — 0.87 V? Go to step 31. Repair the poor
1) Connect all connectors. contact of elec-
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tronic throttle con-
3) Read the data of main throttle sensor signal trol connector.
using Subaru Select Monitor. Replace the elec-
NOTE: tronic throttle con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to trol if defective.
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. <Ref. to
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- FU(H4SO)-15,
tor.> Throttle Body.>
Read the data of sub throttle sensor signal contact of elec-
using Subaru Select Monitor. tronic throttle con-
NOTE: trol connector.
Subaru Select Monitor Replace the elec-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to tronic throttle con-
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. trol if defective.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- <Ref. to
tor.> FU(H4SO)-15,
Throttle Body.>
NECTOR. NOTE:
electronic throttle control connector. ECM and electron-
coupling connector
NECTOR. the harness
1) Connect the connector to ECM. between ECM and
3) Measure the voltage between electronic control.
throttle control connector and engine ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-215

Step Check Yes No

3) Measure the resistance between electronic trol connector.
35 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ELECTRONIC Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 36. Repair the short
THROTTLE CONTROL CONNECTOR. more? circuit of harness
Measure the resistance between electronic between ECM and
throttle control connectors. electronic throttle
Connector & terminal control connector.
(E57) No. 2 — (E57) No. 1:
36 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 37. Repair the harness
TROL GROUND CIRCUIT. and connector.
Measure the resistance between ECM and NOTE:
coupling connector
37 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 50 Ω or less? Go to step 38. Replace the elec-
TROL. tronic throttle con-
Measure the resistance between electronic trol. <Ref. to
throttle control terminals. FU(H4SO)-15,
Terminals Throttle Body.>
No. 2 — No. 1:
38 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Does the valve return to the Repair the poor Replace the elec-
TROL. specified position? Standard contact of ECM tronic throttle con-
Move the throttle valve to the fully open and fully value: 3 mm (0.12 in) from fully connector. trol. <Ref. to
closed positions with fingers. closed position FU(H4SO)-15,
Check that the valve returns to the specified Throttle Body.>
position when releasing fingers.
BY:DTC P050B COLD START IGNITION TIMING PERFORMANCE

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P050A. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-208, DTC P050A COLD
START IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-216

BZ:DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-168, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT, Diag-
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Failure of engine to start
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
F/B No. 21
6
BATTERY
SBF-5 MAIN SBF
2 3
2
IGNITION SWITCH
B72
STARTER RELAY
B493
E
1
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
MT CVT 12 6
11 9
MT
B12 T3 T7
CVT
2
CLUTCH STROKE
MT
START SWITCH)
B501
CVT
1
CVT
B14
MT M
B26
C16
B : B135
ECM
C : B136
B493 B501 B72 T7 B12 B : B135 C : B136
1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 14 15 16
3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4 5 6 9 10 11 12 25 26 27
4 6 7 8 9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-07701
EN(H4SO)(diag)-217

Step Check Yes No

priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Repair the poor
STARTER RELAY CONNECTOR. circuit to power contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. supply in harness connector.
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. starter relay con-
chassis ground.
NOTE:
range or “N” range.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-218

CA:DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY

(RAM) ERROR
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-170, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RAN-
DOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Even if DTC is
priate DTC using detected, the cir-
the “List of Diag- cuit has returned to
nostic Trouble a normal condition
Code (DTC)”. at this time. Repro-
<Ref. to duce the failure,
EN(H4SO)(diag)- and then perform
75, List of Diagnos- the diagnosis
tic Trouble Code again.
(DTC).> NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
CB:DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM)

ERROR
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0607. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-220, DTC P0607 THROTTLE
CONTROL SYSTEM CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-219

CC:DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-172, DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM CIR-
CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
M/B No. 16
4
3
M/B No. 12
1
2 B72 IGNITION
SWITCH BATTERY
1 3
B13
C30
C1
D7
C2
ECM
A : B134 B: B135 C : B136 D : B137

A19
A29
A18
A28
A1
A2
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
C4
E
B138
*
*
B21
18
17
20
38
19
39
37
36
35
34
40
: TERMINAL No.
E2 * OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
6
4
2
5
3
1
E E E57 ELECTRONIC E
THROTTLE CONTROL
B138 B21 B72 E57 B220
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 17
5 6 7 8 4 5 6 1 5 9 13
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07791
EN(H4SO)(diag)-220

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 — 13 V? Go to step 2. Repair the open or
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and of power supply
chassis ground. circuit.
1) Start the engine. ground short circuit
NECTOR. NOTE:
coupling connector
4 CHECK ECM GROUND HARNESS. Is the voltage less than 1 V? Repair the poor Repair the follow-
1) Connect all connectors. contact of ECM ing item.
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. connector. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and ground circuit
chassis ground. • Further tighten-
Connector & terminal ing of the engine
(B134) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): ground terminal
(B134) No. 4 (+) — Chassis ground (–): • Poor contact of
(B134) No. 6 (+) — Chassis ground (–): coupling connector
CD:DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE

(BANK 1)
NOTE:
ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
CE:DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (MIL REQUEST)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to CVT section. <Ref. to CVT(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-221

CF:DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (AT MODEL)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-177, DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
CUIT LOW (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
C: B136
C: B136 ECM
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT 1 2 3 4 5 6
* 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
35
B138 B25
1 2
*
*
B25 T2 T2 B25
B12
MT 2 1
1 2 3 4
CVT
NEUTRAL
5 6 7 8
POSITION
9 10 11 12
SWITCH
T7
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
1 2 3 4 5
12 6
6 7 8 9
11 9
B12 T3 T7
B138
1 2 3 4
STARTER MOTOR (MAGNET) 5 6 7 8
CVT
M
MT
B14
CVT
MT
TO STARTER RELAY
EN-07792
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SELECT CABLE. Is there any fault in select Repair or adjust Go to step 2.
cable? the select cable.
<Ref. to CS-41,
Select Cable.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-222

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Go to step 3.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. contact of ECM
2) Place the select lever in other than “P” range connector.
and “N” range.
chassis ground.
TRANSMISSION HARNESS CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and ECM and transmis-
transmission harness connector (T3). sion harness con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and nector.
chassis ground.
4 CHECK TRANSMISSION HARNESS CON- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the inhibi- Repair short cir-
NECTOR. more? tor switch. <Ref. to cuit to ground in
1) Disconnect the connector from inhibitor CVT-94, Inhibitor harness between
switch. Switch.> transmission har-
2) Measure the resistance between transmis- ness connector
sion harness connector and engine ground. and inhibitor switch
(T3) No. 12 — Engine ground:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-223

CG:DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (MT MODEL)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-178, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
C: B136
C: B136 ECM
* 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
35
B138 B25
1 2
*
*
B25 T2 T2 B25
B12
MT 2 1
1 2 3 4
CVT
NEUTRAL
5 6 7 8
POSITION
9 10 11 12
SWITCH
T7
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
1 2 3 4 5
12 6
6 7 8 9
11 9
B12 T3 T7
B138
1 2 3 4
CVT
M
MT
B14
CVT
MT
TO STARTER RELAY
EN-07792
EN(H4SO)(diag)-224

Step Check Yes No

2) Place the shift lever in a position other than connector.
neutral.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the neu- Repair the short
NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CONNEC- more? tral position switch. circuit to ground
TOR. <Ref. to 6MT-37, harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Switches and Har- ECM and neutral
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and ness.> position switch
neutral position switch. connector.
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-225

CH:DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (AT MODEL)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-179, DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
CUIT HIGH (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
C: B136
C: B136 ECM
* 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
35
B138 B25
1 2
*
*
B25 T2 T2 B25
B12
MT 2 1
1 2 3 4
CVT
NEUTRAL
5 6 7 8
POSITION
9 10 11 12
SWITCH
T7
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
1 2 3 4 5
12 6
6 7 8 9
11 9
B12 T3 T7
B138
1 2 3 4
CVT
M
MT
B14
CVT
MT
TO STARTER RELAY
EN-07792
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SELECT CABLE. Is there any fault in select Repair or adjust Go to step 2.
cable? the select cable.
<Ref. to CS-41,
Select Cable.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-226

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage less than 1 V? Repair the poor Go to step 3.
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and connector.
chassis ground with select lever at “P” range
and “N” range.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IN- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4.
Repair the harness
HIBITOR SWITCH CONNECTOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and In this case, repair
inhibitor switch. the following item:
ECM and inhibitor switch connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and inhibitor
(B136) No. 35 — (T7) No. 6: switch connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK INHIBITOR SWITCH GROUND LINE. Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Replace the inhibi- Repair the harness
Measure the resistance of harness between tor switch. <Ref. to and connector.
inhibitor switch connector and engine ground. CVT-94, Inhibitor NOTE:
Connector & terminal Switch.> In this case, repair
(T7) No. 9 — Engine ground: the following item:
• Open circuit of
harness between
inhibitor switch
connector and
starter motor
ground line
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
starter motor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
starter motor
ground
• Starter motor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-227

CI: DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (MT MODEL)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-180, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
C: B136
C: B136 ECM
* 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
35
B138 B25
1 2
*
*
B25 T2 T2 B25
B12
MT 2 1
1 2 3 4
CVT
NEUTRAL
5 6 7 8
POSITION
9 10 11 12
SWITCH
T7
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
1 2 3 4 5
12 6
6 7 8 9
11 9
B12 T3 T7
B138
1 2 3 4
CVT
M
MT
B14
CVT
MT
TO STARTER RELAY
EN-07792
EN(H4SO)(diag)-228

Step Check Yes No

2) Place the shift lever in neutral. connector.
chassis ground.
NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
neutral position switch. • Open circuit in
ECM and neutral position switch connector. ECM and neutral
Connector & terminal position switch
(B136) No. 35 — (B25) No. 2: connector
joint connector
3 CHECK NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the neu-
1) Place the shift lever in neutral. contact of neutral tral position switch.
2) Measure the resistance between neutral position switch <Ref. to 6MT-37,
position switch terminals. connector. Switches and Har-
Terminals ness.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-229

CJ:DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1

SENSOR1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-181, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-230

Step Check Yes No

TOR. NOTE:
front oxygen (A/F) sensor. • Open circuit in
coupling connector
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-231

CK:DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1

SENSOR1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-183, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-232

Step Check Yes No

TOR. ness between
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. gen (A/F) sensor
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and connector.
chassis ground.
3 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
1) Connect the connector to ECM.
chassis ground.
4 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 4.95 V or more? Go to step 5. Replace the front
Measure the voltage between ECM and chassis oxygen (A/F) sen-
ground. sor. <Ref. to
Connector & terminal FU(H4SO)-37,
(B136) No. 18 (+) — Chassis ground (–): Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
5 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 8 V or more? Repair the short Repair the poor
Measure the voltage between ECM and chassis circuit to power in contact of ECM
ground. the harness connector.
Connector & terminal between ECM and
(B136) No. 18 (+) — Chassis ground (–): front oxygen (A/F)
(B136) No. 19 (+) — Chassis ground (–): sensor connector.
After repair,
replace the ECM.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
CL:DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE

NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-233

CM:DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-186, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper fuel supply
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK DRAIN HOSE. Is there clogging in the drain Replace the drain Go to step 3.
Check the drain hose for clogging. hose? hose.
3 CHECK DRAIN VALVE OPERATION. Does the drain valve operate? Repair the poor Replace the drain
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. contact of ECM valve. <Ref. to
2) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse. connector. EC(H4SO)-18,
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Drain Valve.>
4) Operate the drain valve.
NOTE:
tion Check Mode.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-234

CN:DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P1498. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-236, DTC P1498 EGR SOLE-
NOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
CO:DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
NOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
CP:DTC P1494 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
CQ:DTC P1495 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
CR:DTC P1496 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
CS:DTC P1497 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-235

CT:DTC P1498 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(LOW INPUT)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-188, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1
CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to
GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1494 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW IN-
PUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1496 EGR SO-
LENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1498 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine breathing
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-236

WIRING DIAGRAM:
E18
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16 1 2 3
4 4 5 6
3
2 B21
48
1
E2 B220
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
5
2
EGR B21
VALVE E
E18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
6
3
4
1
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E2 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
30
25
29
26
B21
A30
A20
A8
A9
A: B134
A: B134 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
D: B137 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B21 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
37
36
40
35
34
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E2 26 27 28 29 30 31
E E
EN-07788
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO EGR VALVE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from EGR valve. NOTE:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. In this case, repair
4) Measure the voltage between EGR valve the following item:
connector and engine ground. • Open circuit in
(E18) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): EGR valve and
(E18) No. 5 (+) — Engine ground (–): main relay connec-
tor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-237

Step Check Yes No

EGR VALVE CONNECTOR. and connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and the following item:
EGR valve connector. • Open circuit in
DTC P1492; (B134) No. 8 — (E18) No. 3: ECM and EGR
DTC P1494; (B134) No. 9 — (E18) No. 1: valve connector
DTC P1496; (B134) No. 20 — (E18) No. 4: • Poor contact of
DTC P1498; (B134) No. 30 — (E18) No. 6: coupling connector
EGR VALVE CONNECTOR. more? short in harness
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and EGR valve con-
DTC P1492; (B134) No. 8 — Chassis
ground:
ground:
ground:
ground:
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the EGR
Check for poor contact of ECM and EGR valve EGR valve connector? contact of ECM or valve. <Ref. to
connector. EGR valve con- FU(H4SO)-33,
nector. EGR Valve.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-238

CU:DTC P1499 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(HIGH INPUT)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-190, DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1
CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to
GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1495 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH IN-
PUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1497 EGR SO-
LENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P1499 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine breathing
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-239

WIRING DIAGRAM:
E18
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16 1 2 3
4 4 5 6
3
2 B21
48
1
E2 B220
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
5
2
EGR B21
VALVE E
E18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
6
3
4
1
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E2 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
30
25
29
26
B21
A30
A20
A8
A9
A: B134
A: B134 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
D: B137 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B21 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
37
36
40
35
34
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E2 26 27 28 29 30 31
E E
EN-07788
Step Check Yes No

EGR VALVE CONNECTOR. circuit to power
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. supply in harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and between ECM and
EGR valve. EGR valve con-
chassis ground.
DTC P1493; (B134) No. 8 (+) — Chassis
ground (–):
DTC P1495; (B134) No. 9 (+) — Chassis
ground (–):
DTC P1497; (B134) No. 20 (+) — Chassis
ground (–):
DTC P1499; (B134) No. 30 (+) — Chassis
ground (–):
EN(H4SO)(diag)-240

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK EGR VALVE. Is the resistance 20 Ω or more? Repair the poor Replace the EGR
Measure the resistance between EGR valve contact of ECM valve. <Ref. to
terminals. connector. FU(H4SO)-33,
Terminals EGR Valve.>
DTC P1493; No. 2 — No. 3:
DTC P1493; No. 5 — No. 3:
DTC P1495; No. 2 — No. 1:
DTC P1495; No. 5 — No. 1:
DTC P1497; No. 2 — No. 4:
DTC P1497; No. 5 — No. 4:
DTC P1499; No. 2 — No. 6:
DTC P1499; No. 5 — No. 6:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-241

CV:DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-193, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW IN-
PUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
F/B No. 21
6
BATTERY
SBF-5 MAIN SBF
2 3
2
IGNITION SWITCH
B72
STARTER RELAY
B493
E
1
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
MT CVT 12 6
11 9
MT
B12 T3 T7
CVT
2
CLUTCH STROKE
MT
START SWITCH)
B501
CVT
1
CVT
B14
MT M
B26
C16
B : B135
ECM
C : B136
B493 B501 B72 T7 B12 B : B135 C : B136
1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 14 15 16
3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4 5 6 9 10 11 12 25 26 27
4 6 7 8 9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-07701
EN(H4SO)(diag)-242

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Go to step 2.
“List of Diagnostic
Trouble Code
(DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 3. NOTE:
STARTER RELAY CONNECTOR. Check the follow-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ing item and repair
2) Remove the starter relay. or replace if neces-
3) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and sary.
starter motor. • Open circuit of
ECM and starter relay connector. ECM and starter
Connector & terminal relay connector
NOTE: coupling connector
range or “N” range.
STARTER RELAY CONNECTOR. more? contact of ECM circuit to ground in
Measure the resistance between ECM and connector. harness between
chassis ground. ECM and starter
Connector & terminal relay connector.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-243

CW:DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-194, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MAL-
FUNCTION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
M/B No. 16
4
3 M/B No. 12
1
2 B72 IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
1 3
C30
B13
C1
D7
C2
A : B134
E
B : B135
ECM
C : B136
D : B137
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
B21
40
35
34
37
36
E2
E E
B21 A: B134 B: B135 B220
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 5 9 13
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B72 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07702
Step Check Yes No

1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. contact of ECM
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-244

Step Check Yes No

MAIN FUSE BOX CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and battery
chassis ground. terminal.
3 CHECK M/B NO. 12 FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Repair the harness
and connector.
NOTE:
the following item:
• Open circuit in
harness between
ECM and battery
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
battery terminal
EN(H4SO)(diag)-245

CX:DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-196, DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYS-
TEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
EN(H4SO)(diag)-246


M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
Step Check Yes No

Trouble Code
(DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
TOR. inside.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-247

Step Check Yes No

TOR. NOTE:
coupling connector
TOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and front oxy-
chassis ground. gen (A/F) sensor
3) Measure the voltage between front oxygen
(A/F) sensor connector and chassis ground.
Measure the voltage between front oxygen (A/
F) sensor connector and chassis ground.
Measure the voltage between front oxygen (A/ circuit to power in contact of ECM
F) sensor connector and chassis ground. the harness connector.
(E24) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): front oxygen (A/F)
(E24) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–): sensor connector.
After repair,
replace the ECM.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
intake system?
EN(H4SO)(diag)-248

Step Check Yes No

1) Connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor con- Fuel pressure is
nector. too low:
2) Measure the fuel pressure. <Ref. to • Improper fuel
ME(H4SO)-28, INSPECTION, Fuel Pressure.> pump discharge
Release fuel pressure before removing the
fuel pressure gauge.
tor.>
(167°F). FU(H4SO)-31,
NOTE:
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-249

Step Check Yes No

(167°F). FU(H4SO)-31,
NOTE:
tor.>
maximum)
tool.
NOTE:
• Depress the clutch pedal. (MT model)
tor.>
rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-250

Step Check Yes No

inside.
17 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR US- Is a voltage of 250 mV or less Replace the front Go to step 18.
ING REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL. maintained for 5 minutes or oxygen (A/F) sen-
1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant more? sor. <Ref. to
temperature is higher than 75°C (167°F), then FU(H4SO)-37,
keep the engine idling for 5 minutes or more. Front Oxygen (A/F)
2) Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal Sensor.>
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
(B134) No. 29 — (E25) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-251

CY:DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-198, DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYS-
TEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
EN(H4SO)(diag)-252


M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
Step Check Yes No

Trouble Code
(DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
TOR. inside.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-253

Step Check Yes No

TOR. NOTE:
coupling connector
TOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and front oxy-
chassis ground. gen (A/F) sensor
3) Measure the voltage between front oxygen
(A/F) sensor connector and chassis ground.
Measure the voltage between front oxygen (A/
F) sensor connector and chassis ground.
Measure the voltage between front oxygen (A/ circuit to power in contact of ECM
F) sensor connector and chassis ground. the harness connector.
(E24) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): front oxygen (A/F)
(E24) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–): sensor connector.
After repair,
replace the ECM.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
intake system?
EN(H4SO)(diag)-254

Step Check Yes No

1) Connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor con- Fuel pressure is
nector. too low:
2) Measure the fuel pressure. <Ref. to • Improper fuel
ME(H4SO)-28, INSPECTION, Fuel Pressure.> pump discharge
Release fuel pressure before removing the
fuel pressure gauge.
tor.>
(167°F). FU(H4SO)-31,
NOTE:
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-255

Step Check Yes No

(167°F). FU(H4SO)-31,
NOTE:
tor.>
maximum)
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-256

Step Check Yes No

inside.
17 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR US- Is a voltage of 0.8 V or more Replace the front Go to step 18.
ING REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL. maintained for 5 minutes or oxygen (A/F) sen-
1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant more? sor. <Ref. to
temperature is higher than 75°C (167°F), then FU(H4SO)-37,
keep the engine idling for 5 minutes or more. Front Oxygen (A/F)
2) Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal Sensor.>
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
(B134) No. 29 — (E25) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-257

CZ:DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-200, DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
EN(H4SO)(diag)-258

Step Check Yes No

Terminals
No. 15 — No. 16:
ground.
ground. connector.
(B135) No. 17 — (B220) No. 14:
(B135) No. 7 — (B220) No. 15:
2) Disconnect the connectors from electronic tronic throttle con-
throttle control. trol connector.
chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 — (B136) No. 4:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-259

Step Check Yes No

defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
NECTOR. NOTE:
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
NECTOR. NOTE:
ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
nectors.
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 18:
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 28:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-260

Step Check Yes No

to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- FU(H4SO)-15,
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- <Ref. to
tor.> FU(H4SO)-15,
Throttle Body.>
NECTOR. NOTE:
coupling connector
1) Connect the connector to ECM. ECM and elec-
3) Measure the voltage between electronic trol connector.
17 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 18. Repair the short
TROL CONNECTOR HARNESS. more? circuit of harness
(E57) No. 2 — (E57) No. 1:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-261

Step Check Yes No

coupling connector
throttle control terminals. FU(H4SO)-15,
No. 2 — No. 1:
closed positions with fingers. closed position FU(H4SO)-15,
EN(H4SO)(diag)-262

DA:DTC P2102 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW

MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
EN(H4SO)(diag)-263

Step Check Yes No

Terminals
No. 15 — No. 16:
ground.
ground. connector.
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the open
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- contact of ECM circuit in harness
LAY CONNECTOR. connector. between ECM and
(B135) No. 17 — (B220) No. 14:
(B135) No. 7 — (B220) No. 15:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-264

DB:DTC P2103 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH

MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
EN(H4SO)(diag)-265

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 2. Replace the elec-
TROL RELAY. more? tronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between electronic Electronic Throttle
throttle control relay terminals. Control Relay.>
Terminals
No. 15 — No. 16:
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT OF ELECTRONIC Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 3.
THROTTLE CONTROL RELAY POWER SUP- circuit to power in
PLY. the harness
2) Measure the voltage between electronic electronic throttle
throttle control relay connector and chassis control relay con-
ground. nector.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- more? contact of ECM circuit in harness
LAY CONNECTOR. connector. to ground between
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and trol relay
chassis ground. connector.
DC:DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR “A” MINIMUM STOP

PERFORMANCE
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-266

DD:DTC P2122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT

LOW INPUT
SOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B315
ACCELERATOR
PEDAL POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6
SENSOR
B83 B138
4
B315
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
4 5 6 5 6 7 8
B21

* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
B23
B29
B22
B31
B30
C4
B138
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
B: B135
A4
D3
A6
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B21 C: B136
37
36
34
40
35
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08677
EN(H4SO)(diag)-267

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 2. Repair the short
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR more? circuit to ground in
CONNECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and accelera-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and tor pedal position
accelerator pedal position sensor. sensor connector.
chassis ground.
(B135) No. 23 — (B136) No. 4:
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the accel- Repair the short
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? erator pedal. <Ref. circuit to ground in
2) Measure the resistance between accelera- to SP(H4SO)-4, harness between
tor pedal position sensor connector and chassis Accelerator ECM and accelera-
ground. Pedal.> tor pedal position
(B315) No. 6 — Chassis ground: Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-268

DE:DTC P2123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT

HIGH INPUT
SOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B315
ACCELERATOR
SENSOR
B83 B138
4
B315
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
4 5 6 5 6 7 8
B21

* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
B23
B29
B22
B31
B30
C4
B138
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
B: B135
A4
D3
A6
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B21 C: B136
37
36
34
40
35
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08677
EN(H4SO)(diag)-269

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Repair the open
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR circuit in harness
CONNECTOR. between ECM and
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. accelerator pedal
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and position sensor
accelerator pedal position sensor. connector.
ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
connector.
(B135) No. 23 — (B315) No. 6:
(B135) No. 29 — (B315) No. 5:
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR and connector.
CONNECTOR. NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance between accelera- the following item:
tor pedal position sensor connector and chassis • Open circuit of
Connector & terminal ECM and engine
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR circuit to power
CONNECTOR. supply in the har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ness between the
2) Measure the voltage between accelerator ECM and accelera-
pedal position sensor connector and chassis tor pedal position
ground. sensor connector.
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair the poor Repair the short
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR more? contact of acceler- circuit to power
CONNECTOR. ator pedal position supply in the har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sensor connector. ness between the
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. Replace the accel- ECM and accelera-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- erator pedal if tor pedal position
nectors. defective. <Ref. to sensor connector.
Connector & terminal SP(H4SO)-4,
(B135) No. 21 — (B135) No. 23: Accelerator
Pedal.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-270

DF:DTC P2127 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT

LOW INPUT
SOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B315
ACCELERATOR
SENSOR
B83 B138
4
B315
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
4 5 6 5 6 7 8
B21

* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
B23
B29
B22
B31
B30
C4
B138
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
B: B135
A4
D3
A6
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B21 C: B136
37
36
34
40
35
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08677
EN(H4SO)(diag)-271

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 2. Repair the short
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR more? circuit to ground in
CONNECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and accelera-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and tor pedal position
accelerator pedal position sensor. sensor connector.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the accel- Repair the short
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? erator pedal. <Ref. circuit to ground in
2) Measure the resistance between accelera- to SP(H4SO)-4, harness between
tor pedal position sensor connector and chassis Accelerator ECM and accelera-
ground. Pedal.> tor pedal position
(B315) No. 3 — Chassis ground: Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-272

DG:DTC P2128 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT

HIGH INPUT
SOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B315
ACCELERATOR
SENSOR
B83 B138
4
B315
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
4 5 6 5 6 7 8
B21

* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
B23
B29
B22
B31
B30
C4
B138
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
B: B135
A4
D3
A6
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B21 C: B136
37
36
34
40
35
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08677
EN(H4SO)(diag)-273

Step Check Yes No

CONNECTOR. NOTE:
accelerator pedal position sensor. • Open circuit in
ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ECM and acceler-
connector. ator pedal position
Connector & terminal sensor connector
(B135) No. 30 — (B315) No. 2: joint connector
CONNECTOR. NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance between accelera- the following item:
tor pedal position sensor connector and chassis • Open circuit of
Connector & terminal ECM and engine
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
joint connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR circuit to power
CONNECTOR. supply in the har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ness between the
2) Measure the voltage between accelerator ECM and accelera-
pedal position sensor connector and chassis tor pedal position
ground. sensor connector.
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Repair the poor Repair the short
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR more? contact of acceler- circuit to power
CONNECTOR. ator pedal position supply in the har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sensor connector. ness between the
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. Replace the accel- ECM and accelera-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- erator pedal if tor pedal position
nectors. defective. <Ref. to sensor connector.
Connector & terminal SP(H4SO)-4,
(B135) No. 22 — (B135) No. 31: Accelerator
Pedal.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-274

DH:DTC P2135 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A”/“B” VOLT-

AGE CORRELATION
SOR/SWITCH “A”/“B” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
EN(H4SO)(diag)-275

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 — (B136) No. 4:
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-41,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
NECTOR. NOTE:
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
NECTOR. NOTE:
ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-276

Step Check Yes No

(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 18: FU(H4SO)-15,
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 28: Throttle Body.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-277

DI: DTC P2138 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D”/“E” VOLT-

AGE CORRELATION
SOR/SWITCH “D”/“E” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B315
ACCELERATOR
SENSOR
B83 B138
4
B315
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
4 5 6 5 6 7 8
B21

* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
B23
B29
B22
B31
B30
C4
B138
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
B: B135
A4
D3
A6
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B21 C: B136
37
36
34
40
35
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08677
EN(H4SO)(diag)-278

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Is the difference in measured Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
SENSOR OUTPUT. values for the main accelerator
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. pedal position sensor signal
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and and the sub accelerator pedal
chassis ground. position sensor signal 0 V?
Main accelerator pedal position sensor
signal
Sub accelerator pedal position sensor
signal
2 CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Is the difference in measured Replace the accel- Repair the harness
SENSOR OUTPUT. values for the main accelerator erator pedal. <Ref. and connector.
1) Measure the voltage between accelerator pedal position sensor signal to SP(H4SO)-4, NOTE:
pedal position sensor connector and chassis and the sub accelerator pedal Accelerator In this case, repair
ground. position sensor signal 0 V? Pedal.> the following item:
(B315) No. 6 (+) — Chassis ground (–): harness between
(B315) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): ECM and acceler-
ator pedal position
sensor connector
• Short circuit to
ground in harness
between ECM and
accelerator pedal
position sensor
connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the harness
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR contact of ECM and connector.
CONNECTOR. connector. NOTE:
Measure the resistance of harness between the In this case, repair
accelerator pedal position sensor connector the following item:
and chassis ground. • Open circuit in
(B315) No. 5 — Chassis ground: ECM and acceler-
(B315) No. 2 — Chassis ground: ator pedal position
sensor connector
• Open circuit of
harness between
ECM and engine
ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
joint connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-279

DJ:DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-217, DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Replace the ECM.
“List of Diagnostic <Ref. to
Trouble Code FU(H4SO)-41,
(DTC)”. <Ref. to Engine Control
EN(H4SO)(diag)- Module (ECM).>
75, List of Diagnos- NOTE:
tic Trouble Code The barometric
(DTC).> pressure sensor is
built into the ECM.
DK:DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW

CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
built into the ECM.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-280

DL:DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH

CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
built into the ECM.
DM:DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS ‘OFF’ DETECTION

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to LAN section. <Ref. to LAN(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
DN:DTC U0101 CAN (TCU) DATA NOT LOADED
NOTE:
DO:DTC U0122 CAN (VDC) DATA NOT LOADED
NOTE:
DP:DTC U0140 CAN (BCU) DATA NOT LOADED
NOTE:
DQ:DTC U0402 CAN (TCU) DATA ABNORMAL
NOTE:
DR:DTC U0416 CAN (VDC) DATA ABNORMAL
NOTE:
DS:DTC U0422 CAN (BCU) DATA ABNORMAL
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-281
General Diagnostic Table

19.General Diagnostic Table

A: INSPECTION
1. ENGINE
NOTE:
Malfunction of parts other than those listed is also possible. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-95, Engine Trouble in Gen-
eral.>
Symptoms Faulty parts
1) Manifold absolute pressure sensor
2) Mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor
3) Ignition parts (*1)
4) Engine coolant temperature sensor (*2)
1. Engine stalls during idling.
5) Crankshaft position sensor (*3)
6) Camshaft position sensor (*3)
7) Fuel injection parts (*4)
8) Electronic throttle control
5) Air intake system (*5)
2. Rough idling 7) Electronic throttle control
10) Oxygen sensor
11) Fuel pump and fuel pump relay
12) EGR valve
13) Oil switching solenoid valve
1) Engine coolant temperature sensor
3. Engine does not return to idle. 4) Mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor
5) EGR valve
6) Accelerator pedal position sensor
7) Oil temperature sensor
4. Poor acceleration
9) Engine torque control signal circuit
11) EGR valve
12) Accelerator pedal position sensor
13) Oil temperature sensor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-282

Symptoms Faulty parts

5. Engine stalls, hesitates, or sputters at accelera- 5) Camshaft position sensor (*3)
tion. 6) Purge control solenoid valve
10) EGR valve
6. Surging 5) Camshaft position sensor (*3)
9) EGR valve
3) Engine coolant temperature sensor
4) Knock sensor
7. Spark knock
7) EGR valve
8. After burning in exhaust system 3) Engine coolant temperature sensor (*2)
*1:
Check ignition coil and spark plug.
*2: Indicate the symptom occurring only in cold temperatures.
*3: Ensure the secure installation.
*4: Check fuel injector, fuel pressure regulator and fuel filter.
*5: Inspect air leak in air intake system.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-283

EN(H4SO)(diag)-284
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
GD(H4SO)
Page
1. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ......................................................2
2. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria ....................................8

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: LIST
DTC Item Index
P0026 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-8, DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
Range/Performance (Bank 1) CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
Range/Performance (Bank 2) CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code
P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-11, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
Sensor 1) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0031 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-13, DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0032 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-15, DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
P0037 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-17, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
P0038 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-19, DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position Correla- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-21, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION
tion CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
Low (Bank 1) CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
High (Bank 1) CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
Low (Bank 2) CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
High (Bank 2) CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-26, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT
Range/Performance RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-29, DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT
Input LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-31, DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT
Input HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baromet- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-33, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
ric Pressure Circuit Low Input BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baromet- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-35, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
ric Pressure Circuit High Input BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-37, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1
cuit Range/Performance CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
cuit Low CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
cuit High CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-43, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
Low CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-45, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
High CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-47, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
“A” Circuit Low SOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-2

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

“A” Circuit High SOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-51, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERA-
Closed Loop Fuel Control TURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant Tempera- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-53, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT
ture for Stable Operation TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
P0128 Coolant Thermostat (Engine Coolant <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-55, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE
Temperature Below Thermostat Reg- COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEM-
ulating Temperature) PERATURE), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-57, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
1 Sensor 1) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-59, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-61, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-64, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-66, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-69, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
P0139 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-70, DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-78, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
Detected (Bank1 Sensor2) DETECTED (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0141 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank1 <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-80, DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT (BANK1
Sensor2) SENSOR2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1) <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-82, DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1), Diagnos-
P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1) <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-83, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnos-
P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-85, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A”
Range/Performance CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
Low Input CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
High Input CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0196 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-92, DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
cuit Range/Performance CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P0197 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-94, DTC P0197 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
P0198 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-95, DTC P0198 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
“B” Circuit Low SOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-3

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

“B” Circuit High SOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-100, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE DETECTED,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank 1 <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-107, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW
or Single Sensor) (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank 1 <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-109, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
or Single Sensor) (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-111, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
“A” CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-113, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Range/Performance “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-115, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
(Bank 1 or Single Sensor) CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0341 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-117, DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A”
Range/Performance (Bank 1 or Single CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diag-
Sensor) nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0400 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-119, DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION
FLOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-122, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY
Threshold (Bank 1) BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0442 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-125, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
tem Leak Detected (Small Leak) SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
tem Vent Control Circuit Open SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
tem Vent Control Circuit Shorted SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code
tem Pressure Sensor SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
tem Pressure Sensor Low Input SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
tem Pressure Sensor High Input SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code
tem Leak Detected (Very Small Leak) SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code
GD(H4SO)-4

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

tem Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/ SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diagnostic Trouble
Off) Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-149, DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Control Valve Circuit Low PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0459 Evaporative Emission System Purge <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-151, DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Control Valve Circuit High PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Range/ <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-153, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
Performance RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-155, DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-157, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermittent <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-159, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
INTERMITTENT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor “A” <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-162, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”, Diag-
P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-163, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
Than Expected LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-164, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
Than Expected HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-165, DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CONTROL SYS-
Performance TEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Perfor- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-167, DTC P050B COLD START IGNITION TIMING PER-
mance FORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0512 Starter Request Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-168, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT, Diag-
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-169, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY, Diag-
P0604 Internal Control Module Random <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-170, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RAN-
Access Memory (RAM) Error DOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-171, DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE READ
Memory (ROM) Error ONLY MEMORY (ROM) ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0607 Throttle Control System Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-172, DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM CIR-
Range/Performance CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/Per- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-174, DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
formance (Bank 1) RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P0700 Transmission Control System (MIL <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-176, DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Request) (MIL REQUEST), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0851 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-177, DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
(AT Model) CUIT LOW (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0851 Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low (MT <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-178, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
Model) LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0852 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-179, DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
(AT Model) CUIT HIGH (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0852 Neutral Switch Input Circuit High (MT <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-180, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
Model) HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-181, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
mance (Low) (Bank1 Sensor1) FORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
GD(H4SO)-5

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-183, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
mance (High) (Bank1 Sensor1) FORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P1160 Return Spring Failure <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-185, DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE, Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Function <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-186, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Problem FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1492 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-188, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1
Malfunction (Low Input) CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Malfunction (High Input) CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-193, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW
INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1560 Back-Up Voltage Circuit Malfunction <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-194, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MAL-
P1570 Antenna <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P1570 ANTENNA, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P1571 REFERENCE CODE INCOMPATIBIL-
ITY, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT
ANTENNA CIRCUIT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1574 Key Communication Failure <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE,
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P1576 EGI CONTROL MODULE EEPROM,
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM,
P1578 Meter Failure <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P1578 METER FAILURE, Diagnostic Trouble
P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-196, DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM
Lean (Bank 1) TOO LEAN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-198, DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM
Rich (Bank 1) TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-200, DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
Range/Performance MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
GD(H4SO)-6

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

Low MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
High MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor “A” <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-204, DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
Minimum Stop Performance SOR “A” MINIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
“D” Circuit Low Input SOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
“D” Circuit High Input SOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
“E” Circuit Low Input SOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
“E” Circuit High Input SOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
“A”/“B” Voltage Correlation SOR/SWITCH “A”/“B” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code
“D”/“E” Voltage Correlation SOR/SWITCH “D”/“E” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P2227 Atmospheric Pressure Sensor Range/ <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-217, DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
Performance RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P2228 Barometric Pressure Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-218, DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
P2229 Barometric Pressure Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-219, DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
U0073 CAN Failure, Bus ‘OFF’ Detection <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-220, DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS ‘OFF’ DETEC-
TION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
U0101 CAN (TCU) Data not Loaded <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-221, DTC U0101 CAN (TCU) DATA NOT LOADED, Diag-
U0122 CAN (VDC) Data not Loaded <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-221, DTC U0122 CAN (VDC) DATA NOT LOADED, Diag-
U0140 CAN (BCU) Data not Loaded <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-221, DTC U0140 CAN (BCU) DATA NOT LOADED, Diag-
U0402 CAN (TCU) Data Abnormal <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-221, DTC U0402 CAN (TCU) DATA ABNORMAL, Diag-
U0416 CAN (VDC) Data Abnormal <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-221, DTC U0416 CAN (VDC) DATA ABNORMAL, Diag-
U0422 CAN (BCU) Data Abnormal <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-221, DTC U0422 CAN (BCU) DATA ABNORMAL, Diag-
GD(H4SO)-7
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

A: DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (BANK 1)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge as NG with either Low NG or High NG.
A variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch is installed for diagnosis. It is possible to determine whether
the intake valve is in high mode (increase the amount of lift) or in low mode (suppressing the amount of lift)
when the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch is turned ON or OFF.
• Normal
Oil switching solenoid valve duty Intake valve
oil pressure switch
Large High mode OFF
Minimum Low mode ON
• Low NG
When the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch remains ON even though the intake valve tried to
enter high mode (oil switching solenoid valve duty is large), this is judged as a Low NG.
• High NG
When the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch remains OFF even though the intake valve tried to
enter low mode (oil switching solenoid valve duty is small), this is judged as a High NG.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The variable valve lift system optimizes the intake valve lift by switching between the low lift cam and the high
lift cam according to the engine speed. The amount of intake valve lift is varied by controlling the oil switching
solenoid valve duty according to signals from the ECM.
(A)
(B)
EN-05565
(A) Low lift (B) High lift
GD(H4SO)-8

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V
After engine starting ≥ 6000 ms
Engine oil temperature ≥ 15 °C (59 °F)
Variable valve lift control Operation
4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously 6 seconds after engine start while variable valve lift is being controlled.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
• Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Low
Duty ratio ≥ 62 %
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch ON
High
Duty ratio < 33 %
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch OFF
Time Needed for Diagnosis:

Low side: 784 ms
High side: 3000 ms
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
• Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Low
Duty ratio ≥ 62 %
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch OFF
High
Duty ratio < 33 %
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch ON

Low side: 208 ms
High side: 3000 ms
GD(H4SO)-9

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
B: DTC P0028 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE (BANK 2)
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0026. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-8, DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CON-
TROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-10

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
C: DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect functional errors of the front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater.
Judge as NG when it is determined that the front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance is large when looking at en-
gine status such as deceleration fuel cut.
(1) (2) (3) (4)

(5)
EN-07655
(1) Element cover (outer) (3) Sensor element (5) Sensor housing
(2) Element cover (inner) (4) Ceramic heater
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Condition established time ≥ 42000 ms
Heater current Permitted
Control duty ≥ 35 % Experienced
After fuel cut ≥ 20000 ms

Perform the diagnosis continuously after 42000 ms or more have passed since the engine started.
GD(H4SO)-11

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance > 50 Ω
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
Judgment Value
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance ≤ 50 Ω
GD(H4SO)-12

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
D: DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater open or short circuit.
The front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater performs duty control, and the output terminal voltage at ON is 0 V, and
the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage.
Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains Low.
(A)
OFF
(B)
ON (D)
0V
(C)
EN-01792
(A) Battery voltage (B) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater (C) 128 ms
output voltage
(D) Low error
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
GD(H4SO)-13

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Output voltage level Low
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater control duty < 87.5 %
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 4 ms × 250 time(s)

Judgment Value
Output voltage level High
Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second
GD(H4SO)-14

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
E: DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater open or short circuit.
The front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater performs duty control, and the output terminal voltage at ON is 0 V, and
the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage.
Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains High.
(A)
(D) OFF
(B)
ON
0V
(C)
EN-01793
(A) Battery voltage (B) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater (C) 128 ms
output voltage
(D) High error
3. ENABLE CONDITION

GD(H4SO)-15

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater control duty ≥ 12.5 %

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-16

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
F: DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

Detect the rear oxygen sensor heater open or short circuit.
The rear oxygen sensor heater performs duty control, and the output terminal voltage at ON is 0 V, and the
output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage.
Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains Low.
(A)
OFF
(B)
ON (D)
0V
(C)
EN-01792
(A) Battery voltage (B) Output voltage of the rear oxygen (C) 256 ms (cycle)
sensor heater
(D) Low error
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 1 second
Engine speed < 8000 rpm

After starting the engine, perform the diagnosis continuously when engine is low speed.
GD(H4SO)-17

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Rear oxygen sensor heater control duty < 75 %
Time Needed for Diagnosis:8 ms × 1250 time(s)

cles.
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-18

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
G: DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

Detect the rear oxygen sensor heater open or short circuit.
The rear oxygen sensor heater performs duty control, and the output terminal voltage at ON is 0 V, and the
output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage.
Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains High.
(A)
(D) OFF
(B)
ON
0V
(C)
EN-01793
(A) Battery voltage (B) Output voltage of the rear oxygen (C) 256 ms (cycle)
sensor heater
(D) High error
3. ENABLE CONDITION

After starting the engine, perform the diagnosis continuously when engine is low speed.
GD(H4SO)-19

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Rear oxygen sensor heater control duty ≥ 20 %
Time Needed for Diagnosis:8 ms × 1250 time (s)

cles.
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-20

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
H: DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION CORRELATION

Detect problems in the intake manifold pressure sensor output properties.
Judge as NG when the intake air pressure AD value is Low whereas it seemed to be High from the viewpoint
of engine condition, or when it is High whereas it seemed to be Low from the engine condition.
(1) (2)
(A)
(B)
(3)
EN-01765
(A) Output voltage (B) Absolute pressure
(1) Connector (2) Terminals (3) O-ring
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 60 °C (140 °F)

Perform the diagnosis continuously after idling.
GD(H4SO)-21

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG when Low side or High side becomes NG.
Judgment Value
Low
Throttle position ≥ 12 °
Output voltage < 1.46 V
Engine load > 0.5 g/rev (0.02 oz/rev) (AT model)
> 0.45 g/rev (0.02 oz/rev) (MT model)
High
Engine speed 600 rpm — 900 rpm
Throttle position < 4.4 ° (AT model)
< 3.6 ° (MT model)
Output voltage ≥ 2.5 V
Engine load < 0.4 g/rev (0.01 oz/rev)

Low side: 5000 ms
High side: 10000 ms
cles.
Judge as OK and clear the NG when both Low side and High side become OK.
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as OK.
Judgment Value
Low
Throttle position ≥ 12 °
Engine load > 0.5 g/rev (0.02 oz/rev) (AT model)
> 0.45 g/rev (0.02 oz/rev) (MT model)
High
Throttle position < 4.4 ° (AT model)
< 3.6 ° (MT model)
Engine load < 0.4 g/rev (0.01 oz/rev)

Low side: Less than 1 second
High side: Less than 1 second
GD(H4SO)-22

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I: DTC P0076 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1)

Detect the open circuit of the oil switching solenoid valve.
Judge as NG when the current is small even though the output duty is large.
2. ENABLE CONDITION

Judgment Value
Duty ratio ≥ 30 %
Control current < 0.026 A

Judgment Value
|Oil switching solenoid valve target current value < 0.08 A
– Oil switching solenoid valve current value|
Target current ≥ 0.11 A
GD(H4SO)-23

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
J: DTC P0077 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1)

Detect short circuits of the oil switching solenoid valve.
Judge as a short NG when the current is large even though the output duty is small.
2. ENABLE CONDITION

Judgment Value
Duty ratio <7%
Control current ≥ 0.465 A

Judgment Value
|Oil switching solenoid valve target current value < 0.08 A
– Oil switching solenoid valve current value|
GD(H4SO)-24

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
K: DTC P0082 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2)

NOTE:
TROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
L: DTC P0083 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2)
NOTE:
TROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-25

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
M: DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

Detect the malfunction of air flow sensor output properties.
Judge as a low side NG when the air flow voltage indicates a small value regardless of running in a state
where the air flow voltage increases. Judge as a high side NG when the air flow voltage indicates a large val-
ue regardless of running in a state where the air flow voltage decreases. Judge air flow sensor property NG
when the Low side or High side becomes NG.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01766
(A) Air
(1) Air flow sensor (3) Voltage (V) (4) Amount of intake air (kg (lb)/s)
(2) Intake air temperature sensor
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Perform the diagnosis continuously after idling.
GD(H4SO)-26

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG when Low side or High side becomes NG.
Judgment Value
Low
Output voltage < 1.49 V (AT model)
< 1.47 V (MT model)
Engine speed ≥ 2500 rpm (AT model)
≥ 2000 rpm (MT model)
Throttle opening angle ≥ 12 °
Intake manifold pressure ≥ 66.7 kPa (500 mmHg, 19.7 inHg)
High (1)
Throttle opening angle < 4.4 ° (AT model)
< 3.6 ° (MT model)
Intake manifold pressure ≥ 40 kPa (300 mmHg, 11.8 inHg)
High (2)
Output voltage ≥ 1.55 V (AT model)
≥ 1.45 V (MT model)
< 3.6 ° (MT model)
Intake manifold pressure ≥ 40 kPa (300 mmHg, 11.8 inHg)
Fuel system diagnosis Rich side malfunction

Low: 5000 ms
High: 10000 ms
cles.
GD(H4SO)-27

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as OK and clear the NG when both Low side and High side become OK.
Judgment Value
Low
Output voltage ≥ 1.49 V (AT model)
≥ 1.47 V (MT model)
Engine speed ≥ 2500 rpm (AT model)
≥ 2000 rpm (MT model)
Throttle opening angle ≥ 12 °
Intake manifold pressure ≥ 66.7 kPa (500 mmHg, 19.7 inHg)
High
< 3.6 ° (MT model)
Intake manifold pressure < 40 kPa (300 mmHg, 11.8 inHg)
Fuel system diagnosis Rich side normal

Low: Less than 1 second
High: Less than 1 second
GD(H4SO)-28

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
N: DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

Detect open or short circuits of the air flow sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01766
(A) Air
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-29

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Output voltage ≤ 0.22 V

Judgment Value
Output voltage > 0.22 V
GD(H4SO)-30

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
O: DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

Detect open or short circuits of the air flow sensor.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01766
(A) Air
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-31

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-32

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
P: DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
Detect the open or short circuit of intake manifold pressure sensor.
(1) (2)
(A)
(B)
(3)
EN-01765
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-33

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Output voltage ≤ 0.573 V

Judgment Value
Output voltage > 0.573 V
GD(H4SO)-34

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Q: DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
Detect the open or short circuit of intake manifold pressure sensor.
(1) (2)
(A)
(B)
(3)
EN-01765
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-35

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-36

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
R: DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
Detect the malfunction of intake air temperature sensor output property.
Judge as NG when the intake air temperature is not varied whereas it seemed to be varied from the viewpoint
of engine condition.
(1) (3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01767
(A) Air
(1) Air flow sensor (3) Resistance value (Ω) (4) Intake air temperature °C (°F)
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Engine coolant temperature at engine starting < 35 °C (95 °F)
Continuous time when the vehicle speed is less ≥ 600 s
than 140 km/h (87 MPH)
Intake air amount sum value ≥ Value of Map 1
Number of experiences under conditions below ≥ 3 time(s)

• Continuous time when vehicle speed is less than ≥ Value from Map 2
4 km/h (2.5 MPH)
• Continuous time when vehicle speed is 40 km/h ≥ 15 s
(24.9 MPH) or more
and
Establishing time of 1, 2 ≥ 15 s
1. Intake air amount ≥ 10 g/s (0.35 oz/s)
2. Vehicle speed ≥ 4 km/h (2.5 MPH)
GD(H4SO)-37

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Map 1
Engine coolant temperature –20 –10 0 10 20
°C (°F) (–4) (14) (32) (50) (68)
50000 7400 6600 5800 4500
Intake air amount sum value (g (oz)/s)
(1763.5) (261) (232.78) (204.57) (158.72)
Map 2
Engine coolant temperature –30 0 10 20
°C (°F) (–22) (32) (50) (68)
Continuous time (s) when vehicle
250 40 32 24
speed is less than 4 km/h (2.5 MPH)

Perform the diagnosis when the vehicle speed condition is met after warming up from a cold condition.
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Output voltage difference between Max. and Min. < 0.02 V(Equivalent to approximately
0.5°C (0.9°F) near 25°C)

cles.
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Output voltage difference between Max. and Min. ≥ 0.02 V
GD(H4SO)-38

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
S: DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW

Detect open or short circuit of the intake air temperature sensor.
(1) (3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01767
(A) Air
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-39

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-40

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
T: DTC P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

Detect open or short circuit of the intake air temperature sensor.
(1) (3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01767
(A) Air
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-41

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-42

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
U: DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW

Detect the open or short circuit of the engine coolant temperature sensor.
(1)
(A)
(B)
(2)
EN-02917
(A) Resistance value (kΩ) (B) Temperature °C (°F)
(1) Connector (2) Thermistor element
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-43

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-44

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
V: DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH

Detect the open or short circuit of the engine coolant temperature sensor.
(1)
(A)
(B)
(2)
EN-02917
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-45

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-46

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
W: DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT

LOW
Detect the open or short circuit of throttle position sensor 1.
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
EN-01859
(1) Throttle position sensor 1 signal (3) Throttle position sensor (4) Engine control module (ECM)
(2) Throttle position sensor 2 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage ≥6V

GD(H4SO)-47

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Sensor 1 input voltage ≤ 0.217 V

Judgment Value
Sensor 1 input voltage > 0.217 V
GD(H4SO)-48

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
X: DTC P0123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT

HIGH
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
EN-01859
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

GD(H4SO)-49

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Sensor 1 input voltage ≥ 4.858 V

Judgment Value
Sensor 1 input voltage < 4.858 V
GD(H4SO)-50

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Y: DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP

FUEL CONTROL
Detect the malfunction of engine coolant temperature output property.
Judge as NG when the engine coolant temperature does not rise in driving conditions where it should.
(1)
(A)
(B)
(2)
EN-02917
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Engine speed ≥ Value from Map
Map
Engine coolant temperature –40 –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30
°C (°F) (–40) (–22) (–4) (14) (32) (50) (68) (86)
Engine speed
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
rpm
Engine coolant temperature 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

°C (°F) (104) (122) (140) (158) (176) (194) (212) (230)
Engine speed
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
rpm

Perform the diagnosis only once after engine start.
GD(H4SO)-51

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG if the criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Engine coolant temperature < 20 °C (68 °F)
Timer for diagnosis after engine start ≥ Judgment value of
timer after engine start
Timer for diagnosis after engine start

a. Timer stop at fuel cut
b. During the driving conditions except a) above, timer counts up as follows.
64 ms + TWCNT ms (at 64 ms)
TWCNT is defined as follows,
TWCNT = 0 at idle switch ON,
TWCNT show on the following table at idle switch OFF.
0 (0) 8 (5) 16 (9.9) 24 (14.9) 32 (19.9) 40 (24.9) 48 (29.8) 56 (34.8)
–20 (–4) 0 ms 32.076 ms 39.977 ms 47.879 ms 82.544 ms 117.209 ms 154.214 ms 185.26 ms
–10 (14) 0 ms 25.704 ms 33.606 ms 41.508 ms 68.52 ms 95.532 ms 125.667 ms 155.802 ms
Temperature
0 (32) 0 ms 17.646 ms 25.548 ms 33.45 ms 53.652 ms 73.855 ms 97.12 ms 120.386 ms
°C (°F)
Judgment value of timer after engine starting

t = 573669 ms – 33924 ms × Ti
Ti : The lowest coolant temperature after engine start
cles.
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-52

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Z: DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR STA-

BLE OPERATION
Detect the malfunction of the engine coolant temperature sensor characteristics.
Memorize the engine coolant temperature and fuel temperature at the last engine stop, and use them to
judge as NG when the engine coolant temperature does not decrease when it should.
(1)
(A)
(B)
(2)
EN-02917
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Refueling from the last engine stop till None
the current engine start
Fuel level ≥ 15 2 (3.96 US gal, 3.3 Imp gal)
Engine coolant temperature at the last ≥ 75 °C (167 °F)
engine stop

Perform the diagnosis only once after starting the engine.
GD(H4SO)-53

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Engine coolant temperature at the last < 2.5 °C (4.5°F)
engine stop – Minimum engine coolant
temperature after the engine start
Fuel temperature at the last engine stop ≥ 5 °C (9°F)
– fuel temperature
Intake air temperature – fuel temperature < 2.5 °C (4.5°F)
Fuel temperature < 35 °C (95 °F)

cles.
Judgment Value
Engine coolant temperature at the last ≥ 2.5 °C (4.5°F)
engine stop – Minimum engine coolant
temperature after the engine start
GD(H4SO)-54

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AA:DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

Detect malfunctions of the thermostat function.
Judge as NG when the engine coolant temperature is lower than the estimated engine coolant temperature
and the difference between them is large. Judge as OK when the engine coolant temperature becomes to
75°C (167°F), and the difference is small, before judging NG.
(8) (2)
(2)
(7)
(6) (5)
(4) (1)
(9)
(3)
EN-01692
(1) Valve (4) Piston (7) Stop ring

(2) Spring (5) Guide (8) Wax element
(3) Stopper (6) Rubber seal (9) Jiggle valve
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-55

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Estimate ambient temperature ≥ –7 °C (19.4 °F)
Thermostat malfunction diagnosis Incomplete
Estimated coolant temperature ≥ 77 °C (170.6 °F)
Engine coolant temperature ≤ 77 °C (170.6 °F)
(Estimated – Measured) Engine coolant temperature > 30 °C (54°F)
Vehicle speed ≥ 30 km/h (18.6 MPH)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 64 ms × 3 time(s) × 152 time(s)

cles.
Judgment Value
Estimate ambient temperature ≥ –7 °C (19.4 °F)
Thermostat malfunction diagnosis Incomplete
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 77 °C (170.6 °F)
(Estimated – Measured) Engine coolant temperature ≤ 30 °C (54°F)
GD(H4SO)-56

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AB:DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect the open or short circuit of sensor.
Judge as NG, when the element voltage is out of the specified range.
(3)
(1)
(A)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
(4)
EN-01693
(A) Electromotive force (B) Air fuel ratio (C) Lean

(D) Rich
(1) Atmosphere (3) ZrO2 (4) Ceramic heater

(2) Exhaust gas
3. ENABLE CONDITION

GD(H4SO)-57

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Input voltage (+) < 1.128 V
or
Input voltage (–) < 0.23 V
or
|Input voltage (+) – Input voltage (–)| < 0.644 V

Input voltage (+): 1000 ms
Input voltage (–): 1000 ms
|Input voltage (+) – Input voltage (–)|: 1000 ms
Judgment Value
Input voltage (+) ≥ 1.128 V
Input voltage (–) ≥ 0.23 V
|Input voltage (+) – Input voltage (–)| ≥ 0.644 V
GD(H4SO)-58

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AC:DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect the open or short circuit of sensor.
Judge as NG, when the element voltage is out of the specified range.
(3)
(1)
(A)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
(4)
EN-01693

(D) Rich

(2) Exhaust gas
3. ENABLE CONDITION

GD(H4SO)-59

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Input voltage (+) > 3.589 V
or
Input voltage (–) > 3.541 V

Input voltage (+): 1000 ms
Input voltage (–): 1000 ms
Judgment Value
Input voltage (+) ≤ 3.589 V
Input voltage (–) ≤ 3.541 V
GD(H4SO)-60

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AD:DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect the slow response of front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor cover has some ventilation holes for exhaust gas. Clogged ventilation holes are
diagnosed.
When the holes are clogged, the A/F output variation becomes slow comparing with the actual A/F variation
because oxygen which reaches the zirconia layer is insufficient. Therefore, if the sensor cover holes are
clogged, the rich to lean judgment in the ECM is delayed when the actual change from rich to lean occurs.
Judge as NG when the actual movement in comparison to the ECM control amount is slow.
(2) (3)
(1)
EN-01694
(1) Cover (2) Zirconia (3) Clogging
GD(H4SO)-61

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
(3)
(1)
(A)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
(4)
EN-01693

(D) Rich

(2) Exhaust gas
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Time needed for all secondary parameters ≥ 1024 ms
to be in enable conditions
Barometric pressure > 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Closed loop control with main feedback Operation
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance 0 Ω — 50 Ω
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 120000 ms
Vehicle speed 10 km/h — 120 km/h (6.2 MPH — 74.6 MPH)
Amount of intake air 10 g/s — 40 g/s (0.35 oz/s — 1.41 oz/s)
Engine load < 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Learning value of EVAP conc. during purge < 0.2
Total time of operating canister purge ≥ 19.9 s

Perform diagnosis only once at a constant speed of 10 km/h — 120 km/h (6.2 MPH — 74.6 MPH) 120000 ms
or more after starting the engine.
GD(H4SO)-62

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Calculate faf difference every 32 ms × 4, and the λ value difference. Calculate the diagnosis value after cal-
culating 820 time(s).
Judgment Value
parafca = td2faf/td2lmd > 0.3
where,
td2faf (N) = td2faf (n–1) + |d2faf (n)|
td2lmd (N) = td2lmd (n–1) + |d2lmd (n)|
add up to 32 ms × 4 × 820 time(s).
d2faf (n) = (faf (n) – faf (n–1)) – (faf (n–1) – faf (n–2))
d2lmd (n) = (lmd (n) – lmd (n–1)) – (lmd (n–1) – lmd (n–2))
faf = main feedback compensation coefficient every 128 milliseconds
lmd = output lambda every 128 milliseconds
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 32 ms × 4 × 820 time(s)

cles.
Judgment Value
parafca = td2faf/td2lmd ≤ 0.3
where,
td2faf (N) = td2faf (n–1) + |d2faf (n)|
td2lmd (N) = td2lmd (n–1) + |d2lmd (n)|
add up to 32 ms × 4 × 820 time(s).
d2faf (n) = (faf (n) – faf (n–1)) – (faf (n–1) – faf (n–2))
d2lmd (n) = (lmd (n) – lmd (n–1)) – (lmd (n–1) – lmd (n–2))
faf = main feedback compensation coefficient every 128 milliseconds
lmd = output lambda every 128 milliseconds
Time Needed for Diagnosis:32 ms × 4 × 820 time(s)
GD(H4SO)-63

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AE:DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1

SENSOR 1)
Detect open circuits of the sensor.
Judge as NG when the impedance of the element is large.
(3)
(1)
(A)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
(4)
EN-01693

(D) Rich

(2) Exhaust gas
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-64

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Time of heater control duty at 70 % or more ≥ 36000 ms
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance. > 500 Ω

Judgment Value
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance. ≤ 500 Ω
GD(H4SO)-65

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AF:DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

Detect continuity NG of the oxygen sensor. If the oxygen sensor voltage reading is not within the probable
range considering the operating conditions, judge as NG.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696
(A) Electromotive force (B) Air fuel ratio (C) Rich

(D) Lean (E) Theoretical air fuel ratio (F) Comparative voltage
(1) Atmosphere (2) Exhaust gas (3) Electromotive force
GD(H4SO)-66

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Used for abnormality judgment
High
Secondary air system Not in operation
Closed loop control at the oxygen sensor In operation
Misfire detection every 200 rotations < 5 time(s)
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor compensation coefficient Not in limit value
Low (1)
Amount of intake air ≥ 10 g/s (0.35 oz/s)
Low (2)
Amount of intake air < 10 g/s (0.35 oz/s)
Current continuation time of the rear oxygen sensor heater ≥ 30000 ms
Low (3)
Amount of intake air < 10 g/s (0.35 oz/s)
Current continuation time of the rear oxygen sensor heater ≥ 30000 ms
Fuel cut Experienced
Used for normality judgment


After starting the engine, continuously perform the diagnosis with the same engine condition.
GD(H4SO)-67

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value DTC
High P0138
Sensor output voltage > 1.2 V
Low P0137
Sensor output voltage < 0.03 V

High: 2500 ms
Low (1): 20000 ms
Low (2): 40000 ms
Low (3): Value from Map
Map
Fuel cut time (ms) 0 2000 10000
Time Needed for Diagnosis (ms) 40000 40000 60000
cles.
Judgment Value
High P0138
Sensor output voltage ≤ 1.2 V
Low P0137
Sensor output voltage ≥ 0.03 V

High: Less than 1 second
Low (1): Less than 1 second
GD(H4SO)-68

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AG:DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0137. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-66, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT
LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-69

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AH:DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

Detect the slow response of the oxygen sensor.
Judge as NG if either the rich to lean response diagnosis or lean to rich response diagnosis is NG, and Judge
as OK if both are OK.
[Rich → lean diagnosis response]
1. Measure the response time for oxygen sensor output changes when the A/F ratio changes to rich to lean.
If the measured response time is larger than the threshold value, it is NG. If it is smaller, it is OK. Response
time calculation is categorized in two by voltage difference.
• Response time in small voltage difference: Intermediate
• Response time in large voltage difference: Wide
2. Judge as NG when the oxygen sensor voltage is large (rich) even after deceleration fuel cut has occurred.
[Lean → rich diagnosis response]
1. Measure the response time for oxygen sensor output changes when the A/F ratio changes to lean to rich.
If the measured response time is larger than the threshold value, it is NG.
2. Judge as NG when the oxygen sensor voltage remains small when recovering from a deceleration fuel
cut.
Diagnostic method
Measure the response time of the output change of the oxygen sensor when the A/F ratio changes to rich to
lean. And Judge as NG when the measured response time is larger than the threshold value.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696

GD(H4SO)-70

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Rich → lean diagnosis response
A/F main feedback control condition Complete
Deceleration fuel cut time of 5000 ms or more (intermediate) Experienced
Deceleration fuel cut time of 5000 ms or more (wide)
After fuel cut ≥ 2000 ms (Intermediate)
≥ 2000 ms (Wide)
Estimated temperature of the rear oxygen sensor element ≥ 500 °C (932 °F) (Intermediate)
≥ 500 °C (932 °F) (Wide)
Number of deceleration fuel cut ≥ 1 time(s)

Perform diagnosis once during deceleration fuel cut from a constant and high speed driving, when rear oxy-
gen sensor is warmed up sufficiently. (Pay attention to the oxygen sensor voltage for the timing of the decel-
eration.)
GD(H4SO)-71

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
• Intermediate
When the oxygen sensor output voltage changes from 0.55 V (rich) to 0.15 V (lean), calculate the minimum
response time for output change between 0.5 V and 0.2 V for the judgment criteria.
Diagnosis execution condition
(A)
(B)
Rear oxygen sensor (V)
(G)
(C)
(D)
(E)
Fuel cut on deceleration

(F)
(H)
EN-05566
(A) 0.55 V (B) 0.5 V (C) 0.2 V

(D) 0.15 V (E) 0V (F) More than 5000 ms
(G) Measure the response time. (H) Execute the malfunction judg-
ment in 2000 ms from the recov-
ery of fuel cut on deceleration.
GD(H4SO)-72

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
• Wide
When the oxygen sensor output voltage changes from 0.65 V (rich) to 0.05 V (lean), calculate the minimum
(A)
(B)
(G)
(C)
(D)
(E)

(F)
(H)
EN-05566
(A) 0.65 V (B) 0.6 V (C) 0.1 V

(D) 0.05 V (E) 0V (F) More than 5000 ms
(G) Measure the response time. (H) Execute the malfunction judg-
ment in 2000 ms from the recov-
GD(H4SO)-73

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1) Judge as NG when the judgment value is larger than the threshold value after deceleration fuel cut.
Response time (diagnosis value) > threshold value → abnormal
NOTE:
Perform NG judgment only during fuel cut, when exhaust gas apparently changes from rich → lean. Even
without deceleration fuel cut, judge as OK if the value is below the threshold.
2) Judge as NG when the oxygen sensor voltage at a deceleration fuel cut is large.
Judge as NG when oxygen sensor voltage is large even after a long period of deceleration fuel cut has com-
pleted.
Judgment value (Intermediate)
Shortest time change from rich (0.5 V O2 output) to lean > 491 ms
(0.2 V) when voltage reduces from 0.55 V to 0.15 V
or
Longest time over 0.55 V ≥ 2000 ms
Judgment value (Wide)

Shortest time change from rich (0.6 V O2 output) to lean > Value from Map
or
Longest time over 0.65 V ≥ 2000 ms
Map
Estimated temperature of rear
oxygen sensor element when 0 450 500 1000
fuel cut starts (32) (842) (932) (1832)
°C (°F)
Longest time in rich status
2000 2000 2000 2000
after fuel cut (ms)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1 time(s)

cles.
GD(H4SO)-74

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1) Regardless of a deceleration fuel cut, if the response time (diagnosis value) when the oxygen sensor volt-
age has changed from rich to lean is shorter than the threshold value (judgment value), judge as a normal
condition.
Response time (diagnosis value) ≤ threshold value → normal
2) Do not judge as a normal condition.
Judgment value (Intermediate)
Shortest time change from rich (0.5 V O2 output) to lean ≤ 491 ms
Judgment value (Wide)

Shortest time change from rich (0.6 V O2 output) to lean ≤ 2000 ms

6. ENABLE CONDITION
Lean → rich response diagnosis
A/F main feedback control condition Complete
Deceleration fuel cut time is 6000 ms or more. Experienced
After fuel cut ≥ 2000 ms
Number of deceleration fuel cut ≥ 1 time(s)

Perform diagnosis once during deceleration fuel cut from a constant and high speed driving, when rear oxy-
gen sensor is warmed up sufficiently. (Pay attention to the oxygen sensor voltage for the timing of the decel-
eration.)
GD(H4SO)-75

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
When the oxygen sensor output voltage changes from 0.25 V (lean) to 0.55 V (rich), calculate the minimum
(H)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(J)
(G)
(F)
(I)
EN-05567
(A) 0.55 V (B) 0.5 V (C) 0.3 V

(D) 0.25 V (E) 0V (F) More than 5 seconds
(G) More than 120000 ms (H) Measure the response time (diag- (I) Execute the malfunction judg-
nostic value). ment in 4000 ms from the recov-
(J) Judge NG when the voltage of
rear oxygen sensor is 0.25 V or
less for 120000 ms or more after
recovery of fuel cut on decelera-
tion.
GD(H4SO)-76

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1) Judge as NG when the judgment value is larger than the threshold value after deceleration fuel cut.
Response time (diagnosis value) > threshold value → abnormal
2) If the oxygen sensor voltage is small after recovering from a deceleration fuel cut, and remains small,
judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Shortest time change from lean (0.3 V O2 output) to rich > 4000 ms
(0.5 V) when voltage changes from 0.25 V to 0.55 V
or
Longest time under 0.25 V ≥ 120000 ms

cles.
1) Regardless of a deceleration fuel cut, if the response time (diagnosis value) when the oxygen sensor volt-
age has changed from rich to lean is shorter than the threshold value (judgment value), judge as a normal
condition.
Response time (diagnosis value) ≤ threshold value → normal
2) Do not judge as a normal condition.
Judgment Value
Shortest time change from lean (0.3 V O2 output) to rich ≤ 4000 ms
(0.5 V) when voltage changes from 0.25 V to 0.55 V
GD(H4SO)-77

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AI: DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK1

SENSOR2)
Detect the rear oxygen sensor open or short circuit. Judge as NG when the rear oxygen sensor voltage can
be determined to be abnormal considering conditions such as intake air amount, engine coolant tempera-
ture, main feedback control and deceleration fuel cut.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696

3. ENABLE CONDITION (USED ONLY FOR MALFUNCTION JUDGMENT)

Closed loop control at the rear oxygen sensor In operation
Target output voltage of rear oxygen sensor ≥ 0.55 V + 0.05 V
Deceleration fuel cut of 5000 ms or more. Experienced

Perform the diagnosis once after starting the engine.
GD(H4SO)-78

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Minimum output voltage > 0.15 V
or
Maximum output voltage < 0.55 V

cles.
Judgment Value
Diagnosis of the rear oxygen sensor volt- Incomplete
age low side
Minimum output voltage ≤ 0.15 V
Maximum output voltage ≥ 0.55 V
GD(H4SO)-79

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AJ:DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT (BANK1 SENSOR2)

Detect the malfunction of rear oxygen sensor heater.
While observing the engine condition, judge as NG if the rear oxygen sensor impedance is great.
(1) (2) (3) (4)

(5)
EN-07655
(1) Element cover (outer) (3) Sensor element (5) Sensor housing
(2) Element cover (inner) (4) Ceramic heater
3. ENABLE CONDITIONS
A/F sensor element impedance ≤ 50 Ω
A/F sensor heater control duty ≤ 75 %
Rear oxygen sensor heater control duty < 70 %

Perform the diagnosis continuously after 1000 ms seconds or more have passed since the engine started.
GD(H4SO)-80

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Output terminal for heater characteristics Low
fault detection
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 4 ms × 2500 time (s)

cles.
Judgment Value
Output terminal for heater characteristics High
fault detection
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 4 ms × 2500 time (s)
GD(H4SO)-81

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AK:DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)

Detect fuel system malfunction by the amount of main feedback control.
Diagnostic method
Fuel system is diagnosed by comparing the target air fuel ratio calculated by ECM with the actual air fuel ratio
measured by sensor.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
A/F main learning system In operation
Engine load change < 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Engine load ≥ Value of Map 1
Map 1
Engine speed (rpm) Idling 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500
0.208 0.201 0.185 0.183 0.193 0.206 0.206 0.225 0.245
Measured value (g (oz)/rev) na
(0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01)

Perform the diagnosis continuously at idling or at a constant speed after warming up the engine.
Compare the diagnosed value (fsobd) with the threshold value, and if a condition meeting the malfunction cri-
teria below continues for 10 s × 5 time(s) or more, judge that there is a fault in the fuel system.
Judgment Value
fsobd = (sglmd – tglmda) + faf + flaf ≥ Value from Map 2
In this case: sglmd = measured lambda
tglmda = target lambda
faf = Main feedback compensation coefficient
(every 64 ms)
flaf = main feedback learning compensation
coefficient
Map 2
3.2 6.4 9.6 12.8 16 19.2
Amount of air (g (oz)/s) 0 (0)
(0.11) (0.23) (0.34) (0.45) (0.56) (0.68)
fsobdL1 (%) 1.4 1.4 1.332 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 s × 5 time(s)

cles.
Judgment Value
fsobd = (sglmd – tglmda) + faf + flaf < 1.2
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 s
GD(H4SO)-82

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AL:DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)

Detect fuel system malfunction by the amount of main feedback control.
Diagnostic method
Fuel system is diagnosed by comparing the target air fuel ratio calculated by ECM with the actual air fuel ratio
measured by sensor.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
A/F main learning system In operation
Engine load change ≤ 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Learning value of EVAP conc. < 0.15
Cumulative time of canister purge after engine start ≥ 20 s
Continuous period after canister purge starting ≥ 29884 ms
Engine load ≥ Value of Map 1
Map 1
Engine speed (rpm) Idling 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500
0.208 0.201 0.185 0.183 0.193 0.206 0.206 0.225 0.245
Measured value (g (oz)/rev) na
(0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01)

Perform the diagnosis continuously at idling or at a constant speed after warming up the engine.
GD(H4SO)-83

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Compare the diagnosed value (fsobd) with the threshold value, and if a condition meeting the malfunction cri-
teria below continues for 10 s × 5 time(s) or more, judge that there is a fault in the fuel system.
Judgment Value
fsobd = (sglmd – tglmda) + faf + flaf < Value of Map 2
In this case: sglmd = measured lambda
tglmda = target lambda
faf = Main feedback compensation coefficient
(every 64 ms)
flaf = main feedback learning compensation
coefficient
Map 2
3.2 6.4 9.6 12.8 16 19.2
Amount of air (g (oz)/s) 0 (0)
(0.11) (0.23) (0.34) (0.45) (0.56) (0.68)
fsobdL1 (%) 0.6 0.6 0.668 0.735 0.735 0.735 0.735

cles.
Judge as OK when the malfunction criteria below are met for 10 seconds.
Judgment Value
fsobd = (sglmd – tglmda) + faf + flaf ≥ 0.8
GD(H4SO)-84

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AM:DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
Detect faults in the fuel temperature sensor output properties.
Diagnosis is performed in two methods (drift diagnosis and stuck diagnosis). If either is NG, judge as NG. If
both are OK, Judge as OK and clear the NG.
Drift Diagnosis
Normally fuel temperature is lower than engine coolant temperature. When the fuel temperature becomes
higher than the engine coolant temperature, the range is considered to be shifted, and judged as NG.
Stuck Diagnosis
As the engine warms up (cumulative amount of intake air after starting is large), if the fuel temperature which
should rise does not, determine as being stuck and NG.
(A)
(B)
EN-01700
(A) Resistance value (Ω) (B) Fuel temperature °C (°F)
3. ENABLE CONDITION
DRIFT DIAGNOSIS
None

GD(H4SO)-85

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Fuel level ≥ 9.6 2 (2.54 US gal, 2.11 Imp gal)
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 20 s
Engine coolant temperature – Engine coolant > 10 °C (18°F)
temperature at engine start
Fuel temperature – Engine coolant temperature ≥ 10 °C (18°F)

cles.
Judgment Value
Engine coolant temperature – Engine coolant > 10 °C (18°F)
temperature at engine start
Fuel temperature – Engine coolant temperature < 10 °C (18°F)
Engine coolant temperature < 75 °C (167 °F)

6. ENABLE CONDITION
Stuck Diagnosis

Perform the diagnosis continuously 20 seconds after starting engine.
GD(H4SO)-86

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Accumulated amount of intake air ≥ 551043 g (19435.29 oz)
Fuel temperature difference between < 2 °C (3.6°F)
Max. and Min.

cles.
Judgment Value
Fuel temperature difference between ≥ 2 °C (3.6°F)
Max. and Min.
GD(H4SO)-87

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AN:DTC P0182 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

Detect the open or short circuit of fuel temperature sensor.
(A)
(B)
EN-01700
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-88

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-89

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AO:DTC P0183 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

Detect the open or short circuit of fuel temperature sensor.
(A)
(B)
EN-01700
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-90

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-91

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AP:DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
Detect for abnormal values in the oil temperature sensor output properties.
Judge as NG when the oil temperature does not rise even though the engine is running under a condition
where it should rise.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Engine speed ≥ Value from Map
Map
°C (°F) (–40) (–22) (–4) (14) (32) (50) (68) (86)
Engine speed
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
rpm

°C (°F) (104) (122) (140) (158) (176) (194) (212) (230)
Engine speed
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
rpm

Perform the diagnosis continuously after starting the engine.
GD(H4SO)-92

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Engine oil temperature < 15 °C (59 °F)
After engine start oil temperature sensor ≥ Judgment value for after engine start oil tem-
characteristic diagnosis timer. perature sensor characteristic diagnosis timer
After engine start oil temperature sensor characteristic diagnosis timer (timer for diagnosis).
a. Timer stop at fuel cut
b. During the driving conditions except a) above, timer counts up as follows.
64 ms + TOILCNT ms (at 64 ms)
Where, TOILCNT is determined as follows,
TOILCNT = 0 at idle switch ON
For TOILCNT at Idle switch off, refer to the following table.
0 (0) 8 (5) 16 (9.9) 24 (14.9) 32 (19.9) 40 (24.9) 48 (29.8) 56 (34.8)
–30 (–22) 64 ms 73.2 ms 83.9 ms 96.3 ms 113.2 ms 133.9 ms 160.2 ms 194.6 ms
–20 (–4) 64 ms 73.3 ms 84 ms 96.6 ms 113.7 ms 135 ms 162 ms 197.4 ms
Temperature
–10 (14) 64 ms 73.4 ms 84.2 ms 96.9 ms 114.5 ms 136.4 ms 164.4 ms 201.5 ms
°C (°F)
0 (32) 64 ms 73.5 ms 84.5 ms 97.4 ms 115.6 ms 138.5 ms 168 ms 207.6 ms
10 (50) 102.2 ms 114.8 ms 129.4 ms 146.7 ms 171.7 ms 203.4 ms 245.1 ms 302.1 ms
After engine start oil temperature characteristic diagnosis timer judgment value (t).
t = 1882940 ms – 43302 ms × Ti (t ≥ 2400000)
Ti = The lowest coolant temperature after starting the engine.
cles.
Judgment Value
Engine oil temperature ≥ 15 °C (59 °F)
GD(H4SO)-93

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AQ:DTC P0197 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW

Detect the open or short circuit of the oil temperature sensor.
Judge as NG when outside of the judgment value.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-94

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AR:DTC P0198 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR HIGH

Detect the open or short circuit of the oil temperature sensor.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-95

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

LOW
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
EN-01859
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

GD(H4SO)-96

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Sensor 2 input voltage ≤ 0.926 V

Judgment Value
Sensor 2 input voltage > 0.926 V
GD(H4SO)-97

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AT:DTC P0223 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT

HIGH
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
EN-01859
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

GD(H4SO)-98

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-99

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AU:DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE DETECTED

Detect the presence of misfire occurrence. (Revolution fluctuation method)
Monitoring Misfire which influences exhaust deterioration (1.5 times of FTP) and catalyst damage is made
obligatory by the law. Misfire affecting these two has two patterns below. :
• Intermittent misfire (The same cylinder misfires in random, or different cylinders misfire in random.) : FTP
1.5 times misfire
• Every time misfire (The same cylinder misfires every time.) : FTP 1.5 times misfire, Catalyst damage mis-
fire
The following detecting methods are adopted for these detection.
1) Intermittent misfire: FTP 1.5 times misfire
• 180° Interval Difference Method (MT: 1,800 rpm or less; AT: None)
• 360° Interval Difference Method (whole range)
• 720° Interval Difference Method (3,000 rpm or more)
2) Misfire every time: FTP 1.5 times misfire, Catalyst damage misfire
• 360° Interval Difference Method
2. ENABLE CONDITION
All secondary parameters enable conditions ≥ 1024 ms
Intake manifold pressure change at 180° CA < Value of Map 1
Throttle position variation for 16 ms < 21 °
Fuel shut-off function Not in operation
Vehicle dynamic control or AT torque control Not in operation
Evaporative system leak check Not in operation
Intake manifold pressure ≥ Value from Map 2
Fuel parameter determination Not extremely low volatility
Engine speed variation for 32 ms < 1000 rpm
Map 1
• AT model
rpm 700 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6300
kPa 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3
(mmHg, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100,
inHg) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9)
• MT model
rpm 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6300
kPa 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3
(mmHg, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100,
inHg) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9)
GD(H4SO)-100

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Map 2
• AT model
rpm 700 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6300
kPa 27.6 25.6 22.9 23.2 23.9 23.6 26.8 29.7 32.3 34.1 36 37.9 40
(mmHg, (207.0, (192.0, (172.0, (174.0, (179.0, (177.0, (201.0, (223.0, (242.0, (256.0, (270.0, (284.0, (300.0,
inHg) 8.1) 7.6) 6.8) 6.9) 7) 7) 7.9) 8.8) 9.5) 10.1) 10.6) 11.2) 11.8)
• MT model
Vehicle speed < 64 km/h (39.8 MPH)
rpm 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6300
kPa 26.4 24.8 21.1 20.1 20.3 20.9 26.2 30.2 34.1 34.7 34.7 34.7 34.7
(mmHg, (198, (186, (158, (151, (152, (157, (196.6666667, (226.3333333, (256, (260, (260, (260, (260,
inHg) 7.8) 7.3) 6.2) 5.9) 6) 6.2) 7.7) 8.9) 10.1) 10.2) 10.2) 10.2) 10.2)

rpm 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6300
kPa 38.7 38.7 41.3 42 40 43.1 40 37.3 40.7 37.3 36.9 40.1 43.2
(mmHg, (290, (290, (310, (315, (300, (323, (300, (280, (305, (280, (277, (301, (324,
inHg) 11.4) 11.4) 12.2) 12.4) 11.8) 12.7) 11.8) 11) 12) 11) 10.9) 11.9) 12.8)

• If conditions are met, it is possible to detect the misfires from idling to high engine speed. However, to
avoid excessive load or harm to the engine, perform diagnosis at idle.
• Perform the diagnosis continuously.
GD(H4SO)-101

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
When a misfire occurs, the engine speed will decrease and the crankshaft position speed will change. Cal-
culate the interval difference value (diagnostic value) from crankshaft position speed by the following formu-
la, and judge whether a misfire is occurring or not comparing the calculated result with judgment value. Count
the number of misfires, if the misfire ratio is higher during 1000 revs. or 200 revs., judge corresponding cyl-
inders as NG.
Diagnostic value calculation Misfire detection every single ignition NG judgment (Misfire occurrence judg-
(Calculate from angle speed) → (Compare diagnostic value with judgment value) → ment required by the law) (Compare
number of misfire with judgment)
• 180° Interval Difference Method • FTP 1.5 times misfire NG judgment
• 360° Interval Difference Method • Catalyst damage misfire NG judgment
• 720° Interval Difference Method
As shown in the following figure, pick a cylinder as the standard and name it omg 0. And the former crank-
shaft position speed is named omg 1, the second former crankshaft position speed is named omg 2, the third
is named omg 3, etc.
(A) #3 #2 #4 #1 #3 #2 #4 #1 #3 #2
(B) omg7 omg6 omg5 omg4 omg3 omg2 omg1 omg0
EN-01774
(A) Ignition order (B) Crankshaft position speed
GD(H4SO)-102

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
180° Interval Difference Method

Diagnostic value domg 180 = (omg 1 – omg 0) – (omg 5 – omg 1)/4
Judge as a misfire in the following cases.
• domg 180 > judgment value of positive side
• domg 180 ≤ judgment value of negative side
(Judgment value before 180° CA)
domg180
Threshold valve (positive number)
domg180
Threshold valve (negative number)
Judged as misfire.
EN-02877

Diagnostic value domg 360 = (omg 1 – omg 0) – (omg 3 – omg 2)
Misfire judgment domg 360 > Judgment value → Judge as misfire
domg360
Threshold valve
domg360
Judged as misfire.
EN-03273
GD(H4SO)-103

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Diagnostic value domg 720 = (omg 1 – omg 0) – (omg 5 – omg 4)
Misfire judgment domg 720 > Judgment value → Judge as misfire
domg720
Threshold valve
domg720
Judged as misfire.
EN-03274
• FTP 1.5 times misfire (Misfire occurrence level which influences exhaust gas)
Judgment Value (Judge that malfunction occurs when the misfire ratio is high in 1000 engine revs.)
FTP emission judgment value ≥ 18 × 100/2000% in 1000 revs.
(PZEV AT model)
≥ 20 × 100/2000% in 1000 revs.
(PZEV MT model)
≥ 30 × 100/2000% in 1000 revs.
(except for PZEV model)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1000 engine revs.

cles.
Judgment Value
FTP emission judgment value < 18 × 100/2000% in 1000 revs.
(PZEV AT model)
< 20 × 100/2000% in 1000 revs.
(PZEV MT model)
< 30 × 100/2000% in 1000 revs.
(except for PZEV model)
GD(H4SO)-104

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
• Catalyst damage misfire (Misfire occurrence level damaging catalyst)

Judgment Value
Catalyst damage misfire judgment value ≥ Value from Map 3
Map 3
Intake air (g(oz)/rev)
0.16 (0.01) 0.28 (0.01) 0.4 (0.01) 0.52 (0.02) 0.64 (0.02) 0.76 (0.03) 0.92 (0.03) 1.1 (0.04)
700 100 100 100 100 90 80 64 48
1000 100 100 100 100 90 80 63 44
1500 100 100 90 80 73 67 54 40
2000 80 80 80 80 68 57 51 44
2500 80 80 73 67 62 57 51 44
Engine 3000 67 67 62 57 51 44 44 44
speed 3500 67 67 56 44 40 36 34 31
(rpm) 4000 57 57 44 31 24 20 20 20
4500 44 44 33 31 20 20 20 20
5000 44 44 38 31 20 20 20 20
5500 36 36 31 27 20 20 20 20
6000 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
6300 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

Judgment Value
Catalyst damage misfire judgment value < Value of Map 3
GD(H4SO)-105

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AV:DTC P0302 CYLINDER 2 MISFIRE DETECTED

NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0301. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-100, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MIS-
FIRE DETECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
AW:DTC P0303 CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE DETECTED
NOTE:
NOTE:
GD(H4SO)-106

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AY:DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

Detect the open or short circuit of knock sensor.
(1) (4) (5)
(2)
(A)
(3)
EN-01707
(A) To knock sensor harness
(1) Case (3) Piezoelectric element (5) Resistance

(2) Weight (4) Nut
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-107

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-108

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AZ:DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

Detect the open or short circuit of knock sensor.
(1) (4) (5)
(2)
(A)
(3)
EN-01707
(A) To knock sensor harness
(1) Case (3) Piezoelectric element (5) Resistance

(2) Weight (4) Nut
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-109

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-110

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BA:DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT

Detect the open or short circuit of the crankshaft position sensor.
Judge as NG when the crank signal is not input even though the starter was rotated.
(A)
#1BTDC10 CA #3BTDC10 CA #2BTDC10 CA #4BTDC10 CA #1BTDC10 CA
(B)
10 CA 30 CA 30 CA
EN-05538
(A) Cam signal (B) Crankshaft signal
(1)
(3)
(2)
EN-05539
(1) Crankshaft position sensor (2) Crank sprocket (3) Crankshaft half-turn
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-111

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Starter switch ON
Crankshaft position sensor signal Not detected

Judgment Value
Crankshaft position sensor signal Input exists
GD(H4SO)-112

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BB:DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
Detect for faults in crankshaft position sensor output properties.
Judge as NG when there is a problem in the number of crankshaft signals for every revolution of crankshaft.
(A)
(B)
10 CA 30 CA 30 CA
EN-05538
(1)
(3)
(2)
EN-05539
(1) Crankshaft position sensor (2) Crank sprocket (3) Crankshaft half-turn
3. ENABLE CONDITION
GD(H4SO)-113

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Perform the diagnosis continuously under 3000 rpm engine speed.
Judgment Value
Cylinder number identification Completed
Amount of crank sensor signal during 1 rev Not = 30
of crankshaft.

cles.
Judgment Value
Amount of crank sensor signal during 1 rev = 30
of crankshaft.
GD(H4SO)-114

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BC:DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SIN-

GLE SENSOR)
Detect the open or short circuit of the camshaft position sensor.
Judge as NG when the number of camshaft signals remains abnormal.
Number of camshaft signal = 2 is normal at two engine revolution.
(A)
(B)
10 CA 30 CA 30 CA
EN-05541
(A) Camshaft signal (B) Crankshaft signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-115

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Abnormality Judgment
Judgment Value
Amount of camshaft sensor signal during Not = 2
2 revs of crankshaft.
Time Needed for Diagnosis: Two engine revs. × 4 time(s)

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Voltage ≥8V
Amount of camshaft sensor signal during =2
2 revs.
Time Needed for Diagnosis: Two engine revs.
GD(H4SO)-116

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BD:DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)
Detect the malfunction of camshaft position sensor output property.
Judge as NG when the camshaft line signal input timing is shifted from the crankshaft signal because of tim-
ing belt tooth chip etc.
OK NG OK NG
(A)
(B)
10 CA 30 CA 30 CA
EN-05542
(1) (4)
(3)
(1)
(5)
(2)
EN-01782
(1) Boss (3) Air gap (5) Camshaft one revolution (crank-
shaft two revolutions)
(2) Cam sprocket (4) Camshaft position sensor
GD(H4SO)-117

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Engine operation Idling
Misfire Not detected
Engine speed variation for 4 ms ≤ 12799.8 rpm

Always perform the diagnosis continuously at idle speed.
Judgment Value
Position of camshaft position sensor signal Not between BTDC 10°CA
and BTDC 80°CA

cles.
Judgment Value
Position of camshaft position sensor signal Between BTDC10°CA and
BTDC80°CA
Time Needed for Diagnosis: Two engine revolutions
GD(H4SO)-118

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BE:DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION FLOW

Detect EGR system malfunction.
Intake manifold pressure (negative pressure) is constant because the throttle valve is fully closed during de-
celeration fuel cut. At this time, when the EGR valve is opened/closed, the intake manifold pressure will
change. EGR System OK/NG is judged by the range of this change.
(7)
(1)
(6)
(5)
(2)
(4)
(3)
EN-02192
(1) ECM (4) CPU (6) Main relay

(2) Detecting circuit (5) EGR valve (7) Battery power supply
(3) Switching circuit
GD(H4SO)-119

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C(167 °F)
Intake manifold pressure (absolute pressure) < 44 kPa (330 mmHg, 13 inHg)
Ambient air temperature ≥ 5 °C(41 °F)
Throttle position < 0.25 °
Atmospheric pressure ≥ 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Vehicle speed ≥53 km/h (32.9 MPH)
Fuel shut-off function In operation
Neutral switch OFF
After neutral switch ON/OFF change ≥ Value from Map
No load change (A/C, power steering, lighting, ≥ 5000 ms
rear defogger, heater fan and radiator fan)
Map
°C (°F) (–40) (–22) (–4) (14) (32) (50) (68) (86)
After neutral switch change
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
msec

°C (°F) (104) (122) (140) (158) (176) (194) (212) (230)
After neutral switch change
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
msec

During deceleration fuel cut from 53 km/h (approx. 33 MPH) or more, perform diagnosis once.
Be careful of vehicle speed and engine speed. (Diagnosis will not be completed if the vehicle speed and en-
gine speed conditions become out of specification due to deceleration.)
Measure the pressure values when the enable conditions are established, and perform diagnosis by calcu-
lating those results.
1. Label the intake manifold pressure value as PMOF1, which is observed when enable conditions are es-
tablished, and set the EGR target step to 50 steps (nearly full open).
2. Name the intake manifold pressure value as PMON one second after the target EGR step is set to 50
(when the enabled conditions were established). Then set the target EGR step to 0.
3. Name the intake manifold pressure value as PMOF2 one second after the target EGR step is set to 0 (two
seconds after the enabled conditions were established).
Judgment Value
PMON – (PMOF1 + PMOF2)/2 < 2.5 kPa (18.63 mmHg, 0.7 inHg)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1 time
GD(H4SO)-120

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
cles.
Start dignosis
(A) (B) (C)
ON
Deceleration fuel cut
OFF
Diagnosis enable condition
(Open)
(D)
EGR target step
(Close)
(Open)
EGR actual step
(Close)
PMON
Intake manifold pressure
(During normal condition) PMOF2
PMOF1
DIagnostic mode timer
EN-05568
(A) 3000 ms (B) 1000 ms (C) 1000 ms

(D) 45 step(s)
Judgment Value
PMON – (PMOF1 + PMOF2)/2 ≥ 2.5 kPa (18.63 mmHg, 0.7 inHg)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1 time
GD(H4SO)-121

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BF:DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1)

Detect the deterioration of the catalyst function.
Though the front oxygen sensor output would change slowly with a new catalyst, the sensor output with a de-
teriorated catalyst becomes high and the inversion time is shortened.
For this reason, the catalyst diagnosis is carried out by monitoring the front oxygen sensor output and com-
paring it with the front oxygen (A/F) sensor output.
(1) (2)
(A) (3)
(B) (3)
(C) (D)
EN-01713
(A) Normal (B) Deterioration (C) Output waveform from the front
oxygen (A/F) sensor
(D) Output waveform from the front
oxygen sensor
(1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (2) Front oxygen sensor (3) Catalytic converter
GD(H4SO)-122

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Engine coolant temperature ≥ 75 °C (167 °F) (PZEV model)
≥ 70 °C (158 °F) (AT model except for PZEV)
≥ 75 °C (167 °F) (MT model except for PZEV)
Estimated catalyst temperature ≥ 580 °C (1076 °F) (AT model)
≥ 600 °C (1112 °F) (MT model)
Learning value of evaporation gas density < 0.2
Sub feedback In operation
Evaporative system diagnosis Not in operation
Time of difference (< 0.10) between actual ≥ 1000 ms
lambda and target lambda
Vehicle speed > 75 km/h (46.6 MPH)
Amount of intake air ≥ 5 g/s (0.18 oz/s) (PZEV AT model)
≥ 7 g/s (0.25 oz/s) (except for PZEV AT model)
and
< 40 g/s (1.41 oz/s)
Engine load change every 0.5 engine revs. < 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Rear oxygen output change from 660 mV or Experienced after fuel cut
less to 660 mV or more
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 225 s (PZEV model)
≥ 218 s (except for PZEV model)
Purge execution calculated time ≥0s

Perform the diagnosis only once at a constant 75 km/h (46.6 MPH) or higher.
GD(H4SO)-123

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
After the enable conditions have been established, calculate the front oxygen (A/F) sensor lambda value de-
viation sum value (Σ |(sglmdn – sglmdn–1 )|), and rear oxygen sensor output voltage deviation sum value (Σ
|(ro2sadn – ro2sadn–1)|) in every 32 ms × 4 times. If the front oxygen (A/F) sensor lambda value deviation
sum value (Σ |(sglmdn – sglmdn–1 )|) is the predetermined value or more, calculate the judgment value.
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is within the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Σ |(ro2sadn – ro2sadn–1)| / Σ |(sglmdn – sglmdn–1)| > 11 (PZEV model)
> 19.5 (AT model except for PZEV)
> 16 (MT model except for PZEV)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 30 — 55 seconds

cles.
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is within
the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Σ |(ro2sadn – ro2sadn–1)| / Σ |(sglmdn – sglmdn–1)| ≤ 11 (PZEV model)
≤ 19.5 (AT model except for PZEV)
≤ 16 (MT model except for PZEV)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 30 — 55 seconds
GD(H4SO)-124

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BG:DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED

(SMALL LEAK)
Check if there is a leakage in fuel system or not, and perform the function diagnosis of valve.
(4)
(1) (3)
(2)
(5)
(14)
(13)
(15)
(8)
(7)
(9)
(11) (10)
(12) (6)
EN-07995
(1) Fuel gauge (6) Canister (11) Fuel level sensor

(2) Intake manifold (7) Drain valve (12) Fuel tank
(3) Throttle body (8) Drain filter (13) Fuel cut valve
(4) Purge control solenoid valve (9) Shut-off valve (14) Fuel tank pressure sensor
(5) Engine control module (ECM) (10) Fuel temperature sensor (15) Vent valve
In this system diagnosis, check for leakage and valve function is conducted by changing the fuel tank pres-
sure and monitoring the pressure change using the fuel tank pressure sensor. When in 0.04 inch diagnosis,
perform in the order of mode Z → mode A → mode B → mode C and mode D; When in 0.02 inch diagnosis,
perform in the order of mode A → mode B → mode C → mode D and mode E.
GD(H4SO)-125

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
0.04-inch Diagnosis
Mode OK Mode OK Mode OK Mode OK Mode OK

Z A B C D
NG
Early OK
Large leakage judgement END
Cancel
NG
Mode
NG
Z
Extend OK
EN-02872
Mode Mode Description Diagnosis Period

Mode Z 5000 ms + 3000 ms —
Perform purge control solenoid valve opening failure diagnosis from
(Purge control solenoid valve 5000 ms + 3000 ms +
the size of tank pressure variation from diagnosis start.
opening failure diagnosis) 13000 ms
Mode A
Calculate the tank pressure change amount (P1). 10000 ms
(Estimated evaporation amount)
Mode B Decrease the pressure in the tank to the target value by introducing
0 — 10000 ms + 25000
(Sealed negative pressure, the intake manifold pressure to the fuel tank.
ms
large leakage judgment) If the tank pressure cannot be reduced, it is diagnosed as large leak.
Mode C Wait until the tank pressure returns to the target (start level of P2
(Pressure increase check, calculation). If the tank pressure does not become the value, make 0 — 14013 ms
advanced OK judgment) advanced OK judgment.
Mode D
Calculate the tank pressure variation (P2), and obtain the diagnostic
(Negative pressure variation
value using P1 found in Mode A. 0 ms + 10000 ms
measurement, evaporation
Perform the evaporation diagnosis using the diagnostic value.
leakage diagnosis)
Mode Table for Evaporative Emission Control System Diagnosis

Mode Behavior of tank internal pressure under normal conditions Diagnostic item DTC
Roughly the same as barometric pressure (Same as 0 kPa Purge control solenoid valve is judged
Mode Z P0457
(0 mmHg, 0 inHg)) to be open.
Pressure is in proportion to amount of evaporative emis-
Mode A — None
sion.
Negative pressure is formed due to intake manifold nega-
Mode B Large leak P0457
tive pressure
Mode C Reaches target pressure — None
EVAP system large leak determina-
Mode D Pressure change is small. P0442
tion. [1.0 mm (0.04 in)]
GD(H4SO)-126

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
0.02-inch Diagnosis
Mode A OK Mode B OK Mode C OK Mode D OK Mode E
Cancel
Early OK 2
END
Cancel
Early OK 1
Cancel
Cancel
Cancel
EN-02871
Mode Mode Description Diagnosis Period

Mode A When the pressure in the tank is not near 0 mmHg, wait until it
0 — Value of Map 1
(0 point compensation) returns to 0 point (near 0 mmHg).
Mode B Decrease the pressure in the tank to the target value by introducing
0 — Value of Map 2
(Negative pressure introduced) the intake manifold pressure to the fuel tank.
Mode C Wait until the tank pressure returns to the target (start level of P2
Value from Map 3
(Negative pressure maintained) calculation).
Mode D Calculate the time it takes for the tank pressure to change to the
0 — 0 ms + Value from
(Negative pressure change Mode E shifting pressure. If the tank pressure does not change to
Map 4
calculated) the Mode E shifting pressure, make advanced OK judgment.
Mode E Calculate the amount of evaporation (P1). 0 — 0 ms + Value from
(Evaporation generated Map 4 + Value from
amount calculation) Map 5
Map 1
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 10 20, 5.28, 4.4 30, 7.93, 6.6 40, 10.57, 8.8 50, 13.21, 11 60, 15.85, 13.2
Time Needed for Diagnosis (ms) 6400 6530 6660 7020 7380 7380
Map 2
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 10.5 27, 7.13, 5.94 43, 11.36, 9.46 59.5, 15.72, 13.09
Time Needed for Diagnosis (ms) 20280 20621 21816 21816
Map 3
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 10.5 27, 7.13, 5.94 43, 11.36, 9.46 59.5, 15.72, 13.09
Time Needed for Diagnosis (ms) 21208 19288 9742 8057
GD(H4SO)-127

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Map4
Map 5
Drain valve controls the ambient air to be introduced to the canister.
EN-02293
GD(H4SO)-128

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
0.04-inch Diagnosis
Total time of canister purge operation ≥ 120000 ms
Fuel tank pressure ≥ –4 kPa (–30 mmHg, –1.2 inHg)
Intake manifold relative vacuum (relative pressure) ≥ – 13.3 kPa (– 100 mmHg, – 3.9 inHg)
Continuous time of the status where fuel level is 10.5 2 ≥ 37000 ms
(2.77 US gal, 2.31 Imp gal) — 59.5 2 (15.72 US gal,
13.09 Imp gal)
Closed air/fuel ratio control In operation
Fuel temperature –10 °C (14 °F) — 45 °C (113 °F)
Intake air temperature ≥ –10 °C (14 °F)
Pressure change every 1 second < 1.7 mmHg (Mode A)
< 1.7 mmHg (Mode D)
Minimum pressure change value every one second – < 1.7 mmHg (Mode A)
Maximum pressure change value every one second < 1.7 mmHg (Mode D)
Fuel level change every 128 milliseconds < Value of Map 6
Air fuel ratio 0.76 — 1.25
or
and
Vehicle speed 65 km/h (40.4 MPH) or more
or
and
Continue for 40000 ms or more at a vehicle speed of 50 km/h
(31.1 MPH) or more
or
and
(14.9 MPH) or more
Map 6
10, 20, 25, 30, 43, 45, 50, 60,
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 2.64, 5.28, 6.61, 7.93, 11.36, 11.89, 13.21, 15.85,
2.2 4.4 5.5 6.6 9.46 9.9 11 13.2
4, 5, 6.5, 4, 5, 5, 6, 8,
Change (2, US gal, Imp gal) 1.06, 1.32, 1.72, 1.06, 1.32, 1.32, 1.59, 2.11,
0.88 1.1 1.43 0.88 1.1 1.1 1.32 1.76
GD(H4SO)-129

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
0.02-inch Diagnosis
At starting a diagnosis
Evap. diagnosis Incomplete
Time since last incomplete 0.02-inch leakage diagnosis
When cancelling in mode A > 120000 ms
When cancelling in other than mode A > 230000 ms
Total time of canister purge operation ≥ 120000 ms
Continuous time of the status where fuel level is 10.5 2 ≥ 37000 ms
(2.77 US gal, 2.31 Imp gal) — 59.5 2 (15.72 US gal,
13.09 Imp gal)
Intake manifold relative vacuum (relative pressure) ≥ – 8 kPa (– 60 mmHg, – 2.4 inHg)
Fuel tank pressure –0.7 kPa (–5 mmHg, –0.2 inHg) — 0.4 kPa (2.9 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
Closed air/fuel ratio control In operation
Vehicle speed Continue the status of 50 km/h (31.1 MPH) — 510 km/h (316.9 MPH)
for 125000 ms or more.
or
≥ 100 km/h (62.1 MPH)
or
(55.9 MPH) or more
or
(49.7 MPH) or more
During diagnosis
Change of fuel level ≤ Value of Map 7
Pressure change every 1 second < 0.1 kPa (0.44 mmHg, 0 inHg)
Minimum pressure change value every one second – < 0.1 kPa (0.51 mmHg, 0 inHg) (Mode D)
Maximum pressure change value every one second
| Tank pressure change every 1 second | ≤ 0.1 kPa (0.75 mmHg, 0 inHg)
Barometric pressure change –0.5 kPa (–3.6 mmHg, –0.1 inHg) — 0.3 kPa (2.4 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
(Mode D)
–0.3 kPa (–2.4 mmHg, –0.1 inHg) — 0.3 kPa (2.4 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
(Mode E)
Map 7
10, 20, 25, 30, 43, 45, 50, 60,
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 2.64, 5.28, 6.61, 7.93, 11.36, 11.89, 13.21, 15.85,
2.2 4.4 5.5 6.6 9.46 9.9 11 13.2
4, 5, 6.5, 4, 5, 5, 6, 8,
Change (2, US gal, Imp gal) 1.06, 1.32, 1.72, 1.06, 1.32, 1.32, 1.59, 2.11,
0.88 1.1 1.43 0.88 1.1 1.1 1.32 1.76
GD(H4SO)-130

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

0.04-inch Diagnosis
• Perform the diagnosis only once in 335 seconds or more after starting the engine, at a constant speed of
24 km/h (15 MPH) or more for 83 seconds or more.
• Pay attention to the fuel temperature and fuel level.
0.02-inch Diagnosis
• Perform the diagnosis after 125 seconds or more have elapsed at a constant engine speed of 50 km/h (31
MPH) or higher to judge as NG or OK.
• If judgment cannot be made, repeat the diagnosis.
• Pay attention to the fuel level.
Purge control solenoid valve stuck open fault diagnosis
DTC
P0457 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/Off)
Purpose of Mode Z
When performing the leakage diagnosis of EVAP system, the purge control solenoid valve must operate nor-
mally. Therefore, mode Z is used to diagnose the purge control solenoid valve stuck open condition. Note
that if a purge control solenoid valve stuck open fault is detected, the EVAP system leakage diagnosis is can-
celled.
Diagnostic method
Purge control solenoid valve functional diagnosis is performed by monitoring the tank pressure in mode Z.
If OK judgment cannot be made, extend Mode Z, and Judge as NG when the following conditions are estab-
lished after predetermined amount of time.
Judgment Value
evptez – evptezha > 0.9 kPa (6.5 mmHg, 0.3 inHg) P0457
evptezini ≤ 0.4 kPa (2.9 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
Time with no fuel sloshing equal to or ≥ 40000 ms
over the value of Map 6
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5000 ms + 3000 ms + 13000 ms

cles.
When judgment for purge control solenoid valve stuck open NG is made, end the evaporative diagnosis.
Cancel the evaporative diagnosis when the OK/NG judgment for purge control solenoid valve stuck open
cannot be made in Mode Z.
Judge as OK and change to Mode A when the following conditions are established after 3000 ms has passed
since Mode Z started.
Judgment Value
evptez – evptezha ≤ 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) P0457
GD(H4SO)-131

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Normal
(1)
(2)
evptez
evptezha
evptezini
(3)
0 (4)
(5)
EN-02869
(1) Mode Z (3) Fuel tank pressure (5) OK judgment

(2) 3000 ms (4) 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
evptez – evptezha ≤ 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) Normal when above is established
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5000 ms + 3000 ms
GD(H4SO)-132

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Purge control solenoid valve Open Fixation
(1) (2)
(3)
(6)
evptez
(4) evptezini
0 (5)
evptezha
(7)
(8)
EN-02870
(1) Mode Z (4) Fuel tank pressure (7) 40000 ms no fuel sloshing
(2) Extended mode Z (5) 0.9 kPa (6.5 mmHg, 0.3 inHg) (8) NG judgment
(3) 5000 ms + 3000 ms + 13000 ms (6) 0.4 kPa (2.9 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
• evptezini ≤ 0.4 kPa (2.9 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)

• evptez – evptezha > 0.9 kPa (6.5 mmHg, 0.3 inHg)
• No fuel sloshing with value from Map 6 or more lasts for 40000 ms.
Judge as abnormal when all are established.
GD(H4SO)-133

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Leak Diagnosis
DTC
P0442 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Small Leak)
P0457 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/Off)
• The diagnostic consists of creating a sealed vacuum in the fuel tank and then determining the presence of
leakage from the speed at which the tank internal pressure returns to barometric pressure.
• The diagnosis is divided into the following five phases.
Mode A: (Estimated evaporation gas amount)
Calculate the tank pressure change amount (P1) when using mode A. After calculating P1, switch to mode B.
Mode B: (Negative pressure sealed)
Introduce negative pressure in the intake manifold to the tank.
Approx. 0 → –1.4 kPa (0 → –10.5 mmHg, 0 → –0.4 inHg)
When the pressure above (desired negative pressure) is reached, enters Mode C.
In this case, if the tank pressure does not reach the target negative pressure, judge that there is a large leak-
age in the system and terminate the evaporative emission control system diagnosis.
Judge as NG (large leakage) when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Time to reach target negative pressure ≥ 10000 ms + 25000 ms P0457
or
Mode B time ≥ 10000 ms
(Min. pressure value in tank when in mode B) – > –0.5 kPa (–4 mmHg, –0.2 inHg)
(Tank pressure when mode B started)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5000 ms + 3000 ms + 10000 ms + 10000 ms + 25000 ms

Mode C: (Check pressure rise)
Stop the introduction of negative pressure. (Wait until the tank pressure returns to the start level of P2 cal-
culation.)
Change to Mode D when the tank pressure returns to the start level of P2 calculation.
Judge immediate OK and change to Mode E when it does not return in spite of spending the specified time.
Tank pressure when starting Time for advanced OK
calculation of P2 judgment
–1.3 kPa (–9.75 mmHg, –0.4 inHg) 14013 ms
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5000 ms + 3000 ms + 10000 ms + 10000 ms + 25000 ms + 14013 ms
Mode D: (Measure amount of negative pressure change)
Monitor the tank pressure change amount when using mode D. In this case, the tank pressure increases,
(nears barometric pressure) because evaporation occurs. However, if any leakage exists, the pressure in-
creases additionally in proportion to this leakage. The pressure variation of this tank is P2.
After calculating P2, perform a small leak diagnosis according to the items below.
When Mode D is ended
Assign tank variations measured in Mode A and Mode D, P1 and P2, to the formula below, judge small leaks
in the system. If the measured judgment value exceeds the threshold value, it is judged to be a malfunction.
GD(H4SO)-134

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established within the predetermined time. Judge as OK and
clear the NG if the following conditions are not established within the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
P2 – 1.5 – × P1 > Value of Map 8 P0442
P2: Tank pressure that changes every 10000 ms in mode D
P1: Tank pressure that changes every 10000 ms in mode A
*1.5 –: Evaporation amount compensation value when below negative pressure (Amount of evaporation occurrence increases as
a vacuum condition increases.)
Map 8 Malfunction criteria limit for evaporation diagnosis
Fuel temperature vs. Fuel
15 °C (59 °F) 25 °C (77 °F) 35 °C (95 °F) 45 °C (113 °F)
level
10.5 2 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa
(2.77 US gal, 2.31 Imp gal) (2.1 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) (2.1 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) (2.3 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) (2.4 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
27 2 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.4 kPa
43 2 0.4 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.5 kPa
59.5 2 0.5 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.5 kPa 0.5 kPa
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 5000 ms + 3000 ms + 10000 ms + 10000 ms + 25000 ms + 14013 ms + 10000
ms
cles.
Leak Diagnosis
DTC
P0456 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (very small leak)
• The diagnostic consists of creating a sealed vacuum in the fuel tank and then determining the presence of
leakage from the speed at which the tank internal pressure returns to barometric pressure.
• The diagnosis is divided into the following five phases.
Mode A: (0 point compensation)
When the pressure in the tank is not near 0 mmHg, wait until it returns to 0 point (near 0 mmHg). Shift to mode
B when returned to the 0 point. Cancel the diagnosis when 0 point does not return in the specified time.
Mode B: (Negative pressure introduced)
Introduce negative pressure in the intake manifold to the tank.
Approx. 0 → –2 kPa (0 → –15 mmHg, 0 → –0.6 inHg)
When the pressure above (desired negative pressure) is reached, enters Mode C.
When the tank internal pressure does not reach the target negative pressure, the diagnosis is cancelled.
Mode C: (Negative pressure maintained)
Stop the introduction of negative pressure. (Wait until the tank pressure returns to the start level of P2 cal-
culation.)
Change to Mode D either when the tank pressure returns to the start level of P2 calculation, or when the pre-
determined amount of time has passed.
Mode D: (Calculate the amount of negative pressure change)
Monitor the tank pressure in mode D, calculate the pressure change in the tank (P2), and measure the time
(evpdset) for the tank pressure to change to the Mode E shifting pressure. When the Mode E shifting pres-
sure is reached, Mode E is entered. If it does not change to the Mode E shifting pressure after the predeter-
mined amount of time has passed, make advanced OK judgment or cancel the diagnosis according to the
value of P2.
GD(H4SO)-135

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Advanced OK judgment 1
Mode D time ≥ 0 ms + 20000 ms
Tank internal pressure ≤ Value of Map 9
Advanced OK judgment 2
Mode D time ≥ 0 ms + Value of Map 10
P2 ≤ Value of Map 11
Map 9
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 10.5, 2.77, 2.31 27, 7.13, 5.94 43, 11.36, 9.46 59.5, 15.72, 13.09
Tank pressure (kPa, mmHg, inHgl) –1.9, –14.61, –0.6 –1.9, –14.61, –0.6 –1.8, –13.64, –0.5 –1.8, –13.13, –0.5
Map 10
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 10, 2.64, 2.2 20, 5.28, 4.4 30, 7.93, 6.6 40, 10.57, 8.8 50, 13.21, 11 60, 15.85, 13.2
Map 11
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 10.5, 2.77, 2.31 27, 7.13, 5.94 43, 11.36, 9.46 59.5, 15.72, 13.09
Tank pressure (kPa, mmHg, inHgl) 1.1, 8.52, 0.3 1.1, 8.52, 0.3 1.3, 10, 0.4 1.3, 10, 0.4
Mode E: (Evaporation occurrence amount calculation)

Calculate the change of tank pressure with the time evpdset (P1) to judge as NG/OK according to the value
of P1. (ambiguous determination acceptable).
Judgment Value
P1 < Value of Map 12

Time (evpdset)
40000 ms 60000 ms 105000 ms 110000 ms 140000 ms 160000 ms 180000 ms 200000 ms
vs. Fuel level
10.5 2 0 kPa 0.1 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.4 kPa
(2.77 US gal, (0.00 mmHg, (0.70 mmHg, (2.18 mmHg, (2.23 mmHg, (2.53 mmHg, (2.72 mmHg, (2.90 mmHg, (2.90 mmHg,
2.31 Imp gal) 0 inHg) 0 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg)
27 2 0 kPa 0.2 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.4 kPa 0.4 kPa
5.94 Imp gal) 0 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg)
43 2 0 kPa 0.2 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0 kPa
9.46 Imp gal) 0 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0 inHg)
59.5 2 0 kPa 0.2 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.3 kPa 0.2 kPa 0 kPa
13.09 Imp gal) 0 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0.1 inHg) 0 inHg) 0 inHg)
Time needed for diagnosis: Value from Map 1 + Value from Map 2 + Value from Map 3 + 0 ms + Value from
Map 4 + 0 ms + Value from Map 4 + Value from Map 5
cles.
GD(H4SO)-136

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as OK when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
P1 > Value of Map 13

Time (evpdset)
20000 ms 60000 ms 105000 ms 110000 ms 140000 ms 160000 ms 180000 ms 200000 ms
vs. Fuel level
Time needed for diagnosis: Value from Map 1 + Value from Map 2 + Value from Map 3 + 0 ms + Value from
Map 4 + 0 ms + Value from Map 4 + Value from Map 5
GD(H4SO)-137

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BH:DTC P0447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT OPEN
Detect open or short circuit of the drain valve.
Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level.
(19) (14) (15) (16) (8) (7) (4) (5) (6) (19) (18)
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (17) (2) (1) (3)

EN-02294
(1) Bobbin (8) Magnetic plate (15) Diaphragm

(2) Coil (9) Shaft (16) Movable core
(3) Diode (10) Plate (17) Spring
(4) Stator core (11) Valve (18) Cover
(5) End plate (12) Housing (19) O-ring
(6) Body (13) Filter
(7) Yoke (14) Retainer
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-138

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Terminal output voltage when ECM outputs Low
OFF signal

Judgment Value
Terminal output voltage when ECM outputs High
OFF signal
GD(H4SO)-139

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BI: DTC P0448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT SHORTED
Detect open or short circuit of the drain valve.
(19) (14) (15) (16) (8) (7) (4) (5) (6) (19) (18)
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (17) (2) (1) (3)

EN-02294
(1) Bobbin (8) Magnetic plate (15) Diaphragm

(2) Coil (9) Shaft (16) Movable core
(3) Diode (10) Plate (17) Spring
(4) Stator core (11) Valve (18) Cover
(5) End plate (12) Housing (19) O-ring
(6) Body (13) Filter
(7) Yoke (14) Retainer
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-140

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Terminal output voltage when ECM outputs High
ON signal

Judgment Value
Terminal output voltage when ECM outputs Low
ON signal
GD(H4SO)-141

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BJ:DTC P0451 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SEN-

SOR
Detect the tank pressure sensor output property abnormality.
Judge as NG when there is no pressure variation, which should exist in the tank, considering the engine sta-
tus.
(A)
(1) (2)
(B)
(C)
EN-04462
(A) Output voltage (B) Input voltage (C) To fuel tank
(1) Connector (2) Terminals
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Barometric pressure ≥ 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)

• Perform the diagnosis continuously after 60 s have passed since the engine started.
• Pay attention to the fuel level and temperature.
GD(H4SO)-142

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Number of times that the difference between the ≥ 16 time(s)
Max. fuel level every 60 s and Min. fuel level every
60 s is 2 2 (0.53 US gal, 0.44 Imp gal) or more
(with enable condition established)
Maximum – Minimum tank pressure (with enable < 0 kPa (0.375 mmHg, 0 inHg)
condition completed)
Maximum – Minimum fuel temperature (with enable ≥ 7 °C (12.6°F)
condition completed)
If the difference between the Max. fuel level every 60 s and Min. fuel level every 60 s is less than 2 2 (0.53
US gal, 0.44 Imp gal), extend 60 s and make judgment with the Max. and Min. values for the fuel level in 60
s × 2. If there is no difference after the extension of 60 s, extend the time (60 s × 3, 60 s × 4, 60 s × 5) and
continue the judgment. If the difference between the Max. fuel level every 60 s and Min. fuel level every 60
s is 2 2 (0.53 US gal, 0.44 Imp gal) or more, the diagnosis counter counts up.
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 60 s × 16 time(s) or more
cles.
Judgment Value
Maximum – Minimum tank pressure ≥ 0 kPa (0.375 mmHg, 0 inHg)
GD(H4SO)-143

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BK:DTC P0452 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR LOW INPUT
Detect the open or short circuit of the fuel tank pressure sensor.
(A)
(1) (2)
(B)
(C)
EN-04462
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-144

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure < –7.4 kPa (–55.6 mmHg, –2.2 inHg)

Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure ≥ –7.4 kPa (–55.6 mmHg, –2.2 inHg)
GD(H4SO)-145

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BL:DTC P0453 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR HIGH INPUT
Detect the open or short circuit of the fuel tank pressure sensor.
(A)
(1) (2)
(B)
(C)
EN-04462
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Time needed for all secondary parameters to be ≥ 5000 ms
in enable conditions
All conditions of EVAP canister purge Completed
Learning value of evaporation gas concentration < 0.08
(left and right)
Main feedback compensation coefficient (left ≥ 0.9
and right)

Perform the diagnosis when purging enable conditions are met without idling.
GD(H4SO)-146

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure ≥ 7.9 kPa (59.6 mmHg, 2.3 inHg)

Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure < 7.9 kPa (59.6 mmHg, 2.3 inHg)
GD(H4SO)-147

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BM:DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED

(VERY SMALL LEAK)
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0442. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-125, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) De-
tecting Criteria.>
BN:DTC P0457 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED
(FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF)
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0442. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-125, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) De-
tecting Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-148

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BO:DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT LOW
Detect open or short circuit of the purge control solenoid valve.
(B) (A)
EN-02197
(A) To canister (B) To intake manifold
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Always perform the diagnosis after starting the engine.
GD(H4SO)-149

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Duty ratio of “ON” < 0.75
Terminal output voltage Low

cles.
Judgment Value
Terminal output voltage High
GD(H4SO)-150

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BP:DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT HIGH
Detect open or short circuit of the purge control solenoid valve.
(B) (A)
EN-02197
(A) To canister (B) To intake manifold
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Always perform the diagnosis after starting the engine.
GD(H4SO)-151

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Duty ratio of “ON” ≥ 0.25
Terminal output voltage High

cles.
Judgment Value
Terminal output voltage Low
GD(H4SO)-152

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BQ:DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

Detect malfunctions of the fuel level sensor output property.
If the fuel level does not vary in a particular driving condition / engine condition where it should, judge as NG.
(A)
0 (B)
EN-01734
(A) Fuel level (B) Resistance
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-153

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Max. – min. values of fuel level output < 2.6 2 (0.69 US gal, 0.57 Imp gal)

cles.
Judgment Value
Max. – min. values of fuel level output ≥ 2.6 2 (0.69 US gal, 0.57 Imp gal)
GD(H4SO)-154

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BR:DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW

Detect the open or short circuit of fuel level sensor. Judge as NG if out of specification.
(1) (5)
(4)
(2) (3)
EN-05371
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Fuel sub level sensor (4) Detecting circuit
(2) Fuel level sensor (5) Body integrated unit
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-155

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

cles.
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-156

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BS:DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH

Detect the open or short circuit of fuel level sensor. Judge as NG if out of specification.
(1) (5)
(4)
(2) (3)
EN-05371
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Fuel sub level sensor (4) Detecting circuit
(2) Fuel level sensor (5) Body integrated unit
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-157

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

cles.
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-158

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BT:DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT

Detect the unstable output faults from the fuel level sensor caused by noise. Judge as NG when the max. val-
ue and cumulative value of output voltage variation of the fuel level sensor is larger than the threshold value.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Engine speed ≥ 500 rpm
Idle switch ON
and
< 59.5 2 (15.72 US gal, 13.09 Imp gal)
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) ≥ 10000 ms

• Always perform the diagnosis continuously at idle speed.
• Pay attention to the fuel level.
GD(H4SO)-159

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Calculate the Max. value (DELFLMAX) and cumulative value (SUMFL) of output voltage variation of fuel level
sensor during 12.2 seconds. Judge it normal when both max. and cumulative values are not over the thresh-
old value. Otherwise, when either of them is over the threshold value, the diagnosis counter counts up. Judge
as NG if the counter indicated 4 time(s).
Diagnosis condition
(A)
Diagnosis timer
Fuel level sensor (C)

A/D value (D)
Amount of Fuel level

output voltage variation
Calculate the Max. value (DELFLMAX)

and the cumulative value (SUMFL).
6
5
4
3
2
1
Diagnosis counter 0
(B)
EN-05569
(A) 12288 ms (B) NG at 4 time(s) counts (C) Malfunction

(D) Normal
GD(H4SO)-160

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Integrated times of the condition reaching follows, ≥ 4 time(s)
DELFLMAX ≥ Value from Map
or
SUMFL ≥ 23.8 V
At this time,
DELFLMAX: Maximum difference of sensor output for 12288 ms
SUMFL: Integrated value of the sensor output deviation for12288 ms
Map
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal) 10, 2.64, 2.2 20, 5.28, 4.4 25, 6.61, 5.5 30, 7.93, 6.6 43, 11.36, 9.46 45, 11.89, 9.9 50, 13.21, 11
Measured voltage (V) 0.248 0.519 0.796 0.6 1.025 1.069 1.402
The diagnosis counter does not count up when the following conditions are completed within 12288 ms.
Maximum value – minimum value of change ≥ 0 kPa (0.375 mmHg, 0 inHg)
of tank pressure during 12288 ms
Maximum value – minimum value of battery ≥ 1.09 V
voltage during 12288 ms

cles.
Judgment Value
DELFLMAX < Value from Map
SUMFL < 23.8 V
At this time,
DELFLMAX: Maximum difference of sensor output for 12288 ms
SUMFL: Integrated value of the sensor output deviation for12288 ms
GD(H4SO)-161

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BU:DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”

Judge NG when the received data from VDCCM&H/U is abnormal vehicle speed, and the vehicle speed data
is impossible.
Vehicle speed signals are taken in to the VDC control module and hydraulic control unit, and normal/errone-
ous data of the ABS wheel speed sensor is received by CAN communication from the VDC control module
and hydraulic control unit.
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Always perform diagnosis more than 2000 ms after starting the engine.
Judgment Value
Front ABS wheel speed sensor status Malfunction
Either of the following is established
Front left wheel speed ≥ 300 km/h (186.4 MPH)
Front right wheel speed ≥ 300 km/h (186.4 MPH)

Judgment Value
Front left wheel speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
and
< 300 km/h (186.4 MPH)
Front right wheel speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
and
< 300 km/h (186.4 MPH)
GD(H4SO)-162

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BV:DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED
Detect the malfunction that actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed during idling. Judge as
NG when actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed during idling.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 10.49 s
Feedback of ISC In operation
Lambda value (left and right) ≥ 0.81
and
< 1.1
After switching air conditioner to ON/OFF ≥ 5.1 s
After intake manifold pressure changes by 4 kPa > 5.1 s
(30 mmHg, 1.2 inHg) or more.
Elapsed time after switching neutral position switch > 5.1 s
to ON/OFF
Vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH)

Perform the diagnosis continuously at idling after warming up engine.
Judgment Value
Actual engine speed – Targeted engine speed < –100 rpm
Feedback compensation for ISC Max.

cles.
Judgment Value
Actual engine speed – Targeted engine speed ≥ –100 rpm
GD(H4SO)-163

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BW:DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED
Detect the malfunction that actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed during idling. Judge as
NG when actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed during idling.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Elapsed time after starting the engine ≥ 10.49 s
Feedback of ISC In operation
Lambda value (left and right) ≥ 0.81
and
< 1.1
After switching air conditioner to ON/OFF ≥ 5.1 s
After intake manifold pressure changes by 4 kPa > 5.1 s
(30 mmHg, 1.2 inHg) or more.
Elapsed time after switching neutral position switch > 5.1 s
to ON/OFF
Vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH)

Perform the diagnosis continuously at idling after warming up engine.
Judgment Value
Actual – Target engine speed ≥ 200 rpm
Feedback value for ISC Min.

cles.
Judgment Value
Actual – Target engine speed < 200 rpm
GD(H4SO)-164

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BX:DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

Detect malfunctions of the catalyst advanced idling retard angle control.
Judge as NG when ECM is not controlling the angle properly during catalyst advanced idling retard angle
control.
Judge as NG if there is exhaust gas temperature diagnosis and idle speed diagnosis, and if any one of them
is NG.
• Exhaust gas temperature diagnosis
Judge as NG when the estimated exhausted gas temperature in 14 seconds after the cold start is below the
specified value.
• Idle speed diagnosis
Judge as NG when actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed after terminating the retard angle
control.
Cold start diagnosis Incomplete
Misfire in 200 engine revs. <5
Time after starting = 14 s

Perform the diagnosis at cold start.
• Exhaust gas temperature diagnosis
Calculate the estimated exhaust gas temperature when the diagnostic enable condition is established. Judge
as NG when the following conditions are established after engine starting within the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Estimated exhaust gas temperature < Value from Map
Map
• PZEV model
Coolant tempera-
–40 °C –30 °C –20 °C –10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C
ture after starting
(–40 °F) (–22 °F) (–4 °F) (14 °F) (32 °F) (50 °F) (68 °F) (86 °F) (104 °F) (122 °F)
the engine
Estimated exhaust
140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 138 °C 138 °C 138 °C 138 °C 138 °C
gas temperature
(284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (280.4 °F) (280.4 °F) (280.4 °F) (280.4 °F) (280.4 °F)
(AT model)
Estimated exhaust
140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 138 °C 138 °C 138 °C 138 °C 125 °C 115 °C
gas temperature
(284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (280.4 °F) (280.4 °F) (280.4 °F) (280.4 °F) (257 °F) (239 °F)
(MT model)
GD(H4SO)-165

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
• Except for PZEV model

Coolant tempera-
–40 °C –30 °C –20 °C –10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C
ture after starting
(–40 °F) (–22 °F) (–4 °F) (14 °F) (32 °F) (50 °F) (68 °F) (86 °F) (104 °F) (122 °F)
the engine
Estimated exhaust
140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 135 °C 130 °C 125 °C 125 °C
gas temperature
(284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (275 °F) (266 °F) (257 °F) (257 °F)
(AT model)
Estimated exhaust
140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 140 °C 135 °C 130 °C 120 °C 115 °C
gas temperature
(284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (284 °F) (275 °F) (266 °F) (248 °F) (239 °F)
(MT model)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 14 seconds

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Estimated exhaust gas temperature ≥ Value from Map

• Idle speed diagnosis
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established after the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Continuous time of (Target engine speed – Actual ≥ 6000 ms
engine speed > –300 rpm)
Continuous time of (actual retard amount > 30 °CA) ≥ 0 ms

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Continuous time of (Target engine speed – Actual < 6000 ms
engine speed > –300 rpm)
Continuous time of (actual retard amount > 30 °CA) < 0 ms
GD(H4SO)-166

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BY:DTC P050B COLD START IGNITION TIMING PERFORMANCE

Detect malfunctions of the catalyst advanced idling retard angle control.
Judge as NG when ECM is not controlling the angle properly during catalyst advanced idling retard angle
control.
Judge as NG when actual retard amount is under the specified value at cold start.
Cold start diagnosis Incomplete
Misfire in 200 engine revs. <5
Time after starting = 14 s

Perform the diagnosis at cold start.
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established with diagnosis enable conditions successful.
Judgment Value
Duration time of (Standard ignition timing > 5000 ms
– Actual ignition timing ≤ 0 °CA)

cles.
Judgment Value
Duration time of (Standard ignition timing > 1000 ms
– Actual ignition timing > 0 °CA)
GD(H4SO)-167

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BZ:DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT

Detect the open or short circuit of starter SW.
Judge as ON NG when the starter SW signal remains ON.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value
Engine condition After engine starting
Starter OFF signal Not detected

cles.
Judgment Value
Starter OFF signal Detected
GD(H4SO)-168

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CA:DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY

DTC Item Outline of Diagnosis
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key Incorrect immobilizer key (Use of unregistered key in body integrated unit)
P1570 Antenna Faulty antenna
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility Reference code incompatibility between body integrated unit and ECM
IMM Circuit Failure (Except
P1572 Communication failure between body integrated unit and ECM
Antenna Circuit)
Failure of body integrated unit to verify key (transponder) ID code or tran-
P1574 Key Communication Failure
sponder failure
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM ECM malfunctioning
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM Body integrated unit malfunctioning
Reference code incompatibility between body integrated unit and combina-
P1578 Meter Failure
tion meter
2. ENABLE CONDITION
When starting the engine.
Perform the diagnosis only after starting the engine.
Judge as NG when the conditions for the outline of the diagnosis of the top are established.
GD(H4SO)-169

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CB:DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY

(RAM) ERROR
Detect the malfunction of microcomputer (RAM).
When there is a problem in the CPU normal RAM, judge as NG.
If it is possible to write data to the whole area of RAM in the initial routine, and is possible to read the same
data, it is judged as OK, and if not, NG.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None
Diagnosis with the initial routine.

Perform the diagnosis as soon as the ignition switch is turned to ON.
Judgment Value
Write the specified value into the RAM. The written value cannot be read.

Judgment Value
Write the specified value into the RAM. The written value can be read.
GD(H4SO)-170

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CC:DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM)

ERROR
Judge as NG when SUM value of ROM is outside the standard value.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

Judge as NG if the criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
SUM value of ROM Standard
Time Needed for Diagnosis: Undetermined

GD(H4SO)-171

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CD:DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
Judge as NG when any one of the followings is established.
(1) Monitoring IC operates abnormally. (Monitoring IC malfunction)
(2) Input amplifier circuit of throttle position sensor 1 operates abnormally. (fourfold amplifier malfunction)
(3) CPU operates abnormally. (Instruction/flow check)
(4) A/D converter operates abnormally. (ADC malfunction)
(5) EEPROM operates abnormally. (EEPROM malfunction)
(6) Output IC operates abnormally. (Output driver malfunction)
(9) (1)
(2)
(8) (7)
(12) (10)
(3)
(7)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(13) (11)
(6)
(7)
EN-08016
(1) Throttle position sensor (6) Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 (10) CPU
(2) Throttle position sensor 1 (7) I/F circuit (11) Monitoring IC
(3) Throttle position sensor 2 (8) Amplifier circuit (12) EEPROM
(4) Accelerator pedal position sensor (9) Engine control module (ECM) (13) Output IC
(5) Accelerator pedal position sensor 1
GD(H4SO)-172

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
(1) Battery voltage ≥6V
(3) ETC control Permitted
(5) Starter switch OFF
(5) Battery voltage >6V
(6) Battery voltage ≥ 10.9 V

Judgment Value
(1) Monitoring IC operation The result and estimated
value match.
(2) | Throttle position sensor 1 opening <3°
angle – (Throttle position sensor 1 opening
angle after passing amplifier)/4 |
(3) Main CPU calculation result The result and estimated
value match.
(4) | Standard voltage – Voltage reading | < 0.078125 V
(5) EEPROM writing Writing completed
(6) Communication with output IC Possible to communicate

(1): 200 ms
(2): 24 ms
(3): 192 ms
(4): 200 ms
(5): 48 ms
(6): 2500 ms
GD(H4SO)-173

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CE:DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE

(BANK 1)
Judge as NG when the target opening angle and actual opening angle is mismatched or the current to motor
is the specified duty or more for specified time continuously.
(3) (1)
(4)
(2)
EN-01863
(1) Motor (3) Engine control module (ECM) (4) Drive circuit
(2) Throttle position sensor
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Normal operation of electronic throttle control ON

Always perform the diagnosis continuously when the electronic throttle control is operating.
Judgment Value
Difference between target opening angle Within the OK range of judgment
and actual opening angle value detail
Output duty to drive circuit < 95 %

• Difference between target opening angle and actual opening angle:
• NG judgment: Refer to the judgment time detail.
• OK judgment: 2000 ms
• Output duty to drive circuit: 2000 ms
GD(H4SO)-174

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Details of Judgment Value
(Y5)
Difference between
target opening angle
and
actual opening angle ( ) (NG area)
(Y4)
(Y3)
(Y1) (OK area)
(Y2)
0
0
(X1) (X2) (X3) (X4) (X5)
Target throttle opening angle ( )

EN-08017
(X1) 6.915 ° (X2) 11.565 ° (X3) 15.785 °

(X4) 21.285 ° (X5) 29.965 °
(Y1) 4.65 ° (Y2) 4.22 ° (Y3) 5.5 °

(Y4) 8.68 ° (Y5) 25 °
Judgment time detail
(Y1)
Judgment time
(milliseconds)
(Y2)
(Y3)
(Y4)
0
0
(X1) (X2) (X3) (X4)
Throttle position sensor 1 opening angle (˚)

EN-08018
(X1) 8.049999237 ° (X2) 9.5 ° (X3) 14.5 °

(X4) 23.5 °
(Y1) 1000 ms (Y2) 400 ms (Y3) 304 ms

(Y4) 248 ms
NOTE:
Judgment time is constantly 1000 ms with Actual opening angle ≤ Target opening angle.
GD(H4SO)-175

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CF:DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (MIL REQUEST)

Judge as NG when there is CAN communication with the TCM and there is a MIL lighting request.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value
MIL lighting request from TCM Yes

Judgment Value
MIL lighting request from TCM None
GD(H4SO)-176

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CG:DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (AT MODEL)

Judge the open or short circuit of the neutral SW.
Judge as NG when the ECM neutral terminal input differs from the reception data from TCM.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Starter relay OFF

Perform the diagnosis continuously in 2 seconds after starting the engine.
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal in ECM when “P”/“N” LOW (ON)
range in TCM are “OFF” and when the other
switches are “ON”

cles.
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal in ECM when “P”/“N” HIGH (OFF)
range in TCM are “OFF” and when the other
switches are “ON”
GD(H4SO)-177

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CH:DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (MT MODEL)

Detect the open or short circuit of neutral SW.
Judge as NG when there is no change in the neutral SW even if the driving shift was applied. (There is neutral
SW ON/OFF inversion from the vehicle speed and engine speed.)
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Starter relay OFF

Judge NG when the malfunction criteria below are completed determined times or more after the neutral SW
change.
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal (while changing LOW (ON) continues.
from a to b below)
Driving condition change From a) to b)
a) Engine speed 600 rpm — 900 rpm &
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
b) Engine speed 1600 rpm — 2550 rpm
& Vehicle speed ≥ 64 km/h (39.8 MPH)

cles.
Judge as OK and clear NG when there is change in the neutral SW.
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal (while changing Changes to HIGH (OFF).
from a to b below)
GD(H4SO)-178

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CI: DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (AT MODEL)
Judge the open or short circuit of the neutral SW.
Judge as NG when the ECM neutral terminal input differs from the reception data from TCM.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Starter relay OFF

Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal in ECM when “P”/“N” HIGH (OFF)
range in TCM are “ON” and when the other
switches are “OFF”

cles.
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal in ECM when “P”/“N” LOW (ON)
range in TCM are “ON” and when the other
switches are “OFF”
GD(H4SO)-179

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CJ:DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (MT MODEL)

Detect the open or short circuit of neutral SW.
Judge as NG when there is no change in the neutral SW even if the driving shift was applied. (There is neutral
SW ON/OFF inversion from the vehicle speed and engine speed.)
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Starter relay OFF

Judge NG when the malfunction criteria below are completed determined times or more after the neutral SW
change.
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal (while changing HIGH (OFF) continues.
from a to b below)

cles.
Judge as OK and clear NG when there is change in the neutral SW.
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal (while changing Changes to LOW (ON).
from a to b below)
GD(H4SO)-180

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CK:DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1

SENSOR1)
Detect that λ value remains low.
Judge as NG when lambda value is abnormal in accordance with λ value of front oxygen (A/F) sensor and
running conditions such as vehicle speed, amount of intake air, engine coolant temperature, sub feedback
control, etc.
λ value = Actual air fuel ratio/Theoretical air fuel ratio
λ > 1: Lean
λ < 1: Rich
(3)
(1)
(A)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
(4)
EN-01693

(D) Rich

(2) Exhaust gas
GD(H4SO)-181

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Time needed for all secondary parameters to be in enable conditions ≥ 4096 ms
Rear oxygen sensor sub feedback Execution
Rear oxygen sensor output voltage – Feedback target voltage – 0.2 V — 0.1 V
or rear oxygen sensor sub feedback compensation coefficient On Min.
or rear oxygen sensor sub feedback compensation coefficient On Max.
Load change at 180° CA < 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Targeted lambda value load compensation coefficient –0.03 — 0.000

Perform diagnosis continuously at a constant speed of 20 km/h (12.4 MPH) or more after 60000 ms have
passed since the engine started.
Judgment Value
λ value < 0.85

cles.
Judgment Value
λ value ≥ 0.85
GD(H4SO)-182

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CL:DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1

SENSOR1)
Detect that λ value remains high.
Judge as NG when lambda value is abnormal in accordance with λ value of front oxygen (A/F) sensor and
running conditions such as vehicle speed, amount of intake air, engine coolant temperature, sub feedback
control, etc.
λ value = Actual air fuel ratio/Theoretical air fuel ratio
λ > 1: Lean
λ < 1: Rich
(3)
(1)
(A)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
(4)
EN-01693

(D) Rich

(2) Exhaust gas
GD(H4SO)-183

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Time needed for all secondary parameters to be in enable conditions ≥ 4096 ms
Rear oxygen sensor sub feedback Execution
Rear oxygen sensor output voltage – Feedback target voltage – 0.2 V — 0.1 V
or rear oxygen sensor sub feedback compensation coefficient On Min.
or rear oxygen sensor sub feedback compensation coefficient On Max.
Load change at 180° CA < 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Targeted lambda value load compensation coefficient –0.03 — 0.000

Perform diagnosis continuously at a constant speed of 20 km/h (12.4 MPH) or more after 60000 ms have
passed since the engine started.
Judgment Value
λ value > 1.15

cles.
Judgment Value
λ value ≤ 1.15
GD(H4SO)-184

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CM:DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE

Judge as NG when the valve is opened more than the default opening angle, but does not move to the close
direction with the motor power stopped.
(1) (8)
S S
(3) (7)
(6)
(2)
(4) (5)
EN-01866
(1) Opener spring (4) Full closed stopper (7) DC motor

(2) Return spring (5) Throttle valve (8) Main and sub throttle sensor
(3) Intermediate stopper (6) Gear
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Motor continuity OFF

• Ignition switch ON → OFF
• Ignition switch OFF → ON (Only after clearing memory)
Judgment Value
Opening variation after continuity is set to OFF ≥ 2°
Time Needed for Diagnosis:1880 ms

GD(H4SO)-185

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CN:DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM

Detect the abnormal function (stuck closed) of the drain valve.
Judge as NG when fuel tank pressure is low.
(19) (14) (15) (16) (8) (7) (4) (5) (6) (19) (18)
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (17) (2) (1) (3)

EN-02294
(1) Bobbin (8) Magnetic plate (14) Retainer

(2) Coil (9) Shaft (15) Diaphragm
(3) Diode (10) Plate (16) Movable core
(4) Stator core (11) Valve (17) Spring
(5) End plate (12) Housing (18) Cover
(6) Body (13) Filter (19) O-ring
(7) Yoke
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Drain valve Open
Barometric pressure ≥ 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Tank pressure when starter is OFF → ON –0.4 kPa (–3.2 mmHg, –0.1 inHg)
and
1.4 kPa (10.7 mmHg, 0.4 inHg)

GD(H4SO)-186

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure ≤ –4 kPa (–30 mmHg, –1.2 inHg)

Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure > –4 kPa (–30 mmHg, –1.2 inHg)
Cumulative time when all the malfunction ≥ 30000 s
criteria below are met.
Purge control solenoid valve duty Not = 0
Intake manifold relative pressure ≥ – 26.7 kPa (– 200 mmHg, – 7.9 inHg)
GD(H4SO)-187

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CO:DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(LOW INPUT)
• Detects open or short circuit of EGR.
• Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level.
(5)
(1)
(6)
(3)
(2)
(4)
EN-02051
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Detecting circuit (5) Battery voltage
(2) Computer unit (CPU) (4) Switch circuit (6) Main relay
3. ENABLE CONDITION
EGR valve target position > 0 step

Perform diagnosis continuously during EGR operation.
GD(H4SO)-188

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Terminal voltage level when ECM outputs OFF signal Low level
or
Terminal voltage level when EGR operates Low level

Malfunction Indicator Light: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
Judgment Value
Terminal voltage level when ECM outputs OFF signal High level
Terminal voltage level when EGR operates High level
GD(H4SO)-189

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CP:DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(HIGH INPUT)
• Detects open or short circuit of EGR.
• Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level.
(5)
(1)
(6)
(3)
(2)
(4)
EN-02051
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Detecting circuit (5) Battery voltage
(2) Computer unit (CPU) (4) Switch circuit (6) Main relay
3. ENABLE CONDITION
EGR valve target position > 0 step

GD(H4SO)-190

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Terminal voltage level when ECM outputs ON signal High level
or
Terminal voltage level when EGR operates High level

Judgment Value
Terminal voltage level when ECM outputs ON signal Low level
Terminal voltage level when EGR operates Low level
GD(H4SO)-191

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CQ:DTC P1494 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P1492. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-188, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID
VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Cri-
teria.>
CR:DTC P1495 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
CS:DTC P1496 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
teria.>
CT:DTC P1497 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
Criteria.>
CU:DTC P1498 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
teria.>
CV:DTC P1499 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-192

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CW:DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

Detect the open or short circuit of starter SW.
Judge as OFF NG when it becomes after engine start despite no starter ON experience.
None

Judge as OFF NG when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Starter ON signal Not detected
Engine condition Changed from before start to
after start

cles.
Judge as OFF OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Starter ON Experienced
Starter ON diagnosis No diagnosis experience
GD(H4SO)-193

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CX:DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

Detect the open/short circuit of back-up power supply circuit.
Judge as NG when the backup power voltage is low.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value
Voltage of back-up power supply Low

Judgment Value
Voltage of back-up power supply High
GD(H4SO)-194

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CY:DTC P1570 ANTENNA

NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0513. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-169, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMO-
BILIZER KEY, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CZ:DTC P1571 REFERENCE CODE INCOMPATIBILITY
NOTE:
DA:DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT ANTENNA CIRCUIT)
NOTE:
DB:DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE
NOTE:
DC:DTC P1576 EGI CONTROL MODULE EEPROM
NOTE:
DD:DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM
NOTE:
DE:DTC P1578 METER FAILURE
NOTE:
GD(H4SO)-195

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DF:DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)
Detect the malfunction of fuel system from the size of the sub feedback learning value.
Control the sub feedback learning and judge as NG when the learning value is in the lean zone.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Conditions for carrying out the sub feedback learning Completed
Continuous time when all conditions are established. ≥1s

Perform the diagnosis continuously when the vehicle is idling or running at a constant speed of 80 km/h (50
MPH) or more.
GD(H4SO)-196

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Sub feedback learning value < –0.032

cles.
Judgment Value
Sub feedback learning value ≥ –0.032 + 0
GD(H4SO)-197

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DG:DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)
Detect the malfunction of fuel system from the size of the sub feedback learning value.
Sub feedback learning is being performed. When the learning value goes to the rich side, judge as NG.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Conditions for carrying out the sub feedback learning Completed
Continuous time when all conditions are established. ≥1s

Perform the diagnosis continuously when the vehicle is idling or running at a constant speed of 80 km/h (50
MPH) or more.
GD(H4SO)-198

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Sub feedback learning value ≥ 0.032 (PZEV model)
≥ 0.02 (except for PZEV model)

cles.
Judgment Value
Sub feedback learning value < 0.032 + 0 (PZEV model)
< 0.02 + 0 (except for PZEV model)
GD(H4SO)-199

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DH:DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE
Judge as NG when the motor current becomes large or drive circuit is heated.
12V 12V
(1)
(6)
(2) (3)
(4) (7)
(2) (5)
EN-01867
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (4) Drive circuit (6) Electronic throttle control relay
(2) Detecting circuit (5) Temperature detection circuit (7) Motor
(3) Overcurrent detection circuit
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Under control of electronic throttle control ON

GD(H4SO)-200

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Motor current ≤8A
Drive circuit inner temperature ≤ 175°C (347°F)

• 500 ms (NG judgment)
• 2000 ms (OK judgment)
GD(H4SO)-201

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DI: DTC P2102 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW

Judge as NG when the electronic throttle control power is not supplied even when ECM sets the electronic
throttle control relay to ON.
12V 12V
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3) (5)
EN-01868
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Drive circuit (5) Motor
(2) Voltage detection circuit (4) Electronic throttle control relay
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Electronic throttle control relay output ON

Judgment Value
Motor power voltage ≥5V

GD(H4SO)-202

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DJ:DTC P2103 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH

Judge as NG when the electronic throttle control power is supplied even when ECM sets the electronic throt-
tle control relay to OFF.
12V 12V
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3) (5)
EN-01868
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Drive circuit (5) Motor
(2) Voltage detection circuit (4) Electronic throttle control relay
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Electronic throttle control relay output OFF

• When ignition switch ON → OFF
• Ignition switch OFF → ON (Only after clearing memory)
Judgment Value
Motor power voltage ≤5V

GD(H4SO)-203

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DK:DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR “A” MINIMUM STOP

PERFORMANCE
Judge as NG when full close point learning cannot conducted or abnormal value is detected.
(1) (3)
(2)
(4)
EN-01869
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Motor (4) Throttle position sensor
(2) Drive circuit
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON → OFF
Ignition switch (only after clear memory) OFF → ON

Perform the diagnosis at full closed point learning.
Judgment Value
Throttle sensor opening angle at full close point learning 10.127° or more,
19.872° or less
Throttle opening angle when the ignition switch is ON – ≥ 1.683°
Throttle minimum stop position
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 8 — 80 ms

GD(H4SO)-204

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DL:DTC P2122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT

LOW INPUT
Detect the open or short circuit of accelerator pedal position sensor 1.
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
EN-01861
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Accelerator pedal position sensor (4) Accelerator pedal position sensor
2 signal
(2) Accelerator pedal position sensor
1 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

GD(H4SO)-205

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-206

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DM:DTC P2123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT

HIGH INPUT
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
EN-01861
2 signal
1 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

GD(H4SO)-207

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-208

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DN:DTC P2127 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT

LOW INPUT
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
EN-01861
2 signal
1 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

GD(H4SO)-209

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-210

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DO:DTC P2128 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT

HIGH INPUT
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
EN-01861
2 signal
1 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

GD(H4SO)-211

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-212

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DP:DTC P2135 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A”/“B” VOLT-

AGE CORRELATION
Judge as NG when the signal level of throttle position sensor 1 is different from the throttle position sensor 2.
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
EN-01859
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

GD(H4SO)-213

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Signal difference between two sensors Within the NG range of judgment
value detail
(Y5) (NG area)
(Y4)
Sensor output (Y3)

difference (˚)
(Y2)
(Y1) (OK area)
0
0
(X1) (X2) (X3) (X4)
Throttle position sensor 1 opening angle (˚)

EN-08032
(X1) 2.125 ° (X2) 4.25 ° (X3) 9°

(X4) 31.625 °
(Y1) 5.15 ° (Y2) 6.15 ° (Y3) 8.28 °

(Y4) 10.4 ° (Y5) 12.4 °

Judgment Value
Signal difference between two sensors Within the OK range of judgment
value detail
GD(H4SO)-214

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DQ:DTC P2138 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “D”/“E” VOLT-

AGE CORRELATION
Judge as NG when the signal level of throttle position sensor 1 is different from the throttle position sensor 2.
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
EN-01861
2 signal
1 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

GD(H4SO)-215

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Signal difference between two sensors Within the NG range of judgment
value detail
(Y5)
(Y4) (NG area)
Sensor output
(Y3)
difference (˚)
(Y2)
(Y1)
(OK area)
0
0 (X1) (X2) (X3) (X4)
Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 opening angle (˚)
EN-08033
(X1) 0.6 ° (X2) 1.2 ° (X3) 2°

(X4) 4°
(Y1) 1.465 ° (Y2) 1.597 ° (Y3) 1.663 °

(Y4) 2.455 ° (Y5) 3.116 °

Judgment Value
Signal difference between two sensors Within the OK range of judgment
value detail
GD(H4SO)-216

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DR:DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

Detect the malfunction of barometric pressure sensor output property.
Judge as NG when the barometric pressure sensor output is largely different from the intake manifold pres-
sure at engine start.
The barometric pressure sensor is built into the ECM.
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Perform the diagnosis once at ignition switch ON.
Judgment Value
|Barometric pressure – Intake manifold pressure| ≥ 26.7 kPa (200 mmHg, 7.9 inHg)
|Intake manifold pressure at engine start – Intake < 1.3 kPa (9.99 mmHg, 0.4 inHg)
manifold pressure|

cles.
Judgment Value
|Barometric pressure – Intake manifold pressure| < 26.7 kPa (200 mmHg, 7.9 inHg)
GD(H4SO)-217

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DS:DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW

Detect the open/short circuit of the barometric pressure sensor.
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value
Output voltage < 1.707 V (PZEV AT model)
< 2.006 V (except for PZEV AT model)

Judgment Value
Output voltage ≥ 1.707 V (PZEV AT model)
≥ 2.006 V (except for PZEV AT model)
GD(H4SO)-218

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DT:DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH

Detect the open/short circuit of the barometric pressure sensor.
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value
Output voltage ≥ 4.234 V (PZEV AT model)
≥ 4.016 V (except for PZEV AT model)

Judgment Value
Output voltage < 4.234 V (PZEV AT model)
< 4.016 V (except for PZEV AT model)
GD(H4SO)-219

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DU:DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS ‘OFF’ DETECTION

Detect malfunction of CAN communication.
When CAN communications is not possible, and CAN communications with TCM, VDC CM and body integrat-
ed unit is not possible, judge as NG if data from the TCM, VDC CM and body integrated unit are not normal.
ECM, TCM, VDC CM and body integrated unit are connected by high speed CAN.
(Common Specifications)
CAN Protocol 2.0 B (Active)
Frame Format: 11 Bit ID Frame (Standard Frame)
(High speed CAN)
Conforms to ISO11898
Communication Speed: 500 kbps
None

Perform the diagnosis continuously after starting the engine.
Judgment Value
Battery voltage > 10.9 V
Starter switch OFF
Engine run
bus off flag or error warning flag set (error)
or
ID received from control module connected to driving system CAN None during 500 milliseconds
or
Data updated from control module connected to driving system CAN None during 2000 milliseconds

Judgment Value
Battery voltage > 10.9 V
Starter switch OFF
Engine run
bus off flag or error warning flag clear (No error)
ID received from control module connected to driving system CAN Yes
Data updated from control module connected to driving system CAN Yes

GD(H4SO)-220

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DV:DTC U0101 CAN (TCU) DATA NOT LOADED

NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC U0073. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-220, DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS
‘OFF’ DETECTION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
DW:DTC U0122 CAN (VDC) DATA NOT LOADED
NOTE:
DX:DTC U0140 CAN (BCU) DATA NOT LOADED
NOTE:
DY:DTC U0402 CAN (TCU) DATA ABNORMAL
NOTE:
DZ:DTC U0416 CAN (VDC) DATA ABNORMAL
NOTE:
EA:DTC U0422 CAN (BCU) DATA ABNORMAL
NOTE:
GD(H4SO)-221

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
GD(H4SO)-222
ENGINE 2 SECTION
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS) FU(H4DOTC)
EMISSION CONTROL
EC(H4DOTC)
(AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)
INTAKE (INDUCTION) IN(H4DOTC)
MECHANICAL ME(H4DOTC)
with the necessary information and data EXHAUST EX(H4DOTC)
of SUBARU vehicles.
COOLING CO(H4DOTC)
sembling, inspection and adjustment of LUBRICATION LU(H4DOTC)
Please peruse and utilize this manual SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS SP(H4DOTC)
their vehicle in optimum condition. IGNITION IG(H4DOTC)
SUBARU genuine parts. STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS SC(H4DOTC)
EN(H4DOTC)
(diag)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION GD(H4DOTC)

approval.

FU(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Throttle Body ............................................................................................15
3. Intake Manifold .........................................................................................17
4. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor .......................................................33
5. Crankshaft Position Sensor ......................................................................34
6. Camshaft Position Sensor ........................................................................36
7. Knock Sensor ...........................................................................................38
8. Throttle Position Sensor ...........................................................................40
9. Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temperature Sensor .................................41
10. Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor .........................................................42
11. Fuel Injector .............................................................................................44
12. Tumble Generator Valve Assembly .........................................................47
13. Tumble Generator Valve Actuator ............................................................49
14. Oil Flow Control Solenoid Valve ...............................................................50
15. Wastegate Control Solenoid Valve ..........................................................52
16. Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor ......................................................................54
17. Rear Oxygen Sensor ................................................................................56
18. Engine Control Module (ECM) .................................................................58
19. Main Relay ...............................................................................................59
20. Fuel Pump Relay ......................................................................................61
21. Electronic Throttle Control Relay .............................................................63
22. Fuel Pump Control Unit ............................................................................65
23. Fuel ..........................................................................................................66
24. Fuel Tank .................................................................................................68
25. Fuel Filler Pipe .........................................................................................75
26. Fuel Pump ................................................................................................79
29. Fuel Filter .................................................................................................85
30. Fuel Damper ............................................................................................87
31. Fuel Delivery, Return and Evaporation Lines ...........................................88
32. Fuel System Trouble in General ..............................................................94
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Capacity 70 2 (18.5 US gal, 15.4 Imp gal)
Fuel tank
Install locations Under rear seat
Type Impeller
Shutoff discharge pressure 850 kPa (8.67 kgf/cm2, 123.3 psi) or less
Fuel pump
175 2 (46.2 US gal, 38.5 Imp gal)/h or more.
Discharge rate
[12 V at 300 kPa (3.06 kgf/cm2, 43.5 psi)]
Fuel filter In-tank type
FU(H4DOTC)-2
General Description
B: COMPONENT
1. INTAKE MANIFOLD 1
(41) T5
T7 A
(40)
(2)
T9 T2
T4 (42) (4)
T6 T2 (3)
(1)
(12) T7 (5) (3)
(14) (6)
(8)
(13)
C G
C T4 (7) (8)
F
H (15)
T8 (11) D (8)
E B
(20)
(16) (21) T1 (9)

(23)
(17) (11)
(24) (10)
T4
(18) T1
(22) T4
T1
(19) D I
T8 (23) (24) H
E
(23) F
T4 A (26)
(27) I
T1 T8
(23)
(34) T4
(25)
(30) T10 (24)
T8 (31)
T1
(35) (32) G
(33) (27)
T4 (23)
(31) (28)
(29) (23) (30)
(32) T1
B T10
(33) (36) (31)
T8 T8
T3
(32)
(33) T8
(37)
(39)
(36)
(38)
(37) T8 T8
(38)
FU-06193
FU(H4DOTC)-3
General Description
(1) Intake manifold (19) Vacuum hose D (37) Gasket

(2) Vacuum control hose (20) Purge control solenoid valve 2 (38) Knock pin
(3) Clamp (21) Vacuum hose E (39) Intake manifold protector LH
(4) Intake duct (22) Vacuum hose F (40) Nipple (except for model with inte-
grated plate)
(5) Throttle body (23) Clamp (41) Nipple (model with integrated
plate)
(6) O-ring (24) Fuel hose A (42) O-ring (model with integrated
plate)
(7) Preheater hose A (25) Fuel delivery pipe
(8) Clip (26) Fuel hose B Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(9) Preheater hose B (27) Fuel pipe T1: 1.25 (0.1, 0.9)
(10) Pressure regulator vacuum hose (28) O-ring T2: 3 (0.3, 2.2)
(11) O-ring (29) Pressure regulator T3: 3.45 (0.4, 2.5)
(12) Purge control solenoid valve 1 (30) O-ring T4: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(13) Vacuum hose A (31) Grommet T5: 7.8 (0.8, 5.8)
(14) Vacuum hose B (32) Fuel injector T6: 8 (0.8, 5.9)
(15) Solenoid valve bracket (33) Seal ring T7: 8.3 (0.8, 6.1)
(16) Manifold absolute pressure sensor (34) PCV pipe T8: 19 (1.9, 14.0)
(17) Vacuum hose C (35) Intake manifold protector RH T9: 23 (2.3, 17.0)
(18) Filter (36) Tumble generator valve ASSY T10: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
FU(H4DOTC)-4
General Description
2. INTAKE MANIFOLD 2
(1)
(2) T1
T2
(4)
(3)
T1
(5)
(7)
(8)
(6)
(7)
FU-05606
(1) Intake manifold (5) Vacuum hose B Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Engine harness (6) Vacuum hose C T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) Vacuum hose A (7) Clip T2: 19 (1.9, 14.0)
(4) PCV pipe (8) Brake booster vacuum hose
FU(H4DOTC)-5
General Description
3. CRANKSHAFT POSITION, CAMSHAFT POSITION AND KNOCK SENSORS
(4) T1
T2
T1
T1
(3)
(1) (2)
(6)
T1
(5)
T1
(7)
T1
T1 T1
FU-04844
(1) Crankshaft position sensor (5) Exhaust camshaft position sensor Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
LH
(2) Knock sensor (6) Exhaust camshaft position sensor T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
RH
(3) Intake camshaft position sensor (7) Engine harness cover T2: 24 (2.4, 17.7)
LH
(4) Intake camshaft position sensor
RH
FU(H4DOTC)-6
General Description
4. FUEL TANK
(23)
T1
(8)
T1
T1
A
(7)
(14)
B C
(9) (24) (24)
(12)
(25)
(25)
(10)
(1)
D (11)
(25)
(27)
(25)
(26)
(24)
(15)
(13)
T4
(2)
C
(25)
(3) B
T4 (16)
(16)
(17) T4
(16) (6)
(16)
A
T3 D
T3
(4)
T3
(18)
(19)
(20) (5) (16)
(21) (22)
T2 (22)
T3 T2
(22) (22)
T2 T3
T2
FU-05586
FU(H4DOTC)-7
General Description
(1) Fuel tank (13) Fuel sub level sensor gasket (25) Cushion
(2) Fuel tank band RH (14) Fuel sub level sensor protector (26) Cushion
(3) Fuel tank band LH (15) Fuel sub level sensor filter (27) Cushion
(4) Fuel delivery tube (16) Retainer
(5) Fuel return tube (17) Stopper Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(6) Fuel sub delivery tube (18) Heat shield cover T1: 4.4 (0.4, 3.2)
(7) Fuel pump ASSY (19) Fuel tank protector RH T2: 9 (0.9, 6.6)
(8) Fuel pump upper plate (20) Fuel tank protector LH T3: 18 (1.8, 13.3)
(9) Fuel pump gasket (21) Clip T4: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
(10) Fuel sub level sensor upper plate (22) Self-locking nut
cushion
(11) Fuel sub level sensor (23) Rubber cap
(12) Fuel sub level sensor upper plate (24) Cushion
FU(H4DOTC)-8
General Description
5. FUEL LINE
(26)
(29)
T4 (28) (24)
(41) G
F
(45) (1) F
(1) T3 (23)
(40) (27)
H
(1) I
(1) (36) (25)
(42) (1) (47) (1) D
F
(44) (1) (1) (30)
(1) (39) (31) T6
(38) (33)
(1) (1) E
(34) I
(43) G
T2 (35) (22)
(37) T4
(32) D F
(1) (30)
H
(19) (17) (21)
E F
(17) (1)
(18)
(20)
(17) (46)
(1)
C
(17) (16)
T4 T4
(15)
(5)
(1)
T1 (7) C
(10) (1)
T1
(14)
(12) (1)
(12)
(1) (6) (4) A
(5)
B (13)
(2)
(3)
(12)
(9) T1
(12)
A
T1
B
(8)
T5 (11)
FU-05587
FU(H4DOTC)-9
General Description
(1) Clip (20) Connector (39) Charge hose

(2) Fuel return hose A (21) PCV drain tube (40) Circulate hose
(3) Fuel return hose B (22) Vent tube (41) Circulate tube
(4) Evaporation hose (23) Drain valve (42) Pressure hose
(5) Connect check cover (24) Drain filter (43) Fuel tank pressure sensor bracket
(6) Fuel delivery hose A (25) Canister (44) Vacuum hose
(7) Fuel delivery hose B (26) Canister protector (45) Fuel tank pressure sensor
(8) Fuel damper holder (27) Charge tube (46) Purge hose B
(9) Fuel damper (28) Canister drain tube (47) Clamp
(10) Fuel damper (29) Drain tube ASSY
(11) Fuel damper bracket (30) Connector Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(12) Clamp (31) PCV drain hose T1: 1.25 (0.1, 0.9)
(13) Fuel pipe ASSY (32) PCV outlet hose T2: 2.0 (0.2, 1.5)
(14) Purge hose A (33) Pressure control solenoid valve T3: 2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
(15) Purge pipe (34) Pressure control solenoid valve T4: 7.35 (0.7, 5.4)
bracket A
(16) Air vent hose A (35) Pressure control solenoid valve T5: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
bracket B
(17) Clip (36) PCV inlet hose T6: 8 (0.8, 5.9)
(18) Connector (37) Clamp
(19) Air vent hose B (38) Fuel filler hose
FU(H4DOTC)-10
General Description
6. FUEL FILLER PIPE

(3)
(1) (10)
(2) T2
(4)
(11)
(12)
(5)
(11)
(14) (6)
(15) T4
(13)
A
T4
(14)
(16) (7)
A
(18)
(17) T4
(8) T3
T1 T4
(8)
B
B
(9)
(19)
T4
FU-05588
(1) Fuel filler cap (10) Shut valve (19) Grommet

(2) Fuel filler pipe protector (11) Clip
(3) Clip (12) Evaporation hose A Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Neck holder A (13) Evaporation pipe A T1: 1 (0.1, 0.7)
(5) Neck holder B (14) Clip T2: 4.5 (0.5, 3.3)
(6) Fuel filler pipe (15) Evaporation hose B T3: 7.35 (0.7, 5.4)
(7) Fuel filler pipe bracket A (16) Grommet T4: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(8) Fuel filler pipe bracket B (17) Evaporation pipe B
(9) Fuel filler pipe bracket C (18) Evaporation pipe protector
FU(H4DOTC)-11
General Description
7. FUEL PUMP
(1)
(3)
B
A
(4)
(2)
(5) (2)
(6)
(7)
(11)
(10)
(8)
(11)
(9)
FU-08403
(1) Fuel filter ASSY (5) Fuel pump (9) Fuel level sensor (model with fuel
(2) Pump module spring (6) Support rubber cushion (10) Fuel level sensor (model with fuel
(3) Fuel pump harness (7) Fuel pump holder (11) Fuel temperature sensor
(4) Gasket spacer (8) Fuel chamber ASSY
FU(H4DOTC)-12
General Description
C: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
• Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the work-
ing area.
be spilled. If the fuel spills, wipe it off immediately to
prevent from penetrating into floor or flowing out for
environmental protection.
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing fuel.
FU(H4DOTC)-13
General Description
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
18371AA000 CONNECTOR Used for disconnecting the quick connector on
REMOVER the fuel return hose side of the engine compart-
ment (intake manifold).
ST18371AA000
18471AA000 FUEL PIPE Used for draining fuel.
ADAPTER
ST18471AA000
42099AE000 QUICK CONNEC- Used for removing the quick connector.
TOR RELEASE
ST42099AE000
1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for draining fuel and each inspection.
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Oscilloscope Used for inspecting the waveform of each sensor.
Sensor socket Used for removing and installing the front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear oxygen sensor.
FU(H4DOTC)-14
Throttle Body
2. Throttle Body 9) Remove the bolts which secure the throttle body
to the intake manifold, and remove the throttle
A: REMOVAL body.
FU-04954
B: INSTALLATION
IG-02107
4) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- NOTE:
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> • Use new O-rings.
5) Drain approximately 2.0 2 (2.1 US qt, 1.8 Imp • When installing the intake duct to the throttle
qt) of engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-14, body, align the protrusion (a) on the intake duct to
DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE- the installation position mark (b) on the throttle
MENT, Engine Coolant.> body to install.
(b)
7) Remove the bolts which secure the engine har-
ness and PCV pipe to the intake manifold, and re-
move the intake duct from the throttle body.
(a)
FU-04706
Tightening torque:
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
FU-04952
8) Disconnect the connectors and preheater hoses

from the throttle position sensor.
FU-04954
FU-04953
FU(H4DOTC)-15
Throttle Body
Tightening torque: Throttle Accelerator

T1: 3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb) Terminal No. Standard
sensor pedal
T2: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) Not depressed
Approx. 0.6 V
(Full closed)
T1 Main 18 (+) and 29 (–)
Depressed
T2
Approx. 4.04 V
(Full opened)
Not depressed
Approx. 1.48 V
(Full closed)
Sub 28 (+) and 29 (–)
Depressed
Approx. 4.23 V
(Full opened)
2. THROTTLE SENSOR INSPECTION

FU-04955 (METHOD WITH SUBARU SELECT MONI-
TOR)
C: INSPECTION 1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF)
1. THROTTLE SENSOR INSPECTION 2) Read the throttle opening angle signal and volt-
(METHOD WITH CIRCUIT TESTER) age of throttle sensor using Subaru Select Monitor.
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, READ CURRENT
1) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI- DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE), OPERA-
65, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> TION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
3) Check the voltage between ECM connector ter- Throttle opening
Throttle sensor Standard
minals. angle signal
0.0% Approx. 0.6 V
Main
100.0% Approx. 4.04 V
0.0% Approx. 1.48 V
Sub
100.0% Approx. 4.23 V
FU-04956
(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
34 33 32 31 30 29 28
V
FU-04049
FU(H4DOTC)-16
Intake Manifold
3. Intake Manifold 10) Disconnect the connectors from wastegate

control solenoid valve, and remove the clip (A)
A: REMOVAL which secure the engine harness.
1) Remove the collector cover. (A)
AC-20, PROCEDURE, Refrigerant Recovery Pro-
cedure.>
3) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES-
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.>
FU-04709

12) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
14) Disconnect the A/C pressure hoses from A/C
compressor. <Ref. to AC-68, REMOVAL, Hose and
IG-02107 Pipe.>
5) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler 15) Disconnect the vacuum hose from the PCV
cap. valve.
8) Drain approximately 2.0 2 (2.1 US qt, 1.8 Imp
qt) of coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-14, DRAIN-
ING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACEMENT,
Engine Coolant.>
9) Disconnect the connectors from exhaust oil flow
control solenoid valve (A) and exhaust camshaft
position sensor (B). FU-04957
16) Remove the bolts which secure the engine har-

(A) ness and PCV pipe to the intake manifold, and re-
move the intake duct from the throttle body.
(B)
FU-04952
(B)
(A)
FU-04708
FU(H4DOTC)-17
Intake Manifold
17) Disconnect the preheater hose from throttle 20) Disconnect the vacuum hose from blow-by
body. pipe, and remove the bolt securing the blow-by
pipe to the intake manifold protector RH.
FU-04958
FU-04959
18) Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose.
21) Disconnect vacuum hose (A) and vacuum con-
trol hose (B) from the PCV pipe.
22) Remove the nut securing the PCV pipe to the
intake manifold protector RH, and move the PCV
pipe in the forward direction of the vehicle.
(A)
ME-04380
19) Disconnect the vacuum hose from rocker cov-

er.
(B)
FU-04961
23) Disconnect the bulkhead harness connector

from the engine harness connector (brown).
ME-04376
ME-04391
FU(H4DOTC)-18
Intake Manifold
24) Remove the bolt securing the bulkhead har- 28) Remove the clip which secure the generator
ness connector bracket, and disconnect the bulk- cord to the intake manifold protector LH.
head harness connector from the engine harness
connector (black).
ME-04963
29) Disconnect the connector from the knock sen-

ME-04377
sor.
25) Remove the engine harness connector from
the engine rear hanger.
FU-05126
30) Disconnect the connector from the intake cam-

ME-04378
shaft position sensor.
26) Disconnect the connectors from the engine
coolant temperature sensor (A), oil pressure switch
(B) and crankshaft position sensor (C).
(A)
(B)
(C)
FU-04962
27) Disconnect the connectors from front oxygen

(A/F) sensor (A) and rear oxygen sensor (B).
(B)
(A)
FU-04727
(A)
FU-04724
FU(H4DOTC)-19
Intake Manifold
31) Disconnect the connector from the intake oil 34) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push ST
flow control solenoid valve. in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect the fuel
delivery hose.
LEASE
CAUTION:
or cloth.
(A)
ST
(B) (C)
ME-04382
(A) Fuel delivery hose

(B) Fuel return hose
FU-04964 (C) Evaporation hose
32) Disconnect the connector (A) from oil level
switch. 35) Disconnect the fuel return hose using the ST.
33) Disconnect the connector (B) from ignition coil, ST 18371AA000 CONNECTOR REMOVER
and remove the clips (C) and bolt (D) securing the CAUTION:
engine harness or oil level switch harness to the • Be careful not to spill fuel.
rocker cover. • Catch the fuel from hoses using a container
or cloth.
(1) Attach ST to the fuel return pipe as shown in
the figure.
(C)
(B)
ST
ME-04969
(D) (A)
(B)
(C)
FU-04965
FU(H4DOTC)-20
Intake Manifold
(2) Insert the front side of ST into the quick con- B: INSTALLATION
nector.
1) Install the intake manifold onto cylinder heads.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
ST
ME-04970
(3) Insert the back side of ST into the quick con-

nector and push ST in the direction of arrow
mark to disconnect the fuel return hose.
FU-04966
2) Connect the fuel delivery hose, fuel return hose,

and evaporation hose.
NOTE:
If fuel hoses or clamps are damaged, replace them
with new parts.
ST
ME-04971 (A)
36) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapora-

tion hose from the fuel pipe.
(B) (C)
FU-05059

(C) Evaporation hose
FU-04611
3) Connect the connector (A) from oil level switch.
37) Remove the intake manifold from cylinder
head.
FU-04966
FU(H4DOTC)-21
Intake Manifold
4) Connect the connector (B) to ignition coil, and 6) Connect the connector to the intake camshaft
secure the engine harness or oil level switch har- position sensor.
ness to the rocker cover with clips (C) and bolt (D).
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(C)
(B)
(D) (A)
(B)
FU-04727
7) Connect the connector to the knock sensor.

(C)
FU-04965
5) Connect the connector to the intake oil flow con-

trol solenoid valve.
FU-05126
8) Secure the generator cord to the intake manifold

protector LH with a clip.
ME-04963
FU-04964
FU(H4DOTC)-22
Intake Manifold
9) Connect the connectors to front oxygen (A/F) 13) Connect the bulkhead harness connector to the
sensor (A) and rear oxygen sensor (B). engine harness connector (brown).
(B)
(A)
(A)
FU-04724 ME-04376
10) Connect the connector to the engine coolant 14) Install the nuts securing the PCV pipe to the in-
temperature sensor (A), oil pressure switch (B) and take manifold protector RH, and connect the vacu-
crankshaft position sensor (C). um hose (A) and vacuum control hose (B) to the
PCV pipe.
Tightening torque:
(A) 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(B)
(C)
(A)
FU-04962
11) Install the engine harness connector to the en-

(B)
gine rear hanger.
FU-04961
15) Install the blow-by pipe to the intake manifold

protector RH, and connect vacuum hose to the
blow-by pipe.
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME-04378
12) Connect the bulkhead harness connector to the

engine harness connector (black), and install the
bolt securing the bulkhead harness connector
bracket.
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) FU-04959
ME-04377
FU(H4DOTC)-23
Intake Manifold
16) Connect the vacuum hose to the rocker cover. 19) Install the intake duct to the throttle body, and
install the bolts which secure the engine harness
and PCV pipe to the intake manifold.
NOTE:
When installing the intake duct to the throttle body,
align the protrusion (a) on the intake duct to the in-
stallation position mark (b) on the throttle body to
install.
(b)
(a)
FU-04706
Tightening torque:
T1: 3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
ME-04391
T2: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
17) Connect the brake booster vacuum hose. T1
T2
FU-04955
20) Connect the vacuum hose to PCV valve.

ME-04380
18) Connect the preheater hoses to the throttle

body.
FU-04957
21) Install the A/C pressure hoses to A/C compres-

FU-04958
sor. <Ref. to AC-68, INSTALLATION, Hose and
Pipe.>
22) Install the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-
23) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-12, INSTALLATION, Air Intake
Duct.>
FU(H4DOTC)-24
Intake Manifold
24) Lift up the vehicle. 30) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-14,
25) Connect the connectors to the wastegate con- FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
trol solenoid valve, and secure the engine harness MENT, Engine Coolant.>
with clip (A). 31) Charge the A/C system with refrigerant. <Ref.
to AC-21, PROCEDURE, Refrigerant Charging
(A)
Procedure.>
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the intake manifold protector RH from
intake manifold.
FU-04709
26) Connect the connectors to exhaust oil flow con-

trol solenoid valve (A) and exhaust camshaft posi-
tion sensor (B).
(A)
FU-04967
2) Disconnect front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector

(A) and rear oxygen sensor connector (B) from the
intake manifold protector LH, and also remove clip
(B) (C) which holds the engine harness.
(C)
(B)
(A)
(A) (B)
FU-04735
3) Remove the engine ground terminal from the in-

take manifold protector LH, and remove the intake
FU-04708 manifold protector LH from the intake manifold.
FU-04968
IG-02107
FU(H4DOTC)-25
Intake Manifold
4) Remove the filter assembly. 8) Disconnect the connectors from the throttle posi-
tion sensor.
FU-04737
FU-04741
5) Disconnect the vacuum hose from the intake
manifold and fuel delivery pipe. 9) Remove the throttle body from the intake mani-
fold.
FU-04738
FU-04742
6) Disconnect the connector from the manifold ab-
solute pressure sensor, and remove the solenoid 10) Disconnect the connector from the fuel injector
valve bracket assembly from the intake manifold. and tumble generator valve assembly.
FU-04739
7) Disconnect the connectors from the purge con-

trol solenoid valves 1 and 2.
FU-04969
FU-04740
FU(H4DOTC)-26
Intake Manifold
11) Remove the brake booster vacuum hose from 14) Remove the fuel injector.
the clip (A), and remove PCV pipe (B) and engine
harness (C) from the intake manifold.
(A) (C)
(B)
FU-04970
12) Remove the bolts which secure the fuel deliv-

ery pipe assembly to the intake manifold, and dis-
connect the pressure regulator vacuum hose from
the intake manifold.
FU-04747
15) Disconnect vacuum hose (A), vacuum control

hose (B) and brake booster vacuum hose (C) from
FU-04971
(B)
13) Remove the bolts which hold fuel pipe onto in-
take manifold.
(C)
(A)
FU-04960
16) Remove the bolts which secure the fuel deliv-

ery pipe to the intake manifold, loosen the clamps
which hold the fuel hose to the fuel delivery pipe,
and remove the fuel delivery pipe and fuel pipe.
FU-04749
FU-04972
FU(H4DOTC)-27
Intake Manifold
17) Remove the nipple from the intake manifold. D: ASSEMBLY

(except for model with integrated plate)
1) Install the tumble generator valve assembly onto
intake manifold.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
Tightening torque:
8.3 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 6.1 ft-lb)
FU-04750
18) Remove the nipple from the intake manifold.

(model with integrated plate)
FU-06192
19) Remove the tumble generator valve assembly

from the intake manifold.
FU-04751
2) Apply liquid gasket to the nipple threads, and in-

stall the nipple to the intake manifold. (except for
model with integrated plate)
Liquid gasket:
equivalent
Tightening torque:
23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 17.0 ft-lb)
FU-04751 FU-04750
FU(H4DOTC)-28
Intake Manifold
3) Install the nipple to the intake manifold. (model 6) Install the fuel injector.
with integrated plate)
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
Tightening torque:
7.8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.8 ft-lb)
FU-06192
4) Set the fuel delivery pipe and fuel pipe, tighten

the clamps which hold the fuel hose to the fuel de-
livery pipe, and install the fuel delivery pipe to the
intake manifold.
FU-04747
Tightening torque:
T1: 1.25 N·m (0.1 kgf-m, 0.9 ft-lb) 7) Install the bolts which secure fuel pipe to the in-
T2: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) take manifold.
Tightening torque:
T2
T1 19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
T2
FU-04752
5) Connect vacuum hose (A), vacuum control hose

(B) and brake booster vacuum hose (C) to the in-
take manifold.
(B)
(C)
(A)
FU-04960 FU-04972
FU(H4DOTC)-29
Intake Manifold
8) Install the bolts which secure fuel delivery pipe to 10) Connect the connector to the fuel injector and
the intake manifold, and connect the pressure reg- the tumble generator valve assembly.
ulator vacuum hose to the intake manifold.
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-04971
9) Install PCV pipe (B) and engine harness (C) to

the intake manifold, and install the brake booster
vacuum hose to the clip (A).
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(A) (C)
FU-04969
11) Install the throttle body to the intake manifold.

NOTE:
(B) Use new O-rings.
Tightening torque:
8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
FU-04970
FU-04742
12) Connect the connector to the throttle position

sensor.
FU-04741
FU(H4DOTC)-30
Intake Manifold
13) Connect the connectors to the purge control 17) Install the intake manifold protector LH to the
solenoid valves 1 and 2. intake manifold, and install the engine ground ter-
minal to the intake manifold protector.
NOTE:
Route the from front oxygen (A/F) sensor connec-
tor and rear oxygen sensor connector inside the in-
take manifold protector, as shown in the figure.
(c) (b)
(a)
FU-04740
14) Install the solenoid valve bracket assembly to

the intake manifold, and connect the connector to
the manifold absolute pressure sensor.
Tightening torque:
FU-04753
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
(a) Intake manifold protector
(b) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector
(c) Rear oxygen sensor connector
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-04739
15) Connect the vacuum hose to the intake mani-

fold and fuel delivery pipe.
FU-04968
18) Install front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector (A)

and rear oxygen sensor connector (B) to the intake
manifold protector LH, and also install clip (C)
which holds the engine harness.
FU-04738
16) Install the filter assembly.
(C)
(A) (B)
FU-04735
FU-04737
FU(H4DOTC)-31
Intake Manifold
19) Install the intake manifold protector RH to the

intake manifold.
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-04967
E: INSPECTION
1) Check that the intake manifold and fuel pipe
have no deformation, cracks and other damages.
loose part.
FU(H4DOTC)-32
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

4. Engine Coolant Temperature CAUTION:

Take care not to allow water to get into the en-
Sensor gine coolant temperature sensor connector.
A: REMOVAL Completely remove any water inside.
(A)
(B)
IG-02107
(C)
4) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-
14, DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, RE-
PLACEMENT, Engine Coolant.>
5) Disconnect the connector from the engine cool-
ant temperature sensor, and remove the engine
coolant temperature sensor. FU-04053
(A) Thermometer
(B) Engine coolant temperature sensor
(C) Hexagonal part height: To approx.1/3
3) Raise water temperature gradually, measure the

resistance between the engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor terminals when the temperature is
20°C (68°F) and 80°C (176°F).
FU-04973 NOTE:
Agitate the water for even temperature distribution.
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Use a new gasket. 2 1
Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the engine coolant temperature sen-
sor has no deformation, cracks or other damages. EC-02428
2) Immerse the engine coolant temperature sensor Water temperature Terminal No. Standard
and a thermometer in water.
20°C (68°F) 2.45±0.2 kΩ
1 and 2
80°C (176°F) 0.318±0.013 kΩ
FU(H4DOTC)-33

5. Crankshaft Position Sensor B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the collector cover. Tightening torque:
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-04974
IG-02107
3) Remove the bolt which secures crankshaft posi- C: INSPECTION

tion sensor to oil pump.
(METHOD WITH CIRCUIT TESTER)
1) Measure the resistance between crankshaft po-
sition sensor terminals.
2 1
FU-04974
4) Remove the crankshaft position sensor, and dis-

connect the connector from the crankshaft position
sensor.
EC-02428

1 and 2 2.04±0.204 kΩ
FU-04975
FU(H4DOTC)-34


(METHOD WITH OSCILLOSCOPE)
FU-04956
(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
31 30 29 28 27 26
FU-04758
Terminal No. Probe

17 +
25 –

5) Check that the pattern is the same as the wave-
form and voltage shown below.
10ms
5V
(A)
FU-04057
(A) One crankshaft rotation

Check that the crankshaft position sensor has no
FU(H4DOTC)-35

6. Camshaft Position Sensor 3) Remove the camshaft position sensor LH.
A: REMOVAL
1. INTAKE SIDE
• Camshaft position sensor RH
FU-03520
2. EXHAUST SIDE
IG-02107
2) Disconnect the connector from the camshaft po-

sition sensor RH, and remove the camshaft posi-
tion sensor RH.
IG-02107

4) Disconnect the connector from the camshaft po-
sition sensor, and remove the camshaft position
sensor.
FU-04759
• RH side
• Camshaft position sensor LH
FU-04760
• LH side
IG-02107

FU(H4DOTC)-17, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.>
FU-04761
FU(H4DOTC)-36

B: INSTALLATION • Exhaust camshaft position sensor
1. INTAKE SIDE (A)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Install in the reverse order of removal. 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Tightening torque: 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) 31 30 29 28 27 26
2. EXHAUST SIDE
Tightening torque:
FU-04762
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION (A) To ECM connector
1. CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (METH- Camshaft position

OD WITH OSCILLOSCOPE) Terminal No. Probe
sensor
1) Prepare an oscilloscope. RH 24 +
Intake
2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI- LH 16 +
65, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> RH 23 +
3) Connect the probe to ECM connector. Exhaust
LH 29 +
RH and LH 30 –

5) Check that the pattern is the same as the wave-
form and voltage shown below.
(B) 0
10ms
(A) 5V
(C) 0
FU-04956
• Intake camshaft position sensor

(D) 0
(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 (E) 0
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 FU-04763
31 30 29 28 27 26
(A) One camshaft rotation
(B) Intake camshaft position sensor RH
(C) Intake camshaft position sensor LH
(D) Exhaust camshaft position sensor RH
(E) Exhaust camshaft position sensor LH
FU-04757
(A) To ECM connector 6) After inspection, install the related parts in the
Check that the camshaft position sensor has no de-
formation, cracks or other damages.
FU(H4DOTC)-37
Knock Sensor
7. Knock Sensor B: INSTALLATION

1) Install the knock sensor to the cylinder block.
A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the collector cover. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. The portion of the knock sensor cord that is pulled
out must be positioned at a 60° angle relative to the
engine rear.
Tightening torque:
24 N·m (2.4 kgf-m, 17.7 ft-lb)
(A)
IG-02107

17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.> 60
4) Disconnect the connector from the knock sen-
sor. FU-04883
(A) Front side of vehicle
2) Connect the connector to the knock sensor.
FU-04764
5) Remove the knock sensor from cylinder block.
FU-04764
3) Install the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-18,

INSTALLATION, Intercooler.>
FU-04882
IG-02107
FU(H4DOTC)-38
Knock Sensor
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the knock sensor has no deforma-
2) Measure the resistance between knock sensor
terminals.
2 1
EC-02426

1 and 2 560±28 kΩ
FU(H4DOTC)-39
Throttle Position Sensor

8. Throttle Position Sensor

A: SPECIFICATION
Throttle body is a non-disassembled part, so do not
remove the throttle position sensor from throttle
body.
Refer to “Throttle Body” for removal and installation
procedure. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-15, REMOVAL,
Throttle Body.> <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-15, IN-
STALLATION, Throttle Body.>
FU(H4DOTC)-40
Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temperature Sensor

9. Mass Air Flow and Intake Air 2) Check that the voltage changes when air is
blown to the mass air flow sensor unit from arrow
Temperature Sensor direction.
A: REMOVAL
FU-04063
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE

IG-02107 SENSOR UNIT
2) Disconnect the connector from the mass air flow Measure the resistance between intake air temper-
and intake air temperature sensor, and remove the ature sensor terminals.
mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor.
5 4 3 2 1
FU-04064
FU-04765
Temperature Terminal No. Standard
B: INSTALLATION –20°C (–4°F) 16.0±2.4 kΩ
Install in the reverse order of removal. 20°C (68°F) 1 and 2 2.45±0.24 kΩ
60°C (140°F) 0.580±0.087 kΩ
Tightening torque:
1 N·m (0.1 kgf-m, 0.7 ft-lb) 3. OTHER INSPECTIONS
C: INSPECTION 1) Check that the mass air flow and intake air tem-
perature sensor has no deformation, cracks or oth-
1. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR UNIT er damages.
1) Connect battery positive terminal to terminal No. 2) Check that the mass air flow and intake air tem-
3 and battery ground terminal to terminal No. 4, cir- perature sensor has no dirt.
cuit tester positive terminal to terminal No. 5 and
the circuit tester negative terminal to terminal No. 4.
5 4 3 2 1
V
FU-04062
FU(H4DOTC)-41

10.Manifold Absolute Pressure C: INSPECTION

Sensor 1) Check that the manifold absolute pressure sen-
sor has no deformation, cracks or other damages.
A: REMOVAL 2) Connect dry-cell battery positive terminal to ter-
1) Remove the collector cover. minal No. 3 and dry-cell battery ground terminal to
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. terminal No. 1, circuit tester positive terminal to ter-
minal No. 2 and the circuit tester negative terminal
to terminal No. 1.
NOTE:
dry-cell battery is 1.6 V or more. And also check the
and 5.2 V.
IG-02107
3) Disconnect the connector from manifold abso- 3 2 1

lute pressure sensor (A), and remove the filter as-
sembly (B) from intake manifold.
4) Remove the manifold absolute pressure sensor
from the solenoid valve bracket.
(A)
V
(B)
1.5V 1.5V 1.5V

FU-04976
B: INSTALLATION 4.8 5.2V

FU-04486
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) sure.
NOTE:
the standard value.
Approx. 2.2 V
2 (+) and 1 (–)
(when 25°C (77°F))
FU(H4DOTC)-42


of manifold absolute pressure sensor.
(A)
FU-04487

CAUTION:
Do not apply vacuum of less than –88 — 200
kPa (–0.9 — 2.04 kgf/cm2, –12.8 — 29.0 psi). Do-
ing so may damage the manifold absolute pres-
sure sensor.
NOTE:
When vacuum occurs at the pressure port of man-
ifold absolute pressure sensor, the voltage will drop
from the value as in step 3). When positive pres-
sure occurs, on the other hand, the voltage will rise.
Pressure Terminal No. Standard
2
–88 kPa (–0.9 kgf/cm , Approx. 1.0 V
–12.8 psi) (when 25°C (77°F))
2 (+) and 1 (–)
152 kPa (1.55 kgf/cm2, Approx. 4.5 V
22.0 psi) (when 25°C (77°F))
FU(H4DOTC)-43
Fuel Injector
11.Fuel Injector 8) Remove the bolt which secures the fuel pipe to
A: REMOVAL
1. RH SIDE
FU-04978
9) Remove the fuel injector.
IG-02107
cap.
FU(H4DOTC)-17, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.> FU-04770
6) Remove the intake manifold protector RH from

2. LH SIDE
intake manifold.
FU-04967
7) Disconnect the connector from the fuel injector

and tumble generator valve assembly.
IG-02107
cap.
FU-04977
FU(H4DOTC)-44
Fuel Injector
6) Disconnect front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector 10) Remove the fuel injector.
(A) and rear oxygen sensor connector (B) from the
intake manifold protector LH, and also remove clip
(C) which holds the engine harness.
(C)
FU-04772
B: INSTALLATION
(A) (B)
FU-04735
1. RH SIDE
7) Remove the engine ground terminal from the in- Install in the reverse order of removal.
take manifold protector LH, and remove the intake
manifold protector LH from the intake manifold. NOTE:
Use new O-rings and seal rings.
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-04968
8) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector.

FU-04978
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-04979
9) Remove the bolt which secures the fuel delivery

pipe to the intake manifold.
FU-04967
FU-04980
FU(H4DOTC)-45
Fuel Injector
2. LH SIDE
NOTE:
Use new O-rings and seal rings.
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
T1 T2
FU-04981
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-04968
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel injector has no deformation,
2) Measure the resistance between fuel injector
terminals.
2 1
EC-02428

Approx. 12.0 Ω
1 and 2
(when 20°C (68°F))
FU(H4DOTC)-46
Tumble Generator Valve Assembly

12.Tumble Generator Valve As- 8) Remove the tumble generator valve assembly
from the intake manifold.
sembly
A: REMOVAL
IG-02107
cap.
5) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to FU-04751
6) Disconnect the connector from the tumble gen- B: INSTALLATION
erator valve assembly. Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
8.3 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 6.1 ft-lb)
FU-03093
7) Remove the fuel injector. <Ref. to

FU(H4DOTC)-44, REMOVAL, Fuel Injector.>
FU-04751
FU(H4DOTC)-47
Tumble Generator Valve Assembly

C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the tumble generator valve assembly
2) Check tumble generator valve for contamination
or clogging.
FU(H4DOTC)-48
Tumble Generator Valve Actuator

13.Tumble Generator Valve Ac-

tuator
A: SPECIFICATION
The tumble generator valve assembly cannot be
disassembled.
Refer to “Tumble Generator Valve Assembly” for
removal and installation procedures. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-47, REMOVAL, Tumble Generator
Valve Assembly.> <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-47, IN-
STALLATION, Tumble Generator Valve Assem-
bly.>
FU(H4DOTC)-49
Oil Flow Control Solenoid Valve

14.Oil Flow Control Solenoid 6) Disconnect the connector from the oil flow con-
trol solenoid valve, and remove the oil flow control
Valve solenoid valve from the cylinder head.
A: REMOVAL
1. INTAKE SIDE
Oil flow control solenoid valve is a unit with front
camshaft cap.
Refer to “Camshaft” for the removal procedure.
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-61, REMOVAL, Cam-
shaft.>
2. EXHAUST SIDE
FU-04775
B: INSTALLATION
1. INTAKE SIDE
Refer to “Camshaft” for installation procedure.
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-64, INSTALLATION, Cam-
shaft.>
2. EXHAUST SIDE
IG-02107
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
3) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- Tightening torque:
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
4) Remove the center exhaust pipe. (LH side only)
<Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Center Ex-
haust Pipe.>
5) Remove ground cable (A) from the engine har-
ness cover, and remove the engine harness cover
from the engine. (LH side only)
FU-04775
Tightening torque:
(A) T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 7 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.2 ft-lb)
FU-04774
(A)
T2
T1 T1
FU-04862
FU(H4DOTC)-50
Oil Flow Control Solenoid Valve

C: DISASSEMBLY 3) Attach the oil return cover and gasket.
1. INTAKE SIDE NOTE:

Use a new gasket.
1) Remove the two mounting bolts securing oil re-
turn cover, and remove the oil return cover and Tightening torque:
gasket. 9 N·m (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
2) Remove the bolt securing oil flow control sole-
noid valve, and remove the oil flow control solenoid
valve. (D)
(C)
(B) (A)
(D)
(C)
(B) (A)
FU-05419
(A) Oil flow control solenoid valve

FU-05418 (B) Oil return cover
(C) Gasket
(A) Oil flow control solenoid valve (D) Front camshaft cap
(B) Oil return cover
(C) Gasket 2. EXHAUST SIDE
(D) Front camshaft cap The oil flow control solenoid valve on exhaust side
cannot be disassembled.
2. EXHAUST SIDE
E: INSPECTION
The oil flow control solenoid valve on exhaust side
cannot be disassembled. 1) Check that the oil flow control solenoid valve has
no deformation, cracks or other damages.
D: ASSEMBLY 2) Measure the resistance between the oil flow
control solenoid valve terminals.
1. INTAKE SIDE
1) Install the oil flow control solenoid valve.
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) 2 1
2) Apply liquid gasket to the two bolts securing oil
return cover.
Liquid gasket:
equivalent
EC-02428

7.4±0.5 Ω
1 and 2
(when 20°C (68°F))
FU(H4DOTC)-51
Wastegate Control Solenoid Valve

15.Wastegate Control Solenoid B: INSTALLATION

Valve Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
A: REMOVAL • Use new O-rings.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. • When tightening the boost control solenoid
valve, check that it is securely seated.
Tightening torque:
4 N·m (0.4 kgf-m, 3.0 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the wastegate control solenoid valve
2) Check the resistance between the wastegate
control solenoid valve terminals.
IG-02107
2) Remove the radiator sub fan motor assembly.

<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator
Sub Fan and Fan Motor.> 2 1
3) Remove the screws which hold the wastegate
control solenoid valve to the intake duct.
EC-02426

1 and 2 24±3 Ω (when 20°C (68°F))
FU-04777

MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> (A)
6) Disconnect the connector and air control hose
from the wastegate control solenoid valve, and re-
move the wastegate control solenoid valve from the
intake duct.
(B)
FU-04779
FU-04778
FU(H4DOTC)-52
Wastegate Control Solenoid Valve

4) With terminal No. 1 connected to the battery

positive terminal and terminal No. 2 to the battery
ground terminal, check that air comes out from (B)
when air is blown into (A).
2 1
(A)
(B)
FU-04780
FU(H4DOTC)-53

16.Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
If lubricant is spilt over the exhaust pipe, wipe it
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. off with cloth to avoid emission of smoke or
causing a fire.
1) Before installing front oxygen (A/F) sensor, ap-
ply anti-seize compound only to the threaded por-
tion of front oxygen (A/F) sensor to make the next
removal easier.
CAUTION:
tor of front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
IG-02107
2) Remove the radiator main fan motor assembly. equivalent
<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator 2) Install the front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
3) Disconnect the connector from the front oxygen Tightening torque:
(A/F) sensor, and remove the clip (A) holding the 30 N·m (3.1 kgf-m, 22.1 ft-lb)
front oxygen (A/F) sensor harness.
(A)
FU-04782
FU-04982 3) Connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor connec-
4) Apply spray-type lubricant to the threaded por- tor, and secure the front oxygen (A/F) sensor har-
tion of front oxygen (A/F) sensor, and leave it for ness by using the clip (A).
one minute or more.
5) Remove the front oxygen (A/F) sensor by using
a sensor socket.
CAUTION:
When removing the front oxygen (A/F) sensor,
wait until exhaust pipe cools, otherwise it will
damage the exhaust pipe. (A)
FU-04982
4) Install the radiator main fan motor assembly.

<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, INSTALLATION, Radi-
ator Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
FU-04782
FU(H4DOTC)-54

IG-02107
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the front oxygen (A/F) sensor has no
2) Measure the resistance between front oxygen
(A/F) sensor terminals.
1 2
3 4
FU-04072

2.4±0.24 Ω
1 and 2
(when 20°C (68°F))
FU(H4DOTC)-55
Rear Oxygen Sensor

17.Rear Oxygen Sensor B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
If lubricant is spilt over the exhaust pipe, wipe it
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. off with cloth to avoid emission of smoke or
causing a fire.
1) Before installing rear oxygen sensor, apply the
anti-seize compound only to the threaded portion of
rear oxygen sensor to make the next removal eas-
ier.
CAUTION:
tor of rear oxygen sensor.
IG-02107
2) Remove the radiator main fan motor assembly. equivalent
<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator 2) Install the rear oxygen sensor.
Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
3) Disconnect the connector from the rear oxygen Tightening torque:
sensor, and remove the clip (A) holding the rear ox- 30 N·m (3.1 kgf-m, 22.1 ft-lb)
ygen sensor harness.
(A)
FU-04784
FU-04983
3) Connect the connector to the rear oxygen sen-
4) Apply spray-type lubricant to the threaded por- sor, and hold the rear oxygen sensor harness with
tion of rear oxygen sensor, and leave it for one clip (A).
minute or more.
5) Remove the rear oxygen (A/F) sensor by using a
sensor socket.
CAUTION:
When removing the rear oxygen sensor, wait
until exhaust pipe cools, otherwise it will dam-
age the exhaust pipe. (A)
FU-04983
4) Install the radiator main fan motor assembly.

<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, INSTALLATION, Radi-
FU-04784
FU(H4DOTC)-56
Rear Oxygen Sensor

IG-02107
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the rear oxygen sensor has no defor-
2) Measure the resistance between rear oxygen
sensor terminals.
1 2
3 4
FU-04072

5.6+0.8 –0.6 Ω
1 and 2
(when 20°C (68°F))
FU(H4DOTC)-57
Engine Control Module (ECM)

18.Engine Control Module (ECM) B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. CAUTION:
• When the ECM of model with immobilizer has
been replaced, be sure to perform the registra-
tion of immobilizer system. (Refer to “PC appli-
cation help for Subaru Select Monitor”.)
• If replacing ECM or the bracket, replace both
parts with new parts at a time.
• After installing the bracket to ECM, do not
separate the bracket.
• If the bracket has been installed to ECM in the
wrong direction, replace both parts to new
IG-02107 parts.
2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI- NOTE:
65, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> When replacing the ECM, be careful not to use the
3) Remove the connectors from ECM. wrong spec. ECM to avoid any damage on the fuel
injection system.
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
Check that the ECM has no deformation, cracks or
other damages.
FU-04984
4) Remove the ECM from vehicle.
FU-04985
FU(H4DOTC)-58
Main Relay
19.Main Relay C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the main relay has no deformation,
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 2) Measure the resistance between main relay ter-
minals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
IG-02107

3) Remove the main relay from the relay holder.
1
2
3 4
IN-02836
FU-04986
B: INSTALLATION 1 and 2 1 MΩ or more
130.4 — 230.8 Ω
Install in the reverse order of removal. 3 and 4
(when 20°C (68°F))
FU(H4DOTC)-59
Main Relay
3) Connect battery positive terminal to terminal No.

3 and battery ground terminal to terminal No. 4, and
measure the resistance between the main relay ter-
minals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
1
2
3 4
FU-04077

FU(H4DOTC)-60
Fuel Pump Relay

20.Fuel Pump Relay C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the fuel pump relay has no deforma-
A: REMOVAL tion, cracks or other damages.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 2) Measure the resistance between fuel pump relay
terminals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
IG-02107

3) Remove the fuel pump relay from the relay hold-
er. 1
2
3 4
IN-02836

FU-04987
B: INSTALLATION 93.8 — 136.4 Ω
3 and 4
(when 20°C (68°F))
FU(H4DOTC)-61
Fuel Pump Relay


measure the resistance between the fuel pump re-
lay terminals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
1
2
3 4
FU-04077

FU(H4DOTC)-62

21.Electronic Throttle Control C: INSPECTION

Relay 1) Check that the electronic throttle control relay
A: REMOVAL 2) Measure the resistance between electronic
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. throttle control relay terminals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
IG-02107

3) Remove the electronic throttle control relay from
1
the relay holder. 2
3 4
IN-02836

FU-04988
93.8 — 136.4 Ω
3 and 4
(when 20°C (68°F))
B: INSTALLATION
FU(H4DOTC)-63


measure the resistance between the electronic
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
1
2
3 4
FU-04077

FU(H4DOTC)-64
Fuel Pump Control Unit

22.Fuel Pump Control Unit

A: REMOVAL
IG-02107
2) Remove the trunk trim panel assembly-side RH.

<Ref. to EI-109, REMOVAL, Rear Quarter Trim.>
3) Remove the fuel pump control unit.
FU-04793
4) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump control

unit.
FU-04795
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
Check that the fuel pump control unit has no defor-
FU(H4DOTC)-65
Fuel
23.Fuel
(A)
A: PROCEDURE ST
1. RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE

WARNING:
(C)
working area. (B)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to spill fuel. ME-04382
1) Remove the fuse of fuel pump from main fuse
box. (A) Fuel delivery hose
3) Connect ST to the fuel delivery hose.

ST 18471AA000 FUEL PIPE ADAPTER
4) Connect the gasoline proof hose to ST and put
the end of the hose in the container.
5) Drive the fuel pump and drain the fuel using Sub-
aru Select Monitor. (Refer to “PC application help
for Subaru Select Monitor”.)
FU-04800
CAUTION:
2) Start the engine and run it until it stalls. Be careful not to spill fuel.
3) After the engine stalls, crank it for five more sec- 6) Install the related parts in the reverse order after
onds. draining the fuel.
5) Install the fuse of fuel pump to the main fuse box. 3. DRAINING FUEL (THROUGH THE FUEL
FILLER HOSE)
2. DRAINING FUEL (WITH SUBARU SE-
LECT MONITOR) WARNING:
WARNING: working area.
working area. CAUTION:
CAUTION: • Fuel may remain in the fuel filler pipe. Drain-
Be careful not to spill fuel. ing the fuel from the fuel filler pipe through the
NOTE: fill opening using the gasoline proof pump and
• If the fuel pump cannot be driven, refer to the the gasoline proof hose (ø10 or less) before the
procedures for draining from the fuel filler hose. operation.
<Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-66, DRAINING FUEL 1) Lift up the vehicle.
(THROUGH THE FUEL FILLER HOSE), PROCE- 2) Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
DURE, Fuel.> <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-15, REMOVAL, Rear Ex-
• Be careful not to let the battery run-out. haust Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-17, REMOV-
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to AL, Muffler.>
FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES- 3) Remove the rear sub frame. <Ref. to RS-16, RE-
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> MOVAL, Rear Sub Frame.>
2) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push ST 4) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler
in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect the fuel cap.
delivery hose. 5) Drain the fuel from the fuel filler pipe through the
ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RE- filler opening using the gasoline proof pump and
LEASE the gasoline proof hose (ø10 or less).
CAUTION:
or cloth.
FU(H4DOTC)-66
Fuel
6) Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler

pipe assembly.
CAUTION:
or cloth.
FU-04989
7) Set the container under the vehicle and insert

the gasoline proof hose (ø10 or less) into the fuel
filler hose to drain the fuel.
CAUTION:
8) Install the related parts in the reverse order after
draining the fuel.
Tightening torque:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
FU(H4DOTC)-67
Fuel Tank
24.Fuel Tank (3) Push the grommet (D) down and remove the
service hole cover.
A: REMOVAL (C)
WARNING:
working area. (D)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to spill fuel. (B)
FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES- (C)
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> (A) FU-04991
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-66, DRAIN-
ING FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), 7) Remove the service hole cover of fuel sub level
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> sensor.
FU-04992
IG-02107 8) Disconnect the quick connector of fuel delivery
4) Remove the rear seat cushion. <Ref. to SE-32, tube (A) and fuel return tube (B). <Ref. to
REMOVAL, Rear Seat.> FU(H4DOTC)-88, REMOVAL, Fuel Delivery, Re-
5) Remove the clips (A) and seat cushion hooks turn and Evaporation Lines.>
(B), and turn over the floor mat (C). (A)
(B)
(C)
FU-04993
(B)
(B) (A) (A)
FU-04990 9) Remove the rear wheels.
6) Remove the service hole cover of fuel pump. 10) Lift up the vehicle.
(1) Disconnect the fuel cord connector (A), and 11) Remove the rear ABS wheel speed sensor
remove the clip (B). from the rear housing.
FU-04994
FU(H4DOTC)-68
Fuel Tank
12) Remove the rear ABS wheel speed sensor har- 16) Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
ness bracket from the upper arm. <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-15, REMOVAL, Rear Ex-
haust Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-17, REMOV-
AL, Muffler.>
17) Remove the propeller shaft. <Ref. to DS-10,
REMOVAL, Propeller Shaft.>
18) Remove the clip (A) securing the fuel tank pro-
tector and heat shield cover.
19) Remove the bolts (B) and nuts (C) securing the
fuel tank protector, and remove the fuel tank pro-
tector.
FU-04087 (B)
13) Remove the rear brake hose bracket from rear

housing. (B) (B)
(C) (C)
(A)
FU-04997
20) Remove the bolts and nuts securing the heat

shield cover and remove the heat shield cover.
FU-04995
14) Remove the rear disc brake assembly and tie it

to the body side of the vehicle.
FU-04998
21) Remove the rear suspension assembly.

WARNING:
mission jack.
(2) Remove the bolt and nut which secures rear
shock absorber to rear suspension arm.
FU-04996
15) Remove the parking brake cable from parking

brake assembly. <Ref. to PB-9, REMOVAL, Park-
ing Brake Assembly (Rear Disc Brake).> FU-03359
FU(H4DOTC)-69
Fuel Tank
(3) Remove the bolts which secure the rear

suspension assembly to the body.
FU-05003
25) Disconnect the fuel filler hose (A), PCV inlet

FU-04999 hose (B) and circulate hose (C) from the fuel filler
(4) Remove the rear suspension assembly. pipe assembly.
22) Disconnect the PCV drain hose (A) and PCV
outlet hose (B) from the pressure control solenoid
(C) (B)
valve.
(A)
(A)
(B)
FU-05049

remove the bolts from the fuel tank band, and re-
FU-05000 move the fuel tank from the vehicle.
23) Disconnect the air vent hose from the fuel tank. WARNING:
• A helper is required to perform this work.
• Fuel may remain in the fuel tank. This will
cause the left and right sides to be unbalanced.
Be careful not to drop the fuel tank.
FU-05001
24) Disconnect the quick connector of the circulate

tube from evaporation pipe.
NOTE:
FU-05004
ure.
1
1 FU-05002
FU(H4DOTC)-70
Fuel Tank
B: INSTALLATION 3) Connect the quick connector of the circulate

tube to the evaporation pipe as shown in the figure.
set the fuel tank in place, and temporarily tighten CAUTION:
the bolts of the fuel tank band. • Check that there is no damage or dust on the
WARNING: quick connector. If necessary, clean the seal
surface of the pipe.
ly connected.
FU-05004
2) Securely insert the fuel filler hose (A), PCV inlet FU-05036
hose (B) and circulate hose (C) to the spool or stop-
per, then attach the clamp or clip as shown in the
figure.
Tightening torque:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
(C) (B)
FU-05003
4) Connect the air vent hose to fuel tank.

(A)
FU-05049
(2) (3) (4)

(1)
FU-05001
L/2 5) Connect the PCV drain hose (A) and PCV outlet
hose (B) to the pressure control solenoid valve.
L
FU-05646
(1) Hose
(A)
(2) Clamp or clip
(3) Spool or bump (B)
(4) Pipe
FU-05000
FU(H4DOTC)-71
Fuel Tank
6) Move the fuel tank so that the distance between 7) Install the rear suspension assembly.
the center of the positioning hole for the body (A) WARNING:
and the front end of the fuel tank flange (B) be-
comes L, and tighten the bolts of the fuel tank
bands in the sequence shown in the figure.
mission jack.
CAUTION: (2) Support the rear suspension assembly and
To prevent the fuel tank from damage, after install the rear suspension assembly to the
tightening the bolts of the fuel tank bands, body.
make sure that the distance between the center
of the positioning hole for the body (A) and the Tightening torque:
front end of the fuel tank flange (B) is L. T1: 70 N·m (7.1 kgf-m, 51.6 ft-lb)
T2: 200 N·m (20.4 kgf-m, 147.5 ft-lb)
Distance L: Center of the positioning hole for
the body (A) — Front end of the fuel tank flange
(B)
14.5 mm (0.571 in) or less
T2 T2
Tightening torque:
33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb)
T1 T1
(A)
L
(B) FU-05006
(3) Install the rear shock absorber to the rear

suspension arm.
NOTE:
Tightening torque:
120 N·m (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
1 2
3 4
FU-05585 FU-03359
8) Install the heat shield cover.

Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
FU-04998
FU(H4DOTC)-72
Fuel Tank
9) Install the bolts (B) and nuts (C) securing the fuel 15) Install the rear brake hose bracket to the rear
tank protector and install the clip (A) securing the housing.
fuel tank protector and heat shield cover.
Tightening torque:
Nut (C): 9 N·m (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
Bolt (B): 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
(B)
(B) (B)
(C) (C)
(A)
FU-04995
16) Install the rear ABS wheel speed sensor har-

FU-04997 ness bracket to the upper arm.
10) Install the propeller shaft. <Ref. to DS-11, IN-
Tightening torque:
STALLATION, Propeller Shaft.>
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
11) Install the rear exhaust pipe and muffler. <Ref.
to EX(H4DOTC)-15, INSTALLATION, Rear Ex-
haust Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-17, INSTAL-
LATION, Muffler.>
13) Connect the parking brake cable to the parking
brake assembly. <Ref. to PB-12, INSTALLATION,
Parking Brake Assembly (Rear Disc Brake).>
14) Install the rear disc brake assembly.
Tightening torque:
FU-04087
66 N·m (6.7 kgf-m, 48.7 ft-lb)
17) Attach the rear ABS wheel speed sensor to the
rear housing.
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
FU-04546
FU-04994
FU(H4DOTC)-73
Fuel Tank
18) Install the rear wheels. 22) Set the floor mat (C), and install clips (A) and
seat cushion hooks (B).
Tightening torque:
120 N·m (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
19) Connect the quick connector of fuel delivery
tube (A) and fuel return tube (B). <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-91, INSTALLATION, Fuel Delivery,
Return and Evaporation Lines.>
NOTE: (C)
When connecting, be careful not to reverse the de-
livery side and return side.
(B)
(A) (B) (A) (A)
FU-04990
23) Install the rear seat cushion. <Ref. to SE-47,

INSTALLATION, Rear Seat.>
(B)
FU-04993
20) Install the service hole cover of fuel sub level

sensor.
IG-02107

essary.
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel tank and fuel pipe have no
deformation, cracks and other damages.
FU-04992 or loose part.
21) Attach the service hole cover of the fuel pump,
and attach the connector and clip.
(C)
(D)
(B)
(C)
(A) FU-04991
(A) Connector
(B) Clip
(C) Screw
(D) Grommet
FU(H4DOTC)-74
Fuel Filler Pipe

25.Fuel Filler Pipe 10) Disconnect the fuel filler hose (A), PCV inlet
hose (B) and circulate hose (C) from the fuel filler
A: REMOVAL pipe assembly.
WARNING:
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the (C) (B)
working area.
CAUTION:
FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES- (A)
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-66, DRAIN-
FU-05049
ING FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR),
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> 11) Disconnect the evaporation hose (A) from fuel
3) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. filler pipe assembly and remove the bolts and nuts
securing the fuel filler pipe assembly to the vehicle
body.
(A)
IG-02107
4) Open the fuel filler lid, and remove the filler cap.
5) Turn the fuel filler pipe protector in the direction
of the arrow to unlock and remove it.
FU-05007
FU-04044
12) Remove the fuel filler pipe assembly from the
6) Remove the rear wheel RH. underside of the vehicle.
8) Remove the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to EI-38,
9) Remove the rear sub frame. <Ref. to RS-16, RE-
MOVAL, Rear Sub Frame.>
FU(H4DOTC)-75
Fuel Filler Pipe

B: INSTALLATION 5) Securely insert the fuel filler hose (A), PCV inlet
hose (B) and circulate hose (C) to the spool or stop-
1) Open the fuel filler lid.
per, then attach the clamp or clip as shown in the
2) Insert the fuel filler pipe assembly into the rubber
figure.
saucer from inside of the rear fender.
3) Install the fuel filler pipe assembly to the vehicle Tightening torque:
body and connect the evaporation hose (A) to the 2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
fuel filler pipe assembly.
Tightening torque: (C) (B)
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
(A)
(A)
FU-05049
(2) (3) (4)

(1)
L/2
L
FU-05646
(1) Hose
(2) Clamp or clip
FU-05007 (3) Spool or bump
(4) Pipe
4) Align the cutout on the fuel filler pipe protector
and the protrusion of the neck holder and insert
6) Install the rear sub frame. <Ref. to RS-18, IN-
them all the way, and then turn the fuel filler pipe
STALLATION, Rear Sub Frame.>
protector in the direction of the arrow until it is
7) Install the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to EI-38, IN-
locked.
9) Install the rear wheel RH.
Tightening torque:
120 N·m (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
FU-04104
IG-02107

essary.
FU(H4DOTC)-76
Fuel Filler Pipe

C: DISASSEMBLY D: ASSEMBLY
1) Remove the shut valve from the fuel filler pipe. 1) Temporarily tighten the bolts securing the fuel
<Ref. to EC(H4DOTC)-20, REMOVAL, Shut filler pipe bracket to the fuel filler pipe.
Valve.>
2) Remove the evaporation pipe from the fuel filler
pipe.
FU-05009
2) Install the evaporation pipe to the fuel filler pipe.

FU-05008 Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
3) Remove the fuel filler pipe bracket from the fuel
filler pipe.
FU-05008
FU-05009
FU(H4DOTC)-77
Fuel Filler Pipe

3) Tighten the bolts securing the fuel filler pipe

bracket to the fuel filler pipe.
Tightening torque:
7.35 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
FU-05010
4) Install the shut valve to the fuel filler pipe. <Ref.

to EC(H4DOTC)-20, INSTALLATION, Shut
Valve.>
E: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel filler pipe and evaporation
pipe do not have deformation, cracks or other dam-
ages.
loose part.
FU(H4DOTC)-78
Fuel Pump
26.Fuel Pump (3) Push the grommet (D) down and remove the
service hole cover.
A: REMOVAL (C)
WARNING:
working area. (D)
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to spill fuel. (B)
more of the fuel is remaining, be sure to drain (C)
fuel before starting work to avoid the fuel to (A) FU-04991
spill.
NOTE: 7) Disconnect the connector (A) from fuel pump,
Fuel pump assembly consists of fuel pump, fuel fil- and remove the clip (B) securing the harness.
ter, fuel chamber and fuel level sensor. 8) Disconnect the quick connector of fuel delivery
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to tube (C), fuel return tube (D) and fuel sub delivery
FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES- tube (E). <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-88, REMOVAL,
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> Fuel Delivery, Return and Evaporation Lines.>
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-66, DRAIN- 9) Remove the rubber cap (F) from nut.
ING FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), (D)
PROCEDURE, Fuel.>
3) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. (E)
(F)
(C)
(A)
(B)
FU-05011
10) Remove the nuts securing the fuel pump upper

plate to the fuel tank and remove the fuel pump up-
IG-02107 per plate.
REMOVAL, Rear Seat.>
5) Remove the clips (A) and seat cushion hooks
FU-04534
(C) 11) Remove the fuel pump assembly from the fuel
tank.
(B)
(B) (A) (A)
FU-04990

(1) Disconnect the fuel cord connector (A), and
remove the clip (B).
FU(H4DOTC)-79
Fuel Pump
Install in the reverse order of removal while being 1) Check that the fuel pump has no deformation,
careful of the following. cracks or other damages.
• Make sure the sealing portion is free from fuel or 2) Connect battery positive terminal to terminal No.
foreign matter before installation. 5 and battery ground terminal to terminal No. 6, and
• Align protrusion (A) of the gasket to the position inspect the fuel pump operation.
shown in the figure. WARNING:
• Insert the protrusion (B) of gasket to the fuel • Wipe off fuel completely.
pump upper plate. (3 places) • Keep the battery as far apart from fuel pump
• Align the protrusion (C) of fuel pump assembly as possible.
with the cutout on the fuel pump upper plate. • Do not run the fuel pump for a long time un-
• Tighten the nuts to the specified torque in the order non-load condition.
der as shown in the figure.
• After assembly, install the rubber cap (D) to the
2 1
position shown in the figure.
4 3
NOTE: 6 5
• Do not forget to install the rubber cap (D).
Tightening torque:
4.4 N·m (0.4 kgf-m, 3.2 ft-lb)
(C)
2 FU-04110
4 7
(B) (B)
6 5
(D)
(a) 8 3
1 (A)
(B) FU-05012
FU(H4DOTC)-80
Fuel Level Sensor

27.Fuel Level Sensor 4) Press two claws (A) of the fuel level sensor, and
slide the fuel level sensor in the direction of the ar-
A: REMOVAL row to remove the fuel level sensor.
WARNING:
working area. (A) (A)
CAUTION:
spill.
FU-05015
NOTE:
The fuel level sensor is built in fuel pump assembly. B: INSTALLATION
1) Remove the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to Install in the reverse order of removal.
FU(H4DOTC)-79, REMOVAL, Fuel Pump.>
sembly.
FU-05013
3) Remove the harness from the hooks (A) on the

fuel chamber assembly and remove the fuel tem-
perature sensor (B) from fuel chamber assembly.
(A)
(B)
FU-05014
FU(H4DOTC)-81
Fuel Level Sensor

C: INSPECTION 3) Measure the resistance between fuel level sen-

sor terminals.
1) Check that the fuel level sensor has no damage.
2) Measure the fuel level sensor float position.
NOTE:
When inspecting the fuel level sensor, perform the
work with the sensor installed to the fuel pump.
• Model with fuel level sensor bent in 3 locations (A)
(1)
(B)
(A)
(2) 2 1
(3)
(B) 4 3
FU-05016 6 5
(1) FULL
(2) EMPTY
Float position Standard FU-05017

FULL to Fuel tank seating 126.4±4 mm
surface (A) (4.976±0.157 in)
11.0±4 mm (0.433±0.157 in)
surface (B)

(A)
(1)
(B)
(A)
(2)
(3) 2 1
(B)
FU-08404 4 3
6 5
(1) FULL
(2) EMPTY

FULL to Fuel tank seating 120.9±4 mm FU-08405
surface (A) (4.759±0.157 in)
surface (B)
14.8±4 mm (0.583±0.157 in) FULL (A) 2.0+0.5 –1.0 Ω
1 and 4
EMPTY (B) 31.9±1.0 Ω
FU(H4DOTC)-82

28.Fuel Sub Level Sensor 6) Disconnect the connector (A) from fuel sub level
sensor, and remove the clip (B) securing the fuel
A: REMOVAL cord from fuel sub level sensor protector.
WARNING:
working area.
(B)
CAUTION: (A)
spill.
FU-05018
FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES- 7) Remove the bolts (A) securing the fuel sub level
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> sensor protector to the fuel sub level sensor upper
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-66, DRAIN- plate, and remove the fuel sub level sensor protec-
ING FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), tor.
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> 8) Disconnect the quick connector on the fuel sub
3) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. delivery tube (B). <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-88, RE-
MOVAL, Fuel Delivery, Return and Evaporation
Lines.>
(A)
IG-02107 (B)

FU-05019
REMOVAL, Rear Seat.>
5) Remove the service hole cover. 9) Remove the nuts securing the fuel sub level sen-
sor upper plate to the fuel tank and remove the fuel
sub level sensor upper plate.
FU-04992
FU-04569
10) Remove the fuel sub level sensor from the fuel
tank.
FU(H4DOTC)-83

Install in the reverse order of removal while being 1) Check that the fuel sub level sensor has no dam-
careful of the following. age.
• Make sure the sealing portion is free from fuel or 2) Measure the fuel sub level sensor float position.
• Align protrusion (A) of the gasket to the position (A)
(1) (3)
• Align protrusion (B) of the fuel sub level sensor to
the cutout in the fuel sub level sensor upper plate.
• After tightening the bolts to the specified torque (B)
in the order indicated in the figure, install the fuel
sub level sensor protector.
NOTE: (2)
Use a new gasket. FU-04213
Tightening torque: (1) FULL

4.4 N·m (0.4 kgf-m, 3.2 ft-lb) (2) EMPTY
4 (3) Datum points
2
6
6.4±3.5 mm
FULL to Datum point (A)
(0.252±0.138 in)
5
163.3±3.5 mm
EMPTY to Datum point (B)
(6.429±0.138 in)
(a) 1 (B)
3
3) Measure the resistance between fuel sub level
(A)
FU-04533 sensor terminals.
(A)
(B)
FU-05020
2 1
FU-04214

FULL (A) 2.0+0.5 –1.0 Ω
1 and 2
EMPTY (B) 62.1±1.0 Ω
FU(H4DOTC)-84
Fuel Filter
29.Fuel Filter 5) Remove the fuel pump holder from the fuel filter
assembly.
A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION:
FU-05023
spill.
• Be careful not to drop or apply any impact to 6) Remove the fuel pump from the fuel filter assem-
the fuel pump during work. This may deterio- bly.
rate its performance.
NOTE:
The fuel filter is built in fuel pump assembly.
1) Remove the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-79, REMOVAL, Fuel Pump.>
2) Remove the fuel level sensor and fuel tempera-
ture sensor. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-81, REMOVAL,
Fuel Level Sensor.>
sembly.
FU-05021
FU-05024
4) Disengage the claw connecting the fuel filter as-
sembly and fuel chamber assembly, and separate
fuel filter assembly and fuel chamber assembly.
FU-05022
FU(H4DOTC)-85
Fuel Filter
B: INSTALLATION
1) Assemble the gasket spacer (A) and support
rubber cushion (B) to the fuel pump, and install the
fuel pump to the fuel filter assembly. (B)
NOTE:
• Use a new gasket spacer.
• Use a new support rubber cushion.
• Apply gasoline to the surface of gasket spacer
and support rubber cushion.
(A)
(B) (A)
(A)
FU-03889
FU-05025
FU-05022
2) Install the fuel pump holder to the fuel filter as-
sembly. 4) Connect the fuel pump connector.
FU-03886 FU-05021
3) Install the pump module spring (A) to fuel filter 5) Install the fuel level sensor and fuel temperature
assembly, and install the fuel chamber assembly sensor. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-81, INSTALLA-
(B). TION, Fuel Level Sensor.>
6) Inspect the fuel level sensor. <Ref. to
NOTE:
FU(H4DOTC)-82, INSPECTION, Fuel Level Sen-
• Use a new fuel chamber assembly. sor.>
• Check that the claw connecting the fuel filter as- 7) Install the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to
sembly and fuel chamber assembly is securely fas- FU(H4DOTC)-80, INSTALLATION, Fuel Pump.>
tened.
FU(H4DOTC)-86
Fuel Damper
30.Fuel Damper
A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION:
or cloth.
2) Disconnect the fuel delivery hose (A) and fuel re-
turn hose (B) from the fuel damper, and remove the
fuel damper.
(A)
(B) (A)
(B)
FU-05026
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
If fuel hoses or clamps are damaged, replace them
with new parts.
Tightening torque:
1.25 N·m (0.1 kgf-m, 0.9 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel damper has no deformation,
or loose part.
FU(H4DOTC)-87
Fuel Delivery, Return and Evaporation Lines

31.Fuel Delivery, Return and Evaporation Lines

A: REMOVAL
FU-05027
WARNING: (1) Remove the connect check cover from the

Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the fuel delivery hose and fuel return hose.
working area.
CAUTION:
1) Set the vehicle on a lift.
cap.
4) Remove the floor mat. <Ref. to EI-162, REMOV- FU-05028
AL, Floor Mat.> (2) Set the ST to the fuel pipe.
5) In the engine compartment, disconnect the fuel ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RE-
delivery hoses, fuel return hoses and evaporation LEASE
hoses. (3) Disconnect the quick connector of the fuel
CAUTION: delivery hose and fuel return hose by pushing
• Be careful not to spill fuel. the ST in the direction of the arrow.
or cloth.
FU(H4DOTC)-88

(4) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapo-

ration hose from the fuel pipe.
(F)
ST (D)
(E)
(B)
(A) (C) (A)
(C) FU-05030
(B)
9) Remove the fuel pipe assembly from vehicle.
FU-05029 10) Disconnect the quick connector, then discon-
nect the fuel delivery tube, fuel return tube and fuel
sub delivery tube.
• When using ST
1. Attach ST to the pipe and push ST in the direc-
tion of arrow mark to disconnect the quick connec-
6) Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-
tor.
68, REMOVAL, Fuel Tank.>
LEASE
8) Remove the purge hose (A), purge pipe (B), air CAUTION:
vent hose (C), PCV outlet hose (D), PCV drain • Be careful not to spill fuel.
hose (E) and drain tube assembly (F). • Catch the fuel from hoses using a contain-
er or cloth.
NOTE:
• To disconnect the connector, hold (C)
ure.
1
2 ST pushed, and then pull the connector after
it started moving freely.
NOTE:
1 ered with dust.
(a)
1
2 (C)
ST
(A)
(C)
(B)
FU-05506
1
(b) EC-02590
(A) Quick connector
(a) Air vent hose (C), drain tube ASSY (F) (B) Pipe
(b) PCV outlet hose (D), PCV drain hose (E) (C) Connector holding position
FU(H4DOTC)-89

2. To prevent from damaging or entering foreign 2. To prevent from damaging or entering foreign
matter, wrap the pipes and quick connectors with matter, wrap the pipes and quick connectors with
plastic bag etc. plastic bag etc.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
When reusing the retainer, do not disconnect When reusing the retainer, do not disconnect
the retainer from the connector. the retainer from the pipe.
FU-01333 FU-05507
• When not using ST 11) Remove the evaporation pipe.

1. Push the retainer in the direction of the arrow, (1) Remove the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to
disconnect the quick connector from pipe. EI-38, REMOVAL, Mud Guard.>
CAUTION: (2) Remove the evaporation hose.
er or cloth.
• To disconnect the connector, hold (D)
the retainer pushed in the direction of the ar-
row, and then pull the connector after it start-
ed moving freely. FU-05031
(3) Remove the trunk side trim panel assembly -
side on RH. <Ref. to EI-109, REMOVAL, Rear
Quarter Trim.>
NOTE: (4) Remove the evaporation pipe protector.
ered with dust.
(D)
(B)
(C)
(A)
(D) FU-05032
FU-05510
(A) Quick connector

(B) Retainer
(C) Pipe
(D) Connector holding position
FU(H4DOTC)-90

(5) Remove the evaporation pipe from vehicle. 4) Install the evaporation hose.
FU-05033 FU-05031
B: INSTALLATION 5) Install the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to EI-38, IN-
careful of the following. 2. CONNECTING THE FUEL LINE QUICK
CONNECTOR
1. INSTALLATION OF EVAPORATION PIPE
1) Install the evaporation pipe to the vehicle. CAUTION:
connections. If necessary, clean seal surface of
pipe.
(A)
(a)
(b)
FU-05033
2) Install the evaporation pipe protector.

Tightening torque:
T1: 1 N·m (0.1 kgf-m, 0.7 ft-lb) (B)
T2: 7.5 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
(a)
T2
(b)
T1
FU-05508
FU-05034
(A) When removed using ST
3) Install the trunk side trim panel assembly - side (B) When removed without using ST
on RH. <Ref. to EI-119, INSTALLATION, Rear (a) Seal surface
Quarter Trim.> (b) Pipe
• When reusing the retainer, make sure that

neither scratches nor deformation exist on the
retainer. If it is faulty, use a new part.
FU(H4DOTC)-91

1) Connect the quick connector to pipe.

(A) (a) (d)
CAUTION: (b)
ly connected.
(c)
(d)
(A)
(B)
(a) (d)
(B)
(C)
FU-05511
(b)
(A) Quick connector

(c)
(B) Retainer
(C) Pipe
(d)
• Make sure the two retainer pawls are en-

gaged in their mating positions in the quick FU-05509
connector.
• Be sure to inspect tubes and their connec- (A) When removed using ST
tions for any leakage of fuel. (B) When removed without using ST
• To connect the connector, hold (d) shown in (a) Quick connector
the figure and push in axial direction. (b) Retainer
• When connecting the connector, do not bend (c) Pipe
or twist the tube forcibly. If the tube is bent, re- (d) Connector holding position
place with a new part.
FU(H4DOTC)-92

3. CONNECT FUEL DELIVERY HOSE AND 5. CONNECTING THE EVAPORATION LINE

FUEL RETURN HOSE. QUICK CONNECTOR
Connect the fuel delivery hose and fuel return hose CAUTION:
as shown in the figure. • Make sure there are no damage or dust on
CAUTION: connections. If necessary, clean the seal sur-
• If the connection portion has a spool or stop- face of the pipe.
per, do not allow the end of the hose to bend or • Make sure that the quick connector is secure-
ride over by inserting the hose too deep. ly connected.
• Be sure to inspect hoses and their connec- Connect the quick connector as shown in the fig-
tions for any leakage of fuel. ure.
Tightening torque:
1.25 N·m (0.1 kgf-m, 0.9 ft-lb)
L1: 2.5±1.5 mm (0.098±0.059 in)
L2: 22.5±2.5 mm (0.886±0.098 in)
(3) (4) (5) (6)
(1)
L1
L2
(2)
L1 FU-04503
(1) When there is a spool or stopper

(2) When there is no spool or stopper
(3) Pipe
(4) Spool or stopper
FU-05035
(5) Clamp
(6) Hose C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel pipe has no deformation,
4. EVAPORATION HOSE CONNECTION cracks or other damages.
Connect the evaporation hose to the pipe with an 2) Check that the hose and tube have no cracks,
overlap of 15 to 20 mm (0.59 to 0.79 in). damage or loose part.
L = 17.5±2.5 mm (0.689±0.098 in)
(2) (3)
(1)
L/2
L
FU-04501
(1) Hose
(2) Clip
(3) Pipe
FU(H4DOTC)-93
Fuel System Trouble in General

32.Fuel System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
a. Fuel pump does not operate.
Inspect contact, especially ground, and tighten it
Defective terminal contact
securely.
Trouble in electromagnetic or electronic circuit
Replace the faulty parts.
parts
b. Decline of fuel pump function Replace the fuel pump.
Insufficient fuel
supply to injector Replace the fuel filter. Clean or replace the fuel tank
c. Clogged fuel filter
if necessary.
Clean, correct or replace the pipe, hose or tube of the
d. Clogged or bent pipe, hose or tube of fuel line
fuel line.
Check the fuel line connections, and repair or replace
e. Air is mixed in fuel system.
the defective part.
f. Damaged diaphragm of pressure regulator Replace the pressure regulator.
a. Loose connection in pipe, hose or tube of fuel line
the defective part.
Leakage or run-out b. Cracks in pipe, hose or tube of fuel line Replace the pipe, hose or tube of the fuel line.
of fuel c. Cracks or defective welded part of fuel tank Replace the fuel tank.
Clean, correct or replace the pipe, hose or tube of the
d. Clogged or bent pipe, hose or tube of fuel line
fuel line.
Gasoline smell a. Loose connection in pipe, hose or tube of fuel line
the defective part.
inside of compart-
b. Improper installation of rubber saucer Correct or replace the rubber saucer.
ment
c. Defective canister Replace the canister.
Defective fuel a. Defective operation of fuel level sensor Replace the fuel level sensor.
gauge b. Defective operation of combination meter Replace the combination meter.
Noise a. Big operation noise or vibration from fuel pump Replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
• When the vehicle is left unattended for an extended period of time, water may accumulate in the fuel tank.
Fill fuel fully to prevent the problem.
• In snow-covered areas, mountainous areas, skiing areas, etc. where ambient temperatures drop to 0°C
(32°F) or less throughout the winter season, use a water removing agent in the fuel system to prevent freez-
ing fuel system and accumulating water.
• When water is accumulated in fuel filter, fill the water removing agent in the fuel tank.
• Before using water removing agent, follow the cautions noted on the bottle.
FU(H4DOTC)-94
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION

CONTROL DEVICES)
EC(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Front Catalytic Converter ...........................................................................3
3. Rear Catalytic Converter ............................................................................4
4. Canister ......................................................................................................5
5. Purge Control Solenoid Valve ....................................................................9
7. Fuel Temperature Sensor ........................................................................14
9. Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor .....................................................................16
10. Pressure Control Solenoid Valve .............................................................18
11. Drain Filter ................................................................................................19
12. Shut Valve ................................................................................................20
13. Drain Valve ...............................................................................................21
14. PCV Hose Assembly ................................................................................22
15. PCV Valve ................................................................................................23
General Description
A: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
B: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
hose.
• This tool is made by the French company
CAILLAU. (code) 54.0.000.205
To make it easier to obtain, it has been provided
with a tool number.
ST18353AA000
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Mighty Vac Used for inspecting the fuel tank pressure sensor.
EC(H4DOTC)-2
Front Catalytic Converter

2. Front Catalytic Converter

A: REMOVAL
center exhaust pipe (front). Refer to “Center Ex-
haust Pipe” for removal procedures. <Ref. to
EX(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Center Exhaust
Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
haust Pipe” for installation procedures. <Ref. to
EX(H4DOTC)-13, INSTALLATION, Center Ex-
haust Pipe.>
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
EC(H4DOTC)-3
Rear Catalytic Converter

3. Rear Catalytic Converter

A: REMOVAL
haust Pipe” for removal procedures. <Ref. to
EX(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Center Exhaust
Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
haust Pipe” for installation procedures. <Ref. to
EX(H4DOTC)-13, INSTALLATION, Center Ex-
haust Pipe.>
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
EC(H4DOTC)-4
Canister
4. Canister 5) Remove the clip holding the rear wiring harness.
A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the rear wheel LH.
4) Disconnect the quick connectors of the vent tube
(A), canister drain tube (B), charge tube (C) and
PCV drain tube (D), and remove the tubes from
clips (E). EC-02592
NOTE: 6) Remove the canister from vehicle.
ure.
1
(a)
1
EC-02593
(b)
1
EC-02590
7) Disconnect the connector from drain valve.

(b) Charge tube (C) and PCV drain tube (D)
(D)
(A)
EC-02594
(E)
(B) (C)
EC-02591
EC(H4DOTC)-5
Canister
8) Disconnect the vent tube (A), canister drain tube B: INSTALLATION

(B), charge tube (C) and PCV drain tube (D) from
1) Connect the vent tube (A), canister drain tube
canister, and remove the canister drain tube and
(B), charge tube (C) and PCV drain tube (D) to can-
PCV drain tube (D) from clip (E).
ister, and install the canister drain tube (B) and
NOTE: PCV drain tube (D) to clips (E).
CAUTION:
ure.
1 connections. If necessary, clean the seal sur-
2 face of the pipe.
ly connected.
NOTE:
ure.
(a)
1
(a)
1
(b) EC-02590

(B)
(b) EC-02596
(A)
(D) (a) Vent tube (A) and canister drain tube (B)
(C)
(E)
EC-02595
EC(H4DOTC)-6
Canister
3) Install the canister to the vehicle.

Tightening torque:
(B) 8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
(A)
(D)
(C)
(E)
EC-02595
2) Connect the connector to the drain valve.
EC-02593
4) Secure the rear wiring harness with clip.
EC-02594
EC-02592
EC(H4DOTC)-7
Canister
5) Attach all tubes to clips (E), and connect the C: INSPECTION

quick connectors of the vent tube (A), canister drain
1) Check that the canister has no deformation,
tube (B), charge tube (C) and PCV drain tube (D).
CAUTION: 2) Check that the tube has no cracks, damage or
• Make sure there are no damage or dust on loose part.
face of the pipe.
ly connected.
NOTE:
ure.
(a)
(b) EC-02596

(D)
(A)
(E)
(B) (C)
EC-02591
6) Install the rear mud guard LH. <Ref. to EI-38, IN-

8) Install the rear wheel LH.
Tightening torque:
120 N·m (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
EC(H4DOTC)-8

5. Purge Control Solenoid Valve 6) Remove the nut securing the purge control sole-
noid valve 1 to the solenoid valve bracket assembly.
A: REMOVAL
1. PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1
EC-02583
7) Disconnect the connector (A) and vacuum hose

(B) from the purge control solenoid valve 1, and re-
move the purge control solenoid valve 1.
IG-02107 (B)

4) Remove the bolt securing the solenoid valve
bracket assembly from intake manifold.
(A)
EC-02540

EC-02581
5) Remove the bolts securing the PCV pipe and en-

gine harness from intake manifold.
IG-02107

4) Remove the bolt securing the solenoid valve
EC-02582 bracket assembly from intake manifold.
EC-02581
EC(H4DOTC)-9

5) Remove the bolts securing the PCV pipe and en-

(A)
gine harness from intake manifold.
EC-02582 (c) (a)

(B)
6) Remove the nut securing the purge control sole-
noid valve 2 to the solenoid valve bracket assem-
bly.
(c) (b)
EC-02543
(A) Purge control solenoid valve 1

(B) Purge control solenoid valve 2
(a) To intake manifold
EC-02584
(b) To intake duct
7) Disconnect the connector (A) and vacuum hose (c) To fuel pipe
(B) from the purge control solenoid valve 2, and re-
move the purge control solenoid valve 2. Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(A)
(B)
EC-02623
EC-02583
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Connect the vacuum hose as shown in the figure.
EC-02582
EC(H4DOTC)-10


19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb) 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
EC-02581 EC-02584

NOTE:
Connect the vacuum hose as shown in the figure.
(A)
EC-02582
Tightening torque:
19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
(c) (a)
(B)
EC-02581
(c) (b)
EC-02543
(A) Purge control solenoid valve 1

(B) Purge control solenoid valve 2
(a) To intake manifold
(b) To intake duct
(c) To fuel pipe
EC(H4DOTC)-11

C: INSPECTION 4) With terminal No. 1 connected to the battery

positive terminal and terminal No. 2 to the battery
1. PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ground terminal, check that air comes out from (B)
1) Check that the purge control solenoid valve has when air is blown into (A).
no deformation, cracks or other damages. • Purge control solenoid valve 1
2) Measure the resistance between the purge con-
2 1
2 1
EC-02426
(B) (A)
Purge control solenoid 32 ±2 Ω
valve 1 (when 20°C (68°F))
1 and 2
Purge control solenoid 24 ±3 Ω
valve 2 (when 20°C (68°F))
EC-02433
• Purge control solenoid valve 1
(B) (A)
2 1
EC-02430
(B) (A) (B) (A)
EC-02550
EC-02551
Check the vacuum hose for cracks, damage or
looseness.
EC(H4DOTC)-12
Fuel Level Sensor

6. Fuel Level Sensor

A: REMOVAL
For removal procedures, refer to the “FU
(H4DOTC)” section. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-81,
REMOVAL, Fuel Level Sensor.>
B: INSTALLATION
For installation procedures, refer to the “FU
(H4DOTC)” section. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-81, IN-
STALLATION, Fuel Level Sensor.>
C: INSPECTION
For inspection procedures, refer to the
“FU(H4DOTC)” section. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-82,
INSPECTION, Fuel Level Sensor.>
EC(H4DOTC)-13
Fuel Temperature Sensor

7. Fuel Temperature Sensor C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the fuel temperature sensor has no
A: REMOVAL deformation, cracks or other damages.
Fuel temperature sensor is integrated with the fuel 2) Check the resistance between the fuel tempera-
level sensor. Refer to “Fuel Level Sensor” for re- ture sensor terminals.
moval procedure. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-81, RE-
MOVAL, Fuel Level Sensor.> CAUTION:
When measuring the resistance, check the cir-
cuit tester specification and be careful not to
turn on electricity 3 V or more to prevent dam-
aging the fuel temperature sensor.
(A)
1 2
3 4
EC-02585
B: INSTALLATION EC-02452
Refer to “Fuel Level Sensor” for the installation pro- Temperature Terminal No. Standard
cedure. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-81, INSTALLA- 9.2±2.2 kΩ (when the mea-
TION, Fuel Level Sensor.> –10°C (14°F)
2.5±0.2 kΩ (when the mea-
20°C (68°F) 2 and 3
0.84+0.06 –0.05 kΩ (when the
50°C (122°F)
measured current is 1.0 mA)
(A)
EC-02585
EC(H4DOTC)-14

8. Fuel Sub Level Sensor

A: REMOVAL
For removal procedures, refer to the “FU
(H4DOTC)” section. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-83,
REMOVAL, Fuel Sub Level Sensor.>
B: INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION, Fuel Sub Level Sensor.>
C: INSPECTION
For inspection procedures, refer to the
INSPECTION, Fuel Sub Level Sensor.>
EC(H4DOTC)-15

9. Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
Tightening torque:
WARNING:
7.35 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
working area.
EC-02599
C: INSPECTION
IG-02107
1. FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
cap. 1) Check that the fuel tank pressure sensor does
3) Lift up the vehicle. not have deformation, cracks or other damages.
4) Disconnect connector (A) from fuel tank pres- 2) Connect dry-cell battery positive terminal to ter-
sure sensor. minal No. 3 and dry-cell battery ground terminal to
5) Pull out the vacuum hose (B) from vehicle. terminal No. 1, circuit tester positive terminal to ter-
6) Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor from the minal No. 2 and the circuit tester negative terminal
bracket. to terminal No. 1.
(A)
NOTE:
(B) dry-cell battery is 1.6 V or more. And also check the
and 5.2 V.
3 2 1
EC-02597
7) Disconnect the pressure hose from fuel tank

pressure sensor and remove the fuel tank pressure
sensor.
1.5V 1.5V 1.5V

EC-02598
4.8 5.2V
FU-04486
EC(H4DOTC)-16


sure.
NOTE:
the standard value.
Approx. 2.5 V
2 (+) and 1 (–)
(when 25°C (77°F))

on the fuel tank pressure sensor.
(A)
EC-02586

CAUTION:
Be sure to apply pressure within a range of –10
— 20 kPa (–0.1 — 0.2 kgf/cm2, –1.45 — 2.90 psi).
Otherwise the fuel tank pressure sensor will be
damaged.
Terminal
Pressure Standard
No.
–6.67 kPa (–0.07 kgf/cm2, Approx. 0.5 V
–0.97 psi) 2 (+) and (when 25°C (77°F))
6.67 kPa (0.07 kgf/cm2, 1 (–) Approx. 4.5 V
0.97 psi) (when 25°C (77°F))
Check that the hose has no cracks, damage or
loose part.
EC(H4DOTC)-17
Pressure Control Solenoid Valve

10.Pressure Control Solenoid C: INSPECTION

Valve 1. PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
A: REMOVAL VALVE
1) Check that the pressure control solenoid valve
2) Check the resistance between the pressure con-
2 1
IG-02107

3) Disconnect connector (A) from the pressure con- EC-02587
trol solenoid valve.
4) Disconnect the PCV drain hose (B), PCV inlet Terminal No. Standard
hose (C) and PCV outlet hose (D) from the pres- 1 and 2 20 — 30 Ω
sure control solenoid valve.
5) Remove the nuts securing the bracket to the fuel 2. OTHER INSPECTIONS
tank and remove the pressure control solenoid Check that the evaporation hose has no cracks,
valve together with the bracket. damage or loose part.
(B)
(A)
(D)
(C)
EC-02600
6) Remove the pressure control solenoid valve

from the bracket.
EC-02601
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
7.35 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
EC(H4DOTC)-18
Drain Filter
11.Drain Filter
A: SPECIFICATION
Drain valve is a non-disassembled part, so do not
remove the drain filter from drain valve. Refer to
“Canister” for removal and installation procedures.
<Ref. to EC(H4DOTC)-5, REMOVAL, Canister.>
<Ref. to EC(H4DOTC)-6, INSTALLATION, Canis-
ter.>
EC(H4DOTC)-19
Shut Valve
12.Shut Valve C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the shut valve does not have defor-
A: REMOVAL mation, cracks or other damages.
WARNING: 2) Check that the evaporation hose has no cracks,
Place “NO OPEN FLAMES” signs near the damage or loose part.
working area.
CAUTION:
1) Remove the fuel filler pipe. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-75, REMOVAL, Fuel Filler Pipe.>
2) Remove the shut valve from the fuel filler pipe.
EC-02602
3) Disconnect the evaporation hose from shut

valve and remove the shut valve.
EC-02603
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
4.5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.3 ft-lb)
EC-02602
EC(H4DOTC)-20
Drain Valve
13.Drain Valve
A: REMOVAL
Drain valve is integrated with canister. Refer to
“Canister” for removal procedure. <Ref. to
EC(H4DOTC)-5, REMOVAL, Canister.>
B: INSTALLATION
Refer to “Canister” for the installation procedure.
<Ref. to EC(H4DOTC)-6, INSTALLATION, Canis-
ter.>
C: INSPECTION
Check the resistance between drain valve termi-
nals.
2 1
EC-02455

1 and 2 20 — 30 Ω
EC(H4DOTC)-21
PCV Hose Assembly

14.PCV Hose Assembly B: INSTALLATION

1) Install the PCV hose assembly to the cylinder
A: REMOVAL block RH and blow-by pipe assembly and connect
CAUTION: the vacuum hose to the intake manifold.
Do not remove except when the hose is broken. NOTE:
1) Remove the collector cover. Use a new clamp for the PCV hose assembly, fit
2) Remove the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)- the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the
17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.> clamp as shown in the figure, and lock the clamp.
3) Disconnect the vacuum hose from intake mani- ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS
fold and remove the PCV hose assembly from cyl-
inder block RH and blow-by pipe assembly.
NOTE: ST
Pinch the clamp of the PCV hose assembly by fit-
ting the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the
clamp.
ME-04374
ST
ME-04374
EC-02588

C: INSPECTION
Check the PCV hose assembly for cracks, damage
or looseness.
EC-02588
EC(H4DOTC)-22
PCV Valve
15.PCV Valve B: INSTALLATION

1) Connect the vacuum hose (A) and vacuum hose
A: REMOVAL (B) to the PCV valve.
NOTE:
17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.> Use a new clamp for the vacuum hose (B), fit the
cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the clamp as
3) Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) and vacuum
hose (B) from the PCV valve and remove the PCV
valve. ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS
NOTE:
Pinch the clamp of the vacuum hose (B) by fitting ST
the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the
clamp.
ST
ME-04374
(A)
ME-04374
(B)
EC-02589
(A)
(B)
EC-02589
EC(H4DOTC)-23
PCV Valve
C: INSPECTION
1. PCV VALVE
1) Check that the PCV valve has no deformation,
2) Check that air is discharged from (B) when air is
blown into (A).
(B) (A)
EC-02507
(A) (B)
EC-02508
Check the vacuum hose for cracks, damage or
looseness.
EC(H4DOTC)-24
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
IN(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Air Cleaner Element ...................................................................................7
3. Air Cleaner Case ........................................................................................8
4. Air Intake Boot ..........................................................................................10
5. Air Intake Duct ..........................................................................................12
6. Intake Duct ...............................................................................................13
7. Intercooler ................................................................................................17
8. Turbocharger ............................................................................................20
9. Oil Catch Tank .........................................................................................23
10. Scavenge Pump .......................................................................................25
11. Air By-pass Valve .....................................................................................26
12. Resonator Chamber .................................................................................28
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
A: COMPONENT
1. AIR CLEANER
T1
(1)
(3)
(2)
(12)
(4)
T2
(13)
T4
(5)
(6)
T4
T2 T3
(12) (7)
(8)
(14) (9)
(11)
T4 (15) (10)
(12)
T2
(17)
(16)
(12)
T5 T4
T2
IN-02901
(1) Mass air flow and intake air tem- (9) Air intake duct (17) Duct bracket
perature sensor
(2) Air cleaner case (Rear) (10) Clip
(3) Clip (11) Resonator chamber Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Air cleaner element (12) Clamp T1: 1 (0.1, 0.7)
(5) Air cleaner case (Front) (13) Air intake boot A T2: 2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
(6) Cushion (14) Turbo duct T3: 6 (0.6, 4.4)
(7) Spacer (15) Air intake boot B T4: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(8) Cushion (16) Cushion T5: 18 (0.8, 13.3)
IN(H4DOTC)-2
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
2. INTAKE DUCT
T2 (15)
(13)
(21) T3
(12) (8)
(8)
(8) (8)
(21) (8)
(14) (20)
(18)
(18)
A (18) T3
T3 (18)
(21) (8) B I
(16)
C D C D I
E (8)
A F
B T3
G H (10) (18)
G H (17)
(11) (18)
E
F
(B)
(9)
(5) (7) L
(6)
J (8)
(21) T1
K (A)
(3)
(4)
(19)
T2
(2)
J
L (1)
K
IN-02902
(A) To oil catch tank (B) To air by-pass valve
(1) Intake duct (10) Hose clip stay ASSY (19) O-ring
(2) Boost hose ASSY (11) Vacuum control hose (20) Clamp
(3) Air control hose (12) Blow-by pipe (21) Clamp
(4) Wastegate control solenoid valve (13) PCV pipe
(5) Vacuum hose A (14) Blow-by pipe ASSY A Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(6) Vacuum hose B (15) PCV hose ASSY T1: 4 (0.4, 3.0)
(7) Vacuum hose C (16) Blow-by pipe ASSY B T2: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(8) Clamp (17) Water pipe ASSY T3: 6.5 (0.7, 4.8)
(9) Vacuum hose D (18) Clamp
IN(H4DOTC)-3
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
3. INTERCOOLER
(9)
T1
(5) T2
(10)
(3)
(4)
T2
(1)
T1
(5)
(5)
(6)
(13)
T1
(12)
T2
(14) (2)
(11) (8)
(15) (7) T2
T1
(14)
IN-02903
(1) Intercooler (8) Intercooler stay LH (15) Intake boot

(2) Clip (9) Cushion
(3) Spacer (10) Intake duct B Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Cushion (11) O-ring T1: 3 (0.3, 2.2)
(5) Clamp (12) Clamp T2: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(6) Intake duct A (13) Air by-pass valve
(7) Intercooler stay RH (14) Clip
IN(H4DOTC)-4
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
4. TURBOCHARGER
(3)
T3
(2)
(4)
(5) T1
(4)
(6)
(7) (1)
(8)
(7) T5
(7)
(13)
(10)
(11)
(9)
(7)
(10) T1
T4
(12)
(14)
(15)
T1
T1
T2
IN-02904
(1) Turbocharger (9) Water pipe Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)

(2) Oil inlet pipe (10) Union bolt T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) Union bolt (11) Exhaust stay T2: 10.5 (1.1, 7.7)
(4) Gasket (12) Exhaust cover T3: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(5) Boost hose ASSY (13) Gasket T4: 31.5 (3.2, 23.2)
(6) Gasket (14) Oil catch tank T5: 36.5 (3.7, 26.9)
(7) Gasket (15) Oil catch tank stay
(8) Water pipe connector
IN(H4DOTC)-5
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
B: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
C: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
hose.
CAILLAU. (code) 54.0.000.205
with a tool number.
ST18353AA000
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Mighty Vac Used for checking waste gate actuator and air by-pass valve.
IN(H4DOTC)-6
Air Cleaner Element

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
2. Air Cleaner Element B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the suction hose from intake duct and CAUTION:
air cleaner case (rear). Be sure to use SUBARU genuine air cleaner el-
ement depending on the engine type when re-
placing the air cleaner elements. Using other air
cleaner element may affect the engine perfor-
mance.
NOTE:
• Check that there are no foreign objects in the air
cleaner case.
• If the protrusion of the air cleaner case (rear) is
removed when removing the air cleaner element,
align the protrusion of the air cleaner case (rear) to
the hole on the air cleaner case (front) to install.
IN-02679
IN-02723
2) Remove the clip (A) from the air cleaner case C: INSPECTION
(front). 1) Check that the air cleaner element has no defor-
2) Check the air cleaner element for excessive dirt.
(A)
IN-02724
3) Open the air cleaner case to remove the air

cleaner element.
IN-02725
IN(H4DOTC)-7
Air Cleaner Case

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
3. Air Cleaner Case 6) Remove the clip (D) from the air cleaner case
(front), and remove the air cleaner case (rear).
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. (C)
(B)
(A)
(D)
IN-02726
7) Remove the air cleaner element.

IG-02107 8) Remove bolts (A) and nuts (B) which secure the
2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to air cleaner case (front) to the body, and remove the
IN(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> air cleaner case (front).
3) Remove the suction hose from intake duct and
air cleaner case (rear). (B)
(A)
IN-02727
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the bolt (A) and nut (B) which secure the
air cleaner case (front) to the body.
Tightening torque:
Bolt (A)
6 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.4 ft-lb)
Nut (B)
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
(B)
IN-02723
4) Disconnect the connector (A) from the mass air

flow and intake air temperature sensor, and re-
move the clip (B) which holds the mass air flow and (A)
intake air temperature sensor harness.
5) Loosen the clamp (C) which holds the air intake
boot. IN-02727
2) Install the air cleaner element.
IN(H4DOTC)-8
Air Cleaner Case

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
3) Install the air intake case (rear). 7) Install the suction hose to intake duct and air
NOTE: cleaner case (rear).
When installing the air cleaner case (rear), align the
protrusion of the air cleaner case (rear) to the hole
on the air cleaner case (front) to install.
IN-02679
4) Install the clip (A) to the air cleaner case (front).

5) Hold the mass air flow and intake air tempera-
ture sensor harness with the clip (B), and connect
the connector (C) to the mass air flow and intake air
temperature sensor.
(C) (B) IN-02723
8) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-

12, INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.>
(A)
IN-02728
6) Tighten the clamp which secures the air intake

boot.
Tightening torque:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
IG-02107
C: INSPECTION
Check that the air cleaner case has no deforma-
IN-02729
IN(H4DOTC)-9
Air Intake Boot

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
4. Air Intake Boot B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. NOTE:
When installing the air intake boot to the vehicle,
pay attention to the mounting hole position, and
align the protrusion for stopping rotation of cushion
to the cutout portion on the turbo duct.
(B)
IG-02107 (A)

3) Remove the air cleaner case. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-8, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner Case.>
4) Lift up the vehicle. (E)
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> (G)
6) Remove the intake duct from the air intake boot. (F)
(D)
(G)
(F)
(C)
IN-02691
(A) Attachment hole

(B) Not used
IN-02730 (C) Turbo duct
7) Lower the vehicle. (D) Cushion
8) Remove the nuts which secure the air intake (E) Duct bracket
boot to the vehicle, and remove the air intake boot (F) Cutout portion
from the upper side of the vehicle. (G) Protrusion portion
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
IN-02685
IN-02685
IN(H4DOTC)-10
Air Intake Boot

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
Tightening torque:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
IN-02730
C: DISASSEMBLY
Remove the air intake boot from the turbo duct.
IN-02686
D: ASSEMBLY
Install the air intake boot to the turbo duct.
Tightening torque:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
IN-02686
E: INSPECTION
Check that the air intake boot and turbo duct have
no cracks, damage or loose part.
IN(H4DOTC)-11
Air Intake Duct

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
5. Air Intake Duct

A: REMOVAL
Remove the clip which secures air intake duct then
remove the air intake duct.
IN-02731
B: INSTALLATION
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the air intake duct has no deforma-
2) Inspect that no foreign objects are mixed in the
air intake duct.
IN(H4DOTC)-12
Intake Duct
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
6. Intake Duct 7) Disconnect the connector from the wastegate

control solenoid valve.
A: REMOVAL
IN-02763
8) Loosen the clamp (A) securing the air intake

boot to the intake duct, and remove the air intake
IG-02107 boot from intake duct.
3) Disconnect the vacuum hose from PCV pipe. 9) Disconnect the vacuum hose (B) from intake
duct, and unlock the clip (C) securing the air by-
pass valve to the intake duct.
NOTE:
Pinch the clamp of the vacuum hose (B) by fitting
the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the
clamp.
IN-02732
ST
4) Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from blow-by
pipe and remove the vacuum hose (A) and vacuum
hose (C).
(C)
(A)
ME-04374
(B)
(B)
IN-02733 (C)

(A)
IN-02773
IN(H4DOTC)-13
Intake Duct
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
10) Disconnect the air control hose (A). Tightening torque:

11) Remove the bolts which secure the intake duct 2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
to the turbocharger, and remove the intake duct.
(A)
IN-02734
IN-02735
3) Connect the connector to the wastegate control
B: INSTALLATION solenoid valve.
1) Install the bolts which secure the intake duct to
the turbocharger, and connect the air control hose
(A).
NOTE:
• Be careful not to pinch the O-ring.
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
IN-02763

6) Install the vacuum hose (A) and vacuum hose
(A) (C) to the clip (B), and connect the vacuum hose
(A) to the blow-by pipe.
NOTE:
Install the vacuum hose as shown in the figure.
IN-02735
2) Install the air by-pass valve and air intake boot to

the intake duct, and connect the vacuum hose to
the intake duct.
NOTE:
Use a new clamp for the vacuum hose, fit the cut
ST
ME-04374
IN(H4DOTC)-14
Intake Duct
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
(b)
(a)
(c)
A
A
B
B
C
C IG-02107
D
D
C: DISASSEMBLY
(e) 1) Remove the vacuum hose (A) and vacuum hose
E
E (B) from intake duct.
(f)
F F
(B)
(d)
IN-02736
(A)
(a) Blow-by pipe
(b) PCV pipe
(c) Hose clip stay ASSY
(d) Intake duct
IN-02764
(e) Vacuum hose (C)
2) Remove the wastegate control solenoid valve
(f) Vacuum hose (A)
and air control hose from the intake duct.
(C)
(A)
(B)
IN-02765
IN-02733
7) Connect the vacuum hose to PCV pipe.
IN-02732
IN(H4DOTC)-15
Intake Duct
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
D: ASSEMBLY
1) Install the wastegate control solenoid valve and
air control hose to the intake duct.
• When tightening the boost control solenoid
valve, check that it is securely seated.
Tightening torque:
4 N·m (0.4 kgf-m, 3.0 ft-lb)
IN-02765
2) Install the vacuum hose (A) and vacuum hose

(B) from intake duct.
(B)
(A)
IN-02764
E: INSPECTION
1) Check that the intake duct, PCV pipe and blow-
by pipe have no deformation, cracks or other dam-
ages.
2) Check that the vacuum hose and air control
hose have no cracks, damage or loose part.
IN(H4DOTC)-16
Intercooler
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
7. Intercooler 7) Remove the power steering pump.

(1) Remove the suction hose from intake duct.
A: REMOVAL
2) Remove the clamp (A) which holds the intake
duct to the intercooler, and remove bolts which se-
cure the intercooler to the intercooler stay LH.
IN-02740
(2) Disconnect the connector (A) from power

steering pump, and remove the power steering
(A) pump together with the power steering pump
bracket from engine and stopper rod.
IN-02737
3) Loosen the clamp (A) securing the intake duct to

the intercooler, and remove the bolt securing the in- (A)
tercooler to the intercooler stay RH to remove the
intercooler.
IN-02741
(A) (3) Mount the power steering pump together

side wheel apron.
8) Remove the radiator sub fan motor assembly.
IN-02738 <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator
4) Remove the brake booster vacuum hose from Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
the clip (A), and remove the intercooler stay RH 9) Remove the engine coolant hose from the clip
and intercooler stay LH. (A).
10) Remove the bolts which secure the intake duct
to the turbocharger, and remove the air by-pass
valve from the intake duct.
(A)
(A)
IN-02739
5) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-41,

REMOVAL, V-belt.> IN-02696
IN(H4DOTC)-17
Intercooler
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
11) Remove the intake duct from intake manifold. 5) Install the power steering pump.
(1) Install the power steering pump together
with the power steering pump bracket to engine
and stopper rod, and connect the connector (A)
to the power steering pump.
Tightening torque:
Refer to “COMPONENT” of “STARTING/
CHARGING SYSTEMS” for the tightening
torque. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-7, GENERATOR
BRACKET, COMPONENT, General Descrip-
IN-02698 tion.>
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the intake duct to the intake manifold. (A)
IN-02741
(2) Install the suction hose to the intake duct.

IN-02698
2) Attach the engine coolant hose to the clip (A).

3) Install the air by-pass valve to the intake duct,
and install the bolts which secure the intake duct to
the turbocharger.
NOTE:
• Be careful not to pinch the O-ring.
IN-02740
Tightening torque:
T1: 3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb) 6) Install the generator. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-16, IN-
T2: 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb) STALLATION, Generator.>
7) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-41,
(A)
8) Install the intercooler stay RH and intercooler
stay LH, and install the brake booster vacuum hose
to the clip (A).
Tightening torque:
16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
T1
T2
IN-02697
4) Install the radiator sub fan motor assembly.

<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, INSTALLATION, Radi- (A)
IN-02739
IN(H4DOTC)-18
Intercooler
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
9) Place the intercooler and attach the bolt to se-

cure the intercooler to the intercooler stay RH. And
tighten the clamp to secure the intake duct to the in-
tercooler.
Tightening torque:
T1: 3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
T2: 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
T2 T1
IN-02742
10) Install the bolts which secure the intercooler to

the intercooler stay LH, and tighten the clamp
which holds the intake duct to the intercooler.
Tightening torque:
T1: 3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
T2: 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
T2
T1
IN-02743

C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the intercooler and intercooler stay
have no deformation, cracks or other damages.
2) Check that the intake duct has no cracks, dam-
age or loose part.
IN(H4DOTC)-19
Turbocharger
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
8. Turbocharger 4) Remove the exhaust cover from the turbocharg-

er.
A: REMOVAL
Remove the turbo charger and front exhaust pipe
as a unit. Refer to “Front Exhaust Pipe” for the re-
moval procedure. <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-5, RE-
MOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.> <Ref. to
EX(H4DOTC)-10, DISASSEMBLY, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
Refer to “Front Exhaust Pipe” for the installation
IN-02707
procedure. <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-7, INSTALLA-
TION, Front Exhaust Pipe.> <Ref. to 5) Remove the exhaust stay from the turbocharger.
EX(H4DOTC)-11, ASSEMBLY, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the oil inlet pipe from the turbocharger.
IN-02708
D: ASSEMBLY
1) Install the exhaust stay to the turbocharger.
Tightening torque:
IN-02771
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
2) Remove the water pipe from the turbocharger.
IN-02708
IN-02768
2) Install the exhaust cover to the turbocharger.
3) Remove the water pipe connector from the tur-
bocharger. Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
IN-02769
IN-02707
IN(H4DOTC)-20
Turbocharger
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
3) Install the water pipe connector to the turbo- E: INSPECTION

charger.
1. WASTE GATE ACTUATOR
NOTE:
Use a new gasket. 1) Remove the collector cover.
Tightening torque: EX(H4DOTC)-5, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.>
36.5 N·m (3.7 kgf-m, 26.9 ft-lb) 3) Remove the exhaust pipe cover.
IN-02769 EX-02594
4) Install the water pipe to the turbocharger. 4) Remove the boost hose (B) from the waste gate
NOTE: actuator (A) of the turbocharger, and connect the
Use a new gasket. Mighty Vac to the waste gate actuator (A).
Tightening torque:
31.5 N·m (3.2 kgf-m, 23.2 ft-lb)
(D)
(B)
(C)
(A)
IN-02770
(A) Waste gate actuator

IN-02768 (B) Boost hose
5) Install the oil inlet pipe to the turbocharger. (C) Control rod
(D) Control rod stroke
NOTE:
Use a new gasket. 5) Pressurize slowly with the Mighty Vac, and
Tightening torque: check the pressure when the control rod stroke (D)
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) becomes 2 mm (0.08 in). If it is not within the stan-
T2: 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb) dard, replace the turbocharger assembly.
CAUTION:
T2 Do not pressurize over 85.2 kPa (0.87 kgf/cm2,
12.35 psi) to prevent damaging the waste gate
actuator.
T1 Operating pressure (control rod stroke 2 mm
(0.08 in)):
Standard
70.8 — 76.7 kPa (0.72 — 0.78 kgf/cm2, 10.27
— 11.12 psi)
IN-02772
IN(H4DOTC)-21
Turbocharger
INTAKE (INDUCTION)

Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
EX-02594
1) Check that the turbocharger and pipe have no
loose part.
3) Check that there are no oil leaks or water leaks
from the pipe attachment section.
IN(H4DOTC)-22
Oil Catch Tank

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
9. Oil Catch Tank B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- • Use a new gasket.
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> • When installing the oil catch tank, tighten to the
3) Remove the engine cover. specified torque in the alphabetical order shown in
the figure.
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 10.5 N·m (1.1 kgf-m, 7.7 ft-lb)
T1
IN-02746 (a)
T2 (c)
4) Disconnect vacuum hose (A) and oil outlet hose (b)
(B) from the oil catch tank.
NOTE: IN-02767
Pinch the clamp of the vacuum hose (A) by fitting
the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the • Use a new clamp for the vacuum hose, fit the cut
clamp as shown in the figure, and unlock the out in the ST with the protrusion on the clamp as
clamp. shown in the figure, and lock the clamp.
ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS
ST ST
ME-04374 ME-04374
5) Remove bolts and nuts which secure the oil • After installing, check the engine oil level and re-
catch tank to the turbocharger and oil catch tank plenish it if necessary. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, IN-
stay, and remove the oil catch tank. SPECTION, Engine Oil.>
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(A)
(B)
IN-02747
IN-02746
IN(H4DOTC)-23
Oil Catch Tank

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the oil catch tank does not have de-
2) Check that the vacuum hose and oil outlet hose
have no cracks, damage or loose part.
IN(H4DOTC)-24
Scavenge Pump
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
10.Scavenge Pump
A: REMOVAL
For removal procedures, refer to LU (H4SO) sec-
tion. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-28, REMOVAL, Scavenge
Pump.>
B: INSTALLATION
For installation procedures, refer to LU (H4SO)
section. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-28, INSTALLATION,
Scavenge Pump.>
C: INSPECTION
Refer to LU (H4SO) for inspection procedures.
<Ref. to LU(H4SO)-28, INSPECTION, Scavenge
Pump.>
IN(H4DOTC)-25
Air By-pass Valve

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
11.Air By-pass Valve B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the collector cover. Tightening torque:
2) Disconnect the vacuum control hose from the 3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
PCV pipe, and remove the vacuum control hose
from the clip (A).
IN-02712
(A)
C: INSPECTION
IN-02744
3) Loosen the clamp which holds the air by-pass 1. AIR BY-PASS VALVE
valve to the intake duct. 1) Check that the air by-pass valve has no defor-
2) Connect the Mighty Vac to the nipple (A) of the
air by-pass valve.
(A)
IN-02712

IN-02715
6) Remove the air by-pass valve from the intake 3) Using the Mighty Vac, generate the negative
duct. pressure to –93.3 kPa (–0.95 kgf/cm2, –13.5 psi).
Check that the Mighty Vac gauge needle holds 10
seconds without falling by –92.6 kPa (–0.94 kgf/
cm2, –13.4 psi).
IN-02745
IN(H4DOTC)-26
Air By-pass Valve

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
4) Set a dial gauge to the end of valve rod of the air

by-pass valve.
IN-02716
5) Using the Mighty Vac, generate the negative

pressure, and check the pressure when dial gauge
needle (valve stroke) shows 0.5 mm (0.02 in). If it is
not within the standard, replace the air by-pass
valve.
Opening pressure (valve stroke 0.5 mm (0.02
in)):
Standard
–49.3 — –57.3 kPa (–0.50 — –0.58 kgf/cm2,
–7.15 — –8.31 psi)
Check that the vacuum hose and air by-pass pipe
have no cracks, damage or loose part.
IN(H4DOTC)-27
Resonator Chamber
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
12.Resonator Chamber
A: REMOVAL
er Case” for removal procedure. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-8, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner Case.>
B: INSTALLATION
er Case” for installation procedure. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-8, INSTALLATION, Air Cleaner
Case.>
C: INSPECTION
Check that the resonator chamber has no deforma-
IN(H4DOTC)-28
MECHANICAL
ME(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Compression ............................................................................................20
3. Idle Speed ................................................................................................21
4. Ignition Timing ..........................................................................................22
5. Intake Manifold Vacuum ...........................................................................23
6. Engine Oil Pressure .................................................................................24
7. Fuel Pressure ...........................................................................................25
8. Valve Clearance .......................................................................................26
9. Engine Assembly .....................................................................................30
10. Engine Mounting ......................................................................................37
11. Preparation for Overhaul ..........................................................................40
12. V-belt ........................................................................................................41
13. Crank Pulley .............................................................................................43
14. Timing Belt Cover .....................................................................................45
15. Timing Belt ...............................................................................................50
16. Cam Sprocket ..........................................................................................59
17. Crank Sprocket ........................................................................................60
18. Camshaft ..................................................................................................61
19. Cylinder Head ..........................................................................................70
20. Cylinder Block ..........................................................................................79
21. Intake and Exhaust Valve ......................................................................103
22. Piston .....................................................................................................104
23. Connecting Rod .....................................................................................105
24. Crankshaft ..............................................................................................106
25. Engine Trouble in General .....................................................................107
26. Engine Noise ..........................................................................................113
General Description
MECHANICAL
A: SPECIFICATION
Model 2.5 L
Cylinder arrangement
Belt driven, double overhead camshaft,
Valve system mechanism
4-valve/cylinder
Bore × Stroke mm (in) 99.5 × 79.0 (3.92 × 3.11)
Displacement cm3 (cu in) 2,457 (149.94)
Compression ratio 9.5
Compression pressure
kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Standard 981 — 1,177 (10 — 12, 142 — 171)
(at 200 — 300 rpm)
Number of piston rings Pressure ring: 2, Oil ring: 1
Max.
ATDC 5°
retard
Open
Min.
BTDC 35°
advance
Intake valve timing
Max.
ABDC 65°
retard
Close
Engine Min.
ABDC 25°
advance
Max.
BBDC 24°
retard
Open
Min.
BBDC 64°
advance
Exhaust valve timing
Max.
ATDC 26°
retard
Close
Min.
BTDC 14°
advance
Inspection Intake 0.20+0.04 –0.06 (0.0079+0.0016 –0.0024)
value Exhaust 0.35±0.05 (0.0138±0.0020)
Valve clearance mm (in)
Adjust- Intake 0.20+0.01 –0.03 (0.0079+0.0004 –0.0012)
ment value Exhaust 0.35±0.02 (0.0138±0.0008)
Idle speed (Gear shift lever in No load Standard 700±100
rpm
neutral position) A/C ON Standard 700 — 850
Ignition order 1→3→2→4
Ignition timing BTDC/rpm Standard 15°±10°/700
ME(H4DOTC)-2
General Description
MECHANICAL
NOTE:
OS: Oversize US: Undersize
Belt tension
Adjuster rod protrusion amount mm (in) 5.2 — 6.2 (0.205 — 0.244)
adjuster
Intake Standard 46.55 — 46.65 (1.833 — 1.837)
Cam lobe height mm (in)
Cam base circle diameter mm (in) Standard 37.0 (1.457)
Camshaft
Front Standard 37.946 — 37.963 (1.4939 — 1.4946)
Journal O.D. mm (in)
Center, rear Standard 29.946 — 29.963 (1.1790 — 1.1796)
Warping limit (mating surface with cylinder block) mm (in) 0.035 (0.0014)
Cylinder
head
Seating angle between valve and valve seat 90°
Valve seat Contacting width between Intake Standard 0.6 — 1.4 (0.024 — 0.055)
mm (in)
valve and valve seat Exhaust Standard 1.2 — 1.8 (0.047 — 0.071)
Clearance between the valve Intake Standard 0.030 — 0.057 (0.0012 — 0.0022)
mm (in)
guide and valve stem Exhaust Standard 0.040 — 0.067 (0.0016 — 0.0026)
Inside diameter mm (in) 6.000 — 6.012 (0.2362 — 0.2367)
Valve guide
Intake 5.955 — 5.970 (0.2344 — 0.2350)
Valve stem outer diameters mm (in)
Exhaust 5.945 — 5.960 (0.2341 — 0.2346)
Valve guide protrusion amount mm (in) 15.8 — 16.2 (0.622 — 0.638)
Intake Standard 1.0 — 1.4 (0.039 — 0.055)
Head edge thickness mm (in)
Valve
Intake 104.4 (4.110)
Overall length mm (in)
Exhaust 104.65 (4.1201)
205 — 235
Set (20.90 — 23.96, 46.09 — 52.84)/
36.0 (1.417)
Valve spring Tension/spring height N (kgf, lb)/mm (in)
426 — 490
Lift (43.44 — 49.96, 95.78 — 110.17)/
26.5 (1.043)
Outer diameter mm (in) Standard 34.959 — 34.975 (1.3763 — 1.3770)
Valve lifter mating surface inner diameter mm (in) Standard 34.994 — 35.016 (1.3777 — 1.3786)
Valve lifter
Valve lifter and valve lifter mating surface clear-
mm (in) Standard 0.019 — 0.057 (0.0007 — 0.0022)
ance
Warping limit (mating surface with cylinder head) mm (in) 0.025 (0.0098)
Cylinder Cylindricality mm (in) Standard 0.015 (0.0006)
block Out-of-roundness mm (in) Standard 0.010 (0.0004)
mm (in) Standard –0.010 — 0.010 (–0.00039 — 0.00039)
(68°F)
Cylinder inner diameter boring limit (diameter) mm (in) To 100.005 (3.9372)
ME(H4DOTC)-3
General Description
MECHANICAL
Piston grade point mm (in) 38.2 (1.50)

A 99.505 — 99.515 (3.9175 — 3.9179)
Standard
Piston B 99.495 — 99.505 (3.9171 — 3.9175)
Outer diameter mm (in)
0.25 (0.0098) OS 99.745 — 99.765 (3.9270 — 3.9278)
0.50 (0.0197) OS 99.995 — 100.015 (3.9368 — 3.9376)
Piston pin must be fitted into position
Degree of fit
Piston pin with thumb at 20°C (68°F).
Clearance between piston pin hole and piston pin mm (in) Standard 0.004 — 0.008 (0.0002 — 0.0003)
Top ring Standard 0.20 — 0.25 (0.0079 — 0.0098)
Piston ring gap mm (in) Second ring Standard 0.37 — 0.52 (0.015 — 0.0203)
Piston ring Oil ring Standard 0.20 — 0.50 (0.0079 — 0.0197)
Clearance between piston Top ring Standard 0.040 — 0.080 (0.0016 — 0.0031)
mm (in)
ring and piston ring groove Second ring Standard 0.030 — 0.070 (0.0012 — 0.0028)
Bend or twist per 100 mm (3.94 in) in length mm (in) Limit 0.1 (0.0039)
Connecting Oil clearance mm (in) Standard 0.017 — 0.045 (0.0007 — 0.0018)
rod and con-
Standard 1.490 — 1.506 (0.0587 — 0.0593)
necting rod
bearing Bearing size 0.03 (0.0012) US 1.504 — 1.512 (0.0592 — 0.0595)
mm (in)
(Thickness at center) 0.05 (0.0020) US 1.514 — 1.522 (0.0596 — 0.0599)
0.25 (0.0098) US 1.614 — 1.622 (0.0635 — 0.0639)
Bushing of
Clearance between piston pin and bushing mm (in) Standard 0 — 0.022 (0 — 0.0009)
small end
Out-of-roundness mm (in) Standard 0.003 (0.0001)
Crank pin Cylindricality mm (in) Standard 0.004 (0.0002)
Out-of-roundness mm (in) Standard 0.005 (0.0002)
Crank journal Cylindricality mm (in) Standard 0.006 (0.0002)
Standard 51.976 — 52.000 (2.0463 — 2.0472)
0.03 (0.0012) US 51.954 — 51.970 (2.0454 — 2.0461)
Crank pin outer diameter mm (in)
0.05 (0.0020) US 51.934 — 51.950 (2.0447 — 2.0453)
0.25 (0.0098) US 51.734 — 51.750 (2.0368 — 2.0374)
Crankshaft Standard 59.984 — 60.008 (2.3616 — 2.3625)
and crank-
0.03 (0.0012) US 59.962 — 59.978 (2.3607 — 2.3613)
shaft bear- Crank journal outer diameter mm (in)
ing 0.05 (0.0020) US 59.942 — 59.958 (2.3599 — 2.3605)
0.25 (0.0098) US 59.742 — 59.758 (2.3520 — 2.3527)
Standard 1.998 — 2.015 (0.0787 — 0.0793)
0.03 (0.0012) US 2.017 — 2.020 (0.0794 — 0.0795)
#1, #3
0.05 (0.0020) US 2.027 — 2.030 (0.0798 — 0.0799)
Bearing size 0.25 (0.0098) US 2.127 — 2.130 (0.0837 — 0.0839)
(Thickness at mm (in)
center) Standard 2.000 — 2.017 (0.0787 — 0.0794)
0.03 (0.0012) US 2.019 — 2.022 (0.0795 — 0.0796)
#2, #4, #5
0.05 (0.0020) US 2.029 — 2.032 (0.0799 — 0.0800)
0.25 (0.0098) US 2.129 — 2.132 (0.0838 — 0.0839)
ME(H4DOTC)-4
General Description
MECHANICAL
B: COMPONENT
1. V-BELT
(5)
(6)
(4)
(3)
(7)
T4
A
(11)
T2
(8)
T4 (2)
T6 T5
A
B
(12)
T1 B
T7 T7
(9) T5
(10)
C
C
(1)
(13)
T7
T3
ME-04883
(1) V-belt (8) Idler pulley ASSY Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Collector cover bracket (9) Stopper rod RH T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) V-belt tensioner ASSY (10) Stopper rod LH T2: 20 (2.0, 14.8)
(4) Power steering pump bracket (11) A/C compressor T3: 22 (2.2, 16.2)
(5) Generator (12) A/C compressor bracket B T4: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(6) Generator plate (13) Front cushion rubber T5: 26.5 (2.7, 19.5)
(7) A/C compressor bracket A T6: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
T7: 36 (3.7, 26.6)
ME(H4DOTC)-5
General Description
MECHANICAL
2. TIMING BELT
(19) (1)
(2)
T3 T4
(3)
T2
(19)
(4)
T3
(20)
(9) T2 (5)
(21) T8 T5
(12) T1
(6)
(8)
(20) T2
(17) (7)
T6 (23)
T7
T1
T2 (22) (21) T8 T2
(10)
T7
(14) (19)
(20)
T3
T7 (11)
(24)
(20)
(13)
T1 (22)
T2
T2
(15)
(16)
T2
T9
(25)
(18) T2
T2
ME-04884
(1) Timing belt cover No. 2 RH (13) Belt idler No. 2 (25) Oxygen sensor bracket
(2) Timing belt guide (14) Belt idler
(3) Crank sprocket (15) Timing belt cover LH Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Timing belt cover No. 2 LH (16) Front belt cover T1: 3.4 (0.3, 2.5)
(5) Tensioner bracket (17) Timing belt cover RH T2: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(6) Automatic belt tension adjuster (18) Crank pulley T3: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
ASSY
(7) Belt idler (19) Timing belt guide T4: 9.75 (1.0, 7.2)
(8) Exhaust cam sprocket RH (20) O-ring T5: 24.5 (2.5, 18.1)
(9) Intake cam sprocket RH (21) Intake actuator cover T6: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(10) Intake cam sprocket LH (22) Exhaust actuator cover T7: 39 (4.0, 28.8)
(11) Exhaust cam sprocket LH (23) Belt idler T8: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-59,
INSTALLATION, Cam
Sprocket.>
(12) Timing belt (24) Hose clip stay ASSY T9: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-43,
ME(H4DOTC)-6
General Description
MECHANICAL
3. CYLINDER HEAD AND CAMSHAFT
T6 (1)
T6
T1
(2)
(6)
T4
T2 T6
T6 T4
(32)
(27) (38)
(8) (33)
(9)
T1
T6
(28)
T6 (4) (13)
(7)
(5) (14)
(10)
(12)
(3)
T5 (31)
(30) (29) (23)

(11)
T2 (34)
T3
(9) (24) T1
(8)
(15) T1
(33) (16)
(37)
(14) T4
(19)
T6
(27)
(26) (25)
(21)
T4
(17)
(32)
(27) (12) (20)
(36)
(18)
(29)
(35)
T6 T6
(22) T6
(11)
T3 T5 T6
ME-04914
ME(H4DOTC)-7
General Description
MECHANICAL
(1) Rocker cover RH (17) Exhaust camshaft LH (33) Union bolt without filter (without
protrusion)
(2) Rocker cover gasket RH (18) Front camshaft cap LH (34) Gasket
(3) Front camshaft cap RH (19) Intake camshaft cap LH (35) Exhaust oil flow control solenoid
valve LH
(4) Intake camshaft cap RH (20) Exhaust camshaft cap LH (36) Gasket LH
(5) Intake camshaft RH (21) Rocker cover gasket LH (37) Intake oil flow control solenoid
valve LH
(6) Intake oil flow control solenoid (22) Rocker cover LH (38) Rear camshaft cap
valve RH
(7) Exhaust camshaft cap RH (23) Oil filler cap
(8) Gasket (24) Oil filler duct Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(9) Oil return cover (25) O-ring T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(10) Exhaust camshaft RH (26) Oil pipe LH T2: 9 (0.9, 6.6)
(11) Cylinder head bolt (27) Gasket T3: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(12) Oil seal (28) Oil pipe RH T4: 29 (3.0, 21.4)
(13) Cylinder head RH (29) Stud bolt T5: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-71,
INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Head.>
(14) Cylinder head gasket (30) Exhaust oil flow control solenoid T6: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-64,
valve RH INSTALLATION, Camshaft.>
(15) Cylinder head LH (31) Gasket RH
(16) Intake camshaft LH (32) Union bolt with filter (with protru-
sion)
ME(H4DOTC)-8
General Description
MECHANICAL
4. CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE ASSEMBLY
(1)
(11) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

(3)
(2)
(11) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

(12)
(4)
(10)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(12) (9)
(4)
(10)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
ME-04750
(1) Exhaust valve (5) Intake valve oil seal (9) Valve lifter
(2) Intake valve (6) Valve spring (10) Exhaust valve oil seal
(3) Cylinder head (7) Retainer (11) Intake valve guide
(4) Valve spring seat (8) Retainer key (12) Exhaust valve guide
ME(H4DOTC)-9
General Description
MECHANICAL
5. CYLINDER BLOCK
T5 T2
T2
(34) (5)
T2 T12 T2
(7) (1) (33)
(34)
(8) (10) T6
(6)
(30)
(29)
T10
T6
T2 (3)
(4) T2
(2)
(28) (9) (10)
(14)
T10
(11)
(4) (10)
(3) (10) T6
T2 T3
(30)
(18) (40) T9 (4)
T2 (27)
(10) (32)
T10 (12)
(19) (37) (35) (3) (29)
(43) (41) (38) (15)
T2
(25) T6 T12
T2 T2
T5
(23)
(39) (31) (17) (13)
T8 T4 (16) (26)
(42)
T11
(20) (36)
T1
(22)
(24) T11
T7
(21)
ME-04885
ME(H4DOTC)-10
General Description
MECHANICAL
(1) Oil pressure switch (21) Drain plug (41) Oil level switch
(2) Cylinder block RH (22) Drain plug gasket (42) Oil cooler pipe stay
(3) Service hole plug (23) Oil level gauge guide (43) O-ring
(4) Gasket (24) Oil filter
(5) Oil separator cover (25) Gasket Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(6) Water by-pass pipe (26) Water pump hose T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(7) Oil pump (27) Nipple T2: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(8) Front oil seal (28) Seal T3: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(9) Rear oil seal (29) Washer T4: First 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(10) O-ring (30) Seal washer Second 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(11) Service hole cover (31) O-ring T5: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(12) Cylinder block LH (32) Gasket T6: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(13) Water pump (33) Engine rear hanger T7: 41.7 (4.3, 30.8)
(14) Baffle plate (34) Oil pump seal T8: 54 (5.5, 39.8)
(15) Oil cooler (35) Water pump sealing T9: 69 (7.0, 50.9)
(16) Oil cooler pipe (36) O-ring T10: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(17) Connector (37) Oil level gauge T11: <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-25, INSTAL-
LATION, Engine Oil Cooler.>
(18) Oil strainer (38) O-ring T12: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-84,
INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Block.>
(19) Cylinder block lower (39) Oil drain pipe
(20) Oil pan (40) O-ring
ME(H4DOTC)-11
General Description
MECHANICAL
6. CRANKSHAFT AND PISTON
(1)
T2
(8)
(7) (2)
(3)
(4) (10)
(5)
(8) (6)
(11)
T1 (9)
(13)
(12) (11)
(12)
(9)
(11)
T1
(11) (6)
(14) (8)
(5)
(4)
(10) (3)
(8)
(7)
(17)
(16)
(15)
(16)
(15)
ME-04886
(1) Flywheel (8) Snap ring (15) Crankshaft bearing #1, #3

(2) Ball bearing (9) Connecting rod bolt (16) Crankshaft bearing #2, #4
(3) Top ring (10) Connecting rod (17) Crankshaft bearing #5
(4) Second ring (11) Connecting rod bearing
(5) Oil ring (12) Connecting rod cap Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(6) Piston (13) Crankshaft T1: 52 (5.3, 38.4)
(7) Piston pin (14) Woodruff key T2: <Ref. to CL-14, INSTALLATION,
Flywheel.>
ME(H4DOTC)-12
General Description
MECHANICAL
7. ENGINE MOUNTING
T5 (3)
(4)
T1
B
T2
B
T5
A (2)
T4
(1)
T3
T5
ME-04887
(1) Front mounting bracket (3) Engine mounting bracket Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Front cushion rubber (4) Turbocharger upper stay T1: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
T2: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
T3: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
T4: 58 (5.9, 42.8)
T5: 60 (6.1, 44.3)
ME(H4DOTC)-13
General Description
MECHANICAL
C: CAUTION
any work.
tery.
• All parts should be thoroughly cleaned, paying special attention to engine oil passages, pistons and bear-
ings.
• Rotating parts and sliding parts such as piston, bearing and gear should be coated with oil prior to assem-
bly.
• Be careful not to let oil, grease or engine coolant contact the timing belt, clutch disc and flywheel.
• All removed parts, if to be reused, should be reinstalled in the original positions and directions.
• Bolts, nuts and washers should be replaced with new parts as required.
• Even if necessary inspections have been made in advance, proceed with assembly work while making re-
checks.
• Remove or install the engine in an area where chain hoists, lifting devices, etc. are available for ready use.
• Be sure not to damage coated surfaces of body panels with tools, or not to stain seats and windows with
coolant or oil. Place a cover over fender, as required, for protection.
• Prior to starting work, prepare the following:
Service tools, clean cloth, containers to catch coolant and oil, wire ropes, chain hoist, transmission jacks, etc.
• Lift up or lower the vehicle when necessary. Make sure to support the correct positions.
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
498267600 CYLINDER HEAD • Used for replacing valve guides.
TABLE • Used for removing and installing valve spring.
ST-498267600
ADAPTER RH (499817100).
ST-498457000
ME(H4DOTC)-14
General Description
MECHANICAL

ADAPTER LH (499817100).
ST-498457100
498747300 PISTON GUIDE Used for installing the piston into the cylinder.
ST-498747300
498857100 VALVE OIL SEAL Used for press-fitting of intake and exhaust
GUIDE valve guide oil seals.
ST-498857100
499017100 PISTON PIN GUIDE Used for installing piston pin, piston and con-
necting rod.
ST-499017100
499037100 CONNECTING ROD Used for removing and installing connecting rod
BUSHING bushing.
REMOVER AND
INSTALLER
ST-499037100
ME(H4DOTC)-15
General Description
MECHANICAL

INSTALLER
ST-499587100
SEAL INSTALLER • Used together with CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
GUIDE (499597100).
ST-499587200
499587600 OIL SEAL Used for installing the camshaft oil seal.
INSTALLER
ST-499587600
SEAL GUIDE • Used together with CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
ST-499597100
499597200 OIL SEAL GUIDE • Used for installing the camshaft oil seal.
• Used together with OIL SEAL INSTALLER
(499587600).
ST-499597200
ME(H4DOTC)-16
General Description
MECHANICAL

499718000 VALVE SPRING Used for removing and installing valve spring.
REMOVER
ST-499718000
499767200 VALVE GUIDE Used for removing valve guides.
REMOVER
ST-499767200
499767400 VALVE GUIDE Used for reaming valve guides.
REAMER
ST-499767400
499817100 ENGINE STAND • Used for disassembling and assembling
engine.
• Used together with ENGINE STAND
ADAPTER RH (498457000) & LH (498457100).
ST-499817100
WRENCH ley.
ST-499977100
ME(H4DOTC)-17
General Description
MECHANICAL

499977500 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing intake cam
WRENCH sprocket and exhaust cam sprocket.
ST-499977500
SOCKET
ST-499987500
18251AA020 VALVE GUIDE Used for installing intake and exhaust valve
ADJUSTER guides.
ST18251AA020
499097700 PISTON PIN Used for removing piston pin.
REMOVER ASSY
ST-499097700
hose.
CAILLAU. (code) 54.0.000.205
with a tool number.
ST18353AA000
ME(H4DOTC)-18
General Description
MECHANICAL

18371AA000 CONNECTOR Used for disconnecting the quick connector on
REMOVER the fuel return hose side of the engine compart-
ment (intake manifold).
ST18371AA000
18854AA000 ANGLE GAUGE Used for installing the crank pulley.
ST18854AA000
42099AE000 QUICK CONNEC- Used for disconnecting quick connector of the
TOR RELEASE engine compartment.
ST42099AE000
1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for various inspections.
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Compression gauge Used for measuring compression.
Timing light Used for measuring ignition timing.
Vacuum gauge Used for measuring intake manifold vacuum.
Oil pressure gauge Used for measuring engine oil pressure.
Fuel pressure gauge Used for measuring fuel pressure.
ME(H4DOTC)-19
Compression
MECHANICAL
2. Compression 12) Crank the engine by starter motor and read the
value when the needle of the compression gauge
A: INSPECTION becomes stable.
CAUTION: NOTE:
After warming-up, engine becomes very hot. Be • Perform at least two measurements per cylinder,
careful not to burn yourself during measure- and make sure that the values are correct.
ment. • If the compression pressure is out of standard,
1) Remove the collector cover. check or adjust the pistons, valves and cylinders.
2) After warming-up the engine, turn the ignition Compression (fully open throttle):
switch to OFF. Standard
3) Make sure that the battery is fully charged. 981 — 1,177 kPa (10 — 12 kgf/cm2, 142 —
4) Remove the fuse of fuel pump from main fuse 171 psi)
box. Difference between cylinders
49 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2, 7 psi) or less
FU-04800
5) Start the engine and run it until it stalls.

6) After the engine stalls, crank it for five more sec-
onds.
8) Remove all spark plugs. <Ref. to IG(H4DOTC)-
4, REMOVAL, Spark Plug.>
9) Fully open the throttle valve.
10) Check the starter motor for satisfactory perfor-
mance and operation.
11) Install the compression gauge to the spark plug
hole.
NOTE:
When using a screw-in type compression gauge,
the screw should be less than 18 mm (0.71 in) long.
ME-04361
ME(H4DOTC)-20
Idle Speed
MECHANICAL
3. Idle Speed
A: INSPECTION
1) Before checking the idle speed, check the fol-
lowing item:
clogging, ignition timing is correct, spark plugs
are in good condition, and hoses are connected
properly.
not illuminate.
3) Read the engine idle speed using Subaru Select
Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, READ
CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL
NOTE:
• Idle speed cannot be adjusted manually, be-
cause the idle speed is automatically adjusted.
• If idle speed is out of standard, refer to the Gen-
eral Diagnosis Table under “Engine Control Sys-
tem”. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic
Diagnostic Procedure.>
(1) Check the idle speed when no-loaded.
(Headlight, heater fan, rear defroster, radiator
fan, A/C and etc. are OFF)
Idle speed (No load and gear shift lever in neu-
tral position):
Standard
700±100 rpm
(2) Check the idle speed when loaded. (Turn
the A/C switch to “ON” and operate the com-
pressor for at least one minute before measure-
ment.)
Idle speed (A/C ON and gear shift lever in neu-
tral position):
Standard
700 — 850±100 rpm
ME(H4DOTC)-21
Ignition Timing
MECHANICAL
4. Ignition Timing
A: INSPECTION
CAUTION:
After warming-up, engine becomes very hot. Be
careful not to burn yourself at measurement.
1) Before checking the ignition timing, check the
following item:
clogging, spark plugs are in good condition, and
hoses are connected properly.
not illuminate.
3) Read the ignition timing using Subaru Select
Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, READ
CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL
NOTE:
If ignition timing is out of standard, check the igni-
tion control system. Refer to “Engine Control Sys-
tem”. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic
Diagnostic Procedure.>
Ignition timing [BTDC/rpm]:
Standard
15°±10°/700
ME(H4DOTC)-22
Intake Manifold Vacuum

MECHANICAL
5. Intake Manifold Vacuum

A: INSPECTION
4) Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from
the intake manifold, and attach the vacuum gauge.
ME-04362

6) Keep the engine at idle speed and read the vac-
uum gauge indication.
NOTE:
Condition of engine inside can be diagnosed by ob-
serving the behavior of the vacuum gauge needle
as described in table below.
Intake manifold vacuum (at idling, A/C OFF):
Standard
–66.7 kPa (–500 mmHg, –19.70 inHg) or
more
Diagnosis of engine condition by inspection of intake manifold vacuum
Vacuum gauge needle behavior Possible engine condition
1. Needle is steady but lower than standard value. This tendency Leakage around intake manifold gasket, or disconnected
becomes more evident as engine temperature rises. or damaged vacuum hose
2. Needle intermittently drops to position lower than standard value. Leakage around cylinder
3. Needle drops suddenly and intermittently from standard value. Sticky valve
4. When engine speed is gradually increased, needle begins to Weak or broken valve springs
vibrate rapidly at certain speed, and then vibration increases as
engine speed increases.
5. Needle vibrates above and below standard value in narrow range. Defective ignition system
ME(H4DOTC)-23
Engine Oil Pressure

MECHANICAL
6. Engine Oil Pressure Engine oil pressure:

Standard
A: INSPECTION 98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14 psi) or more (at 600
1) Remove the collector cover. rpm)
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 392 kPa (4.0 kgf/cm2, 57 psi) or more (at
6,000 rpm)
IG-02107
3) Remove the oil pressure switch. <Ref. to

LU(H4SO)-24, REMOVAL, Oil Pressure Switch.>
4) Install the oil pressure gauge to cylinder block.
ME-04363
IG-02107
6) Start the engine, and check the oil pressure.

NOTE:
• Standard value is based on an engine oil temper-
ature of 80°C (176°F).
• If the oil pressure is out of specification, check oil
pump, oil filter and lubrication line. <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-43, INSPECTION, Engine Lubrication
System Trouble in General.>
• If the oil pressure warning light is ON and oil
pressure is within specification, check the oil pres-
sure switch. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-43, INSPECTION,
Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General.>
ME(H4DOTC)-24
Fuel Pressure
MECHANICAL
7. Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure:

Standard
A: INSPECTION 274 — 304 kPa (2.8 — 3.1 kgf/cm2, 40 — 44
CAUTION: psi)
• Before removing the fuel pressure gauge, re- 8) After inspection, install the related parts in the
lease the fuel pressure. reverse order of removal.
• Be careful not to spill fuel. Tightening torque:
• Catch the fuel from hoses using a container 1.25 N·m (0.1 kgf-m, 0.9 ft-lb)
or cloth.
cap.
4) Disconnect the fuel delivery hose from fuel
damper, and connect fuel pressure gauge.
ME-04364

6) Check the fuel pressure while disconnecting
pressure regulator vacuum hose from intake mani-
fold.
NOTE:
• The fuel pressure gauge registers 10 to 20 kPa
(0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2, 1 to 3 psi) higher than standard
values during high-altitude operations.
• If the fuel pressure is out of specification, check
or replace the fuel pump, fuel line, pressure regula-
tor and pressure regulator vacuum hose.
Fuel pressure:
Standard
328 — 358 kPa (3.3 — 3.7 kgf/cm2, 48 — 52
psi)
7) After connecting the vacuum hose to the pres-
sure regulator, measure the fuel pressure again.
NOTE:
• The fuel pressure gauge registers 10 to 20 kPa
(0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2, 1 to 3 psi) higher than standard
values during high-altitude operations.
• If the fuel pressure is out of specification, check
or replace the fuel pump, fuel line, pressure regula-
tor and pressure regulator vacuum hose.
ME(H4DOTC)-25
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
8. Valve Clearance
A: INSPECTION
ME(H4DOTC)-30, REMOVAL, Engine Assembly.>
(1) Remove the timing belt cover RH. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-50, TIMING BELT, REMOVAL,
Timing Belt.>
(2) Disconnect the connectors from exhaust oil ME-04484
flow control solenoid valve RH (A) and exhaust
(6) Remove the rocker cover RH.
camshaft position sensor RH (B).
(1) Remove the timing belt cover RH. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-50, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
(A) (2) Disconnect the connectors from exhaust oil
(B) flow control solenoid valve LH (A) and exhaust
camshaft position sensor LH (B).
(A)
ME-04490
(3) Remove the clip which holds the engine har-

ness to the rocker cover.
(B)
ME-04491
(3) Disconnect the oil level switch connector.
ME-04332
(4) Remove the ignition coil. <Ref. to

IG(H4DOTC)-6, REMOVAL, Ignition Coil.>
(5) Disconnect PCV hose and vacuum hose
from the rocker cover RH. ME-04389
NOTE: (4) Remove the clip (A) and bolt (B) securing
Pinch the clamp of the PCV hose by fitting the cut the engine harness or oil level switch harness to
out in the ST with the protrusion on the clamp as the rocker cover LH.
shown in the figure, and unlock the clamp.
(A)
ST (B)
ME-04485
(5) Remove the ignition coil. <Ref. to

ME-04374
ME(H4DOTC)-26
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
(6) Disconnect PCV hose and vacuum hose • Measurement of clearance of #2 cylinder ex-
from the rocker cover LH. haust valve and #3 cylinder intake valve
NOTE:
Pinch the clamp of the PCV hose by fitting the cut
ST
ME-03121
• Measurement of clearance of #2 cylinder intake

valve and #4 cylinder exhaust valve
ME-04374
ME-03122
• Measurement of clearance of #1 cylinder ex-

haust valve and #4 cylinder intake valve
ME-04486
(7) Remove the rocker cover LH.

4) Turn the crank pulley clockwise until the round
mark on the camshaft sprocket is set to position
NOTE:
Turn the crank pulley using a socket wrench.
• Measurement of clearance of #1 cylinder intake
valve and #3 cylinder exhaust valve
ME-03123
5) Measure the clearance of intake valve and ex-

haust valve using thickness gauge (A).
NOTE:
• Insert a thickness gauge in a direction as hori-
zontal as possible with respect to the valve lifter.
• Lift up the vehicle, and then measure the ex-
haust valve clearances.
• If the measured value is not within the inspection
ME-04090 value, take notes of the value in order to adjust the
valve clearance later on.
ME(H4DOTC)-27
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
Valve clearance (inspection value): B: ADJUSTMENT

Intake
1) Measure all the valve clearances. <Ref. to
0.20+0.04 –0.06 mm (0.0079+0.0016 –0.0024 in) ME(H4DOTC)-26, INSPECTION, Valve Clear-
Exhaust ance.>
0.35±0.05 mm (0.0138±0.0020 in)
NOTE:
Record the measured value of each valve clear-
ance.
(A)
ME-00019
6) If necessary, adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to

ME(H4DOTC)-28, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clear- ME-00024
ance.>
7) After inspection, install the related parts in the 2) Remove the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
reverse order of removal. 61, REMOVAL, Camshaft.>
3) Remove the valve lifter.
NOTE: 4) Measure the thickness of valve lifter using mi-
• Refer to “Camshaft” when installing the rocker crometer.
cover. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-64, INSTALLATION,
Camshaft.>
• Use a new clamp for the PCV hose clamp, fit the
ST
ME-00025
5) Select a valve lifter of suitable thickness using

the measured valve clearance and valve lifter thick-
ness, and install it.
NOTE:
ME-04374 Use a new valve lifter.
Tightening torque: Unit: mm (in)
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) Intake valve: S = (V + T) – 0.19 (0.0075)
Exhaust valve: S = (V + T) – 0.35 (0.0138)
S: Valve lifter thickness required
V: Measured valve clearance
T: Valve lifter thickness to be used
6) Install the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-64,

INSTALLATION, Camshaft.>
7) Install the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
59, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.>
ME-04487 TIMING BELT, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
ME(H4DOTC)-28
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
9) Measure all valves for valve clearance again at

this time. If the valve clearance is not within the ad-
justment value, repeat the procedure over again
from the first step.
Valve clearance (adjustment value):
Intake
0.20+0.01 –0.03 mm (0.0079+0.0004 –0.0012 in)
Exhaust
0.35±0.02 mm (0.0138±0.0008 in)
10) After adjustment, install the related parts in the
ME(H4DOTC)-29
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
9. Engine Assembly 11) Remove the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to

A: REMOVAL 12) Lower the vehicle.
1) Change the front hood damper mounting posi- 13) Disconnect the bulkhead harness connector
tion from (A) to (B), and completely open the front from the engine harness connector (brown).
hood.
Tightening torque:
20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(A) (A)
(B) (B)
ME-04376
14) Remove the bolt securing the bulkhead har-

ness connector bracket, and disconnect the bulk-
ME-04375
head harness connector from the engine harness
connector (black).
AC-20, Refrigerant Recovery Procedure.>
ME-04377
15) Disconnect the connector (A) and connector

(B) from A/C compressor, and remove the clip (C)
securing the generator cord to the intake manifold
protector LH.
(A)
IG-02107
cap. (C)
(B)
9) Remove the air by-pass valve. <Ref. to
ME-04379
IN(H4DOTC)-26, REMOVAL, Air By-pass Valve.>
10) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-
21, REMOVAL, Radiator.>
ME(H4DOTC)-30
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
16) Disconnect the following hoses. 19) Disconnect the ground cable on the engine
(1) A/C pressure hose <Ref. to AC-68, RE- side, and remove the engine harness cover.
MOVAL, Hose and Pipe.>
(2) Brake booster vacuum hose
ME-04380
(3) Heater inlet hose and heater outlet hose
ME-04243

ME-04242 21) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push ST
in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect the fuel
delivery hose.
18) Remove the intake duct from the air intake
boot.
LEASE
CAUTION:
or cloth.
(A)
ST
ME-04437
(B) (C)
ME-04382

ME(H4DOTC)-31
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
22) Disconnect the fuel return hose using the ST. 23) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapora-
ST 18371AA000 CONNECTOR REMOVER tion hose from the fuel pipe.
CAUTION:
or cloth.
(1) Attach ST to the fuel return pipe as shown in
the figure.
FU-04611
24) Support the engine with a lifting device and

wire ropes.
ST
ME-04969
(2) Insert the front side of ST into the quick con-

nector.
LU-00222
ST
ME-04970
(3) Insert the back side of ST into the quick con-

nector and push ST in the direction of arrow
mark to disconnect the fuel return hose.
ME-04381

ST
ME-04971
ME-04246

CAUTION:
at the same time.
ME(H4DOTC)-32
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
28) Remove the bolts which secure the engine (1) Remove the starter. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-9,
mounting onto the engine, and remove the engine REMOVAL, Starter.>
mounting. (2) Remove the bolts which hold the upper side
of the transmission to the engine.
ME-04247
29) Remove the bolts and nuts which hold the low- MT-01524
er side of transmission to the engine. 33) Remove the engine from vehicle.
(1) Slightly raise the engine.
(2) Adjust the height of the transmission with
garage jack.
(3) Move the engine horizontally until main
shaft is withdrawn from clutch cover.
(4) Slowly move the engine away from engine
compartment.
NOTE:
MT-00077 panels with crank pulley, oil level gauge, etc.
30) Lower the vehicle. B: INSTALLATION
CAUTION: 1) Apply a small amount of grease to splines of
When lifting down the vehicle, lower wire ropes main shaft.
at the same time.
Grease:
31) Support the transmission with a garage jack.
NICHIMOLY N-130 or equivalent
NOTE: 2) Position the engine in engine compartment and
Fine adjustment of the transmission height can be align it with transmission.
performed with this operation.
NOTE:
panels with crank pulley, oil level gauge, etc.
3) Tighten the bolts which hold upper side of trans-
(A) mission to engine.
(B) Tightening torque:
50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
ME-00215
(A) Transmission
(B) Garage jack
32) Separation of engine and transmission

CAUTION:
Before removing the engine away from trans- MT-01524
mission, check to be sure no work has been 4) Remove the garage jack.
overlooked.
ME(H4DOTC)-33
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
5) Install the starter. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-9, IN- 11) Install the stopper rod.
STALLATION, Starter.>
Tightening torque:
36 N·m (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
at the same time.
7) Attach the bolts and nuts which hold lower side
of the transmission to engine.
Tightening torque:
50 N·m (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
ME-04381
12) Remove the lifting device and wire ropes.
MT-00077

Tightening torque:
LU-00222
58 N·m (5.9 kgf-m, 42.8 ft-lb)
14) Install the intake duct to the air intake boot.
Tightening torque:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
ME-04247

CAUTION:
at the same time. ME-04437
10) Attach the bolts and nuts which secure engine

Tightening torque:
60 N·m (6.1 kgf-m, 44.3 ft-lb)
ME-04246
ME(H4DOTC)-34
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
15) Install the engine harness cover, and connect 19) Connect the bulkhead harness connector to the
the ground cable. engine harness connector (black), and install the
bolt securing the bulkhead harness connector
Tightening torque:
bracket.
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 7 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 5.2 ft-lb) Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T1
T2
T1
ME-04377
20) Connect the bulkhead harness connector to the

engine harness connector (brown).
T2
ME-04248

17) Connect the following hoses. ME-04376
(1) Fuel delivery hose, fuel return hose and 21) Install the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
evaporation hose EX(H4DOTC)-7, INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust
(2) Heater inlet hose and heater outlet hose Pipe.>
(3) Brake booster vacuum hose 22) Install the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-22,
(4) A/C pressure hose <Ref. to AC-68, INSTAL- INSTALLATION, Radiator.>
LATION, Hose and Pipe.> 23) Install the air by-pass valve. <Ref. to
18) Install the clip (C) securing the generator cord IN(H4DOTC)-26, INSTALLATION, Air By-pass
to the intake manifold protector LH, and connect Valve.>
the connector (A) and connector (B) to the A/C 24) Install the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-
compressor. 18, INSTALLATION, Intercooler.>
(A) 25) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-12, INSTALLATION, Air Intake
Duct.>
(C)
(B)
ME-04379
IG-02107
ME(H4DOTC)-35
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
27) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-14,

28) Charge the A/C system with refrigerant. <Ref.
to AC-21, PROCEDURE, Refrigerant Charging
Procedure.>
Tightening torque:
20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(A) (A)
(B) (B)
ME-04375
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the pipes, hoses, connectors and
clamps are securely connected.
2) Check that the engine coolant is up to specified
level.
3) Start the engine and check for exhaust gas leak-
age, engine coolant leakage, fuel leakage, noise or
vibration.
ME(H4DOTC)-36
Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL
10.Engine Mounting 10) Support the engine with a lifting device and
wire ropes.
A: REMOVAL
hood.
Tightening torque:
20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(A) (A)
LU-00222
(B) (B) 11) Remove the stopper rod.
ME-04375

ME-04422

IG-02107

5) Remove the radiator main fan motor assembly
and radiator sub fan motor assembly. <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-25, REMOVAL, Radiator Main Fan ME-04249
and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, RE- 13) Lift up the vehicle.
MOVAL, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
CAUTION:
at the same time.
mounting onto the engine, and remove the engine
mounting.
ME-04247
ME(H4DOTC)-37
Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION 5) Remove the lifting device and wire ropes.

Tightening torque:
58 N·m (5.9 kgf-m, 42.8 ft-lb)
LU-00222

EX(H4DOTC)-7, INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>
ME-04247
2) Lower the vehicle. LATION, Front Under Cover.>
CAUTION: 9) Lower the vehicle.
When lifting down the vehicle, lower wire ropes 10) Install the radiator main fan motor assembly
at the same time. and radiator sub fan motor assembly. <Ref. to
3) Attach the bolts and nuts which secure engine CO(H4DOTC)-25, INSTALLATION, Radiator Main
mounting to the cradle. Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27,
INSTALLATION, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Mo-
Tightening torque: tor.>
60 N·m (6.1 kgf-m, 44.3 ft-lb) 11) Install the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-
ME-04249
4) Install the stopper rod.

IG-02107
Tightening torque:
36 N·m (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb) 13) Install the collector cover.
Tightening torque:
20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(A) (A)
(B) (B)
ME-04422
ME-04375
ME(H4DOTC)-38
Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL
C: DISASSEMBLY D: ASSEMBLY
1) Remove the turbocharger upper stay from the 1) Install the front cushion rubber to the front
engine mounting bracket. mounting bracket.
Tightening torque:
45 N·m (4.6 kgf-m, 33.2 ft-lb)
ME-04250
2) Remove the front cushion rubber from the en-

gine mounting bracket. ME-04252
2) Install the front cushion rubber to the engine

mounting bracket.
Tightening torque:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
ME-04251
3) Remove the front cushion rubber from the front

mounting bracket.
ME-04251
3) Install the turbocharger upper stay to the engine

mounting bracket.
Tightening torque:
33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb)
ME-04252
ME-04250
E: INSPECTION
Check that the engine mounting does not have de-
formation, cracks and any other damage.
ME(H4DOTC)-39
Preparation for Overhaul

MECHANICAL
11.Preparation for Overhaul

A: PROCEDURE
1) After removing the engine from vehicle body, at-
tach the ST to the engine as shown in the figure.
RH
LH
ST3 499817100 ENGINE STAND
ST2
ST1
ST3
ME-00057
2) In this section the procedures described under

each index are all connected and stated in order.
Engine overhaul will be completed when you go
through all steps in the procedure.
Therefore, in this section, to conduct the particular
procedure within the flow of a section, you need to
go back and conduct the procedure described pre-
viously in order to do that particular procedure.
ME(H4DOTC)-40
V-belt
MECHANICAL
12.V-belt 3) Remove the bolt securing the idler pulley to the

A/C compressor bracket, and remove the idler pul-
A: REMOVAL ley.
NOTE:
1. V-BELT
3) Attach the tool to the V-belt tensioner assembly,
and rotate the tool clockwise to loosen and remove ME-04385
the V-belt.
B: INSTALLATION
1. V-BELT
CAUTION:
• When reusing the V-belt, wipe off dust and
water with cloth.
• Do not use the V-belt if there is any oil, grease
or coolant on the belt.
• Be careful not to rub the V-belt end surface
with bare hands; exposed core may cause inju-
ry.
• Wipe off any dust, oil and water on the groove
of each pulley with cloth.
(E)
(F) (G)
(D)
(B)
ME-04383 (A)
(C)
2. V-BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY AND
IDLER PULLEY ME-04386
(A) V-belt
V-BELT, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
(B) V-belt tensioner ASSY
2) Remove the bolt securing the V-belt tensioner
assembly to the power steering pump bracket, and (C) Crank pulley
remove the V-belt tensioner assembly. (D) Idler pulley
(E) Generator pulley
(F) Power steering pump pulley
(G) A/C compressor pulley
ME-04384
ME(H4DOTC)-41
V-belt
MECHANICAL
2. V-BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY AND C: INSPECTION

IDLER PULLEY 1) Check the V-belt for cracks, tear or wear.
Install in the reverse order of removal. 2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to
Tightening torque: IN(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb) 3) Check that the V-belt tensioner assembly and
idler pulley do not have deformation, cracks or oth-
er damages.
4) Check the V-belt tension indicator (A) shows
within the limit (B).
(B) (A)
ME-04385
Tightening torque:
20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
ME-04384
ME-04387
ME(H4DOTC)-42
Crank Pulley
MECHANICAL
13.Crank Pulley (2) Draw reference lines (A) and (B) using a
marker to set the socket to the crank pulley bolt
A: REMOVAL as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
When replacing the single part, perform the work NOTE:
with the engine installed to vehicle body. Set the socket onto the crank pulley bolt so that ref-
1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-41, erence lines (A) and (B) is visible.
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
2) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and remove
the crank pulley bolt.
(A) (B) (A) (B)

(a) (b)
ST
ME-04524
3) Remove the crank pulley.

B: INSTALLATION
ST
1. METHOD WITHOUT ANGLE GAUGE
(A)
1) Clean the crankshaft thread using compressed (B)
air.
ME-04526
2) Install the crank pulley.
3) Apply engine oil to the crank pulley bolt seat and (a) When using 6-point socket
thread. (b) When using 12-point socket
(1) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and (3) Draw end line (C) on ST using a marker at
temporarily tighten the crank pulley bolt. the same position as reference line (B) was
ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH drawn on the socket in step (2).
Tightening torque: ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
47 N·m (4.8 kgf-m, 34.7 ft-lb)
(C)
ST ST
(B)
ME-04527
ME-04525
ME(H4DOTC)-43
Crank Pulley
MECHANICAL
(4) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and (3) Set the ST2, use the ST1 to lock the crank
tighten the crank pulley bolt to the angle where pulley, and tighten the crank pulley bolt to the
reference line (A) and end line (C) are aligned. specified angle.
NOTE: ST2 18854AA000 ANGLE GAUGE
It should be approx. 60° when reference line (A) NOTE:
and end line (C) are aligned. Attach the magnet used for securing the ST2 (AN-
Tightening angle: GLE GAUGE) to ST1.
60°±5° Tightening angle:
60°±5°
(C)
ST1
ST
(A) ST2
ME-04528
5) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-41, ME-04530
INSTALLATION, V-belt.> (4) Install the radiator main fan motor assembly
and radiator sub motor assembly. <Ref. to
2. METHOD WITH ANGLE GAUGE CO(H4DOTC)-25, INSTALLATION, Radiator
1) Clean the crankshaft thread using compressed Main Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to
air. CO(H4DOTC)-27, INSTALLATION, Radiator
2) Install the crank pulley. Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
3) Apply engine oil to the crank pulley bolt seat and 5) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-41,
thread. INSTALLATION, V-belt.>
(1) Remove the radiator main fan motor assem- C: INSPECTION
bly and radiator sub motor assembly. <Ref. to Check that the crank pulley has no deformation,
CO(H4DOTC)-25, REMOVAL, Radiator Main cracks or other damages.
Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-
27, REMOVAL, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Mo-
tor.>
(2) Use the ST1 to lock the crank pulley, and
temporarily tighten the crank pulley bolt.
Tightening torque:
47 N·m (4.8 kgf-m, 34.7 ft-lb)
ST1
ME-04529
ME(H4DOTC)-44
Timing Belt Cover

MECHANICAL
14.Timing Belt Cover (6) Disconnect the connector (A) from power
steering pump, and remove the power steering
A: REMOVAL pump together with the power steering pump
bracket from engine and rod stopper.
1. WORK ON THE VEHICLE
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. (A)
IN-02741
(7) Mount the power steering pump together

IG-02107
side wheel apron.
3) When removing the timing belt cover RH (8) Remove the radiator sub fan motor assem-
(1) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to bly. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Ra-
IN(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> diator Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
(2) Loosen the clamp which holds the intake (9) Remove the engine coolant hose from the
duct to intercooler. clip (A).
(10) Remove the bolts which secure the intake
duct to the turbocharger, and remove the air by-
pass valve from the intake duct.
(A)
ME-04365
(3) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to

ME(H4DOTC)-41, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
IN-02696
(4) Remove the generator. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-
16, REMOVAL, Generator.> (11) Remove the intake duct from intake mani-
(5) Remove the suction hose from intake duct. fold.
IN-02740 IN-02698
ME(H4DOTC)-45
Timing Belt Cover

MECHANICAL
(12) Disconnect the vacuum hose from blow-by (19) Remove the clip holding the engine har-
pipe, and remove the bolt securing the blow-by ness.
pipe from the intake manifold protector RH.
ME-04488
ME-04366
(20) Loosen the remaining bolts which secure
(13) Disconnect the vacuum hose from PCV timing belt cover RH, and remove the timing
pipe. belt cover RH together with the hose clip stay
assembly.
4) When removing the timing belt cover LH
(1) Disconnect the connectors from front oxy-
gen (A/F) sensor and rear oxygen sensor, and
remove the clip (A) securing the front oxygen
(A/F) sensor harness and rear oxygen sensor
harness.
ME-04367
(14) Remove vacuum hose (B), vacuum hose

(C), vacuum hose (D) and vacuum hose (E)
from the clip (A).
(A)
(B) (D)
(E) EX-02575
(2) Remove the bolts which secure the upper

(C) side of the timing belt cover LH.
(A)
(3) Lift up the vehicle.
(4) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35,
REMOVAL, Front Under Cover.>
(5) Loosen the remaining bolts which secure
ME-04893
timing belt cover LH, and remove the timing belt
(15) Remove the bolts which secure the upper cover LH together with the oxygen sensor
side of the timing belt cover RH. bracket.
(16) Lift up the vehicle.
(17) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35,
REMOVAL, Front Under Cover.>
(18) Remove the air by-pass valve. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-26, REMOVAL, Air By-pass
Valve.>
ME(H4DOTC)-46
Timing Belt Cover

MECHANICAL
5) When removing the front timing belt cover 3) Remove vacuum hose (B), vacuum hose (C),
(1) Remove the stopper rod. vacuum hose (D) and vacuum hose (E) from the
clip (A).
(B) (D)
(E)
(C)
(A)
ME-04381
ME-04895
(2) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-43, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> 4) Remove the clip which holds the engine harness
(3) Remove the timing belt cover RH and timing to the hose clip stay assembly.
belt cover LH. Refer to step 3) and step 4) for
removal procedures.
(4) Remove the bolts securing the front timing
belt cover, and remove the front timing belt cov-
er.
(E)
(A)
(D)
ME-04353
(B)
5) Remove timing belt cover RH (B) together with
the hose clip stay assembly (A).
(C)
6) Remove timing belt cover (LH) (D) together with
the oxygen (A/F) sensor bracket (C).
ME-04835 7) Remove front timing belt cover (E).
(A) Hose clip stay ASSY
(B) Timing belt cover RH
(E)
(C) Oxygen sensor bracket (A)
(D) Timing belt cover LH (D)
(E) Front timing belt cover
(B)
2. WORK ON THE ENGINE UNIT ONLY

(C)
1) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-43, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
ME-04835
2) Remove the blow-by pipe from the intake mani-
fold protector RH.
ME-04438
ME(H4DOTC)-47
Timing Belt Cover

MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION Tightening torque:

6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
1. WORK ON THE VEHICLE
NOTE:
(b)
(a)
(c) ME-04373
(j)
(k) Tightening torque:
A
C B T1: 3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
A D
T2: 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
B C D
E
G F
E H
F G H
(e)
(f)
I (h)
I (j) K
(g) T1
K J
(k) T2
J (i)
ME-04427
(d)
Refer to “COMPONENT” of “STARTING/
(a) Blow-by pipe CHARGING SYSTEMS” for the tightening
(b) PCV pipe torque. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-5, GENERATOR,
(c) Hose clip stay ASSY COMPONENT, General Description.>
(d) Intake duct
(e) Vacuum hose (A)
(A)
(f) Vacuum hose (B)
(g) Vacuum hose (C)
(h) Vacuum hose (D)
(i) To Oil catch tank
(j) Clamp
(k) Clamp
IN-02741
Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb) Tightening torque:
3 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
ME-04834
ME-04365
ME(H4DOTC)-48
Timing Belt Cover

MECHANICAL

ME-04381 ME-04834
2. WORK ON THE ENGINE UNIT ONLY Tightening torque:

Install in the reverse order of removal. 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
NOTE:
(b)
(a)
(c)
(j)
(k)
A ME-04438
C B
A D C: INSPECTION
B C D
E Check that the timing belt cover does not have de-
G
H F formation, cracks and any other damage.
E
F G H
(e)
(f)
I (h)
I (j) K
(g)
K J
(k)
J (i)
(d)
ME-04370
(a) Blow-by pipe

(b) PCV pipe
(c) Hose clip stay ASSY
(d) Intake duct
(e) Vacuum hose (A)
(f) Vacuum hose (B)
(g) Vacuum hose (C)
(h) Vacuum hose (D)
(i) To Oil catch tank
(j) Clamp
(k) Clamp
ME(H4DOTC)-49
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
15.Timing Belt
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
• When replacing the single part, perform the work
stalled to body, the following parts must also be re-
moved/installed.
• Radiator main fan motor assembly <Ref. to ME-04307
CO(H4DOTC)-25, REMOVAL, Radiator Main
Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-25,
INSTALLATION, Radiator Main Fan and Fan
Motor.>
• Radiator sub fan motor assembly <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, IN-
STALLATION, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Mo-
tor.>
stalled to body, protect the radiator with cardboards ME-03126
or blankets. 4) If the alignment mark or arrow mark (which indi-
1. TIMING BELT cates the direction of rotation) on timing belt fade
away, put new marks before removing the timing
1) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to belt as shown in procedures below.
ME(H4DOTC)-43, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> (1) Turn the crankshaft using ST, and align the
2) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to alignment marks on crank sprocket, intake cam
ME(H4DOTC)-45, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> sprocket LH, exhaust cam sprocket LH, intake
3) Remove the timing belt guide. cam sprocket RH and exhaust cam sprocket
RH with marks on oil pump and notches of tim-
ing belt cover.
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET
ME-00230
ST
ME-00231
ME-03124
ME(H4DOTC)-50
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
(2) Using white paint, put an alignment mark or 6) Remove the timing belt.
an arrow mark on timing belts in relation to the CAUTION:
crank sprocket and cam sprockets.
After the timing belt has been removed, never
rotate the intake and exhaust cam sprocket. If
the cam sprocket is rotated, the intake and ex-
haust valve heads strike together and valve
stems are bent.
ER ASSEMBLY AND BELT IDLER
1) Remove the belt idler (A) and (B).
ME-00070
(B)
(A)
ME-04310
2) Remove the belt idler No. 2.

ME-04308
Z1: 54.5 teeth

Z2: 51 teeth
Z3: 28 teeth
Z1 Z2
Z3 Z3
ME-04977
3) Remove the automatic belt tension adjuster as-

sembly.
ME-03128
5) Remove the belt idler (A).
ME-04978
(A)
ME-04309
ME(H4DOTC)-51
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION 2) Install the automatic belt tension adjuster as-

sembly.
ER ASSEMBLY AND BELT IDLER Tightening torque:
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
sion adjuster assembly.
CAUTION:
• Push the adjuster rod vertically.
ing three minutes or more.
• Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807 ME-04979
N (1,000 kgf, 2,205 lbf).
• Push in the adjuster rod to the end face of the 3) Install the belt idler No. 2.
cylinder. However, do not press the adjuster Tightening torque:
rod below the end face of the cylinder. Doing so 39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
• Do not release the press pressure until stop-
per pin is completely inserted.
(1) Attach the automatic belt tension adjuster
assembly to vertical pressing tool.
(2) Slowly push in the adjuster rod with a pres-
sure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lbf) or more until
the adjuster rod is aligned with the stopper pin
hole in the cylinder.
ME-04977
4) Install the belt idlers.

Tightening torque:
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
ME-00239
(3) With a 2 mm (0.08 in) dia. stopper pin or a 2

mm (nominal) dia. hex wrench inserted into the
stopper pin hole in cylinder, secure the adjuster
rod.
ME-04980
ME-00350
ME(H4DOTC)-52
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
Tightening torque: 4) Align the single line mark (B) on the intake cam
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb) sprocket RH with notch (A) on the timing belt cover.
Make sure that the double line marks (C) on intake
and exhaust cam sprockets are aligned.
(A)
(B)
(C)
ME-04981
2. TIMING BELT ME-04084

1) Prepare for installation of the automatic belt ten- 5) Align the single line mark (B) on exhaust cam
sion adjuster assembly. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-52, sprocket LH with notch (A) on the timing belt cover
AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUSTER AS- by turning the sprocket counterclockwise (as
SEMBLY AND BELT IDLER, INSTALLATION, viewed from front of engine).
Timing Belt.>
2) Align the mark (B) on crank sprocket with the
mark (A) on oil pump.
(A)
(B) (A)
(B)
ME-04311
6) Align the single line mark (B) on intake cam

ME-04082 sprocket LH with notch (A) on the timing belt cover
by turning the sprocket clockwise (as viewed from
3) Align the single line mark (B) on the exhaust cam front of engine). Make sure the double line marks
sprocket RH with notch (A) on the timing belt cover. (C) on the intake and exhaust cam sprockets are
aligned.
(A) (B)
(A)
(B)
(C)
ME-04083
ME-04086
ME(H4DOTC)-53
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
7) Make sure that the cam and crank sprockets are • Do not allow the camshafts to rotate in the di-
positioned properly. rection shown in the upper figure. Doing this
CAUTION: may cause both the intake and exhaust valves
• Intake and exhaust camshafts for this DOHC to lift simultaneously, resulting in mutual inter-
engine can be independently rotated with the ference of valve heads.
timing belts removed. As can be seen from the
figure, if the intake and exhaust valves are lifted (A)
simultaneously, heads will interfere with each

other, resulting in bent valves.
(A)
(A)
(B)
(A)
(A)
(B)
ME-04717
(A) Direction of rotation

(B) Timing belt installation position
(B)
ME-04111
(A) Intake camshaft

(B) Exhaust camshaft
• When the timing belts are not installed, four

camshafts are held at the “zero-lift” position,
where all cams on camshafts are not pushing
down on the intake and exhaust valves. (Under
this condition, all valves remain unlifted.)
• When the camshafts are rotated to install the
timing belts, #2 intake and #4 exhaust cam of
camshaft LH are held, pushing their corre-
sponding valves down. (Under this condition,
these valves are held lifted.) Camshaft RH are
held so that their cams do not push the valves
down.
• Camshafts LH must be rotated from the zero-
lift position to the position where the timing belt
is to be installed with the smallest possible an-
gle, in order to prevent mutual interference of
intake and exhaust valve heads.
ME(H4DOTC)-54
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
8) Align the alignment mark on the timing belt with marks on the sprockets in the alphabetical order shown
in the figure. While aligning marks, position the timing belt properly, and install the timing belt.
CAUTION:
• If the timing belt slips by 1 or more teeth, the valve and piston may hit each other.
• Make sure that the direction of belt rotation is correct.
(1) (2)
(4) (5)
(3) (6)
(D) (B)
(A)
RH-IN LH-IN
RH-EX LH-EX
(E) (7) (C)

ME-04718
(1) Arrow mark (4) 54.5 teeth (7) Install it in the end
(2) Timing belt (5) 51 teeth
(3) 28 teeth (6) 28 teeth
9) Install the belt idlers. 10) After ensuring that the marks on the timing belt
and sprockets are aligned, remove the stopper pin
Tightening torque:
from tensioner adjuster.
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
NOTE:
Make sure that the marks on the timing belt and
sprockets are aligned.
ME-00245
ME-04982
ME(H4DOTC)-55
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
11) Install the timing belt guide.

(1) Temporarily tighten the bolts mounting the
timing belt guide.
NOTE:
• Before installing the timing belt guide, clean the
timing belt guide mounting bolt holes of the timing
belt cover No. 2.
• Apply liquid gasket to the thread of the timing belt
guide mounting bolt on the cam sprocket section.
(when reusing bolts) ME-03126
Liquid gasket: (2) Adjust the clearance between timing belt

THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or and timing belt guide using a thickness gauge
equivalent and tighten.
Clearance:
1.0±0.5 mm (0.039±0.020 in)
ME-00230
ME-00246
ME-03124
ME-03138
ME-04307
ME-04312
ME(H4DOTC)-56
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
ME-03140 ME-03126
Tightening torque: 12) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to

9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb) ME(H4DOTC)-48, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt
Cover.>
13) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
43, INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
C: INSPECTION
1. TIMING BELT
1) Check the timing belt teeth for breaks, cracks or
wear. If any fault is found, replace the timing belt.
2) Check the condition on the back surface of the
ME-00247
timing belt. If cracks are found, replace the timing
belt.
Tightening torque:
CAUTION:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
• Be careful not to let oil, grease or coolant
contact the timing belt. Remove quickly and
thoroughly if this happens.
• Do not bend the timing belt sharply.
In radial diameter h:
60 mm (2.36 in) or more
ME-03124
h
ME-00248
2. AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUSTER

1) Visually check the oil seals for leaks, and rod
ends for abnormal wear and scratches. If neces-
ME-04307 sary, replace the automatic belt tension adjuster
assembly.
NOTE:
Slight traces of oil on the oil seal of the rod does not
indicate a problem.
2) Check that the adjuster rod does not move when
a pressure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lbf) is applied to
it. This is to check adjuster rod stiffness.
ME(H4DOTC)-57
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
3) If the adjuster rod is not stiff enough and moves 4. BELT IDLER
freely when applying 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lbf), 1) Check the belt idler for smooth rotation. Replace
check it using the following procedures: if noise or excessive play occurs.
(1) Slowly press the adjuster rod down to the 2) Check the outer contacting surfaces of idler pul-
end surface of cylinder. Repeat this operation ley for abnormal wear and scratches.
two to three times. 3) Check the belt idler for grease leakage.
(2) With the adjuster rod moved all the way up,
apply a pressure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lbf) to
it, and check the adjuster rod stiffness.
(3) If the adjuster rod is not stiff and moves
down, replace the automatic belt tension adjust-
er assembly with a new part.
CAUTION:
• Push the adjuster rod vertically.
ing three minutes or more.
• Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807
N (1,000 kgf, 2,205 lbf).
• Push in the adjuster rod to the end face of the
cylinder. However, do not press the adjuster
rod below the end face of the cylinder. Doing so
4) Measure the amount of adjuster rod protrusion
“L” from the end surface of the cylinder. If it is not
within specifications, replace the automatic belt
tension adjuster assembly with a new part.
Protrusion amount of adjuster rod L:
5.2 — 6.2 mm (0.205 — 0.244 in)
ME-04106
3. BELT TENSION PULLEY

1) Check the mating surfaces of timing belt and
contact point of adjuster rod for abnormal wear or
scratches. Replace the automatic belt tension ad-
juster assembly with a new part if faulty.
2) Check the belt tension pulley for smooth rota-
tion. Replace the automatic belt tension adjuster
assembly with a new part if abnormal noise or ex-
cessive play occurs.
3) Check the belt tension pulley for grease leakage.
ME(H4DOTC)-58
Cam Sprocket
MECHANICAL
16.Cam Sprocket 3) Install the actuator covers of intake cam sprock-

et and exhaust cam sprocket.
A: REMOVAL NOTE:
NOTE: Use new O-rings.
When replacing the single part, perform the work Tightening torque:
3.4 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.5 ft-lb)
ME(H4DOTC)-45, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
ME(H4DOTC)-48, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt
3) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)- Cover.>
50, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> 6) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
4) Remove the actuator covers of intake cam 43, INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
sprocket and exhaust cam sprocket.
5) Use the ST to lock the cam sprocket, and re- C: INSPECTION
move the cam sprocket bolt. 1) Check the cam sprocket teeth for abnormal wear
ST 499977500 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH and scratches.
2) Make sure there is no free play between cam
sprocket and key.
ST
ME-04313
6) Remove the cam sprocket.

B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the cam sprocket.
2) Use the ST to lock the cam sprocket, and install
the cam sprocket bolt.
NOTE:
Do not confuse cam sprockets (LH) and (RH) or
(INT) and (EXH) during installation.
ST 499977500 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH
Tightening torque:
Tighten to 30 N·m (3.1 kgf-m, 22.1 ft-lb) of
torque, and then tighten further by 45°.
ST
ME-04313
ME(H4DOTC)-59
Crank Sprocket
MECHANICAL
17.Crank Sprocket
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
3) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
50, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
4) Remove the crank sprocket.
ME-04983
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the crank sprocket.
ME-04983

Cover.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the crank sprocket teeth for abnormal
wear and scratches.
2) Make sure there is no free play between crank
sprocket and key.
3) Check the crank sprocket protrusion used for
sensor for damage and contamination of foreign
matter.
ME(H4DOTC)-60
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
18.Camshaft 7) Disconnect the connectors from the exhaust

camshaft position sensor (A) and exhaust oil flow
A: REMOVAL control solenoid valve (B).
(A)
ME(H4DOTC)-43, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> (B)
5) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to
6) Disconnect the connector of the intake oil flow
control solenoid valve.
(A)
(B)
ME-04492
8) Remove the timing belt cover No. 2 (RH) (A) and

timing belt cover No. 2 LH (B).
NOTE:
Do not damage or lose the seal rubber when re-
moving the timing belt covers.
(A)
(B)
ME-04388
ME-04836
ME-04984
ME(H4DOTC)-61
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
10) Disconnect the oil level switch connector. 14) Disconnect PCV hose and vacuum hose from
the rocker cover.
NOTE:
Pinch the clamp of the PCV hose by fitting the cut
ST
ME-04389
11) Remove the clip (A) and bolt (B) securing the
engine harness or oil level switch harness to the
rocker cover.
(A) ME-04374
(A)
(B)
ME-04390
12) Remove the ignition coil. <Ref. to

13) Remove the scavenge pump. (RH side only) ME-04440
<Ref. to LU(H4SO)-28, REMOVAL, Scavenge 15) Remove the rocker cover.
Pump.>
ME(H4DOTC)-62
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
16) Remove the union bolt without filter (without 17) Loosen the bolts located on the upper side of
protrusion) which secures the oil pipe to the front the front camshaft cap, intake camshaft cap and
camshaft cap. rear camshaft cap (RH side only) equally, a little at
(A) a time in alphabetical order, as shown in the figure.
(B)
(G) (A)
(D) (C) (E)
(C) (D)
(D)
(D) (F)
(H) (B)
(B) (A)
(E) (C)
(D)
(C)
(F) (D)
(B)
(A)
(D)
ME-04320
ME-04317
18) Loosen the lower side of the front camshaft cap
(B) Union bolt without filter (without protrusion)
and the exhaust camshaft cap bolts equally, a little
(C) Oil pipe at a time in alphabetical sequence shown in the fig-
(D) Gasket ure.
(A)
(C) (E)
(D) (F) (B)
(A)
(E) (C)
(F) (D)
(B) ME-04349
ME(H4DOTC)-63
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
19) Remove the front camshaft cap.

20) Remove the intake camshaft caps, intake cam- (A)
shaft and rear camshaft caps (RH side only). (a) (b)
77.5
21) Remove the exhaust camshaft caps and ex- 11
haust camshaft.
NOTE:
Arrange camshaft caps in order so that they can be
installed in their original positions.
22) Remove the oil seal.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch the journal surface when remov-
(B)
ing the oil seal. (b) (a)
77.5
23) Similarly, remove the camshaft RH and related
parts. 11
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the camshaft.
Apply engine oil to the cylinder head at camshaft
journal installation location before installing the
camshaft. Install the camshaft so that each valve is
close to or in contact with base circle of the cam ME-04719
lobe.
(A) Cylinder head LH
NOTE:
(B) Cylinder head RH
• Set the camshaft to the position shown in the fig-
ure. (a) Intake camshaft
• When set at the position shown in the figure, it is (b) Exhaust camshaft
not necessary to rotate the camshaft RH when in-
stalling the timing belt, but it is necessary to rotate 2) Install the camshaft cap.
the camshaft LH slightly. (1) Apply small amount of liquid gasket to the
mating surface of front camshaft cap and rear
Intake camshaft LH: camshaft cap (RH side only).
Rotate 80° clockwise.
NOTE:
Exhaust camshaft LH: • Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
Rotate 45° counterclockwise. • Do not apply liquid gasket excessively. Applying
excessively may cause excess gasket to come out
and flow toward oil seal, resulting in oil leak.
Liquid gasket:
or equivalent
ME(H4DOTC)-64
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
(4) After tightening the camshaft cap, ensure

the camshaft rotates only slightly while holding
it at base circle.
3) Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the periphery of
the camshaft oil seal and oil seal lip, and install the
oil seal on the camshaft using ST1 and ST2.
NOTE:
Use a new oil seal.
ST1 499587600 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
ME-00773 ST2 499597200 OIL SEAL GUIDE
ST1
ST2
ME-00116
ME-04318
(2) Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the cap 4) Install the oil pipe to the front camshaft cap using
journal surface, and install the camshaft cap to the union bolt without filter (without protrusion).
the camshaft. Tightening torque:
(3) Gradually tighten the camshaft cap in at 29 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb)
least two steps, in alphabetical order shown in
(B) (A)
the figure, and then tighten to the specified
torque.
(D)
(C) (D)
Tightening torque: (D)
T1: 9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
T2: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(M) (G)
(L) (C)
T1
T1
T2
T1 (K) (A) (E)
(N)
(F)
(J) T2 (B)
(B)
T1
(D)
(C)
(I) (D) (H)
(G) (A)
(C) (L)
T1
(D)
T2 ME-04320
(E) (A) (K)
(F) (A) Union bolt with filter (with protrusion)
(B) (J)
T2 (B) Union bolt without filter (without protrusion)
T1
(C) Oil pipe
(D) Gasket
(H) (D) (I)
ME-04352
ME(H4DOTC)-65
Camshaft
MECHANICAL

Tightening torque:
24.5 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
ME-04984
6) Install the timing belt cover No. 2 RH (A) and tim-

ing belt cover No. 2 LH (B).
Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
(A)
ME-04321
(B)
(3) Install the rocker cover onto cylinder heads.
Ensure the gasket is properly positioned during
installation.
tighten to specified torque in alphabetical order.
7) Install the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)- 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
59, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.>
8) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-52, (C),(K)
(E)
(H)
9) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-28, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clear-
(B),(J)
ance.> (A),(I)
cover. (Outer section and ignition coil section)
NOTE: (F) (G)
(D),(L)
(2) Apply liquid gasket to the specified point of (C),(K) (H)
(E)
the cylinder head.
NOTE:
Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket. (B),(J)
Liquid gasket: (A),(I)

or equivalent
(G) (F)
(D),(L)
ME-04351
ME(H4DOTC)-66
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
11) Install the scavenge pump. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)- 14) Secure the engine harness or oil level switch
28, INSTALLATION, Scavenge Pump.> harness to the rocker cover with the clip (A) and
12) Connect the PCV hose and vacuum hose to the bolt (B).
rocker cover.
Tightening torque:
NOTE: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
Use a new clamp for the PCV hose clamp, fit the
shown in the figure, and lock the clamp. (A)
ST
(A)
ME-04374
(B)
ME-04390
15) Connect the connector to the oil level switch.
ME-04389
ME-04440
13) Install the ignition coil. <Ref. to IG(H4DOTC)-6,

INSTALLATION, Ignition Coil.>
ME(H4DOTC)-67
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
16) Connect the connector to the intake oil flow 18) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
control solenoid valve. ME(H4DOTC)-48, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt
Cover.>
20) Install the engine to the vehicle. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-33, INSTALLATION, Engine As-
sembly.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Measure the bend, and repair or replace if nec-
essary.
Camshaft bend limit:
0.020 mm (0.00079 in)
ME-04388
ME-00118
17) Connect the connectors to the exhaust cam-
shaft position sensor (A) and exhaust oil flow con- 2) Check the journal for damage and wear. Re-
trol solenoid valve (B). place if faulty.
3) Check the cutout portion used for camshaft sen-
sor for damage. Replace if faulty.
4) Check the cam face condition, and remove the
(A) minor faults by grinding with oil stone. Replace if
(B) there is uneven wear or others.
5) Measure the cam lobe height “H” and cam base
circle diameter “A”. If it exceeds the standard or off-
set wear occurs, replace it.
Cam lobe height H:
Standard
Intake
(A) 46.55 — 46.65 mm (1.833 — 1.837 in)
Exhaust
45.85 — 45.95 mm (1.805 — 1.809 in)
Cam base circle diameter A:
Standard
37.0 mm (1.457 in)
(B)
ME-04492
A
ME-00276
ME(H4DOTC)-68
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
6) Measure the outside diameter of camshaft jour- (6) Measure the widest point of the plastigauge
nal. If the journal diameter is not within specifica- on each journal. If oil clearance exceeds the
tion, check the oil clearance. standard, replace the camshaft. If necessary,
Camshaft journal
replace the camshaft caps and cylinder head as
a set.
Front Center, rear
Standard 37.946 — 37.963 29.946 — 29.963 Camshaft oil clearance:
mm (in) (1.4939 — 1.4946) (1.1790 — 1.1796) Standard
0.037 — 0.072 mm (0.0015 — 0.0028 in)
7) Measure the oil clearance of camshaft journal.
(1) Clean the camshaft cap and cylinder head
camshaft journal.
(2) Place the camshaft on cylinder head. (With-
out installing the valve lifter)
(3) Place a plastigauge across each camshaft
journals.
(4) Gradually tighten the camshaft cap in at
least two steps, in alphabetical order shown in
the figure, and then tighten to the specified
ME-00119
torque. Do not turn the camshaft.
(7) Completely remove the plastigauge.
Tightening torque:
8) Measure the thrust clearance of camshaft with
T1: 9.75 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
the dial gauge set at end of camshaft. If the thrust
T2: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb) clearance is not within the standard or there is off-
set wear, replace the camshaft caps and cylinder
(G)
(L) (C) head as a set. If necessary replace the camshaft.
T1
Camshaft thrust clearance:
T2 Standard
(K) (A) (E)
0.068 — 0.116 mm (0.0027 — 0.0047 in)
(F)
(J) T2 (B)
T1
(I) (D) (H)
(G)
(C) (L)
T1
T2
(E) (A) (K) ME-00121
(F)
(B) (J)
T2
T1
(H) (D) (I)

ME-04350
(5) Remove the camshaft cap.
ME(H4DOTC)-69
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
19.Cylinder Head
A: REMOVAL (A) (F) (D)

(C) (E) (B)
50, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> (D) (F) (A)
6) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to
7) Remove the bolts which secure A/C compressor
bracket to cylinder head. (LH side only)
8) Remove the oil pipe. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-29, RE-
MOVAL, Oil Pipe.> (B) (E) (C)
9) Remove the clip stay.
ME-04298
13) While tapping the cylinder head with a plastic

hammer, separate it from cylinder block. Remove
the bolts (A) and (D) to remove cylinder head.
(A) (F) (D)
ME-04323
10) Remove the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-

61, REMOVAL, Camshaft.>
11) Remove the oil level gauge guide. (LH side (C) (E) (B)
only)
12) Remove the cylinder head bolts in alphabetical
order shown in the figure.
NOTE: (D) (F) (A)
Leave the bolts (A) and (D) engaged by three or
four threads to prevent the cylinder head from fall-
ing.
(B) (E) (C)
ME-04298
14) Remove the cylinder head gasket.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
cylinder head and cylinder block.
ME(H4DOTC)-70
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the cylinder head to the cylinder block.
(F) (A) (C)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
cylinder head and cylinder block.
NOTE:
Use a new cylinder head gasket.
(D) (B) (E)
(1) Clean the bolt threads and the bolt holes in
the cylinder block
CAUTION:
To avoid erroneous tightening of the bolts,
clean out the bolt holes sufficiently by blowing (C) (A) (F)
with compressed air to eliminate engine cool-
ant etc.
(2) Apply a sufficient coat of engine oil to the
washer and bolt thread.
(3) Tighten all bolts to 40 N·m (4.1 kgf-m, 29.5
ft-lb) in alphabetical order. (E) (B) (D)
70.1 ft-lb) in alphabetical order. ME-04319
CAUTION: 2) Install the oil level gauge guide. (LH side only)
If the bolt makes stick-slip sound during tight-
ening, repeat the procedure from step (1). In Tightening torque:
this case, the cylinder head gasket can be re- 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
used. 3) Install the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-64,
(5) Loosen all the bolts by 180° in the reverse INSTALLATION, Camshaft.>
order of installing, and loosen them further by 4) Install the clip stay.
180°. Tightening torque:
(6) Tighten all bolts to 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft- 36 N·m (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb)
lb) in alphabetical order.
ical order.
ical order.
CAUTION: ME-04323
The tightening angle of the bolt should not ex-
ceed 45°. 5) Install the oil pipe. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-31, IN-
STALLATION, Oil Pipe.>
(11) Retighten bolts (A) and (B) by 40 — 45°.
6) Install the A/C compressor bracket on cylinder
CAUTION: head. (LH side only)
Make sure the total “tightening angle” of steps
(10) and (11) does not exceed 90°. Tightening torque:
36 N·m (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb)
ME(H4DOTC)-71
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
7) Install the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)- (4) Temporarily tighten the rocker cover bolts in
59, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.> alphabetical order shown in the figure, and then
8) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-52, tighten to specified torque in alphabetical order.
Tightening torque:
9) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ance.> (C),(K)
10) Install the rocker cover. (H) (E)
(B),(J)
NOTE: (A),(I)
(2) Apply liquid gasket to the specified point of
the cylinder head.
NOTE: (F) (G)
Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket. (D),(L)
(C),(K) (H)
Liquid gasket: (E)
or equivalent
(B),(J)
(A),(I)
(G) (F)
(D),(L)
ME-04351
11) Connect the PCV hose to the rocker cover.

Cover.>
14) Install the intake manifold. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-21, INSTALLATION, Intake Mani-
fold.>
sembly.>
ME-04321
(3) Install the rocker cover onto cylinder heads.

Ensure the gasket is properly positioned during
installation.
ME(H4DOTC)-72
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the valve lifter.
2) Place the cylinder head on ST1.
ST1 498267600 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
3) Using ST2, compress the valve spring and re-
move the valve spring retainer key. Remove each
valve and valve spring.
ST2 499718000 VALVE SPRING REMOVER
NOTE:
• Mark each valve to prevent confusion.
• Pay careful attention not to damage the lips of in-
take valve oil seals and exhaust valve oil seals.
• Keep all the removed parts in order for re-install-
ing in their original positions.
• For removal and installation procedures of the
valve guide, intake valve oil seal and exhaust valve
oil seal, refer to “INSPECTION”. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-76, VALVE GUIDE, INSPECTION,
Cylinder Head.> <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-78, IN-
TAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE OIL SEAL, IN-
SPECTION, Cylinder Head.>
ST2
ST1
ME-03142
ME(H4DOTC)-73
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
D: ASSEMBLY
(1)
(11) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

(3)
(2)
(11) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

(12)
(4)
(10)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(12) (9)
(4)
(10)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
ME-04750
(1) Exhaust valve (5) Intake valve oil seal (9) Valve lifter
(2) Intake valve (6) Valve spring (10) Exhaust valve oil seal
(3) Cylinder head (7) Retainer (11) Intake valve guide
(4) Valve spring seat (8) Retainer key (12) Exhaust valve guide
ME(H4DOTC)-74
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
1) Install the valve spring and valve. NOTE:

(1) Coat the valve stem of each valve with en- Uneven torque for the cylinder head bolts can
gine oil and insert the valve into valve guide. cause warping. When reinstalling, pay special at-
NOTE: tention to the torque so as to tighten evenly.
When inserting the valve into valve guide, use spe- (A)
cial care not to damage the oil seal lip.
(2) Set the cylinder head on ST1.
(3) Install the valve spring and retainer.
NOTE:
Be sure to install the valve spring with its close-
coiled end facing the cylinder head side. (B)
(4) Set the ST2 on valve spring.
ME-00126
ST2 499718000 VALVE SPRING REMOVER
2. VALVE SEAT
Inspect the intake and exhaust valve seats, and
ST2
correct the contact surfaces with a valve seat cutter
if they are defective or when valve guides are re-
placed.
Contacting width W between valve and valve
seat:
ST1
Standard
ME-03142 Intake
(5) Compress the valve spring and fit the valve 0.6 — 1.4 mm (0.024 — 0.055 in)
spring retainer key. Exhaust
(6) After installing, tap the valve spring retainers 1.2 — 1.8 mm (0.047 — 0.071 in)
lightly with a plastic hammer for better seating.
2) Apply oil to the surface of valve lifter.
3) Install the valve lifter.
E: INSPECTION
1. CYLINDER HEAD W
1) Check for cracks or damage. Use liquid pene-

trant tester on the important sections to check for
fissures. Check that there are no marks of gas leak-
ME-04721
ing or water leaking on gasket installing surface.
2) Measure the warping of the cylinder head sur-
face that mates with cylinder block using a straight
edge (A) and thickness gauge (B).
If the warping exceeds the limit, correct the surface
by grinding it with a surface grinder.
Warping limit:
0.035 mm (0.0014 in)
Grinding limit:
0.3 mm (0.012 in)
ME-00287
Standard height of cylinder head:
127.5 mm (5.02 in)
ME(H4DOTC)-75
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
3. VALVE GUIDE (3) Turn the cylinder head upside down and
1) Check the clearance between valve guide and place the ST as shown in the figure.
valve stem. The clearance can be checked by mea- ST 18251AA020 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
suring respectively the outer diameter of valve
stem with a micrometer and the inner diameter of
valve guide with a caliper gauge.
Clearance between the valve guide and valve
ST
stem:
Standard
Intake
0.030 — 0.057 mm (0.0012 — 0.0022 in)
Exhaust ME-04107
0.040 — 0.067 mm (0.0016 — 0.0026 in)
2) If the clearance between valve guide and valve (4) Before installing a new valve guide, make
stem exceeds the standard, replace the valve sure that neither scratches nor damages exist
guide or valve itself, whichever shows the greater on the inner surface of valve guide holes in cyl-
amount of wear or damage. See the following pro- inder head.
cedure for valve guide replacement. (5) Coat a new valve guide with sufficient oil,
put it into the cylinder head, and insert the ST1
Valve guide inner diameter: into the valve guide. Press in until the valve
6.000 — 6.012 mm (0.2362 — 0.2367 in) guide upper end is flush with the upper surface
Valve stem outer diameters: of ST2.
Intake ST1 499767200 VALVE GUIDE REMOVER
5.955 — 5.970 mm (0.2344 — 0.2350 in) ST2 18251AA020 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
Exhaust
5.945 — 5.960 mm (0.2341 — 0.2346 in) ST1
(1) Place the cylinder head on ST1 with the
combustion chamber upward so that valve ST2
guides fit the holes in ST1.
(2) Insert the ST2 into valve guide and press it
down to remove the valve guide.
ST2 499767200 VALVE GUIDE REMOVER
ME-00130
ST2
(6) Check the valve guide protrusion amount
“L”.
Valve guide protrusion amount L:
15.8 — 16.2 mm (0.622 — 0.638 in)
ST1
ME-00128
ME-04522
ME(H4DOTC)-76
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
(7) Ream the inside of valve guide using ST.

Put the ST in valve guide, and rotate the ST
slowly clockwise while pushing it lightly. Bring
(A)
the ST back while rotating it clockwise.
NOTE:
• Apply engine oil to the ST when reaming.
H
• If the inner surface of valve guide is damaged,
the edge of ST should be slightly ground with oil
stone.
• If the inner surface of valve guide becomes lus-
trous and the ST does not chip, use a new ST or
remedy the ST.
ST 499767400 VALVE GUIDE REAMER
(B)
ST
ME-04825
2) Put a small amount of grinding compound on the

ME-04393 valve seat surface, and lap the valve and valve seat
(8) After reaming, clean the valve guide to re- surface. Replace with a new valve oil seal after lap-
move chips. ping.
(9) Recheck the contact condition between NOTE:
valve and valve seat after replacing the valve It is possible to differentiate between the intake
guide. valve and the exhaust valve by their overall length.
4. INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE Valve overall length:
1) Inspect the flange of valve and valve stem, and Intake
replace the valve with a new part if damaged, worn, 104.4 mm (4.110 in)
deformed, or if dimension “H” in the figure is out- Exhaust
side of the specified limit. 104.65 mm (4.1201 in)
Head edge thickness H:
Standard
Intake (A)
1.0 — 1.4 mm (0.039 — 0.055 in)
Exhaust (B)
1.3 — 1.7 mm (0.051 — 0.067 in)
ME(H4DOTC)-77
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
5. VALVE SPRING
1) Check the valve springs for damage, free length, ST2
and tension. Replace the valve spring if it is not
within the standard value presented in the table.
2) To measure the squareness of the valve spring,
stand the valve spring on a surface plate and mea-
sure its deflection at the top of valve spring using a
right angle gauge.
205 — 235 (20.90 — 23.96, ME-00133
Tension/spring Set
46.09 — 52.84)/36.0 (1.417)
height 7. VALVE LIFTER
N (kgf, lbf)/mm (in) Lift 426 — 490 (43.44 — 49.96,
95.78 — 110.17)/26.5 (1.043) 1) Perform visual check on the valve lifter.
2) Measure the valve lifter outer diameter.
Outer diameter of valve lifter:
34.959 — 34.975 mm (1.3763 — 1.3770 in)
ME-00283
ME-00134
6. INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE OIL
SEAL 3) Measure the inner diameter of valve lifter mating
1) For the following, replace the oil seal with a new surface on cylinder head.
part. See the procedure 2) and subsequent for re- Inner diameter of valve lifter mating surface:
placement procedures. 34.994 — 35.016 mm (1.3777 — 1.3786 in)
• When the lip is damaged.
• When the spring is out of the specified position.
• When readjusting the surfaces of valve and
valve seat.
• When replacing the valve guide.
2) Place the cylinder head on ST1, and use ST2 to
press-fit the oil seal.
ST2 498857100 VALVE OIL SEAL GUIDE
NOTE: ME-00135
• Apply engine oil to oil seal before press-fitting.
4) Check the clearance between valve lifter and
• When press-fitting the oil seal, do not use a ham-
valve lifter mating surface. The clearance can be
mer or strike in.
determined from the measured value of the valve
• The intake valve oil seals and exhaust valve oil lifter outer diameter and valve lifter mating surface
seals are distinguished by their colors. inner diameter. If it is not within the standard or
Color of rubber part: there is uneven wear in the inner surface, replace
Intake [Gray] the cylinder head.
Exhaust [Green] Clearance between valve lifter and valve lifter
mating surface:
Standard
0.019 — 0.057 mm (0.0007 — 0.0022 in)
ME(H4DOTC)-78
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
20.Cylinder Block 18) Remove the oil pump from cylinder block using
a flat tip screwdriver.
A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
Before conducting this procedure, drain the engine the cylinder block and oil pump.
oil completely.
5) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)- ME-00138
6) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to 19) Remove the front oil seal from the oil pump.
ME(H4DOTC)-59, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.> 20) Remove the clip holding the oil level switch har-
7) Remove the crank sprocket. <Ref. to ness from cylinder block.
ME(H4DOTC)-60, REMOVAL, Crank Sprocket.>
8) Remove the A/C compressor together with the
bracket.
9) Remove the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
61, REMOVAL, Camshaft.>
10) Remove the cylinder head. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-70, REMOVAL, Cylinder Head.>
11) Remove the clutch disc and cover. <Ref. to CL-
11, REMOVAL, Clutch Disc and Cover.>
12) Remove the flywheel. <Ref. to CL-14, REMOV- ME-04392
AL, Flywheel.>
21) Remove the oil pan and cylinder block lower.
13) Remove the oil separator cover.
14) Remove the oil filter. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-34, (1) Set the part so that the cylinder block LH is
REMOVAL, Engine Oil Filter.> on the upper side.
(2) Remove the bolts which secure the oil pan
15) Remove the oil cooler. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-25,
to the cylinder block lower.
REMOVAL, Engine Oil Cooler.>
(3) Insert an oil pan cutter blade into the gap be-
16) Remove the water pump. <Ref. to
tween cylinder block lower and oil pan, and re-
CO(H4DOTC)-16, REMOVAL, Water Pump.>
move the oil pan.
17) Remove the bolts which secure oil pump to cyl-
inder block. CAUTION:
Do not use a screwdriver or similar tools in
NOTE:
place of oil pan cutter.
When disassembling and checking the oil pump,
loosen the relief valve plug before removing the oil
pump.
LU-00015
ME(H4DOTC)-79
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(4) Remove the bolts which secure the cylinder

block lower to the cylinder block, and remove (C)
the cylinder block lower by using flat tip screw- (A)
driver.
CAUTION:
Insert the flat tip screwdriver at the position
shown in the figure, and avoid scratching the
mating surface of the cylinder block and cylin-
der block lower. (B)
(D)
ME-04426

ME-04888
23) Remove blow-by pipe assembly (A), blow-by
pipe (B), PCV hose assembly (C) and water pipe 24) Remove the water by-pass pipe.
assembly (D).
NOTE:
To unlock the clamp of the blow-by pipe assembly
(A), blow-by pipe (B) and PCV hose assembly (C),
pinch the clamp by fitting the cut out in the ST with
the protrusion on the clamp as shown in the figure.
ST
ME-04374
ME-04889
ME(H4DOTC)-80
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(4)
(5)
(3)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(7)
(8)
(4)
(7)
(3)
(2)
(1)
ME-04723
(1) Service hole plug (4) Piston pin (7) Seal washer
(2) Gasket (5) Service hole cover (8) Washer
(3) Snap ring (6) O-ring
25) Remove the service hole plugs using a hexa- 27) Rotate the crankshaft to bring #1 and #2 pis-
gon wrench [14 mm]. tons to bottom dead center position, then remove
the piston snap ring through service hole of #1 and
#2 cylinders.
ME-00140

ME-00141
ME(H4DOTC)-81
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
28) Draw out the piston pin from #1 and #2 pistons

using ST.
ST 499097700 PISTON PIN REMOVER
ASSY
NOTE:
of piston, piston pin and cylinder.
ST
ME-03325
29) Similarly remove the piston pins from #3 and #4

pistons.
30) Remove the cylinder block connecting bolt on
the RH side.
31) Loosen the cylinder block connecting bolt on
the LH side by 2 to 3 turns.
32) Set the part so that the cylinder block LH is on
the upper side, and remove the cylinder block con-
necting bolt.
ME(H4DOTC)-82
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
33) Separate the cylinder block LH and RH.

NOTE:
When separating the cylinder block, do not allow
the connecting rod to fall or damage the cylinder
block.
(5)
(7)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(6) (4)
(3)
(1)
(5)
ME-04724
(1) Cylinder block (4) Crankshaft bearing (7) Washer

(2) Rear oil seal (5) Piston
(3) Crankshaft (6) Seal washer
34) Remove the rear oil seal.
35) Remove the crankshaft together with connect-
ing rod.
36) Remove the crankshaft bearings from cylinder
block using a hammer handle.
NOTE:
• Press the crankshaft bearing at the end opposite
to locking lip to remove.
• Be careful not to confuse the crankshaft bearing
combination.
37) Remove each piston from the cylinder block us-
ing a wooden bar or hammer handle.
NOTE:
of piston and cylinder.
ME(H4DOTC)-83
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION
(6)
(5)
(4)
(1) (7)
(3)
(3)
(7) (2)
(6)
(7)
(6)
ME-04725
(1) Crankshaft bearing (4) Rear oil seal (7) Washer

(2) Crankshaft (5) O-ring
(3) Cylinder block (6) Seal washer
1) Remove oil on the mating surface of cylinder Liquid gasket:
block before installation. Apply a coat of engine oil THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
to the bearing and crankshaft journal. or equivalent
2) Position the crankshaft and O-ring on cylinder
block RH.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
3) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of cyl-
inder block RH, and position cylinder block LH.
NOTE:
• Do not allow liquid gasket to jut into O-ring
grooves, oil passages, bearing grooves, etc. ME-00145
ME(H4DOTC)-84
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
4) Apply a coat of engine oil to the washer and bolt 8) Tighten the RH side cylinder block connecting
thread. bolts (E — J) further in alphabetical order.
Use a new seal washer. 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
5) Tighten the 10 mm cylinder block connecting
bolts on the LH side (A — D) in alphabetical order.
Tightening torque: (E)
10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb) (J)
(G)
(A)
(H)
(D) (I) (F)
ME-00780
9) Tighten the LH side cylinder block connecting

(B) bolts (A — D) further in alphabetical order.
(C) • (A), (C): Angle tightening
ME-00779
Tightening angle:
6) Tighten the 10 mm cylinder block connecting 90°
bolts on the RH side (E — J) in alphabetical order. • (B), (D): Torque tightening
(E) (A)
(J)
(G)
(D)
(B)
(H)
(I) (F) (C)
ME-00780 ME-00779
7) Tighten the LH side cylinder block connecting 10) Tighten the RH side cylinder block connecting
bolts (A — D) further in alphabetical order. bolts (E — J) further in alphabetical order.
Tightening torque: Tightening angle:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb) 90°
(A) (E)
(J)
(D) (G)
(B)
(C) (H)
(I) (F)
ME-00779 ME-00780
ME(H4DOTC)-85
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
11) Tighten the 8 mm and 6 mm cylinder block con- 15) Position the upper rail gap at (C) in the figure.
necting bolts on the LH side (A — H) in alphabetical
order.
Tightening torque:
(A) — (G): 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
(H): 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(G)
25
(C) (A) (B)
(E)
(C)
ME-04738
16) Align the upper rail spin stopper (E) to the side
hole (D) on the piston.
(D) (E)
(D) (F)
(H) ME-00147
12) Apply a coat of engine oil to the oil seal inner

periphery and outer periphery, and install the rear
oil seal using ST1 and ST2.
NOTE:
Use a new rear oil seal.
ST1 499597100 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
ME-02471
GUIDE
ST2 499587200 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL IN- 17) Position the expander gap at (F) in the figure on
STALLER the 180° opposite direction of (C).
(B) (A)
(F)
ST2
ST1
ME-00148 ME-04739
(A) Rear oil seal

18) Set the lower rail gap at position (G), located
120° clockwise from (C) in the figure.
(B) Flywheel attachment bolt
13) Position the top ring gap at (A) or (B) in the fig-
ure.
14) Position the second ring gap at 180° on the re-
verse side the top ring gap.
(G) (C)
120
ME-04740
(A) (B)
NOTE:
• Make sure ring gaps do not face the same direc-
tion.
• Make sure ring gaps are not within the piston
ME-04737 skirt area.
ME(H4DOTC)-86
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
19) Install the snap ring.

Before positioning the piston on the cylinder block,
attach the snap ring in the service hole of the cylin-
der block, and the piston hole on the opposite side.
NOTE:
Use new snap rings.
#3
#1
#4
(A)
#2
ME-04764
(A) Front side
(5) T
(4) (5)
(1) (3) (4)

(3)
(2)
(2)
(1)
ME-04730
(1) Piston (4) Gasket Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)

(2) Piston pin (5) Service hole plug T: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(3) Snap ring
ME(H4DOTC)-87
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
20) Install the piston. (3) Apply a thin coat of engine oil to piston pin,
(1) Set the parts so that the #1 and #2 cylinders and insert the piston pin into piston and con-
are on the upper side. necting rod through service hole.
(2) Using the ST1, turn the crankshaft so that (4) Install the snap ring.
#1 and #2 connecting rods are set at bottom NOTE:
dead center. Use new snap rings.
ST1 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET
(3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the pistons and
cylinders and insert pistons in their cylinders us-
ing ST2.
ST2 498747300 PISTON GUIDE
ST1
ME-00159
(5) Apply liquid gasket to the threaded portion

of the service hole plug.
ST2 Liquid gasket:
ME-00157 THREE BOND 1105 (Part No. 004403010) or
NOTE: equivalent
Face the piston front mark towards the front of the
engine.
(A)
ME-00160
(6) Install the service hole plug and gasket.

ME-04830
NOTE:
(A) Front mark Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
21) Install the piston pin. 70 N·m (7.1 kgf-m, 51.6 ft-lb)
(1) Apply a coat of engine oil to ST3.
(2) Insert ST3 into the service hole to align the
piston pin hole and the connecting rod small
end.
ST3 499017100 PISTON PIN GUIDE
ST1
ST3
ME-00140
ME-00158
ME(H4DOTC)-88
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(5)
T2 T1
(6)
(4)
(3)
(1) (2) (7)
(3)
(2)
(1)
ME-04731
(1) Piston (5) Service hole plug Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Piston pin (6) Service hole cover T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) Snap ring (7) O-ring T2: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(4) Gasket
(7) Set the parts so that the #3 and #4 cylinders
are on the upper side. Following the same pro-
cedures as used for #1 and #2 cylinders, install
the pistons and piston pins.
(8) Install the service hole cover.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME(H4DOTC)-89
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
22) Install the water by-pass pipe. Tightening torque:

6.5 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.8 ft-lb)
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb) (A)
(C)
T2
T1
T1
(B)
(D)
ME-04888

ME-04890 NOTE:
23) Install blow-by pipe assembly (A), blow-by pipe • Use a new seal.
(B), PCV hose assembly (C) and water pipe as- • Make sure that the seals (A) are installed secure-
sembly (D). ly on the baffle plate in a direction as shown in the
NOTE: figure below.
For the blow-by pipe assembly (A), blow-by pipe (A)
(B) and PCV hose assembly (C), use a new clamp,
fit the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the
clamp as shown in the figure, and lock the clamp.
ST
LU-00052
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
25) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of
cylinder block lower, and install the cylinder block
ME-04374 lower.
CAUTION:
O-ring attachment section.
NOTE:
• Before installing the cylinder block lower, clean
the mating surface of cylinder block lower and cyl-
inder block.
ME(H4DOTC)-90
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
Liquid gasket: Tightening torque:

THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100) 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
or equivalent
(A)
LU-02583
LU-02581
27) Secure the oil level switch harness to the cylin-
(A) O-ring
der block with clip.
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
ME-04392
28) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surface of oil

T1 separator cover and the threaded portion of bolt (A)
T2 shown in the figure (when reusing the bolt), and
ME-04327 then install the oil separator cover.
26) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of oil NOTE:
pan, and install the oil pan. • Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
NOTE: • Use new oil separator cover.
• Before installing the oil pan, clean the mating Liquid gasket:
surface of oil pan and cylinder block. Mating surface
• Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket. THREE BOND 1217G (Part No.
Liquid gasket: K0877Y0100) or equivalent
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100) Bolt thread (A) (when reusing the bolt)
or equivalent THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
equivalent
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(A)
LU-02580
ME-03333
ME(H4DOTC)-91
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
29) Install the flywheel. <Ref. to CL-14, INSTALLA- (4) Install the oil pump to cylinder block.
TION, Flywheel.> CAUTION:
30) Install the clutch disc and cover. <Ref. to CL- • Be careful not to damage the front oil seal
11, INSTALLATION, Clutch Disc and Cover.> during installation.
31) Install the oil pump. • Make sure the front oil seal lip is not folded.
(1) Using the ST, install the front oil seal.
ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER NOTE:
• Align the flat surface of oil pump’s inner rotor with
NOTE: that of crankshaft before installation.
Use a new front oil seal. • Use new O-rings.
• Do not forget to assemble O-rings.
(5) Apply liquid gasket to the three bolts thread
Liquid gasket:
ST equivalent
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
LU-00021
(2) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of

oil pump.
NOTE:
Liquid gasket:
or equivalent
ME-04946
32) Install the water pump and gasket.

NOTE:
• When installing the water pump, tighten bolts in
two stages in alphabetical order as shown in the
figure.
(A) • Use a new gasket.
• Use new water pump sealing.
First:
(A) O-ring 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
Second:
(3) Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the inside of 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
front oil seal.
ME-00312
ME(H4DOTC)-92
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

(B) (1) Install the rocker cover gasket to the rocker
(C)
NOTE:
(A) Use a new rocker cover gasket.
(2) Apply liquid gasket to the specified point of
the cylinder head.
(D)
NOTE:
(E) (F)
Liquid gasket:
or equivalent
CO-02578

34) Install the oil cooler. (MT model) <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-25, INSTALLATION, Engine Oil Cool-
er.>
35) Install the oil filter. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-34, IN-
STALLATION, Engine Oil Filter.>
36) Install the cylinder head. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-71, INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Head.>
37) Install the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
64, INSTALLATION, Camshaft.>
38) Install the A/C compressor together with the
bracket. ME-04321
Tightening torque: (3) Install the rocker cover onto cylinder heads.
36 N·m (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb) Ensure the gasket is properly positioned during
39) Install the crank sprocket. <Ref. to installation.
ME(H4DOTC)-60, INSTALLATION, Crank Sprock-
et.>
40) Install the cam sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-59, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprock-
et.>
41) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
52, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
42) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to
ance.>
ME(H4DOTC)-93
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL

tighten to specified torque in alphabetical order.
Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(C),(K)
(H) (E)
(B),(J)
(A),(I)
(F) (G)
(D),(L)
(C),(K) (H)
(E)
(B),(J)
(A),(I)
(G) (F)
(D),(L)
ME-04351
44) Connect the PCV hose to the rocker cover.

Cover.>
47) Install the intake manifold. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-21, INSTALLATION, Intake Mani-
fold.>
sembly.>
ME(H4DOTC)-94
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
C: DISASSEMBLY
(7)
(6)
(6)
(5)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(4)
ME-04831
(1) Top ring (4) Snap ring (6) Connecting rod bearing
(2) Second ring (5) Connecting rod (7) Connecting rod cap
(3) Oil ring
1) Remove the connecting rod cap.
2) Remove the connecting rod bearing.
NOTE:
Keep the removed connecting rods, connecting rod
caps and bearings in order so that they are kept in
their original combinations/groups, and not mixed
together.
3) Remove the piston rings using piston ring ex-
pander.
4) Remove the oil ring by hand.
NOTE:
Arrange the removed piston rings in proper order,
to prevent confusion.
5) Remove the snap ring.
ME(H4DOTC)-95
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
D: ASSEMBLY
(8)
(7)
T
(7)
(6)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(5)
(4)
ME-04832
(1) Top ring (5) Side mark Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Second ring (6) Connecting rod T: 52 (5.3, 38.4)
(3) Oil ring (7) Connecting rod bearing
(4) Snap ring (8) Connecting rod cap
1) Apply engine oil to the surface of the connecting E: INSPECTION
rod bearings, and install the connecting rod bear-
ings on connecting rods and connecting rod caps. 1. CYLINDER BLOCK
2) Position each connecting rod with the side with a 1) Check for cracks or damage. Use liquid pene-
side mark facing forward, and install it. trant tester on the important sections to check for
3) Attach the connecting rod cap and tighten it with fissures. Check that there are no marks of gas leak-
connecting rod bolt. Make sure the arrow on con- ing or water leaking on gasket installing surface.
necting rod cap faces the front during installation. 2) Check the oil passages for clogging.
NOTE: 3) Inspect the cylinder block surface that mates
• Each connecting rod has its own mating cap. with cylinder head for warping by using a straight
Make sure that they are assembled correctly by edge, and correct by grinding if necessary.
checking their matching number. Warping limit:
• When tightening the connecting rod bolts, apply 0.025 mm (0.00098 in)
oil on the threads.
Grinding limit:
Tightening torque: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
52 N·m (5.3 kgf-m, 38.4 ft-lb)
4) Install the oil ring upper rail, expander and lower Standard height of cylinder block:
rail by hand. 201.0 mm (7.91 in)
5) Install the second ring and top ring using piston
ring expander.
NOTE:
Assemble so that the piston ring mark “R” faces the
top side of the piston.
ME(H4DOTC)-96
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
2. CYLINDER AND PISTON 2) Measure inner diameter of each cylinder.

1) The cylinder bore size is stamped on the front Measure the inner diameter of each cylinder in both
upper face of the cylinder block. the thrust and piston pin directions at the heights as
shown in the figure, using a cylinder bore gauge.
NOTE:
• Measurement should be performed at a temper- NOTE:
ature of 20°C (68°F). Measurement should be performed at a tempera-
• Standard sized pistons are classified into two ture of 20°C (68°F).
grades, “A” and “B”. These grades should be used Cylindricality:
as guide lines in selecting a standard piston. Standard
Standard diameter: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
A: 99.505 — 99.515 mm (3.9175 — 3.9179 in) Out-of-roundness:
B: 99.495 — 99.505 mm (3.9171 — 3.9175 in) Standard
0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
(A) (B)
(A) (B)
#5
4
#4
5
H1
#3 H2
#2 (F) H3
B
#1 (D) H4
A
(E) (C)
ME-00170
ME-04734
(A) Main journal size mark
(B) Cylinder block (RH) – (LH) combination mark (A) Piston pin direction
(C) #1 cylinder bore size mark (B) Thrust direction
(D) #2 cylinder bore size mark H1: 10 mm (0.39 in)
(E) #3 cylinder bore size mark H2: 45 mm (1.77 in)
(F) #4 cylinder bore size mark H3: 80 mm (3.15 in)
H4: 115 mm (4.53 in)
3) When the piston is to be replaced due to general

or cylinder wear, select a suitable sized piston by
measuring the piston clearance.
ME(H4DOTC)-97
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
4) Measure outer diameter of each piston. NOTE:

Measure the outer diameter of each piston at the Immediately after reboring, the cylinder diameter
height as shown in the figure. (Thrust direction) may differ from its real diameter due to temperature
NOTE: rise. Thus, when measuring the cylinder diameter,
Measurement should be performed at a tempera- wait until it has cooled to room temperature.
ture of 20°C (68°F). Cylinder inner diameter boring limit (diameter):
Piston grade point H: To 100.005 mm (3.9372 in)
38.2 mm (1.50 in) 3. PISTON AND PISTON PIN
Piston outer diameter: 1) Check the piston and piston pin for damage,
cracks or wear. Replace if faulty.
Standard 2) Check the piston ring groove for wear or dam-
A: 99.505 — 99.515 mm (3.9175 — 3.9179 in) age. Replace if faulty.
B: 99.495 — 99.505 mm (3.9171 — 3.9175 in) 3) Make sure the piston pin can be inserted into the
0.25 mm (0.0098 in) oversize piston pin hole by a thumb at 20°C (68°F). Replace
99.745 — 99.765 mm (3.9270 — 3.9278 in) if faulty.
0.50 mm (0.0197 in) oversize
99.995 — 100.015 mm (3.9368 — 3.9376 in) Clearance between piston pin hole and piston
pin:
Standard
0.004 — 0.008 mm (0.0002 — 0.0003 in)
ME-00172
5) Calculate the clearance between cylinder and

piston.
ME-00173
NOTE:
Measurement should be performed at a tempera-
ture of 20°C (68°F).
(68°F):
Standard
–0.010 — 0.010 mm (–0.00039 — 0.00039 in)
6) Boring and honing
(1) If any of the measured value of cylindricality,
out-of-roundness or cylinder-to-piston clear- ME-00174
ance is out of standard or if there is any damage
on the cylinder wall, rebore it to replace with an 4) Check the snap ring installation groove (A) on
oversize piston. the piston for burr. If necessary, remove burr from
the groove so that the piston pin can lightly move.
CAUTION:
When any of the cylinders needs reboring, all
other cylinders must be bored at the same time,
and replaced with oversize pistons.
(2) If the cylinder inner diameter exceeds the (A)
limit after boring and honing, replace the cylin-
der block.
ME-00175
ME(H4DOTC)-98
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
5) Check the piston pin snap ring for distortion,

cracks and wear.
4. PISTON RING
1) If the piston ring is broken, damaged or worn, or
if its tension is insufficient, or when the piston is re-
placed, replace the piston ring with a new part of
the same size as piston.
NOTE:
• The top ring and second ring have the mark to ME-00177
determine the direction for installing. When install-
ing the ring to piston, face marks to the top side. 3) Fit the piston ring straight into the piston ring
• Oil ring consists of the upper rail, expander and groove, then measure the clearance between pis-
lower rail. When installing oil ring on piston, be ton ring and piston ring groove with a thickness
careful of the direction of each rail. gauge.
NOTE:
Before measuring the clearance, clean the piston
ring groove and piston ring.
(A) Standard
mm (in)
(B)
0.040 — 0.080
Clearance between Top ring (0.0016 — 0.0031)
(C) piston ring and pis-
ton ring groove 0.030 — 0.070
Second ring
(0.0012 — 0.0028)
(A)
(B)
(C)
ME-00178
ME-02480
(A) Upper rail

(B) Expander
(C) Lower rail
2) Using the piston, insert the piston ring and oil

ring into the cylinder so that they are perpendicular
to the cylinder wall, and measure the piston ring
gap with a thickness gauge.
Standard
mm (in)
0.20 — 0.25
Top ring
(0.0079 — 0.0098)
0.37 — 0.52
Piston ring gap Second ring
(0.015 — 0.020)
0.20 — 0.50
Oil ring rail
(0.0079 — 0.0197)
ME(H4DOTC)-99
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
5. CONNECTING ROD 4) Inspect the connecting rod bearing for scar,

1) Replace the connecting rod, if the large or small peeling, seizure, melting, wear, etc.
end thrust surface is damaged. 5) Measure the oil clearance on each connecting
2) Check for bend or twist using a connecting rod rod bearing using plastigauge. If any oil clearance
aligner. Replace the connecting rod if the bend or is not within the standard, replace the defective
twist exceeds the limit. bearing with a new part of standard size or under-
size as necessary.
Limit of bend or twist per 100 mm (3.94 in) in
length: Connecting rod oil clearance:
0.10 mm (0.0039 in) Standard
0.017 — 0.045 mm (0.0007 — 0.0018 in)
(A) Unit: mm (in)
Bearing size Outer diameter of
Bearing
(Thickness at center) crank pin
1.490 — 1.506 51.976 — 52.000
(B) Standard
(0.0587 — 0.0593) (2.0463 — 2.0472)
0.03 (0.0012) 1.504 — 1.512 51.954 — 51.970
Undersize (0.0592 — 0.0595) (2.0454 — 2.0461)
0.05 (0.0020) 1.514 — 1.522 51.934 — 51.950
Undersize (0.0596 — 0.0599) (2.0447 — 2.0453)
0.25 (0.0098) 1.614 — 1.622 51.734 — 51.750
Undersize (0.0635 — 0.0639) (2.0368 — 2.0374)
6) Inspect the bushing at connecting rod small end,

and replace with a new part if worn or damaged.
(A)
7) Measure the piston pin clearance at connecting
rod small end. Replace it with a new part if the val-
(B)
ue is not within the standard.
Clearance between piston pin and bushing:
Standard
ME-00179
0 — 0.022 mm (0 — 0.0009 in)
(A) Thickness gauge

(B) Connecting rod
3) Install the connecting rod with bearings attached

to the crankshaft, and using a thickness gauge,
measure the thrust clearance. If the thrust clear-
ance exceeds the standard or uneven wear is
found, replace the connecting rod.
Connecting rod thrust clearance: ME-00181
Standard
0.070 — 0.330 mm (0.0028 — 0.0130 in)
ME-00174
ME-00180
ME(H4DOTC)-100
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
8) The replacement procedure for the connecting 3) Inspect the crank journal and crank pin for wear.
rod small end bushing is as follows. If they are not within the standard, replace the bear-
(1) Remove the bushing from connecting rod ing with a suitable (undersize) one, and replace or
with ST and press. grind to correct the crankshaft as necessary. When
(2) Apply oil on the periphery of the new bush- grinding the crank journal or crank pin, finish them
ing, and press the bushing in with the ST. to the specified dimensions according to the under-
ST 499037100 CONNECTING ROD BUSH- size bearing to be used.
ING REMOVER AND IN- Crank pin:
STALLER Out-of-roundness
Standard
0.003 mm (0.0001 in)
ST
Cylindricality
Standard
0.004 mm (0.0002 in)
Grinding limit (dia.)
To 51.750 mm (2.0374 in)
Crank journal:
Out-of-roundness
ME-00182
Standard
(3) Make two 3 mm (0.12 in) holes in the 0.005 mm (0.0002 in)
pressed bushing to match the pre-manufac- Cylindricality
tured holes on the connecting rod, then ream Standard
the inside of the bushing. 0.006 mm (0.0002 in)
(4) After completion of reaming, clean the bush- Grinding limit (dia.)
ing to remove chips. To 59.758 mm (2.3527 in)
6. CRANKSHAFT AND CRANKSHAFT
BEARING
1) Clean the crankshaft completely, and check it for
cracks using liquid penetrant tester. If defective, re-
place the crankshaft.
2) Measure warping of the crankshaft. If it exceeds
the limit, correct or replace it.
NOTE:
If a suitable V-block is not available, using just the
ME-00184
#1 and #5 crankshaft bearings on cylinder block,
position the crankshaft on cylinder block. Then,
measure the crankshaft bend using a dial gauge.
Crankshaft bend limit:
0.035 mm (0.0014 in)
ME-00183
ME(H4DOTC)-101
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
Unit: mm (in)
Crank journal diameter
Crank pin outer diameter
#1, #3 #2, #4, #5
59.984 — 60.008 59.984 — 60.008 51.976 — 52.000
Journal O.D.
(2.3616 — 2.3625) (2.3616 — 2.3625) (2.0463 — 2.0472)
Standard
Bearing size 1.998 — 2.015 2.000 — 2.017 1.490 — 1.506
59.962 — 59.978 59.962 — 59.978 51.954 — 51.970
Journal O.D.
0.03 (0.0012) (2.3607 — 2.3613) (2.3607 — 2.3613) (2.0454 — 2.0461)
59.942 — 59.958 59.942 — 59.958 51.934 — 51.950
Journal O.D.
0.05 (0.0020) (2.3599 — 2.3605) (2.3599 — 2.3605) (2.0447 — 2.0453)
59.742 — 59.758 59.742 — 59.758 51.734 — 51.750
Journal O.D.
0.25 (0.0098) (2.3520 — 2.3527) (2.3520 — 2.3527) (2.0368 — 2.0374)
4) Use a thickness gauge to measure the thrust
clearance of crankshaft at #5 crank journal bearing.
If clearance exceeds the standard, replace the
bearing.
Crankshaft thrust clearance:
Standard
0.030 — 0.115 mm (0.0012 — 0.0045 in)
ME-00322
5) Inspect individual crankshaft bearings for signs

of flaking, seizure, melting and wear.
6) Measure the oil clearance on each crankshaft
bearing using plastigauge. If the measured value is
out of standard, replace the defective bearing with
an undersize one, and replace or grind to correct
the crankshaft as necessary.
Crankshaft oil clearance:
Standard
0.010 — 0.030 mm (0.00039 — 0.0012 in)
ME(H4DOTC)-102
Intake and Exhaust Valve

MECHANICAL
21.Intake and Exhaust Valve

A: SPECIFICATION
Refer to “Cylinder Head” for removal and installa-
tion procedures of the intake and exhaust valves.
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-70, REMOVAL, Cylinder
Head.> <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-71, INSTALLA-
TION, Cylinder Head.>
ME(H4DOTC)-103
Piston
MECHANICAL
22.Piston
A: SPECIFICATION
tion procedures of pistons. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
79, REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-84, INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Block.>
ME(H4DOTC)-104
Connecting Rod
MECHANICAL
23.Connecting Rod
A: SPECIFICATION
tion procedures of connecting rod. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-79, REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.>
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-84, INSTALLATION, Cylin-
der Block.>
ME(H4DOTC)-105
Crankshaft
MECHANICAL
24.Crankshaft
A: SPECIFICATION
tion procedures of the crankshaft. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-79, REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.>
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-84, INSTALLATION, Cylin-
der Block.>
ME(H4DOTC)-106

MECHANICAL
25.Engine Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
NOTE:
The “RANK” shown in the chart shows the possibilities of the cause of trouble in order from “Very often” to
“Rarely”.
A — Very often
B — Sometimes
C — Rarely
1. Engine does not start.
1) Starter does not turn. Starter Defective battery-to-starter harness B
Defective starter switch C
Defective starter B
Battery Improper connection of terminal A
Run-down battery A
Defective charging system B
Friction Seizure of crankshaft and connecting rod bearing C
Seized camshaft C
Seized or stuck piston and cylinder C
Immobilizer system <Ref. to IM(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
2) Initial combustion does Starter Defective starter C
not occur. Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay A
Clogged fuel line C
Defective timing B
gasket
ME(H4DOTC)-107

MECHANICAL

3) Initial combustion occurs. Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Defective intake manifold gasket B
Clogged fuel line C
Defective timing B
gasket
4) Engine stalls after initial Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
combustion. Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct B
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose C
Fuel line Clogged fuel line C
Defective timing B
gasket
ME(H4DOTC)-108

MECHANICAL

2. Rough idle and engine Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
stall Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Defective PCV valve C
Clogged fuel line C
Timing belt Defective timing C
gasket
Defective rocker cover gasket C
Stuck or damaged throttle valve B
ME(H4DOTC)-109

MECHANICAL

3. Low output, hesitation and Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
poor acceleration Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Dirty air cleaner element A
Clogged fuel line B
gasket
Over-cooling C
ME(H4DOTC)-110

MECHANICAL

4. Surging Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Dirty air cleaner element B
Clogged fuel line B
gasket
5. Engine does not return to Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
idle. Intake system Loosened or cracked vacuum hose A
Others Stuck or damaged throttle valve A
6. Dieseling (Run-on) Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction B
7. After burning in exhaust Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
system Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct C
gasket
ME(H4DOTC)-111

MECHANICAL

8. Knocking Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Loosened oil filler cap B
Cooling system Over-heating A
9. Excessive engine oil con- Intake system Loosened or cracked PCV hose A
sumption Defective PCV valve B
Compression Defective valve stem A
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston A
Lubrication system Loosened oil pump attaching bolts and defective gas- B
ket
Defective oil filter gasket B
Defective crankshaft oil seal B
Defective rocker cover gasket B
Loosened oil drain plug or defective gasket B
Loosened oil pan fitting bolts or defective oil pan B
10. Excessive fuel consump- Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
tion Intake system Dirty air cleaner element A
gasket
ME(H4DOTC)-112
Engine Noise
MECHANICAL
26.Engine Noise
A: INSPECTION
Type of sound Condition Possible cause
• Valve mechanism is defective.
Sound increases as engine • Incorrect valve clearance
Regular clicking sound
speed increases. • Worn camshaft
• Broken valve spring
• Worn crankshaft main bearing
Oil pressure is low.
Heavy and dull clank • Worn connecting rod bearing (large end)
Oil pressure is normal. • Damaged engine mounting
• Ignition timing advanced
Sound is noticeable when
• Accumulation of carbon inside combustion chamber
High-pitched clank accelerating with an overload
• Wrong heat range of spark plug
condition.
• Improper octane value gasoline
Noise is reduced when fuel • Worn crankshaft main bearing
Clank when engine speed is
injector connector of noisy cyl- • Worn connecting rod bearing (large end)
between 1,000 and 2,000 rpm.
inder is disconnected. *
Noise is reduced when fuel • Worn cylinder liner and piston ring
injector connector of noisy cyl- • Broken or stuck piston ring
Knocking sound when engine inder is disconnected. * • Worn piston pin and hole at piston end of connecting rod
is operating under idling speed
and engine is warm Sound is not reduced if each • Unusually worn valve lifter
fuel injector connector is dis- • Worn cam sprocket
connected in turn. * • Worn camshaft journal bore in cylinder head
Squeaky sound — • Insufficient generator lubrication
Rubbing sound — • Poor contact of generator brush and rotor
Gear scream when starting • Defective ignition starter switch
—
engine • Worn gear and starter pinion
Sound like polishing glass with • Loose V-belt
—
a dry cloth • Defective water pump shaft
• Insufficient compression
Hissing sound —
• Air leakage in air intake system, hose, connection or manifold
• Loose timing belt
Timing belt noise —
• Timing belt contacting with adjacent part
Valve noise — • Incorrect valve clearance
* When disconnecting the fuel injector connector, the malfunction indicator light illuminates and DTC is stored in ECM memory.
Therefore, perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-54, OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.> and Inspec-
tion Mode <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-43, PROCEDURE, Inspection Mode.> after connecting the fuel injector connector.
ME(H4DOTC)-113
Engine Noise
MECHANICAL
ME(H4DOTC)-114
EXHAUST
EX(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Front Exhaust Pipe .....................................................................................5
3. Center Exhaust Pipe ................................................................................12
4. Rear Exhaust Pipe ...................................................................................15
5. Muffler ......................................................................................................17
General Description
EXHAUST
A: COMPONENT
1. FRONT EXHAUST PIPE
T1
T1 (1)
E
A
C B
D
(2)
T1 T3
(3)
T3
(6) (2)
(14)
(7) (8)
(4)
T2
(9) C
T3
D
E
(10)
(5)
F
G
(11)
T3
A (14)
H
(13) T1
(12)
F B
H T2
T1
T1
EX-02685
(1) Exhaust pipe cover (8) Turbocharger Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Gasket (9) Gasket T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) Front exhaust pipe (10) Center exhaust pipe (Front) T2: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
(4) Gasket (11) Turbocharger upper stay T3: 42.5 (4.3, 31.3)
(5) Exhaust pipe stay (12) Turbocharger lower stay
(6) Intake duct (13) Engine cover
(7) O-ring (14) Self-locking nut
EX(H4DOTC)-2
General Description
EXHAUST
2. CENTER AND REAR EXHAUST PIPE, AND MUFFLER
(25)
(20)
T1 (20) (23)
(25)
(20)
(22)
(24) (21)
(24) (20)
T7 T7
T1
(21)
(18) (16) (20)
(17)
(21)
T7
T7 (21)
(15) T4
(19) (26)
T1
B
(6)
T5 T3
T1 B
T1
(12)
T8 (4)
(8) A
T6
(1) T3
(11)
(9)
T9
(2)
(10)
(3) (13)
(14)
(5) A
T2
T2
(7)
EX-02687
EX(H4DOTC)-3
General Description
EXHAUST
(1) Center exhaust pipe (Front) (14) Center exhaust pipe band Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Front catalytic converter (15) Gasket T1: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(3) Rear catalytic converter (16) Rear exhaust pipe T2: 13 (1.3, 9.6)
(4) Center exhaust pipe inner cover (17) Spring T3: 18 (1.8, 13.3)
(Front)
(5) Center exhaust pipe outer cover (18) Bolt T4: 23 (2.3, 17.0)
(Front)
(6) Center exhaust pipe upper cover (19) Chamber T5: 35 (3.6, 25.8)
(Front)
(7) Center exhaust pipe lower cover (20) Cushion rubber T6: 42.5 (4.3, 31.3)
(Front)
(8) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (21) Self-locking nut T7: 48 (4.9, 35.4)
(9) Rear oxygen sensor (22) Muffler RH T8: <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-54,
INSTALLATION, Front Oxygen
(A/F) Sensor.>
(10) Gasket (23) Muffler LH T9: <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-56,
INSTALLATION, Rear Oxygen
Sensor.>
(11) Center exhaust pipe (Rear) (24) Gasket
(12) Center exhaust pipe upper cover (25) Muffler cutter
(Rear)
(13) Center exhaust pipe lower cover (26) Hanger bracket
(Rear)
B: CAUTION
any work.
tery.
• If any fat adheres to the exhaust pipe, wipe it off. Otherwise a fire may happen.
C: PREPARATION TOOL
1. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
®
TORX socket E10 Used for removing and installing center exhaust pipe (front).
EX(H4DOTC)-4
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
2. Front Exhaust Pipe 9) Disconnect the engine coolant hose from the
water tank pipe and water pump.
A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
parts.
IG-02107

EX-02576
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> 10) Remove the radiator sub fan motor assembly.
6) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)- <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator
14, DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, RE- Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
PLACEMENT, Engine Coolant.> 11) Remove the engine coolant hose from clip (A),
7) Lower the vehicle. and remove the bolts which secure the intake duct
8) Disconnect connectors from the front oxygen (A/ to the turbocharger.
F) sensor and rear oxygen sensor, and remove the (A)
clip (A) fastening the front oxygen (A/F) sensor har-
ness and rear oxygen sensor harness.
(A) EX-02567
EX-02575
EX(H4DOTC)-5
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
13) Remove oil inlet pipe B (B) from oil inlet pipe A 15) Remove the center exhaust pipe (rear) from the
(A), and remove the bolt which holds oil inlet pipe C center exhaust pipe (front).
(C) and oil inlet pipe A (A).
CAUTION:
loosing the oil inlet pipe flare nut, and avoid the
part from rotating together while loosening the
nut.
EX-02552
16) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from the center

exhaust pipe (rear).
(a)
EX-02549
(C)
EX-02561

pipe (rear) to the hanger bracket, and remove the
(B) (A) center exhaust pipe (rear).
EX-02550
14) Disconnect the air control hose (A), and loosen

the bolts which secure the intake duct to the turbo-
charger.
EX-02562
(A)
18) Remove the engine cover.
IN-02735
EX-02589
EX(H4DOTC)-6
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
19) Remove bolts and nuts which secure the oil B: INSTALLATION
catch tank to the turbocharger and oil catch tank
1) While holding the front exhaust pipe with trans-
stay, and remove the oil catch tank from the turbo-
mission jack, set the front exhaust pipe, and install
charger.
the nuts which hold the front exhaust pipe to the
cylinder head exhaust port.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
42.5 N·m (4.3 kgf-m, 31.3 ft-lb)
EX-02590
20) Remove the bolts which secure the turbocharg-

er stay.
EX-02592
2) Attach the bolt which holds the turbocharger

stay.
Tightening torque:
33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb)
EX-02591
21) While holding the front exhaust pipe with trans-

mission jack, remove the nuts which hold the front
exhaust pipe to the cylinder head exhaust port, and
remove the front exhaust pipe.
EX-02591
3) Set the oil catch tank to the turbocharger, and at-

tach the bolt and nut which secure the oil catch tank
to the turbocharger and oil catch tank stay.
NOTE:
EX-02592 • Use a new gasket.
• When installing the oil catch tank, tighten to the
specified torque in the alphabetical order shown in
the figure.
EX(H4DOTC)-7
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
Tightening torque: 6) Install the rear exhaust pipe to the center ex-
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) haust pipe (rear).
T2: 10.5 N·m (1.1 kgf-m, 7.7 ft-lb) NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
T1
(a)
T2 (c)
(b)
EX-02593
4) Install the engine cover.

Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) EX-02561
7) Assemble the center exhaust pipe (rear) to the

center exhaust pipe (front).
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
42.5 N·m (4.3 kgf-m, 31.3 ft-lb)
EX-02589
5) Install the center exhaust pipe (rear) and tempo-

rarily tighten the bolt which holds center exhaust
pipe (rear) to the hanger bracket.
EX-02552
8) Tighten the bolts which hold center exhaust pipe

(rear) to the hanger bracket.
Tightening torque:
35 N·m (3.6 kgf-m, 25.8 ft-lb)
EX-02562
EX-02562
EX(H4DOTC)-8
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
9) Install the bolts which secure the intake duct to 12) Lower the vehicle.
the turbocharger, and connect the air control hose 13) Install the engine coolant hose to the clip (A),
(A). and install the bolts which secure the intake duct to
NOTE: the turbocharger.
• Use new O-rings. Tightening torque:
• Be careful not to pinch the O-ring. 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
Tightening torque: (A)
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(A)
EX-02567
14) Install the radiator sub fan motor assembly.

IN-02735 <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, INSTALLATION, Radi-
10) Install the bolt which holds oil outlet pipe (C)
and oil inlet pipe A (A), and install oil inlet pipe B (B) 15) Connect the engine coolant hoses to the water
to oil inlet pipe A (A). tank pipe and water pump.
CAUTION:
tightening the oil inlet pipe flare nut, and avoid
the part from rotating together while tightening
the nut.
(a)
EX-02549
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
EX-02576
T1
(C)
(B) T2 (A)
EX-02555

EX(H4DOTC)-9
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
16) Connect connectors to the front oxygen (A/F) 2) Remove nuts which secure the center exhaust
sensor and rear oxygen sensor, and secure the pipe (front) to the turbocharger, and remove the
front oxygen (A/F) sensor harness and rear oxygen center exhaust pipe (front) together with turbo-
sensor harness with the clip (A). charger upper stay (A) and turbocharger lower stay
(B).
(A)
(A)
(B)
EX-02575
EX-02595
17) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-12, INSTALLATION, Air Intake 3) Remove the turbocharger from the front exhaust
Duct.> pipe.
EX-02596
IG-02107 4) Remove the exhaust pipe stay from the front ex-
19) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-14, haust pipe.
20) Check the engine oil level and replenish the en-
gine oil if necessary. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, IN-
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the exhaust pipe cover.
EX-02560
EX-02594
EX(H4DOTC)-10
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
D: ASSEMBLY 4) Install the exhaust pipe cover.

1) Install the exhaust pipe stay to the front exhaust Tightening torque:
pipe. 6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
Tightening torque:
33 N·m (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb)
EX-02594
E: INSPECTION
EX-02560
2) Install the turbocharger to the front exhaust pipe. leaks.
NOTE: 2) Make sure there are no holes or rusting.
Tightening torque:
42.5 N·m (4.3 kgf-m, 31.3 ft-lb)
EX-02596
3) Install the center exhaust pipe (front) to the tur-

bocharger together with turbocharger upper stay
(A) and turbocharger lower stay (B).
NOTE:
Tightening torque:
42.5 N·m (4.3 kgf-m, 31.3 ft-lb)
(A)
(B)
EX-02595
EX(H4DOTC)-11
Center Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
3. Center Exhaust Pipe 7) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from the center
exhaust pipe (rear).
A: REMOVAL
EX-02561

pipe (rear) to the hanger bracket, and remove the
IG-02107 center exhaust pipe (rear).
3) Disconnect connectors from the front oxygen (A/
F) sensor and rear oxygen sensor, and remove the
clip (A) fastening the front oxygen (A/F) sensor har-
ness and rear oxygen sensor harness.
EX-02562
(A) 9) Remove the bolts which secure the turbocharger

stay.
EX-02575

6) Remove the center exhaust pipe (front) from the
center exhaust pipe (rear).
EX-02570
10) Remove the bolts which hold the oil catch tank
stay and engine cover to the turbocharger lower
stay.
EX-02552
EX-02556
EX(H4DOTC)-12
Center Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
11) Remove nuts which hold center exhaust pipe 2) Install the center exhaust pipe (front) to the tur-
(front) to the turbocharger, and remove the turbo- bocharger together with turbocharger upper stay
charger lower stay (A). (A) and turbocharger lower stay (B).
NOTE:
Tightening torque:
42.5 N·m (4.3 kgf-m, 31.3 ft-lb)
(A)
(A)
EX-02568
12) Using the TORX® socket E10, remove bolts

from the turbocharger, and remove the center ex- (B)
haust pipe (front) together with turbocharger upper
stay (A).
EX-02571
3) Install bolts which hold the oil catch tank stay

and engine cover to the turbocharger lower stay.
(A) Tightening torque:
6.4 N·m (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
EX-02569
B: INSTALLATION
1) Set the center exhaust pipe (front) together with
turbocharger upper stay (A), and install stud bolts
to the turbocharger by using the TORX® socket EX-02556
E10.
4) Attach the bolt which holds the turbocharger
NOTE: stay.
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
14.7 N·m (1.5 kgf-m, 10.8 ft-lb)
(A)
EX-02570
EX-02569
EX(H4DOTC)-13
Center Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
5) Install the center exhaust pipe (rear) and tempo- 8) Tighten the bolts which hold center exhaust pipe
rarily tighten the bolt which holds center exhaust (rear) to the hanger bracket.
pipe (rear) to the hanger bracket.
Tightening torque:
35 N·m (3.6 kgf-m, 25.8 ft-lb)
EX-02562
6) Install the rear exhaust pipe to the center ex- EX-02562

haust pipe (rear).
NOTE: LATION, Front Under Cover.>
Use a new gasket. 10) Lower the vehicle.
Tightening torque: 11) Connect connectors to the front oxygen (A/F)
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb) sensor and rear oxygen sensor, and secure the
front oxygen (A/F) sensor harness and rear oxygen
sensor harness with the clip (A).
(A)
EX-02561
7) Install the center exhaust pipe (front) to the cen- EX-02575

ter exhaust pipe (rear).
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
42.5 N·m (4.3 kgf-m, 31.3 ft-lb)
IG-02107

C: INSPECTION
EX-02552 1) Check the connections and welds for exhaust
leaks.
EX(H4DOTC)-14
Rear Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
4. Rear Exhaust Pipe B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL area of cushion rubber.
CAUTION: 2) Install the rear exhaust pipe to the cushion rub-
Vehicle components are extremely hot after ber.
driving. Be wary of receiving burns from heated NOTE:
parts. After assembling, degrease the lubricant which
1) Lift up the vehicle. was applied to the cushion rubber while removing/
2) Remove the center exhaust pipe (rear) from the installing.
rear exhaust pipe.
EX-02578
EX-02561
3) Install the muffler to the rear exhaust pipe.
3) Remove the muffler from rear exhaust pipe.
NOTE:
CAUTION: Use a new gasket and self-locking nut.
Be careful not to drop the rear exhaust pipe.
Tightening torque:
48 N·m (4.9 kgf-m, 35.4 ft-lb)
EX-02564

EX-02564
area of cushion rubber.
5) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from the cushion 4) Install the center exhaust pipe (rear) to the rear
rubber. exhaust pipe.
CAUTION: NOTE:
Be careful not to let the muffler contact the rear Use a new gasket.
bumper. Tightening torque:
18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
EX-02578
EX-02561
EX(H4DOTC)-15
Rear Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
3) Check the cushion rubber for wear or crack.
EX(H4DOTC)-16
Muffler
EXHAUST
5. Muffler B: INSTALLATION
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
CAUTION:
• Use a new gasket and self-locking nut.
• After assembling, degrease the lubricant which
was applied to the cushion rubber while removing/
parts. installing.
2) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from the muffler. Tightening torque:
48 N·m (4.9 kgf-m, 35.4 ft-lb)
EX-02564
EX-02564
area of cushion rubber. C: INSPECTION
4) Remove the muffler from the cushion rubber.
CAUTION: leaks.
Be careful not to drop the muffler during remov- 2) Make sure there are no holes or rusting.
al. 3) Check the cushion rubber for wear or crack.
EX-02566
EX(H4DOTC)-17
Muffler
EXHAUST
EX(H4DOTC)-18
COOLING
CO(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Radiator Fan System .................................................................................7
3. Engine Coolant .........................................................................................14
4. Water Pump .............................................................................................16
5. Thermostat ...............................................................................................19
6. Radiator ....................................................................................................21
7. Radiator Cap ............................................................................................24
8. Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor ...........................................................25
9. Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor .............................................................27
10. Reservoir Tank .........................................................................................29
11. Engine Cooling System Trouble in General .............................................30
General Description
COOLING
A: SPECIFICATION
Electric fan + Forced engine coolant
Cooling system
circulation system
Total engine coolant capacity 2 (US qt, Imp qt) Approx. 6.6 (7.0, 5.8)
Type Centrifugal impeller type
Discharge
2 (US gal, Imp gal) /min. 200 (52.8, 44.0)
rate
Discharge performance
Pump speed — Discharge pressure 6,000 rpm — 225.4 kPa (23.0 mAq)
Water pump Engine coolant temperature 80°C (176°F)
Impeller diameter mm (in) 76 (2.99)
Number of impeller vanes 8
Pump pulley diameter mm (in) 60 (2.36)
Clearance between impeller and pump case mm (in) Standard 0.5 — 1.5 (0.020 — 0.059)
Type Wax pellet type
Starting temperature to open 82 — 86°C (180 — 187°F)
Thermostat Fully opens 91°C (196°F)
Valve lift mm (in) 9.0 (0.354) or more
Valve bore mm (in) 35 (1.38)
Main fan W 120
Motor input
Sub fan W 120
Radiator fan
Main fan 320 mm (12.6 in)/5
Fan diameter / Blade
Sub fan 320 mm (12.6 in)/7
Type Down flow
687.4 × 340 × 16
Core dimensions Width × Height × Thickness mm (in)
(27.06 × 13.39 × 0.63)
Positive Standard 93 — 123 (0.95 — 1.25, 14 — 18)
pressure
Radiator Pressure range in Limit 83 (0.85, 12)
side
which cap valve is kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
open Negative
–1.0 — –4.9
pressure Standard
(–0.01 — –0.05, –0.1 — –0.7)
side
Fins Corrugated fin type
Reservoir
Capacity 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.45 (0.48, 0.40)
tank
Recommended materials Item number Alternative

—
(Concentrated type)
Coolant —
K0670Y0001
(Diluted type)
Water for dilution Distilled water — Soft water or tap water
Cooling system protective
Cooling system conditioner SOA345001 —
agent
CO(H4DOTC)-2
General Description
COOLING
B: COMPONENT
1. WATER PUMP
T1
T1
(7)
(8)
(3)
(2)
(9)
(1)
T3
(4)
T2 (5)
(6)
T2
CO-02572
(1) Water pump ASSY (6) Thermostat cover Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Gasket (7) Water by-pass pipe T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) Heater by-pass hose (8) Clip T2: 9 (0.9, 6.6)
(4) Thermostat (9) Water pump sealing T3: First 12 (1.2, 8.9)
Second 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(5) Gasket
CO(H4DOTC)-3
General Description
COOLING
2. RADIATOR AND RADIATOR FAN
(8)
A
(5)
(6) T3
(15)
(5)
(14)
(10) (7)
T4
(9)
(13)
(11)
(4)
T2
(3)
(19)
T1 T2
(2) A
(12)
T1
(5)
(16)
(18) (1)
(5)
(17)
CO-02745
(1) Radiator lower cushion (10) Radiator sub fan shroud (19) Radiator cap
(2) Radiator (11) Radiator main fan shroud
(3) Radiator upper cushion (12) Radiator main fan Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Radiator upper bracket (13) Radiator sub fan T1: 3.4 (0.3, 2.5)
(5) Clip (14) Main fan motor T2: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(6) Radiator inlet hose (15) Sub fan motor T3: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(7) Engine coolant reservoir tank cap (16) Radiator outlet hose T4: 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(8) Over flow hose (17) Radiator drain plug
(9) Engine coolant reservoir tank (18) O-ring
CO(H4DOTC)-4
General Description
COOLING
C: CAUTION
any work.
• Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from battery.
• Prepare a container and cloth to prevent scattering of engine coolant when performing work where engine
coolant can be spilled. If the fuel spills, wipe it off immediately to prevent from penetrating into floor or flowing
out for environmental protection.
• Follow all government and local regulations concerning disposal of refuse when disposing engine coolant.
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
WRENCH ley.
ST-499977100
499977500 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing intake cam
WRENCH sprocket and exhaust cam sprocket.
ST-499977500
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
CO(H4DOTC)-5
General Description
COOLING
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Radiator cap tester Used for checking radiator and radiator cap.
CO(H4DOTC)-6
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
2. Radiator Fan System

A: WIRING DIAGRAM
MB-6 FB-35 MB-7 FB-39

M/B FUSE NO. 8 F/B FUSE NO. 26 M/B FUSE NO. 7 F/B FUSE NO. 22
(B) (IG) (B) (IG)
20
21
10
13
17
14
1
MAIN
FAN A/C
MOTOR MAIN MAIN SUB RELAY HOLDER
FAN FAN FAN
B473 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY B497
2
15
16
22
19
18
11
12
J/C B482
3
B479
12
11
B135 ECM
SUB FAN MOTOR
B473 B479 B497 B135
B482 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
3 4 5 1
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
1 2 6
2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 7
18
12 16 19
10 11 14 15
13 17 20 21 22
A/C RELAY HOLDER
CO-02631
CO(H4DOTC)-7
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
B: INSPECTION
Operating condition:
Radiator fan operates depending on the radiator fan operation mode related to engine coolant temperature
or the radiator fan operation mode related to A/C compressor load, whichever is higher as an operation
mode.
• Radiator fan operation mode related to engine coolant temperature
(A)
(1)
(2)
(3) (B)
(4) (5)(6) (7)
CO-02661
(A) Radiator fan operation mode (B) Engine coolant temperature
(1) High-Speed (4) 96°C (205°F) (7) 100°C (212°F)

(2) Low-Speed (5) 97.5°C (207°F)
(3) OFF (6) 98°C (208°F)
CO(H4DOTC)-8
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
• Radiator fan operation mode related to A/C compressor load
(A)
(1)
(2)
(3) (B)
(4) (5) (6) (7)
CO-02662
(A) Radiator fan operation mode (B) A/C compressor refrigerant pres-
sure
(1) High-Speed (4) 0.8 MPa (8.16 kgf/cm2, 116 psi) (7) 1.5 MPa (15.30 kgf/cm2, 218 psi)
(2) Low-Speed (5) 1.125 MPa (11.47 kgf/cm2, 163
psi)
(3) OFF (6) 1.25 MPa (12.75 kgf/cm2, 181 psi)
DIAGNOSIS:
Radiator main fan and radiator sub fans do not rotate under the above operating conditions.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Do the radiator main fans and Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
1) Connect the delivery mode fuse. radiator sub fans rotate at low
NOTE:
CO(H4DOTC)-9
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Do the radiator main fans and Radiator main fan Go to step 27.
1) Connect the delivery mode fuse. radiator sub fans rotate at high system is normal.
3) Perform the compulsory operation check for
the radiator fan relay using Subaru Select Mon-
itor.
NOTE:
LAY.
2) Remove the sub fan relay from A/C relay
holder.
LAY.
7 CHECK SUB FAN RELAY. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 8. Replace the sub
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay.
2) Measure the resistance between sub fan
relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 10 — No. 11:
8 CHECK SUB FAN RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 9. Replace the sub
1) Connect the battery to terminals No. 12 and fan relay.
No. 13 of the sub fan relay.
2) Measure the resistance between sub fan
relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 10 — No. 11:
CO(H4DOTC)-10
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

LAY CONNECTOR AND SUB FAN MOTOR circuit of harness
CONNECTOR. between sub fan
1) Disconnect the connector from the sub fan relay connector
motor. and sub fan motor
2) Measure the resistance of harness between connector.
sub fan relay connector and sub fan motor con-
nector.
(B482) No. 1 — (B497) No. 11:
10 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SUB FAN MO- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 11. Repair the open
TOR CONNECTOR AND MAIN FAN RELAY 2 circuit of the har-
CONNECTOR. ness between sub
1) Remove the main fan relay 2 from A/C relay fan motor connec-
holder. tor and main fan
2) Measure the resistance of harness between relay 2 connector.
sub fan motor connector and main fan relay 2
connector.
(B482) No. 2 — (B497) No. 18:
11 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the sub Repair the poor Go to step 12.
Check poor contact of sub fan motor connector. fan motor connector? contact of sub fan
motor connector.
12 CHECK SUB FAN MOTOR. Does the radiator sub fan Go to step 13. Replace the sub
Connect the battery positive (+) terminal to ter- rotate? fan motor.
minal No. 1 of the sub fan motor, and the ground
(–) terminal to terminal No. 2.
Measure the resistance between main fan relay fan relay 2.
2 terminals.
Terminals
No. 21 — No. 18:
(B473) No. 1 — (B497) No. 21:
MOTOR. circuit of the har-
Measure the resistance between main fan ness between the
motor connector and chassis ground. main fan motor
(B473) No. 2 — Chassis ground: chassis ground or
poor contact of the
joint connector.
16 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the Repair the poor Go to step 17.
Check poor contact of main fan motor connec- main fan motor connector? contact of main fan
tor. motor connector.
17 CHECK MAIN FAN MOTOR. Does the radiator main fan Go to step 18. Replace the main
Connect the battery positive (+) terminal to ter- rotate? fan motor.
minal No. 1 of the main fan motor, and the
ground (–) terminal to terminal No. 2.
CO(H4DOTC)-11
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

LAY CONNECTOR AND ECM. circuit of harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. between sub fan
2) Measure the resistance between the sub relay connector
fan relay connector and ECM connector. and ECM.
(B135) No. 11 — (B497) No. 12:
19 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Check the DTC.
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM Repair the trouble
connector. cause. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-42, Read Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay 1.
2) Remove the main fan relay 1 from A/C relay
holder.
relay 1 terminals.
Terminals
No. 14 — No. 15:
1) Connect terminals No. 17 and No. 16 of the fan relay 1.
main fan relay 1 to the battery.
relay 1 terminals.
Terminals
No. 14 — No. 15:
(B473) No. 1 — (B497) No. 15:
2) Measure the resistance between the main main fan relay 1
fan relay 1 connector and ECM connector. connector and
Connector & terminal ECM.
(B135) No. 12 — (B497) No. 16:
Measure the resistance between the main fan ness between
relay 2 connector and ECM connector. main fan relay 2
(B135) No. 12 — (B497) No. 22: ECM.
25 CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Go to step 26.
2) Remove the fuse No. 8 and 26.
26 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Repair the power
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM supply circuit to the
connector. main fuse box.
CO(H4DOTC)-12
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

27 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Does the radiator sub fan Go to step 20. Go to step 28.
If the both fans do not rotate at high speed in the rotate?
condition of step 2, check whether the radiator
sub fan is rotating.
RELAY 2. circuit of the har-
1) Remove the main fan relay 2 from A/C relay ness between
holder. main fan relay 2
2) Measure the resistance between main fan connector and
relay 2 connector and chassis ground. chassis ground or
Connector & terminal poor contact of the
(B497) No. 19 — Chassis ground: joint connector.
29 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO MAIN FAN RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 30. Repair the power
LAY 2. supply line.
2) Measure the voltage between main fan relay
2 connector and chassis ground.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay 2.
2) Remove the main fan relay 2.
relay 2 terminals.
Terminals
No. 18 — No. 19:
1) Connect the battery to terminals No. 20 and fan relay 2.
No. 22 of the main fan relay 2.
relay 2 terminals.
Terminals
No. 18 — No. 19:
CO(H4DOTC)-13
Engine Coolant
COOLING
3. Engine Coolant NOTE:

The SUBARU Super Coolant is especially made for
A: REPLACEMENT SUBARU engine, which has an aluminum cylinder
block, and contains anti-freeze and anti-rust
1. DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT agents. Always use SUBARU Super Coolant, since
1) Lift up the vehicle. other coolant may cause corrosion.
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- 3) Fill engine coolant into the reservoir tank up to
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> “FULL” level.
3) Remove the drain plug to drain engine coolant
into container.
NOTE:
Remove the radiator cap so that engine coolant will
drain faster.
FULL
LOW
CO-02633
4) Close the radiator cap and start the engine.

Race 5 to 6 times at 3,000 rpm or less, then stop
the engine. (Complete this operation within 40 sec-
onds.)
CO-02632 5) Wait for one minute after the engine stops, and
4) Install the drain plug. open the radiator cap. If the engine coolant level
5) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL- drops, add engine coolant into radiator up to the fill-
LATION, Front Under Cover.> er neck position.
6) Perform the procedures 4) and 5) again.
2. FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT 7) Attach the radiator cap and reservoir tank cap
1) Pour cooling system conditioner from the filler properly.
neck of the radiator. 8) Start the engine and operate the heater at max-
imum hot position and the blower speed setting to
Cooling system protecting agent: “LO”.
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for cooling sys- 9) Run the engine at 2,000 rpm or less until radiator
tem protecting agent. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)- fan starts and stops.
2, SPECIFICATION, General Description.>
2) Pour engine coolant into the radiator up to the NOTE:
filler neck position. Be careful with the engine coolant temperature
gauge to prevent overheating.
Recommended engine coolant: 10) Stop the engine and wait until the engine cool-
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for recommended ant temperature lowers to 30°C (86°F) or less.
engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-2, 11) Open the radiator cap. If the engine coolant lev-
SPECIFICATION, General Description.> el drops, add engine coolant into radiator up to the
Engine coolant level: filler neck position and reservoir tank to the “FULL”
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for engine cool- level.
ant level. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-2, SPECIFI- 12) Attach the radiator cap and reservoir tank cap
CATION, General Description.> properly.
13) Set the heater setting to maximum hot position
Engine coolant concentration: and the blower speed setting to “LO” and start the
Refer to “ADJUSTMENT” for the recommend- engine. Perform racing at 3,000 rpm or less. If the
ed engine coolant concentration. <Ref. to flowing sound is heard from heater core, repeat the
CO(H4DOTC)-15, ADJUSTMENT, Engine procedures from step 9).
Coolant.>
CO(H4DOTC)-14
Engine Coolant
COOLING
B: ADJUSTMENT
1. PROCEDURE TO ADJUST THE SUBARU SUPER COOLANT CONCENTRATION
CAUTION:
SUBARU Super Coolant concentration must be used from 50 to 60% to assure the best performance
of the anti-freeze and anti-rust agents.
To adjust the concentration of SUBARU Super Coolant according to temperature, find the proper SUBARU
Super Coolant concentration in the table, and add diluting water to the SUBARU Super Coolant (concentrat-
ed type) until it reaches the proper dilution.
Relationship of SUBARU Super Coolant concentration and freezing temperature
SUBARU Super Coolant concentration 50% 55% 60%
Freezing temperature –36°C (–33°F) –41°C (–42°F) –50°C (–58°F)
Recommended engine coolant and water for dilution:

Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for the recommended engine coolant and diluting water. <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-2, SPECIFICATION, General Description.>
CO(H4DOTC)-15
Water Pump
COOLING
4. Water Pump 14) Remove the water pump.
A: REMOVAL
2) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-21,
REMOVAL, Radiator.>
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
7) Remove the automatic belt tension adjuster (A).
8) Remove the belt idler (B).
9) Remove the belt idler No. 2 (C).
(A)
(B)
CO-02608
(C)
CO-02726
10) Remove the cam sprocket LH. <Ref. to

CO-02577
ME-04984
13) Disconnect the hose from water pump.
CO(H4DOTC)-16
Water Pump
COOLING
B: INSTALLATION 4) Install the belt cover No. 2 LH.

1) Install the water pump onto cylinder block LH. Tightening torque:
NOTE: 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
• Use new water pump sealing.
• When installing the water pump, tighten the bolts
in two stages in alphabetical sequence as shown in
figure.
Tightening torque:
First:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
Second:
CO-02577
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
5) Install the cam sprocket LH. <Ref. to
(B) ME(H4DOTC)-59, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprock-
et.>
(C) 6) Install the belt idler No. 2 (C).
(A) Tightening torque:
39 N·m (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
7) Install the belt idler (B).
(D)
Tightening torque:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
(E) (F) 8) Install the automatic belt tension adjuster (A)
with the tension rod held by a pin. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-52, AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION
ADJUSTER ASSEMBLY AND BELT IDLER, IN-
STALLATION, Timing Belt.>
(A)
(B)
CO-02578

(C)
CO-02726
Tightening torque:
24.5 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb) 9) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-53,
Cover.>
12) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-41,
13) Install the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-22,
INSTALLATION, Radiator.>
ME-04984
CO(H4DOTC)-17
Water Pump
COOLING
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the water pump bearing for smooth rota-
tion.
2) Check the water pump pulley for abnormalities.
3) Make sure the impeller is not abnormally de-
formed or damaged.
4) Inspect the clearance between impeller and
pump case.
Clearance between impeller and pump case:
Standard
0.5 — 1.5 mm (0.020 — 0.059 in)
CO-00293
5) After water pump installation, check pulley shaft

for engine coolant leaks or noise. If leaks or noise
are noted, replace the water pump assembly.
CO(H4DOTC)-18
Thermostat
COOLING
5. Thermostat B: INSTALLATION
1) Install a gasket to thermostat.
A: REMOVAL
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- Use a new gasket.
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> 2) Install the thermostat and thermostat cover.
3) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)- NOTE:
14, DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, RE- Install the parts with the jiggle pin facing upside.
Tightening torque:
9 N·m (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
stat cover.
(D)
CO-02579
5) Remove the thermostat cover, and then remove (C)

the gasket and thermostat.
T
(B)
(A)
CO-02581

(B) Gasket
(C) (C) Thermostat
(D) Jiggle pin
(B)
(A) 3) Connect the radiator outlet hose to thermostat

cover.
6) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-14,
CO-02735
(B) Gasket
(C) Thermostat
CO(H4DOTC)-19
Thermostat
COOLING
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the thermostat does not have defor-
2) Check that the thermostat valve closes com-
pletely at an ambient temperature.
3) Immerse the thermostat and a thermometer in
water. Raise water temperature gradually, and
check the temperature and valve lift when the valve
begins to open and when the valve is fully opened.
Replace the thermostat if faulty.
NOTE:
• During the test, agitate the water for even tem-
perature distribution.
• Leave the thermostat in the boiling water for five
minutes or more before measuring the valve lift.
• Hold the thermostat with a wire or the like to
avoid contacting the container.
Starting temperature to open:
82 — 86°C (180 — 187°F)
Full open temperature:
91°C (196°F)
Total valve lift:
9.0 mm (0.354 in) or more
(A)
(B)
CO-02420
(A) Thermometer
(B) Thermostat
CO(H4DOTC)-20
Radiator
COOLING
6. Radiator 10) Disconnect the connectors of main fan motor

connector (A) and sub fan motor connector (B).
A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
The radiator is pressurized when the engine
and radiator are hot. Wait until engine and radi-
ator cools down before working on the radiator.
(A)
CO-02634
(B)
IG-02107

MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> CO-02635
5) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)- 11) Disconnect the radiator inlet hose from the wa-
14, DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, RE- ter tank pipe.
stat cover.
CO-02636
12) Remove the grille bracket.

CO-02579 NOTE:
7) Lower the vehicle. Remove ten clips when removing the grille bracket.
9) Remove the reservoir tank. <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-29, REMOVAL, Reservoir Tank.>
CO-02637
CO(H4DOTC)-21
Radiator
COOLING
13) Remove the radiator upper brackets. 3) Install the radiator upper brackets.
Tightening torque:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
CO-02638
14) Lift the radiator up and remove the radiator

from vehicle. CO-02638
15) Remove the radiator lower cushion from the ve-
4) Attach the grille bracket.
hicle body.
CO-02637
CO-02639
5) Connect the radiator inlet hose.
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the radiator lower cushion to the vehicle
body.
CO-02636
CO-02639
2) Install the radiator to the vehicle.

NOTE:
Insert the pin on the lower side of radiator into the
radiator lower cushion.
CO(H4DOTC)-22
Radiator
COOLING
6) Connect the connectors of main fan motor con- 14) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-14,
nector (A) and sub fan motor connector (B). FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the radiator does not have deforma-
loose part.
(A) 3) Remove the radiator cap, fill the radiator with en-
gine coolant, and then install the radiator cap tester
CO-02634
to the filler neck of radiator.
(B)
CO-02635 CO-02640
7) Install the reservoir tank. <Ref. to 4) Apply a pressure of 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi)
CO(H4DOTC)-29, INSTALLATION, Reservoir to the radiator and check the following points:
Tank.> • Leakage from the radiator or its vicinity
8) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)- • Leakage from the hose or its connections
12, INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.>
CAUTION:
• Engine should be turned off.
10) Connect the radiator outlet hose.
• Wipe engine coolant from check points in ad-
vance.
• Be careful of the spurt of engine coolant
when removing the radiator cap tester.
• Be careful not to deform the filler neck of ra-
diator when installing and removing the radia-
tor cap tester.
CO-02579

IG-02107
CO(H4DOTC)-23
Radiator Cap
COOLING
7. Radiator Cap
A: INSPECTION
1) Check that the radiator cap does not have defor-
2) Attach the radiator cap tester to radiator cap.
CO-00044
3) Increase pressure until the radiator cap tester

gauge needle stops. Radiator cap is functioning
properly if it holds the service limit pressure for 5 —
6 seconds. Replace the radiator cap if its valve
opens at less than the service limit.
Standard:
93 — 123 kPa (0.95 — 1.25 kgf/cm2, 14 — 18
psi)
Service limit:
83 kPa (0.85 kgf/cm2, 12 psi)
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove foreign matter and rust from
the cap in advance. Otherwise, results of pres-
sure test will be incorrect.
CO(H4DOTC)-24

COOLING
8. Radiator Main Fan and Fan B: INSTALLATION

Motor Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
A: REMOVAL Confirm that the radiator hose is securely con-
1) Remove the collector cover. nected.
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
IG-02107
3) Remove the reservoir tank. <Ref. to CO-02641

CO(H4DOTC)-29, REMOVAL, Reservoir Tank.>
4) Disconnect the main fan motor connector (A). C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the main fan motor connector and main
fan motor harness from the radiator main fan
shroud.
2) Remove the radiator main fan from the main fan
motor.
(A)
CO-02634
5) Remove the bolts that secure the radiator main

fan motor assembly.
CO-02642
3) Remove the main fan motor from the radiator

main fan shroud.
CO-02641
6) Remove the radiator main fan motor assembly

from the upper side of the vehicle.
CO-02643
CO(H4DOTC)-25

COOLING
D: ASSEMBLY
Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
CO-02643
Tightening torque:
3.4 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.5 ft-lb)
CO-02642
E: INSPECTION
Check that the radiator main fan, radiator main fan
shroud and main fan motor do not have deforma-
CO(H4DOTC)-26

COOLING
9. Radiator Sub Fan and Fan B: INSTALLATION

Motor Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
A: REMOVAL Confirm that the radiator hose is securely con-
1) Remove the collector cover. nected.
Tightening torque:
7.5 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
IG-02107
3) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to CO-02644

4) Disconnect the sub fan motor connector (B). C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the sub fan motor connector and sub
fan motor harness from the radiator sub fan shroud.
(B) 2) Remove the radiator sub fan from the sub fan
motor.
CO-02635
5) Remove the bolts that secure the radiator sub

fan motor assembly.
CO-02645
3) Remove the sub fan motor from the radiator sub

fan shroud.
CO-02644
6) Remove the radiator sub fan motor assembly

from the upper side of the vehicle.
CO-02646
CO(H4DOTC)-27

COOLING
D: ASSEMBLY
Tightening torque:
5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
CO-02646
Tightening torque:
3.4 N·m (0.3 kgf-m, 2.5 ft-lb)
CO-02645
E: INSPECTION
Check that the radiator sub fan, radiator sub fan
shroud and sub fan motor do not have deformation,
cracks or damage.
CO(H4DOTC)-28
Reservoir Tank
COOLING
10.Reservoir Tank
A: REMOVAL
1) Pull out the over flow hose (A).
2) Pull out the reservoir tank to the arrow direction
while pushing the claw (B).
(B)
(A)
CO-02647
B: INSTALLATION
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the reservoir tank does not have de-
2) Check the over flow hose for cracks or damage.
3) Make sure the engine coolant level is between
“FULL” and “LOW”.
FULL
LOW
CO-02633
CO(H4DOTC)-29
Engine Cooling System Trouble in General

COOLING
11.Engine Cooling System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Replenish engine coolant, inspect for leakage, and
a. Insufficient engine coolant
repair it if necessary.
b. Loose timing belt Repair or replace timing belt tensioner.
c. Oil on timing belt Replace.
d. Malfunction of thermostat Replace.
e. Malfunction of water pump Replace.
f. Clogged engine coolant passage Clean.
Inspect and repair ignition control system. <Ref. to
g. Improper ignition timing EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, PROCEDURE, Basic Diagnos-
tic Procedure.>
h. Clogged or leaking radiator Clean, repair or replace.
Over-heating i. Defective radiator fan Replace.
Replace the engine coolant. If ineffective, check, repair
j. Improper engine oil in engine coolant
or replace engine components.
Inspect and repair the fuel injection system. <Ref. to
k. Air/fuel mixture ratio too lean EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, PROCEDURE, Basic Diagnos-
tic Procedure.>
l. Excessive back pressure in exhaust system Clean or replace.
m. Insufficient clearance between piston and cylin-
Adjust or replace.
der
n. Slipping clutch Repair or replace.
o. Dragging brake Adjust.
Inspect the radiator fan relay, engine coolant tempera-
p. Defective radiator fan
ture sensor or fan motor and replace them.
a. Ambient temperature extremely low Partly cover radiator front area.
Over-cooling
b. Defective thermostat Replace.
a. Loosened or damaged connecting units on
Repair or replace.
hoses
b. Leakage from water pump Replace.
c. Leakage from water pipe Repair or replace.
Engine coolant Retighten cylinder head bolts or replace cylinder head
d. Leakage around cylinder head gasket
leaks gasket.
e. Damaged or cracked cylinder head and cylinder
Repair or replace.
block
f. Damaged or cracked thermostat cover Repair or replace.
g. Leakage from radiator Repair or replace.
a. Timing belt problem Replace.
b. Defective radiator fan Replace.
Noise
c. Defective water pump bearing Replace water pump.
d. Defective water pump mechanical seal Replace water pump.
CO(H4DOTC)-30
LUBRICATION
LU(H4DOTC)
Page
General Description
LUBRICATION
A: SPECIFICATION
Specifications for the turbo model are included in
the LU (H4SO) section. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-2, Gen-
eral Description.>
LU(H4DOTC)-2
SP(H4DOTC)
Page
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Specifications for the turbo model are the same as
the non-turbo model. <Ref. to SP(H4SO)-2, Gener-
al Description.>
SP(H4DOTC)-2
IGNITION
IG(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Spark Plug ..................................................................................................4
3. Ignition Coil ................................................................................................6
General Description
IGNITION
A: SPECIFICATION
Item SPECIFICATION
Type FK0368
Ignition coil Ignition system Independent ignition coil
Manufacturer Diamond Electric
Manufacturer and type NGK: SILFR6B8
Thread size (diameter, pitch, length) mm 14,1.25,26.5
Spark plug Stan-
Spark plug gap mm (in) 0.7 — 0.8 (0.028 — 0.031)
dard
Electrode Iridium
B: COMPONENT
T1
T2
(2)
(1)
T2
(1)
(2)
T1
IG-02111
(1) Spark plug (2) Ignition coil Tightening torque:N·m (kgf-m, ft-lb)
T1: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
T2: 21 (2.1, 15.5)
IG(H4DOTC)-2
General Description
IGNITION
C: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
IG(H4DOTC)-3
Spark Plug
IGNITION
2. Spark Plug NOTE:

Turn #4 ignition coil by 180 degrees to remove it.
A: REMOVAL
Spark plug:
Refer to “SPECIFICATION” for the spark
plug. <Ref. to IG(H4DOTC)-2, SPECIFICA-
TION, General Description.>
1. RH SIDE
IG-02100

B: INSTALLATION
1. RH SIDE
IG-02107 21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.5 ft-lb)
2) Remove the air cleaner case. <Ref. to Tightening torque (Ignition coil):
IN(H4DOTC)-8, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner Case.> 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
3) Disconnect the connector from ignition coil.
4) Remove the ignition coil. 2. LH SIDE
NOTE: Install in the reverse order of removal.
Turn #3 ignition coil by 180 degrees to remove it. Tightening torque (Spark plug):
21 N·m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.5 ft-lb)
Tightening torque (Ignition coil):
16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the spark plug for abnormalities. If defec-
tive, replace the spark plug.
(C)
IG-02099

2. LH SIDE
1) Remove the battery. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-25,
REMOVAL, Battery.> (A)
2) Disconnect the connector from ignition coil.
3) Remove the ignition coil. (B) IG-02094
(A) Terminal damage

(B) Crack or damage in insulator
(C) Damaged gasket
2) Check the spark plug electrode and condition of

the insulator. If abnormal, check and repair the
cause and replace the spark plug.
IG(H4DOTC)-4
Spark Plug
IGNITION
(1) Normal: (4) Overheating:

Brown to grayish-tan deposits and slight elec- White or light gray insulator with black or brown
trode wear indicate correct spark plug heat spots and bluish burnt electrodes indicate en-
range. gine overheating, wrong selection of fuel, or
loose spark plugs.
IG-00011
IG-00014
(2) Carbon fouled:
Dry fluffy carbon deposits on insulator and elec- 3) Using a nylon brush, etc., clean and remove the
trode are mostly caused by slow speed driving carbon or oxide deposits from the spark plug. If de-
in the city, weak ignition, too rich fuel mixture, posits are too stubborn, replace the spark plugs.
etc. After cleaning the spark plugs, check the spark
plug gap “L” using a gap gauge. If it is not within the
standard, replace the spark plug.
NOTE:
• Never use a plug cleaner.
• Do not use a metal brush as it may damage the
electrode area.
Spark plug gap L:
Standard
0.7 — 0.8 mm (0.028 — 0.031 in)
IG-00012
(3) Oil fouled:

Wet black deposits show oil entrance into com-
bustion chamber through worn piston rings or L
increased clearance between valve guides and
valve stems.
IG-02095
IG-00013
IG(H4DOTC)-5
Ignition Coil
IGNITION
3. Ignition Coil
A: REMOVAL
Direct ignition type has been adopted. Refer to
“Spark Plug”, “REMOVAL” for removal procedures.
<Ref. to IG(H4DOTC)-4, REMOVAL, Spark Plug.>
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
For inspection procedure, refer to “Diagnostics for
Engine Starting Failure”. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(di-
ag)-71, IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM, Diagnos-
tics for Engine Starting Failure.>
IG(H4DOTC)-6
SC(H4DOTC)
Page
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Specifications for the turbo model are included in
the SC(H4SO) section. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-2, Gen-
eral Description.>
SC(H4DOTC)-2
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)
Page
1. Basic Diagnostic Procedure .......................................................................2
2. Check List for Interview ..............................................................................4
4. Electrical Component Location ..................................................................9
5. Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal ................................................18
6. Engine Condition Data .............................................................................29
7. Data Link Connector ................................................................................30
8. General Scan Tool ...................................................................................31
9. Subaru Select Monitor ..............................................................................36
10. Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) .....................................................42
11. Inspection Mode .......................................................................................43
12. Drive Cycle ...............................................................................................48
13. Clear Memory Mode .................................................................................54
14. System Operation Check Mode ...............................................................55
15. Malfunction Indicator Light .......................................................................56
16. Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure ....................................................65
17. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....................................................76
18. Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....................84
19. General Diagnostic Table .......................................................................332

1. Basic Diagnostic Procedure

A: PROCEDURE
1. ENGINE
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE START FAILURE. Does the engine start? Go to step 2. Inspection using
1) Ask the customer when and how the trouble “Diagnostics for
occurred using the interview check list. <Ref. to Engine Start Fail-
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-4, CHECK, Check List for ure”. <Ref. to
Interview.> EN(H4DOTC)(diag
2) Start the engine. )-65, Diagnostics
for Engine Starting
Failure.>
2 CHECK ILLUMINATION OF MALFUNCTION Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 3. Inspection using
INDICATOR LIGHT. light illuminate? “General Diagnos-
tic Table”. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-332, General
Diagnostic Table.>
3 CHECK COMMUNICATION STATUS. Does Subaru Select Monitor or Go to step 4. Inspection using
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. general scan tool communicate LAN system “Diag-
2) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor or gen- with vehicle normally? nostic Procedure
eral scan tool to data link connector. with Diagnostic
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and run the Trouble Code
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool. (DTC)”. <Ref. to
NOTE: LAN(diag)-48,
• Subaru Select Monitor COMMUNICA-
For detailed procedures, refer to “Subaru Select TION FOR INI-
Monitor”. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Sub- TIALIZING
aru Select Monitor.> IMPOSSIBLE,
• General scan tool Diagnostic Proce-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the dure with Diagnos-
general scan tool operation manual. tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
4 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed on Subaru Record the DTC. Repair the related
Read DTC using Subaru Select Monitor or gen- Select Monitor or general scan Repair the trouble parts.
eral scan tool. tool? cause. <Ref. to NOTE:
NOTE: EN(H4DOTC)(diag If DTC is not
• Subaru Select Monitor )-76, List of Diag- shown on display
Refer to “Read Diagnostic Trouble Code” for nostic Trouble although the mal-
detailed operation procedure. <Ref. to Code (DTC).> Go function indicator
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-42, Read Diagnostic Trou- to step 5. light illuminates,
ble Code (DTC).> perform the diag-
• General scan tool nosis of malfunc-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tion indicator light
general scan tool operation manual. circuit or combina-
tion meter. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(di-
ag)-56, Malfunc-
tion Indicator
Light.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2

Step Check Yes No

5 CHECK FREEZE FRAME DATA. Is freeze frame data displayed Record the freeze Go to step 6.
Check the freeze frame data using the Subaru on Subaru Select Monitor or frame data. Repair
Select Monitor or general scan tool. general scan tool? the cause of fault,
NOTE: and go to the next
• Subaru Select Monitor step. Go to step 6.
For detailed procedures, refer to “Subaru Select
Monitor”. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Sub-
aru Select Monitor.>
6 PERFORM DIAGNOSIS. Is DTC displayed on Subaru Inspect using Finish the diagno-
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to Select Monitor or general scan “Diagnostic Proce- sis.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-54, Clear Memory Mode.> tool? dure with Diagnos-
2) Perform the Inspection Mode or drive cycle. tic Trouble Code
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-43, Inspection (DTC)”. <Ref. to
Mode.> <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-48, Drive EN(H4DOTC)(diag
Cycle.> )-84, Diagnostic
Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-3

2. Check List for Interview

A: CHECK
1. CHECK LIST NO. 1
Check the following item when problem has occurred.
NOTE:
Customer’s name Engine No.
Date of purchase Fuel type
Date of repair km
Odometer reading
V.I.N. miles
Weather Fine
Cloudy
Rainy
Snowy
Various/Others:
Ambient air temperature °C (°F)
Hot
Warm
Cool
Cold
Place Highway
Suburbs
Inner city
Uphill
Downhill
Rough road
Others:
Engine temperature Cold
Warming-up
After warming-up
Any temperature
Others:
Engine speed rpm
Driving conditions Not affected
At starting
While idling
At racing
While accelerating
While cruising
While decelerating
While turning (RH/LH)
Headlight ON/ OFF Rear defogger ON/ OFF
Blower ON/ OFF Audio ON/ OFF
A/C compressor ON/ OFF Rear entertainment system ON/ OFF
Radiator fan ON/ OFF Car phone ON/ OFF
Front wiper ON/ OFF Wireless device ON/ OFF
Rear wiper ON/ OFF
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-4

2. CHECK LIST NO. 2

Check the following item about the vehicle’s state when malfunction indicator light illuminates.
NOTE:
a) Other warning lights or indicators turn on. Yes / No
Low fuel warning light
Charge indicator light
Engine coolant temperature indicator light
Oil pressure warning light
ATF temperature indicator light or SPORT indicator light
Drivers control center differential indicator light
ABS warning light
VDC warning light
Cruise indicator light
SI-CRUISE warning light
Immobilizer indicator light
STEERING indicator light
Glow indicator light
Sedimentor warning light
Others:
b) Fuel level
• Lack of gasoline: Yes / No
• Indicator position of fuel gauge:
• Experienced running out of fuel: Yes / No
c) Intentional connecting or disconnecting of harness connectors or spark plug cords: Yes / No
• What:
d) Intentional connecting or disconnecting of hoses: Yes / No
• What:
e) Installing of parts other than genuine parts: Yes / No
• What:
• Where:
f) Occurrence of noise: Yes / No
• From where:
• What kind:
g) Occurrence of smell: Yes / No
• From where:
• What kind:
h) Intrusion of water into engine compartment or passenger compartment: Yes / No
i) Troubles occurred
Engine does not start.
Engine stalls during idling.
Engine stalls while driving.
Engine speed decreases.
Engine speed does not decrease.
Rough idling
Poor acceleration
Back fire
After fire
Does not shift.
Excessive shift shock
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-5
General Description
3. General Description 7) Use ECM mounting stud bolts at the body side
grounding point when measuring voltage and resis-
A: CAUTION tance inside the passenger compartment.
1) Airbag system wiring harness is routed near the
ECM, main relay and fuel pump relay.
CAUTION:
• Do not use electrical test equipment on the
airbag system circuit.
• Be careful not to damage the airbag system
wiring harness when servicing the ECM, TCM, (A)
main relay and fuel pump relay.
2) Never connect the battery in reverse polarity.
Doing so will damage the ECM instantly, and other EN-07713
parts will also be damaged.
(A) Stud bolt
3) Do not disconnect the battery terminals while the
engine is running. A large counter electromotive 8) Use the engine ground terminal or engine as-
force will be generated in the generator, and this sembly as the grounding point to chassis when
voltage may damage electronic parts such as ECM measuring the voltage and resistance in engine
etc. compartment.
4) Before disconnecting the connectors of each
sensor and ECM, be sure to turn the ignition switch
to OFF. Perform the Clear Memory Mode after con-
necting the connectors. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(di-
ag)-54, Clear Memory Mode.>
5) When measuring the voltage or resistance of in-
dividual sensor or all electrical control modules,
use a tapered pin with a diameter of less than 0.6
mm (0.024 in). Do not insert the pin 4 mm (0.16 in)
or more into the part.
EN-07823
CAUTION:
When replacing the ECM, be careful not to use 9) Every MFI-related part is a precision part. Do not
the wrong spec. ECM to avoid any damage on drop them.
the fuel injection system. 10) Observe the following cautions when installing
NOTE: a radio in vehicle.
When replacing the ECM of the models with Immo- CAUTION:
bilizer, immobilizer system must be registered. To • The antenna must be kept as far apart as pos-
do so, all ignition keys and ID cards need to be pre- sible from control module. (ECM is installed at
pared. For detailed operation procedures, refer to the back of the glove box.)
“PC application help for Subaru Select Monitor”. • The antenna feeder must be placed as far
6) Take care not to allow water to get into the con- apart as possible from the ECM and engine
nectors when servicing or washing the vehicle in control system harness.
rainy weather. Avoid exposure to water even if the • Carefully adjust the antenna for correct
connectors are waterproof. matching.
• When mounting a large power type radio, pay
special attention to the three items mentioned
above.
• Incorrect installation of the radio may affect
the operation of ECM.
11) When disconnecting the fuel hose, release the
fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEAS-
ING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-6
General Description
12) For the model with ABS, the ABS warning light • The OBD system stores freeze frame engine
may illuminate when performing driving test with condition data (engine load, engine coolant tem-
jacked-up or lifted-up condition, but this is not a perature, fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
system malfunction. The reason for this is the speed, etc.) into on-board computer when it detects
speed difference between the front and rear a malfunction.
wheels. When engine control system diagnosis is • Freeze frame engine condition data are stored
finished, perform the VDC memory clearance pro- until the DTCs are cleared. However when such
cedure of self-diagnosis function. <Ref. to VDC(di- malfunctions as fuel trim fault and misfire are de-
ag)-25, Clear Memory Mode.> tected with the freeze frame engine condition data
stored, they are rewritten into those related to the
B: INSPECTION fuel trim fault and misfire.
Before performing diagnostics, check the following • When the malfunction does not occur again for
item which might affect engine problems. three consecutive driving cycles, malfunction indi-
1. BATTERY cator light is turned off, but DTC remains at on-
board computer.
1) Measure the battery voltage and specific gravity • When performing diagnosis, connect the Subaru
of the electrolyte. Select Monitor or general scan tool to the vehicle.
Standard voltage: 12 V
Specific gravity: 1.260 or more
2) Check the condition of the main and other fuses,
and harnesses and connectors. Also check for
proper grounding.
2. ENGINE GROUND
Make sure that the engine ground terminal is prop-
erly connected to the engine.
EN-07823
C: NOTE
• The on-board diagnostic (OBD) system detects
and indicates a fault in various inputs and outputs
of the complex electronic control. Malfunction indi-
cator light in the combination meter indicates oc-
currence of a fault or trouble.
• Further, against such a failure of sensors as may
disable the drive, the fail-safe function is provided
to ensure the minimal driveability.
• The OBD system incorporated with the vehicles
within this type of engine complies with OBD-II reg-
ulations. The OBD system monitors the compo-
nents and the system malfunction listed in “Engine
Section” which affects on emissions.
• When the system decides that a malfunction oc-
curs, malfunction indicator light illuminates. At the
same time of the malfunction indicator light illumi-
nation or blinking, a DTC and a freeze frame en-
gine conditions are stored into on-board computer.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-7
General Description
D: PREPARATION TOOL
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
SOCKET
ST-499987500
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-8

4. Electrical Component Location

A: LOCATION
1. CONTROL MODULE
(1)
(3) (4) (2)

EN-07794
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Delivery (test) mode fuse (4) Data link connector
(2) Malfunction indicator light
(1)
CHECK
ENGINE
CHECK
ENGINE (2)
EN-07715 EN-07716
(3)
(4)
EN-07511 EN-07717
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-9

2. SENSOR
(8) (5) (1) (2) (4) (3) (5) (9)
(9) (6) (7) (6)

EN-07795
(1) Manifold absolute pressure sen- (4) Knock sensor (7) Crankshaft position sensor
sor
(2) Engine coolant temperature sen- (5) Intake camshaft position sensor (8) Mass air flow and intake air tem-
sor perature sensor
(3) Electronic throttle control (6) Exhaust camshaft position sensor (9) Tumble generator valve ASSY
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-10

(1)
(2)
EN-07751 EN-07747
(3)
(4)
EN-07756 EN-07748
(5)
(6)
EN-01798 EN-01929
(7)
(8)
EN-07862 EN-07749
(9)
EN-04992
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-11

(1)
(2)
(3) (4)
EN-07742
(1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (3) Rear oxygen sensor (4) Rear catalytic converter
(2) Front catalytic converter
(3)
(1)
EN-08536
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-12

(1) (2) (3)
(4)
EN-07796
(1) Fuel level sensor (3) Fuel tank pressure sensor (4) Fuel sub level sensor
(2) Fuel temperature sensor
(3)
(1)
(2)
EN-07725 EN-07719
(4)
EN-07720
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-13

3. SOLENOID VALVE, ACTUATOR, EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PARTS AND IGNITION

SYSTEM PARTS
(3) (4) (2) (7) (3) (4) (7) (3)
(5) (1) (6) (5)

EN-07797
(1) Wastegate control solenoid valve (4) Intake oil flow control solenoid (6) Tumble generator valve ASSY
valve
(2) Purge control solenoid valve 1 (5) Exhaust oil flow control solenoid (7) Purge control solenoid valve 2
valve
(3) Ignition coil
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-14

(2) (7)
(1)
EN-07758 EN-07755
(3)
(4)
EN-01936 EN-01937
(6)
(5)
EN-07762 EN-07754
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-15

(6) (5) (4) (3) (2)
(11)
(7) (8) (9) (1)

(10) (12) (13) (14) EN-07798
(1) Starter (6) Fuel pump relay (11) Pressure control solenoid valve
(2) Fuel pump (7) Radiator main fan relay 1 (12) Canister
(3) Main relay (8) Radiator main fan relay 2 (13) Drain valve
(4) A/F, oxygen sensor relay (9) Radiator sub fan relay (14) Drain filter
(5) Electronic throttle control relay (10) Starter relay
(2)
(1)
EN-07519 EN-07753
(3)
(4)
(8)
(5)
(7)
(6)
(9)
EN-07726 EN-07521
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-16

(11)
(10)
EN-07727 EN-07825
(14)
(13)
(12)
EN-07723
4. TRANSMISSION
(1)
EN-07524
(1) Neutral position switch
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-17

5. Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

TO A: B134 TO B: B135 TO C: B136 TO D: B137
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 31 30 29 28 27 26
EN-05288
Termi- Signal (V)

Connector
No.
Crankshaft Signal (+) B137 17 0 –7 — +7 Waveform
Signal (+) B136 19 2.8 — 3.2 2.8 — 3.2 —
Front oxygen
Signal (–) B136 18 2.4 — 2.7 2.4 — 2.7 —
(A/F) sensor
Shield B136 9 0 0 —
Signal B136 20 0 0 — 0.9 —
Rear oxygen Shield B136 9 0 0 —
sensor Ground
B135 30 0 0 —
(sensor)
Front oxygen Signal 1 B136 6 — — Waveform
(A/F) sensor
heater Signal 2 B136 5 — — Waveform
Rear oxygen sensor heater
B135 6 0 — 13 — Waveform
signal
Engine cool- Signal B137 22 1.0 — 1.4 1.0 — 1.4 After engine is warmed up.
ant tempera- Ground
ture sensor B134 29 0 0 After engine is warmed up.
(sensor)
Signal B136 22 — 0.3 — 4.5 —
Air flow sensor Shield B136 10 0 0 —
Ground B136 11 0 0 —
Intake air temperature sen-
B136 31 0.3 — 4.6 0.3 — 4.6 —
sor signal
Wastegate control solenoid
B134 33 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 Waveform
valve
Starter switch B136 16 0 0 Cranking: 8 — 14
Ignition switch B136 30 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
ON: 0 ON: 0
Neutral position switch B136 35 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-18

Termi- Signal (V)

Connector
No.
Delivery (test) mode switch B136 34 10 — 13 12 — 14 When fuse is installed: 0
Signal B137 2 2.8 2.8 —
Knock sensor
Shield B137 8 0 0 —
Ignition switch “OFF”: 10
Back-up power supply B136 2 10 — 13 12 — 14
— 13
Control module power sup- B137 7 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
ply B136 1 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
B134 19 5 5 —
Sensor power supply
B135 22 5 5 —
#1 B134 21 0 0 or 5 Waveform
#2 B134 22 0 0 or 5 Waveform
Ignition control
#3 B134 31 0 0 or 5 Waveform
#4 B134 32 0 0 or 5 Waveform
#1 B134 10 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
#2 B134 11 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
Fuel injector
#3 B134 12 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
#4 B134 13 10 — 13 1 — 14 Waveform
Control B136 33 0 or 5 0 or 5 Waveform
Fuel pump
control unit Diagnostic
B135 10 0 or 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
signal
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Light “ON”: 1 or less
Malfunction indicator light B135 33 — —
Light “OFF”: 10 — 14
Engine speed output B135 15 — 0 — 13 or more Waveform
Purge control solenoid valve 1 B137 6 Waveform
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Purge control solenoid valve 2 B137 15 Waveform
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Signal B137 20 1.7 — 2.4 1.1 — 1.6
Manifold abso- Power
B134 19 5 5
lute pressure supply —
sensor Ground
B134 29 0 0
(sensor)
SSM communication B135 14 1 or less ←→ 4 or more —
more
Main B134 18 (After engine is (After engine is
warmed up.) warmed up.)
Electronic Sub B134 28 (After engine is (After engine is
Throttle warmed up.) warmed up.)
Power
B134 19 5 5 —
supply
Ground
B134 29 0 0 —
(sensor)
motor (+)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-19

Termi- Signal (V)

Connector
No.
motor (–)
B135 7 10 — 13 12 — 14 —
motor power supply
Electronic throttle control ON: 0 ON: 0 When ignition switch is
B135 17
motor relay OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14 turned to ON: ON
Intake oil flow ON: 10 — 13 ON: 12 — 14
Signal (+) B134 17 —
control sole- OFF: 0 OFF: 0
noid valve (LH) Signal (–) B134 16 0 0 —
Intake oil flow ON: 10 — 13 ON: 12 — 14
Signal (+) B134 34 —
control sole- OFF: 0 OFF: 0
noid valve
(RH) Signal (–) B134 27 0 0 —
Exhaust oil ON: 10 — 13 ON: 12 — 14
Signal (+) B134 5 —
flow control OFF: 0 OFF: 0
solenoid valve
(LH) Signal (–) B134 14 0 0 —
Exhaust oil ON: 10 — 13 ON: 12 — 14
Signal (+) B134 7 —
flow control OFF: 0 OFF: 0
solenoid valve
(RH) Signal (–) B134 15 0 0 —
Intake camshaft position
B137 16 0 or 5 0 or 5 Waveform
sensor (LH)
Intake camshaft position
sensor (RH)
Exhaust camshaft position
sensor (LH)
Exhaust camshaft position
sensor (RH)
Camshaft position sensor
B137 30 0 0 —
ground
Main sen- Fully closed: 1 Fully closed: 1
B135 23 —
Shield B136 4 0 0 —
Main
power sup- B135 21 5 5 —
ply
Ground
Accelerator
(main sen- B135 29 0 0 —
pedal position
sor)
sensor
Sub signal Fully closed: 1 Fully closed: 1
B135 31 —
sensor Fully opened: 3.3 Fully opened: 3.3
Sub power
B135 22 5 5 —
supply
Ground
(sub sen- B135 30 0 0 —
sor)
ON: 0 ON: 0
Starter relay B135 26 ON: cranking
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
depressed: 0 depressed: 0
Clutch switch B135 9 —
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-20

Termi- Signal (V)

Connector
No.
Brake switch 1 depressed: 0 depressed: 0
B136 15 —
(brake switch) When brake pedal is When brake pedal is
Brake switch 2 depressed: 10 — 13 depressed: 12 — 14
B136 3 —
(stop light switch) When brake pedal is When brake pedal is
released: 0 released: 0
When operating
When operating noth- nothing: 3.5 — 4.5
ing: 3.5 — 4.5 When operating
When operating RES/ RES/ACC: 2.5 —
ACC: 2.5 — 3.5 3.5
When operating vehicle When operating
Cruise control command
B136 12 distance setting: 1.5 — vehicle distance set- —
switch
2.5 ting: 1.5 — 2.5
When operating SET/ When operating
COAST: 0.5 — 1.5 SET/COAST: 0.5 —
When operating CAN- 1.5
CEL: 0 — 0.5 When operating
CANCEL: 0 — 0.5
ON: 0 ON: 0
Cruise control main switch B136 13 —
OFF: 5 OFF: 5
CAN commu- (Hi) B136 17 — — —
nication (Lo) B136 28 — — —
Self-shutoff control B135 13 0 0 —
Power steering oil pressure ON: 0
B137 28 10 — 13 —
switch OFF: 12 — 14
Oil level switch B136 26 0 0 Oil level LOW: 10 — 14
Fully closed: Fully closed:
Tumble generator valve 0.43 — 1.19 0.43 — 1.19
B137 11 —
position sensor signal (RH) Fully opened: Fully opened:
2.83 — 4.69 2.83 — 4.69
Fully closed: Fully closed:
Tumble generator valve 0.43 — 1.19 0.43 — 1.19
B137 10 —
position sensor signal (LH) Fully opened: Fully opened:
2.83 — 4.69 2.83 — 4.69
Tumble generator valve (RH
B134 26 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 —
closed)
Tumble generator valve (LH
B134 24 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 —
closed)
Tumble generator valve (RH
B134 25 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 —
open)
Tumble generator valve (LH
B134 23 0 or 10 — 13 0 or 12 — 14 —
open)
Immobilizer communication B135 25 — — —
Fuel tank pressure sensor B136 21 2.3 — 2.7 2.3 — 2.7 —
Pressure control solenoid ON: 1 or less ON: 1 or less
B135 3 —
valve OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Drain valve B135 4 —
OFF: 10 — 13 OFF: 12 — 14
Ambient temperature:
Fuel temperature sensor B136 23 2.5 — 3.8 2.5 — 3.8
25°C (77°F)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-21

Termi- Signal (V)

Connector
No.
B134 29 0 0 —
Sensor
B135 30 0 0 —
Engine 1 B134 6 0 0 —
Engine 2 B134 4 0 0 —
Ground
Engine 3 B134 3 0 0 —
Engine 4 B137 1 0 0 —
Engine 5 B137 3 0 0 —
Body B136 4 0 0 —
Input/output name:
• Crankshaft position sensor
• Intake camshaft position sensor RH
• Intake camshaft position sensor LH
• Exhaust camshaft position sensor RH
• Exhaust camshaft position sensor LH
• After warming-up
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-22

• At idling
CRANKSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR 0
ONE CRANKSHAFT ROTATION
INTAKE CAMSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR RH 0
ONE CAMSHAFT ROTATION
INTAKE CAMSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR LH 0
EXHAUST CAMSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR RH 0
EXHAUST CAMSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR LH 0
10 ms
5V
EN-07431
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-23

F/B FUSE No. 4
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
B9
C2
M/B FUSE No. 12
CLUTCH SWITCH
STARTER MOTOR
B14
C16
C34
IGNITION SWITCH
B26 DELIVERY (TEST)
F/B FUSE No. 21 MODE FUSE
STARTER
CLUTCH STROKE SENSOR
RELAY
(CLUTCH START SWITCH)
C4
JOINT CONNECTOR
1
1
NEUTRAL B23
POSITION
SWITCH
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
B21
POSITION SENSOR
C35
B31
C30
F/B FUSE No. 12
FUEL PUMP
B29
RELAY
C33
FUEL PUMP
M/B FUSE No. 20 CONTROL UNIT B10 B22
JOINT
CONNECTOR
FUEL
TEMPER- B30
ATURE
SENSOR
FUEL PUMP
8 2
C23
2 3 4 5 6 7
EN-07799
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-24

M/B FUSE No. 13

8
CONTROL RELAY
M/B FUSE No. 16
F/B FUSE No. 7
ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE
F/B FUSE No. 5
M/B FUSE No. 15
A21
B7 IGNITION
COIL No. 1
B17
A/F, OXYGEN
SENSOR
RELAY
RELAY
MAIN
A22 IGNITION
COIL No. 2
A31
IGNITION
B13 COIL No. 3
A32
IGNITION
COIL No. 4
C1 11
D7
PURGE CONTROL D6
SOLENOID VALVE 1
PURGE CONTROL D15

SOLENOID VALVE 2
B33
(CAN COMMUNICATION)
INTEGRATED UNIT
BODY
COMBINATION METER
INTAKE D16
CAMSHAFT POSITION
SENSOR LH
B15
D24
INTAKE
CAMSHAFT POSITION D30
SENSOR RH
POWER STEERING
OIL PRESSURE
D29 SWITCH
EXHAUST
CAMSHAFT POSITION
SENSOR LH D28
D23
EXHAUST
CAMSHAFT POSITION
SENSOR RH
C26
9 10 OIL LEVEL
SWITCH
EN-08614
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-25

10 6
FUEL INJECTOR A10

No. 1
A18
FUEL INJECTOR A11

No. 2
A28
A12 ELECTRONIC
FUEL INJECTOR
THROTTLE
No. 3 13 CONTROL
A1
A2
FUEL INJECTOR A13

No. 4 A19
WASTEGATE CONTROL A33

SOLENOID VALVE
D20 MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE
A29 SENSOR
3
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
MASS AIR FLOW &
C31
D22
INTAKE AIR
C11 ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
C22 SENSOR
C10
12 14 15
EN-08615
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-26

15 14
9
C5 A23 TUMBLE
C6 GENERATOR
FRONT A24 VALVE ASSY
OXYGEN
C18 LH
(A/F)
SENSOR D10
C19
C9
5
C20 A25 TUMBLE
GENERATOR
REAR A26 VALVE ASSY
OXYGEN 16 RH
SENSOR
D11
B6
INTAKE
A17
OIL FLOW
CONTROL
A16 SOLENOID VALVE
LH
INTAKE
A34
OIL FLOW
CONTROL
A27 SOLENOID VALVE
A5
RH
EXHAUST OIL FLOW
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE LH A14
D17
CRANKSHAFT
D25 POSITION SENSOR
A7
EXHAUST OIL FLOW D31
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE RH A15
13
KNOCK SENSOR
D2
D8
13
EN-08616
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-27

12 4 7
FUEL TANK
C3 C21 PRESSURE SENSOR
STOP LIGHT SWITCH
B3
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
C15 B4
BRAKE SWITCH
DRAIN VALVE
BODY INTEGRATED UNIT B25

(IMMOBILIZER) C13
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
C17 C12
BODY INTEGRATED UNIT
(CAN COMMUNICATION)
C28
11 16 13
A3
B11
SUB FAN RELAY
D1
A6
D3
A4
B12
MAIN FAN RELAY
ENGINE GROUND ENGINE GROUND
EN-08617
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-28
Engine Condition Data

6. Engine Condition Data

Remarks Specification
17.6 — 35.64 (%): Idling
Engine load
13.2 — 26.73 (%): 2,500 rpm racing
• After engine is warmed up.
• Place the shift lever in neutral position.
• Turn the A/C to OFF.
• Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-29
Data Link Connector

7. Data Link Connector

A: NOTE
This connector is used for Subaru Select Monitor.
CAUTION:
Do not connect any scan tools other than Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool because the cir-
cuit for Subaru Select Monitor may be damaged.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
EN-07824
Terminal No. Contents Terminal No. Contents

1 Empty 9 Empty
2 Empty 10 Empty
3 Empty 11 Empty
4 Ground 12 Empty
5 Ground 13 Empty
6 CAN communication (Hi) 14 CAN communication (Lo)
7 Subaru Select Monitor signal 15 Empty
8 Empty 16 Power supply
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-30
General Scan Tool

8. General Scan Tool

A: OPERATION
1. HOW TO USE GENERAL SCAN TOOL
1) Prepare a scan tool (general scan tool) required
by SAE J1978.
2) Connect the general scan tool to data link con-
nector located in the lower portion of the instrument
panel (on the driver’s side).
EN-07712
3) Using the general scan tool, call up each data.

General scan tool functions consist of:
(1) MODE $01: Current powertrain diagnostic
data
(2) MODE $02: Powertrain freeze frame data
(3) MODE $03: Emission-related powertrain
DTC
(4) MODE $04: Clear/Reset emission-related
diagnostic information
test results for intermittently monitored systems
test results for continuously monitored systems
(7) MODE $09: Request vehicle information
4) Read out the data according to repair proce-
dures. (For detailed operation procedure, refer to
the general scan tool operation manual.)
NOTE:
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-76, List of Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-31
General Scan Tool

2. MODE $01 (CURRENT POWERTRAIN DIAGNOSTIC DATA)

Refer to data denoting the current operating condition of analog input/output, digital input/output or the pow-
ertrain system.
Number of emission-related powertrain DTC, and malfunction indicator light status and diag-
$01 —
nosis support information
$15 Oxygen sensor output voltage and short term fuel trim associated with oxygen sensor V and %
$21 Running distance after MIL turns on miles
$24 A/F value and A/F sensor output voltage – and V
$2F Fuel level %
$30 Number of warm ups after DTC clear —
$31 Travel distance after DTC clear miles
$33 Atmospheric pressure kPa
$34 A/F sensor λ value, current – and mA
$3C Catalytic temperature °C
$41 Diagnostic monitor of each drive cycle —
$43 Absolute load %
$49 Absolute acceleration opening angle 1 %
$4A Absolute acceleration opening angle 2 %
$4D Engine operation time during MIL on min
$4E Elapsed time after DTC clear min
$51 Fuel used —
$5A Relative acceleration opening angle %
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruction manual to access the generic OBD-II PID (MODE $01).
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-32
General Scan Tool

3. MODE $02 (POWERTRAIN FREEZE FRAME DATA)

Refer to data denoting the operating condition when trouble is sensed by the on-board diagnosis system.
$02 DTC that caused the freeze frame data storage required by CARB —
$15 Rear oxygen sensor voltage, compensation value V and %
$2F Fuel level %
$33 Atmospheric pressure kPa
$43 Absolute load %
$49 Absolute acceleration opening angle 1 %
$4A Absolute acceleration opening angle 2 %
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s operation manual to access freeze frame data (MODE $02).
4. MODE $03 (EMISSION-RELATED POWERTRAIN DTC)
Refer to “List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)” for information about data denoting emission-related pow-
ertrain DTC. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-76, List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
5. MODE $04 (CLEAR/RESET EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION)
Refer to the mode used to clear or reset emission-related diagnostic information (OBD-II trouble diagnostic
information).
NOTE:
• Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruction manual to clear the emission-related diagnostic in-
formation (MODE $04).
• Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is performed after memory clearance. Wait for 10 seconds or
more after turning the ignition switch to ON, and then start the engine.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-33
General Scan Tool

6. MODE $06
Refer to test value of troubleshooting and data of test limit indicated on the support data bit sequence table.
A list of the support data is shown in the following table.
OBDMID TID SID Diagnostic item
$81 $0A
$82 $8D A/F sensor continuity failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$83 $14
$01
$84 $1E
A/F sensor range failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$85 $1E
$86 $20 A/F sensor response failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$87 $0B
Oxygen sensor circuit failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$88 $0B
$07 $0B
$02 $08 $0B Oxygen sensor drop failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$A5 $0B
$05 $10
Oxygen sensor response failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$06 $10
$21 $89 $20 Catalyst deterioration diagnosis (Bank 1)
$8B $9D
$8C $9D
$35 VVT monitor bank 1
$8D $9D
$8E $9D
$8B $9D
$8C $9D
$36 VVT monitor bank 2
$8D $9D
$8E $9D
$39 $93 $FE Evaporative emission control system leak detected (Fuel filler cap off)
$94 $FE
$3B $95 $FE Evaporative emission control system (0.04 inch leak)
$A6 $FE
$96 $FE
$3C Evaporative emission control system (0.02 inch leak)
$97 $FE
$3D $98 $FE Evaporative emission control system (Purge flow)
$99 $24
A/F sensor heater failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$41 $9A $24
$9B $14 A/F sensor heater characteristics failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$9C $24
$42 Oxygen sensor heater failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$9D $24
$0B $24
$A1 Misfire monitoring (All cylinders)
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34
General Scan Tool

7. MODE $07
Refer to the data of DTC (pending code) for troubleshooting result about emission in the first time.
8. MODE $09
Refer to the data of vehicle specification (V.I.N., calibration ID, etc.).
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-35

9. Subaru Select Monitor

A: OPERATION
1. HOW TO USE THE SUBARU SELECT MONITOR
NOTE:
For detailed operation procedures, refer to “PC application help for Subaru Select Monitor”.
2. READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE)
NOTE:
• *: For models without cruise control, the brake switch signal does not change.
Unit of mea-
sure
Engine load Engine Load % 21.0%
Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp. °C or °F 80 — 100°C or 176 — 212°F
A/F correction #1 A/F Correction #1 % –10 — +10%
A/F learning #1 A/F Learning #1 % –15 — +15%
220 — 275 mmHg, 29.5 — 37
mmHg, kPa,
Intake manifold absolute pressure Mani. Absolute Pressure kPa, 8.7 — 10 inHg or 4.2 —
inHg or psig
5.3 psig
630 — 770 rpm (Agree with
the tachometer indication)
Meter vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed km/h or MPH 0 km/h or 0 MPH (at parking)
Ignition timing signal Ignition Timing deg 10 — 15 deg
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. °C or °F 20 — 50°C or 68 — 122°F
2.1 — 3.1 g/s or 0.35 — 0.40
Intake air amount Mass Air Flow g/s or lb/m
lb/m
Throttle opening angle signal Throttle Opening Angle % 2.0 — 2.4%
Rear oxygen sensor voltage Rear O2 Sensor V 0 — 1.0 V
Battery voltage Battery Voltage V 12 — 15 V
Mass air flow voltage Air Flow Sensor Voltage V 1.0 — 1.7 V
Injection 1 pulse width Fuel Injection #1 Pulse ms 1.2 — 2.2 ms
mmHg, kPa,
Atmospheric pressure Atmosphere Pressure —
inHg or psig
mmHg, kPa, Air intake absolute pressure
Intake manifold relative pressure Mani. Relative Pressure
inHg or psig — Atmospheric pressure
Learned ignition timing Learned Ignition Timing deg 0 deg
Acceleration opening angle signal Accel. Opening Angle % 0.0%
Fuel temperature signal Fuel Temp. °C or °F +28°C or 82°F
Primary supercharged pressure control signal Primary Control % 0.0%
Purge control solenoid duty ratio CPC Valve Duty Ratio % 0 — 25%
Tumble generator valve RH opening signal TGV Position Sensor R V 0.81 V
Tumble generator valve LH opening signal TGV Position Sensor L V 0.81 V
Fuel pump duty ratio Fuel Pump Duty % 30 — 40%
AVCS advance angle amount RH VVT Adv. Ang. Amount R deg ±5 deg
AVCS advance angle amount LH VVT Adv. Ang. Amount L deg ±5 deg
Oil flow control solenoid valve duty ratio RH OCV Duty R % 0 — 20%
Oil flow control solenoid valve duty ratio LH OCV Duty L % 0 — 20%
Oil flow control solenoid valve current RH OCV Current R mA 40 — 100 mA
Oil flow control solenoid valve current LH OCV Current L mA 40 — 100 mA
A/F sensor current value 1 A/F Sensor #1 Current mA –20 — 20 mA
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36

Unit of mea-
sure
A/F sensor resistance value 1 A/F Sensor #1 Resistance Ω 27 — 35 mA
A/F sensor output lambda 1 A/F Sensor #1 — 1.0
A/F correction #3 A/F Correction #3 % 0.00%
Throttle motor duty Throttle Motor Duty % –5%
Throttle motor voltage Throttle Motor Voltage V 12 — 15 V
Sub throttle sensor voltage Sub-Throttle Sensor V 1.5 V
Main throttle sensor voltage Main-Throttle Sensor V 0.6 V
Sub accelerator sensor voltage Sub-Accelerator Sensor V 1.1 V
Main acceleration sensor voltage Main-Accelerator Sensor V 1.0 V
Memory vehicle speed Memorized Cruise Speed km/h or MPH —
Fuel level sensor resistance Fuel level resistance Ω 4 — 96 Ω
Odometer Odometer km —
Exhaust AVCS retard angle amount RH Exh. VVT Retard Ang. R deg ±5 deg
Exhaust AVCS retard angle amount LH Exh. VVT Retard Ang. L deg ±5 deg
Exhaust oil flow control solenoid valve duty ratio RH Exh. OCV Duty R % 0 — 20%
Exhaust oil flow control solenoid valve duty ratio LH Exh. OCV Duty L % 0 — 20%
Exhaust oil flow control solenoid valve current value
Exh. OCV Current R mA 40 — 100 mA
RH
Exhaust oil flow control solenoid valve current value
Exh. OCV Current L mA 40 — 100 mA
LH
Knock sensor correction Knocking Correction deg 0.0 deg
mmHg, kPa, +8.8 mmHg, +1.2 kPa, +0.4
Fuel tank pressure signal Fuel Tank Pressure
inHg or psig inHg or 0.2 psig
AT vehicle ID signal AT Vehicle ID Signal — OFF
D-check require Flag D-check Require Flag — OFF
Delivery Mode Connector
Delivery (test) mode terminal — OFF
(Test Mode Connector)
Neutral position switch signal Neutral Position Switch — ON
Soft idle switch signal Idle Switch Signal — ON
Ignition switch signal Ignition Switch — ON
Power steering switch signal P/S Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Air conditioning switch signal A/C Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Starter switch signal Starter Switch — OFF
Rear oxygen monitor Rear O2 Rich Signal — Rich/Lean
Knocking signal Knocking Signal — OFF
Crankshaft position sensor signal Crankshaft Position Sig. — ON
Camshaft position sensor signal Camshaft Position Sig. — ON
Rear defogger switch signal Rear Defogger SW — OFF (when OFF)
Blower fan switch signal Blower Fan SW — OFF (when OFF)
Light switch signal Light Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Pressure control solenoid valve signal PCV Solenoid Valve — OFF (when OFF)
Tumble generator valve output signal TGV Output — OFF
Tumble generator valve driving signal TGV Drive — Closing direction
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-37

Unit of mea-
sure
Drain valve signal Vent. Solenoid Valve — OFF (when OFF)
Purge control solenoid valve 2 signal CPC Solenoid 2 — OFF (when OFF)
Vehicle dynamics control (VDC) torque down prohi-
Ban of Torque Down — ON
bition output
Vehicle dynamics control (VDC) torque down Request Torque Down
— OFF
demand VDC
ETC motor relay signal ETC Motor Relay — ON
Clutch switch signal Clutch Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Stop light switch signal Stop Light Switch — OFF (when OFF)
SET/COAST switch signal SET/COAST Switch — OFF (when OFF)
RES/ACC switch signal RESUME/ACCEL Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Brake switch signal* Brake Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Main switch signal Main Switch — OFF (when OFF)
Cruise control cancel switch signal CC Cancel SW — OFF (when OFF)
Malfunction indicator light signal MIL On Flag — OFF (when unlit)
Oil level switch signal Oil level switch — HIGH level
3. READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (OBD MODE)
NOTE:
Unit of mea-
sure
Number of diagnosis code Number of Diag. Code: 0 —
Condition of malfunction indicator light MI(MIL) OFF —
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring (Supp) YES —
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring (Rdy) YES —
Monitoring test of fuel system Fuel system monitoring (Supp) YES —
Monitoring test of fuel system Fuel system monitoring (Rdy) YES —
Monitoring test of comprehensive component Component monitoring (Supp) YES —
Monitoring test of comprehensive component Component monitoring (Rdy) YES —
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis (Supp) YES —
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis (Rdy) NO —
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Supp) NO —
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Rdy) N/A —
Test of evaporative emission purge control system Evaporative purge system (Supp) YES —
Test of evaporative emission purge control system Evaporative purge system (Rdy) NO —
Secondary air system test Secondary air system (Supp) NO —
Secondary air system test Secondary air system (Rdy) N/A —
Test of air conditioning system refrigerant A/C system refrigerant (Supp) NO —
Test of air conditioning system refrigerant A/C system refrigerant (Rdy) N/A —
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Supp) YES —
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Rdy) NO —
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis (Supp) YES —
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis (Rdy) YES —
Test of EGR system EGR system (Supp) YES —
Test of EGR system EGR system (Rdy) NO —
Air fuel ratio control system for bank 1 Fuel system for Bank 1 Cl_normal —
Engine load data Calculated load value 19.2 %
Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp. 96 °C
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-38

Unit of mea-
sure
Short term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor
Short term fuel trim B1 17.2 %
(Bank 1)
Long term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor
Long term fuel trim B1 5.5 %
(Bank 1)
Intake manifold absolute pressure signal Mani. Absolute Pressure 32 kPa
Engine speed signal Engine Speed 846 rpm
Vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed 0 km/h
#1 Cylinder ignition timing Ignition timing adv. #1 13.5 °
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. 44 °C
Intake air amount Mass Air Flow 3.6 g/s
Throttle position signal Throttle Opening Angle 13 %
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 0.1 — 0.7 V
A/F correction (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Short term fuel trim #12 0.0 %
On-board diagnostic system OBD System OBD/OBD2 —
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Oxygen sensor #11 Supported —
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 Supported —
Elapsed time after engine start Time Since Engine Start — sec
Travel distance after the malfunction indicator light
Lighted MI lamp history — km
illuminates
A/F sensor output signal (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F Sensor #11 2.468 V
Evaporative purge Commanded Evap Purge 0 %
Fuel level signal Fuel Level — %
Number of warm ups after DTC clear Number of warm-ups — —
Travel distance after DTC clear Meter since DTC cleared — km
Fuel tank pressure signal Fuel Tank Pressure 1171.5 Pa
Atmospheric pressure signal Atmosphere Pressure Atmospheric pressure kPa
A/F sensor output signal (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F Sensor #11 –0.18 mA
Catalyst temperature #1 Catalyst Temperature #11 — °C
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring (Enable) YES —
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring (Comp) YES —
Monitoring test of fuel system Fuel system monitoring (Enable) YES —
Monitoring test of fuel system Fuel system monitoring (Comp) YES —
Monitoring test of comprehensive component Component monitoring (Enable) NO —
Monitoring test of comprehensive component Component monitoring (Comp) NO —
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis (Enable) YES —
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis (Comp) NO —
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Enable) N/A —
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Comp) N/A —
(Enable)
Test of evaporative emission purge control system Evaporative purge system (Comp) NO —
Secondary air system test Secondary air system (Enable) N/A —
Secondary air system test Secondary air system (Comp) N/A —
Test of air conditioning system refrigerant A/C system refrigerant (Enable) N/A —
Test of air conditioning system refrigerant A/C system refrigerant (Comp) N/A —
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Enable) YES —
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Comp) NO —
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis (Enable) YES —
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-39

Unit of mea-
sure
Test of oxygen sensor heater O2 Heater Diagnosis (Comp) YES —
Test of EGR system EGR system (Enable) YES —
Test of EGR system EGR system (Comp) NO —
ECM power supply voltage Control module voltage 13.848 V
Absolute load Absolute Load Value 21 %
A/F target lambda Target Equivalence Ratio 0.993 —
Relative throttle opening angle Relative Throttle Pos. 2 %
Ambient temperature Ambient Temperature Ambient temperature °C
Absolute throttle opening angle 2 Absolute Throttle Pos.#2 31 %
Target throttle opening angle Target Throt. Act. Cont. 0 %
Engine operating time while malfunction indicator
Time while MIL lighted — min
light lit
Elapsed time after DTC clear Time since DTC cleared — min
Type of fuel Type of fuel GAS —
Relative acceleration opening angle Relative Accelera. Pos. 0 %
Neutral condition MT gear status NEUT —
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-40

4. READ FREEZE FRAME DATA FOR ENGINE (OBD MODE)

NOTE:
Contents Display Unit of measure
DTC of freeze frame data Freeze frame data —
Air fuel ratio control system for bank 1 Fuel system for Bank 1 —
Engine load data Calculated load value %
Short term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1) Short term fuel trim B1 %
Long term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1) Long term fuel trim B1 %
Intake manifold absolute pressure signal Mani. Absolute Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psi
Vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed km/h or MPH
Ignition timing adv. #1 Ignition timing adv. #1 °
Intake air temperature Intake Air Temp. °C
Amount of intake air Mass Air Flow g/s
Throttle valve angle Throttle Opening Angle %
Oxygen sensor #12 Oxygen sensor #12 V
A/F correction #12 Short term fuel trim #12 %
OBD system OBD System —
Oxygen sensor #11 Oxygen sensor #11 —
Oxygen sensor #12 Oxygen sensor #12 —
Elapsed time after starting engine Time Since Engine Start sec
Evaporative purge Commanded Evap Purge %
Fuel level Fuel Level %
Fuel tank pressure Fuel Tank Pressure mmHg, Pa, inHg or psig
Atmospheric pressure Atmosphere Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psig
ECM power supply voltage Control module voltage V
Absolute load Absolute Load Value %
A/F target lambda Target Equivalence Ratio —
Relative throttle opening angle Relative Throttle Pos. %
Ambient temperature Ambient Temperature °C or °F
Absolute throttle opening angle 2 Absolute Throttle Pos.#2 %
Target throttle opening angle Target Throt. Act. Cont. %
Neutral condition MT gear status —
5. V.I.N. REGISTRATION
1) On «Main Menu» display, select {Each System Check}.
2) On «System Selection Menu» display, select {Engine Control System}.
3) Click the [OK] button after the information of engine type has been displayed.
4) On «Engine Diagnosis» display, select {Entry VIN}.
5) Perform the procedures shown on the display screen.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-41
Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

10.Read Diagnostic Trouble

Code (DTC)
A: OPERATION
NOTE:
Code (DTC).>
Refer to data denoting emission-related powertrain
DTC.
Code (DTC).>
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturer’s instruc-
tion manual to access powertrain DTC (MODE
$03).
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-42
Inspection Mode
11.Inspection Mode
A: PROCEDURE
Perform the diagnosis shown in the following DTC table.
When performing the diagnosis not listed in “List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)”, refer to the item on the
drive cycle. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-48, Drive Cycle.>
DTC Item Condition
P0011 Intake Camshaft Position - Timing Over-Advanced or System Performance —
(Bank 1)
P0014 Exhaust AVCS System 1 (Range/Performance) —
P0016 Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank1) —
P0017 Crank and Cam Timing B System Failure (Bank 1) —
P0018 Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank2) —
P0019 Crank and Cam Timing B System Failure (Bank 2) —
P0021 Intake Camshaft Position - Timing Over-Advanced or System Performance —
(Bank 2)
P0024 Exhaust AVCS System 2 (Range/Performance) —
P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input —
P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High Input —
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Barometric Pressure Circuit Low Input —
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Barometric Pressure Circuit High Input —
P0112 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Low —
P0113 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit High —
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Low —
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit High —
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “A” Circuit Low —
P0123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “A” Circuit High —
P0182 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit Low Input —
P0183 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit High Input —
P0222 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “B” Circuit Low —
P0223 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “B” Circuit High —
P0230 Fuel Pump Primary Circuit —
P0245 Turbo/Super Charger Wastegate Solenoid “A” Low —
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) —
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) —
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit —
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance —
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) —
P0345 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Circuit (Bank 2) —
P0365 Camshaft Position Sensor “B” Circuit (Bank 1) —
P0390 Camshaft Position Sensor “B” Circuit (Bank 2) —
P0447 Evaporative Emission Control System Vent Control Circuit Open —
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-43
Inspection Mode
DTC Item Condition

P0448 Evaporative Emission Control System Vent Control Circuit Shorted —
P0452 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor Low Input —
P0453 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor High Input —
P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit Low —
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Low —
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit High —
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor “A” —
P0512 Starter Request Circuit —
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key —
P0604 Internal Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) Error —
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) Error —
P0607 Throttle Control System Circuit Range/Performance —
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/Performance (Bank 1) —
P0851 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low —
P0852 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit High —
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (Low) (Bank1 Sensor1) —
P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (High) (Bank1 Sensor1) —
P1160 Return Spring Failure —
P1400 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Circuit Low —
P1420 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Sol. Valve Circuit High —
P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input —
P1560 Back-Up Voltage Circuit Malfunction —
P1570 Antenna —
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility —
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure —
P1574 Key Communication Failure —
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM —
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM —
P1578 Meter Failure —
P2006 Intake Manifold Runner Control Stuck Closed (Bank 1) —
P2007 Intake Manifold Runner Control Stuck Closed (Bank 2) —
P2008 Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit / Open (Bank 1) —
P2009 Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit Low (Bank 1) —
P2011 Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit / Open (Bank 2) —
P2012 Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit Low (Bank 2) —
P2016 Intake Manifold Runner Position Sensor / Switch Circuit Low (Bank 1) —
P2017 Intake Manifold Runner Position Sensor / Switch Circuit High (Bank 1) —
P2021 Intake Manifold Runner Position Sensor / Switch Circuit Low (Bank 2) —
P2022 Intake Manifold Runner Position Sensor / Switch Circuit High (Bank 2) —
P2088 Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit Low (Bank 1) —
P2089 Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit High (Bank 1) —
P2090 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit Low (Bank 1) —
P2091 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit High (Bank 1) —
P2092 Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit Low (Bank 2) —
P2093 Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit High (Bank 2) —
P2094 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit Low (Bank 2) —
P2095 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit High (Bank 2) —
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Range/Performance —
P2102 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Low —
P2103 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit High —
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-44
Inspection Mode
DTC Item Condition

P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor “A” Minimum Stop Performance —
P2122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “D” Circuit Low Input —
P2123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “D” Circuit High Input —
P2127 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “E” Circuit Low Input —
P2128 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “E” Circuit High Input —
P2135 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “A”/“B” Voltage Correlation —
P2138 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch “D”/“E” Voltage Correlation —
P2227 Atmospheric Pressure Sensor Range/Performance —
P2228 Barometric Pressure Circuit Low —
P2229 Barometric Pressure Circuit High —
P2419 Evaporative Emission System Switching Valve Control Circuit Low —
P2420 Evaporative Emission System Switching Valve Control Circuit High —
U0073 CAN Failure, Bus ‘OFF’ Detection —
U0101 CAN (TCU) Data not Loaded —
U0122 CAN (VDC) Data not Loaded —
U0140 CAN (BCU) Data not Loaded —
U0402 CAN (TCU) Data Abnormal —
U0416 CAN (VDC) Data Abnormal —
U0422 CAN (BCU) Data Abnormal —
1. PREPARATION FOR THE INSPECTION • To prevent the vehicle from slipping due to
MODE vibration, do not place anything between rigid
1) Check that the battery voltage is 12 V or more rack and the vehicle.
and fuel remains approx. half [20 — 40 2 (5.3 —
10.6 US gal, 4.4 — 8.8 Imp gal)].
2) Lift up the vehicle using a garage jack and place
it on rigid racks, or drive the vehicle onto free roll-
ers.
WARNING:
• Before lifting up the vehicle, ensure parking
brakes are applied.
• Do not use a pantograph jack in place of a rig-
id rack. (A)
• Secure a rope or wire to the front or rear tow-
ing hooks to prevent the lateral runout of front
wheels.
• Before rotating the wheels, make sure that
there is no one in front of the vehicle. Besides
while the wheels are rotating, make sure that no
one approaches the vehicle front side.
• Make sure that there is nothing around the
wheels. For AWD model, pay special attention
to all four wheels.
• While servicing, do not depress or release (B)
EN-00041
the clutch pedal or accelerator pedal quickly re-
gardless of the engine speed. Quick operation (A) Rigid rack
may cause the vehicle to drop off the free roller. (B) Free roller
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-45
Inspection Mode
2. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR CAUTION:

1) Check that no DTC remains after clearing mem- Do not connect any scan tools except Subaru
ory. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-54, Clear Memo- Select Monitor or general scan tool.
ry Mode.>
3) Prepare the Subaru Select Monitor kit. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-8, PREPARATION TOOL,
EN-07712
9) Start the PC.

10) Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF)
and run the “PC application for Subaru Select Mon-
itor”.
EN-05692 11) On «Main Menu» display, select {Each System
4) Prepare PC with Subaru Select Monitor in- Check}.
stalled. 12) On «System Selection Menu» display, select
5) Connect the USB cable to SDI (Subaru Diagno- {Engine Control System}.
sis Interface) and USB port on the personal com- 13) Click the [OK] button after the information of
puter (dedicated port for the Subaru Select engine type has been displayed.
Monitor). 14) On «Engine Diagnosis» display, select {Dealer
Check Mode Procedure}.
NOTE: 15) When the «Perform Inspection (Dealer Check)
The dedicated port for the Subaru Select Monitor Mode?» is shown on the screen, click the [Next]
means the USB port which was used to install the button.
Subaru Select Monitor. 16) Perform subsequent procedures as instructed
6) Connect the diagnosis cable to SDI. on the display screen.
7) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse (A) of the • If trouble still remains in the memory, the corre-
main fuse box. sponding DTC appears on the display screen.
NOTE:
• For detailed operation procedures, refer to
(A)
“PC application help for Subaru Select Monitor”.
• For details concerning DTC, refer to “List of Di-
agnostic Trouble Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-76, List of Diagnos-
• Release the parking brake.
EN-07555 wheels may illuminate the ABS warning light, but
8) Connect SDI to data link connector located in the this does not indicate a malfunction. When en-
lower portion of the instrument panel (on the driv- gine control system diagnosis is finished, per-
er’s side). form the VDC memory clearance procedure of
self-diagnosis function. <Ref. to VDC(diag)-25,
Clear Memory Mode.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-46
Inspection Mode
3. GENERAL SCAN TOOL 9) Using the general scan tool, check for DTC and
1) Check that no DTC remains after clearing mem- record the result(s).
ory. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-33, MODE $04 NOTE:
(CLEAR/RESET EMISSION-RELATED DIAG- • For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
NOSTIC INFORMATION), OPERATION, General general scan tool operation manual.
Scan Tool.> • For details concerning DTC, refer to “List of Diag-
2) Warm up the engine. nostic Trouble Code (DTC)”.
3) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse (A) of the <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-76, List of Diagnostic
main fuse box. Trouble Code (DTC).>
(A)
EN-07555
4) Connect the general scan tool to the data link

connector located in the lower portion of the instru-
ment panel (on the driver’s side).
CAUTION:
Do not connect any scan tools except Subaru
Select Monitor or general scan tool.
EN-07712

NOTE:
Depress the clutch pedal when starting engine.
6) Turn the neutral position switch to ON by operat-
ing shift lever.
7) Keep the engine speed in 2,500 — 3,000 rpm
range for 40 seconds.
8) Place the shift lever in 1st gear and drive the ve-
hicle at 5 to 10 km/h (3 to 6 MPH).
NOTE:
• For AWD model, release the parking brake.
wheels may illuminate the ABS warning light, but
this does not indicate a malfunction. When engine
control system diagnosis is finished, perform the
VDC memory clearance procedure of self-diagno-
sis function. <Ref. to VDC(diag)-25, Clear Memory
Mode.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-47
Drive Cycle
12.Drive Cycle
A: PROCEDURE
It is necessary to perform the drive cycle listed below if DTC is not found in the Inspection Mode. It is possible
to complete diagnosis of the DTC by performing the indicated drive cycle. After the repair for the DTC, per-
form a necessary drive cycle and make sure the function recovers and the DTC is recorded.
1. PREPARATION FOR DRIVE CYCLE
1) Check that the battery voltage is 12 V or more and fuel remains approx. half [20 — 40 2 (5.3 — 10.6 US
gal, 4.4 — 8.8 Imp gal)].
2) After performing the diagnostics and Clear Memory Mode, check that no DTC remains. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-54, Clear Memory Mode.>
3) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is removed.
NOTE:
• Perform the drive cycle after warming up the engine except when the engine coolant temperature at en-
gine start is specified.
• Perform the drive cycle twice if the DTC in the list is marked with *. After completing the first drive cycle,
stop the engine and perform second diagnosis in same condition.
2. DRIVE CYCLE A
DTC Item Condition
*P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop Fuel Control engine start is less than 20°C
(68°F).
*P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant Temperature for Stable Operation —
Coolant Thermostat (Engine Coolant Temperature Below Thermostat Regulat-
*P0128 engine start is less than 55°C
ing Temperature)
(131°F).
*P0141 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank1 Sensor2) —
cycle B or C as well.
*P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1) —
*P0442 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Small Leak) engine start is less than 25°C
(77°F).
*P0451 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor —
*P0456 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Very Small Leak) engine start is less than 25°C
(77°F).
*P0457 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/Off) engine start is less than 25°C
(77°F).
*P0459 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit High —
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Function Problem —
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-48
Drive Cycle
DTC Item Condition

1) Drive for 20 minutes or more at a constant speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more.
2) Stop the vehicle and idle for one minute.
3. DRIVE CYCLE B
DTC Item Condition
*P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermittent —
*P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower Than Expected —
*P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher Than Expected —
*P219A Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio Imbalance
cycle C as well.
1) Drive at 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more.
2) Stop the vehicle and idle for ten minutes.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-49
Drive Cycle
4. DRIVE CYCLE C
DTC Item Condition
*P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 1) —
*P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position Correlation —
*P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Range/Performance —
P0244 Turbo/Super Charger Wastegate Solenoid “A” Range/Performance —
P0246 Turbo/Super Charger Wastegate Solenoid “A” High —
P2004 Intake Manifold Runner Control Stuck Open (Bank 1) —
P2005 Intake Manifold Runner Control Stuck Open (Bank 2) —
*P219A Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio Imbalance
cycle B as well.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-50
Drive Cycle
Drive according to the drive pattern described below.
(H)
(C)
97 (60)
(D) (F) (G)
64 (40)
(B) (E)
(A)
0
50 100 150 (I)
EN-00842
(A) Idle the engine for 10 seconds or (D) Decelerate with fully closed throt- (G) Stop the vehicle with throttle fully
more. tle to 64 km/h (40 MPH) or less. closed.
(B) Accelerate to 97 km/h (60 MPH) (E) Drive for 20 seconds or more at 64 (H) Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
or more within 20 seconds. km/h (40 MPH) or less.
(C) Drive for 20 seconds or more at 97 (F) Accelerate to 97 km/h (60 MPH) (I) Sec.
km/h (60 MPH) or more. or more within 10 seconds.
5. DRIVE CYCLE D
DTC Item Condition
*P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance —
NOTE:
In drive cycle D, one drive cycle will be established when both the drift diagnosis and stuck diagnosis have
completed.
DRIFT DIAGNOSIS
1) Make sure of the items below before starting the engine.
• Engine coolant temperature is less than 30°C (86°F).
• Remaining fuel is 10 2 (2.6 US gal, 2.2 Imp gal) or more.
• Battery voltage is 10.9 V or more.
2) Idle the engine until engine coolant temperature is at least 10°C (18°F) higher than it was when engine
started.
3) After the engine has reached the state of procedure 2), idle the engine for another 5 minutes or more.
STUCK DIAGNOSIS
2) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-54, Clear Memory Mode.>
3) Drive the vehicle for the distance equal to the fuel of 50 2 (13.2 US gal, 11 Imp gal).
NOTE:
• Do not disconnect the battery terminals during stuck diagnosis. (Data will be cleared by disconnecting the
battery terminals.)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-51
Drive Cycle
6. DRIVE CYCLE E
DTC Item Condition
*P0461 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Range/Performance —
3) Drive the vehicle for the distance equal to the fuel of 30 2 (7.9 US gal, 6.6 Imp gal).
NOTE:
• Do not disconnect the battery terminals while diagnosing. (Data will be cleared by disconnecting the bat-
tery terminals.)
7. DRIVE CYCLE F
DTC Item Condition
*P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Range/Performance —
1) Make sure that the engine coolant temperature is less than 30°C (86°F).
2) Drive according to the drive pattern described below.
(A)
(2) (4) (6)

80 km/h
(50 MPH)
0
(3) (5) (7) (B)
(1)
EN-07588
(A) Vehicle speed (B) Elapsed time
(1) Idle the engine for 10 seconds or (4) Drive for 30 seconds or more at a (6) Drive for 30 seconds or more at a
more after engine start. constant speed of 80 km/h (50 constant speed of 80 km/h (50
MPH) or more. MPH) or more.
(2) Drive for 8 minutes or more at a (5) Stop the vehicle and idle for 30 (7) Stop the vehicle and idle for 30 sec-
constant speed of 80 km/h (50 seconds or more. onds.
MPH) or more.
(3) Stop the vehicle and idle for 30
seconds or more.
NOTE:
• There is no given transition time between idling and cruising.
• Driving at constant speed only on a downhill causes smaller engine load and may result in failure to obtain
a right diagnostic result.
• When the engine stops while performing drive cycle F, perform it again from the state of procedure 1).
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-52
Drive Cycle
8. DRIVE CYCLE H
DTC Item Condition
*
P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance —
*
P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Performance —
2) With the ignition switch ON (engine OFF), read the engine coolant temperature, intake air temperature and
fuel temperature. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL
3) If the values from step 2) satisfy the following two conditions, idle the engine for one minute.
Condition:
|Engine coolant temperature — Intake air temperature | ≤ 5°C (41°F)
|Engine coolant temperature — Fuel temperature | ≤ 2°C (36°F)
NOTE:
• If the conditions are not satisfied, turn the ignition switch to OFF and wait until the parameters are satisfied.
• Do not move the shift lever from neutral position during idling.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-53
Clear Memory Mode

13.Clear Memory Mode

A: OPERATION
NOTE:
• Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is
performed after memory clearance. Wait for 10
seconds or more after turning the ignition switch to
ON, and then start the engine.
For procedures clearing memory using the general
scan tool, refer to the general scan tool operation
manual.
NOTE:
Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is per-
formed after memory clearance. For this reason,
start the engine after 10 seconds or more have
elapsed since the ignition switch was turned to ON.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-54
System Operation Check Mode

14.System Operation Check

Mode
A: OPERATION
CAUTION:
After executing the system operation check
mode, execute the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-54, OPERATION, Clear
Memory Mode.>
NOTE:
For detailed operation procedures, refer to “PC ap-
plication help for Subaru Select Monitor”.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-55

15.Malfunction Indicator Light

A: PROCEDURE
1. Activation of malfunction indicator light. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-57, ACTIVATION OF MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT,
↓
2. Malfunction indicator light does not come on. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-58, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
COME ON, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
3. Malfunction indicator light does not go off. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-60, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
GO OFF, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
4. Malfunction indicator light does not blink. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-61, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
BLINK, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
↓
5. Malfunction indicator light remains blinking. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-63, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT REMAINS
BLINKING, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56

B: ACTIVATION OF MALFUNCTION
(1)
INDICATOR LIGHT
(2)
1) When the ignition switch is turned to ON (engine
OFF), the malfunction indicator light (A) in the com- (3)
bination meter illuminates.
(4)
NOTE: (6)
If the malfunction indicator light does not illuminate,
perform diagnostics of the malfunction indicator (5)
light circuit or the combination meter circuit. <Ref. EN-01680

to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-58, MALFUNCTION INDI-
CATOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON, Malfunc- (1) ON
tion Indicator Light.> (2) OFF
(4) Engine start
(5) Misfire start
(6) 1 second
CHECK
ENGINE
4) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse (A) of main

fuse box with ignition switch to OFF.
CHECK
ENGINE (A)
EN-07714
(A)
2) After starting the engine, the malfunction indica-
tor light goes out. If it does not go off, any of the en-
gine and emission control system has malfunction.
(1)
(3)
(4)
EN-07555
(2)
(3) (1) When the ignition switch is turned to ON
(engine OFF), the malfunction indicator light il-
(4) luminates.
(5) (2) After the engine starts, malfunction indicator
(6)
light blinks in a cycle of 0.5 Hz. (During diagno-
EN-01679 sis)
(3) Malfunction indicator light blinks at a cycle of
(1) No DTC 3 Hz after diagnosis if there is no trouble. Mal-
(2) Trouble occurs function indicator light illuminates if faulty.
(3) ON
(4) OFF
(1)
(6) Engine start (2)
3) If the diagnostic system detects a misfire which (4)

could damage the catalyst, the malfunction indica-
tor light will blink at a cycle of 1 Hz. (3)
EN-01681
(1) ON
(2) OFF
(4) 1 second
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-57

C: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON

DIAGNOSIS:
The malfunction indicator light circuit is open or shorted.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (engine OFF), malfunction indicator light does not illuminate.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72 SWITCH BATTERY
1 3
E
19
COMBINATION
METER
i10
6
M/B
DELIVERY (TEST)
MODE FUSE No. 36 B138
1 2
*
i3 : TERMINAL No.
* *
18
OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
B38
C34
B33
C4
B : B135 C : B136 ECM
B138 i10 B38 B72 B: B135
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-07804
Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-58

Step Check Yes No

COMBINATION METER CONNECTOR. and connector.
2) Remove the combination meter. <Ref. to In this case, repair
IDI-20, Combination Meter.> the following item:
combination meter. harness between
4) Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and combi-
ECM and combination meter connector. nation meter con-
Connector & terminal nector
(B135) No. 33 — (i10) No. 6: • Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of combi- Repair the poor Go to step 4.
Check for poor contact of combination meternation meter connector? contact of combi-
connector. nation meter con-
nector.
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINA- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the meter Check the follow-
TION METER AND IGNITION SWITCH CON- case assembly of ing item and repair
NECTOR. combination meter. if necessary.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. <Ref. to IDI-20, NOTE:
2) Measure the voltage between combination Combination • Blown-out of
meter connector and chassis ground. Meter.> fuse (F/B No. 5)
Connector & terminal • Open circuit or
(i10) No. 19 (+) — Chassis ground (–): short circuit to
ground in harness
of power supply
circuit
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Does the malfunction indicator Repair the poor Go to step 6.
Check for poor connection by shaking or pulling light illuminate? contact of ECM
ECM connector and harness. connector.
6 CHECK ECM CONNECTOR. Is the ECM connector correctly Replace the ECM. Repair the connec-
Check the connection of ECM connector. connected? <Ref. to tion of ECM con-
FU(H4DOTC)-58, nector.
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-59

D: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT GO OFF

DIAGNOSIS:
The malfunction indicator light circuit is shorted.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Although malfunction indicator light comes on when the engine runs, DTC is not shown on the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool display.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72 SWITCH BATTERY
1 3
E
19
COMBINATION
METER
i10
6
M/B
DELIVERY (TEST)
1 2
*
i3 : TERMINAL No.
* *
18
B38
C34
B33
C4
B : B135 C : B136 ECM
B138 i10 B38 B72 B: B135
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-07804
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Does the malfunction indicator Repair the ground Replace the ECM.
COMBINATION METER CONNECTOR. light illuminate? short circuit of har- <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ness between FU(H4DOTC)-58,
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. ECM and combi- Engine Control
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. nation meter con- Module (ECM).>
nector.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-60

E: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT BLINK

DIAGNOSIS:
• The malfunction indicator light circuit is open or shorted.
• The delivery (test) mode fuse circuit is open.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Malfunction indicator light does not blink during Inspection Mode.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72 SWITCH BATTERY
1 3
E
19
COMBINATION
METER
i10
6
M/B
DELIVERY (TEST)
1 2
*
i3 : TERMINAL No.
* *
18
B38
C34
B33
C4
B : B135 C : B136 ECM
B138 i10 B38 B72 B: B135
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-07804
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-61

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK STATUS OF MALFUNCTION INDI- Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 2. Repair the mal-
CATOR LIGHT. light illuminate? function indicator
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. light circuit. <Ref.
2) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is to
removed. EN(H4DOTC)(diag
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF) )-58, MALFUNC-
TION INDICATOR
LIGHT DOES NOT
COME ON, Mal-
function Indicator
Light.>
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Does the malfunction indicator Repair the ground Go to step 3.
COMBINATION METER CONNECTOR. light illuminate? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. ECM and combi-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. nation meter con-
nector.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND DE- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
LIVERY (TEST) MODE FUSE. and connector.
2) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse of the In this case, repair
main fuse box. the following item:
ECM connectors. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and delivery
(B136) No. 4 — (B136) No. 34: (test) mode fuse
• Poor contact of
joint connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Replace the ECM.
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM <Ref. to
connector. FU(H4DOTC)-58,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-62

F: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT REMAINS BLINKING

DIAGNOSIS:
The delivery (test) mode fuse circuit is shorted.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Malfunction indicator light blinks when delivery (test) mode fuse is not connected.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72 SWITCH BATTERY
1 3
E
19
COMBINATION
METER
i10
6
M/B
DELIVERY (TEST)
1 2
*
i3 : TERMINAL No.
* *
18
B38
C34
B33
C4
B : B135 C : B136 ECM
B138 i10 B38 B72 B: B135
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-07804
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-63

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK DELIVERY (TEST) MODE FUSE. Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 2. System is normal.
1) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is light blink? NOTE:
removed. Malfunction indica-
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor light blinks
when delivery
(test) mode fuse is
connected.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Repair the short Replace the ECM.
CHASSIS GROUND TERMINAL. circuit to ground in <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. harness between FU(H4DOTC)-58,
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. ECM and delivery Engine Control
3) Measure the resistance of harness between (test) mode fuse. Module (ECM).>
ECM and chassis ground.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-64

16.Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure

A: PROCEDURE
1. Check of the fuel amount
↓
2. Inspection of starter motor circuit. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-66, STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Start-
ing Failure.>
↓
3. Inspection of ECM power supply and ground line. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-69, CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
LINE OF ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM), Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure.>
↓
4. Inspection of ignition control system. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-71, IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM, Diagnostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>
↓
5. Inspection of fuel pump circuit. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-73, FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting Fail-
ure.>
↓
6. Inspection of fuel injector circuit. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-74, FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting
Failure.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-65

B: STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-54,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-43, PROCE-
DURE, Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B72
IGNITION SWITCH
F/B No. 21
6
BATTERY
SBF-5 MAIN SBF
2 3
E
2
STARTER
RELAY
B493
STARTER MOTOR
1
3
2

M
B501 B14
1
C16
B26
ECM
B: B135 C: B136
B72 B493 B: B135 C: B136 B501
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
4 5 6 3
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-07805
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK BATTERY. Is the voltage 12 V or more? Go to step 2. Charge or replace
Check the battery voltage. the battery.
2 CHECK OPERATION OF STARTER MOTOR. Does the starter motor oper- Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
ate?
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-66

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? <Ref. to Check the appro- The circuit has
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-42, priate DTC using returned to a nor-
OPERATION, Read Diagnostic the “List of Diag- mal condition at
Trouble Code (DTC).> nostic Trouble this time. Repro-
Code (DTC)”. duce the failure,
<Ref. to and then perform
EN(H4DOTC)(diag the diagnosis
)-76, List of Diag- again.
nostic Trouble NOTE:
Code (DTC).> In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR STARTER MO- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check the starter Go to step 5.
TOR. motor. <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. SC(H4SO)-9,
2) Disconnect the connector from starter Starter.>
motor.
3) Depress the clutch pedal.
4) Turn the ignition switch to START.
5) Measure the voltage between the starter
motor connector and the engine ground.
(B14) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–):
5 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR STARTER MO- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the open Go to step 6.
TOR. circuit of the har-
1) Depress the clutch pedal. ness between
2) Turn the ignition switch to START. starter relay con-
3) Measure the voltage between starter relay nector and starter
connector and chassis ground. motor.
6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 7. Repair the power
AND IGNITION SWITCH CONNECTOR. supply circuit.
2) Disconnect the connector from ignition
switch.
3) Measure the voltage between ignition
switch connector and chassis ground.
7 CHECK IGNITION SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 8. Replace the igni-
Measure the resistance between ignition switch tion switch. <Ref.
terminals after turning the ignition switch to to SL-60,
START position. REPLACEMENT,
Terminals Ignition Key Lock.>
No. 2 — No. 3:
No. 6 — No. 3:
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-67

Step Check Yes No

8 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF STARTER RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 9. Check the follow-
LAY. ing item and repair
1) Remove the starter relay. if necessary.
2) Connect the connector to ignition switch. • Blown out of fuse
3) Turn the ignition switch to START. (F/B No. 21)
4) Measure the voltage between starter relay • Open or short
connector and chassis ground. circuit to ground in
(B493) No. 4 (+) — Chassis ground (–): starter relay con-
(B493) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–): nector and ignition
switch connector
9 CHECK STARTER RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 10. Replace the starter
1) Connect the battery to starter relay termi- relay. <Ref. to
nals No. 2 and No. 1. EN(H4DOTC)(diag
2) Measure the resistance between starter )-9, Electrical
relay terminals. Component Loca-
Terminals tion.>
No. 4 — No. 3:
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. starter relay con-
3) Measure the resistance of harness between nector.
ECM and starter relay connector.
(B136) No. 16 — (B493) No. 3:
11 CHECK ECM INPUT VOLTAGE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check the ECM Go to step 12.
1) Install the starter relay. power supply and
2) Depress the clutch pedal. ground line. <Ref.
3) Turn the ignition switch to START. to
4) Measure the voltage between ECM connec- EN(H4DOTC)(diag
tor and chassis ground. )-69, CHECK
Connector & terminal POWER SUPPLY
(B135) No. 26 (+) — Chassis ground (–): AND GROUND
LINE OF ENGINE
CONTROL MOD-
ULE (ECM), Diag-
nostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>
CLUTCH START SWITCH CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
2) Disconnect the clutch start switch connec- clutch start switch
tor. connector.
ECM and clutch start switch connector.
(B135) No. 26 — (B501) No. 1:
13 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF CLUTCH Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the clutch Repair open or
START SWITCH. start switch. <Ref. short circuit to
1) Turn the ignition switch to START. to CL-31, Clutch ground in harness
2) Measure the voltage between the clutch Switch.> between starter
start switch connector and chassis ground. relay and clutch
Connector & terminal start switch con-
(B501) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–): nector.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-68

C: CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND LINE OF ENGINE CONTROL MOD-

ULE (ECM)
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
M/B No. 16
4
3 M/B No. 12
1
2 IGNITION
B72
SWITCH BATTERY
1 3
C30
B13
C1
D7
C2
A : B134
E
B : B135
ECM
C : B136
D : B137
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
B21
40
35
34
37
36
E2
E E
B72 A: B134 B: B135 B220

B21
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13
4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
19
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
C: B136 D: B137
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31 EN-07806
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK MAIN RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 2. Replace the main
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. relay. <Ref. to
2) Remove the main relay. EN(H4DOTC)(diag
3) Connect the battery to main relay terminals )-9, Electrical
No. 1 and No. 2. Component Loca-
4) Measure the resistance between main relay tion.>
terminals.
Terminals
No. 3 — No. 4:
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-69

Step Check Yes No

1) Disconnect the connector from ECM. and connector.
2) Measure the resistance of harness between NOTE:
ECM and chassis ground. In this case, repair
(B134) No. 3 — Chassis ground: • Open circuit in
(B137) No. 1 — Chassis ground: ground terminal
coupling connector
3 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the open or
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and of harness of
chassis ground. power supply cir-
Connector & terminal cuit.
4 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF MAIN RELAY. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 5. Repair the open or
Measure the voltage between main relay con- ground short circuit
nector and chassis ground. of harness of
Connector & terminal power supply cir-
(B220) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): cuit.
5 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 6. Repair the open
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. circuit in harness
2) Install the main relay. between ECM and
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. main relay connec-
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and tor.
chassis ground.
6 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check ignition con- Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol system. <Ref. and connector.
2) Connect the connector to ECM. to NOTE:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. EN(H4DOTC)(diag In this case, repair
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and )-71, IGNITION the following item:
chassis ground. CONTROL SYS- • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal TEM, Diagnostics harness between
(B136) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): for Engine Starting ECM and main re-
(B137) No. 7 (+) — Chassis ground (–): Failure.> lay connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-70

D: IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B134 ECM
3 1
21
31
22
32
B72 IGNITION SWITCH
SBF-5
F/B No. 12
MAIN SBF
B21
BATTERY
49
20
31
10
9
E2
E
E31 E32 E33 E34
3
2
E
IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E31 B21 B134 B72

E32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 4 5 6
E33
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E34 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1
2
3
EN-07807
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SPARK PLUG CONDITION. Is the spark plug condition nor- Go to step 2. Replace the spark
1) Remove the spark plug. <Ref. to mal? plug. <Ref. to
IG(H4DOTC)-4, REMOVAL, Spark Plug.> IG(H4DOTC)-4,
2) Check the spark plug condition. <Ref. to Spark Plug.>
IG(H4DOTC)-4, INSPECTION, Spark Plug.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-71

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK IGNITION SYSTEM FOR SPARKS. Does spark occur at each cylin- Check fuel pump Go to step 3.
1) Connect the spark plug to ignition coil. der? system. <Ref. to
2) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag
FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEASING OF FUEL )-73, FUEL PUMP
PRESSURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> CIRCUIT, Diag-
3) Contact the spark plug thread portion to nostics for Engine
engine. Starting Failure.>
4) While opening the throttle valve fully, crank
the engine to check that spark occurs at each
cylinder.
3 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
CIRCUIT. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ignition coil. In this case, repair
4) Measure the voltage between ignition coil • Open circuit or
connector and engine ground. short circuit to
Connector & terminal ground in power
(E31) No. 3 (+) — Engine ground (–): supply circuit
(E33) No. 3 (+) — Engine ground (–): coupling connector
(E34) No. 3 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Blown out of fuse
(F/B No. 12)
4 CHECK HARNESS OF IGNITION COIL Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 5. Repair the open
GROUND CIRCUIT. circuit in harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ignition
2) Measure the resistance of harness between coil connector and
ignition coil connector and engine ground. engine grounding
Connector & terminal terminal.
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 6. Repair the harness
NITION COIL CONNECTOR. and connector.
ECM and ignition coil connector. the following item:
Connector & terminal • Open circuit of
(B134) No. 22 — (E32) No. 1: ECM and ignition
(B134) No. 31 — (E33) No. 1: coil connector
coupling connector
6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 7. Repair the ground
NITION COIL CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance of harness between ness between
ECM and engine ground. ECM and ignition
Connector & terminal coil connector.
7 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Replace the igni-
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM tion coil. <Ref. to
connector. IG(H4DOTC)-6,
Ignition Coil.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-72

E: FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK OPERATING SOUND OF FUEL Does the fuel pump emit oper- Check the fuel Display the DTC.
PUMP. ating sound? injector circuit. <Ref. to
Make sure that the fuel pump operates for two <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag
seconds when turning the ignition switch to ON. EN(H4DOTC)(diag )-42, OPERA-
NOTE: )-74, FUEL INJEC- TION, Read Diag-
Fuel pump operation can be executed using the TOR CIRCUIT, nostic Trouble
Subaru Select Monitor. Diagnostics for Code (DTC).>
For detailed procedures, refer to “SYSTEM OP- Engine Starting
ERATION CHECK MODE”. <Ref. to Failure.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-55, System Operation
Check Mode.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-73

F: FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
• Check or repair only faulty parts.
• After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-
54, OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-43, PRO-
CEDURE, Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
E
B220
B134 ECM
10
11
12
13
B21
48
54
53
52
51
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
1

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E5 E16 B220 B21 B134
E6 E17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07809
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OPERATION OF EACH FUEL INJEC- Does the fuel injector emit Check the fuel Go to step 2.
TOR. operating sound? pressure. <Ref. to
While cranking the engine, check each fuel ME(H4DOTC)-25,
injector emits operating sound. Use a sound INSPECTION,
scope or attach a screwdriver to the injector for Fuel Pressure.>
this check.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-74

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO EACH FUEL IN- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
JECTOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector. In this case, repair
4) Measure the voltage between fuel injector • Open circuit in
connector and the engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal main relay and fuel
#1 (E5) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): injector connector
#2 (E16) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): • Poor contact of
#3 (E6) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): main relay connec-
#4 (E17) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): tor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
ECM and fuel injector connector. • Open circuit in
#4 (B134) No. 13 — (E17) No. 2: coupling connector
Measure the resistance between ECM and harness between
chassis ground. ECM and fuel
Connector & terminal injector connector.
5 CHECK EACH FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance 5 — 20 Ω? Go to step 6. Replace the faulty
Measure the resistance between each fuel fuel injector. <Ref.
injector terminals. to FU(H4DOTC)-
Terminals 44, Fuel Injector.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
6 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Inspection using
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM “General Diagnos-
connector. tic Table”. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-332, INSPEC-
TION, General
Diagnostic Table.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-75

17.List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: LIST
DTC Item Note
P0011 Intake Camshaft Position - Timing <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-84, DTC P0011 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSI-
Over-Advanced or System Perfor- TION - TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK
mance (Bank 1) 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0014 Exhaust AVCS System 1 (Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-85, DTC P0014 EXHAUST AVCS SYSTEM 1
Performance) (RANGE/PERFORMANCE), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0016 Crankshaft Position - Camshaft <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-86, DTC P0016 CRANKSHAFT POSITION -
Position Correlation (Bank1) CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK1), Diagnostic Procedure
P0017 Crank and Cam Timing B System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-87, DTC P0017 CRANK AND CAM TIMING B
Failure (Bank 1) SYSTEM FAILURE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0018 Crankshaft Position - Camshaft <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-88, DTC P0018 CRANKSHAFT POSITION -
Position Correlation (Bank2) CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK2), Diagnostic Procedure
P0019 Crank and Cam Timing B System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-89, DTC P0019 CRANK AND CAM TIMING B
Failure (Bank 2) SYSTEM FAILURE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0021 Intake Camshaft Position - Timing <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-90, DTC P0021 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSI-
Over-Advanced or System Perfor- TION - TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK
mance (Bank 2) 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0024 Exhaust AVCS System 2 (Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-91, DTC P0024 EXHAUST AVCS SYSTEM 2
Performance) (RANGE/PERFORMANCE), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-92, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL
1 Sensor 1) CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0031 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-94, DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0032 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-96, DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0037 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-98, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0038 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-100, DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position Cor- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-102, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE
relation POSITION CORRELATION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-103, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR
Range/Performance FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
Low Input FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
High Input FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-76

DTC Item Note

P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baro- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-108, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
metric Pressure Circuit Low Input PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic
Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baro- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-110, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
metric Pressure Circuit High Input PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic
P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-112, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
Circuit Range/Performance SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
Circuit Low SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
Circuit High SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-117, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEM-
cuit Low PERATURE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-119, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEM-
cuit High PERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-121, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSI-
Switch “A” Circuit Low TION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with
Switch “A” Circuit High TION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-125, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT
for Closed Loop Fuel Control TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Proce-
P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant Tem- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-126, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE
perature for Stable Operation COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Proce-
P0128 Coolant Thermostat (Engine Cool- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-126, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT
ant Temperature Below Thermo- (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULAT-
stat Regulating Temperature) ING TEMPERATURE), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-127, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-129, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
ble Code (DTC).>
P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-131, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-132, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO
Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with
P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-134, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
ble Code (DTC).>
P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-136, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
ble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-77

DTC Item Note

P0139 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-138, DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-140, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO
Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 2) ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Procedure with
P0141 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank1 <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-142, DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIR-
Sensor2) CUIT (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1) <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-142, DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK
1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1) <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-143, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK
1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor “A” Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-145, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SEN-
cuit Range/Performance SOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
cuit Low Input SOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
cuit High Input SOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
Switch “B” Circuit Low TION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with
Switch “B” Circuit High TION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0230 Fuel Pump Primary Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-154, DTC P0230 FUEL PUMP PRIMARY CIR-
CUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0244 Turbo/Super Charger Wastegate <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-157, DTC P0244 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER
Solenoid “A” Range/Performance WASTEGATE SOLENOID “A” RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Proce-
Solenoid “A” Low WASTEGATE SOLENOID “A” LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Solenoid “A” High WASTEGATE SOLENOID “A” HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-162, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-169, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
1 or Single Sensor) LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-171, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
1 or Single Sensor) HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-173, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION
cuit SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-78

DTC Item Note

P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor “A” Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-175, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION
cuit Range/Performance SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-176, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SEN-
cuit (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) SOR “A” CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure
P0345 Camshaft Position Sensor “A” Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-178, DTC P0345 CAMSHAFT POSITION SEN-
cuit (Bank 2) SOR “A” CIRCUIT (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0365 Camshaft Position Sensor “B” Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-180, DTC P0365 CAMSHAFT POSITION SEN-
cuit (Bank 1) SOR “B” CIRCUIT (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0390 Camshaft Position Sensor “B” Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-182, DTC P0390 CAMSHAFT POSITION SEN-
cuit (Bank 2) SOR “B” CIRCUIT (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-184, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFI-
Threshold (Bank 1) CIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
P0442 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-188, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
tem Leak Detected (Small Leak) CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Proce-
tem Vent Control Circuit Open CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Proce-
tem Vent Control Circuit Shorted CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic
tem Pressure Sensor CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Procedure with
tem Pressure Sensor Low Input CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Proce-
tem Pressure Sensor High Input CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Proce-
tem Leak Detected (Very Small CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic
Leak) Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
tem Leak Detected (Fuel Cap CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diag-
Loose/Off) nostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0458 Evaporative Emission System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-203, DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
Purge Control Valve Circuit Low SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure
Purge Control Valve Circuit High SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-207, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A”
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-207, DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor “A” Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-207, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A”
CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-79

DTC Item Note

P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermit- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-208, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIR-
tent CUIT INTERMITTENT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor “A” <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-208, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
“A”, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-209, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYS-
Lower Than Expected TEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-210, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYS-
Higher Than Expected TEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-211, DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR
Performance CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Perfor- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-219, DTC P050B COLD START IGNITION TIM-
mance ING PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0512 Starter Request Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-220, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIR-
CUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key <Ref. to IM(diag)-16, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY, Diag-
P0604 Internal Control Module Random <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-222, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MOD-
Access Memory (RAM) Error ULE RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Procedure
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-222, DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MOD-
Memory (ROM) Error ULE READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM) ERROR, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0607 Throttle Control System Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-223, DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYS-
Range/Performance TEM CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-224, DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR
Performance (Bank 1) CONTROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with
P0851 Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-225, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
(MT Model) CIRCUIT LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0852 Neutral Switch Input Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-227, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
(MT Model) CIRCUIT HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-229, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT
mance (Low) (Bank1 Sensor1) RANGE/PERFORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Proce-
P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-231, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT
mance (High) (Bank1 Sensor1) RANGE/PERFORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Proce-
P1160 Return Spring Failure <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-232, DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE,
P1400 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Sole- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-233, DTC P1400 FUEL TANK PRESSURE
noid Valve Circuit Low CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with
P1420 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Sol. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-235, DTC P1420 FUEL TANK PRESSURE
Valve Circuit High CONTROL SOL. VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Func- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-237, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID
tion Problem VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-80

DTC Item Note

P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-238, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT
LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1560 Back-Up Voltage Circuit Malfunc- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-240, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIR-
tion CUIT MALFUNCTION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P1570 Antenna <Ref. to IM(diag)-17, DTC P1570 ANTENNA, Diagnostic Procedure with
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility <Ref. to IM(diag)-19, DTC P1571 REFERENCE CODE INCOMPATIBILITY,
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-20, DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT
ANTENNA CIRCUIT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P1574 Key Communication Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-22, DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE, Diag-
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to IM(diag)-22, DTC P1576 EGI CONTROL MODULE EEPROM, Diag-
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to IM(diag)-23, DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM,
P1578 Meter Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-24, DTC P1578 METER FAILURE, Diagnostic Procedure
P2004 Intake Manifold Runner Control <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-242, DTC P2004 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUN-
Stuck Open (Bank 1) NER CONTROL STUCK OPEN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
Stuck Open (Bank 2) NER CONTROL STUCK OPEN (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
Stuck Closed (Bank 1) NER CONTROL STUCK CLOSED (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with
Stuck Closed (Bank 2) NER CONTROL STUCK CLOSED (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with
Circuit / Open (Bank 1) NER CONTROL CIRCUIT / OPEN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with
Circuit Low (Bank 1) NER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
Circuit / Open (Bank 2) NER CONTROL CIRCUIT / OPEN (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with
Circuit Low (Bank 2) NER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
P2016 Intake Manifold Runner Position <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-254, DTC P2016 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUN-
Sensor / Switch Circuit Low (Bank NER POSITION SENSOR / SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic
1) Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Sensor / Switch Circuit High (Bank NER POSITION SENSOR / SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic
Sensor / Switch Circuit Low (Bank NER POSITION SENSOR / SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic
Sensor / Switch Circuit High (Bank NER POSITION SENSOR / SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-81

DTC Item Note

P2088 Intake Camshaft Position Actuator <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-262, DTC P2088 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSI-
Control Circuit Low (Bank 1) TION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Proce-
Control Circuit High (Bank 1) TION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Proce-
P2090 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actua- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-266, DTC P2090 EXHAUST CAMSHAFT
tor Control Circuit Low (Bank 1) POSITION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic
tor Control Circuit High (Bank 1) POSITION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic
Control Circuit Low (Bank 2) TION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Proce-
Control Circuit High (Bank 2) TION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic Proce-
tor Control Circuit Low (Bank 2) POSITION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic
tor Control Circuit High (Bank 2) POSITION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic
P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-278, DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM
Too Lean (Bank 1) SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-285, DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM
Too Rich (Bank 1) SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-292, DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR
cuit Range/Performance CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Proce-
cuit Low CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
cuit High CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor “A” <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-300, DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSI-
Minimum Stop Performance TION SENSOR “A” MINIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Proce-
Switch “D” Circuit Low Input TION SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
Switch “D” Circuit High Input TION SENSOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
Switch “E” Circuit Low Input TION SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
Switch “E” Circuit High Input TION SENSOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
Switch “A”/“B” Voltage Correlation TION SENSOR/SWITCH “A”/“B” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Pro-
cedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-82

DTC Item Note

Switch “D”/“E” Voltage Correlation TION SENSOR/SWITCH “D”/“E” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Pro-
cedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P219A Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio Imbalance <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-314, DTC P219A BANK 1 AIR-FUEL RATIO
IMBALANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2227 Atmospheric Pressure Sensor <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-280, DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIR-
Range/Performance CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P2228 Barometric Pressure Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-280, DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIR-
P2229 Barometric Pressure Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-281, DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIR-
Switching Valve Control Circuit SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Proce-
Low dure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Switching Valve Control Circuit SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Pro-
High cedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
U0073 CAN Failure, Bus ‘OFF’ Detection <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-331, DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS ‘OFF’
DETECTION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
U0101 CAN (TCU) Data not Loaded <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-331, DTC U0101 CAN (TCU) DATA NOT
LOADED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
U0122 CAN (VDC) Data not Loaded <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-331, DTC U0122 CAN (VDC) DATA NOT
U0140 CAN (BCU) Data not Loaded <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-331, DTC U0140 CAN (BCU) DATA NOT
U0402 CAN (TCU) Data Abnormal <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-331, DTC U0402 CAN (TCU) DATA ABNOR-
MAL, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
U0416 CAN (VDC) Data Abnormal <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-331, DTC U0416 CAN (VDC) DATA ABNOR-
U0422 CAN (BCU) Data Abnormal <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-331, DTC U0422 CAN (BCU) DATA ABNOR-
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-83

18.Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: DTC P0011 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSITION - TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK 1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-10, DTC P0011 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSITION -
TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) De-
tecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the AVCS system operating Go to step 2. Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. angle approximately 0°? ing item and repair
2) Check the AVCS system operating angle or replace if neces-
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan sary.
tool. • Oil pipe (clog)
NOTE: • Oil flow control
• Subaru Select Monitor solenoid valve
For detailed operation procedures, refer to (clog or dirt of oil
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. routing, setting of
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Subaru Select Moni- spring)
tor.> • Intake camshaft
• General scan tool (dirt, damage of
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the camshaft)
2 CHECK CURRENT DATA. When the oil flow control sole- Check the follow- Perform the follow-
1) Drive with acceleration and deceleration at noid valve duty output exceeds ing item and repair ing procedures,
80 km/h (50 MPH) or less. 10%, is the AVCS system oper- or replace if neces- and clean the oil
NOTE: ating angle approx. 0°? sary. routing.
Drive to an extent that the duty output of oil flow • Oil pipe (clog) Replace the
control solenoid valve increases. • Oil flow control engine oil and idle
2) Measure the AVCS system operating angle solenoid valve the engine for 5
and oil flow control solenoid valve duty output (clog or dirt of oil minutes, and then
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan routing, setting of replace the oil filter
tool. spring) and engine oil.
NOTE: • Intake camshaft <Ref. to
• Subaru Select Monitor (dirt, damage of LU(H4SO)-13,
For detailed operation procedures, refer to camshaft) REPLACEMENT,
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. Engine Oil.> <Ref.
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Subaru Select Moni- to LU(H4SO)-34,
tor.> Engine Oil Filter.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-84

B: DTC P0014 EXHAUST AVCS SYSTEM 1 (RANGE/PERFORMANCE)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-12, DTC P0014 EXHAUST AVCS SYSTEM 1
(RANGE/PERFORMANCE), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the exhaust AVCS system Go to step 2. Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. operating angle approximately ing item and repair
2) Check the exhaust AVCS system operating 0°? or replace if neces-
angle using Subaru Select Monitor or general sary.
scan tool. • Oil pipe (clog)
tor.> • Exhaust cam-
• General scan tool shaft (dirt, dam-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the age of camshaft)
80 km/h (50 MPH) or less. 10%, is the exhaust AVCS sys- or replace if neces- and clean the oil
NOTE: tem operating angle approx. sary. routing.
Drive to an extent that the duty output of oil flow 0°? • Oil pipe (clog) Replace the
2) Measure the exhaust AVCS system operat- solenoid valve the engine for 5
ing angle and oil flow control solenoid valve duty (clog or dirt of oil minutes, and then
output using Subaru Select Monitor or general routing, setting of replace the oil filter
scan tool. spring) and engine oil.
NOTE: • Exhaust cam- <Ref. to
• Subaru Select Monitor shaft (dirt, dam- LU(H4SO)-13,
For detailed operation procedures, refer to age of camshaft) REPLACEMENT,
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-85

C: DTC P0016 CRANKSHAFT POSITION - CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELA-

TION (BANK1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-14, DTC P0016 CRANKSHAFT POSITION - CAM-
SHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the AVCS system operating Perform the follow- Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. angle approx. 0°, and oil flow ing procedures, ing item and repair
2) Measure the AVCS system operating angle control solenoid valve duty out- and clean the oil or replace if neces-
and oil flow control solenoid valve duty output put approx. 10%? routing. sary.
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan Replace the • Oil pipe (clog)
tool. engine oil and idle • Oil flow control
NOTE: the engine for 5 solenoid valve
• Subaru Select Monitor minutes, and then (clog or dirt of oil
For detailed operation procedures, refer to replace the oil filter routing, setting of
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. and engine oil. spring)
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Subaru Select Moni- <Ref. to • Intake camshaft
tor.> LU(H4SO)-13, (dirt, damage of
• General scan tool REPLACEMENT, camshaft)
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the Engine Oil.> <Ref. • Timing belt
general scan tool operation manual. to LU(H4SO)-34, (matching of timing
Engine Oil Filter.> mark)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-86

D: DTC P0017 CRANK AND CAM TIMING B SYSTEM FAILURE (BANK 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-16, DTC P0017 CRANK AND CAM TIMING B SYS-
TEM FAILURE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the exhaust AVCS system Perform the follow- Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. operating angle approx. 0°, and ing procedures, ing item and repair
2) Measure the exhaust AVCS system operat- oil flow control solenoid valve and clean the oil or replace if neces-
ing angle and oil flow control solenoid valve duty duty output approx. 10%? routing. sary.
output using Subaru Select Monitor or general Replace the • Oil pipe (clog)
scan tool. engine oil and idle • Oil flow control
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Subaru Select Moni- <Ref. to • Exhaust cam-
tor.> LU(H4SO)-13, shaft (dirt, dam-
• General scan tool REPLACEMENT, age of camshaft)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-87

E: DTC P0018 CRANKSHAFT POSITION - CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELA-

TION (BANK2)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-18, DTC P0018 CRANKSHAFT POSITION - CAM-
SHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the AVCS system operating Perform the follow- Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. angle approx. 0°, and oil flow ing procedures, ing item and repair
2) Measure the AVCS system operating angle control solenoid valve duty out- and clean the oil or replace if neces-
and oil flow control solenoid valve duty output put approx. 10%? routing. sary.
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan Replace the • Oil pipe (clog)
tool. engine oil and idle • Oil flow control
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Subaru Select Moni- <Ref. to • Intake camshaft
tor.> LU(H4SO)-13, (dirt, damage of
• General scan tool REPLACEMENT, camshaft)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-88

F: DTC P0019 CRANK AND CAM TIMING B SYSTEM FAILURE (BANK 2)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-18, DTC P0019 CRANK AND CAM TIMING B SYS-
TEM FAILURE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the exhaust AVCS system Perform the follow- Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. operating angle approx. 0°, and ing procedures, ing item and repair
2) Measure the exhaust AVCS system operat- oil flow control solenoid valve and clean the oil or replace if neces-
ing angle and oil flow control solenoid valve duty duty output approx. 10%? routing. sary.
output using Subaru Select Monitor or general Replace the • Oil pipe (clog)
scan tool. engine oil and idle • Oil flow control
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Subaru Select Moni- <Ref. to • Exhaust cam-
tor.> LU(H4SO)-13, shaft (dirt, dam-
• General scan tool REPLACEMENT, age of camshaft)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-89

G: DTC P0021 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSITION - TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK 2)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-18, DTC P0021 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSITION -
TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) De-
tecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the AVCS system operating Go to step 2. Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. angle approximately 0°? ing item and repair
2) Check the AVCS system operating angle or replace if neces-
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan sary.
tool. • Oil pipe (clog)
tor.> • Intake camshaft
• General scan tool (dirt, damage of
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the camshaft)
80 km/h (50 MPH) or less. 10%, is the AVCS system oper- or replace if neces- and clean the oil
NOTE: ating angle approx. 0°? sary. routing.
Drive to an extent that the duty output of oil flow • Oil pipe (clog) Replace the
2) Measure the AVCS system operating angle solenoid valve the engine for 5
and oil flow control solenoid valve duty output (clog or dirt of oil minutes, and then
using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan routing, setting of replace the oil filter
tool. spring) and engine oil.
NOTE: • Intake camshaft <Ref. to
• Subaru Select Monitor (dirt, damage of LU(H4SO)-13,
For detailed operation procedures, refer to camshaft) REPLACEMENT,
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-90

H: DTC P0024 EXHAUST AVCS SYSTEM 2 (RANGE/PERFORMANCE)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-18, DTC P0024 EXHAUST AVCS SYSTEM 2
(RANGE/PERFORMANCE), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the exhaust AVCS system Go to step 2. Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. operating angle approximately ing item and repair
2) Check the exhaust AVCS system operating 0°? or replace if neces-
angle using Subaru Select Monitor or general sary.
scan tool. • Oil pipe (clog)
tor.> • Exhaust cam-
• General scan tool shaft (dirt, dam-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the age of camshaft)
80 km/h (50 MPH) or less. 10%, is the exhaust AVCS sys- or replace if neces- and clean the oil
NOTE: tem operating angle approx. sary. routing.
Drive to an extent that the duty output of oil flow 0°? • Oil pipe (clog) Replace the
2) Measure the exhaust AVCS system operat- solenoid valve the engine for 5
ing angle and oil flow control solenoid valve duty (clog or dirt of oil minutes, and then
output using Subaru Select Monitor or general routing, setting of replace the oil filter
scan tool. spring) and engine oil.
NOTE: • Exhaust cam- <Ref. to
• Subaru Select Monitor shaft (dirt, dam- LU(H4SO)-13,
For detailed operation procedures, refer to age of camshaft) REPLACEMENT,
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-91

I: DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-19, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 1 2
3 4
11 8
10
B22 E3
1
9 B220
E
B220
FRONT OXYGEN 17
(A/F) SENSOR 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
E24
B21
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
7
1
2
B22
E
B22
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
C19
C18
C9
C5
C6
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C: B136 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
E2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08618
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-92

Step Check Yes No

TOR. NOTE:
1) Start and warm up the engine. In this case, repair
front oxygen (A/F) sensor. harness between
4) Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and front oxy-
ECM and front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. gen (A/F) sensor
(B136) No. 19 — (E24) No. 3:
(B136) No. 18 — (E24) No. 4:
2 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 2 — Go to step 3. Replace the front
Measure the resistance between front oxygen 3 Ω? oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector terminals. sor. <Ref. to
Terminals FU(H4DOTC)-54,
Sensor.>
sensor connector. FU(H4DOTC)-54,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-93

J: DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 1 2
3 4
11 8
10
B22 E3
1
9 B220
E
B220
FRONT OXYGEN 17
(A/F) SENSOR 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
E24
B21
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
7
1
2
B22
E
B22
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
C19
C18
C9
C5
C6
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C: B136 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
E2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08618
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-94

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO FRONT OXY- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
GEN (A/F) SENSOR. supply line.
2) Disconnect the connectors from front oxy- In this case, repair
gen (A/F) sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between front oxygen harness between
(A/F) sensor connector and engine ground. A/F, oxygen sen-
Connector & terminal sor relay and front
(E24) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): oxygen (A/F) sen-
sor connector
• Poor contact of
A/F, oxygen sen-
sor relay connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
F, oxygen sensor
relay
TOR. NOTE:
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and front oxy-
(B136) No. 5 — (E24) No. 2: gen (A/F) sensor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. Is the resistance 2 — 3 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the front
Measure the resistance between front oxygen contact of ECM oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor terminals. connector. sor. <Ref. to
Sensor.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-95

K: DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 1 2
3 4
11 8
10
B22 E3
1
9 B220
E
B220
FRONT OXYGEN 17
(A/F) SENSOR 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
E24
B21
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
7
1
2
B22
E
B22
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
C19
C18
C9
C5
C6
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C: B136 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
E2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08618
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-96

Step Check Yes No

FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in
TOR. the harness
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and front oxygen (A/F)
chassis ground. sensor connector.
coupling connector
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-97

L: DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY B83 E25

A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY
M/B No.15 1 2 3
12 4 5 6
1 2
11 16 3 4
10
B22 E3 B220
2
9
E
B220 17
REAR OXYGEN 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
SENSOR 2 6 10 14
19
E25
B21
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E3
15
10
9
B22
E
B22 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
* 13 14 15 16
C20
B30
C9
B6
B83
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135
ECM 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
* ARRANGEMENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08619
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-98

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO REAR OXY- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
GEN SENSOR. supply line.
2) Disconnect the connector from rear oxygen In this case, repair
sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen harness between
sensor connector and engine ground. A/F, oxygen sen-
Connector & terminal sor relay and rear
(E25) No. 2 (+) — Engine ground (–): oxygen sensor
connector
• Poor contact of
A/F, oxygen sen-
sor relay connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
F, oxygen sensor
relay
3) Measure the resistance between the ECM the following item:
and rear oxygen sensor connector. • Open circuit in
(B135) No. 6 — (E25) No. 1: ECM and rear oxy-
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. Is the resistance 5 — 7 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the rear
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen contact of ECM oxygen sensor.
sensor terminals. connector. <Ref. to
No. 1 — No. 2: Rear Oxygen Sen-
sor.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-99

M: DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY B83 E25

M/B No.15 1 2 3
12 4 5 6
1 2
11 16 3 4
10
B22 E3 B220
2
9
E
B220 17
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
SENSOR 2 6 10 14
19
E25
B21
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E3
15
10
9
B22
E
B22 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
* 13 14 15 16
C20
B30
C9
B6
B83
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135
ECM 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08619
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-100

Step Check Yes No

REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. circuit to power in
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and between ECM and
chassis ground. rear oxygen sensor
coupling connector

N: DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION CORRELATION

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-29, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION
CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
intake system?
2 CHECK MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Is the measured value 73.3 — Go to step 3. Replace the mani-
SENSOR. 106.6 kPa (550 — 800 mmHg, fold absolute pres-
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until 21.65 — 31.50 inHg) when the sure sensor. <Ref.
coolant temperature is higher than 75°C ignition is turned ON, and 20.0 to FU(H4DOTC)-
(167°F). — 46.7 kPa (150 — 350 mmHg, 42, Manifold Abso-
2) Place the shift lever in neutral position. 5.91 — 13.78 inHg) during lute Pressure Sen-
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF. idling? sor.>
5) Read the data of intake manifold pressure
sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or
general scan tool.
NOTE:
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
3 CHECK THROTTLE OPENING ANGLE. Is the measured value less than Go to step 4. Replace the elec-
Read the data of throttle position signal using 5% when throttle is fully tronic throttle con-
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool. closed? trol. <Ref. to
NOTE: FU(H4DOTC)-15,
• Subaru Select Monitor Throttle Body.>
tor.>
4 CHECK THROTTLE OPENING ANGLE. Is the measured value 85% or Replace the mani- Replace the elec-
more when throttle is fully fold absolute pres- tronic throttle con-
open? sure sensor. <Ref. trol. <Ref. to
to FU(H4DOTC)- FU(H4DOTC)-15,
42, Manifold Abso- Throttle Body.>
lute Pressure Sen-
sor.>

O: DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-31, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIR-
CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the mass
priate DTC using air flow and intake
the “List of Diag- air temperature
nostic Trouble sensor. <Ref. to
Code (DTC)”. FU(H4DOTC)-41,
<Ref. to Mass Air Flow and
EN(H4DOTC)(diag Intake Air Temper-
)-76, List of Diag- ature Sensor.>
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>

P: DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

CUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
3
B220
MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
2

* *
*
B83
B30
C11
C31
C10
C22
B: B135 C: B136 ECM
B3 B220 B: B135 C: B136 B83
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
17
1 5 9 13 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08684

Step Check Yes No

to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Subaru Select Moni- again.
tor.> NOTE:
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF MASS AIR Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE and connector.
SENSOR. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connectors from the mass the following item:
air flow and intake air temperature sensor. • Open circuit in
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. harness between
4) Measure the voltage between mass air flow main relay and
and intake air temperature sensor connector mass air flow and
and engine ground. intake air tempera-
(B3) No. 3 (+) — Engine ground (–): nector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit in harness
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. between ECM and
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the mass air flow
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. and intake air tem-
3) Measure the resistance of harness between perature sensor
ECM and the mass air flow and intake air tem- connector.
perature sensor connector.
(B136) No. 22 — (B3) No. 5:
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- more? circuit to ground in
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. harness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and mass air
chassis ground. flow and intake air
Connector & terminal temperature sen-
(B136) No. 22 — Chassis ground: sor connector.
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the mass
Check for poor contact of ECM and mass air mass air flow and intake air contact of ECM or air flow and intake
flow and intake air temperature sensor connec- temperature sensor connector? mass air flow and air temperature
tor. intake air tempera- sensor. <Ref. to
ture sensor con- FU(H4DOTC)-41,
nector. Mass Air Flow and
Intake Air Temper-
ature Sensor.>

Q: DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
3
B220
MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
2

* *
*
B83
B30
C11
C31
C10
C22
B: B135 C: B136 ECM
B3 B220 B: B135 C: B136 B83
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
17
1 5 9 13 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08684

Step Check Yes No

to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Subaru Select Moni- again.
tor.> NOTE:
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit of harness
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. to power supply
2) Disconnect the connectors from the mass mass air flow and
air flow and intake air temperature sensor. intake air tempera-
3) Start the engine. ture sensor con-
4) Read the data of air flow sensor signal using nector.
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor • Open circuit in
connector and engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and mass air
(B3) No. 4 — Engine ground: flow and intake air
temperature sen-
sor connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of mass Repair the poor Replace the mass
Check for poor contact of mass air flow and air flow and intake air tempera- contact of mass air air flow and intake
intake air temperature sensor connector. ture sensor connector? flow and intake air air temperature
temperature sen- sensor. <Ref. to
sor connector. FU(H4DOTC)-41,
Mass Air Flow and
Intake Air Temper-
ature Sensor.>

R: DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-37, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MANIFOLD E21
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
1 2 3
1
2
3
E21
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
23
28
6
B21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
D20
A19
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
EN-07667

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. 13.3 kPa (100 mmHg, 3.94 detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of intake manifold absolute inHg)? cuit has returned to
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Subaru Select Moni- NOTE:
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF MANIFOLD Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from manifold In this case, repair
absolute pressure sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between manifold harness between
absolute pressure sensor connector and ECM and manifold
engine ground. absolute pressure
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. the following item:
ECM and manifold absolute pressure sensor harness between
connector. ECM and manifold
Connector & terminal absolute pressure
(B137) No. 20 — (E21) No. 2: sensor connector.
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- more? short circuit of har-
SOR CONNECTOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and manifold
chassis ground. absolute pressure
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the mani-
Check for poor contact of ECM and manifold manifold absolute pressure contact of ECM or fold absolute pres-
absolute pressure sensor connector. sensor connector? manifold absolute sure sensor. <Ref.
pressure sensor to FU(H4DOTC)-
connector. 42, Manifold Abso-
lute Pressure Sen-
sor.>

S: DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-39, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MANIFOLD E21
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
1 2 3
1
2
3
E21
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
23
28
6
B21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
D20
A19
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
EN-07667

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value 119.5 Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. kPa (896.5 mmHg, 35.29 inHg) detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of intake manifold absolute or more? cuit has returned to
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the measured value 119.5 Repair the short Go to step 3.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- kPa (896.5 mmHg, 35.29 inHg) circuit of harness
SOR CONNECTOR. or more? to power supply
2) Disconnect the connector from manifold manifold absolute
absolute pressure sensor. pressure sensor
3) Start the engine. connector.
4) Read the data of intake manifold absolute
pressure signal using Subaru Select Monitor or
general scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
manifold absolute pressure sensor connector • Open circuit of
Connector & terminal ECM and manifold
(E21) No. 1 — Engine ground: absolute pressure
sensor connector.
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of mani- Repair the poor Replace the mani-
Check for poor contact of manifold absolute fold absolute pressure sensor contact of manifold absolute pres-
pressure sensor connector. connector? fold absolute pressure sensor. <Ref.
sure sensor to FU(H4DOTC)-
connector. 42, Manifold Abso-
lute Pressure Sen-
sor.>

T: DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-41, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA- Is the engine coolant tempera- Replace the mass Go to DTC P0125.
TURE. ture 75°C (167°F) or higher? air flow and intake <Ref. to
1) Start the engine and warm up completely. air temperature EN(H4DOTC)(diag
2) Measure the engine coolant temperature sensor. <Ref. to )-125, DTC P0125
using the Subaru Select Monitor or general FU(H4DOTC)-41, INSUFFICIENT
scan tool. Mass Air Flow and COOLANT TEM-
NOTE: Intake Air Temper- PERATURE FOR
• Subaru Select Monitor ature Sensor.> CLOSED LOOP
For detailed operation procedures, refer to FUEL CONTROL,
“READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE”. <Ref. Diagnostic Proce-
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Subaru Select Moni- dure with Diagnos-
tor.> tic Trouble Code
• General scan tool (DTC).>

U: DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW

SOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
3
B220
MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
2

* *
*
B83
B30
C11
C31
C10
C22
B: B135 C: B136 ECM
B3 B220 B: B135 C: B136 B83
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
17
1 5 9 13 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08684

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. 120°C (248°F) or more? detected, the cir-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the mass Repair the short
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- more? air flow and intake circuit to ground in
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. air temperature harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sensor. <Ref. to ECM and mass air
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and FU(H4DOTC)-41, flow and intake air
the mass air flow and intake air temperature Mass Air Flow and temperature sen-
sensor. Intake Air Temper- sor connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and ature Sensor.>
chassis ground.

V: DTC P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

SOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
3
B220
MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
2

* *
*
B83
B30
C11
C31
C10
C22
B: B135 C: B136 ECM
B3 B220 B: B135 C: B136 B83
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
17
1 5 9 13 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08684

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. less than –40°C (–40°F)? detected, the cir-
ness may be the
cause.
Check for poor contact of ECM and mass air mass air flow and intake air contact of ECM or
flow and intake air temperature sensor connec- temperature sensor connector? mass air flow and
tor. intake air tempera-
ture sensor con-
nector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and the following item:
the mass air flow and intake air temperature • Open circuit in
sensor. harness between
3) Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and mass air
ECM and the mass air flow and intake air tem- flow and intake air
perature sensor connector. temperature sen-
Connector & terminal sor connector
(B135) No. 30 — (B3) No. 2: coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the mass
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit of harness air flow and intake
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. to power supply air temperature
1) Connect all connectors. between ECM and sensor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. mass air flow and FU(H4DOTC)-41,
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and intake air tempera- Mass Air Flow and
chassis ground. ture sensor con- Intake Air Temper-
Connector & terminal nector. ature Sensor.>

W: DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-48, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E8
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 1 2
E8
2
1
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E2 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
12
26 27 28 29 30 31
6
B21
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
D22
A29
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
EN-07668

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. (302°F) or more? detected, the cir-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the Repair short cir-
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR more? engine coolant cuit in harness to
CONNECTOR. temperature sen- ground between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sor. <Ref. to ECM and engine
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and FU(H4DOTC)-33, coolant tempera-
engine coolant temperature sensor. Engine Coolant ture sensor con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and Temperature Sen- nector.
chassis ground. sor.>

X: DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-50, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E8
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 1 2
E8
2
1
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E2 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
12
26 27 28 29 30 31
6
B21
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
D22
A29
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
EN-07668

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. ture less than –40°C (–40°F)? detected, the cir-
ness may be the
cause.
Check for poor contact of ECM and engine cool- engine coolant temperature contact of ECM or
ant temperature sensor connector. sensor connector? engine coolant
temperature sen-
sor connector.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR and connector.
CONNECTOR. NOTE:
engine coolant temperature sensor. • Open circuit in
ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor ECM and engine
connector. coolant tempera-
(B137) No. 22 — (E8) No. 2: nector
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR circuit of harness engine coolant
CONNECTOR. to power supply temperature sen-
1) Connect all connectors. between ECM and sor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. engine coolant FU(H4DOTC)-33,
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and temperature sen- Engine Coolant
chassis ground. sor connector. Temperature Sen-
Connector & terminal sor.>

Y: DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT

LOW
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-52, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE M/B No. 13
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
15 MAIN RELAY
B220
B17
B7
ECM
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137 E

A19
A29
A28
A18
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
A1
A2
C4
B138
*
B21
*
37
36
40
35
34
28
39
38
24
25
6
E2
*
5
1
2
3
ELECTRONIC
E E THROTTLE CONTROL
E
E57
B21
B220 B138 E57

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
17 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 5 9 13 5 6 7 8 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 6 10 14
19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07813

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 — (B136) No. 4:
throttle control connector and engine ground. FU(H4DOTC)-15, ECM and elec-
Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-58,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>

Z: DTC P0123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT

HIGH
SOR/SWITCH “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
15 MAIN RELAY
B220
B17
B7
ECM
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137 E

A19
A29
A28
A18
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
A1
A2
C4
B138
*
B21
*
37
36
40
35
34
28
39
38
24
25
6
E2
*
5
1
2
3
ELECTRONIC
E
E57
B21
B220 B138 E57

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
17 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 5 9 13 5 6 7 8 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 6 10 14
19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07813

Step Check Yes No

NECTOR. NOTE:
and electronic throttle control. • Open circuit in
coupling connector
NECTOR. NOTE:
ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- circuit of harness
NECTOR. to power supply
throttle control connector and engine ground. control connector.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? contact of elec- circuit of harness
NECTOR. tronic throttle con- to power supply
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol connector. between ECM and
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. Replace the elec- electronic throttle
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- tronic throttle con- control connector.
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 18: FU(H4DOTC)-15,
Throttle Body.>

AA:DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP

FUEL CONTROL
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-56, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPER-
ATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine does not return to idle.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK TIRE SIZE. Is the tire size as specified and Go to step 2. Replace the tire.
the same size as three other
wheels?
2 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT. Is the engine coolant normal? Go to step 3. Fill or replace the
Check the following items: engine coolant.
• Amount of engine coolant <Ref. to
• Engine coolant freeze CO(H4DOTC)-14,
• Contamination of engine coolant REPLACEMENT,
Engine Coolant.>
3 CHECK THERMOSTAT. Does the thermostat remain Replace the ther- Replace the
opened? mostat. <Ref. to engine coolant
CO(H4DOTC)-19, temperature sen-
Thermostat.> sor. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-33,
Engine Coolant
Temperature Sen-
sor.>

AB:DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR STA-

BLE OPERATION
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-58, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Is the resistance of engine cool- Repair the poor Replace the
SENSOR. ant temperature sensor differ- contact of ECM engine coolant
1) Disconnect the connectors from the engine ent between when engine connector. temperature sen-
coolant temperature sensor. coolant is cold and after sor. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between engine warmed up? FU(H4DOTC)-33,
coolant temperature sensor terminals when the Engine Coolant
engine coolant is cold and after warmed up. Temperature Sen-
Terminals sor.>
No. 1 — No. 2:
AC:DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-60, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE
COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEMPERATURE), Diagnostic Trouble
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Thermostat remains open.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT. Is the engine coolant amount Go to step 2. Refill the engine
normal? coolant. <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-14,
Engine Coolant.>
2 CHECK RADIATOR FAN. Does the radiator fan continu- Repair radiator fan Replace the ther-
1) Start the engine. ously rotate for 3 minutes or circuit. <Ref. to mostat. <Ref. to
2) Check the radiator fan operation. more during idling? CO(H4DOTC)-25, CO(H4DOTC)-19,
Radiator Main Fan Thermostat.>
and Fan Motor.>
and <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-27,
Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.>

AD:DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-62, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLT-
AGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 1 2
3 4
11 8
10
B22 E3
1
9 B220
E
B220
FRONT OXYGEN 17
(A/F) SENSOR 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
E24
B21
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
7
1
2
B22
E
B22
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
C19
C18
C9
C5
C6
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C: B136 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
E2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08618

Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
TOR. ness between
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and gen (A/F) sensor
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. connector.
chassis ground.
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>

AE:DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-64, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLT-
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 1 2
3 4
11 8
10
B22 E3
1
9 B220
E
B220
FRONT OXYGEN 17
(A/F) SENSOR 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
E24
B21
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
7
1
2
B22
E
B22
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
C19
C18
C9
C5
C6
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C: B136 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
E2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08618

Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 8 V or more? Repair the short Replace the front
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in oxygen (A/F) sen-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and FU(H4DOTC)-54,
2) Disconnect the connectors from front oxy- front oxygen (A/F) Front Oxygen (A/F)
gen (A/F) sensor. sensor connector. Sensor.>
chassis ground.

AF:DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-66, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RE-
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair the exhaust Replace the front
NOTE: system? system. oxygen (A/F) sen-
Check the following items. sor. <Ref. to
• Loose installation of front portion of exhaust FU(H4DOTC)-54,
pipe onto cylinder heads Front Oxygen (A/F)
• Loose connection between front exhaust pipe Sensor.>
and front catalytic converter
• Damage of exhaust pipe resulting in a hole

AG:DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SEN-

SOR 1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-69, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 1 2
3 4
11 8
10
B22 E3
1
9 B220
E
B220
FRONT OXYGEN 17
(A/F) SENSOR 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
E24
B21
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
7
1
2
B22
E
B22
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
C19
C18
C9
C5
C6
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C: B136 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
E2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08618

Step Check Yes No

TOR. NOTE:
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. • Open circuit in
coupling connector
sensor connector. FU(H4DOTC)-54,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>

AH:DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-71, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLT-
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY B83 E25

M/B No.15 1 2 3
12 4 5 6
1 2
11 16 3 4
10
B22 E3 B220
2
9
E
B220 17
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
SENSOR 2 6 10 14
19
E25
B21
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E3
15
10
9
B22
E
B22 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
* 13 14 15 16
C20
B30
C9
B6
B83
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135
ECM 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08619

Step Check Yes No

maximum)
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
inside.
(B135) No. 30 — (E25) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. FU(H4DOTC)-56, In this case, repair
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
NOTE: <Ref. to
Check the following items. FU(H4DOTC)-56,
system parts sor.>
• Damage (crack, hole etc.) between front oxy-
gen (A/F) sensor and rear oxygen sensor

AI: DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-74, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLT-
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY B83 E25

M/B No.15 1 2 3
12 4 5 6
1 2
11 16 3 4
10
B22 E3 B220
2
9
E
B220 17
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
SENSOR 2 6 10 14
19
E25
B21
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E3
15
10
9
B22
E
B22 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
* 13 14 15 16
C20
B30
C9
B6
B83
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135
ECM 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08619

Step Check Yes No

rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
inside.
(B135) No. 30 — (E25) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
NOTE: <Ref. to
system parts sor.>

AJ:DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-75, DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RE-
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY B83 E25

M/B No.15 1 2 3
12 4 5 6
1 2
11 16 3 4
10
B22 E3 B220
2
9
E
B220 17
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
SENSOR 2 6 10 14
19
E25
B21
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E3
15
10
9
B22
E
B22 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
* 13 14 15 16
C20
B30
C9
B6
B83
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135
ECM 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08619

Step Check Yes No

nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen ness between
sensor connector and chassis ground. ECM and rear oxy-
Connector & terminal gen sensor con-
(E25) No. 3 — Chassis ground: nector.
3 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the rear Even if DTC is
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen oxygen sensor. detected, the cir-
sensor terminals. <Ref. to cuit has returned to
Terminals FU(H4DOTC)-56, a normal condition
No. 3 — No. 4 Rear Oxygen Sen- at this time. Repro-
sor.> duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.

AK:DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK1

SENSOR2)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-83, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
DETECTED (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY B83 E25

M/B No.15 1 2 3
12 4 5 6
1 2
11 16 3 4
10
B22 E3 B220
2
9
E
B220 17
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
SENSOR 2 6 10 14
19
E25
B21
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E3
15
10
9
B22
E
B22 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
* 13 14 15 16
C20
B30
C9
B6
B83
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135
ECM 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08619

Step Check Yes No

maximum)
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
inside.
(B135) No. 30 — (E25) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

Step Check Yes No

gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
NOTE: <Ref. to
system parts sor.>
AL:DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT (BANK1 SENSOR2)

Refer to DTC P0037 for diagnostic procedure. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-98, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
AM:DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)
Refer to DTC P0172 for diagnostic procedure. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-143, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO
RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

AN:DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-88, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diag-
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
intake system?
CAUTION: • Clogged fuel
Be careful not to spill fuel. return line or bent
Measure the fuel pressure while disconnecting hose
pressure regulator vacuum hose from intake Fuel pressure is
manifold. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-25, INSPEC- too low:
TION, Fuel Pressure.> • Improper fuel
CAUTION: pump discharge
Release fuel pressure before removing the • Clogged fuel
fuel pressure gauge. supply line
NOTE:
If fuel pressure does not increase, squeeze the
fuel return hose 2 to 3 times, then measure fuel
pressure again.
After connecting the pressure regulator vacuum 304 kPa (2.8 — 3.1 kg/cm2, 40 ing item.
hose, measure fuel pressure. <Ref. to — 44 psi)? Fuel pressure is
ME(H4DOTC)-25, INSPECTION, Fuel Pres- too high:
sure.> • Faulty pressure
CAUTION: regulator
fuel pressure gauge. return line or bent
NOTE: hose
• If fuel pressure does not increase, squeeze Fuel pressure is
fuel return hose 2 to 3 times, then measure fuel too low:
pressure again. • Faulty pressure
• If the measured value at this step is out of regulator
specification, check or replace pressure regula- • Improper fuel
tor and pressure regulator vacuum hose. pump discharge
• Clogged fuel
supply line

Step Check Yes No

ture sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor FU(H4DOTC)-33,
tor.>
(167°F). FU(H4DOTC)-41,
2) Place the shift lever in neutral position. Mass Air Flow and
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF. Intake Air Temper-
4) Turn all the accessory switches to OFF. ature Sensor.>
NOTE:
tor.>
7 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Subtract ambient temperature Repair the poor Check the mass air
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. from intake air temperature. Is contact of ECM flow and intake air
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until the obtained value –10 — 50°C connector. temperature sen-
coolant temperature is higher than 75°C (–18 — 90°F)? sor.
(167°F). <Ref. to
2) Place the shift lever in neutral position. FU(H4DOTC)-41,
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF. Mass Air Flow and
4) Turn all the accessory switches to OFF. Intake Air Temper-
5) Open the front hood. ature Sensor.>
NOTE:
tor.>

AO:DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-90, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A”
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
nostic Trouble EC(H4DOTC)-14,
Code (DTC)”. Fuel Temperature
<Ref. to Sensor.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-76, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>

AP:DTC P0182 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
3
2
R58
R57
11
7
R15
R333
3
8
i155
i3
11
5
B38
*
*
B83
B30
C23
B: B135 : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

ECM
*
C: B136
R57 R58 B38 B: B135 C: B136 B83
i155 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
3 4 5 6 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
5 6 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11
EN-08685

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. (248°F) or higher? detected, the cir-
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Subaru Select Moni- the diagnosis
tor.> again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the fuel Repair the ground
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- more? temperature sen- short circuit of har-
TOR. sor. <Ref. to ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. EC(H4DOTC)-14, ECM and fuel
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and Fuel Temperature pump connector.
fuel temperature sensor. Sensor.>
chassis ground.

AQ:DTC P0183 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
3
2
R58
R57
11
7
R15
R333
3
8
i155
i3
11
5
B38
*
*
B83
B30
C23
B: B135 : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

ECM
*
C: B136
R57 R58 B38 B: B135 C: B136 B83
i155 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
3 4 5 6 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
5 6 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11
EN-08685

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the temperature less than – Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. 40°C (–40°F)? detected, the cir-
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Subaru Select Moni- the diagnosis
tor.> again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the Repair any poor Go to step 3.
Repair any poor contact between the ECM and ECM or fuel temperature sen- contact between
fuel temperature sensor connectors. sor connectors? the ECM and fuel
temperature sen-
sor connectors.
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
fuel temperature sensor. • Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of the harness harness between
between the ECM and fuel temperature sensor ECM and fuel tem-
connector. perature sensor
(B136) No. 23 — (R58) No. 2: • Poor contact of
(B135) No. 30 — (R58) No. 3: coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the fuel
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in temperature sen-
1) Connect all connectors. between the ECM EC(H4DOTC)-14,
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. and fuel tempera- Fuel Temperature
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and ture sensor con- Sensor.>

AR:DTC P0222 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT

LOW
SOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
15 MAIN RELAY
B220
B17
B7
ECM
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137 E

A19
A29
A28
A18
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
A1
A2
C4
B138
*
B21
*
37
36
40
35
34
28
39
38
24
25
6
E2
*
5
1
2
3
ELECTRONIC
E
E57
B21
B220 B138 E57

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
17 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 5 9 13 5 6 7 8 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 6 10 14
19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07813

Step Check Yes No

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM tronic throttle con-
and electronic throttle control. trol connector.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the elec- Repair the ground
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? tronic throttle con- short circuit of har-
2) Measure the resistance between electronic trol. <Ref. to ness between
throttle control connector and engine ground. FU(H4DOTC)-15, ECM and elec-
Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-58,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>


HIGH
SOR/SWITCH “B” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
15 MAIN RELAY
B220
B17
B7
ECM
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137 E

A19
A29
A28
A18
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
A1
A2
C4
B138
*
B21
*
37
36
40
35
34
28
39
38
24
25
6
E2
*
5
1
2
3
ELECTRONIC
E
E57
B21
B220 B138 E57

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
17 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 5 9 13 5 6 7 8 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 6 10 14
19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07813

Step Check Yes No

NECTOR. NOTE:
coupling connector
NECTOR. NOTE:
ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- circuit of harness
NECTOR. to power supply
throttle control connector and engine ground. control connector.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? contact of elec- circuit of harness
NECTOR. tronic throttle con- to power supply
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol connector. between ECM and
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. Replace the elec- electronic throttle
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- tronic throttle con- control connector.
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 28: FU(H4DOTC)-15,
Throttle Body.>

AT:DTC P0230 FUEL PUMP PRIMARY CIRCUIT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-101, DTC P0230 FUEL PUMP PRIMARY CIRCUIT,
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
M/B No. 20
14 20 21
i3 B38 FUEL PUMP

B220
RELAY
i155
2
R333
E
8
FUEL PUMP
CONTROL UNIT
R122
10
5
6
7
9
R15 R333
1
1
4
R57 i155
i3
10
4
B38
C33
B10
5
FUEL ECM E
PUMP
M B: B135
R58
C: B136
R58 R122 C: B136
B220 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2
5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3 4 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
17
1 5 9 13 5 6 B38 R57 i155 B: B135 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
7 8 9 10 11 12 8 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-07808

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT TO FUEL Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
PUMP CONTROL UNIT. supply circuit.
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump In this case, repair
control unit. the following item:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. • Open or ground
4) Measure the voltage between fuel pump short circuit of har-
control unit connector and chassis ground. ness between fuel
Connector & terminal pump relay and
(R122) No. 8 (+) — Chassis ground (–): fuel pump control
unit connector
• Poor contact of
fuel pump relay
connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT OF FUEL PUMP Is the resistance less than 5 Ω? Go to step 3. Repair the open
CONTROL UNIT. circuit in harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between fuel pump
2) Measure the resistance of harness between control unit and
fuel pump control unit connector and chassis chassis ground.
ground.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUEL PUMP Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
CONTROL UNIT AND FUEL PUMP CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump. In this case, repair
fuel pump control unit and fuel pump connector. • Open circuit in
(R122) No. 9 — (R58) No. 5: fuel pump control
(R122) No. 10 — (R58) No. 6: unit and fuel pump
connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUEL PUMP Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 5. Repair the short
CONTROL UNIT AND FUEL PUMP CONNEC- more? circuit to ground in
Measure the resistance between fuel pump fuel pump control
control unit connector and chassis ground. unit and fuel pump
FUEL PUMP CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR. and connector.
ECM and fuel pump control unit connector. the following item:
(B136) No. 33 — (R122) No. 6: harness between
(B135) No. 10 — (R122) No. 7: ECM and fuel
pump control unit
connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

Step Check Yes No

FUEL PUMP CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR. more? circuit to ground in
Measure the resistance between fuel pump harness between
control unit connector and chassis ground. ECM and fuel
Connector & terminal pump control unit
(R122) No. 6 — Chassis ground: connector.
Check for poor contact of ECM and fuel pump
fuel pump control unit connec- contact of ECM or
control unit connector. tor? fuel pump control
unit connector.
8 CHECK EXPERIENCE OF RUNNING OUT OF Has the vehicle experienced Finish the diagno- Replace the fuel
FUEL. running out of fuel? sis. pump control unit.
NOTE: <Ref. to
DTC may be re- FU(H4DOTC)-65,
corded as a result Fuel Pump Control
of fuel pump idling Unit.>
while running out
of fuel.

AU:DTC P0244 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER WASTEGATE SOLENOID “A”

RANGE/PERFORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-103, DTC P0244 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER
WASTEGATE SOLENOID “A” RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-76, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK WASTEGATE ACTUATOR PIPING Are there any damage or dis- Connect the Replace the waste-
AND WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID connection of hose in waste- wastegate actuator gate control sole-
VALVE PIPING. gate actuator piping or pipe or wastegate noid valve. <Ref. to
wastegate control solenoid control solenoid FU(H4DOTC)-52,
valve piping? valve pipe properly. Wastegate Control
If defective, Solenoid Valve.>
replace the hose.

AV:DTC P0245 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER WASTEGATE SOLENOID “A” LOW

WASTEGATE SOLENOID “A” LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
B220
4
3
17
2 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
1 2 6 10 14
19
B220
B134
E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B134 ECM
E64
33
1 2
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B21 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
48
50
E2
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E64
1
2
WASTEGATE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
EN-07814

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
a normal condition
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary open or
ness or temporary
poor contact of
connector may be
the cause.
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO WASTEGATE Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the power
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. supply circuit.
Measure the voltage between wastegate con-
trol solenoid valve connector and engine
ground.
WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE more? short circuit of har-
CONNECTOR. ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and waste-
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and gate control sole-
wastegate control solenoid valve. noid valve
3) Measure the resistance between wastegate connector.
ground.
WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE and connector.
CONNECTOR. NOTE:
ECM and wastegate control solenoid valve con- the following item:
nector. • Open circuit of
(B134) No. 33 — (E64) No. 2: ECM and waste-
gate control sole-
noid valve
connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLE- Is the resistance 10 — 100 Ω? Repair poor con- Replace the waste-
NOID VALVE. tact of wastegate gate control sole-
1) Remove the wastegate control solenoid control solenoid noid valve. <Ref. to
valve. valve connector. FU(H4DOTC)-52,
2) Measure the resistance between wastegate Wastegate Control
control solenoid valve terminals. Solenoid Valve.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:

AW:DTC P0246 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER WASTEGATE SOLENOID “A” HIGH

WASTEGATE SOLENOID “A” HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
B220
4
3
17
2 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
1 2 6 10 14
19
B220
B134
E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B134 ECM
E64
33
1 2
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B21 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
48
50
E2
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E64
1
2
WASTEGATE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
EN-07814

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair short cir- Go to step 2.
WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE cuit of the harness
CONNECTOR. to power supply
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and wastegate control
wastegate control solenoid valve. solenoid valve con-
chassis ground.
2 CHECK WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLE- Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the waste- Repair the poor
NOID VALVE. gate control sole- contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. noid valve. <Ref. to connector.
2) Measure the resistance between wastegate FU(H4DOTC)-52,
control solenoid valve terminals. Wastegate Control
No. 1 — No. 2:

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0304. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-163, DTC P0304 CYLIN-
DER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
AY:DTC P0302 CYLINDER 2 MISFIRE DETECTED
NOTE:
AZ:DTC P0303 CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE DETECTED
NOTE:

BA:DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED

• Immediately at fault recognition (A misfire which could damage catalyst occurs.)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-113, DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED,
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Improper idling
• Rough driving
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
E
B220
B134 ECM
10
11
12
13
B21
48
54
53
52
51
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
1

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E5 E16 B220 B21 B134
E6 E17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07809

Step Check Yes No

ders.
coupling connector
terminals on faulty cylinder. to FU(H4DOTC)-
No. 1 — No. 2:
connector of faulty cylinders and engine injector circuit. In this case, repair
ground. the following item:
#2 (E16) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): the main relay and
#3 (E6) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): fuel injector con-
#4 (E17) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): nector on faulty
cylinders
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor

Step Check Yes No

7 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance 5 — 20 Ω? Replace the faulty Go to step 8.
2) Measure the resistance between fuel injec- to FU(H4DOTC)-
tor terminals on faulty cylinder. 44, Fuel Injector.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
8 CHECK INSTALLATION OF CAMSHAFT PO- Is the camshaft position sensor Tighten the cam- Go to step 9.
SITION SENSOR/CRANKSHAFT POSITION or crankshaft position sensor shaft position sen-
SENSOR. loosely installed? sor or crankshaft
position sensor.
<Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-36,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.> <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-34,
Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>
ME(H4DOTC)-45, REMOVAL, Timing Belt ME(H4DOTC)-60,
Cover.> Crank Sprocket.>
alignment mark on crank sprocket with align- ME(H4DOTC)-50,
SOCKET
11 CHECK FUEL LEVEL. Is the fuel meter indication Go to step 12. Refill the fuel so
higher than the “Lower” level? that the fuel meter
indication is higher
than the “Lower”
level, and proceed
to the next step. Go
to step 12.
12 CHECK STATUS OF MALFUNCTION INDI- Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 14. Go to step 13.
CATOR LIGHT. light illuminate or blink?
1) Clear the memory using the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool.
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-54, Clear Memory
Mode.>
2) Start the engine, and drive the vehicle 10
minutes or more.

Step Check Yes No

13 CHECK CAUSE OF MISFIRE. Was the cause of misfire identi- Finish diagnostics Repair the poor
fied when the engine is run- operation, if the contact of connec-
ning? engine has no tor.
abnormality. NOTE:
the following item:
• Poor contact of
ignition coil con-
nector
• Poor contact of
fuel injector con-
nector on faulty
cylinders
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
14 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Is there any fault in air intake Repair the air Go to step 15.
system? intake system.
NOTE:
Check the follow-
ing items.
• Are there air
leaks or air suction
caused by loose or
dislocated nuts
and bolts?
• Are there cracks
or any disconnec-
tion of hoses?
15 CHECK MISFIRE SYMPTOM. Does the Subaru Select Moni- Go to step 20. Go to step 16.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor or general scan tool indicate
2) Check for DTC. <Ref. to only one DTC?
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-42, Read Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
20 ONLY ONE CYLINDER. Is there any fault in the cylin- Repair or replace Go to DTC P0171.
der? faulty parts. <Ref. to
NOTE: EN(H4DOTC)(diag
Check the follow- )-142, DTC P0171
(DTC).>

Step Check Yes No

• Check the fol- )-142, DTC P0171
ratio (DTC).>
• If any fault is not
found, check the
“IGNITION CON-
TROL SYSTEM” of
#1 and #2 cylin-
ders side. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(di-
ag)-71, IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM, Diagnostics
for Engine Starting
Failure.>
• Check the fol- )-142, DTC P0171
ratio (DTC).>
• If any fault is not
found, check the
“IGNITION CON-
TROL SYSTEM” of
#3 and #4 cylin-
ders side. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(di-
ag)-71, IGNITION
CONTROL SYS-
TEM, Diagnostics
for Engine Starting
Failure.>
belt teeth

Step Check Yes No

belt teeth
25 CYLINDER AT RANDOM. Is the engine idle rough? Go to DTC P0171. Repair or replace
<Ref. to faulty parts.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag NOTE:
)-142, DTC P0171 Check the follow-
SYSTEM TOO ing items.
LEAN (BANK 1), • Spark plug
Diagnostic Proce- • Fuel injector
dure with Diagnos- • Compression ra-
tic Trouble Code tio
(DTC).>

BB:DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SEN-

SOR)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-114, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
KNOCK SENSOR
E14
1 2
2
E14
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
6
B21 26 27 28 29 30 31
E B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A29
D2
D8
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
EN-07671

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 600 kΩ or Go to step 2. Repair the poor
KNOCK SENSOR CONNECTOR. more? contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM.
nectors.
(B137) No. 2 — (B134) No. 29:
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR. Is the resistance 600 kΩ or Replace the knock Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connector from knock sen- more? sensor. <Ref. to and connector.
sor. FU(H4DOTC)-38, NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance between knock Knock Sensor.> In this case, repair
sensor terminals. the following item:
Terminals • Open circuit in
ECM and knock
sensor connector
• Poor contact of
knock sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

BC:DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SEN-

SOR)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-116, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
KNOCK SENSOR
E14
1 2
2
E14
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
6
B21 26 27 28 29 30 31
E B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A29
D2
D8
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
EN-07671

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 500 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
KNOCK SENSOR CONNECTOR. kΩ?
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM.
nectors.
(B137) No. 2 — (B134) No. 29:
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 500 Replace the knock Repair the ground
1) Disconnect the connector from knock sen- kΩ? sensor. <Ref. to short circuit of har-
sor. FU(H4DOTC)-38, ness between
2) Measure the resistance between knock Knock Sensor.> ECM and knock
sensor connectors. sensor connector.
Terminals NOTE:
No. 1 — No. 2: The harness be-
tween both con-
nectors are
shielded. Remove
the shield and re-
pair the short cir-
cuit of the harness.
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 2 V or more? Even if DTC is Repair the poor
1) Connect the connector to ECM. detected, the cir- contact of ECM
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. cuit has returned to connector.
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and a normal condition
chassis ground. at this time. Repro-
Connector & terminal duce the failure,
(B137) No. 2 (+) — Chassis ground (–): and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.

BD:DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-118, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
“A” CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
CRANKSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR
E10
1 2
2
E10
B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
E2
14
B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
E 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
25
17
31
B137 ECM
EN-07686

Step Check Yes No

securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-34,
Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>
2 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is the resistance between 1 and Go to step 3. Replace the crank-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 4 kΩ? shaft position sen-
2) Remove the crankshaft position sensor. sor. <Ref. to
<Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-34, REMOVAL, Crank- FU(H4DOTC)-34,
shaft Position Sensor.> Crankshaft Posi-
3) Measure the resistance between terminals tion Sensor.>
of crankshaft position sensor.
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the poor Repair the harness
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CON- contact of ECM and connector.
NECTOR. and crankshaft NOTE:
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. position sensor In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance of harness between connector. the following item:
ECM and crankshaft position sensor connector. • Open circuit in
(B137) No. 17 — (E10) No. 1: ECM and crank-
(B137) No. 25 — (E10) No. 2: shaft position sen-
sor connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

BE:DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-120, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
“A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
Turn the ignition switch to OFF. securely? sor installation bolt
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-34,
Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>
2 CHECK CRANK SPROCKET. Are crank sprocket teeth Replace the crank Go to step 3.
Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to cracked or damaged? sprocket. <Ref. to
3 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the timing belt dislocated Repair the installa- Replace the crank-
Turn the crankshaft using ST, and align the timing belt. <Ref. to sor. <Ref. to
alignment mark on crank sprocket with align- ME(H4DOTC)-50, FU(H4DOTC)-34,
ment mark on cylinder block. Timing Belt.> Crankshaft Posi-
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT tion Sensor.>
SOCKET

BF:DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SIN-

GLE SENSOR)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-122, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
“A” CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
INTAKE INTAKE
B220 CAMSHAFT CAMSHAFT
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR LH SENSOR RH
E
2
3
1
2
3
E35 E36
E2
48
13
2
5
B21
16
24
30
B137 ECM
E35 B220 B137 B21
E36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
2 6 10 14 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
19 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 2 3
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07815

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF CAMSHAFT Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
POSITION SENSOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from camshaft In this case, repair
position sensor. the following item:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. • Open circuit or
4) Measure the voltage between camshaft short circuit to
position sensor connector and engine ground. ground in harness
Connector & terminal between main re-
(E36) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): lay connector and
camshaft position
sensor connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. NOTE:
camshaft position sensor connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and camshaft
(B137) No. 24 — (E36) No. 2: position sensor
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in
TOR. the harness
Measure the voltage between camshaft posi- between ECM and
tion sensor connector and engine ground. camshaft position
5 CHECK CONDITION OF CAMSHAFT POSI- Is the camshaft position sensor Go to step 6. Tighten the cam-
TION SENSOR. installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-36,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
6 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is there any abnormality in Replace the cam- Repair the follow-
Check the waveform of the camshaft position waveform? shaft position sen- ing item.
sensor. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-18, sor. <Ref. to • Poor contact of
Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal.> FU(H4DOTC)-36, ECM connector
Camshaft Position • Poor contact of
Sensor.> camshaft position
sensor connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

BG:DTC P0345 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT (BANK 2)

“A” CIRCUIT (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
INTAKE INTAKE
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR LH SENSOR RH
E
2
3
1
2
3
E35 E36
E2
48
13
2
5
B21
16
24
30
B137 ECM
E35 B220 B137 B21
E36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
2 6 10 14 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
19 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 2 3
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07815

Step Check Yes No

camshaft position
sensor connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. NOTE:
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. the harness
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-36,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
sensor connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

BH:DTC P0365 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “B” CIRCUIT (BANK 1)

“B” CIRCUIT (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
EXHAUST EXHAUST
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR LH SENSOR RH
E
2
3
1
2
3
E65 E62
E2
26
48
15
5
B21
29
23
30
B137 ECM
E62 B220 B137 B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E65
17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
2 6 10 14 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
19 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 2 3
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07816

Step Check Yes No

camshaft position
sensor connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. NOTE:
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. the harness
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-36,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
sensor connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

BI: DTC P0390 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR “B” CIRCUIT (BANK 2)

“B” CIRCUIT (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
EXHAUST EXHAUST
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR LH SENSOR RH
E
2
3
1
2
3
E65 E62
E2
26
48
15
5
B21
29
23
30
B137 ECM
E62 B220 B137 B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E65
17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
2 6 10 14 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
19 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 2 3
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07816

Step Check Yes No

camshaft position
sensor connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. NOTE:
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. the harness
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-36,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
sensor connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

BJ:DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK

1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-127, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY
BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
• Idle mixture is out of specifications.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY B83 E25

M/B No.15 1 2 3
12 4 5 6
1 2
11 16 3 4
10
B22 E3 B220
2
9
E
B220 17
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
SENSOR 2 6 10 14
19
E25
B21
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E3
15
10
9
B22
E
B22 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
* 13 14 15 16
C20
B30
C9
B6
B83
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135
ECM 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08619

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair or replace Go to step 2.
Check for gas leaks or air suction caused by system? the exhaust sys-
loose or dislocated nuts and bolts, and open tem. <Ref. to
hole at exhaust pipes. EX(H4DOTC)-2,
NOTE: General Descrip-
Check the following positions. tion.>
• Between cylinder head and front exhaust
pipe
• Between front exhaust pipe and front catalytic
converter
• Between front catalytic converter and rear
catalytic converter
• Loose or improperly attached front oxygen
(A/F) sensor or rear oxygen sensor
2 CHECK WAVEFORM DATA ON THE SUBA- Is a normal waveform dis- Even if DTC is Go to step 3.
RU SELECT MONITOR (WHILE DRIVING). played? detected, the cir-
1) Drive at a constant speed between 80 — cuit has returned to
112 km/h (50 — 70 MPH). a normal condition
2) After 5 minutes have elapsed in the condi- at this time. Repro-
tion of step 1), use the Subaru Select Monitor duce the failure,
while still driving to read the waveform data. and then perform
• At normal condition the diagnosis
again.
1
NOTE:
REAR OXYGEN In this case, tem-
SENSOR VOLTAGE porary poor con-
(V)
tact of connector,
0 temporary open or
1.5
A/F SENSOR
ness may be the
OUTPUT LAMBDA 1 cause.
0.5
10 sec/div
EN-06666
• At abnormal condition (numerous inversion)
REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)
0
1.5
A/F SENSOR
OUTPUT LAMBDA 1
0.5
10 sec/div
EN-06667

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK WAVEFORM DATA ON THE SUBA- Is a normal waveform dis- Go to step 4. • The waveform is
RU SELECT MONITOR (WHILE IDLING). played? displayed at abnor-
1) Run the engine at idle. mal condition 1: Go
2) In the condition of step 1), use the Subaru to step 4.
Select Monitor to read the waveform data. • The waveform is
• At normal condition displayed at abnor-
mal condition 2: Go
1
to step 5.
REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)
0
10 sec/div
EN-06668
• At abnormal condition 1 (numerous inversion)
REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)
0
10 sec/div
EN-06669
• At abnormal condition 2 (noise input)
REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)
0
10 sec/div
EN-06670
4 CHECK CATALYTIC CONVERTER. Is the catalytic converter dam- Replace the cata- Go to step 5.
aged? lytic converter.
<Ref. to
EC(H4DOTC)-3,
Front Catalytic
Converter.>
inside.

Step Check Yes No

2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and Repair the follow-
rear oxygen sensor. ing locations.
(B135) No. 30 — (E25) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
7 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 0.2 — 0.5 V? Go to step 8. Repair the harness
1) Connect the connector to ECM. NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Repair the follow-
3) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen ing locations.
sensor connector and chassis ground. • Open circuit in
gen sensor con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
8 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SHIELD. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the rear Repair the open
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. oxygen sensor. circuit of rear oxy-
2) Expose the rear oxygen sensor connector <Ref. to gen sensor har-
body side harness sensor shield. FU(H4DOTC)-56, ness.
3) Measure the resistance between sensor Rear Oxygen Sen-
shield and chassis ground. sor.>

BK:DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT-

ED (SMALL LEAK)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-129, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON-
TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Fuel odor
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
NOTE:
tightening.
genuine fuel filler
cap.
<Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-75,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
4 CHECK DRAIN VALVE OPERATION. Does the drain valve operate? Go to step 5. Replace the drain
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. EC(H4DOTC)-21,
3) Perform operation check for the drain valve Drain Valve.>
using the Subaru Select Monitor.
NOTE:
The drain valve can be operated using Subaru
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-55, System Oper-
ation Check Mode.>
5 CHECK OPERATION OF PURGE CONTROL Does the purge control sole- Go to step 6. Replace the purge
SOLENOID VALVE. noid valve operate? control solenoid
Perform operation check for the purge control valve. <Ref. to
solenoid valve using the Subaru Select Monitor. EC(H4DOTC)-9,
NOTE: Purge Control
Check Mode.>

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK OPERATION OF PRESSURE CON- Does the pressure control sole- Go to step 7. Replace the pres-
TROL SOLENOID VALVE. noid valve operate? sure control sole-
Perform operation check for the pressure con- noid valve. <Ref. to
trol solenoid valve using the Subaru Select EC(H4DOTC)-18,
Monitor. Pressure Control
NOTE: Solenoid Valve.>
The pressure control solenoid valve operation
can be executed using the Subaru Select Mon-
itor. For detailed procedures, refer to “SYSTEM
OPERATION CHECK MODE”. <Ref. to
Check Mode.>
TROL SYSTEM LINE. 1.0 mm (0.04 in) dia. on evapo- the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ration line? line. <Ref. to
2) Remove the delivery (test) mode fuse. FU(H4DOTC)-88,
Fuel Delivery,
Return and Evapo-
ration Lines.>
mm (0.04 in) dia. in it? to EC(H4DOTC)-5,
Canister.>
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)- there any hole of more than 1.0 the fuel tank. <Ref.
68, Fuel Tank.> mm (0.04 in) dia. in it? to FU(H4DOTC)-
68, Fuel Tank.>

BL:DTC P0447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT OPEN
TROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B220
B: B135 D: B137 ECM E
D15
D6
B3
B4
B38
15
3
B21
i3
44
11
48
E2
i155
5
i54
12
11
R333
R99
R15
5
R57
R68 R144 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
1
2
2
PRESSURE
PURGE CONTROL PURGE CONTROL
CONTROL DRAIN VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE 1 SOLENOID VALVE 2
SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R68 R144 i54 R57 i155 B38 B21
E52 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D: B137 B: B135 B220
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 19
26 27 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08620

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
a normal condition
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary open or
ness or temporary
poor contact of
connector may be
the cause.
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO DRAIN VALVE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the power
Measure the voltage between drain valve con- supply circuit.
nector and chassis ground.
DRAIN VALVE CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM ECM and drain
and drain valve. valve connector.
3) Measure the resistance between the drain
valve connector and chassis ground.
DRAIN VALVE CONNECTOR. and connector.
ECM and drain valve connector. In this case, repair
(B135) No. 4 — (R144) No. 2: • Open circuit of
harness between
ECM and drain
valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
6 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Is the resistance 10 — 100 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the drain
Measure the resistance between drain valve contact of drain valve. <Ref. to
terminals. valve connector. EC(H4DOTC)-21,
Terminals Drain Valve.>
No. 1 — No. 2:

BM:DTC P0448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT SHORTED
TROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B220
B: B135 D: B137 ECM E
D15
D6
B3
B4
B38
15
3
B21
i3
44
11
48
E2
i155
5
i54
12
11
R333
R99
R15
5
R57
R68 R144 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
1
2
2
PRESSURE
CONTROL DRAIN VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R68 R144 i54 R57 i155 B38 B21
E52 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D: B137 B: B135 B220
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 19
26 27 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08620

Step Check Yes No

DRAIN VALVE CONNECTOR. circuit to power in
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM between ECM and
and drain valve. drain valve con-
chassis ground.
2 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the drain Repair the poor
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. valve. <Ref. to contact of ECM
2) Measure the resistance between drain valve EC(H4DOTC)-21, connector.
terminals. Drain Valve.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:

BN:DTC P0451 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR
TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
2) Open the fuel flap.
2 CHECK PRESSURE/VACUUM LINE. Is there any fault in pressure/ Repair or replace Replace the fuel
NOTE: vacuum line? the hoses and tank pressure sen-
Check the following items. pipes. sor. <Ref. to
• Disconnection, leakage and clogging of the EC(H4DOTC)-16,
vacuum hoses and pipes between fuel tank Fuel Tank Pres-
pressure sensor and fuel tank sure Sensor.>
• Disconnection, leakage and clogging of air
ventilation hoses and pipes between fuel filler
pipe and fuel tank

BO:DTC P0452 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR LOW INPUT
TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
PRESSURE
SENSOR
2
1
3
R47
R57
10
R15
R333
11
10
9
i155
i3
12
2

B38 *
*
*
B83
B22
C21
B30
B: B135
ECM
C: B136
R47 R57 B38 B83 B: B135 C: B136
i155 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 4 5 6 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
3 4 5 6 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08621

Step Check Yes No

1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. –7.45 kPa (–55.89 mmHg, – detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of fuel tank pressure sensor 2.2003 inHg)? cuit has returned to
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
POWER SUPPLY. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank In this case, repair
pressure sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between the fuel tank harness between
pressure sensor connector and chassis ground. ECM and fuel tank
(R47) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. NOTE:
the ECM and fuel tank pressure sensor connec- harness between
tor. ECM and fuel tank
(B136) No. 21 — (R47) No. 2: connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- more? short circuit of har-
TOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and fuel tank
chassis ground. pressure sensor
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the Repair the poor Replace the fuel
Check for poor contact between the ECM and ECM or fuel tank pressure sen- contact of the ECM tank pressure sen-
fuel tank pressure sensor connector. sor connector? or fuel tank pressor. <Ref. to
sure sensor con- EC(H4DOTC)-16,
nector. Fuel Tank Pres-
sure Sensor.>

BP:DTC P0453 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR HIGH INPUT
TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
PRESSURE
SENSOR
2
1
3
R47
R57
10
R15
R333
11
10
9
i155
i3
12
2

B38 *
*
*
B83
B22
C21
B30
B: B135
ECM
C: B136
R47 R57 B38 B83 B: B135 C: B136
i155 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 4 5 6 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
3 4 5 6 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08621

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the measured value 7.98 kPa Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (59.86 mmHg, 2.357 inHg) or detected, the cir-
2) Read the data of fuel tank pressure sensor more? cuit has returned to
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the measured value 7.98 kPa Repair the short Go to step 3.
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- (59.86 mmHg, 2.357 inHg) or circuit to power in
TOR. more? the harness
2) Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank fuel tank pressure
pressure sensor. sensor connector.
4) Read the data of fuel tank pressure sensor
signal using the Subaru Select Monitor or gen-
eral scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
TOR. NOTE:
fuel tank pressure sensor connector and engine • Open circuit of
Connector & terminal ECM and fuel tank
(R47) No. 1 — Engine ground: pressure sensor
connector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of fuel Repair the poor Replace the fuel
Check for poor contact of the fuel tank pressure tank pressure sensor connec- contact of fuel tank tank pressure sen-
sensor connector. tor? pressure sensor sor. <Ref. to
connector. EC(H4DOTC)-16,
Fuel Tank Pres-
sure Sensor.>

BQ:DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT-

ED (VERY SMALL LEAK)
TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Fuel odor
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
NOTE:
tightening.
genuine fuel filler
cap.
<Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-75,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
NOTE:
ation Check Mode.>
NOTE: Purge Control
Check Mode.>

Step Check Yes No

Check Mode.>
TROL SYSTEM LINE. 0.5 mm (0.020 in) dia. on evap- the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. oration line? line. <Ref. to
Fuel Delivery,
Return and Evapo-
ration Lines.>
mm (0.020 in) dia. in it? to EC(H4DOTC)-5,
Canister.>
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)- there any hole of more than 0.5 the fuel tank. <Ref.
68, Fuel Tank.> mm (0.020 in) dia. in it? to FU(H4DOTC)-
68, Fuel Tank.>

BR:DTC P0457 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT-

ED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF)
TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Fuel odor
• Fuel filler cap loose or lost
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
NOTE:
tightening.
genuine fuel filler
cap.
<Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-75,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
NOTE:
ation Check Mode.>
NOTE: Purge Control
Check Mode.>

Step Check Yes No

Check Mode.>
7 CHECK EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- Is there any disconnection, Repair or replace Go to step 8.
TROL SYSTEM LINE. damage or clogging on the the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. evaporation line? line. <Ref. to
Fuel Delivery,
Return and Evapo-
ration Lines.>
8 CHECK CANISTER. Is the canister damaged? Repair or replace Go to step 9.
the canister. <Ref.
to EC(H4DOTC)-5,
Canister.>
9 CHECK FUEL TANK. Is the fuel tank damaged? Repair or replace Go to step 10.
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)- the fuel tank. <Ref.
68, Fuel Tank.> to FU(H4DOTC)-
68, Fuel Tank.>
10 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU- Are there holes, cracks, clog- Repair or replace Repair the poor
BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- ging, or disconnection, miscon- the hoses or pipes. contact of ECM
TROL SYSTEM. nection of hoses or pipes in connector.
evaporative emission control
system?

BS:DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT LOW
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-157, DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYS-
TEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B220
B: B135 D: B137 ECM E
D15
D6
B3
B4
B38
15
3
B21
i3
44
11
48
E2
i155
5
i54
12
11
R333
R99
R15
5
R57
R68 R144 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
1
2
2
PRESSURE
CONTROL DRAIN VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R68 R144 i54 R57 i155 B38 B21
E52 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D: B137 B: B135 B220
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 19
26 27 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08620

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
a normal condition
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary open or
ness or temporary
poor contact of
connector may be
the cause.
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO PURGE CON- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the power
TROL SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR. supply circuit.
Measure the voltage between purge control
solenoid valve connector and engine ground.
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CON- more? short circuit of har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and purge
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and control solenoid
purge control solenoid valve. valve connector.
3) Measure the resistance between the purge
ground.
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
ECM and purge control solenoid valve connec- the following item:
tor. • Open circuit in
(B137) No. 6 — (E4) No. 2: ECM and purge
control solenoid
valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
6 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance 10 — 100 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the purge
VALVE. contact of purge control solenoid
1) Remove the purge control solenoid valve. control solenoid valve. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between purge con- valve connector. EC(H4DOTC)-9,
No. 1 — No. 2:

BT:DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT HIGH
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-159, DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYS-
TEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B220
B: B135 D: B137 ECM E
D15
D6
B3
B4
B38
15
3
B21
i3
44
11
48
E2
i155
5
i54
12
11
R333
R99
R15
5
R57
R68 R144 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
1
2
2
PRESSURE
CONTROL DRAIN VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R68 R144 i54 R57 i155 B38 B21
E52 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D: B137 B: B135 B220
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 19
26 27 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08620

Step Check Yes No

PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CON- circuit to power in
NECTOR. the harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and purge control sole-
purge control solenoid valve. noid valve connec-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the purge Repair the poor
VALVE. control solenoid contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. valve. <Ref. to connector.
2) Measure the resistance between purge con- EC(H4DOTC)-9,
No. 1 — No. 2:

BU:DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-161, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using level sensor and
the “List of Diag- fuel sub level sen-
nostic Trouble sor. <Ref. to
Code (DTC)”. FU(H4DOTC)-81,
<Ref. to Fuel Level Sen-
EN(H4DOTC)(diag sor.> <Ref. to
)-76, List of Diag- FU(H4DOTC)-83,
nostic Trouble Fuel Sub Level
Code (DTC).> Sensor.>
BV:DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT LOW

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0463. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-207, DTC P0463 FUEL LEV-
EL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
BW:DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT HIGH
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-165, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR “A” CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is DTC P0462 or P0463 dis- Check the combi- Even if DTC is
played on the Subaru Select nation meter. <Ref. detected, the cir-
Monitor? to IDI-12, CHECK cuit has returned to
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.

BX:DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-167, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT IN-
TERMITTENT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is DTC P0464 displayed on the Check the combi- Even if DTC is
display? nation meter. <Ref. detected, the cir-
to IDI-12, CHECK cuit has returned to
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
BY:DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-170, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR “A”, Di-
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK DTC OF VDC. Is DTC of VDC displayed? Perform the diag- Repair the poor
Check DTC of VDC. nosis according to contact of ECM
DTC. <Ref. to connector.
VDC(diag)-35, List
of Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>

BZ:DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-171, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Hard to start the engine.
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-76, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK AIR CLEANER ELEMENT. Is there excessive clogging on Replace the air Go to step 3.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. air cleaner element? cleaner element.
2) Check the air cleaner element. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-7, Air
Cleaner Element.>
1) Remove the electronic throttle control. <Ref. tronic throttle con- P2101. <Ref. to
to FU(H4DOTC)-15, REMOVAL, Throttle trol. EN(H4DOTC)(diag
Body.> )-292, DTC P2101
2) Check the electronic throttle control. THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CON-
TROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE,
Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>

CA:DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-172, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine keeps running at higher speed than specified idle speed.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-76, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Is there any fault in air intake Repair air suction Go to step 3.
1) Start and idle the engine. system? and leaks.
2) Check the following items.
• Loose installation of intake manifold and
throttle body
• Cracks of intake manifold gasket and throttle
body gasket
• Disconnection of vacuum hoses
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. tronic throttle con- P2101. <Ref. to
2) Remove the electronic throttle control. <Ref. trol. EN(H4DOTC)(diag
to FU(H4DOTC)-15, REMOVAL, Throttle )-292, DTC P2101
Body.> THROTTLE
3) Check the electronic throttle control. ACTUATOR CON-
TROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE,
Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>

CB:DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-173, DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CONTROL
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine keeps running at higher speed than specified idle speed.
• Engine keeps running at a lower speed than the specified idle speed.
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
E
B220
B134 ECM
10
11
12
13
B21
48
54
53
52
51
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
1

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E5 E16 B220 B21 B134
E6 E17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07809

BATTERY
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
15 MAIN RELAY
B220
B17
B7
ECM
A: B134 B: B135A19 C: B136 D: B137 E
A29
A28
A18
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
A1
A2
C4
B138
*
B21
*
37
36
40
35
34
28
39
38
24
25
6
E2
*
5
1
2
3
ELECTRONIC
E
E57
B21
B220 B138 E57

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
17 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 5 9 13 5 6 7 8 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 6 10 14
19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07813
Step Check Yes No

priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-76, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK ENGINE OIL. Is there a proper amount of Go to step 3. Replace engine oil.
engine oil? <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-13,
REPLACEMENT,
Engine Oil.>

Step Check Yes No

intake system?
CAUTION: • Clogged fuel
Be careful not to spill fuel. return line or bent
Measure the fuel pressure while disconnecting hose
pressure regulator vacuum hose from intake Fuel pressure is
manifold. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-25, INSPEC- too low:
TION, Fuel Pressure.> • Improper fuel
CAUTION: pump discharge
fuel pressure gauge. supply line
NOTE:
If fuel pressure does not increase, squeeze the
fuel return hose 2 to 3 times, then measure fuel
pressure again.
After connecting the pressure regulator vacuum 304 kPa (2.8 — 3.1 kg/cm2, 40 ing item.
hose, measure fuel pressure. <Ref. to — 44 psi)? Fuel pressure is
ME(H4DOTC)-25, INSPECTION, Fuel Pres- too high:
sure.> • Faulty pressure
CAUTION: regulator
fuel pressure gauge. return line or bent
NOTE: hose
• If fuel pressure does not increase, squeeze Fuel pressure is
fuel return hose 2 to 3 times, then measure fuel too low:
pressure again. • Faulty pressure
• If the measured value at this step is out of regulator
specification, check or replace pressure regula- • Improper fuel
tor and pressure regulator vacuum hose. pump discharge
• Clogged fuel
supply line
ture sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor FU(H4DOTC)-33,
tor.>

Step Check Yes No

(158°F). FU(H4DOTC)-41,
NOTE:
tor.>
(158°F). FU(H4DOTC)-41,
NOTE:
tor.>

Step Check Yes No

ders.
coupling connector
terminals on faulty cylinder. to FU(H4DOTC)-
No. 1 — No. 2:
#3 (E6) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): the main relay and
#4 (E17) No. 1 (+) — Engine ground (–): fuel injector con-
nector on faulty
cylinders
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
• Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor

Step Check Yes No

16 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the faulty Go to step 17.
2) Measure the resistance between fuel injec- to FU(H4DOTC)-
tor terminals on faulty cylinder. 44, Fuel Injector.>
Terminals
No. 1 — No. 2:
17 CHECK INSTALLATION OF CAMSHAFT PO- Is the camshaft position sensor Tighten the cam- Go to step 18.
SITION SENSOR/CRANKSHAFT POSITION or crankshaft position sensor shaft position sen-
SENSOR. loosely installed? sor or crankshaft
position sensor.
alignment mark on crank sprocket with align- ME(H4DOTC)-50,
SOCKET
2) Remove the electronic throttle control relay. FU(H4DOTC)-63,
Terminals
No. 16 — No. 15:
ground.
ground. connector.

Step Check Yes No

(B135) No. 17 — (B220) No. 14:
(B135) No. 7 — (B220) No. 15:
chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 — (B136) No. 4:
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-58,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
NECTOR. NOTE:
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
NECTOR. NOTE:
ground
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector

Step Check Yes No

nectors.
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 18:
(B134) No. 19 — (B134) No. 28:
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Subaru Select Moni- FU(H4DOTC)-15,
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36, Subaru Select Moni- <Ref. to
tor.> FU(H4DOTC)-15,
Throttle Body.>
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MO- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
coupling connector

Step Check Yes No

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MO- circuit to power in
1) Connect the connector to ECM. ECM and elec-
3) Measure the voltage between electronic trol connector.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MO- more? circuit to ground in
36 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Go to step 37. Repair the short
TROL MOTOR HARNESS. more? circuit of harness
(E57) No. 2 — (E57) No. 1:
coupling connector
throttle control terminals. FU(H4DOTC)-15,
No. 1 — No. 2:
closed positions with fingers. closed position FU(H4DOTC)-15,
CC:DTC P050B COLD START IGNITION TIMING PERFORMANCE

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P050A. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-211, DTC P050A COLD
START IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>

CD:DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-176, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT, Di-
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B72
IGNITION SWITCH
F/B No. 21
6
BATTERY
SBF-5 MAIN SBF
2 3
E
2
STARTER
RELAY
B493
STARTER MOTOR
1
3
2

M
B501 B14
1
C16
B26
ECM
B: B135 C: B136
B72 B493 B: B135 C: B136 B501
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
4 5 6 3
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-07805

Step Check Yes No

priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-76, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Repair the poor
STARTER RELAY CONNECTOR. circuit to power contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. supply in harness connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. between ECM and
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. starter relay con-
chassis ground.

CE:DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY

(RAM) ERROR
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-178, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE
RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Even if DTC is
priate DTC using detected, the cir-
the “List of Diag- cuit has returned to
nostic Trouble a normal condition
Code (DTC)”. at this time. Repro-
<Ref. to duce the failure,
EN(H4DOTC)(diag and then perform
)-76, List of Diag- the diagnosis
nostic Trouble again.
Code (DTC).> NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
CF:DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM)

ERROR
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0607. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-223, DTC P0607 THROT-
TLE CONTROL SYSTEM CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>

CG:DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-180, DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
M/B No. 16
4
3 M/B No. 12
1
2 B72 IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY
1 3
B13
C30
C1
D7
C2
A : B134 B: B135 C : B136 D : B137 ECM

A19
A29
A28
A18
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
A1
A2
C4
E
B138
*
*
B21
37
36
40
35
34
28
39
38
24
25
6
E2

*
6
4
2
5
3
1
E57 ELECTRONIC
E E THROTTLE CONTROL E
B138 B21 B72 E57

B220
1 2 3 4 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
5 6 7 8 4 5 6 17
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 2 6 10 14
19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07820

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. ground short circuit
NECTOR. NOTE:
coupling connector
4 CHECK ECM GROUND HARNESS. Is the voltage less than 1 V? Repair the poor Repair the harness
1) Connect all connectors. contact of ECM and connector.
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. connector. NOTE:
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and In this case, repair
chassis ground. the following item:
(B134) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): ground circuit
(B134) No. 4 (+) — Chassis ground (–): • Retightening of
(B134) No. 6 (+) — Chassis ground (–): engine ground ter-
(B137) No. 1 (+) — Chassis ground (–): minals
(B137) No. 3 (+) — Chassis ground (–): • Poor contact of
coupling connector
CH:DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE

(BANK 1)
NOTE:
TLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Di-
agnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

CI: DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (MT MODEL)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-185, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B136
B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
35
4
B138
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
*
B138
B25
*
1 2
B25
1
T2
: TERMINAL No.
* OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
NEUTRAL
POSITION SWITCH
EN-07821

Step Check Yes No

2) Place the shift lever in a position other than connector.
neutral.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 MΩ or Replace the neu- Repair the short
NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CONNEC- more? tral position switch. circuit to ground
TOR. <Ref. to 6MT-37, harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Switches and Har- ECM and neutral
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and ness.> position switch
neutral position switch. connector.
chassis ground.

CJ:DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (MT MODEL)

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-186, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B136
B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
35
4
B138
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
*
B138
B25
*
1 2
B25
1
T2
: TERMINAL No.
* OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
NEUTRAL
POSITION SWITCH
EN-07821

Step Check Yes No

2) Place the shift lever in neutral. connector.
chassis ground.
NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
neutral position switch. • Open circuit in
ECM and neutral position switch connector. ECM and neutral
Connector & terminal position switch
(B136) No. 35 — (B25) No. 2: connector
coupling connector
3 CHECK NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the neu-
1) Place the shift lever in neutral. contact of neutral tral position switch.
2) Measure the resistance between neutral position switch <Ref. to 6MT-37,
position switch terminals. connector. Switches and Har-
Terminals ness.>
No. 1 — No. 2:

CK:DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1

SENSOR1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-187, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 1 2
3 4
11 8
10
B22 E3
1
9 B220
E
B220
FRONT OXYGEN 17
(A/F) SENSOR 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
E24
B21
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
7
1
2
B22
E
B22
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
C19
C18
C9
C5
C6
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C: B136 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
E2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08618
Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.

Step Check Yes No

TOR. NOTE:
coupling connector
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>

CL:DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1

SENSOR1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-189, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 1 2
3 4
11 8
10
B22 E3
1
9 B220
E
B220
FRONT OXYGEN 17
(A/F) SENSOR 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
E24
B21
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
7
1
2
B22
E
B22
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
C19
C18
C9
C5
C6
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C: B136 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
E2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08618
Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.

Step Check Yes No

TOR. ness between
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. gen (A/F) sensor
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and connector.
chassis ground.
chassis ground.
4 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 4.95 V or more? Go to step 5. Replace the front
Measure the voltage between ECM and chassis oxygen (A/F) sen-
ground. sor. <Ref. to
Connector & terminal FU(H4DOTC)-54,
(B136) No. 18 (+) — Chassis ground (–): Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
Measure the voltage between ECM and chassis circuit to power in contact of ECM
ground. the harness connector.
(B136) No. 19 (+) — Chassis ground (–): front oxygen (A/F)
(B136) No. 18 (+) — Chassis ground (–): sensor connector.
After repair,
replace the ECM.
<Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-58,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
CM:DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE

NOTE:
TLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Di-
agnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>

CN:DTC P1400 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT

LOW
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-193, DTC P1400 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B220
B: B135 D: B137 ECM E
D15
D6
B3
B4
B38
15
3
B21
i3
44
11
48
E2
i155
5
i54
12
11
R333
R99
R15
5
R57
R68 R144 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
1
2
2
PRESSURE
CONTROL DRAIN VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R68 R144 i54 R57 i155 B38 B21
E52 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D: B137 B: B135 B220
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 19
26 27 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08620

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
a normal condition
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary open or
ness or temporary
poor contact of
connector may be
the cause.
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO THE PRES- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the power
SURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. supply circuit.
Measure the voltage between pressure control
solenoid valve and chassis ground.
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE more? short circuit of har-
CONNECTOR. ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and pressure
2) Disconnect the connector from the ECM control solenoid
and pressure control solenoid valve. valve connector.
3) Measure the resistance between pressure
control solenoid valve and chassis ground.
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Go to step 6.
Repair the harness
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE and connector.
CONNECTOR. NOTE:
ECM and pressure control solenoid valve con- the following item:
(B135) No. 3 — (R68) No. 2: ECM and pressure
control solenoid
valve connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
6 CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance 10 — 100 Ω? Repair the poor Replace the pres-
VALVE. contact of pressure sure control sole-
Measure the resistance between pressure con- control solenoid noid valve. <Ref. to
trol solenoid valve terminals. valve connector. EC(H4DOTC)-18,
Terminals Pressure Control
No. 1 — No. 2: Solenoid Valve.>

CO:DTC P1420 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL SOL. VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-195, DTC P1420 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL
SOL. VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B220
B: B135 D: B137 ECM E
D15
D6
B3
B4
B38
15
3
B21
i3
44
11
48
E2
i155
5
i54
12
11
R333
R99
R15
5
R57
R68 R144 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
1
2
2
PRESSURE
CONTROL DRAIN VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R68 R144 i54 R57 i155 B38 B21
E52 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D: B137 B: B135 B220
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 19
26 27 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08620

Step Check Yes No

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE circuit to power in
CONNECTOR. the harness
2) Disconnect the connector from the ECM pressure control
and pressure control solenoid valve. solenoid valve con-
chassis ground.
2 CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance less than 1 Ω? Replace the pres- Repair the poor
VALVE. sure control sole- contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. noid valve. <Ref. to connector.
2) Measure the resistance between pressure EC(H4DOTC)-18,
control solenoid valve terminals. Pressure Control
No. 1 — No. 2:

CP:DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-197, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper fuel supply
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-76, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK DRAIN HOSE. Is there clogging in the drain Replace the drain Go to step 3.
Check the drain hose for clogging. hose? hose.
3 CHECK DRAIN VALVE OPERATION. Does the drain valve operate? Repair the poor Replace the drain
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. contact of ECM valve. <Ref. to
2) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse. connector. EC(H4DOTC)-21,
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Drain Valve.>
4) Perform operation check for the drain valve
NOTE:
ation Check Mode.>

CQ:DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-199, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW
INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B72
IGNITION SWITCH
F/B No. 21
6
BATTERY
SBF-5 MAIN SBF
2 3
E
2
STARTER
RELAY
B493
STARTER MOTOR
1
3
2

M
B501 B14
1
C16
B26
ECM
B: B135 C: B136
B72 B493 B: B135 C: B136 B501
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
4 5 6 3
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-07805

Step Check Yes No

Trouble Code
(DTC)”. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-76, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
1) Turn the ignition to OFF. between ECM and
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and starter relay con-
starter motor. nector.
3) Remove the starter relay.
ECM and starter relay connector.
(B136) No. 16 — (B493) No. 3:
STARTER RELAY CONNECTOR. more? contact of ECM circuit to ground in
Measure the resistance between ECM and connector. harness between
chassis ground. ECM and starter
Connector & terminal relay connector.

CR:DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-200, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MAL-
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
M/B No. 16
4
3 M/B No. 12
1
2 IGNITION
B72
SWITCH BATTERY
1 3
C30
B13
C1
D7
C2
A : B134
E
B : B135
ECM
C : B136
D : B137
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
B21
40
35
34
37
36
E2
E E
B72 A: B134 B: B135 B220

B21
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13
4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
19
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
C: B136 D: B137
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31 EN-07806
Step Check Yes No

1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. contact of ECM
chassis ground.

Step Check Yes No

MAIN FUSE BOX CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
1) Disconnect the connector from ECM. ness between
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and battery
chassis ground. terminal.
3 CHECK M/B FUSE NO. 12. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Repair the harness
and connector.
NOTE:
the following item:
• Open circuit in
harness between
ECM and battery
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
battery terminal

CS:DTC P2004 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER CONTROL STUCK OPEN (BANK

1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-202, DTC P2004 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER CON-
TROL STUCK OPEN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-76, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK TUMBLE GENERATOR VALVE RH. Is there any dirt or clogging with Clean the tumble Replace the tum-
1) Remove the tumble generator valve assem- foreign objects in the tumble generator valve. ble generator valve
bly RH. generator valve? assembly RH.
2) Check the tumble generator valve body. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-47,
Tumble Generator
Valve Assembly.>

CT:DTC P2005 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER CONTROL STUCK OPEN (BANK

2)
TROL STUCK OPEN (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-76, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK TUMBLE GENERATOR VALVE LH. Is there any dirt or clogging with Clean the tumble Replace the tum-
bly LH. generator valve? assembly LH.
FU(H4DOTC)-47,
Tumble Generator
Valve Assembly.>

CU:DTC P2006 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER CONTROL STUCK CLOSED

(BANK 1)
TROL STUCK CLOSED (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-76, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK TUMBLE GENERATOR VALVE RH. Is there any dirt or clogging with Clean the tumble Replace the tum-
bly RH. generator valve? assembly RH.
FU(H4DOTC)-47,
Tumble Generator
Valve Assembly.>

CV:DTC P2007 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER CONTROL STUCK CLOSED

(BANK 2)
TROL STUCK CLOSED (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC)”.
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-76, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK TUMBLE GENERATOR VALVE LH. Is there any dirt or clogging with Clean the tumble Replace the tum-
bly LH. generator valve? assembly LH.
FU(H4DOTC)-47,
Tumble Generator
Valve Assembly.>

CW:DTC P2008 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER CONTROL CIRCUIT / OPEN

(BANK 1)
TROL CIRCUIT / OPEN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
TUMBLE GENERATOR
VALVE ASSY RH
1
2
3
4
5
E55
E2
16
28
19
6
B21
D11
A29
A19
A26
A25
ECM
A: B134
D: B137
E55 B21 A: B134 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
4 5 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07678

Step Check Yes No

TUMBLE GENERATOR VALVE ASSEMBLY and connector.
RH CONNECTOR. NOTE:
and tumble generator valve assembly RH. • Open circuit in
ECM and tumble generator valve assembly RH. ECM and tumble
Connector & terminal generator valve
(B134) No. 25 — (E55) No. 5: assembly RH con-
(B134) No. 26 — (E55) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
TUMBLE GENERATOR VALVE ASSEMBLY more? circuit to ground in
RH CONNECTOR. harness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and tumble
chassis ground. generator valve
Connector & terminal assembly RH con-
(B134) No. 25 — Chassis ground: nector.
3 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the tum- Repair the poor Replace the tum-
Check for poor contact of tumble generator ble generator valve assembly contact of tumble ble generator valve
valve assembly RH connector. RH connector? generator valve assembly RH.
assembly RH con- <Ref. to
nector. FU(H4DOTC)-47,
Tumble Generator
Valve Assembly.>

CX:DTC P2009 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK

1)
TROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
TUMBLE GENERATOR
VALVE ASSY RH
1
2
3
4
5
E55
E2
16
28
19
6
B21
D11
A29
A19
A26
A25
ECM
A: B134
D: B137
E55 B21 A: B134 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
4 5 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07678

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the tum-
TUMBLE GENERATOR VALVE ASSEMBLY circuit to power in ble generator valve
RH CONNECTOR. harness between assembly RH.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and tumble <Ref. to
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. generator valve FU(H4DOTC)-47,
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and assembly RH con- Tumble Generator
chassis ground. nector. Valve Assembly.>

CY:DTC P2011 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER CONTROL CIRCUIT / OPEN

(BANK 2)
TROL CIRCUIT / OPEN (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
TUMBLE GENERATOR
VALVE ASSY LH
1
2
3
4
5
E51
E2
27
28
30
29
6
B21
D10
A29
A19
A24
A23
ECM
A: B134
D: B137
E51 B21 A: B134 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
4 5 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07679

Step Check Yes No

LH CONNECTOR. NOTE:
tumble generator valve assembly LH. • Open circuit in
ECM and tumble generator valve assembly LH. ECM and tumble
Connector & terminal generator valve
(B134) No. 23 — (E51) No. 5: assembly LH con-
(B134) No. 24 — (E51) No. 4: nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
LH CONNECTOR. harness between
Connector & terminal assembly LH con-
3 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the tum- Repair the poor Replace the tum-
Check for poor contact of tumble generator ble generator valve assembly contact of tumble ble generator valve
valve assembly LH connector. LH connector? generator valve assembly LH.
assembly LH con- <Ref. to
nector. FU(H4DOTC)-47,
Tumble Generator
Valve Assembly.>

CZ:DTC P2012 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK

2)
TROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
TUMBLE GENERATOR
VALVE ASSY LH
1
2
3
4
5
E51
E2
27
28
30
29
6
B21
D10
A29
A19
A24
A23
ECM
A: B134
D: B137
E51 B21 A: B134 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
4 5 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07679

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the tum-
TUMBLE GENERATOR VALVE ASSEMBLY circuit to power in ble generator valve
LH CONNECTOR. harness between assembly LH.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and tumble <Ref. to
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. generator valve FU(H4DOTC)-47,
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and assembly LH con- Tumble Generator
chassis ground. nector. Valve Assembly.>

DA:DTC P2016 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER POSITION SENSOR / SWITCH

CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-211, DTC P2016 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER PO-
SITION SENSOR / SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
TUMBLE GENERATOR
VALVE ASSY RH
1
2
3
4
5
E55
E2
16
28
19
6
B21
D11
A29
A19
A26
A25
ECM
A: B134
D: B137
E55 B21 A: B134 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
4 5 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07678

Step Check Yes No

2) Read the data of tumble generator valve cuit has returned to
position sensor signal (RH) using Subaru a normal condition
Select Monitor or general scan tool. at this time. Repro-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF TUMBLE GEN- Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
ERATOR VALVE ASSEMBLY RH. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from tumble gen- In this case, repair
erator valve assembly RH. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between tumble gener- harness between
ator valve assembly RH connector and engine ECM and tumble
ground. generator valve
(E55) No. 3 (+) — Engine ground (–): nector
• Poor contact of
ECM connector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
RH CONNECTOR. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. the following item:
ECM and tumble generator valve assembly RH. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and tumble
(B137) No. 11 — (E55) No. 1: generator valve
assembly RH con-
nector
• Poor contact of
coupling connector
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the tum-
Check for poor contact of tumble generator the tumble generator valve contact of ECM or ble generator valve
valve assembly RH connector. assembly RH connector? tumble generator assembly RH.
valve assembly RH <Ref. to
connector. FU(H4DOTC)-47,
Tumble Generator
Valve Assembly.>

DB:DTC P2017 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER POSITION SENSOR / SWITCH

CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1)
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-213, DTC P2017 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER PO-
SITION SENSOR / SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
• Improper idling
• Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
TUMBLE GENERATOR
VALVE ASSY RH
1
2
3
4
5
E55
E2
16
28
19
6
B21
D11
A29
A19
A26
A25
ECM
A: B134
D: B137
E55 B21 A: B134 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
4 5 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 26 27 28 29 30 31
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07678

Step Check Yes No

2) Read the data of tumble generator valve cuit has returned to
position sensor signal (RH) using Subaru a normal condition
Select Monitor or general scan tool. at this time. Repro-
ness may be the
cause.
TUMBLE GENERATOR VALVE ASSEMBLY circuit to power in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and tumble
2) Disconnect the connector from tumble gen- generator valve
erator valve assembly RH. assembly RH con-
3) Start the engine. nector.
4) Read the data of tumble generator valve
position sensor signal (RH) using Subaru
Select Monitor or general scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
RH CONNECTOR. NOTE:
tumble generator valve assembly RH connector • Open circuit in
Connector & terminal ECM and tumble
(E55) No. 2 — Engine ground: generator valve
assembly RH con-
nector

Outback 20011 2.5, 2,5t 3.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Outback 20011 2.5, 2,5t 3.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

11LE_US.

book 1 ページ ２０１５年１２月２５日 金曜日 午前９時２１分

2011 LEGACY SERVICE MANUAL QUICK REFERENCE INDEX

HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS HU

All information, illustration and specifi-

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. G2470BE1

The manuals contain the latest information at the

HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS

How to Use This Manuals

1. How to Use This Manuals

How to Use This Manuals

: Should be lubricated with oil.

(20) : Should be lubricated with grease.

How to Use This Manuals

4. DEFINITION OF “NOTE”, “CAUTION” AND “WARNING”

How to Use This Manuals

15.Main Shaft (A)

11) Tighten the lock nuts to the specified torque us-

(A) Component (D) Cautions (G) Tightening torque

How to Use This Manuals

How to Use This Manuals

How to Use This Manuals

5AT: Electronically controlled fully-automatic, 5-forward speeds and 1-reverse

TCC: Torque Converter Clutch

5AT: Electronically controlled fully-automatic, 5-forward speeds and 1-reverse

TCC: Torque Converter Clutch

11.WINDOW ADHESIVE 16.REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OPERA-

• If you keep using the hose, perform the in-

(1) Push against the spool. (Insert the hose and

(1) Fender cover (3) Tray (5) Container box

3. SAFETY 4. SERVICE OPERATION

5. REMOVED PART 4. BACKUP/POWER SUPPLY FUSE

• Automatic full open/close of driver’s window

3. BATTERY 7. PROTECTING VEHICLE UNDER MAIN-

9. LIFT AND JACK

(A) 80 mm (3.1 in) or more

• Align the cushion rubber center part of plate lift

(1) Jack-up point

(1) Jack-up point

(1) (2) (1)

(1) Jack-up point (2) Attachment

• JACK-UP POINT (WHEN USING A GARAGE JACK)

(A) Front (B) Rear

(1) Hook for tie-down (2) Tie-down hole

• CHAIN DIRECTION AT TIE-DOWN CONDITION

For sea transportation

• VEHICLE SINKING VOLUME AT TIE-DOWN CONDITION

(C) (C) (A)

• NOTES FOR THE USE OF TIE-DOWN HOOK

(A) Hook cover (B) Hook

(A) Hook cover (B) Hook

Raising the front wheels Prohibited for full-time AWD model.

Marked : OK, Marked : Prohibited, Marked : Conditionally OK.

(1) Normal attached position

(1) Normal attached position (2) Installation position at full open

13.GENERAL SCAN TOOL 15.SPEEDOMETER TEST

(A) Free roller

(3) Set the speedometer tester.

(A) RIGID RACK NT-00029

(3) Conduct the speedometer test work. (A) Brake tester

• When measurement is difficult to carry out

(A) Brake tester

17.ON THE CAR WHEEL BALANCING

book 1 ページ２０１５年１２月２５日　金曜日　午前９時２１分